Philips Medical Systems

AcQSim CT Service Documentation

Click here for Table of Contents

Part Number: 4535 671 03491 Revision: E

All pages of this document contain proprietary and confidential information of Philips Medical Systems (Cleveland), Inc. The documents are intended for current Philips
Medical Systems (Cleveland), Inc. personnel or are licensed to Philips Medical Systems (Cleveland), Inc. customer for use by the customer’s in–house service employee on
equipment located at the customer’s designated site. Copying, disclosure to others or other use is prohibited without the express written authorization of Philips Medical
Systems (Cleveland), Inc. Law Department. Report violation of these requirements to the Philips Medical Systems (Cleveland), Inc. Law Department, Highland Heights, Ohio.

Service Publication, Philips Medical Systems (Cleveland) Inc. Highland Hts., OH 44143
E 2007 All rights reserved under the copyright laws of the United States.
 E 2007

Philips Medical Systems (Cleveland), Inc. Highland Hts., OH 44143

All rights reserved under the copyright laws of the United States
This document prepared by the Service Publications Department.
Note any additions/corrections via an electronic Field Feedback Form.
 SYMBOL DESCRIPTIONS
Attention symbol. Radiation warning symbol.

Laser warning symbol. Biohazard warning symbol.

Magnetism warning symbol. Projectile warning symbol.

Electrical warning symbol.

 REVISION HISTORY
REVISION DATE COMMENTS
–1 10/10/00 Preliminary version.
–2 12/20/01 Updated for Philips. Updated AcQImage power supply replacement, added gantry display assembly re-
placement. Added lasers part numbers. Updated laser calibration procedure.
A 08/12/04 Changed manual part number from T55ED–1034 (DRS No. C877:C) to 4535 671 03491. Added backup
timer test to Performance section.
B 02/21/05 Added Z logs to Diagnostics section. Updated Horizontal Resolver replacement
C 07/15/05 Added X–ray tube change process links, updated tape switch part number
D 02/14/06 Removal of statement that gantry will start up at GUI start. Gantry will not start up at GUI start.
E 05/30/07 Corrected Tube Alignment Procedure step 1. Band descriptions were reversed.
 NOTICE
THE INFORMATION CONTAINED IN THIS MANUAL CONFORMS WITH THE CONFIGURATION OF THE EQUIPMENT AS OF THE DATE OF MANUFACTURE. REVISIONS TO THE EQUIPMENT
SUBSEQUENT TO THE DATE OF MANUFACTURE WILL BE ADDRESSED IN SERVICE UPDATES DISTRIBUTED TO PHILIPS MEDICAL SYSTEMS TECHNICAL SERVICE ORGANIZATION.

TO THE USER OF THIS MANUAL

THE USER OF THIS MANUAL IS DIRECTED TO READ AND CAREFULLY REVIEW THE INSTRUCTIONS, WARNINGS AND CAUTIONS CONTAINED HEREIN PRIOR TO BEGINNING
INSTALLATION OR SERVICE ACTIVITIES. WHILE YOU MAY HAVE PREVIOUSLY INSTALLED OR SERVICED EQUIPMENT SIMILAR TO THAT DESCRIBED IN THIS MANUAL, CHANGES IN
DESIGN, MANUFACTURE OR PROCEDURE MAY HAVE OCCURRED WHICH SIGNIFICANTLY AFFECT THE PRESENT INSTALLATION OR SERVICE.
THE INSTALLATION AND SERVICE OF EQUIPMENT DESCRIBED HEREIN IS TO BE PREFORMED BY AUTHORIZED, QUALIFIED PHILIPS MEDICAL SYSTEM PERSONNEL. ASSEMBLERS
AND OTHER PERSONNEL NOT EMPLOYED BY NOR DIRECTLY AFFILIATED WITH PHILIPS MEDICAL SYSTEMS TECHNICAL SERVICES ARE DIRECTED TO CONTACT THE LOCAL
PHILIPS MEDICAL SYSTEMS OFFICE BEFORE ATTEMPTING INSTALLATION OR SERVICE PROCEDURES.

INSTALLATION AND ENVIRONMENT

EXCEPT FOR INSTALLATIONS REQUIRING CERTIFICATION BY THE MANUFACTURER PER FEDERAL STANDARDS, SEE THAT A RADIATION PROTECTION SURVEY IS MADE BY A
QUALIFIED EXPERT IN ACCORDANCE WITH NCRP 102, SECTION 7, AS REVISED OR REPLACED IN THE FUTURE. PERFORM A SURVEY AFTER EVERY CHANGE IN EQUIPMENT,
WORKLOAD, OR OPERATING CONDITIONS WHICH MIGHT SIGNIFICANTLY INCREASE THE PROBABILITY OF PERSONS RECEIVING MORE THAN THE MAXIMUM PERMISSIBLE DOSE
EQUIVALENT.

Diagnostic Imaging Systems – MECHANICAL-ELECTRICAL WARNING

ALL OF THE MOVEABLE ASSEMBLIES AND PARTS OF THIS EQUIPMENT SHOULD BE OPERATED WITH CARE AND ROUTINELY INSPECTED IN ACCORDANCE WITH THE MANUFACTURER’S
RECOMMENDATIONS CONTAINED IN THE EQUIPMENT MANUALS.
ONLY PROPERLY TRAINED AND QUALIFIED PERSONNEL SHOULD BE PERMITTED ACCESS TO ANY INTERNAL PARTS. LIVE ELECTRICAL TERMINALS ARE DEADLY; BE SURE LINE
DISCONNECTS ARE OPENED AND OTHER APPROPRIATE PRECAUTIONS ARE TAKEN BEFORE OPENING ACCESS DOORS, REMOVING ENCLOSURE PANELS, OR ATTACHING
ACCESSORIES.
DO NOT UNDER ANY CIRCUMSTANCES, REMOVE THE FLEXIBLE HIGH TENSION CABLES FROM THE X-RAY TUBE HOUSING OR HIGH TENSION GENERATOR AND/OR THE ACCESS
COVERS FROM THE GENERATOR UNTIL THE MAIN AND AUXILIARY POWER SUPPLIES HAVE BEEN DISCONNECTED. FAILURE TO COMPLY WITH THE ABOVE MAY RESULT IN SERIOUS
OR FATAL BODILY INJURIES TO THE OPERATOR OR THOSE IN THE AREA.

ELECTRICAL-GROUNDING INSTRUCTIONS
THE EQUIPMENT MUST BE GROUNDED TO AN EARTH GROUND BY A SEPARATE CONDUCTOR. THE NEUTRAL SIDE OF THE LINE IS NOT TO BE CONSIDERED THE EARTH GROUND.
ON EQUIPMENT PROVIDED WITH A LINE CORD, THE EQUIPMENT MUST BE CONNECTED TO PROPERLY GROUNDED, THREE-PIN RECEPTACLE. DO NOT USE A THREE-TO-TWO PIN
ADAPTER.

Diagnostic Imaging Systems – RADIATION WARNING

X-RAY AND GAMMA-RAYS ARE DANGEROUS TO BOTH OPERATOR AND OTHERS IN THE VICINITY UNLESS ESTABLISHED SAFE EXPOSURE PROCEDURES ARE STRICTLY OBSERVED.
THE USEFUL AND SCATTERED BEAMS CAN PRODUCE SERIOUS OR FATAL BODILY INJURIES TO ANY PERSONS IN THE SURROUNDING AREA IF USED BY AN UNSKILLED OPERATOR.
ADEQUATE PRECAUTIONS MUST ALWAYS BE TAKEN TO AVOID EXPOSURE TO THE USEFUL BEAM, AS WELL AS TO LEAKAGE RADIATION FROM WITHIN THE SOURCE HOUSING OR
TO SCATTERED RADIATION RESULTING FROM THE PASSAGE OF RADIATION THROUGH MATTER.
THOSE AUTHORIZED TO OPERATE, PARTICIPATE IN OR SUPERVISE THE OPERATION OF THE EQUIPMENT MUST BE THOROUGHLY FAMILIAR AND COMPLY COMPLETELY WITH THE
CURRENT ESTABLISHED SAFE EXPOSURE FACTORS AND PROCEDURES DESCRIBED IN PUBLICATIONS, SUCH AS: SUBCHAPTER J OF TITLE 21 OF THE CODE OF FEDERAL
REGULATIONS, “DIAGNOSTIC X-RAY SYSTEMS AND THEIR MAJOR COMPONENTS”, AND THE NATIONAL COUNCIL ON RADIATION PROTECTION (NCRP) NO. 102, “MEDICAL X-RAY AND
GAMMA-RAY PROTECTION FOR ENERGIES UP TO 10 MEV-EQUIPMENT DESIGN AND USE”, AS REVISED OR REPLACED IN THE FUTURE.
THOSE RESPONSIBLE FOR PLANNING OF X-RAY AND GAMMA-RAY EQUIPMENT INSTALLATIONS MUST BE THOROUGHLY FAMILIAR AND COMPLY COMPLETELY WITH NCRP NO. 49,
“STRUCTURAL SHIELDING DESIGN AND EVALUATION FOR MEDICAL OF X-RAYS AND GAMMA-RAYS OF ENERGIES UP TO 10 MEV”, AS REVISED AND REPLACED IN THE FUTURE. FAILURE
TO OBSERVE THESE WARNINGS MAY CAUSE SERIOUS OR FATAL BODILY INJURIES TO THE OPERATOR OR THOSE IN THE AREA.
 TABLE OF CONTENTS

INSTALLATION

CALIBRATION / ADJUSTMENT

PERFORMANCE VERIFICATION

PLANNED MAINTENANCE

DIAGNOSTICS

ADVANCED CALIBRATION

PARTS

REPAIR / REPLACEMENT

PERIPHERALS, OPTIONS, SYSTEM LEVEL

SYSTEM APPLICATIONS

SCHEMATICS – IN 11 X 17 PAPER FORMAT ONLY. REFER TO MANUAL PART NUMBER T55E–2918

ACQSIM CT INSTALLATION – INTRODUCTION
This AcQSim CT Installation Manual contains all the information necessary to physically install, power up, and do the initial checks for a
Philips Medical Systems AcQSim CT Computed Tomographic (CT) system.
Additional items, such as Laser Cameras, Remote Diagnostic Stations, Patient Support pads and rails, injectors, or options from Health
Care Products, are not covered in this document.

WHAT THIS MANUAL CONTAINS

This Section – introduces you to the material in this manual and contains the ’model’ for the installation (i.e., the basic installation steps).
This section contains enough information for the experienced FSE to install a scanner.

Section One – contains general descriptions of the AcQSim CT scanner and descriptions of the individual components
Section Two – describes the site preparations required prior to the actual installation. Uncrating, handling, and placement of
components is described.
Section Three – contains the step–by–step installation procedure and connection to the in–house utilities.
Section Four – explains power–up procedures.
Section Five – Section Five contains quick checks and the X–ray tube alignment procedure to be performed prior to system image
calibration.

ADDITIONAL DOCUMENTATION REQUIRED

An additional manual is necessary for the installation of this scanner:
S Service Applications (Calibration, Configuration and Performance Sections)

The Service Publications department supplies complete documentation, including these manuals, with each scanner. The actual
documentation shipped depends on the type of scanner and the ordered options. See the appropriate documentation shipping list for the
documents shipped with your scanner.

WHO THIS MANUAL IS FOR

This manual has been written for currently employed Philips Medical Systems International personnel, or those individuals who have been
trained by Philips Medical Systems, for the express purpose of maintaining, servicing, or repairing Philips Medical Systems AcQSim CT
scanners.

Philips Medical Systems. Confidential and Proprietary information. Refer to Title Page.
HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL

S Step–by–Step Information – Begin with this section and continue through the manual, doing each section in sequence.

INSTALLATION SEQUENCE

The flow chart on the following page shows that not all procedures in this manual or the referenced manuals are required for a correct and
proper installation.:

THINGS TO DO TO MAKE THE INSTALL GO EASIER

1. Visit the site ahead of time to ensure the suite is being prepared properly and on time. Check:
a. Is floor level?
b. Is power/power conditioner installed?
c. Have proper length Gantry–to–Recon Tower cables been ordered (50 ft. or 75 ft.)?
2. Are the installation tools (drills, anchors, etc.) available and ready to go?
3. Is the documentation available or being shipped to the proper location?
4. Find a source of distilled water or purchase some.
5. Find the phantom and fill it with the distilled water. Set it aside during the installation so that the bubbles have a chance to clear out
(during the installation time) so that it is ready to go when you need it.
6. Bring your calibration and diagnostics manuals.
7. Follow the installation model.

ORDERING PARTS

Replaceable parts for AcQSim CT scanner are listed in the AcQSim CT Parts manual.

Philips Medical Systems. Confidential and Proprietary information. Refer to Title Page.
EQUIPMENT DESCRIPTION
The AcQSim CT scanner consists of three major groups: Patient Support, Gantry and Operator’s Console. Figure 1 illustrates a typical
AcQSim CT system.

GANTRY

The Gantry contains the ”front end” electronics to collect Patient data as well as the X–ray system, which is mounted around the rotating
frame. As a general statement, the Gantry ’electronics’ consists of the following sub–assemblies:

S X–ray Tube

S X–ray Generator

S Detectors

S Main and Secondary motor drives

S Gantry card file

S Power supplies for Cardfile and Detector Ring

Philips Medical Systems. Confidential and Proprietary information. Refer to Title Page.
GANTRY

CT0128

ACQIMAGE
CABINET

PATIENT SUPPORT

DISPLAY TOWER

C2209A

FIGURE 1 EXAMPLE OF ACQSIM CT SYSTEM

Philips Medical Systems. Confidential and Proprietary information. Refer to Title Page.
 GANTRY

FIGURE 2 PATIENT SUPPORT, FULLY ASSEMBLED

Philips Medical Systems. Confidential and Proprietary information. Refer to Title Page.
OPERATOR’S CONSOLE
(SHOWN WITHOUT ACQIMAGE CABINET) DISPLAY MONITOR

KEYBOARD
INTERCOM

OPTIONAL CHAIR

ACQSIM CT USES
THE ULTRA ZX
DISPLAY TOWER

MOUSE
AND
PAD

OPTIONAL TABLE

Philips Medical Systems. Confidential and Proprietary information. Refer to Title Page.
Figure 3 shows the standard boards and their locations for the Recon Tower:

CP (WITH HUB IN FRONT)

OPEN

OPEN BP

AP

GAM

DISK ASSEMBLY

FIGURE 3 ACQIMAGE CABINET BOARD LOCATIONS – TYPICAL CONFIGURATION

Philips Medical Systems. Confidential and Proprietary information. Refer to Title Page.
DIMENSIONS AND WEIGHTS

All dimensions (width, depth, height) are in inches and millimeters and weights are in pounds and kilograms.

ACQSIM CT DIMENSIONS AND THERMAL OUTPUTS

ASSEMBLY WIDTH DEPTH HEIGHT WEIGHT BTU/HR
Display Tower 13” / 33 CM 21.5” / 54.6 CM 25.5” / 64.8 CM 115 LBS / 52.2 KG 300
AcQImage Cabinet 14.5” / 36.8 CM 31” / 78.7 CM 27” / 68.6 CM 150 LBS. / 68 KG 1200
Gantry __ IN. / 223.5 CM __ IN. / 86.4 CM __ IN. / 195.6 CM ___ LB / 1545 KG ____
Patient Support 22 IN. / 55.9 CM 101 IN. / 256.5 CM 40 IN. / 101.6 CM 600 LB / 273 KG

PRIMARY POWER REQUIREMENTS – Incoming and Utilization Power

Volts AC Phase Voltage Regulation Momentary kVA/Amps Utilization Voltage

480 3 +/– 5 % 75/90 432 to 528

NOTE
Line–to–line voltages given are limits of any one phase set (A–B, B–C, C–A). Phase–
to–phase voltages must be within " 5% of each other.

Isolation Transformer And Wire Sizing. In all cases, the site planning guide and requirements of the Site Planning department shall prevail.

Voltage Distribution Wire Size Require vs. Distance (ft./m)

Variation Transformer 50/15 100/30 200/61 Neutral Ground
–5% / +10% 75 kVA #2 #2 1/0 #6 (1) Same as power

ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS
68 to 75 Degrees F. (20 TO 23.9 Degrees C.), 30 to 60% humidity (non–condensing).

Important: Via ServeCom, refer to http://servecom.picker.com/forms/ and complete the appropriate form.

Philips Medical Systems. Confidential and Proprietary information. Refer to Title Page.
UNCRATING, HANDLING AND PLACEMENT PROCEDURE
This section provides information on:
S physically handling the scanner
S requirements for any lifting equipment used
S uncrating the Gantry, Patient Support, AcQImage Cabinet and Display Tower
S removing the Gantry shipping bracket
S visually checking the placement of the Gantry and the Patient Support

WARNING
LIFTING HAZARD. INSTALLATION PERSONNEL MUST USE DISCRETION WHEN
LIFTING OR MOVING CRATES OR COMPONENTS. MANUAL LIFTING OF ITEMS
THAT ARE TOO HEAVY CAN RESULT IN SERIOUS INJURY TO PERSONNEL AND
DAMAGE TO THE EQUIPMENT OR BOTH. INSTALLATION PERSONNEL

CAUTION
POSSIBLE EQUIPMENT DAMAGE. DO NOT USE FORKLIFT TO MOVE OR LIFT
GANTRY. MOVE THE GANTRY ON THE TRANSPORT CASTERS OR ATTACH A
PROPER LIFTING DEVICE TO THE CHAIN SHACKLES. USING A FORKLIFT WILL
DAMAGE THE GANTRY.
THE GANTRY MUST BE LIFTED OFF THE SKID BY A LIFTING MACHINE CAPABLE
OF HANDLING AT LEAST 6.000 POUNDS (2730 KG.). FAILURE TO HAVE THE COR-
RECT LIFTING MACHINERY CAN RESULT IN DAMAGE TO THE GANTRY.

NOTE
The AcQSim CT is shipped with the side covers NOT installed.
Refer to the GANTRY COVERS procedure on the next page to install them correctly.

Philips Medical Systems. Confidential and Proprietary information. Refer to Title Page.
GANTRY COVERS

The following procedure shows how to open/close, install, remove/replace and adjust the various AcQSim CT Gantry covers.

Front Upper Cover

1. Loosen the captive screws on the front cover, lift up and secure. Refer to Figure 4.

LOOSEN TWO SCREWS (ONE COVER LOCK DETAIL

ON EACH SIDE OF THE CONE)
GRASP HERE TO OPEN COVER

UPPER
MOUNTING
BRACKET

SECURE BRACE
IN NOTCH TO
HOLD UP THE
UPPER COVER

FIGURE 4 GANTRY UPPER PANEL OPENING

Philips Medical Systems. Confidential and Proprietary information. Refer to Title Page.
Lower Front Cover

1. Remove the screws that secure the lower Gantry cover. Lift the cover up and off the bottom latches and slide the cover away from
Gantry. Store the cover in a secure place.. Refer to Figure 5.

INSIDE
LOWER
COVER

FIGURE 5 GANTRY FRONT LOWER COVER – DETAIL

Philips Medical Systems. Confidential and Proprietary information. Refer to Title Page.
Rear Covers

CAUTION
Before removing the rear covers, unplug the two connectors from the cables that lead
to the speaker and x–ray light. Failure to do this will result in damage to the cables and/or
connectors.

1. Remove the screws that secure the rear Gantry covers. Lift up and away on each of the covers and set aside in a safe place. Refer
to Figure 6.

TOP OF RIGHT REAR COVER HOOK TAB ONTO LIP

REAR COVERS

COVER TAB

C02255

FIGURE 6 REAR COVER REMOVAL

Philips Medical Systems. Confidential and Proprietary information. Refer to Title Page.
Lower Side Cover Installation

1. Remove Lower Right Column Cover (p/n 312863) from shipping box.
2. Remove the small bag attached to the inside surface of the cover, which contains the mounting screws and washers. Set it aside.
3. Open the Front Upper Cover and lock in place. Uninstall the E–Stop Switch located on the right side column.
4. Install the E–Stop Switch in the Lower Right Side Column. Refer to Figure 7.

REMOVE ESTOP
SWITCH FROM
BRACKET

INSTALL
ESTOP
SWITCH
IN COVER

FIGURE 7 ESTOP SWITCH LOCATION

Philips Medical Systems. Confidential and Proprietary information. Refer to Title Page.
5. Install the Lower Right Column Cover onto the right side column. Align and insert Locating pins on Lower Right Column Cover with
the V groove features on the Side Column. Refer to Figure 8.

PINS
ALIGN
WITH
GROOVES

FIGURE 8 LOWER RIGHT COLUMN COVER

Philips Medical Systems. Confidential and Proprietary information. Refer to Title Page.
6. Fasten the Lower Right Column Cover to the Gantry Column using the two screws (1/4”–20 x 3/4”, Pan Head) and two nylon washers
provided. Maintain a gap between the top of the Column Cover and Gantry Side Panel in the range of 0.050 to 0.250 inch. Refer to
Figure 9.

MAINTAIN A
GAP OF 0.050
TO 0.250
INCHES HERE

INSTALL SCREWS
AND WASHERS HERE

FIGURE 9 FASTENING LOWER SIDE COVER

Philips Medical Systems. Confidential and Proprietary information. Refer to Title Page.
7. Lower the Front Upper Cover. Make sure the Front Upper Cover is seated firmly against the Lower Front Cover.
8. Check the clearance between the Lower Right Column Cover and the Front Upper Cover as shown in Figure 10. It should measure
between 0.100 to 0.250 inch. If the gap measures within the allowable range, assemble the Lower Left Side Cover (p/n 312865) in
the same fashion as the right cover. If not, continue to step 9.

GAP = 0.100” TO
0.250”

GAP
DETAIL

FIGURE 10 GAP BETWEEN SIDE COVER AND FRONT UPPER COVER

Philips Medical Systems. Confidential and Proprietary information. Refer to Title Page.
9. If the gap is not within the allowable range, raise the Front Upper Cover, remove the Lower Right Column Cover, and adjust the height
of the V–groove Mounting Bracket. Refer to Figure 11. Continue to check the clearance between the Lower Right Column Cover and
the Front Upper Cover and make sure it is within the allowable range of 0.100 to 0.250 inch.

10. Prior to final installation of Lower Right Side Cover, make sure wires are reconnected to E–Stop Switch.

11. Assemble the Lower Left Side Cover (p/n 312865) in the same fashion as the right cover.

LOOSEN NUTS
TO ADJUST
V–GROOVE
BRACKET

FIGURE 11 V–GROOVE BRACKET ADJUST

Philips Medical Systems. Confidential and Proprietary information. Refer to Title Page.
UPPER SIDE COVER INSTALLATION

1. Remove Upper Right Column Cover (p/n 362096) from shipping box.
2. Align and insert the pins on the Upper Right Column Cover into the holes on the Cover Mounting Bracket which is a attached to the
Gantry Side Panel. Refer to Figure 12.

INSERT PINS INTO HOLES

THUMBSCREW
THAT SECURES
BACK PART OF
UPPER PANEL

METAL BRACKET ATTACHES

TO MAGNET ON GANTRY
FIGURE 12 UPPER SIDE COVER

Philips Medical Systems. Confidential and Proprietary information. Refer to Title Page.
3. Swing the lower side of the Upper Right Column Cover down until it comes into contact with the Gantry Side Panel. A magnetic latch
should attract and hold the cover in place.
4. Visually locate the thumbscrew through the hole on the back side of the Upper Right Column Cover. Insert a long, narrow slotted
screwdriver into the hole and lightly tighten the thumbscrew. This is a blind connection, so ensure you get the right “feel” of the captive
screw starting correctly. Refer to Figure 13.

INSERT SLOTTED
SCREWDRIVER
HERE TO LIGHTLY
TIGHTEN
THUMBSCREW

FIGURE 13 THUMBSCREW LOCATION

Philips Medical Systems. Confidential and Proprietary information. Refer to Title Page.
5. Check clearance ”A” between the Upper Right Column Cover and Lower Right Column Cover. Also check the uniformity of the gap
between the Upper Right Column Cover and the Upper Front Cover. Refer to Figure 14.

MAINTAIN
VISUALLY
UNIFORM GAP
ALONG THIS EDGE

CLEARANCE “A” IS
0.100 TO 0.250 INCH

VISUALLY MATCH GAP

SIZES IF POSSIBLE

FIGURE 14 CLEARANCE “A” CHECK

Philips Medical Systems. Confidential and Proprietary information. Refer to Title Page.
6. Check clearance ”B”, between the Upper Right Column Cover and the Lower Right Column Cover. Refer to Figure 15.
7. If clearances ”A” and ”B” are within the allowable ranges and the gap uniformity looks good, than skip to the Hole Plug Installation
procedure. If the clearances are not within tolerance, continue to the next page.

CLEARANCE “B”
IS 0.100 TO 0.250
INCH

FIGURE 15 CLEARANCE “B” CHECK

Philips Medical Systems. Confidential and Proprietary information. Refer to Title Page.
8. If clearance ”A” is outside the allowable range or the gap between the Upper Right Column Cover and the Upper Front Cover does
not visually appear uniform, remove the Upper Right Column Cover, and adjust the Cover Mounting Bracket by loosening the two bolts
as shown below.

CLEARANCE “B”
IS 0.100 TO 0.250
INCH

Gantry Cardfile
Access Panel

ADJUST THUMBSCREW
BRACKET IF NECESSARY TO
AVOID INTERFERENCE WITH
THE SIDE COLUMN BRACKET

FIGURE 16 ADJUSTING CLEARANCE “A”

Philips Medical Systems. Confidential and Proprietary information. Refer to Title Page.
9. If clearance ”B” is outside the allowable range, than remove the Upper Right Column Cover, and adjust the Mounting Brackets located
inside the Upper Right Column Cover by loosening the bolts as shown below.
10. Assembly of the Upper Left Column Cover (p/n 362097) follows this same procedure.

LOOSEN BOLTS AND ADJUST

BRACKETS TO CORRECT
CLEARANCE “B” IF NECESSARY

FIGURE 17 ADJUSTING CLEARANCE “B”

Philips Medical Systems. Confidential and Proprietary information. Refer to Title Page.
HOLE PLUG INSTALLATION

1. Install the Hole Plugs (p/n T39A–1013) at the four locations shown in Figure 18.

INSTALL HOLE
PLUGS HERE

FIGURE 18 FRONT HOLE PLUG INSTALLATION

2. Install the Hole Plugs (p/n T39A–1013) at the two locations shown in Figure 19.

INSTALL HOLE
PLUGS HERE

FIGURE 19 REAR HOLE PLUG INSTALLATION

CARDFILE ACCESS REMOVAL:
1. Remove the upper side cover. Loosen the two screws and remove the access cover. Refer to Figure 16.

Philips Medical Systems. Confidential and Proprietary information. Refer to Title Page.
CARDFILE ACCESS REPLACEMENT:
2. Set the access cover over the opening and secure with the two screws. Install the upper side cover.

DOMESTIC SHIPMENTS
There are FOUR major items to a domestic AcQSim CT CT scanner system:

1. Gantry, on casters (X–ray tube installed).

2. Patient Support, on dollies with returnable container, and accessories.
3. AcQImage Cabinet.
4. Display Tower
The chair and table (optional), any cameras, Patient Support rails, etc. are in additional cartons. All laser imagers are direct–shipped to
the site. RDS and Voxel options are additional items not covered in this manual.

PERSONNEL NEEDED
At least four persons are needed to move the Gantry. Personnel will guide and control the speed of the units being moved, but must not
attempt to directly lift any of the loaded equipment. Personnel should work as a team to keep the Gantry (or Patient Support, etc) from hitting
and damaging walls, doorways, etc. All ramps should be verified as to load carrying ability. The Patient Support can be handled by two
persons. The AcQImage Cabinet and Display Tower can be handled by one person. Overall installation requires two people.

UNCRATE THE SYSTEM

WARNING
WHEN STRAPS ARE CUT TO REMOVE PACKING, CASTERS CAN DETACH FROM
COUCH. DO NOT REMOVE BANDING FROM COUCH UNTIL IT IS READY FOR
FINAL POSITIONING IN THE SCAN SUITE. FAILURE TO COMPLY CAN RESULT IN
SERIOUS INJURY.

Undo the items wrapped on the skid. Obtain a cart or other device, as necessary, and move the X–ray tube (if packed separately) to the
scan room; move the AcQImage and Display Tower crate to the control room.

Philips Medical Systems. Confidential and Proprietary information. Refer to Title Page.
International Shipments
The following paragraphs provide information on the numbering of international shipments and how they must be uncrated. The following
information on international shipments excludes the overall international shipping container. The actual appearance of the shipment you
receive can vary from this description. The following information refers to the ”internal” containers of any international shipments.
Numbering of Crates
The crates are clearly numbered. Contents of each is identified in a packing list attached to the bill of lading.

The AcQSim CT CT scanner shipments typically consist of three crates:

1. Gantry
2. AcQImage Cabinet and Display Tower, including keyboard, mouse and pad, monitor and cabling, and X–ray tube. For international
shipments, the tube is typically shipped uninstalled.
3. Patient Support with returnable container and accessories (except Germany and Austria) The returnable container contains Gantry
casters, dollies, etc. All three crates are typically supported by shock absorbing plastic springs.
The chair, table, any cameras, Patient Support rails, etc. are in additional cartons.

– All laser imagers and the digital interface are direct–shipped to the site.

Philips Medical Systems. Confidential and Proprietary information. Refer to Title Page.
UNCRATING

WARNING
WHEN STRAPS ARE CUT TO REMOVE PACKING, CASTERS CAN DETACH FROM
COUCH. DO NOT REMOVE BANDING FROM COUCH UNTIL IT IS READY FOR
FINAL POSITIONING IN THE SCAN SUITE. FAILURE TO COMPLY CAN RESULT IN
SERIOUS INJURY.

Unbolt the boxes to gain access to the contents in the crate.

CAUTION
THE GANTRY MUST BE LIFTED OFF THE SKID BY A LIFTING MACHINE CAPABLE
OF HANDLING AT LEAST 6.000 POUNDS (2730 KG.). FAILURE TO HAVE THE COR-
RECT LIFTING MACHINERY CAN RESULT IN DAMAGE TO THE GANTRY

WARNING
LIFTING HAZARD.. USE ONLY THE PROVIDED CHAIN SLING WHEN LIFTING THE
GANTRY. FAILURE TO COMPLY CAN RESULT IN EQUIPMENT OR PERSONNEL
INJURY.

WARNING
GANTRY DAMAGE HAZARD. DO NOT USE A FORK LIFT TO LIFT THE GANTRY.
MOVE THE GANTRY ON THE CASTERS (WHEELS ATTACHED TO EACH
END–STAND) OR BY LIFTING AND MOVING WITH THE CHAIN SHACKLES (TOP
OF GANTRY). USE OF A FORK LIFT WILL RESULT IN DAMAGE TO THE GANTRY.

Philips Medical Systems. Confidential and Proprietary information. Refer to Title Page.
EQUIPMENT POSITIONING
1. Prior to the delivery of the system the General Contractor shall drill the mounting holes and install 1/2”–13 anchoring expansion nuts
for anchoring Gantry (6 places) and Patient Support (5 places).
2. The nuts are to be flush with the finish of the floor surface. A template (P/N 174214) to lay out the hole centers may be obtained from
the local Philips Medical SystemsService office.
3. Philips Medical Systems International requires the use of 1/2” – 13 anchors for the Gantry and couch with a pull out force of 8,000
LBS. (3640 kg.) Lead anchors are not acceptable. Acceptable anchors are:
 Red Head, Hilti, Parabolt by Molly

NOTE
Carbide drill bits or ”core drills” are not recommended to drill holes for Red Head an-
chors. These drill bits cause holes to be drilled outside of positional tolerances; there-
fore, holes in the floor may not match the holes in the Gantry.

Figure 20 is a representation of the template used to place holes for equipment anchoring. Example weight specifications given in
Figure 20. Actual weights for your system are defined in the Architectural Planning Guide for your site.

Philips Medical Systems. Confidential and Proprietary information. Refer to Title Page.
 88”
METHOD # 1 2235 MM
SURFACE MOUNTED 44” 37” 5” ALTERNATE
RACEWAY ON FLOOR RACEWAY
1118 MM 940 MM 127 MM
FOR CABLE ACCESS LOCATION
30” 30”
781 MM 781 MM

19.50” A1
17”
495 MM 29”
ISOCENTER 432 MM
737 MM

A2

5–1/2” 11 ” * 8–1/2 ”
7–1/2 ” 30”
216 MM
191 MM 140 MM 762 MM 279 MM
31.25 ”
METHOD#2: ALTERNATIVE COVER
794 mm
12 IN. X 2 IN (305 X 305mm) COVER 5–1/2” PLATE LOCATION
PLATE FLUSH–MOUNTED IN FLOOR 140 MM
FOR CABLE ACCESS B1 B2

* THIS DISTANCE INCREASES

WHEN MOBILE C–ARM IS APPLIED.

B3 49.875”
1267 MM
66 ”
ACTUAL 5 in. X 2
1676 MM (127 mm X 70 mm)
GANTRY CABLE OPENING
B4 B5
Philips Medical Systems supplied
cable tray

13–3/8 In.
340 MM

CONTINUED ON NEXT PAGE:

Philips Medical Systems. Confidential and Proprietary information. Refer to Title Page.
 CONTINUED FROM FIGURE 20

SCANNER GANTRY WEIGHT: PATIENT SUPPORT:

3,400 LBS 550 LBS
1542 KG 249 KG
FLOOR AREA: 2,552 SQ. IN. FLOOR AREA: 883 SQ. IN.
CONCRETE LOAD AREA: CONCRETE LOAD AREA:
A1 + A2 = 393.5 SQ. IN. (2539 SQ CM.) B1 + B2 + B3 + B4 + B5 = 49.75 SQ.
DYNAMIC FORCES: NEGLIGIBLE IN. (321 SQ CM.)
DYNAMIC FORCES: NEGLIGIBLE

CONTRACTOR SHALL DRILL MOUNTING HOLES AND INSTALL 1/2 INCH–13 ANCHORING EXPANSION NUTS FOR
SCANNER GANTRY AND PATIENT SUPPORT. NUTS TO BE FLUSH WITH FINISHED FLOOR SURFACE. A TEMPLATE
TO LAY OUT THE HOLE CENTERS MAY BE OBTAINED FROM PHILIPS MEDICAL SYSTEMS SERVICE DIVISION.

PHILIPS MEDICAL SYSTEMS REQUIRE THE USE OF READ HEAD ANCHORS #S12 (RATED PULL–OUT FORCE OF
8500 LBS (37,808 N), OR THROUGH–BOLTING WILL BE REQUIRED (LEAD ANCHORS ARE NOT ACCEPTABLE)

IN ORDER TO MEET ELECTRICAL GROUND ISOLATION REQUIREMENTS, ALL METHODS OF SCANNER GANTRY AND
PATIENT SUPPORT BOLTING MUST NOT COME IN CONTACT WITH ANY BUILDING STEEL STRUCTURE OR RE-
INFORCEMENT. MODULAR BUILDING FLOOR STRUCTURE MAY REQUIRE ADDITIONAL BRACING BENEATH SCAN-
NER GANTRY AND PATIENT SUPPORT IN ORDER TO ELIMINATE VIBRATION THAT CAN AFFECT CLINICAL IMAGES.

FIGURE 20 MOUNTING TEMPLATE (P/N 174214)

Philips Medical Systems. Confidential and Proprietary information. Refer to Title Page.
GANTRY POSITIONING

WARNING
PINCH HAZARD. FINGERS CAN BE CAUGHT IN THE CLOSE CLEARANCES
BETWEEN THE CASTERS AND THE ’DISKS.”

1. After all floor anchors are in place, roll the Gantry into position above them. (If for some reason the Gantry is not supported by the
casters, raise the Gantry onto the casters by rotating the circular portion (caster disk) of the caster assembly in a clockwise direction.)

WARNING
OPEN GANTRY COVERS MUST BE PROPERLY SECURED OR REMOVED FROM
THE IMMEDIATE AREA. FAILURE TO DO SO CAN RESULT IN SERIOUS INJURY
TO PERSONNEL.

WARNING
INJURY HAZARD. THE FRONT AND REAR UPPER GULL WINGS HAVE SHARP
EDGES. USE CAUTION WHEN SERVICING EQUIPMENT WHILE UPPER GULL
WINGS ARE OPEN. FAILURE TO COMPLY CAN RESULT IN SERIOUS INJURY TO
PERSONNEL.

2. Open the panel to full–position and lock in place using the support rod. Refer to NO TAG.

NOTE
Gantry Cover procedure is found in the first chapter of the Gantry section of the Repair
Manual.

Philips Medical Systems. Confidential and Proprietary information. Refer to Title Page.
FRONT CONE

C0134

FIGURE 21 AcQSim CT GANTRY FRONT CONE AND CABLE ACCESS COVERS (REAR)

CAUTION
THE PLASTIC EDGES OF THE CONE THAT FIT INTO THE SLIP RING ARE VERY
FRAGILE. DO NOT LEAN THE CONE AGAINST THE WALL ON THIS EDGE. FAIL-
URE TO COMPLY MAY RESULT IN DAMAGE TO THE CONE RESULTING IN THE
NEED FOR REPLACEMENT.

Philips Medical Systems. Confidential and Proprietary information. Refer to Title Page.
3. Remove the two cable access covers at the lower rear corners of the Gantry base to gain access to the bolt holes. Remove the shipping
covers in the bottom of the cable trough. See Figure 21.

CAUTION
IN THE FOLLOWING STEP USE THE SUPPLIED 2–INCH BOLTS UNLESS DIRECTED OTHERWISE. IMPROPER LENGTH
BOLTS CAN BE TORQUED TO SPECIFICATION (30–40 FT–LBS) BUT WILL NOT SECURE THE GANTRY.
4. Carefully lower the Gantry one end at a time by rotating the caster disks in unison. Lower the Gantry over the holes in the floor (already
drilled – see Equipment Positioning) until the Gantry base is about 1/2–inch above the floor. Position the Gantry over the holes and
install _ but DO NOT TIGHTEN _ the six 1/2–inch bolts (S617–129) and 1/8–inch thick washers (T11–447) provided in the anchor
hardware kit. Figure 22 shows the initial Gantry bolt–down positions. Lower the Gantry to the floor.

NOTE
In most installations, all six bolt holes are now accessible. In some situations it will be
necessary to power the Gantry (later, in this procedure) and tip it to +5 degrees for ac-
cess to the front two holes. Ensure that the Gantry anti–tilt shipping bracket is re-
moved before tilting. See Figure 23.

NOTE
Final tightening of Gantry and Patient Support floor anchor bolts and removal of ship-
ping caster assemblies will be done after power is supplied. The Patient Support must
be raised to tighten the floor bolts and to do final alignment of Patient Support to Gantry.
This requires electrical power: these steps are detailed in Section 4 of this manual, Sys-
tem Installation

Philips Medical Systems. Confidential and Proprietary information. Refer to Title Page.
 FIGURE 22 INITIAL GANTRY BOLT–DOWN POSITION

NOTE
DO NOT remove the Gantry caster assemblies at this time. They will be removed later
in the installation procedure.

5. Use the appropriate wrench (i.e., for hex–head or Allen–head) and remove the Gantry tilt bracket located in the lower center portion
in the back of the Gantry. This bracket prevents inadvertent Gantry tilt during shipment. Refer to Figure 23. HINT: Sometimes the fit
is very tight and the bracket cannot be removed after unbolting. Later, after power is applied, tilt the Gantry slightly to release the
pressure on the anti–tilt bracket.

Philips Medical Systems. Confidential and Proprietary information. Refer to Title Page.
 GANTRY FRAME

SHIPPING
BRACKET

MOUNTING
BOLTS (4)

FIGURE 23 GANTRY SHIPPING BRACKET

6. Remove the Connector Plate by removing the two bolts that secure it. The Column Support bar will be removed AFTER the gantry
is aligned and the casters are removed. DO NOT attempt to remove them now. Refer to Figure 24.

Philips Medical Systems. Confidential and Proprietary information. Refer to Title Page.
BOLTS GO THROUGH PLATE AND INTO
COLUMN SUPPORT AND GANTRY

CONNECTOR PLATE

FIGURE 24 COLUMN CONNECTOR PLATE AND COLUMN SUPPORT LOCATIONS – (Approx. first 14 systems)

Philips Medical Systems. Confidential and Proprietary information. Refer to Title Page.
POSITION PATIENT SUPPORT

NOTE
The Gantry must be in its final position before you begin these steps. The rear and cen-
ter anchor bolts in each support column must be partially threaded into the floor anchor
nuts. The front two bolts may already be in or may be inserted later when the Gantry
can be tilted 5 degrees forward.

1. Remove the top bolts of the column support on each gantry column. Remove the connector plate that is attached to the column support
and has a pin extending into the tilt arm channel.
2. At the front of the Gantry, pull out cables L7272 and L7161. HINT: remove the rear, Gantry base access plate; you can then push the
cables through to the front.

WARNING
LIFTING HAZARD. THE PATIENT SUPPORT IS VERY HEAVY AND SHOULD BE
MANEUVERED BY TWO PEOPLE. USE CAUTION WHEN MOVING THIS ITEM.
FAILURE TO COMPLY CAN RESULT IN INJURY TO PERSONNEL.

3. Maneuver the Patient Support into the approximate position over the anchor holes and cut the banding straps. (This requires two
people). While one person lifts one end of the Patient Support, the other person can remove the dolly. Do the same to the other end.
4. Remove the top two leaves of the telescoping covers to gain access to the anchoring holes (see Figure 25) by doing the following:
a. Remove the four screws that bolt the two panels together.
b. Remove the four screws and washers that attach the telescoping base cover panels to the subframe.
c. Remove the ground wire from each panel.
5. Place the cable trough between the Gantry and Patient Support. The section with a tape switch is the bottom of the trough. Orient the
cable trough with the connector end toward the Patient Support. Refer to Figure 26. Do not remove the double–sided tape at this time.
Remove when the alignment section is completed.
6. Connect cables L7161 and L7272 to the Patient Support. Refer to Figure 27 for cable connections.

NOTE
For hospital locations that have ordered the additional plastic elevator plate for high fluid
levels, refer to Figure 27 for instructions.

Philips Medical Systems. Confidential and Proprietary information. Refer to Title Page.
 LEFT HAND PANEL

UP

RIGHT HAND PANEL

MOUNTING SCREWS AND WASHERS (4)

FIGURE 25 PATIENT SUPPORT TELESCOPING BASE COVERS

Philips Medical Systems. Confidential and Proprietary information. Refer to Title Page.
PRESSURE SENSITIVE
DOUBLE–SIDED TAPE

FIGURE 26 CABLE TROUGH WITH FOOT SWITCH

Philips Medical Systems. Confidential and Proprietary information. Refer to Title Page.
INSTALLATION INSTRUCTIONS:
1. Slide the 18 inch plastic elevator plate under the cables.
2. Join two tyraps together in order to lengthen. Make three assemblies.
3. Bind cables to plastic elevator plate using the joined tyraps as shown.
4. Trim tyraps.
5. Make certain the couch foot switch top does not interfere with connectors.
6. Test foot switch for proper operation.

CABLE L7504

CABLE L7274

CABLE L7272

CABLE L7161

FIGURE 27 OPTIONAL PLASTIC ELEVATOR INSTALLATION

Philips Medical Systems. Confidential and Proprietary information. Refer to Title Page.
 J1252 Display J1200
Tower
TB12
Left Column
J1211

L11040
P417
TB13
L7272, 6 cond. w/ shield
L11041

PATIENT SUPPORT GANTRY

L11039

L7161, 50 cond. Ribbon

P402

J108

AcQImage J103
Cabinet J1101

J101
J1194
#11 on J2 Card File Backplane
Backplane Gantry Data (ribbon) L11036
J1195
J1193 Gantry Signal L11038 (opcon I/O)

J1100 Gantry Power L11037

FIGURE 28 SYSTEM INTERCONNECT DIAGRAM

NOTE: Do not wire at this time – the next section covers this in detail.

Philips Medical Systems. Confidential and Proprietary information. Refer to Title Page.
7. Plug in the Tape Switch connector. If possible, install the safety ground (green and yellow stripped wire,) from the Gantry to the Patient
Support; otherwise, do this in the Installation section. This connection must be made in the Patient Support!
8. After the Patient Support is bolted down, place the cable trough cover over the bottom trough.

NOTE
The installation and final tightening of the Gantry and Patient Support floor anchor bolts
and the removal of Gantry shipping caster assemblies will be done after power is ap-
plied. The Patient Support must be electrically raised to install and tighten bolts, and
to do final alignment of the Patient Support to the Gantry. These steps are detailed in
System Installation section.

Philips Medical Systems. Confidential and Proprietary information. Refer to Title Page.
POSITION ACQIMAGE CABINET & DISPLAY TOWER
1. Remove the AcQImage Cabinet and Display Tower from the shipping palette. Clear away any packing materials and unlock the wheels
on both units. They can now be rolled to their respective installation locations.
2. Locate the AcQImage Cabinet in either the Scan Control room, Gantry room or elsewhere per site planning instructions. Ensure you
lock the wheels when in place. See SEISMIC CONSIDERATIONS if applicable on the following page.
3. Locate the Display Monitor, Keyboard, Mouse, Mousepad and Intercom Assembly to their respective locations. Refer to Figure 29 for
a typical setup. Roll the Display Tower to its general location. (See Canadian Note.). To install the wrist pad on the new curved–top
style keyboard (P/N 178918), turn the keyboard and wrist rest over. Place the wrist rest’s four capture posts over the keyboard’s four
capture points and snap into place.
4. Install the anti–tip device on each of the wheels of both cabinets if not factory installed.

THIS FIGURE SHOWS A TYPICAL SETUP. THE DISPLAY TOWER CAN BE

ROLLED UNDER THE TABLE. DOES NOT FIT UNDER
(OPTIONAL) TABLE.

MAKE SURE THE EQUIPMENT IS LOCATED IN A SPOT WHERE THE

CABLES CAN BE INSTALLED BEFORE ROLLING UNDER THE TABLE.

LOCK WHEELS AFTER POSITIONING.

ACQIMAGE CABINET

DISPLAY TOWER

FIGURE 29 ACQIMAGE CABINET AND DISPLAY TOWER SETUP (optional table and chair)

Philips Medical Systems. Confidential and Proprietary information. Refer to Title Page.
SEISMIC CONSIDERATIONS
The following procedure is for systems that require special seismic anchoring installation. A P/N 178172 Seismic Mounting Package
Assembly is required to complete this type of installation for Display Console/AcQImage Cabinets in California or other locations prone to
seismic disturbances.
Display Tower / AcQImage Cabinet
1. Set the Display Tower on its left side (when facing the front).
2. Remove the four castors by loosening the 1/2” nut that is just above each castor.
3. Remove each castor and its washer.
4. Install the spacers and washers as shown in Figure 31 for the Display Tower.
5. Put the castors back in and tighten each of the nuts. Tip the cabinet back onto its castors. Roll into the area where they will be located.
6. Repeat this procedure for the AcQImage cabinet. Refer to Figure 30.
To slide either cabinet out for service:
1. Remove both anchor bolts from each of the two FRONT seismic brackets.
2. Unlock the castors and slide the cabinet out (the rear seismic brackets do not move).
3. Slide back in and re–assemble the two front brackets.

NOTES
1. Supporting structure (floor/wall/ceiling) is responsibility of architect or engineer of record at site specific project.
2. For the state of California, expansion anchors shall have special inspection during installation and be tested in accordance
with OSHPD requirments.
3. Anchor base with 8 each HSL MB/20 expansion anchors embedded 2 5/8” into 4 3/4” min. thickness = 2000PSI normal wt.
concrete. Minimum concrete edge distance = 7”. Install per ICBO ER–3987. 50% of the anchors shall be tested after a minimum
of 24 hours of their installation by a torque test of 20 ft–lbs. The specified torque shall be reached with one half turn of the head.
Should any anchor fail, test the remainder.
4. Equivalent expansion anchors in lieu of Hilti, may be used provided allowable loads are equal or greater and are approved
by ICBO.
5. Anchor Forces
Max. shear (AcQImage Cabinet) = 37 lbs. (Display Tower) = 31 lbs.
Max. tension (AcQImage Cabinet) = 311 lbs. (Display Tower) = 245 lbs.
6. Seismic drilling templates for location of mounting holes are included in P/N 178172 seismic mounting package assembly.

Philips Medical Systems. Confidential and Proprietary information. Refer to Title Page.
 :

FRONT

(TOP VIEW)

HILTI
ANCHOR

SUGGESTED FASTENERS – HSL 20 MM

M8/20 HILTI EXPANSION ANCHORS 8 FLAT
PLC’S WASHER

FIGURE 30 SEISMIC BRACKET – ACQIMAGE CABINET

Philips Medical Systems. Confidential and Proprietary information. Refer to Title Page.
 FRONT

(TOP VIEW)
HILTI
ANCHOR

20 MM
SAME BRACKETS AS ACQIMAGE CABINET FLAT
IN FIGURE 30 WASHER

FIGURE 31 SEISMIC BRACKET – DISPLAY TOWER

Philips Medical Systems. Confidential and Proprietary information. Refer to Title Page.
 NOTE
To meet Canadian regulatory requirements, a French–Canadian warning message
(83980) is available for any systems to be shipped to Canada. It is part of the ship–with
items (311264). The label is applied over the keyboard label (83926) on the older style
keyboard. It is placed to the right of the English warning message in the blank area of
the label.
For the new curved–top style keyboard, P/N 178918, remove the existing label and
install the new label (P/N 312729) at the top of the keyboard.

NAMEPLATE LOCATIONS

It is necessary to record all equipment serial numbers and part numbers from the equipment nameplates on the FDA Reporting forms and
on the system performance evaluation sheets. Use Figure 32, Figure 33, and Figure 34 to locate all nameplates and record the proper
information. The table below will assist you in loacting and identifying the labels.

1 88856 NAMEPLATE, CATALOG – COLLIMATOR

2 178620 SERIAL TAG PAGE FOR SYSTEM 2007
3 T32–616 LASER CAUTION LABEL
4 T32–703 LASER CAUTION LABEL – CLASS II
5 T32–707 LASER CAUTION LABEL – CLASS II
6 T32–712 LASER WARNING – GERMAN
7 T60C–551 INSTALLATION INSTRUCTIONS – GERMAN LASER WARNING
8 T63G–1150 INSTALLATION INSTRUCTION – LASER CAUTION – FRENCH
9 T63G–1154 INSTALLATION INSTRUCTION – LASER CAUTION – FRENCH
10 T92C–288 FDA CERTIFICATION LABEL
11 T92C–288 LASER RADIATION CAUTION LABEL – FRENCH
12 T92C–289 CAUTION LABEL – FRENCH

Philips Medical Systems. Confidential and Proprietary information. Refer to Title Page.
 F C

PICKER INTERNATIONAL, INC

Serial Tag Page For System:
Serial Tag Page For System

MADE
IN U.S.A.

Page 2 of 2
Page 1 of 2 PICKER INTERNATIONAL, INC

P/N: 178620 Rev: A

P/N: 178620 Rev: A

A
Label Page 2 Legend

E PICKER INTERNATIONAL, INC

MADE IN U.S.A.

171850A

MADE IN U.S.A.

PICKER INTERNATIONAL, INC

PICKER INTERNATIONAL, INC

G 120V~ 15A 50/60 HZ

208V2~N 15A 50/60 HZ

MADE IN U.S.A.
MADE IN U.S.A.

Label PICKER INTERNATIONAL, INC

Page 1

Legend

D
MADE IN U.S.A.
B

FIGURE 32 LABELS (LETTER CALLOUTS WILL BE IN NEXT 3 FIGURES)

Philips Medical Systems. Confidential and Proprietary information. Refer to Title Page.
 FIGURE 33 GANTRY / PATIENT SUPPORT LABELS

Philips Medical Systems. Confidential and Proprietary information. Refer to Title Page.
 FIGURE 34 GANTRY LABELS

Philips Medical Systems. Confidential and Proprietary information. Refer to Title Page.
AcQImage Cabinet
Display Tower

FIGURE 35 ACQIMAGE CABINET / DISPLAY TOWER LABELS

Philips Medical Systems. Confidential and Proprietary information. Refer to Title Page.
Place the castors, etc back into the crate they came in. Pack and return the column connector plate and column supports. All must be
returned to WHQ.

FIGURE 36 SHIP–TO SUPPLIES PACKED FOR RETURN SHIPMENT

Philips Medical Systems. Confidential and Proprietary information. Refer to Title Page.
SYSTEM INSTALLATION PROCEDURE
INTRODUCTION

In this section you:

S connect power to the Gantry, Patient Support, AcQImage Cabinet and Display Tower
S verify power phasing
S interconnect the Gantry to the AcQImage Cabinet
S interconnect the AcQImage Cabinet with the Display Cabinet
S align the Patient Support to the Gantry
S install the X–ray tube (as required)
S install the monitor

INSTALL POWER AND SIGNAL CABLES

In this section you:

S install and connect the main power cable into the Gantry
S install and connect the Gantry–to–AcQImage Cabinet cables, the AcQImage Cabinet to Display Tower cables and the Display Tower
to Operator Console cables.

Philips Medical Systems. Confidential and Proprietary information. Refer to Title Page.
 backplane BACKPLANE
front – REAR

FRONT OF
GANTRY

GANTRY
PIVOTING
ARM
OPCOM
CABLE ENTRY AREAS CABLE
RIBBON
CABLE

REAR VIEW OF THE GANTRY RIGHT SIDE VIEW OF THE GANTRY

FIGURE 37 CABLE ENTRY AREAS

Philips Medical Systems. Confidential and Proprietary information. Refer to Title Page.
 TABLE 1 INTERCONNECT CABLES
CABLE CABLE CABLE FROM LOCATION AND TO LOCATION AND
NUMBER LENGTH DESCRIPTION CONN. CONN
L11038 50 FT. Gantry Signal Cable Gantry Backplane, J103 AcQImage CabinetJ1193
L11038–A 25 FT. (Use P1193 end)

L11036 50 FT. Gantry Data (Ribbon) Gantry Backplane, J101 AcQImage Cabinet
L11036–A 25 FT. Backplane, #11 on J2

L11037 50 FT. Gantry Power Cable Gantry Left Column, AcQImage Cabinet,
L11037–A 25 FT. TB12 J1100

L11039 50 FT. Ethernet Cable –100 AcQImage Cabinet, Display Cabinet, SUN
Base T4 J1195 Motherboard, J1252
L11039–A 10 FT. (Run inside cabinet)
L11040 50 FT. Power Cable AcQImage Cabinet, Display Cabinet, J1200
L11040–A 10 FT. J1101

L11041 50 FT. Display Signal Cable AcQImage Cabinet, Display Cabinet, J1211
J1194
L11041–A 10 FT. (Use P1194 end)
*L7161 12 FT. Couch Signal Cable Couch Control Assembly Gantry Backplane, J108
PCB, P402
*L7272 16 FT. Couch Power Cable Couch Control Assembly Gantry Left Column,
PCB, P417 TB13

* Completed previously in the Uncrating section of this manual.

NOTE
DO NOT bend the ethernet cables sharply. DO NOT place the ethernet cables near the
electronics of the system components.

Philips Medical Systems. Confidential and Proprietary information. Refer to Title Page.
 GANTRY DATA CABLE (RIBBON) – L11036 TOP

GANTRY SIGNAL CABLE – L11038

J101

J103

J108
FRONT OF BACKPLANE RIGHT SIDE
TO PATIENT SUPPORT
FIGURE 38 GANTRY CARDFILE BACKPLANE – FRONT
1. Connect the Suite Annunciator (if being used) to TB20 in the left column of the Gantry. See Figure 39 for the location of TB20.
2. Connect the Door Interlock (if being used) to TB30 in the right Gantry column.

Philips Medical Systems. Confidential and Proprietary information. Refer to Title Page.
 TB20

TB13 TB12

INCOMING POWER
CABLE CONSOLE POWER
TB11

SUITE ANNUNCIATOR
PATIENT TABLE POWER (FAC-
TORY WIRED)

FIGURE 39 LEFT COLUMN WIRING

Philips Medical Systems. Confidential and Proprietary information. Refer to Title Page.
3. Install/Connect System Main Power At Gantry: Route the incoming main power lines through the access holes located at the rear of
either Gantry column. Refer to Figure 37.
4. Secure the power lines to TB10 and the ground lug (GL1) to ground stud (GS) as shown in Figure 39. The thick power line can be routed
under the tilt arm. More flexibility can be obtained by carefully removing the black outer cover to expose the four individual wires.
Ensure that the line is not located where the column cover will slide down.
5. Wire the Recon cable to TB12. From left to right: Open, Black, Red, White, Green. Wire the couch cable to TB13. See Figure 39.
For detailed information, refer to the AcQImage Cabinet to Gantry instructions.
6. Put on anti–static wrist strap, grounding it to Gantry card file chassis.

CAUTION
STATIC ELECTRICITY HAZARD. PRINTED CIRCUIT BOARDS MUST BE HANDLED
WITH ANTI–STATIC TECHNIQUES. DISCHARGE YOUR BODY BEFORE HANDLING
ANY PCB. KEEP ALL PCBS IN ANTI–STATIC BAGS WHEN NOT INSTALLED IN THE
EQUIPMENT. FAILURE TO COMPLY CAN CAUSE PERMANENT DAMAGE TO COM-
PONENTS ON PRINTED CIRCUIT BOARDS.

NOTE
The threaded ends of the gantry cardfile cover screw holes are plastic. This helps to
hold the screws in place, and are therefore labeled “captive.” However, the screws can
come completely out if loosened too far.

7. Remove the gantry cardfile covers by loosening the four captive screws on each cover. Reseat all boards in the Gantry card file rack
— merely press each board into the card file, do not remove any! Replace the cardfile covers.

WARNING
ELECTRIC SHOCK HAZARD. USE EXTREME CAUTION WHEN PERFORMING
GANTRY INSTALLATION PROCEDURES WITH THE COVERS OPEN. 480 VAC, 208
VAC AND 120 VAC, AS WELL AS 5–18 VDC ARE EXPOSED IN MANY LOCATION.
FAILURE TO COMPLY CAN RESULT IN SERIOUS INJURY OR DEATH.

Philips Medical Systems. Confidential and Proprietary information. Refer to Title Page.
8. Visually inspect the power and signal slip ring brushes. All brush wires must be down in their respective grooves. A ”brush” with one
or two damaged wires can have a wire cut. Brushes must have at least 19 wires!
TECHNICAL INFORMATION: Reverse rotation of the scan frame (clockwise) can result in one or more brush wires being bent/distorted.
Severely bent wires in one groove can come in contact with other brush components in adjacent grooves. Because of the potential on these
brushes, 480 (or 208) vac for the X–ray power supply and 120 vac for the lasers and the XSC, damage will almost certainly occur to the
brush holder; or, on the signal slip rings, damage will most certainly occur to any card associated with the affected 5 volt line. BE AWARE
that reverse rotation can occur during shipment because the scan frame is not locked.
9. Perform DC power check. Refer to Figure 40.
a. Remove main drive fuses F310, F311, F312.
b. On the Gantry AC Control Panel, turn DRIVES switch to f, TILT/VERTICAL DRIVES to | (on), CONTROL ELECTRONICS to |,
and POWER SUPPLY to |. (These are not ”1’s” but are vertical bars.)
c. Select SERVICE mode on the AC Control Panel.
d. Turn Wall Power ON and press START button.
e. Check the Power Monitor board indicators at the right rear of the gantry (All 6 green indicators should be ON and the green DC
OK LED on the AC Control Panel should be ON. If a condition other than this exists, check Wall Power Supply connections and
the card file 5–output DC power supply. Refer to Figure 41 for locations.
f. Press EMERGENCY STOP button. Turn Wall Power OFF.

MAIN DRIVE

F310 I I
10A
0 0

F311
10A

0 I I
AC CONTROL SERVICE NORMAL
F312
10A 0 0

FIGURE 40 AC CONTROL PANEL

Philips Medical Systems. Confidential and Proprietary information. Refer to Title Page.
 POWER MONITOR BOARD

YELLOW “HIGH VOLTAGE” LED

YELLOW “LOW VOLTAGE” LED

GREEN “CORRECT” VOLTAGE LED

GREEN VOLTAGE INDICA-

TOR LEDS

FIGURE 41 POWER MONITOR BOARD

Philips Medical Systems. Confidential and Proprietary information. Refer to Title Page.
 WARNING
ELECTRIC SHOCK HAZARD. USE EXTREME CAUTION WHEN PERFORMING
GANTRY INSTALLATION PROCEDURES WITH THE COVERS OPEN. 480 VAC, 208
VAC AND 120 VAC, AS WELL AS 5–18 VDC ARE EXPOSED IN MANY LOCATION.
FAILURE TO COMPLY CAN RESULT IN SERIOUS INJURY OR DEATH.

10. Turn ON Wall Power. Press the START button located on the Gantry AC Control Panel.
11. Lower the front gull–wing panel halfway for access to the Gantry Control panels.

Philips Medical Systems. Confidential and Proprietary information. Refer to Title Page.
VERIFY MAIN POWER PHASING
In this section you will verify main power phasing by exercising the Patient Support.

WARNING
ELECTRIC SHOCK HAZARD. USE EXTREME CAUTION WHEN WORKING INSIDE
THE PATIENT SUPPORT WITH THE COVERS OPEN. 480 VAC, 208 VAC AND 120
VAC, +17 VDC, –17 VDC AND 15 VDC ARE EXPOSED. FAILURE TO COMPLY CAN
RESULT IN SERIOUS INJURY OR DEATH.

WARNING
CRUSH HAZARD. SCISSOR–ACTION MACHINERY IS EXPOSED WHEN THE
PATIENT SUPPORT COVERS ARE REMOVED. KEEP EQUIPMENT AND
PERSONNEL AWAY FROM THE MECHANICAL ACTION OF THESE PARTS.
FAILURE TO DO SO CAN CAUSE SERIOUS DAMAGE TO EQUIPMENT AND
SERIOUS INJURY OR DEATH TO PERSONNEL.

CAUTION
THE PATIENT SUPPORT DOWN LIMIT SWITCHES ARE NOT ENABLED WHEN THE
PATIENT SUPPORT IS TRAVELING IN THE UP DIRECTION. DO NOT EXERCISE
THE UPWARD TOUCH COMMAND AT THE GANTRY CONTROL PANEL AT THIS
TIME. FAILURE TO COMPLY CAN CAUSE DAMAGE TO THE BALL SCREW AND
BEARING.

1. Check the phase rotation of the incoming main power. Exercise the vertical motion of the Patient Support by a downward touch
command at the Gantry touch panel. If the downward command causes the Patient Support to move upward, correct the
phasing immediately. Correct this condition by turning OFF main power at the wall box and reversing any two of the three line
conductors supplying power to the system (in the Gantry column at TB10). Then turn main power ON.
2. Raise the Patient Support about 1/2–way up (approximately 680 mm on the Gantry display panel. Turn power off at the wall box.

Philips Medical Systems. Confidential and Proprietary information. Refer to Title Page.
3. Install the safety ground (green & yellow striped wire) from the Gantry to the Patient Support. This connection must be made in the Patient
Support, not in the cable trough. Remove all wires from the grounding stud in the Patient Support. Put the incoming wire from the Gantry
on the bottom. Reinstall the ground wires. Connect ground wire from the Patient Support ground stud to the ground stud on the cable
trough cover. Refer to Figure 42.
4. Install cable trough cover on the cable trough.
LEFT

GROUND
STUD
FRONT

FIGURE 42 PATIENT SUPPORT GROUND STUD

Philips Medical Systems. Confidential and Proprietary information. Refer to Title Page.
ALIGN GANTRY COLUMNS AND BOLT DOWN
This section details aligning the Gantry columns and then bolting the Gantry to the floor.

Proper Gantry operation requires that the Gantry support columns be aligned with each other, be rigidly secured to the floor, that there are
no gaps between a column and the floor at the six hold down bolt holes, and that correct torque is applied to the mounting bolts. Failure
to properly mount the columns can cause: a Gantry side panel to contact its nearby column during tilt movement, inadvertent opening of
a tilt actuator switch, or Gantry sway in excess of the specified +/– .002–inch limit at speed 1.

Use the Gantry shims included in the Anchor Hardware kit (176360) in the following steps, as required.

ALIGNMENT AND BOLT DOWN

CAUTION
USE THE SUPPLIED 2–INCH BOLTS (S617–129) UNLESS DIRECTED OTHERWISE.
BOLTS THAT ARE TOO LONG FOR THE ANCHORS CAN BE TORQUED TO SPEC-
IFICATION (30–40 FT–LBS) BUT WILL NOT SECURE THE GANTRY.

1. At this point, all six bolts with 1/8–inch thick hardened washers should be installed in the columns. The bolts should be backed off about
1/4–inch for clearance so you can raise the Gantry during the aligning procedure. If the front two bolts are not installed, tilt the Gantry
to +5_ and install them now.

Philips Medical Systems. Confidential and Proprietary information. Refer to Title Page.
2. Turn main power OFF at the wall box.
3. Place a level –– oriented front to rear –– on top of one column. Note the level reading.
4. Move the level to the other column. Again note the level reading. Compare this with the first observation.
If level readings of both columns are the same:

a. column alignment is acceptable

b. proceed to Step 6.
If the level readings are not the same: continue at the next step.

5. Do the following steps to bring the most out–of–level column into parallel with the other column.

NOTE
Although, it is generally not necessary that the column tops are level, it is better that they
are. All AcQsim sites must be level for proper system performance.

a. Use the caster discs to raise the column for shim placement.
b. Place shims under the front or rear of the column being adjusted so that the level reads the same on both columns. Refer to
Figure 43. The shims have a slot that straddles the floor bolt. Place the shim so that it extends outward from the bolt such that
it supports the entire width of the column. Decide if sliding the shim from the inside or outside of the column is easier.
c. The gap between the gantry and each column must be even from top to bottom on both sides OR rubbing may occur. Refer to
the Gantry / Column Gap Alignment Procedure and Figure 44 for details.

Philips Medical Systems. Confidential and Proprietary information. Refer to Title Page.
 SHIM STRADDLES BOLT. PLACE
SHIM SO IT SUPPORTS WIDTH OF
THE COLUMN.

FIGURE 43 SHIM PLACEMENT AT GANTRY MOUNTING BOLTS

Philips Medical Systems. Confidential and Proprietary information. Refer to Title Page.
6. Lower the Gantry to the floor and check for gaps between each column and the floor at all bolt locations. Use shims to eliminate gaps.
Do this for all Gantries; even if no column alignment was done. (Use the 3–inch shims at the center bolt locations.)
7. Ensure that the gap between the gantry and each column is the same and parallel from top to bottom. If this is not the case, rubbing
of the gantry can occur. To remedy this problem:
Gantry / Column Gap Alignment Procedure (if necessary)
8. Attach a level on the top inside of the gantry. Using the casters, raise or lower them to get the system level. (Do not watch the gap
at this time since the casters cause the column to distort inward slightly).
9. Place shims under the column that needs them. Refer to Figure 43. Loosen the casters so the system is resting only on the floor or
shims. The bolts should be installed, but not tight at this time. Turn on power at the Wall Box and tilt the gantry back and forth once
(about 10–15 deg) to allow it to center itself. Now check the gap between the gantry and columns. They must be parallel and even.
Refer to Figure 44. Exercise the Gantry tilt function several times to ensure there is no binding or rubbing of the Gantry covers against
the columns.

CAUTION
IN THE NEXT STEP, DO NOT EXCEED THE MAXIMUM TORQUE OF 40 FT–LBS. EX-
CESSIVE TORQUE CAN PULL THE ANCHORS OUT OF THE FLOOR.

10. Ensure that the hardened, 1/8–inch thick washers and lock washers are installed between the bolt heads and Gantry base. Torque
all Gantry floor bolts to 30–40 ft–lbs.
11. Turn off wall power.

Philips Medical Systems. Confidential and Proprietary information. Refer to Title Page.
 GAP EVEN DUE TO
PROPER LEVELING

UNEVEN GAP
BETWEEN
GANTRY AND
COLUMN

C2634 SHIMS ADDED

SEE Figure 43

FIGURE 44 GANTRY / COLUMN GAP VERTICAL ALIGNMENT

Philips Medical Systems. Confidential and Proprietary information. Refer to Title Page.
 CAUTION
WHEN REMOVING THE REAR CASTERS, HOLD THE LONG STIFFENING BAR BE-
FORE REMOVING THE BOLTS OR IT MAY FALL ON YOU. FAILURE TO COMPLY
CAN RESULT IN INJURY TO SERVICE PERSONNEL.

12. Use a 3/4–inch wrench to remove all four caster assemblies from the Gantry.
13. Place caster assemblies (and chain from Gantry) in the installation container for return shipment to the factory. Figure 36 shows the
placement of these items.
14. Install cable access covers (2) on the bottom rear of the Gantry. Do NOT re–install the L–shaped covers that go under the trough.

Philips Medical Systems. Confidential and Proprietary information. Refer to Title Page.
INSTALL PATIENT SUPPORT

WARNING
USE EXTREME CAUTION WHEN PERFORMING INSTALLATION PROCEDURES
WITH THE PATIENT SUPPORT COVERS OPEN. 480 VAC AND 120 VAC, AS WELL
AS DC VOLTAGES ARE EXPOSED IN MANY LOCATIONS. FAILURE TO COMPLY
CAN RESULT IN SERIOUS INJURY OR DEATH TO PERSONNEL.

1. Turn the wall power ON.

2. Power up the Gantry in SERVICE mode, by pressing the START button on AC Control Panel.
3. Verify that the floor tape switch (foot switch) between the Patient Support and the Gantry is not binding, by activating the foot switch
several times.
4. Lift the cover of the foot switch and push the cable trough squarely against the base panel of the Gantry. Make sure the foot switch
is centered about the cut out in the base panel.
5. Scribe a line along the floor at the outer edge of the trough. Make sure that the floor under the cables is clear of dirt and wax. Clean
this area if necessary. (This is to assure that the pressure sensitive tape used to secure the trough makes good contact with the floor).
6. Remove the protective strip from the pressure sensitive tape. Refer to Figure 45. Place the bottom trough along the scribe line and
press down to secure it in place. (It may be necessary to slide the Patient Support back slightly to have adequate room to maneuver
the trough. Slide the Patient Support back into place after you secure the trough in place. )

PRESSURE–SEN-
SITIVE DOUBLE
SIDED TAPE

FIGURE 45 FOOT SWITCH ARRANGEMENT

Philips Medical Systems. Confidential and Proprietary information. Refer to Title Page.
7. Place the top cover onto the trough. Insert the screws (2, one at left front and one at right back) in the top trough cover. These will
loosely engage the top cover to the base. Activate the foot switch several times to ensure its proper operation.

NOTE
The cover MUST be free to move up after it has been pressed and released. If the trough
cover binds in the ”pressed” condition the top of the Patient Support will ”free float”.

8. Press an E–Stop button, then turn the wall power OFF.

WARNING
USE EXTREME CAUTION WHEN PERFORMING GANTRY INSTALLATION
PROCEDURES WITH THE COVERS OPEN. 480 VAC, 208 VAC AND 120 VAC, AS
WELL AS 5–18 VDC ARE EXPOSED IN MANY LOCATIONS. FAILURE TO COMPLY
CAN RESULT IN SERIOUS INJURY OR DEATH TO PERSONNEL.

NOTE
The Patient Support was designed to provide maximum stability to the patient while
scanning. It is, therefore, rigidly and tightly assembled and still allows proper motion.
Forcing a twist in the Patient Support by incorrectly bolting it to the floor can cause it
to function improperly. Use the leveling screws in the base plate to allow for variations
and unevenness in the suite floor.

9. Rotate the leveling screws down until they touch the floor, plus one full rotation. DO NOT ROTATE SCREWS EXCESSIVELY. – this
may cause the baseplate to lift and introduce an undesired ”twist”.
10. Place a level on the flat surface of the subframe and check the Patient Support for being ”level” in both the transverse (left–right) and
longitudinal (front–rear) directions. **If the pre–installation inspection determined that the floor is out of specification (ref: Architectural
Planning Guide) then use the leveling screws and level the Patient Support. Place the level on the flat surface of the subframe.
11. Install and hand–tighten the five 1/2–13 x 1–1/4–inch Patient Support mounting bolts (S617–126) and flat washers (S612–16). Later,
use a 3/8–inch Allen to torque the mounting bolts to 30–40 ft–lb. Ensure all washers and lock washers are installed between bolt heads
and the Patient Support base.
This completes Patient Table Installation with the exception of final torque of the bolts, performed in the System Checks section.

Philips Medical Systems. Confidential and Proprietary information. Refer to Title Page.
VERIFY GANTRY TILT
The Gantry tilt drive consists of two linear actuators, one in each column. Ideally, each actuator shares an equal amount of the Gantry load
during tilt operation. In the extending mode (forward tilt) the actuators automatically share the load. If one actuator speeds up, it must also
carry a higher share of the load. Because DC motors slow down when loaded, this actuator slows down allowing the other actuator to regain
its share of the load. Both actuators then run at the same speed.

In the retracting mode (backward tilt) the motors do not carry the load, rather they only need to provide enough torque to overcome their
internal back–drive friction. This friction prevents the actuators from rotating when power is off.

To control the speed of the motors in the retracting mode (that is, torque load during negative tilt), a Hall–effect device senses motor rotation
and an up/down counter toggles power to the faster motor. This causes both motors to supply torque within specified limits.

However, if, for any reason, one of the actuators slows down, or shares less than 40% of the retracting force, the opposite actuator must
then provide 60% or more of the retracting force. As a result, the faster of the two actuators lifts on its spring–loaded pivot. A safety limit
switch, located on the actuator pivot at the bottom of the column, detects this action and interrupts power to the control circuit stopping all
tilt action. If an actuator fails during retracting, the circuitry removes power from the ’good’ actuator and any further Gantry tilt motion ceases.

It is imperative that this safety switch perform as designed. Because an uneven floor could also cause the safety switch to break its electrical
continuity, the Gantry Shimming Procedure in the Gantry Alignment performed earlier ensures the columns make solid contact with the floor.

CAUTION
DO NOT ATTEMPT TO PUT A PLASTIC CABLE TIE UNDER THE SWITCH TO ACTI-
VATE IT. THIS CAN CAUSE DAMAGE TO THE SWITCH.

1. Turn the power ON at the wall box and exercise the Gantry tilt function. If the Gantry tilt is not functioning, jumper the contact points in
the AC Control Chassis to restore continuity. Tilt the Gantry to +10_ to seat the Gantry tilt actuator socket and then remove the jumper.
Position the Gantry to 0_ Gantry tilt.

2. Lower the Patient Support to the lowest position.

3. Verify Patient Support vertical up and down movement using Gantry front touch panel control. Move the carbon top out (away from
Gantry) to furthest horizontal position. Raise the Patient Support to full UP vertical position.

4. Turn power OFF at the wall box.

Philips Medical Systems. Confidential and Proprietary information. Refer to Title Page.
 END OF “VERIFY GANTRY TILT”

**** WHAT TO DO NEXT ! ****

If the Gantry was received . . . Go To. . .
With the X–ray tube installed GO TO: OPERATOR DISPLAY CONSOLE
& ACQIMAGE CABINET HARDWARE
INSTALLATION
With the x–ray tube shipped separately INSTALL X–RAY TUBE AND HEAT
EXCHANGER (See next section).

Philips Medical Systems. Confidential and Proprietary information. Refer to Title Page.
INSTALL X–RAY TUBE AND HEAT EXCHANGER

This section explains how to install the X–ray tube and heat exchanger on systems where these items were shipped separately.

Required Tools:

This process requires the following tools, which may be in addition to your standard tool kit:

 9/16” Socket, Ratchet or a closed–end wrench

 5/32” Hex Key
 Hoist Assembly (7” tube beam installation)
Required Materials:

 Transformer oil
 Protective cover for Patient Support couch top.

INSTALLATION NOTES, WARNINGS AND CAUTIONS

WARNING
USE EXTREME CAUTION WHEN SERVICING EQUIPMENT WHILE UPPER GULL
WING PANEL IS OPEN. THESE PANELS HAVE SHARP EDGES. FAILURE TO
COMPLY COULD RESULT IN SERIOUS INJURY.

WARNING
ELECTROCUTION HAZARD. USE EXTREME CAUTION WHEN OPERATING OR
WORKING ON EQUIPMENT WITH COVERS REMOVED. DANGEROUS VOLTAGES
ARE EXPOSED WHEN THE GATNRY COVERS ARE REMOVED. CONTACT WITH
THESE VOLTAGES MAY CAUSE SERIOUS INJURY OR DEATH TO PERSONNEL.

Philips Medical Systems. Confidential and Proprietary information. Refer to Title Page.
 WARNING
CRUSH HAZARD. SCISSOR–ACTION MACHINERY IS EXPOSED WHEN THE
PATIENT SUPPORT COVERS ARE REMOVED. KEEP EQUIPMENT AND
PERSONNEL AWAY FROM THE MECHANICAL ACTION OF THESE PARTS.
FAILURE TO DO SO CAN CAUSE SERIOUS DAMAGE TO EQUIPMENT AND
SERIOUS INJURY OR DEATH TO PERSONNEL.

XRAY TUBE COMPONENT WEIGHTS

Tube Type Tube With Cradle Heat Exchanger
7 INCH 132 pounds (60 kg) 45 pounds (20.5 kg)

CAUTION
ROTATE THE SCAN FRAME COUNTER–CLOCKWISE ONLY. CLOCKWISE ROTA-
TION OF THE SCAN FRAME MAY CAUSE DAMAGE TO THE SLIP RING BRUSHES.

Philips Medical Systems. Confidential and Proprietary information. Refer to Title Page.
INSTALL X–RAY TUBE AND HEAT EXCHANGER
At this time:

 The front and rear upper Gantry covers are open and the rear Gantry covers are off.
 The scan frame should be pinned at the 12 o’clock position. Refer to Figure 46.
 System power is off at the wall box.
Prepare Gantry and Patient Support for Installation of Tube and Heat Exchanger

WARNING
MAKE NO ATTEMPT TO REMOVE THE HIGH VOLTAGE FEDERAL CONNECTORS
FROM THE X–RAY TUBE. THEY ARE PERMANENTLY ATTACHED AND STAY
WITH THE TUBE. REMOVING THESE CONNECTORS WILL CAUSE SERIOUS
DAMAGE AND/OR DESTRUCTION OF THE TUBE.

1. Assemble the hoist and secure it to the Patient Support couch top. Screw the knob bolts in securely and make sure the Clamp Base
seats firmly in position on the Patient Support. See Figure 47.
PIN LOCATION

X–RAY TUBE

CAUTION!

ROTATE
CCW ONLY!

FIGURE 46 SCAN FRAME PINNED WITH TUBE AT 12 O’CLOCK

Philips Medical Systems. Confidential and Proprietary information. Refer to Title Page.
2. Place a protective cover on the Patent Support (such as a towel or several layers of a sheet).
3. Remove the four Cradle Locking Hex Head Bolts enough to slide Mounting Rails against Cradle and Tube Shelf. Install the Tray Table
Slide to the Tube Shelf. Refer to Figure 48.
4. Remove the Cradle–locking Hex Head Bolts and Washers. Refer to Figure 49. (This figure shows the tube in its installed position.)

COVER PATIENT SUPPORT

TOP FOR PROTECTION

PATIENT
SUPPORT

HOIST
ASSEMBLY

KNOB
BOLTS
CLAMP BASE

C0827

FIGURE 47 HOIST ASSEMBLY

Philips Medical Systems. Confidential and Proprietary information. Refer to Title Page.
 SECURE MOUNTING TRAY TO
SHELF

TUBE SHELF

TUBE MOUNTING TRAY

FIGURE 48 XRAY TUBE MOUNTING TRAY ON TUBE SHELF

Philips Medical Systems. Confidential and Proprietary information. Refer to Title Page.
 7” TUBE

TUBE SHELF

PIVOT CRADLE
BLOCK

TUBE SHELF
CRADLE–LOCKING
HEX HEAD BOLTS
(4)
AXIAL ALIGNMENT
BLOCK MOUNTING
SCREWS (2)

AXIAL
ALIGNMENT
BLOCK

FIGURE 49 TUBE MOUNTED ON SHELF

Philips Medical Systems. Confidential and Proprietary information. Refer to Title Page.
 NOTE
Recheck the mounting tray to ensure it is properly and securely installed.

5. Loosen one of the two Axial Alignment Block Mounting Socket Head Capscrews and remove the other. Let the Block swing down to
allow removal of the X–Ray Tube Cradle. Refer to Figure 50.

NOTE
This method minimizes the need for axial adjustment of the X–Ray Tube if the Axial Piv-
ot block is not loosened. However, later, care must be exercised not to damage the Pa-
tient Support with the protruding Axial Pivot block. Place a protective cover on the Car-
bon Top before setting the Tube and Cradle on it.

6. Install the XSC support rods into the scan frame so they can support the Heat Exchanger chassis.
Move Xray Tube Onto Patient Support

NOTE
The Couch Top must have a protective cover to prevent damage by the Axial Alignment
Pivot Block attached to the tube cradle.

7. Place box with X–Ray Tube on left side of Patient Support. Open shipping container and remove packaging material.

WARNING
LIFTING HAZARD. THE HEAT EXCHANGER WEIGHS 45 LBS (20.5 KG) USE
CAUTION WHEN HANDLING THIS ITEM. FAILURE TO COMPLY CAN RESULT IN
EQUIPMENT DAMAGE AND/OR SERIOUS INJURY TO PERSONNEL.

8. Lift heat exchanger from container and place it on floor near front of Gantry.

Philips Medical Systems. Confidential and Proprietary information. Refer to Title Page.
 WARNING
LIFTING HAZARD. THE X–RAY TUBE WEIGHS 83 LBS (37.7KG) IN THE CRADLE.
USE EXTREME CAUTION WHEN HANDLING THIS ITEM. FAILURE TO COMPLY
MAY RESULT IN SEVER DAMAGE TO THE EQUIPMENT AND/OR INJURY TO
PERSONNEL.

9. Place Lifting Straps through eyelets of Tube. Lift the X–Ray Tube from the shipping container and set it on the Patient Support with
its emission port up.
10. With the X–Ray Tube Shutter facing upwards, remove protective covering. Check for the plastic covering over Shutter opening and
check for dirt/dust. Remove any debris found on the plastic. DO NOT REMOVE THE PLASTIC !

Philips Medical Systems. Confidential and Proprietary information. Refer to Title Page.
BOLTS GO BOLT HERE
THROUGH CRADLE ANODE SIDE
ASSEMBLY AND NOTE HOW CRADLE HOLES
INTO TUBE HERE DOWEL PINS HERE ALIGN WITH TUBE HOLES

BOLT HERE

BOLTS HERE

FIGURE 50 CRADLE ASSEMBLY

Philips Medical Systems. Confidential and Proprietary information. Refer to Title Page.
11. Attach Cradle Assembly to Xray Tube. Follow illustration in Figure 50 for proper installation. Do not tighten Hex Head Bolts until Cradle
End Plate is firmly seated on Tube and Base Plate Alignment Pins.

D Torque Mounting Hex Head and Socket Head Screws to 15 ft–lbs.

12. Wipe off the X–Ray Tube with cloth and check for container–debris.
13. (If possible) Rotate the X–Ray tube so that the tube cradle side faces down and the oil hoses face left on the Patient support.
14. Remove the lifting straps from the eyelets and reposition as follows:
a. Reposition one strap through one eyelet, under the X–ray tube and up the other side through the other eyelet.
b. Route second strap through one cradle hole, under the x–ray tube and through hole on opposite side. Refer to Figure 51.
FIGURE NOTE: Figure 51 shows the tube on the cradle, but you route the straps in the same manner while the tube is on the Patient
Support couch top.

Philips Medical Systems. Confidential and Proprietary information. Refer to Title Page.
 ROUTE
STRAP ANODE
THROUGH
EYELETS ROUTE
STRAP
THROUGH
CRADLE
CATHODE HOLES

UNDERNEATH
TUBE

FIGURE 51 LIFTING STRAP ROUTING

MOUNTING TRAY

Philips Medical Systems. Confidential and Proprietary information. Refer to Title Page.
INSTALL TUBE INTO GANTRY

WARNING
CRUSH HAZARD. USE EXTREME CAUTION WHEN MOVING OR HANDLING OR IN
GENERAL VICINITY OF X–RAY TUBE. SEE TUBE WEIGHTS IN THE TABLE AT
FRONT OF THIS SECTION. FAILURE TO COMPLY CAN RESULT IN DAMAGE TO
THE SCANNER OR X–RAY TUBE AND CAN RESULT IN SERIOUS INJURY OR
DEATH TO PERSONNEL.

15. Hoist the Xray Tube to the Guide Rails. Push Tube onto Rails until back of Cradle Assembly is flush with front of Tube Shelf.

WARNING
USE EXTREME CAUTION AND VERIFY THAT THE X–RAY TUBE IS FULLY
SUPPORTED BY THE MOUNTING RAILS BEFORE REMOVING THE LIFTING
STRAPS. FAILURE TO COMPLY MAY RESULT IN EQUIPMENT DAMAGE AND/OR
SERIOUS INJURY TO PERSONNEL.

16. Remove Lifting Straps from around Xray Tube and move the Hoist Assembly out of the way.
17. Ensure that all cables are in the clear and that none will be pinched as you slide the tube into the cradle. Push the Xray Tube all the
way back onto the Tube Shelf.
18. Replace the Cradle Locking Bolts and fasten the Cradle down enough to relieve pressure from the Mounting Rails.

Philips Medical Systems. Confidential and Proprietary information. Refer to Title Page.
19. Remove Mounting Rails and secure Axial Alignment Block in its original position with the Socket Head Capscrew removed earlier.
a. Apply Loc–Tite to Alignment Block Screws and tighten to hand–tight.
b. Tighten Cradle hardware to 15 ft–lbs.

WARNING
LIFTING AND CRUSH HAZARD. THE HEAT EXCHANGER WEIGHS 45 LBS. USE
CAUTION WHEN HANDLING THIS ITEM. FAILURE TO COMPLY MAY RESULT IN
EQUIPMENT DAMAGE AND/OR SERIOUS INJURY TO PERSONNEL.

INSTALL HEAT EXCHANGER INTO GANTRY

20. Lift the Heat Exchanger on XSC+ standoffs and push it back into position. Place the Cables behind the Heat Exchanger.

NOTE
Ensure the Cables rest on top the dogbone counterweights and that the cable–protect-
ing rubber grommet is in place on top of the right heat exchanger mounting bracket.

21. Secure the Heat Exchanger to the scan frame. Refer to Figure 52.
22. Secure Oil Hoses with Hose Clamps. DO NOT OVERTIGHTEN HEX NUTS.
23. Connect Quick Disconnects J4 (Rotor Cable), J5 (Heat Exchanger Power Cable), and J6 (Thermal Switch Cable).

Philips Medical Systems. Confidential and Proprietary information. Refer to Title Page.
 BOLT HERE
BOLT HERE

FIGURE 52 HEAT EXCHANGER MOUNTING

24. Install the Anode and Cathode High Voltage Federal Connectors. Refer to the Cable Cleaning and Installation procedure in the Repair
manual.
25. VERIFY ALL CABLES AND HOSES ARE PROPERLY SECURED!
26. Remove the protective rubber strip over the detectors and secure it in the bottom of the Gantry. Remove the scan fame locking pin.
27. Rotate the Scan Frame counterclockwise by hand while checking for loose Cables. Also check for clearance over the entire range
of travel between the Rotating Frame Cables and the Stationary Frame.
28. Align the X–Ray Tube. Refer to the Xray Tube Mechanical Alignment procedure in the MANEXP section of the Diagnostic Gui manual.

CAUTION
ROTATE THE SCAN FRAME COUNTERCLOCKWISE ONLY. CLOCKWISE ROTA-
TION OF THE SCAN FRAME MAY CAUSE DAMAGE TO THE SLIP RING BRUSHES.

End of X–ray tube installation section. Continue to next page.

Philips Medical Systems. Confidential and Proprietary information. Refer to Title Page.
OPERATOR DISPLAY CONSOLE & ACQIMAGE CABINET HARDWARE INSTALLATION
The AcQImage Recon Cabinet (referred to as the AcQImage Cabinet) and Display Tower will generally be placed at the user’s desired
location by Service personnel. Considerations have already been taken into account regarding cable lengths from Gantry to AcQImage
Cabinet and AcQImage Cabinet to Display Tower. Refer to the installation arrangement provided by Site Planning for cable routing, ducting
and unit locations. Use the following procedure to place the two units at their desired locations.

NOTE
This procedure documents installation using the optional table (P/N 83847). The cus-
tomer may elect to locate the table top display console on their own shelf or table, there-
fore a customized installation may vary slightly from the following procedure.

At this time:
 The AcQImage Cabinet should already be located. See: POSITION ACQIMAGE & DISPLAY TOWERS.
1. The AcQImage Cabinet may be co–located close to the display components (similar to Figure 53) or in the Gantry room (or elsewhere)
as far as 50 feet away from the Display Tower. This consideration should have been decided when choosing the cable lengths: Display
Tower to AcQImage Cabinet – 10 or 25 ft., AcQImage Cabinet to Gantry – 10 or 50 ft. cable sets. Refer to Table 1 for details.
2. Each portion of the entire system cabling, Operator Console, Display Tower to AcQImage Cabinet and AcQImage Cabinet to Gantry
is detailed in Figure 57, Figure 58 and Figure 59 respectively.
3. Remote access to the system is accomplished via the Site Manager..
4. After the two cabinets are in place, press down on the wheel locks to keep them from rolling. (Do not do this at this time.)
5. Locate the table and unpack the optional chair and roll to its location. Assemble the operator table, part number 83847, which is 54”
wide by 30” deep in the Scan Control room, using the instructions that came with the table. The tools required should be included in
a standard FSE toolkit.
6. Whether or not the optional table and chair are being used, the callouts in Figure 53 should be followed during installation.

WARNING
SHOCK HAZARD. ENSURE THAT THE DISPLAY CABINET KEYSWITCH IS
TURNED OFF AS WELL AS THE CIRCUIT BREAKERS ON THE ACQIMAGE AND
DISPLAY CABINETS. FAILURE TO COMPLY MAY RESULT IN SERIOUS INJURY
OR DEATH.

Philips Medical Systems. Confidential and Proprietary information. Refer to Title Page.
 ALLOW AT LEAST 2” OF CLEARANCE FOR
ALLOW AT LEAST 6” OF CABLES AND VENTILATION
CLEARANCE FOR
CABLES AND VENTILA-
TION
ALLOW AT LEAST 2” VEN-
TILATION ON EACH SIDE
ALLOW AT LEAST 5” OF REAR CLEARANCE
FOR MONITOR HANGOVER AND CABLE
CLEARANCE.

THRU HOLES FOR THE FOUR

CABLES THAT INTERCONNECT
FROM TABLE TOP PERIPHER-
ACQIMAGE
ALS TO THE REAR OF THE DIS-
CABINET
PLAY TOWER.

DISPLAY ALLOW AT LEAST 2”

TOWER VENTILATION ON
EACH SIDE

OPTIONAL CHAIR (P/N 83848.)

OPTIONAL TABLE (P/N 83847) IS 54”

WIDE AND 30” DEEP. NOMINAL
FLOOR TO TABLE TOP (BOT-
NOTE: THE DISPLAY TOWER MAY BE LOCATED
TOM)SURFACE DIMENSION IS
AS SHOWN ON EITHER SIDE UNDERNEATH THE
28.75”
TABLE OR IMMEDIATELY TO THE LEFT OR RIGHT C2209A
(OUTBOARD) OF THE TABLE .

DISPLAY TOWER WILL FIT UNDER THE OPTIONAL TABLE. ACQI-

MAGE CABINET WILL NOT.

FIGURE 53 ACQIMAGE CABINET and DISPLAY CONSOLE (optional table and chair)

Philips Medical Systems. Confidential and Proprietary information. Refer to Title Page.
 ULTRASPARC
J2102 AXT ENGINE
DISPLAY L11032 VIDEO
MONITOR
J2301 ETHERNET
KEYBOARD/
J0902
MOUSE
J1281 J1280

83857 J1252 100 BASE T4

ETHERNET
J1291

MOUSE

KEYBOARD

L11056
INTERCOM
J1273
L11063 INTERCOM

J1195 L11039 SYSTEM POWER

CONTROLLER
L11041 J1211
J1194

POWER TRAY
AcQImage CABINET
J1201 PERIPHERAL
POWER
J1200 SUPPLY
J1101 L11040

FIGURE 54 CABLE CONFIGURATION – OPERATOR CONSOLE

Philips Medical Systems. Confidential and Proprietary information. Refer to Title Page.
 J1252 Display J1200
Tower
TB12
J1211 Left Column
L11039 100 BASE T4 ETHERNET

L11040 P417
TB13
L7272 – 6 cond. w/ shield
L11041 SIGNAL

PATIENT SUPPORT
GANTRY

L7161 – 50 cond. Ribbon

P402

AcQImage
J108
Cabinet

J1101 J103

J101
J1194
#11 on J2 Card File Backplane
J1195 Backplane Gantry Data (ribbon) L11036

J1193 Gantry Signal L11038 (opcon I/O)

J1100
Gantry Power L11037

FIGURE 55 SYSTEM INTERCONNECT DIAGRAM

Philips Medical Systems. Confidential and Proprietary information. Refer to Title Page.
 NEED NEW DISPLAY TOWER REAR VIEW.
UPPER REAR COVER NEEDS TO BE RE-
MOVED.

(OPERATOR DISPLAY CONSOLE)

ACQIMAGE CABINET

DISPLAY TOWER

GANTRY

DISPLAY MONITOR

KEYBOARD
MOUSE

Û
CT0128
Û
ÛÛÛ
ÛÛÛ
INTERCOM

FOR ADDITIONAL CONFIGURATION DRAWINGS, SEE Figure 38, Figure 39 and Figure 54.

ACQIMAGE CABINET TO GANTRY. DISPLAY TOWER TO ACQIMAGE CABI- OPERATOR CONSOLE. REFER
REFER TO FIGURE 59 FOR DETAIL NET. REFER TO FIGURE 58 FOR DETAIL. TO FIGURE 57 FOR DETAIL.

FIGURE 56 CABLING FOR ACQIMAGE, DISPLAY CABINETS, OPERATOR CONSOLE & GANTRY

Philips Medical Systems. Confidential and Proprietary information. Refer to Title Page.
OPERATOR CONSOLE
1. Ensure all power has been removed from the system. Move the Display Tower to a clear position to permit cable installation. Use
Figure 57 and Table 1 for reference to this text.

WARNING
ELECTRIC SHOCK HAZARD. USE EXTREME CAUTION WHEN WORKING INSIDE
THE OPERATOR CONSOLE WITH THE COVERS OPEN. 120 VAC, +/–12 VDC, 5
VDC AND 3.3 VDC ARE EXPOSED. FAILURE TO COMPLY CAN RESULT IN
SERIOUS INJURY OR DEATH.

2. Remove the covers and make a visual inspection of the boards and connectors, verifying they are secure and properly seated. Cover
removal instructions can be found in the AcQImage Cabinet Covers Removal/Replace procedure in the Repair Manual.
3. Attach all of the cabling according to the diagram in Figure 57 and Table 1. Refer to the following note before running the cables.

NOTE
Display Tower: The cables (312690, L11039, 83857, recon cable, intercom cable)
must be routed inside the Display Tower. Remove the upper rear panel by removing
the six screws. Make sure the cables run through and are secured by the hook and loop
strain relief on the AC Chassis. Refer to Figure 57 and Figure 58.

NOTE
DO NOT bend the ethernet cables sharply. DO NOT place the ethernet cables near the
electronics of the system components.

Philips Medical Systems. Confidential and Proprietary information. Refer to Title Page.
 DISPLAY TOWER – REAR DETAIL J1281 REAR OF MONITOR DETAIL

SWITCHES SHOULD BE IN THE VIDEO

ÔÔ
75 OHM POSITION (IN)

INTERCOM
ÔÔ VGA
MARKINGS / WIRE COLORS:

ÓÓÓ
Ó
H/HV – BLACK
B – BLUE
G – GREEN

NETWORK ÓÓ R – RED

CABLE

DISPLAY MONITOR

KEYBOARD
MOUSE
(PLUG INTO
REAR
MIDDLE OF
KEYBOARD)

KEYBOARD
EXTENSION
J1201 CABLE
L11056

83857
312690

FIGURE 57 OPERATOR CONSOLE CABLING DETAIL

Philips Medical Systems. Confidential and Proprietary information. Refer to Title Page.
DISPLAY TOWER TO ACQIMAGE CABINET
1. Ensure all power has been removed from the system! Move the AcQImage Cabinet as required to a clear location to permit cable
installation. Use Figure 58 and Table 1 for reference to this text.

WARNING
ELECTRIC SHOCK HAZARD. USE EXTREME CAUTION WHEN WORKING INSIDE
THE DISPLAY TOWER AND ACQIMAGE CABINET WITH THE COVERS OPEN. 120
VAC, +/–12 VDC, 5 VDC AND 3.3 VDC ARE EXPOSED. FAILURE TO COMPLY CAN
RESULT IN SERIOUS INJURY OR DEATH.

2. Cable lengths and routing have been established per site planning instructions. If not, then route the cables as necessary to accomplish
an orderly, safe installation. Refer to Figure 58 and table 1.

NOTE
Display Tower: The cables (312690, L11039, 83857, L11041, intercom cable) must be
routed inside the Display Tower. Remove the upper rear panel by removing the six
screws. Make sure the cables run through and are secured by the hook and loop strain
relief on the AC Chassis. Refer to Figure 57 and Figure 58.

NOTE
DO NOT bend the ethernet cables sharply. DO NOT place the ethernet cables near the
electronics of the system components.

3. Attach the Display Signal cable (P/N L11041) to J1194 on the rear of the AcQImage Cabinet. Attach the other end to the Display Cabinet
J1211.
4. Attach the AcQImage Power cable (P/N L11040) to J1101 on the Rear of the AcQImage Cabinet. Attach the other end to the Display
Tower J1200.
5. Remove the small rear panel on the Display Tower by removing the two screws.

Philips Medical Systems. Confidential and Proprietary information. Refer to Title Page.
6. Run the 100 Base T4 Ethernet cable (P/N L11039) through the hole in the upper left of the rear cover to J1195 which is INSIDE the
AcQImage cabinet (on a short adapter on the 100mb board.) Attach the other end to the Display Tower Ethernet port (J1252) on the
Sparc motherboard as seen in Figure 58.

NOTE
The network between the AcQImage and Display Cabinets is a private network for their
intercommunication. The high–speed data link cable (P/N L11039) is a specially
constructed 100MB/sec twisted pair cable to be used ONLY as a connection between
the two units. Do not use this cable for standard ethernet hook–ups or substitute it for
a standard ethernet cable.

7. Replace the covers on the Display tower and roll into its final position. Lock the wheels. Refer to Figure 53 for considerations.
8. Proceed to the AcQImage Cabinet to Gantry cabling instructions.

Philips Medical Systems. Confidential and Proprietary information. Refer to Title Page.
 ACQIMAGE CABINET REAR PANEL DETAIL DISPLAY TOWER – REAR PANEL DETAIL

J1194

SPARC AXT MOTHERBOARD

HOST E–NET
J1195

NOTE:Cable
now goes
through hole in
rear panel to
short adapter
on 100MB
board
CB1100
CABLE
TIES

J1101

J1200

L11040

L11039 L11041

FIGURE 58 DISPLAY TOWER TO ACQIMAGE TOWER CABLING DETAIL

Philips Medical Systems. Confidential and Proprietary information. Refer to Title Page.
ACQIMAGE CABINET TO GANTRY
1. Ensure all power has been removed from the system! Move the AcQImage cabinet to a clear location to permit cable installation. Use
Figure 59 and Table 1 for reference to this text.

WARNING
ELECTRIC SHOCK HAZARD. USE EXTREME CAUTION WHEN WORKING INSIDE
THE ACQIMAGE CABINET WITH THE COVERS OPEN. 208 VAC, 120 VAC, +/–12
VDC, 5 VDC AND 3.3 VDC ARE EXPOSED. FAILURE TO COMPLY CAN RESULT IN
SERIOUS INJURY OR DEATH.

2. Remove the covers and make a visual inspection of the boards and connectors, verifying they are secure and properly seated. Cover
removal instructions can be found in the AcQImage Cabinet Covers Removal/Replace procedure in the Repair Manual.

NOTE
It is a good idea to record the numbers associated with each of the AcQImage boards.
Store this information in a safe place as you may have to refer to it at a later date.

3. Open and secure the front upper gantry panel The gantry cardfile backplane is located at the upper right, just below the cardfile.
Remove the left column cover to expose TB12.
4. Loosen the screws on the AcQImage Cabinet’s right side strain relief. Feed the ribbon cable (P/N L1036) in and attach to the #11
connector of the J2 backplane. Ensure latches are in the locked position. Tighten the strain relief to secure the cable. Details are shown
in Figure 60. Replace the rear cover. Attach the other end to J101 of the Gantry cardfile backplane.
5. Attach the Gantry Signal cable (P/N L11038) to J1193 on the rear of the AcQImage Cabinet. Attach the other end to J103 of the Gantry
cardfile backplane.
6. Plug in the Gantry Power cable (P/N L11037) into J1100 on the rear of the AcQImage Cabinet. Attach the other end to TB12 of the
left Gantry column. Note the proper terminal strip connections as shown in Figure 59.
7. Replace covers on the AcQImage Cabinet and roll into its final position. Lock the wheels. Refer to Figure 53 for placement
considerations.
8. With no power applied to the system from the wall breaker, ensure that the Display Tower keyswitch is turned OFF and the circuit
breakers (CB1100 – AcQImage, CB1200 – Display) on both units are ON. Hardware installation of the Operator Console and
AcQImage Cabinet is now complete!

Philips Medical Systems. Confidential and Proprietary information. Refer to Title Page.
 GANTRY CARDFILE
BACKPLANE (FRONT) GANTRY LEFT COLUMN ACQIMAGE CABINET REAR PANEL DETAIL
L11036
TO RIBBON CABLE
J1193 CONNECTOR #11 ON

WHITE
GREEN
J2 BACKPLANE

BLACK
RED
INSIDE ACQIMAGE
CABINET (64 PIN).

REFER TO FIGURE 60
FOR DETAIL.

TB12

CB1100
L11037

J101

(40 PIN)

J103 J1100

L11038

FIGURE 59 ACQIMAGE CABINET TO GANTRY CABLING DETAIL

Philips Medical Systems. Confidential and Proprietary information. Refer to Title Page.
#11 CONNECTOR
ON J2 (TO
GANTRY CARDFILE
BACKPLANE, J101)

LATCHES ON
BACKPLANE RE-
TAIN CABLE CON-
NECTOR

ACQIMAGE TOWER

FIGURE 60 L11036 GANTRY DATA CABLING AND STRAIN RELIEF DETAIL

Philips Medical Systems. Confidential and Proprietary information. Refer to Title Page.
 TABLE 1 ACQIMAGE TOWER AND DISPLAY CABINET CABLING CONFIGURATION
Operator Console Cabling: (Figure 57)
CABLE CABLE CABLE FROM LOCATION AND CONN. TO LOCATION AND CONN
NUMBER LENGTH DESCRIPTION
83857 8 FT. Keyboard and Keyboard Display Tower, SUN Motherboard,
Extension Cable J____
312690 10 FT. Monitor Video Cable Display Monitor, J1280 Display Tower, SUN Motherboard,
J____
L11056 10 FT. Monitor Power Back of display Monitor, J1281 Display Tower, J1201
L11063 12 FT. Op intercom connect Rear I/O Display Tower, J1273 Operator Intercom
Display Tower to AcQImage Cabinet: (Figure 58) **
L11039 50 FT. Ethernet Cable –100 AcQImage Cabinet, J1195 Display Tower, SUN Motherboard,
Base T4 J____
L11040 50 FT. Power Cable AcQImage Cabinet, J1101 Display Cabinet, J1200
L11041 50 FT. Display Signal Cable AcQImage Cabinet, J1194, Display Cabinet, J1211
(P1194 end)
AcQImage Cabinet to Gantry: (Figure 59) *
L11036 50 FT. Gantry Data Ribbon Gantry Backplane, J101 AcQImage Cabinet Backplane, #11
on J2
L11037 50 FT. Gantry Power Cable Gantry Left Column, TB12 AcQImage Cabinet, J1100
L11038 50 FT. Gantry Signal Cable Gantry Backplane, J103 AcQImage Cabinet, J1193, (Use
P1193 end)
** – The “–A” suffix on L11039, L11040 and L11041 indicates a 10 ft. length.
* – The “–A” suffix on L11036, L11037 and L11038 indicates a 25 ft. length.

System component part numbers:

Description Part number Description Part Number
AcQImage Cabinet 178220 Op. Intercom XXXX
Display TOWER 178927 Keyboard xxxxx
Mouse xxxxxx Mouse Pad xxxx
Display Monitor xxxxx

Philips Medical Systems. Confidential and Proprietary information. Refer to Title Page.
SOFTWARE INSTALLATION AND CONFIGURATION
The system is shipped with operating software installed on the Display Tower disk drive 0. New software will be loadable on the system
via factory releases on CD–ROM disk(s). A CD–ROM drive is standard on all Display Towers for this procedure. New or replacement disk
drives will be initialized via utility programs located on a CD–ROM disk.
The system is shipped with standard configuration parameters such as hospital name, system serial numbers, default network
configuration, etc. for stand–alone scanner operation already loaded.
Each installation will be unique. However, in light of the fact that many options are attached via ethernet network connection. Additional
site specific configuration information will likely need to be entered at installation.
IF 1.0 SOFTWARE MUST BE INSTALLED, SEE THE ACQSIM CT 1.0 SOFTWARE INSTALLATION INSTRUCTIONS.

NOTE
Refer to the Peripherals Configuration manual for disk drive initialization, installation
and software installation.

PERIPHERALS INSTALLATION AND CONFIGURATION

The Display Tower and AcQImage Cabinets are shipped from the factory with standard and optional peripherals such as disk, tape, optical
and CD–ROM installed and configured.
The Display Tower peripherals are connected to the Sparc host computer via a SCSI–2 bus cable located within the tower. The volume
data disks in the AcQImage Cabinet are connected to the GAM board via a separate internal Fast–Wide SCSI bus cable.
If new options need to be added or repair/replacement is required, it will be necessary to install and configure in the field.

NOTE
Refer to the Peripherals Configuration manual for mechanical details on disk drive re-
placement/installation and also for information on SCSI assignments and jumper set-
tings.

Philips Medical Systems. Confidential and Proprietary information. Refer to Title Page.
DISPLAY MONITOR INSTALLATION SETUP

NOTE
The Display Monitor may need to be adjusted to local ambient lighting conditions and
customer preference. Refer to the Display Monitor Calibration section of the Mechani-
cal Calibration Manual and the Operator’s Manual for instructions on monitor setup and
adjustment.

ACQIMAGE BOARD INFORMATION

IMPORTANT NOTE
The information on the front of the AcQImage boards is very important. **Write down
the IP address, netmask, router Ethernet address and node name of each board
and affix somwhere safe (inside of AcQImage Cabinet) This information is contained
within the Configure | Network/Camera option in the Service Application. If this informa-
tion is lost, the only place to restore it will be your hardcopy record.

NETWORK CONFIGURATION

NOTE
The AcQSim CT must be configured (IP addresses, network camera, etc.) Refer to the

CONFIGURE chapter of the Service Application manual.

LI PLUS FILM SERVER INSTALLATION

NOTE
Your specific configuration may require the installation of the LI Plus Film Server. If so,
refer to the LI PLUS manual (in Ultra Z peripherals) for installation/configuration details.

(continue to the next page for more installation instructions).

Philips Medical Systems. Confidential and Proprietary information. Refer to Title Page.
CREATE A SITE TAPE

You should create a site tape at this time. This is done via the Main Startup Menu. Click in the lower left corner and type the word “site”
(lower case) and press <CR>. After the Save Site / Restore Site menu appears, push the tape in, wait for the green light to stop flashing
and select “1” from the menu to Save Site. The system will eject the tape and reboot the system when finished. (Restore Site is done in
a similar fashion.)

Clinical Scanning

Service

Click here with the

mouse, then type site
and press <CR>.

FIGURE 61 Starting the Save Site / Restore Site Menu

ALIGN LASERS

NOTE
Laser Alignment is performed in the Mechanical Calibration manual.

Philips Medical Systems. Confidential and Proprietary information. Refer to Title Page.
AUTOVOICE CONFIGURATION

NOTE
Refer to the Operator’s Manual for the Autovoice Configuration, recording and playback
instructions. Autovoice Diagnostics are part of the Diagnostic GUI.

INTERCOM INSTALLATION SETUP

NOTE
Refer to the Operator’s Manual for instructions on the Intercom setup and operation.

Philips Medical Systems. Confidential and Proprietary information. Refer to Title Page.
ACQSIM CT 1.0 SOFTWARE INSTALLATION INSTRUCTIONS
The following kit instructions should be used when installing 1.0 software onto an AcQSim CT system.

NOTE
This procedure in intended for the first series of software installations on the AcQSim
CT and is not intended to be part of a software upgrade kit.

1. Make a Site tape immediately before installation. If in the Console or Service Application, select Shutdown Console from the General
Utilities button. When the main menu appears, click in the lower left corner of the Main Startup menu and type the word “site” (lower
case) and press <CR>.
2. After the Save Site / Restore Site menu appears, push the tape in, wait for the green light to stop blinking and select “1” to Save Site.
The system will eject the tape when finished.
3. Exit the Save Site Utility. When the Shutdown button becomes available, press it and wait for the system to shut down.
4. Open the CD–ROM drive and insert CD #1. Close the drive.
5. When the ok prompt appears, type boot cdrom and press <CR>. After a few minutes, the password prompt will appear. Type picker
and press <CR>.
6. The system then checks the disk configuration and prompts you with:
Enter the type of system installation:

1. RDS (Note: “RDS” refers to an Ultra Z Diagnostic Workstation, UDW)

2. Scanner Console

q. quit
7. Select option “2,” Scanner Console from the menu. You will see the following menu.
Enter a Console Installation option:

1. Install the OS and Application Software

2. Configure a Replaced Disk(s)
3. Upgrade Application Software Only

q. quit
8. Select option “1,” Install the OS and Application Software from the menu. Answer “y” to the next question. The following will appear:

Philips Medical Systems. Confidential and Proprietary information. Refer to Title Page.
Main Menu Option #1 – Reformat and Configure entire system:
Enter IP Address [default xxx.xxx.xx.xx]:
Enter Netmask [default 255.255.255.0]:
Enter Router [default xxx.xx.xx.xx]:
Enter Nodename [default consolexxxx]:
9. Press <CR> to accept the default values. Make sure the Netmask number is 255.255.255.0. After the information is entered, the system
will display your choices as you entered them:
IP Address:
Netmask:
Router:
Nodename:

10. After the “Ready to run the installation. Are you satisfied? (y/n) [n]?” prompt appears:
If you answer NO to “satisfied,” the installation will cancel and take you back to the first sub–menu where you can quit the installation
program, or continue and adjust the network information.

If installation information is correct, choose “y” to “satisfied.”

11. The software will now begin installing from the first CD. This will take about 20 minutes. When the “serial/parallel” change menu
appears, choose “q” and press <CR>. The following menu will appear:
1. Install SCANNER Console Application Software
2. Eject the CD.

Select option “2,” Eject the CD. Remove the first CD and put the second CD in, then close the drive door.

12. Select option “1,” to continue with the installation. You will be prompted with the “satisfied” question again. Select “y” and the system
will continue with the software installation. After the installation is complete, a menu will appear:
1. View the installation error log [/cd_errlog]
2. Eject the CD (it’s OK to eject it now)
3. Continue booting the machine

Choice:

NOTE
After the installation has completed, additional messages may be displayed on the
screen, pushing the above menu out of view. Simply press <CR> to see it again.

Philips Medical Systems. Confidential and Proprietary information. Refer to Title Page.
13. View the error log by choosing option 1. There should not be any errors in the error log at this time. After viewing, the menu will be
displayed again. Select option 2 to eject the CD. Remove the CD and close the drive door. Then select option 3 to continue booting
to the application software.
14. Perform a Restore Site.

15. After the 1.0 software installation is done and the system has booted, start the Diagnostic GUI. (To start Diag GUI: Go to General
Utilities, select Shutdown Console to get to the Startup men. Click on the lower left hand corner, type PICKER and press <CR>.)

Flash Burner
System name: bay00
Board name: 1

Quit Continue

16. Run the Flash Burner from the Diag GUI. The flash burner is a utility for transferring executable code from a directory on the SPARC
disk to the Flash of the CP, AP, BP or GAM.

17. Enter the board number (1 for CP).

18. An Xterm will be displayed. Select option 1.) Transfer OS. When completed, the board will reboot.

19. Restart the the Flash burner from the GUI again on the same board. Then select option 2.) Transfer Diags.

20. When completed, the board will reboot. Now one board is done. Repeat this process on the remaining three boards. Board numbers
are: 2 for GAM, 3 for DSP/AP, 4 for BP. You can view the date of the Flash OS via a Telnet session. At the pSH+> prompt, type romver
and press <CR>.

21. This completes the 1.0 scanner software portion of the upgrade. After the initialization is complete, run a pilot, axial and spiral scan
to further ensure system functionality. This completes the 1.0 installation. Reboot the system.

Philips Medical Systems. Confidential and Proprietary information. Refer to Title Page.
POWER UP / DOWN PROCEDURE
This section describes the system start–up/shutdown procedures. Power–UP is accomplished via the keyswitch on the Display Tower.
Power DOWN of the entire system is accomplished via the General Utilities GUI. This is accessed via the “Service” option from the opening
bootup GUI. This procedure covers the Service Application mode. Scanning Application mode procedure is in the OP manual.

SYSTEM POWER UP
1. Make sure the Gantry keyswitch is in the normal position. Turn the Display Tower keyswitch to the ON position. After the system
boots, you will be prompted with the startup application display (or “4 Button Screen.”) You have 4 boot options. Refer to Figure 62.:
A.) Select Clinical Scanning (or do nothing) and the system will start and connect to the acquisition server. The acquisition server will
then power up the AcQImage Cabinet, and if that is done successfully, the acquisition server will power up the gantry and X–ray system.
B.) Select the Service Application option (within 15 seconds) by clicking on the Service button with the mouse pointer.
C.) Reboot the system. D. ) Start the Diagnostic GUI (within 15 seconds) by clicking once in the bottom left corner, then entering
PICKER <CR>. (All caps). The AcQImage board LEDs will display a power up test sequence. Refer to the LED Interpretations.

Clinical Scanning

Service

FOR DIAG GUI:

Click here with the mouse, then
type PICKER and press <CR>.

FIGURE 62 4 BUTTON SCREEN

Philips Medical Systems. Confidential and Proprietary information. Refer to Title Page.
PREPARE THE SYSTEM FOR USE (X–Ray Tube Warmup)
2. The X–Ray system needs to be properly warmed up prior to executing a scan procedure. X–Ray System Warmup must be completed
at the start of every scan day or when the tube heat is below 6%. Tube heat is displayed in the Tube Warmup window.
3. To perform a tube warm–up, click on the Tube Warm Up button with the mouse pointer. Refer to Figure 62. This will initiate the warm–up
sequence and X–RAYS WILL BE EMITTED. The tube warm–up status is displayed is displayed in the Tube Warmup Window. Refer
to Figure 63.

Progress

Status Scan Status

Tube : %
Start Stop
Scan Scan kv :

mA :
TubeHeat
Time :
0%
Tilt :+

Couch :

SPOV :

FIGURE 63 TUBE WARM–UP STATUS WINDOW

Philips Medical Systems. Confidential and Proprietary information. Refer to Title Page.
SYSTEM POWER DOWN
1. From the 4 Button Screen (Figure 62) click on SHUTDOWN with the mouse pointer.

CAUTION
DO NOT POWER DOWN THE SYSTEM WITH THE TUBE HEAT AT OR ABOVE 35%.
FAILURE TO COMPLY MAY RESULT IN SHORTENED TUBE LIFE AND/OR ERRATIC
TUBE BEHAVIOR.

System shutdown ensures that all images on disk are properly closed, all image maintenance functions properly terminated, the gantry
parked, the X–Ray system sufficiently cooled and all films printed.
There are three shutdown selections: Shutdown Gantry, Shutdown Console, Shutdown System and Switch to Console as seen in Figure 64.
SHUTDOWN

Shutdown System...

Shutdown Console...

Start Gantry

Switch to Console...

FIGURE 64 SHUTDOWN SCREEN

Shutdown Gantry: This option should be used, if possible, in place of the e–stop switches. An orderly shutdown of the gantry will be
performed. Display Tower and/or AcQImage Cabinet operation may continue after selected. To cancel shutdown,
click the Abort button.

Philips Medical Systems. Confidential and Proprietary information. Refer to Title Page.
Shutdown System: Performs an orderly shutdown of the entire scanner system. To cancel shutdown, click the Abort button.
Shutdown Console: This option shuts down only the console units. An orderly shutdown of the image archiver, filming and file system
will be done.
Start Gantry: Toggles Start/Shutdown Gantry depending on status of Gantry power.
Switch to Console: Changes the GUI to the Console Application (Operator) screen.

WARNING
THE GUI SHUTDOWN REMOVES POWER FROM THE SYSTEM, BUT NOT AT THE
INCOMING POWER LINES. DANGEROUS VOLTAGES ARE EXPOSED WHEN THE
GANTRY COVERS ARE REMOVED. BEFORE SERVICING EQUIPMENT, REMOVE
POWER FROM THE WALL BOX. FAILURE TO COMPLY CAN CAUSE SERIOUS
INJURY OR DEATH TO PERSONNEL.

2. When prompted via a dialog box, turn the Display Tower keyswitch to the OFF position.
3. On the AcQImage Cabinet and Display Tower, ensure the rear breaker switch is turned off.
AcQImage Boards – Power Up Test LED Interpretations
AP, PB, GAM Board Diagnostic Flash Version 1.1.2

0 Hardware Initialization
1 CPU Version Check
2 Diagnostic Flash CRC Check
3 Operating System Flash CRC Check
4 CPU Memory Test
5 Data Cache Test
6 Unexpected Exception Test
7 IBC Test
8 NVRAM Single Location Test
9 PCI Bus Select Test
A Ethernet Loopback Test
B UART Loopback Test
C apmem for AP, pbmem for PB, gamem for GAM

C CIO Test (CP Board Diagnostic Flash Version 1.1.2)

D Synchronous Serial Chip Loopback Test (CP Board Diagnostic Flash Version 1.1.2)

Philips Medical Systems. Confidential and Proprietary information. Refer to Title Page.
SYSTEM CHECKS, CONFIGURATION AND TUBE SEASONING

GANTRY TILT CHECKS

WARNING
THE FRONT UPPER GULL WING HAS SHARP EDGES. USE EXTREME CAUTION
WHEN SERVICING EQUIPMENT WHILE UPPER GULLWING IS OPEN. FAILURE TO
COMPLY CAN RESULT IN INJURY TO PERSONNEL.

1. Remove the left rear Gantry cover.

2. Set a protractor against the Gantry scan frame. Refer to Figure Figure 65.

PROTRACTOR

FRONT

FIGURE 65 GANTRY AT ZERO DEGREES

Philips Medical Systems. Confidential and Proprietary information. Refer to Title Page.
3. Tilt the Gantry until the protractor bubble level indicates that the Gantry is at zero degrees.

NOTE
The protactor supplied in your kit may be different from the one shown here. If your pro-
tractor indicates 90o when the Gantry is at 0, use the following table to find the correct
Gantry angle.

Gantry Tilt (deg.) 0 10 20 30

Protractor Reading (deg.) 90 80 70 60
4. Observe the Tilt position readout and verify that it displays a reading of zero (0.0). If the readout does not display zero (0.0 +/– .5mm),
reference the Calibration manual and calibrate the Gantry tilt. (The Gantry tilt readout displays only to the nearest 1/2–degree: i.e.,
0.5, 1.0, 1.5, etc.)
5. Tilt the Gantry backwards until the protractor indicates that the Gantry is at –30 degrees.
6. Observe the Tilt position readout and verify that it displays a reading of –30.0. If the readout does not display –30.0 +/–.5 mm, reference
the Calibration manual and calibrate the Gantry tilt.
7. Tilt the Gantry forward until the protractor indicates that the Gantry is at +30 degrees.
8. Observe the Tilt position readout and verify that it displays a reading of +30.0. If the readout does not display +30.0 +/–.5 mm, reference
the Calibration manual and calibrate Gantry tilt.

Philips Medical Systems. Confidential and Proprietary information. Refer to Title Page.
X–RAY TUBE MECHANICAL ALIGNMENT

NOTE
For domestic shipments the x–ray tube is shipped installed; therefore, this procedure
should not be necessary at installation. If you installed the tube, you must perform this
procedure.

Introduction

This procedure explains how to mechanically align the X–ray tube so that the X–ray beam is centered on the detectors. This procedure
must be done whenever an X–ray tube is replaced/installed. You will be working with the Gantry covers open while performing this
procedure and will be initiating X–rays.

Tools Required

1. FSE tool kit

2. 3/8–inch drive socket wrench set
Materials Required

1. X–ray film – part number 97806

Philips Medical Systems. Confidential and Proprietary information. Refer to Title Page.
XRAY TUBE ALIGNMENT PROCEDURE

WARNING
SHOCK HAZARD. USE EXTREME CAUTION WHEN SERVICING THE GANTRY
WITH THE COVERS OPEN. 480 VAC, 208 VAC, 120 VAC AS WELL AS 5VDC AND
15 VDC ARE EXPOSED IN MANY LOCATIONS. FAILURE TO COMPLY CAN
RESULT IN SERIOUS INJURY OR DEATH.

1. Remove Gantry power. Refer to the Power Up/Down procedures in this manual.
2. Open and secure the upper Gantry cover. Remove the lower cover cone. Store the front cone out of the way. Do not lean the cone plastic
inner edge of the cone against a wall as this might damage it.
3. Rotate the scan frame until the X–ray tube is at the 12 o’clock position. See Figure 66.

PIN IN THIS LOCATION

FIGURE 66 ROTATING FRAME WITH TUBE PINNED AT 12 O’CLOCK

4. Loosen the fourtube cradle mounting bolts but do not remove them. Carefully turn the lateral adjustment screw until the hash mark
on the cradle lines up with the hash mark on the base plate. See Figure 67.

Philips Medical Systems. Confidential and Proprietary information. Refer to Title Page.
 LATERAL
TUBE SHELF CRADLE ADJUSTMENT SCREW

MOUNTING BOLTS ( 4 )
(2 ON OTHER SIDE )

FIGURE 67 X–RAY TUBE ALIGNMENT

5. Tighten the four (4) cradle mounting bolts, in a cross pattern, to 15 ft–lbs.

6. Apply Gantry power. Turn the Display Tower and AcQImage Cabinet ON. Check that the main scan drives are off.

7. Do a Warm–up from the Scanner Utilities selection of the User Interface.

8. Disable the scan drives. When the upper front cover is open, the cover interlock switch automatically disables the scan drives. DO
NOT DEFEAT THE INTERLOCK SWITCH.

Philips Medical Systems. Confidential and Proprietary information. Refer to Title Page.
9. Place a 4x5–inch film on the bottom of the inside of the Gantry aperture. Configure a reference marker in the orientation shown in
Figure 68, centered in the x–ray field.

FILM

BACK EDGE

GANTRY APERTURE

REFERENCE MARKER (PAPER CLIP)

POINTING TO FRONT FRONT EDGE

FIGURE 68 FILM AND REFERENCE MARKER

Philips Medical Systems. Confidential and Proprietary information. Refer to Title Page.
10. Turn scan drives on.
11. Position the X–ray tube at the 12 o’clock position (facing detector 1800).
12. Perform a stationary x–ray exposure (no scan frame motion). Refer to the new MANEXP procedure.
NOTE 1: The value for length of exposure is film speed dependent. Use an initial value of 200.

NOTE 2: The ”tube position” option lets you use the rotate motor to position the x–ray tube if the scan frame drive is enabled. This number
is the detector position where the tube will be located. Use the following table for examples:
MOVE TO DETECTOR 1800 600
..FACE DETECTOR .. 600 1800
Do Not Move Rotating –1
Frame
13. Re–position the X–ray tube at the 6 o’clock position (facing detector = 600). Be careful to keep the film stationary.
14. Perform a stationary x–ray exposure (no scan frame motion) using MANEXP .
15. Note the film orientation with the reference object, so that when the film is developed, the image can be positioned correctly to make
the centering measurements required.
16. Develop the film and inspect for a narrow, darker band superimposed on a wider, lighter band.

NOTE
The shadow of the X–ray beam on the film should show an even penumbra (fade off) on both sides to ensure mechanical
centering.

17. Measure the distance from the front edge (see Figure 69) of the narrow, darker band to the front edge of the wide, lighter band (referred
to as distance D1).
18. Measure the distance from the back edge of the narrow, darker band to the back edge of the wide, lighter band (referred to as distance
D2).
19. Determine the distance between the band centers by the following equation:
Distance between band centers (D) = D1 – D2
2

Philips Medical Systems. Confidential and Proprietary information. Refer to Title Page.
 NOTE
One full turn of the adjustment screw corresponds to a 0.025” (0.63 mm) movement of the X–ray tube.

20. Multiply the distance between band centers (D) by 0.417 to determine the distance the X–ray tube must move. Refer to the table below
Figure 69) to determine which way to rotate the alignment screw.

ÚÚÚÚÚÚÚÚÚÚÚÚÚ
FILM

ÚÚÚÚÚÚÚÚÚÚÚÚÚ
ÚÚÚÚÚÚÚÚÚÚÚÚÚ
ÚÚÚÚÚÚÚÚÚÚÚÚÚ
ÚÚÚÚÚÚÚÚÚÚÚÚÚ
ÚÚÚÚÚÚÚÚÚÚÚÚÚ
D1

ÚÚÚÚÚÚÚÚÚÚÚÚÚ
ÚÚÚÚÚÚÚÚÚÚÚÚÚ
D2

ÚÚÚÚÚÚÚÚÚÚÚÚÚ
ÚÚÚÚÚÚÚÚÚÚÚÚÚ
ÚÚÚÚÚÚÚÚÚÚÚÚÚ
ÚÚÚÚÚÚÚÚÚÚÚÚÚ
ÚÚÚÚÚÚÚÚÚÚÚÚÚ
FIGURE 69 EXPOSED FILM

If the band is shifted to the FRONT, rotate the screw CCW.

If the band is shifted to the REAR, rotate the screw CW.

Philips Medical Systems. Confidential and Proprietary information. Refer to Title Page.
21. Loosen the four (4) tube cradle mounting bolts but do not remove them. See Figure 70.
22. Carefully turn the axial adjustment screw by hand, in the direction determined above, until you remove thread backlash; that is, any
screw rotation causes movement of the tube base.
23. Look at and note the index position on the axial adjustment screw. Turn it the number of turns and in the direction indicated:
If the band is shifted to the FRONT, rotate the screw CCW.
If the band is shifted to the REAR, rotate the screw CW.

24. Tighten the four (4) cradle mounting bolts to 15 ft–lbs, in a cross pattern.
25. Repeat steps 10 through 19. Verify that the centers of the bands on the film are less than 0.25 mm apart.
26. Turn the Console OFF. Remove Gantry power. Refer to the Power Up/Down procedures in this manual.

Philips Medical Systems. Confidential and Proprietary information. Refer to Title Page.
 TUBE SHELF CRADLE

MOUNTING BOLTS ( 4 )
(2 ON OTHER SIDE )

FIGURE 70 TYPICAL TUBE CRADLE ADJUSTMENT

COVERS

27. Gantry cover documentation can be found in the Repair Manual.

28. Apply Gantry power. Refer to the Power Up/Down procedures in this manual. Allow 5–10 minutes for detector stabilization before
continuing.
29. Run the Tube Centering procedure: first lateral centering (mechanical); then center calibration Refer to the Auto–Calibration manual.

Philips Medical Systems. Confidential and Proprietary information. Refer to Title Page.
30. If centering deviates by more than +/– 2 ray sums, adjust the offset of the scan drive fine resolver using the Scan Drive Calibration
procedure in the Calibration manual.
31. Run the CNA noise test (X ray noise test) and record the value obtained (for 50–60 Hz range). Refer to the Auto–Calibration manual.
32. Perform the full Auto–Calibration procedure.
33. Remove Gantry power. Refer to the Power Up/Down procedures in this manual.

Philips Medical Systems. Confidential and Proprietary information. Refer to Title Page.
COUCH–TO–GANTRY ALIGNMENT CHECKS
Prior to checking the relative positioning of the table or the alignment of the phantom, the table must be in the center of the scan circle. The
following procedure quickly checks for Patient Support centering.
Verify Patient Support is Perpendicular to the Gantry
1. Measure from the right side, upper corner of the foot end of the Patient support to the top retaining pin of the right side gantry column.
See Figure 71. Use a metric tape measure. Do not use a string.

2
MEASURE TO
COVER RETAINING
1 PIN
MEASURE FROM (BEHIND COVER)
TOP FOOT-END
CORNERS
USE A TAPE MEASURE,
NOT A STRING!
CHECKING PATIENT SUPPORT ALIGNMENT
FIGURE 71 HOW TO SET PATIENT SUPPORT PERPENDICULAR TO THE GANTRY
2. Repeat this for the left side of the Patient Support top.
Fill In this Table:
Right Side Measurement
Left Side Measurement
Difference (within ± 3 mm)

Philips Medical Systems. Confidential and Proprietary information. Refer to Title Page.
 This distance should equal the corresponding distance measured on the right side: ± 3 millimeters. If the two measurements are not
within this limit, reposition the rear of the Patient Support (maintain the front edge measurement !!), and verify.

3. Recheck levelness of Patient Support.

Scan and Verify Patient Support is Centered in Scan field
1. Power up the system. Push the table top into the scan circle.
2. Take an axial scan of the table top. Measure the distance from each edge of the table top to the edge of the scan field. Select the
Help pull down menu for the Operator’s On–Line manual if necessary.
3. Take a vertical pilot scan as well; this will ensure perpendicularity.
4. You can make minor adjustments to the Patient Support because it has not been torqued to the floor. Re–scan as necessary.
5. After the Patient Support is in the center of the scan circle:
a. ensure all washers and lock washers are installed between the bolt heads and the Patient Support base
b. then use the appropriate socket or drive and torque the bolts to 30 to 40 ft–lbs.
6. Press the E–STOP button. Turn power OFF at the wall box.

WARNING
USE EXTREME CAUTION WHEN PERFORMING INSTALLATION PROCEDURES
WITH THE GANTRY COVERS OPEN. 480 VAC, 208 VAC AND 120 VAC AS WELL
AS 5 VDC AND 15 VDC ARE EXPOSED IN MANY LOCATIONS. FAILURE TO
COMPLY CAN RESULT IN SERIOUS INJURY OR DEATH.

7. Refer to Figure 72. Install Patient Support covers. Place cover over sub–frame lips, and reinstall fastening screws at each end,
installing top screws first. Fasten top cover panels to couch top, using four screws and washers, as shown.

Philips Medical Systems. Confidential and Proprietary information. Refer to Title Page.
 LEFT HAND PANEL

LIP

RIGHT HAND PANEL

MOUNTING SCREWS AND WASHERS (4)

FIGURE 72 PATIENT SUPPORT COVER INSTALLATION

Philips Medical Systems. Confidential and Proprietary information. Refer to Title Page.
PATIENT SUPPORT VERTICAL/HORIZONTAL CHECKS
Do this procedure to verify Patient Support position display on the Gantry.

Vertical Checks

Perform these checks by measuring the height of the Patient Support sub–frame above the floor, not the couch height above the floor.

1. Position the table top by hand against its rear mechanical stop.
2. Apply Gantry power. Refer to the Power Up/Down procedures in this manual.
3. Position the Gantry to zero degrees tilt with the Gantry control panel switches.
4. Position the Patient Support at a vertical elevation of 10.0 mm as displayed on the Gantry. Measure this distance with a metric tape
measure. See Figure 73. Record the value.
This measured distance should be 458 mm (+/– 3 mm). If the measurement is out of this range, refer to the Calibration manual and
calibrate the position of the Patient Support.

NOTE
For consistency, table height measurements are referenced as follows: place a straight–edge across the top of the sub–frame at a
point 55.5 inches from the front edge; measure the table top height from the rear side of the straight–edge to the floor.

Philips Medical Systems. Confidential and Proprietary information. Refer to Title Page.
 Measure

FLOOR

FIGURE 73 PATIENT SUPPORT WITH GANTRY DISPLAY AT 10.0 MM

5. Raise the Patient Support to 475 mm as displayed on the Gantry display panel. Measure the distance from the floor to the sub–frame
with the same tape measure See Figure 74. Record the value.
6. Subtract the value (recorded vertical height) of Step 4 from the measurement in Step 5. The difference should be 465 " 2 mm. If the
difference is out of this range, refer to the Vertical Position Calibration and calibrate the vertical position of the Patient Support.

Philips Medical Systems. Confidential and Proprietary information. Refer to Title Page.
MEASURE

FLOOR

FIGURE 74 PATIENT SUPPORT WITH GANTRY DISPLAY AT 475.0 mm

Philips Medical Systems. Confidential and Proprietary information. Refer to Title Page.
HORIZONTAL CHECKS

1. Move the table top forward 180 mm from its rear mechanical stop. See Figure 75. Use a metric tape measure for this measurement.
This position will be referred to as the Table Top ”OUT” Reference Mark.

FORWARD
180 mm REFERENCE MARK

REFERENCE MARK
TABLE TOP ”OUT” 1000 mm
SUB–FRAME

FIGURE 75 TABLE TOP “OUT” REFERENCE MARK

2. Press the Relative Zero switch on the Gantry control panel.

3. Observe the horizontal position readout and verify that it displays a reading of zero (0.0). If the readout does not display 0.0, a failure is
present in the Gantry. Utilize Questor in this case.
4. Move the table top forward 1000 mm from the Table Top ”OUT” Reference Mark established in Step 1. Measure this distance with the
same tape measure used in Step 1.
5. Observe the horizontal position readout and verify that it displays a reading of 1000.0. If the readout does not display 1000.0 +/–0.5
mm, refer to the GPUSPY procedure called CC.

Philips Medical Systems. Confidential and Proprietary information. Refer to Title Page.
COUCH/GANTRY RELATIVE POSITIONING CHECK
The interference monitor assumes a certain relative position between the table top and the Gantry. If this is not maintained, the performance
of the interference monitor may be compromised. A simple check, outlined below, assures the correct positioning.

Two positions must be verified to assure the proper table top–to–Gantry relative position (one for vertical and one for horizontal). It is
assumed that the table top and Gantry are calibrated prior to performing these checks.

Check 1 –– Relative Vertical Positioning

1. Place the table top at 20 mm horizontal (fully moved away from the Gantry) and 215.0 mm vertical.
2. Manually move the table top forward into the Gantry aperture.
3. The bottom of the table top should touch the bottom of the Gantry aperture or be within 3 mm.
Check 2 –– Relative Horizontal Positioning

1. Raise the table top to the approximate center of the aperture.

2. Horizontally position the table top to a display readout of 507.0 mm (This should place the tip of the table top at the scan plane of the
Gantry.)
3. Turn on the Gantry lasers and verify that the laser beams are within 3 mm of the tip of the table top.

Philips Medical Systems. Confidential and Proprietary information. Refer to Title Page.
PHANTOM ALIGNMENT PROCEDURE
Use the following procedure to physically center the phantom within the phantom box. Once this is accomplished, centering the phantom
in the field should only require the Service Engineer to place the table top at the positions recorded in this procedure.

1. Place the phantom box on the table top so that the front of the phantom box is flush with the end of the table top. Place the phantom
in the phantom holder.
2. Align the phantom in the field using the laser so that the 8” water phantom is in the beam.
3. Scan the phantom using the center cal or H–F (half–field) water protocol from the Test Protocols screen of the User Interface. Use the
default mA, no comp.
4. Need phantom check procedure here.

LEFT/RIGHT ADJUSTMENT

5. Loosen the screws on one of the phantom holder wedges so that the phantom can be moved in the required direction. Refer to Figure
Figure 76.
6. Move the wedge the desired distance, tighten the screw and then slide the phantom into its new location.

Philips Medical Systems. Confidential and Proprietary information. Refer to Title Page.
 ÏÏ
ÏÏ
SCREWS SCREWS
and and
WEDGES

ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ
WEDGES

ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ
FIGURE 76 MOUNTING SCREWS FOR PHANTOM WEDGES

UP/DOWN ADJUSTMENT

7. Use the Gantry control panels to move the table top into the correct vertical location.
8. Re–scan the phantom as many times as needed to adjust the phantom to proper centering position. When the phantom is within the
+/–1 mm specification of the check phantom(??) program, record the table top horizontal and vertical locations and use these
locations when it is necessary to scan a centered phantom.

Philips Medical Systems. Confidential and Proprietary information. Refer to Title Page.
NEW PHANTOM TEST KIT (STARTING SEPTEMBER 1997)
A Beam Analysis kit has been provided with the scanner systems. This kit is used to verify the calibration and performance of the system.
The kit is also used as part of regularly scheduled quality control checks.

The test kit contains: phantom, phantom support, centering pin and two bottles of phantom refill solution. The illustration shows the test kit
as it appears packed in its shipping and storage box. The phantom support is always the topmost piece in the kit.

 The phantom support attaches to the patient support and positions the phantom and centering pin.
 The phantom is used for evaluating image quality and has five separate scannable sections:
12” water... used for full field.
8” water... used for half field.
6” water... used for low contrast measurements.
6” low contrast... used for low contrast measurements.
6” slice thickness/MTF.
Proper scanner calibration requires the phantom have no air bubbles in any scan section. Additional distilled water can be added to the
phantom via the expansion chamber which should be 3/4 filled.

 The centering pin is used for calibrating global and individual centering constants.

NEW PHANTOM MOUNTING PROCEDURE

1. Remove the phantom support from the storage box.

2. Loosen the adjustable foot knob to its maximum open position by turning the knob counterclockwise. Refer to Figure 77.

Philips Medical Systems. Confidential and Proprietary information. Refer to Title Page.
 PHANTOM
SUPPORT

CT0003
CT0002

ADJUSTABLE
FOOT
KNOB

FIGURE 77 NEW PHANTOM SUPPORT

3. Stand on the right side of the patient couch. Place the phantom support on the couch by sliding the supports’ feet onto the couch until
the phantom support overhang on the front of the support butts up flush against the front of the patient couch. Refer to Figure 78.

Philips Medical Systems. Confidential and Proprietary information. Refer to Title Page.
 FIGURE 78 NEW FLUSH MOUNTED PHANTOM SUPPORT

4. With both feet underneath the edge of the couch top and the front of the support flush to the patient couch, place your left hand on the
left corner of the support and slide unit toward you. Make sure the front overlay piece of the support remains flush to the front of the
couch. Refer to Figure 79.

5. The front and left side of the phantom support should now fit snug to the patient couch. Hold the phantom support in place with your
left hand. With the right hand, push the right foot bracket in toward the patient couch and tighten the right foot by turning the adjustable
knob clockwise until the foot fits snug to the right side of the patient support. Refer to Figure 79.

Philips Medical Systems. Confidential and Proprietary information. Refer to Title Page.
 TIGHTEN FOOT KNOB
TO SECURE TO COUCH

PUSH THE FOOT

BRACKET IN
TOWARD COUCH
CT0006

FIGURE 79 SECURING NEW PHANTOM SUPPORT TO PATIENT SUPPORT

Place New Phantom in Retainer Brackets
6. Remove the phantom from the storage box and mount it on the phantom support by inserting the phantom’s flange (the part with the
aluminum screw posts) behind the retainer holding brackets and position the overflow chamber at the top. Make sure the phantom
rests securely between the left/right adjustable holding brackets by turning the screws to tighten brackets.

Philips Medical Systems. Confidential and Proprietary information. Refer to Title Page.
 TIGHTEN
SCREWS
CT0007

FIGURE 80 PHANTOM MOUNTED ON PATIENT SUPPORT

7. With the phantom sitting in the support, adjust the left/right centering by loosening the screws and sliding the brackets as needed in
their slots. Turn the screws clockwise to re–tighten them after making the centering adjustment and rescan to see if centered in the
field of view. Refer to Figure 81.

Philips Medical Systems. Confidential and Proprietary information. Refer to Title Page.
 BRACKET

SCREW

SLOT
ADJUSTMENT

CT0008

FIGURE 81 RETAINER BRACKET ADJUSTMENT SLOTS

The phantom should now be securely held between the retainer brackets on the phantom support.

Philips Medical Systems. Confidential and Proprietary information. Refer to Title Page.
Phantom Support and Phantom Positioning
The phantom is properly positioned for the scan when the phantom support is flush with the end of the patient couch, fits snugly to the sides
of the patient couch, the phantom overflow chamber is at the top and the centering pin is inserted. Refer to Figure 82.
PHANTOM
OVERFLOW
CHAMBER
CENTERING PIN

PHANTOM SUPPORT

PATIENT SUPPORT

RETAINER
HOLDING
BRACKET

FLUSH MOUNTED
PHANTOM SUPPORT

CT0010

FIGURE 82 PROPERLY MOUNTED SUPPORT AND PHANTOM

Philips Medical Systems. Confidential and Proprietary information. Refer to Title Page.
DISPLAY CONSOLE AND ACQIMAGE CABINET CHECKS
1. With power off remove air filter in Display Tower and check to see that it is clean. Replace air filter (Refer to the Planned Maintenance
Manual for details)
2. With power off remove air filter in AcQImage Cabinet and check to see it is clean. Replace air filter (Refer to the Planned Maintenance
Manual for details).
After keyswitch power on of system, check:

3. Tape drive(s) LEDs blink through an initialization cycle and settle to a green go condition. This may take over 30 seconds to complete.
4. Check for audible sound of fans running in the Display Tower tower and light airflow exiting from upper side vents on each side.
5. Display Monitor video screen should present a video output within one minute. Most monitors will show status of video on LED indicator
panel or video screen after power up as well.
6. Sparc computer within the Display Tower performs a power on self–test. Indication of status is given on various keyboard LEDs through
the cycle and Display Monoitor should remain blank. Test should complete in less than 20 seconds and all LED’s should be off. If a
malfunction is detected one or more LED’s will remain on.
7. Intercom will become operational after approximately 5 seconds. Verify operation by by pressing PTT (Push to talk) button and
checking for indication on PTT LED.
8. Check for audible sound of fans running in the AcQImage Cabinet and airflow exiting from upper side vents on each side. There are
no visual power on LEDs so this will be your best indicator of power to the unit.

Philips Medical Systems. Confidential and Proprietary information. Refer to Title Page.
X–RAY TUBE SEASONING PROCEDURE
Each x–ray tube must be seasoned to ensure exposure consistency by helping to eliminate anode–to–cathode tube arcs caused by air
molecules. Seasoning activates the device internal to the tube known as the ’getter’ which collects these air molecules. Tubes are seasoned
by initiating a series of exposures starting with a low energy technique and moving up to the maximum technique. It is extremely important
to ensure that the wait times, delay times, and exposure times are followed accurately.

Tube Seasoning instructions are located in the MANEXP manual.

COMPLETE FIELD INSTALLATION

Performance Results

1. After you calibrate the scanner (if needed), test it, and find it to be ready for turn–over to the customer, the latest set of performance
archiver results should be stored as the record of and at field installation.
Pick Up / Clean Up

2. Do a ’sweep’ of the area. Pick up all tools. clean up all shipping and wrapping papers. Use the supplied cleansers to clean the Console
top, the Console, the Gantry and the Patient support. Use Philips spray paint as necessary to cover nicks and scratches.
THIS COMPLETES THE SCANNER INSTALLATION

3. Finish up by clearing all debris, making sure the scanner is clean (there are no smears or chipped paint) and the system is operable.
4. Fill in appropriate local paper work.

Philips Medical Systems. Confidential and Proprietary information. Refer to Title Page.
 AcQSim CT Mechanical Component Calibration

HORIZONTAL TRAVEL – LIMIT SWITCHES

VERTICAL TRAVEL LIMIT SWITCH

VERTICAL POSITION ADJUSTMENT

HORIZONTAL POSITION ADJUSTMENT

HORIZONTAL DRIVE BELT

X–RAY TUBE AXIAL MECHANICAL ALIGNMENT

LASER ALIGNMENT PROCEDURE

BRUSH BLOCK ALIGNMENT

GANTRY TILT

POWER SUPPLY VERIFICATION

MAIN DRIVES

ACQIMAGE POWER SUPPLY

DISPLAY TOWER POWER SUPPLY

MONITOR CAL

IMAGE CALIBRATION

Philips Medical Systems. Confidential and Proprietary information. Refer to Title Page.
HORIZONTAL TRAVEL – LIMIT SWITCHES
Introduction: This procedure is used to adjust the Patient Support Top horizontal travel limit switches. The procedure is the same
for both the front and the rear switches.
Tools required: FSE tool kit
Estimated time: 1 Hour

COMPONENT
LOCATION

ADJUSTMENT PROCEDURE:

1. Apply Gantry power. Refer to the Power Up/Down procedure.

2. Position the table top by hand against its rear stop.
3. Using the gantry control panel switches, raise the Patient Support to its highest position.

Philips Medical Systems. Confidential and Proprietary information. Refer to Title Page.
 WARNING
480 VOLTS AC, 120 VOLTS AC, +17 VOLTS DC, AND –17 VOLTS DC ARE EXPOSED
WHEN THE GANTRY COVERS ARE OPEN. ACCIDENTAL CONTACT WITH THESE
VOLTAGES MAY CAUSE SERIOUS INJURY OR DEATH TO THE SERVICE
PERSON.

4. Remove the right carbon top side cover and the right side rail cover. Refer to the J–Bracket Cover and Rail Cover removal in the Patient
Support Cover Removal/Replacement procedures at the beginning of this section.
5. Move the table top by hand as far as it will go toward the front and then move it back 3/8 inch [9.525 mm].
6. Refer to Figure 83. Loosen the screw that attaches the limit switch bracket to the table frame and position the switch so that it just
actuates. Tighten the limit switch in place.
7. Move the table top away from the switch and then back to engage the switch to verify proper mechanical operation.
8. Move the table top by hand as far as it will go toward the rear and then move it back 1/8 inch [3.175 mm].
9. Refer to Figure 83. Loosen the screw that attaches the limit switch bracket to the table frame and position the switch so that it just
actuates. Tighten the limit switch in place.
10. Move the table top away from the switch and then back to engage the switch to verify proper mechanical operation.
11. Move the Patient Support table top by hand to the center of its travel.
12. Apply Gantry power. Refer to the Power Up/Down procedure.
13. Move the table top forward and backward with the Gantry control panel switches to verify limit switch operation.
14. Position the Patient Support table top by hand against its rear stop.
15. Remove Gantry power. Refer to the Power Up/Down procedure.
16. Install the right side rail cover and right J–bracket cover. Refer to the J–bracket cover and Rail Cover replacement in the Patient Support
Cover Removal/Replacement procedures at the beginning of this section.

Philips Medical Systems. Confidential and Proprietary information. Refer to Title Page.
 LIMIT SWITCH
ACTIVATING SURFACE
LIMIT SWITCH

BELT CLAMP

MOUNTING SCREW

LIMIT SWITCH
ACTIVATING SURFACE
BELT CLAMP

LIMIT SWITCH

MOUNTING SCREW
FIGURE 83 FRONT AND REAR HORIZONTAL LIMIT SWITCHES

Philips Medical Systems. Confidential and Proprietary information. Refer to Title Page.
VERTICAL TRAVEL LIMIT SWITCH

Do not perform this procedure unless ABSOLUTELY NECESSARY.

Introduction: This procedure is used to adjust the Patient Support vertical travel limit switches.
Tools required: FSE tool kit
Estimated time: 1.5 hours

VERTICAL TRAVEL LIMIT SWITCH ADJUSTMENT:

1. Apply Gantry power. Refer to the Power Up/Down procedure.

2. Lower the Patient Support to its lowest position with the Gantry control panel switches.

WARNING
480 VOLTS AC, 120 VOLTS AC, ARE EXPOSED WHEN THE PATIENT SUPPORT
TELESCOPING BASE COVERS ARE OPEN (INCLUDING THE LIMIT SWITCHES).
ACCIDENTAL CONTACT WITH THESE VOLTAGES MAY CAUSE SERIOUS INJURY
OR DEATH OF THE SERVICE PERSON.

3. Remove the Patient Support telescoping base covers from the subframe. Completely remove all telescoping panels. Refer to
Telescoping Base Cover procedure.

WARNING
SCISSOR–ACTION MECHANISM IS EXPOSED WHEN THE PATIENT SUPPORT
COVERS ARE REMOVED. KEEP EQUIPMENT AND PERSONNEL AWAY FROM
THE MECHANICAL ACTION OF THESE PARTS. FAILURE TO DO SO MAY CAUSE
SERIOUS DAMAGE TO EQUIPMENT AND SERIOUS INJURY OR DEATH TO
PERSONNEL.

4. Raise the Patient Support to the center of its vertical travel with the Gantry control panel switches.

Philips Medical Systems. Confidential and Proprietary information. Refer to Title Page.
5. Remove Gantry power. Refer to the Power Up/Down procedures.
6. Loosen the lock nuts on the four vertical limit switch adjustment screws. Turn the soft limit switch adjusting screws fully into the frame.
Turn the hard limit adjusting screws several turns into the frame. Refer to Figure 84.

CAUTION
THE ALIGNMENT OF THE VERTICAL SUPPORT RODS AND THE CARRIAGE IS
CRITICAL. DO NOT PERMIT THE CARRIAGE MECHANISM TO COLLIDE WITH THE
STOP BLOCKS. FAILURE TO COMPLY MAY RESULT IN MISALIGNMENT AND SUB-
SEQUENT SERIOUS DAMAGE TO THE EQUIPMENT.

7. Apply Gantry power. Refer to the Power Up/Down procedures.

8. Lower the Patient Support with the Gantry control panel switches until the distance between the carriage and either stop block
(whichever is closest) is 1/16 in. Refer to Figure 84.
9. Adjust the ”down” hard limit switch actuating screw until the hard limit switch just actuates.
10. Raise the Patient Support with the Gantry control panel switches to allow tool access to the limit switch actuating screw.
11. Hold the ”down” hard limit switch actuating screw with an allen wrench and tighten the lock nut.
12. Using the gantry control panel switches, raise the Patient Support a little and then lower it until the distance between the carriage and
either linear bearing stop block (whichever is closest) is 1/8 in.

Philips Medical Systems. Confidential and Proprietary information. Refer to Title Page.
 VERTICAL DOWN
LIMIT SWITCHES

SWITCH
MOUNTING
SCREW
(TYPICAL)

C0665B

VERTICAL UP
LIMIT SWITCHES

FIGURE 84 VERTICAL LIMIT SWITCHES

13. Adjust the ”down” soft limit switch actuating screw until the soft limit switch just actuates.
14. Using gantry control panel switches, raise the Patient Support to allow tool access to the limit switch actuating screw.

Philips Medical Systems. Confidential and Proprietary information. Refer to Title Page.
15. Hold the ”down” soft limit switch actuating screw with an allen wrench and tighten the lock nut.
16. Check the ”down” soft limit by using the Gantry control panel switches to lower the Patient Support until the soft limit switch is actuated.
Verify the switch activateswhen the carriage is 1/8” from the stop block. The carriage may ”coast” past the point of actuation.
17. Using the Gantry control panel switches, raise the Patient Support until the distance between the carriage and either stop block
(whichever is closest) is 1/16 in. Unhook the vertical transducer line if necessary.
18. Adjust the ”up” hard limit switch actuating screw until the hard limit switch just actuates.
19. Using the Gantry control panel switches, lower the Patient Support to allow tool access to the limit switch actuating screw. Pull on the
vertical transducer line if necessary.
20. Hold the ”up” hard limit switch actuating screw with an allen wrench and tighten the lock nut.
21. Check the ”up” hard limit by using the Gantry control panel switches to raise the Patient Support until the ”up” hard limit switch is
actuated. Verify that the vertical motion stops and the distance between the carriage and the stop block is 1/16 in.
22. Using the Gantry control panel switches, lower the Patient Support until the distance between the carriage and either stop block (which
ever is closest) is 1/8 in.
23. Adjust the ”up” soft limit switch adjusting screw until the soft limit switch just actuates.
24. Using the Gantry control panel switches, lower the Patient Support with the Gantry control panel switches to allow tool access to the
limit switch actuating screw.
25. Hold the ”up” soft limit switch actuating screw with an allen wrench and tighten the lock nut.
26. Check the ”up” soft limit by using the Gantry control panel switches to raise the Patient Support until the soft limit switch is actuated.
Verify that the vertical motion stops and that there is 1/8 in. between the carriage and the stop blocks.
27. Using the Gantry control panel switches, lower the Patient Support to its lowest position.
28. Remove Gantry power. Refer to the Power Up/Down procedures in the Introduction section of this manual.
29. Install the Patient Support telescoping base covers. Refer to Telescoping Base Cover procedure.

Philips Medical Systems. Confidential and Proprietary information. Refer to Title Page.
VERTICAL POSITION
Introduction: This procedure is used to calibrate the Patient Support vertical movement measurement circuitry.

Tools Required: FSE tool kit

Metric tape measure (200 cm)
Metal 6” ruler

Estimated Time: 30 min.

NOTE
Before beginning this procedure, it is important to confirm the Patient Support table top
is level.

1. With system power OFF, position the carbon table top by hand against its rear mechanical stop.
2. Apply system power and allow the system to autoboot into the Clincal Scanning mode. Refer to the Power Up/Down procedure.
3. Position the Gantry to zero degrees tilt with the Gantry control panel switches.
4. Loosen the two captive screws and remove the small Gantry cardfile access cover on the right side of the upper gantry column.

WARNING
USE EXTREME CAUTION WHEN OPERATING OR WORKING ON EQUIPMENT
WITH COVERS REMOVED. HAZARDOUS VOLTAGES ARE EXPOSED WHEN THE
GANTRY COVERS ARE REMOVED. ACCIDENTAL CONTACT WITH THESE
VOLTAGES MAY CAUSE SERIOUS INJURY OR DEATH TO SERVICE PERSONNEL.

5. Turn the Vertical Zero clockwise (R13) and Vertical Scale (R4) counterclockwise on the CTCC fully (approx. 10 turns).
6. For consistency, table height measurements will be referenced as follows: Tape a 6 inch ruler across the subframe at a point 20
inches from the front edge; measure the table height from the underside of straight-edge to the floor.
7. Position the Patient Support 448 mm above the floor. Measure this distance with a tape measure. See Figure 85.
8. Adjust the Vertical Zero pot (R13) until the vertical gantry display indicates zero.

Philips Medical Systems. Confidential and Proprietary information. Refer to Title Page.
 20 INCH MARK

448 m

FLOOR
FIGURE 85 PATIENT SUPPORT AT 448 mm
9. Position the Patient Support 923mm above the floor. Measure the height with a tape measure. Adjust the Vertical Scale pot (R14)
on the CTCC card until the gantry displays 475.
10. Use the Gantry control panel switches to verify that the vertical position display indicates 475 +/– 2 mm when the Patient Support
is 923mm above the floor and zero when the Patient Support is 448 above the floor.
11. If necessary, readjust R13 to make the gantry vertical display read zero. Raise the patient support again. The display should read
455 +/– 2mm.
12. Close and secure the Gantry cardfile access cover.

Philips Medical Systems. Confidential and Proprietary information. Refer to Title Page.
 CTCC BOARD

FIGURE 86 CTCC – POTENTIOMETER LOCATIONS

Philips Medical Systems. Confidential and Proprietary information. Refer to Title Page.
HORIZONTAL COUCH CALIBRATION

NOTE
Patient Support Horizontal Calibration is done via Gputty+, run via the Diagnostic GUI.

Philips Medical Systems. Confidential and Proprietary information. Refer to Title Page.
HORIZONTAL DRIVE BELT TENSION AND RUN–OUT ADJUSTMENT
Introduction: This procedure is used to adjust (set) the tension on the patient support horizontal drive belt.

Tools Required: FSE tool kit

Estimated Time: 60 min.

1. Raise the Patient Support to its highest position with the Gantry control panel switches.
2. Remove Gantry power. Refer to the Power Up/Down procedure.
3. Remove the Patient Support rear cover, right carbon top side cover and right rail cover. Refer to the Cover Removal procedure.
4. Manually move the table top until the horizontal drive belt block is centered between the front and rear pulleys.
5. Loosen (but do not remove) the four mounting screws that secure front pulley mounting plate to the right side rail. Loosen these screws
just enough to permit movement of the mounting plate. Refer to Figure 87.
6. Disconnect the horizontal drive belt block from the table top. See Figure 88.

Philips Medical Systems. Confidential and Proprietary information. Refer to Title Page.
 BELT HOOK

BELT TENSION
ADJUST BOLT

C0335

MOUNTING PLATE SCREWS

FIGURE 87 HORIZONTAL DRIVE BELT TENSION ADJUSTMENT

Philips Medical Systems. Confidential and Proprietary information. Refer to Title Page.
 RIGHT
SIDE PANEL

MOUNTING
SCREWS

BELT HOOK

MOUNTING MOUNTING BELT HOOK

SCREW (2) BLOCK SCREW
D0198

FIGURE 88 HORIZONTAL DRIVE BELT BLOCK

Philips Medical Systems. Confidential and Proprietary information. Refer to Title Page.
7. Release the tension on the belt by turning the belt tension adjusting bolt clockwise (facing couch horizontal drive motor). Turn the
adjusting screw until the belt clamp just touches the bottom belt surface. Refer to Figure 89.

BELT LOCK BELT

Front Rear
CENTERED BETWEEN PULLEYS
PULLEY

FIGURE 89 HORIZONTAL BELT BEFORE ADJUSTMENT

8. Mark the belt tension adjusting screw so that the number of turns can be counted and turn it 2-1/2 to 2-3/4 full turns counter -clockwise
(facing couch horizontal drive motor) to tighten the belt.

CAUTION
DO NOT TIGHTEN THE BELT MORE THAN THE SPECIFIED AMOUNT. IF THE BELT
IT TIGHTENED TOO MUCH, THE BELT AND THE SPROCKETS MAY BE DAMAGED.

9. Reconnect the horizontal drive belt block to the table top. See Figure 88.
10. If the pulley does not have a rim to retain the drive belt, manually, verify that the belt rides true on the front pulley. If not, adjust the
set screws on the pulley block (See Figure 90). (Turn the set screws clockwise to move the rear of the block away from the Patient
Support). Moving the rear of the block away from the subframe will cause the drive belt to move away from the subframe.

Philips Medical Systems. Confidential and Proprietary information. Refer to Title Page.
 REAR

FRONT

FIGURE 90 BELT RUN OUT ADJUSTMENT

11. Tighten the four mounting screws that secure the pulley assembly to the right side rail.
12. Replace the Patient Support rear cover, carbon top side cover and right rail cover. Refer to the Cover Replacement procedure.

Philips Medical Systems. Confidential and Proprietary information. Refer to Title Page.
X–RAY TUBE AXIAL MECHANICAL ALIGNMENT
Introduction: The purpose of this procedure is to mechanically align the X–ray tube so it is centered on the detectors. This
procedure must be done whenever an X–ray tube is replaced/installed. The FSE will be working with the Gantry
covers open while performing this procedure and will be initiating X–rays.

NOTE
A new Xray Tube Mechanical Alignment procedure is available via MANEXP.

Philips Medical Systems. Confidential and Proprietary information. Refer to Title Page.
LASER ALIGNMENT CALIBRATION
Introduction: The purpose of this procedure is to align the positioning lasers so that they properly indicate the center of the X–ray
beam.
Tools Required: FSE Tool Kit, 3 index cards (approx. 4 x 6 in.), transparent or masking tape, mechanical pencil, black electrical tape
Estimated Time: 60 min.

NOTE
The 3 Gantry Lasers are essentially the same for Ultra Z and AcQSim–CT with one
small difference. The 9:00 O’clock laser has been split into (2) separate lasers on AcQ-
Sim–CT. The ‘X’ direction is at 10:00 O’clock and the ‘Z’ direction is placed at 9:00
O’clock. See Figure 92.

LASER ALIGNMENT PROCEDURE:

1. Remove Gantry power. Refer to the Power Up/Down procedure.
2. Open the top front Gantry gull wing. Remove the lower front Gantry cover and the front Gantry cone. Refer to the Gantry Cover
procedures in the Repair Manual.
3. Enable the scan drives by pulling the gullwing interlock switch out and turn on Gantry power. Refer to the Power Up/Down procedure.

WARNING
THE SCAN FRAME WILL ROTATE WHEN GANTRY IS POWERED UP. USE
CAUTION WHEN POWERING UP THE GANTRY. FAILURE TO COMPLY MAY
RESULT IN INJURY TO PERSONNEL.

4. In the Gscope program, position the collimator to the 1mm position by typing cl 10 and press <CR>. Refer to the Gscope Service
Manual for more details.
5. Depress the laser button to turn the lasers ON. (You may have to lower the gullwing momentarily to do this.)
6. Cover the 3 and 9 o’clock lasers (two lasers at 9 and 10 o’clock for AcQSim CT) openings over the laser opening with black electrical
tape. Refer to Figure 91.

Philips Medical Systems. Confidential and Proprietary information. Refer to Title Page.
 LOOSEN ALLEN HEAD SCREW TO ADJUST
LASER RIGHT OR LEFT ON 12:00 LASER

LASER
ADJUSTMENT
SCREWS

DUAL
BEAM
LASER
LASER OPENING (COVERED AT
SPECIFIC TIMES OF THE CALIBRATION)

12:00 AND 3:00 LASERS

SINGLE BEAM LASER

ADJUSTING
SCREWS
SHUTTER SCREW
9:00 LASERS

FIGURE 91 LASER ALIGNMENT SCREWS

Philips Medical Systems. Confidential and Proprietary information. Refer to Title Page.
 9:00 and 10:00
O’Clock Lasers

FIGURE 92 9:00 and 10:00 O’Clock Split Laser on AcQSim–CT Scanframe

7. Adjust the 12 o’clock laser so the beam is aligned between detector channel 1799 and 1800 at the bottom of the gantry. To adjust the
laser, you must loosen the allen head screw at the mounting bracket stud, then move the laser right or left as needed. Tighten after
adjusting. Refer to Figure 91.

WARNING
USE EXTREME CAUTION WHEN OPERATING OR WORKING ON EQUIPMENT
WITH COVERS REMOVED. DANGEROUS VOLTAGES ARE EXPOSED WHEN THE
GANTRY COVERS ARE REMOVED. FAILURE TO COMPLY CAN CAUSE SERIOUS
INJURY OR DEATH TO PERSONNEL.

8. Turn the lasers OFF. Disable the Gantry scan drives by placing the upper cover interlock switch in the middle position.
9. Manually rotate the scan frame ccw until the x–ray tube and collimator are at the 8:00 position.
10. Lay an index card across collimator opening and tape it to the slip ring.

Philips Medical Systems. Confidential and Proprietary information. Refer to Title Page.
11. Put two marks on each edge of the card that line up with the collimator opening. With a ruler, draw a line connecting the two marks.
Using a mechanical lead pencil will produce a line approx. .5mm thick.
12. Move the collimator to approximately the 6:00 position. Repeat steps 10. and 11. Then rotate the scan frame around ccw so the
collimator is at the 4:00 position and repeat the card marking steps. You should now have a marked card taped at the 8:00, 6:00 and
4:00 position. Cards in Figure 93 are colored gray.

WARNING
THE SCAN FRAME WILL ROTATE TO THE “HOME” POSITION WHEN THE LASER
BUTTON IS PRESSED. USE CAUTION WHEN POWERING UP THE GANTRY.
FAILURE TO COMPLY MAY RESULT IN INJURY TO PERSONNEL.

13. Enable the scan drives by pulling the interlock switch out. Press the laser button on the front of the gantry.
14. Disable the main drive. Adjust the 12:00 laser so the line falls on the line of all three cards. Figure 91 shows the the spring–mounted
laser adjustment screws. Note that adjustment screws interact with each other.
15. Rotate the scan frame ccw until the 12:00 laser is directly below the 6:00 card. The laser line should fall directly on the card line. Adjust
the 12:00 laser as necessary. While rotating, you can quickly see if the laser line is falling on the 8:00 and 4:00 cards correctly. Repeat
this step until the laser line falls directly on the card line at both top and bottom positions.
16. Now cover the laser opening of the 12:00 laser. Uncover the 3:00, 9:00, and 10:00 laser openings. Rotate the scan frame ccw until the
12:00 laser is near the top (this only makes the next adjustment easier and does not have to be exact). Lasers should still be on.
17. Check the line of the 3:00 laser and ensure that the horizontal beam falls directly on the horizontal laser port of the 9:00 laser.
Check the 9:00 laser in the same manner on the 3:00 laser and adjust either laser as necessary.
18. Cover both 9:00 and 10:00 laser openings. Rotate the scan frame so the 3:00 laser is pointing down at the 6:00 card. Adjust the 3:00
laser as necessary. While rotating, you can quickly see if the laser line is falling on the 8:00 and 4:00 cards correctly. Repeat this
step until the laser line falls directly on the card line at both top and bottom positions.
19. After the 3:00 laser is aligned, cover its laser opening and uncover the opening of the 10:00 laser. Rotate the scan frame so the 10:00
laser is pointing down at the 6:00 card. Adjust the 10:00 laser as necessary. While rotating, you can quickly see if the laser line is falling
on the 8:00 and 4:00 cards correctly.

Philips Medical Systems. Confidential and Proprietary information. Refer to Title Page.
 WARNING
THE SCAN FRAME WILL ROTATE TO THE “HOME” POSITION WHEN THE LASER
BUTTON IS PRESSED. USE CAUTION WHEN POWERING UP THE GANTRY.
FAILURE TO COMPLY MAY RESULT IN INJURY TO PERSONNEL.

20. Enable the main drive. Press the laser button so the gantry rotates to “home” position. Disable the main drive and uncover lasers.
21. Align a phantom on a centered couch. Wrap a piece of paper around the 6” section of the phantom and secure in place. Push the
couch in until the laser line falls on the paper. If properly aligned, you should see a continuous, solid line all the way around the paper.
If a laser is out of alignment, you will see a blurring or two solid lines. If this is the case, locate the misaligned laser and re–adjust.

Philips Medical Systems. Confidential and Proprietary information. Refer to Title Page.
CARDS SECURED AT
8:00, 6:00 and 4:00
POSITIONS WITH
LINES DRAWN. NOTE HOW
CARD LINE
ALIGNS WITH
8:00 COLLIMATOR
OPENING.

6:00

4:00

PL0080

FIGURE 93 CARD ALIGNMENTS – 8:00, 6:00 AND 4:00 POSITIONS

Philips Medical Systems. Confidential and Proprietary information. Refer to Title Page.
LASER ALIGNMENT VERIFICATION
22. Keep the paper on the phantom. Once you are confident that lasers are aligned, remove the alignment cards and CAREFULLY replace
the cone (it is easy to bump the 12:00 and 3:00 lasers when doing this).
23. Verify the laser alignment on the paper once more. Run the following procedure for a final verification:
24. Unfold and cut an ordinary paper clip to a one inch length . Tape the clip in the groove between the MTF and Low Contrast
sections (approx. 70 mm from the tip of the peg.)
25. Turn on the lasers and make sure the beam is directly on the paper clip.
26. From the Clinical Scanning GUI, create a new test patient entry.
27. Select the Protocol Selection option, click on the phantom icon and choose the Half Water protocol. Press Select.
28. Select the Planning option at the bottom of the screen.
29. The tube must be warmed up. In Pilot Planning, select the OM Landmark and Confirm with the mouse. Another Pilot screen will appear.
Select 60mA. Click on Confirm.
30. Click on the Advance to Scan Button. Click on Start scan. The pilot will appear. Click on the Extent Tab under Scan Parameters
Selection, and select a slice thickness of 1mm (2mm on AcQSim CT). Make sure the Scan Extents (mm) are set to +1.0 Start and
+1.0 End so the couch will not move when it scans.
31. Click on the Scanning/Recon button. Click on Advance to Scan, then Start Scan.
32. Observe the resulting axial image. The lasers are positioned properly if the clip is visible in the image. If this is not the case, the
calibration procedure should be done again.

Philips Medical Systems. Confidential and Proprietary information. Refer to Title Page.
BRUSH BLOCK ALIGNMENT
Introduction: The purpose of this procedure is to mechanically align the slip ring brush blocks. The brush blocks must be aligned
axially, ensuring that the brushes are centered in each ring groove; and radially, ensuring that the proper pressure
is applied to each brush.
Tools Required: FSE tool kit
Alignment Pins P/N 95341
Estimated Time: 20 min.

ALIGNMENT PROCEDURE:

WARNING
USE EXTREME CAUTION WHEN OPERATING OR WORKING ON EQUIPMENT
WITH COVERS REMOVED. HAZARDOUS VOLTAGES ARE EXPOSED WHEN THE
GANTRY COVERS ARE REMOVED. ACCIDENTAL CONTACT WITH THESE
VOLTAGES MAY CAUSE SERIOUS INJURY OR DEATH TO SERVICE PERSONNEL.

1. Remove Gantry power. Power MUST BE REMOVED AT THE WALL BOX. Refer to the Power Up/Down procedure.

WARNING
THE FRONT UPPER GANTRY COVER HAS SHARP EDGES. USE EXTREME
CAUTION WHEN SERVICING EQUIPMENT WHILE UPPER GULL WINGS ARE
OPEN. FAILURE TO COMPLY MAY RESULT IN SERIOUS INJURY TO SERVICE
PERSONNEL.

2. Open and secure the upper front Gantry cover. Remove the lower front cover and remove the front cone. .Refer to the Gantry Cover
procedures of the Repair Manual.
3. Move the rotating scan frame ccw by hand to position the X–ray tube at the 12:00 position. Lock the scan frame with the locking pin.
Refer to Figure 94.

Philips Medical Systems. Confidential and Proprietary information. Refer to Title Page.
 PIN LOCATION

SIGNAL BRUSH BLOCK

POWER BRUSH BLOCK

FIGURE 94 SCAN FRAME PINNED WITH TUBE AT 12:00

SIGNAL BRUSH BLOCK

Refer to Figure 95 and Figure 96.

1. Loosen the two radial mounting screws. Loosen the four screws that secure the mounting bracket to the underside of the shelf. Refer
to Figure 95.

2. Move the brush block assembly so that the brushes are centered in the groove, as shown in Figure 96. Slowly tighten the four screws
that secure the mounting bracket to the underside of the shelf. Monitor the position of the brushes as the screws are tightened to ensure
they remain centered in the grooves.

Philips Medical Systems. Confidential and Proprietary information. Refer to Title Page.
 LOOSEN THESE TWO
SCREWS AND TWO
ON OTHER BRACKET.

FRONT VIEW

LOOSEN RADIAL SCREWS

FIGURE 95 SIGNAL BRUSH BLOCK

Philips Medical Systems. Confidential and Proprietary information. Refer to Title Page.
FIGURE 96 ALIGNMENT OF ASSEMBLY AND SIGNAL BRUSHES

Philips Medical Systems. Confidential and Proprietary information. Refer to Title Page.
3. Slowly rotate the Gantry scan frame counterclockwise by hand. Listen to and observe the brush in each slip ring groove to determine
that alignment is maintained throughout 360 degrees of rotation. Make sure the assembly tracks smoothly and encounters no
obstructions or collisions during the rotation.
4. Replace the laser or the relay card cover, as appropriate. If the laser was removed, refer to the Laser Calibration section of this manual
after its installation.
5. Rotate the scan frame by hand 360 degrees counterclockwise and make sure all cables are safely secured.
6. Apply system power. Refer to the Power Up/Down procedure.
7. Perform a warm–up of the x–ray system (if necessary) and run a typical water phantom scan to verify proper system operation.
8. Refer to the RING procedure in the Diagnostic GUI manual and execute RING for 2 and 4 second scan speeds. The Ring program
tests the integrity of the slip rings themselves. However, if the signal brush block is not properly aligned, communication errors will
occur during normal operation. Common errors that occur if the brush block is misaligned are: ACK/NACK BREAK (ANB) error, Drives
Disable errors and X–ray control resets (contactor drops out or shutdown faults).
9. If any of the listed errors occur, either the alignment of the brush block assembly is bad or a brush tip or slip ring is bad. If no errors,
exit the diagnostic.
10. Remove system power. Refer to the Power Up/Down procedure.
11. Replace the front cone and close the Gantry covers. Refer to the Gantry Cover procedures of the Repair Manual.

POWER BRUSH BLOCK

1. Power should be removed from the system AT THE WALL BOX. In order to remove the power brush block, you must first remove
the laser assembly. Refer to the Laser Removal/Replacement procedure in the Repair manual for complete details.
2. Insert the two alignment pins into the holes provided on the brush block assembly. Refer to Figure 97. These two pins should fall into
the inner air gap on the slip ring assembly.
3. Loosen the two radial mounting screws (Figure 97).
4. Move the brush block assembly so that the brushes are centered in the groove, as shown in Figure 98. Slowly tighten the four screws
that secure the mounting bracket to the underside of the shelf. Monitor the position of the brushes as the screws are tightened to ensure
they remain centered in the grooves.
5. Remove the two radial mounting screws (Figure 95) one at a time, apply a drop of Loc–Tite to the threads of each screw, reinstall,
but do not tighten them.

Philips Medical Systems. Confidential and Proprietary information. Refer to Title Page.
6. Move the brush block assembly so that the alignment pins are centered in the groove, as shown in Figure 96. Slowly tighten the four
screws that secure the mounting bracket to the underside of the shelf. Monitor the position of the alignment pins as the screws are
tightened to ensure the brush tips remain centered in the slip ring grooves.

LOOSEN THESE TWO

SCREWS AND TWO
ON OTHER BRACKET.

FRONT VIEW WITHOUT

480v BRUSHES SHOWN

LOOSEN RADIAL SCREWS

FIGURE 97 POWER BRUSH BLOCK

Philips Medical Systems. Confidential and Proprietary information. Refer to Title Page.
 ALIGNMENT PIN

FIGURE 98 ALIGNMENT OF ASSEMBLY AND BRUSH FIBER TIPS (POWER)

Philips Medical Systems. Confidential and Proprietary information. Refer to Title Page.
7. Slowly rotate the Gantry scan frame counterclockwise by hand. Listen to and observe the brush in each slip ring groove to determine
that alignment is maintained throughout 360 degrees of rotation. Make sure the assembly tracks smoothly and encounters no
obstructions or collisions during the rotation.
8. Replace the laser or the relay card cover, as appropriate. If the laser was removed, refer to the Laser Calibration section of this manual
after its installation.
9. Rotate the scan frame by hand 360 degrees counterclockwise and make sure all cables are safely secured.
10. Apply system power. Refer to the Power Up/Down procedure.
11. Perform a warm–up of the x–ray system (if necessary) and run a typical water phantom scan to verify proper system operation.
12. Refer to the Gscope manual and execute the @ring macro for 2 and 4 second scan speeds. The @ring macro was created to test
the integrity of the slip rings themselves. However, if the signal brush block is not properly aligned, communication errors will occur
during normal operation. Common errors that occur if the brush block is misaligned are: ACK/NACK BREAK (ANB) error, Drives Disable
errors and X–ray control resets (contactor drops out or shutdown faults).
13. If any of the listed errors occur, either the alignment of the brush block assembly is bad or a brush tip or slip ring is bad. If no errors,
exit the diagnostic.
14. Remove system power. Refer to the Power Up/Down procedure.
15. Replace the front cone and close the Gantry covers. Refer to the Gantry Cover procedures of the Repair Manual.

Philips Medical Systems. Confidential and Proprietary information. Refer to Title Page.
TILT CALIBRATION
Introduction: The following procedure is used to calibrate the Gantry tilt position and read–out.
Tools Required: Combination protractor head
FSE tool kit
Estimated Time: 30 min.

1. Remove Gantry Power. Refer to the Power Up/Down procedure.

WARNING
THE FRONT UPPER GANTRY COVER HAS SHARP EDGES. USE EXTREME
CAUTION WHEN SERVICING EQUIPMENT WHILE THE UPPER GULL WING IS
OPEN. FAILURE TO COMPLY MAY RESULT IN SERIOUS INJURY TO SERVICE
PERSONNEL.

2. Refer to the Gantry Cover procedures of the Repair Manual to:

c. Open the upper front Gantry cover and secure the upper cover in the full–open position.
d. Remove the right Gantry column cover.
e. Remove the Gantry cardfile access cover.

WARNING
480 VOLTS AC, 120 VOLTS AC, 5 VOLTS DC, AND 15 VOLTS DC ARE EXPOSED
WHEN THE GANTRY COVERS ARE OPEN. ACCIDENTAL CONTACT WITH THESE
VOLTAGES MAY CAUSE SERIOUS INJURY OR DEATH TO THE SERVICE
PERSON.

Philips Medical Systems. Confidential and Proprietary information. Refer to Title Page.
 CTCC BOARD

FIGURE 99 CTCC ADJUSTMENT LOCATIONS

3. Apply Gantry power. Refer to the Power Up/Down procedure.

4. Set the protractor to indicate zero (0) degrees and tape it against the side of the collimator (non–magnetic metal). Tilt the Gantry until
the protractor bubble level indicates that the Gantry is at zero degrees. Refer to Figure 100.

Philips Medical Systems. Confidential and Proprietary information. Refer to Title Page.
 PROTRACTOR

FIGURE 100 PROTRACTOR ON COLLIMATOR AT ZERO DEGREES

5. Remove Gantry power. Refer to the Power Up/Down procedure.

6. On the CTCC card, connect pos (+) lead of a digital Multi–meter (DMM) to TP10 and the black (–) lead to TP8. Refer to Figure 99.

WARNING
120 VAC IS PRESENT ON THE TILT LIMIT SWITCHES. AVOID CONTACT WITH THE
TILT LIMIT SWITCH WIRING. FAILURE TO COMPLY MAY CAUSE SERIOUS
INJURY OR DEATH TO THE SERVICE PERSON.

Philips Medical Systems. Confidential and Proprietary information. Refer to Title Page.
 WARNING
MOVING MACHINERY. KEEP BODY PARTS AND ALL OBJECTS AWAY FROM
MOVING PARTS OF THE GANTRY. FAILURE TO COMPLY MAY CAUSE SERIOUS
DAMAGE TO THE EQUIPMENT AND SERIOUS INJURY TO PERSONNEL.

7. Apply Gantry power. Refer to the Power Up/Down procedure. Rotate the pot output shaft until the voltmeter indicates 0.0 VDC. The
pot output can be adjusted by carefully turning the pot, allowing the belt to slip around the smooth Gantry pulley. Refer to Figure 101.

8. Disconnect the DMM from the CTCC. Use the gantry control panel switches to tilt the gantry in the positive direction. While the Gantry
is tilting, activate each positive limit switch to verify it interrupts the tilting motion. Refer to Figure 101 for limit switch location.

–30o
–30.5o

TURN
POT TO
OBTAIN
+30o ZERO

+30.5o

PL0082

FIGURE 101 TILT POT AND LIMIT SWITCHES – RIGHT GANTRY COLUMN

Philips Medical Systems. Confidential and Proprietary information. Refer to Title Page.
9. Use the gantry control panel switches to tilt the gantry in the negative direction. While the Gantry is tilting, carefully activate each
negative limit switch to verify that it interrupts the tilting motion.
10. Tilt the gantry to a –30 degree position, using the protractor.
11. Adjust the tilt scale pot R11 on the CTCC card until the front display indicates –29.5 degrees. Refer to Figure 99. With the protractor,
verify that the Gantry will tilt to –30.5 degrees and that the software limit stops the the tilt at –30.5 degrees.
12. Repeat steps 14. through 11., adjusting the positive limit switch (+30).
13. Tilt the Gantry to zero degrees.
14. Using a protractor against the scan frame as the means of measurement, tilt the gantry to –10 degrees. Adjust the CTCC potentiometer
R10 until the gantry touch panel displays –10 degrees. Refer to Figure 99.
15. Tilt the gantry to a –20 degree position, using the display as the means of measurement. Verify with the protractor that the gantry
position is accurate.
16. Remove Gantry power. Refer to the Power Up/Down procedure.
17. Refer to the Gantry Cover procedures of the Repair Manual to:
a. Close the upper front Gantry cover and secure the upper cover in the full–open position.
b. Close the right Gantry column cover.
c. Replace the small carfdfile access cover back into position.

Philips Medical Systems. Confidential and Proprietary information. Refer to Title Page.
+5, "
15, +12, –20 VOLT DC POWER SUPPLY VERIFICATION
Introduction: The purpose of this procedure is to verify the accuracy of the +5, +/–15, +12, and –20 VDC power supplies. There
is no calibration adjustment on these supplies.
Tools required: FSE tool kit
Estimated time: 10 Minutes

+5, "
15, +12, –20 POWER SUPPLY VERIFICATION:

1. Remove system power. Refer to the Power Up/Down procedure. Remove the left smaller rear gantry cover. Refer to the Gantry Cover
procedures of the Repair Manual.

WARNING
480 VOLTS AC, 120 VOLTS AC, 5 VOLTS DC, ”15 VOLTS AND ”20 VOLTS DC ARE
EXPOSED WHEN THE GANTRY COVERS ARE OPEN. ACCIDENTAL CONTACT
WITH THESE VOLTAGES MAY CAUSE SERIOUS INJURY OR DEATH TO THE
SERVICE PERSON.

2. Disable the Console by positioning the key switch on the AC control chassis to the SERVICE position. Refer to Figure 102.
3. Set the DMM to a 20 volt or greater DC range. Connect the leads while observing proper polarity to the proper test points (+5, +15,
–15, +20 and –20vdc with respect to ground). Refer to Figure 103.

Philips Medical Systems. Confidential and Proprietary information. Refer to Title Page.
 MAIN DRIVE

F310 I I
10A
0 0

F311
10A

0 I I
AC CONTROL SERVICE NORMAL
F312
10A 0 0

FIGURE 102 AC CONTROL CHASSIS KEY SWITCH

Under Normal Conditions:

Power Supply Voltage Output* Load Current

+5vdc 4.85 – 5.15v 50 – 60A
+15vdc 14.55 – 15.45v 8 – 10A
–15vdc –14.55 to –15.45v 6 – 6.7A
+12vdc 12.36 – 11.64v 7.5 – 8.3A
–20vdc –19.40 to –20.60v 9 – 10A
*absolute values

If the power supply voltages are not within these ranges, the supply must be replaced.
4. Return the service key switch on the AC control chassis to the NORMAL position. Replace the Gantry covers. Refer to the Gantry
Cover procedures of the Repair Manual.

Philips Medical Systems. Confidential and Proprietary information. Refer to Title Page.
 POWER
MONITOR
BOARD

YELLOW “HIGH VOLTAGE” LED

GREEN “CORRECT” VOLTAGE LED
YELLOW “LOW VOLTAGE” LED

GREEN VOLTAGE
INDICATOR LEDS

+12 –20
+5
GND. –15
+15

FIGURE 103 POWER SUPPLY TEST POINTS

Philips Medical Systems. Confidential and Proprietary information. Refer to Title Page.
MAIN DRIVES CALIBRATION

NOTE
The Main Drives Calibration can be found in the Gputty+ section of the Diagnostic GUI
manual. The procedure is called MC. Click on the MC link to access the procedure now.

Philips Medical Systems. Confidential and Proprietary information. Refer to Title Page.
+3.3, +5, +/–12 VOLT DC ACQIMAGE CABINET POWER SUPPLY VERIFICATION/CAL
Introduction: The purpose of this procedure is to verify the accuracy of the +3.3 VDC, +5 VDC and +/–12VDC AcQImage Cabinet
power supplies.
Tools required: FSE tool kit
Estimated time: 15 Minutes

1. Remove system power. Refer to the Power Up/Down procedure.

2. Remove the front cosmetic cover and inside front cover. Remove the top cover. Refer to the Cover Removal/Replacement procedures
in the Repair manual. Apply power. Refer to the Power Up/Down procedure.

WARNING
120 VOLTS AC, 5 VOLTS DC and +/–12 VOLTS DC ARE EXPOSED WHEN THE
DISPLAY TOWER COVERS ARE OPEN. ACCIDENTAL CONTACT WITH THESE
VOLTAGES MAY CAUSE SERIOUS INJURY OR DEATH.

3. Set the DMM to a 20 volt or greater DC range. Connect the leads while observing proper polarity to the proper test points (+3.3, +5,
and +/–12vdc with respect to ground). Refer to Figure 104.

Philips Medical Systems. Confidential and Proprietary information. Refer to Title Page.
 12V
NEUTRAL
GND
–12 V

+3.3V +5V
+12 V

FIGURE 104 POWER SUPPLY VOLTAGE TEST POINTS

Under Normal Conditions:

POWER SUPPLY MIN. VOLTAGE MAX. VOLTAGE

+3.3 VDC +3.25 +3.45
+5 VDC +4.875 +5.25
+12 VDC +11.64 +12.6
–12 VDC –11.64 –12.6

Philips Medical Systems. Confidential and Proprietary information. Refer to Title Page.
If the voltages are out of range, adjust using the following procedure:

+3.3 VDC Supply:

4. Using a small screwdriver, adjust the pot until the voltage falls within the acceptable range. Refer to Figure 105.
+5 VDC and +/–12 VDC Supply:
5. Using a small screwdriver, adjust the pot until the voltage falls within the acceptable range. Refer to Figure 106. Both the +12vdc
and –12vdc are adjusted with the same pot.

DETAIL OF +3.3VDC POWER SUPPLY

WHEN LOOKING DOWN THROUGH TOP
AFTER COVER IS REMOVED.

+3.3 VOLT ADJ.

REAR OF
CABINET

FIGURE 105 +3.3 VDC POWER SUPPLY ADJUSTMENT LOCATION

Philips Medical Systems. Confidential and Proprietary information. Refer to Title Page.
 DETAIL OF +5, +/–12VDC POWER SUP-
PLY WHEN LOOKING DOWN THROUGH
TOP AFTER COVER IS REMOVED.

+/–12 VOLT ADJ. +5 VOLT ADJ.

REAR OF CABINET

FIGURE 106 +5, +/– 12VDC POWER SUPPLY ADJUSTMENT LOCATIONS

6. When finished, attach the inside front and outside cosmetic covers and the top cover.. Refer to the Cover Removal/Replacement
procedures in the Repair manual.

Philips Medical Systems. Confidential and Proprietary information. Refer to Title Page.
ULTRA ZX +5, +12, –12, +3.3 VOLT DC DISPLAY TOWER POWER SUPPLY VERIFICATION/CALIBRATION
Introduction: The purpose of this procedure is to verify the accuracy of the +5, +12, –12 and 3.3VDC Display Tower power supply.
Tools required: FSE tool kit
Estimated time: 15 Minutes

1. Remove system power. Refer to the Power Up/Down procedure.

WARNING
120 VOLTS AC, +5, +12, –12 and 3.3 VOLTS DC DC ARE EXPOSED WHEN THE
DISPLAY TOWER COVERS ARE OPEN. ACCIDENTAL CONTACT WITH THESE
VOLTAGES MAY CAUSE SERIOUS INJURY OR DEATH TO THE SERVICE
PERSON.

2. Remove the left side and top cover. Refer to the Display Tower Cover Removal procedure in the Repair Manual.
3. Refer to Figure 107 and locate the power supply voltage check points and adjustment locations.
4. Set the DMM to a 20 volt or greater DC range. Connect the leads while observing proper polarity to the proper test points.

NOTE
The +5V adjustment access hole is located at the TOP of the power supply. You must
temporarily move the SPC and boards above it to gain access.

Philips Medical Systems. Confidential and Proprietary information. Refer to Title Page.
 +5V

+3.3V

+12V

–12V

AC INPUT

+5V

+3.3V
+12V

NOTE: THE +5V ADJUSTMENT ACCESS

HOLE IS ON THE TOP OF THE POWER SUP-
PLY. THE SPC AND BOARDS ABOVE IT
NEED TO BE REMOVED TO GAIN ACCESS
–12V

FIGURE 107 SYSTEM POWER SUPPLY – VOLTAGE TEST POINTS AND ADJUSTMENT LOCATIONS

Philips Medical Systems. Confidential and Proprietary information. Refer to Title Page.
Under Normal Conditions:
POWER SUPPLY MIN. VOLTAGE MAX. VOLTAGE
+5 VDC +4.75 +5.25
+12 VDC +11.4 +12.6
–12 VDC –11.4 –12.6
+3.3 VDC +3.465 +3.135
If the voltages are out of range, adjust the pot with a small screwdriver until the voltage falls within an acceptable range. Refer to the table
above.

Philips Medical Systems. Confidential and Proprietary information. Refer to Title Page.
DISPLAY MONITOR CALIBRATION
Introduction: The purpose of this procedure is to calibrate the display monitor to factory specifications using the SMPTE pattern.
Tools required: FSE tool kit
Estimated time: 5 Minutes

NOTE
The display monitor cal via the SMPTE pattern is initiated via the Diagnostic GUI.

Philips Medical Systems. Confidential and Proprietary information. Refer to Title Page.
MANUAL IMAGE CALIBRATION
Image Calibration not run via AutoCalibration is run via the REASON pulldown menu of the Calibration selection of the Service Application.

Refer to the Service Application manual for more details.

Refer to the table below for the Manual Calibration/Performance pulldown menu. (Manual Calibration routines are in bold).
Reason Pull Down Menu – MANUAL CALIBRATION
REASON DESCRIPTION OF ACTION PERFORMED
ManPerform_Lateral_Centering
ManFind_Centering
ManFind_DAC
MandFind_Air
MandFind MA
ManFind_Flatts
ManFind_FlattsFF
ManFind_Level
ManFind_LevelFF
ManFind_Level2
ManFind_Level2FF
ManFind_PilotAir
ManPerform_MTF
Clear_BadDetsList
How to Run Manual Performance/Calibration
1. After the reason is selected, a text editor appears, containing the calibration/performance routine text of the Reason that was selected.
Find and edit the appropriate text parameters for the calibration or performance routine you selected. To edit a routine, highlight the
text value (mA, voltage, etc.) with the mouse pointer. (Click on the text, hold and drag across the text of choice until the text displays
in reverse video.) Refer to Figure 110.
2. After the text is highlighted, type in the new value. For example, select 130kV and type in 120kV. After the text is edited, save the
file and close the text editor window. When closing the editor, you will be prompted with a information about the steps you should
perform. Refer to Figure 111. (In this example, the ManFind_Centering Reason was chosen.) Click on OK to continue.
3. From the scanning screen, click on the Proceed to Scan button, then the Start Scan button to continue with the Calibration or
Performance routine.

Philips Medical Systems. Confidential and Proprietary information. Refer to Title Page.
2. Right
mouse click.
Select SAVE
from menu

3. Right mouse click on bar.

Select Close from menu

1. Select parameter with mouse

pointer. Type in new value.

FIGURE 108 MANUAL PERFORMANCE / CALIBRATION TEXT EDITOR

Philips Medical Systems. Confidential and Proprietary information. Refer to Title Page.
 Move Couch to LandMark position.

1) Use lasers to center performance phantom.

2) Move couch to position phantom between the MTF & Low
Contrast sections (approx. 70mm from tip of peg.)

In the future, to reset a LandMark you must reselect a reason.

OK

FIGURE 109 MANUAL PERFORMANCE / CALIBRATION INFORMATION WINDOW

Philips Medical Systems. Confidential and Proprietary information. Refer to Title Page.
Manual Calibration Protocols

Scan parameters for 3rd party service manual calibration of an Astro scanner.

Vector Name kv filter spot scan_fov thick ma speed

–––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––

CAL: Lateral 130 none large full 5 100 1.5

CAL: Centering 130 none small full 5 100 1

CAL: Centering 130 none small full 5 100 1.5
CAL: Centering 130 none small full 5 100 2
CAL: Centering 130 none small full 5 100 3
CAL: Centering 130 none small full 5 100 4
CAL: Centering 130 none large full 5 100 1
CAL: Centering 130 none large full 5 100 1.5
CAL: Centering 130 none large full 5 100 2
CAL: Centering 130 none large full 5 100 3
CAL: Centering 130 none large full 5 100 4

CAL: DAC 130 none small full 8 100 4

CAL: DAC 130 none large full 8 100 4

CAL: Air 80 none small full 5 100 4

CAL: Air 80 half small full 5 100 4
CAL: Air 80 none large full 5 100 4
CAL: Air 80 half large full 5 100 4
CAL: Air 100 none small full 5 100 4
CAL: Air 100 half small full 5 100 4
CAL: Air 100 none large full 5 100 4
CAL: Air 100 half large full 5 100 4
CAL: Air 120 none small full 5 100 4
CAL: Air 120 half small full 5 100 4
CAL: Air 120 none large full 5 100 4

Philips Medical Systems. Confidential and Proprietary information. Refer to Title Page.
CAL: Air 120 half large full 5 100 4
CAL: Air 130 none small full 2 100 4
CAL: Air 130 none small full 3 100 4
CAL: Air 130 none small full 4 100 4
CAL: Air 130 none small full 5 100 4
CAL: Air 130 none small full 8 100 4
CAL: Air 130 half small full 2 100 4
CAL: Air 130 half small full 3 100 4
CAL: Air 130 half small full 4 100 4
CAL: Air 130 half small full 5 100 4
CAL: Air 130 half small full 8 100 4
CAL: Air 130 none large full 2 100 4
CAL: Air 130 none large full 3 100 4
CAL: Air 130 none large full 4 100 4
CAL: Air 130 none large full 5 100 4
CAL: Air 130 none large full 8 100 4
CAL: Air 130 half large full 2 100 4
CAL: Air 130 half large full 3 100 4
CAL: Air 130 half large full 4 100 4
CAL: Air 130 half large full 5 100 4
CAL: Air 130 half large full 8 100 4
CAL: Air 140 none small full 5 100 4
CAL: Air 140 half small full 5 100 4
CAL: Air 140 none large full 5 100 4
CAL: Air 140 half large full 5 100 4

CAL: Ma 100 none large full 5 30 2

CAL: Ma 100 none large full 5 40 2
CAL: Ma 100 none large full 5 50 2
CAL: Ma 100 none large full 5 60 2
CAL: Ma 100 none large full 5 70 2
CAL: Ma 100 none large full 5 80 2
CAL: Ma 100 none large full 5 90 2

Philips Medical Systems. Confidential and Proprietary information. Refer to Title Page.
CAL: Ma 100 none large full 5 100 2
CAL: Ma 100 none large full 5 110 2
CAL: Ma 100 none large full 5 120 2
CAL: Ma 100 none large full 5 130 2
CAL: Ma 100 none large full 5 140 2
CAL: Ma 100 none large full 5 150 2
CAL: Ma 100 none large full 5 160 2
CAL: Ma 100 none large full 5 170 2
CAL: Ma 100 none large full 5 180 2
CAL: Ma 100 none large full 5 190 2
CAL: Ma 100 none large full 5 200 2
CAL: Ma 100 none large full 5 210 2
CAL: Ma 100 none large full 5 220 2
CAL: Ma 100 none large full 5 230 2
CAL: Ma 100 none large full 5 240 2
CAL: Ma 100 none large full 5 250 2
CAL: Ma 100 none large full 5 260 2
CAL: Ma 100 none large full 5 270 2
CAL: Ma 100 none large full 5 280 2
CAL: Ma 100 none large full 5 290 2
CAL: Ma 100 none large full 5 300 2
CAL: Ma 100 none large full 5 310 2
CAL: Ma 100 none large full 5 320 2
CAL: Ma 100 none large full 5 330 2
CAL: Ma 100 none large full 5 340 2
CAL: Ma 100 none large full 5 350 2
CAL: Ma 100 none large full 5 360 2
CAL: Ma 100 none large full 5 370 2
CAL: Ma 100 none large full 5 380 2
CAL: Ma 100 none large full 5 390 2
CAL: Ma 100 none large full 5 400 2

CAL: PilotAir 130 none large full 2 30 4

Philips Medical Systems. Confidential and Proprietary information. Refer to Title Page.
CAL: FlattsFF 80 none small full 8 100 4
CAL: FlattsFF 80 half small full 8 100 4
CAL: FlattsFF 80 none large full 8 100 4
CAL: FlattsFF 80 half large full 8 100 4
CAL: FlattsFF 100 none small full 8 100 4
CAL: FlattsFF 100 half small full 8 100 4
CAL: FlattsFF 100 none large full 8 100 4
CAL: FlattsFF 100 half large full 8 100 4
CAL: FlattsFF 120 none small full 8 100 4
CAL: FlattsFF 120 half small full 8 100 4
CAL: FlattsFF 120 none large full 8 100 4
CAL: FlattsFF 120 half large full 8 100 4
CAL: FlattsFF 130 none small full 8 100 4
CAL: FlattsFF 130 half small full 8 100 4
CAL: FlattsFF 130 none large full 8 100 4
CAL: FlattsFF 130 half large full 8 100 4
CAL: FlattsFF 140 none small full 8 100 4
CAL: FlattsFF 140 half small full 8 100 4
CAL: FlattsFF 140 none large full 8 100 4
CAL: FlattsFF 140 half large full 8 100 4

CAL: LevelFF 80 none small full 8 100 4

CAL: LevelFF 80 half small full 8 100 4
CAL: LevelFF 80 none large full 8 100 4
CAL: LevelFF 80 half large full 8 100 4
CAL: LevelFF 100 none small full 8 100 4
CAL: LevelFF 100 half small full 8 100 4
CAL: LevelFF 100 none large full 8 100 4
CAL: LevelFF 100 half large full 8 100 4
CAL: LevelFF 120 none small full 8 100 4
CAL: LevelFF 120 half small full 8 100 4
CAL: LevelFF 120 none large full 8 100 4

Philips Medical Systems. Confidential and Proprietary information. Refer to Title Page.
CAL: LevelFF 120 half large full 8 100 4
CAL: LevelFF 130 none small full 8 100 4
CAL: LevelFF 130 half small full 8 100 4
CAL: LevelFF 130 none large full 8 100 4
CAL: LevelFF 130 half large full 8 100 4
CAL: LevelFF 140 none small full 8 100 4
CAL: LevelFF 140 half small full 8 100 4
CAL: LevelFF 140 none large full 8 100 4
CAL: LevelFF 140 half large full 8 100 4

CAL: Level2FF 80 none small full 8 100 4

CAL: Level2FF 80 half small full 8 100 4
CAL: Level2FF 80 none large full 8 100 4
CAL: Level2FF 80 half large full 8 100 4
CAL: Level2FF 100 none small full 8 100 4
CAL: Level2FF 100 half small full 8 100 4
CAL: Level2FF 100 none large full 8 100 4
CAL: Level2FF 100 half large full 8 100 4
CAL: Level2FF 120 none small full 8 100 4
CAL: Level2FF 120 half small full 8 100 4
CAL: Level2FF 120 none large full 8 100 4
CAL: Level2FF 120 half large full 8 100 4
CAL: Level2FF 130 none small full 8 100 4
CAL: Level2FF 130 half small full 8 100 4
CAL: Level2FF 130 none large full 8 100 4
CAL: Level2FF 130 half large full 8 100 4
CAL: Level2FF 140 none small full 8 100 4
CAL: Level2FF 140 half small full 8 100 4
CAL: Level2FF 140 none large full 8 100 4
CAL: Level2FF 140 half large full 8 100 4

Philips Medical Systems. Confidential and Proprietary information. Refer to Title Page.
PERFORMANCE / VERIFICATION
Performance/Verification is run via the REASON pulldown menu of the Calibration selection of the Service Application.
For system performance tests, test methods, and performance specifications, refer to the Performance Specifications section of this
manual.
Manual Performance is run the same way as auto, except the REASON menu is different to allow only certain calibration/performance
routines. Refer to the table below for the Manual Calibration/Performance pulldown menu. (Performance routines are in bold).
Reason Pull Down Menu – MANUAL CALIBRATION
REASON DESCRIPTION OF ACTION PERFORMED
ManPerform_Lateral_Centering
ManFind_Centering
ManFind_DAC
MandFind_Air
MandFind MA
ManFind_Flatts
ManFind_FlattsFF
ManFind_Level
ManFind_LevelFF
ManFind_Level2
ManFind_Level2FF
ManFind_PilotAir
ManPerform_MTF
Clear_BadDetsList
How to Run Manual Performance / Calibration
1. After the reason is selected, a text editor appears, containing the calibration/performance routine text of the Reason that was selected.
Find and edit the appropriate text parameters for the calibration or performance routine you selected. To edit a routine, highlight the
text value (mA, voltage, etc.) with the mouse pointer. (Click on the text, hold and drag across the text of choice until the text displays
in reverse video.) Refer to Figure 110.
2. After the text is highlighted, type in the new value. For example, select 130kV and type in 120kV. After the text is edited, save the
file and close the text editor window. When closing the editor, you will be prompted with a information about the steps you should
perform. Refer to Figure 111. (In this example, the ManFind_Centering Reason was chosen.) Click on OK to continue.
3. From the scanning screen, click on the Proceed to Scan button, then the Start Scan button to continue with the Performance routine.

Philips Medical Systems. Confidential and Proprietary information. Refer to Title Page.
2. Right
mouse click.
Select SAVE
from menu

3. Right mouse click on bar.

Select Close from menu

1. Select parameter with mouse

pointer. Type in new value.

FIGURE 110 MANUAL PERFORMANCE / CALIBRATION TEXT EDITOR

Philips Medical Systems. Confidential and Proprietary information. Refer to Title Page.
 Move Couch to LandMark position.

1) Use lasers to center performance phantom.

2) Move couch to position phantom between the MTF & Low
Contrast sections (approx. 70mm from tip of peg.)

In the future, to reset a LandMark you must reselect a reason.

OK

FIGURE 111 MANUAL PERFROMANCE / CALIBRATION INFORMATION WINDOW

Philips Medical Systems. Confidential and Proprietary information. Refer to Title Page.
PERFORMANCE SPECIFICATIONS
INTRODUCTION

This document provides system performance tests, test methods, and performance specifications for the AcQSim CT CT System. The test
methods assume familiarity with the operation of the AcQSim CT System. A AcQSim CT System satisfying these performance
specifications is a necessary but not sufficient condition for acceptable system performance.

TEST PHANTOM

The test phantom used for the majority of these tests is the Philips Medical Systems Performance Phantom. This phantom is supplied with
the AcQSim CT System. This phantom is specially designed to evaluate the image performance of Philips Medical Systems CT systems
and consists of the six separate scanable sections as described below. The standard phantom landmark for many of the tests is the crease
between the fourth and fifth sections.

1. A 12 inch diameter uniform water section is used for full field uniformity and noise.

2. A 8 inch diameter uniform water section is used for half field uniformity and noise.

3. A 6 inch diameter uniform water section is used for low contrast measurements.

4. A 6 inch diameter low contrast section contains a low contast plastic insert (.35% contrast compared to water) drilled with 7 rows of four
holes (6mm, 5mm, 4mm, 3mm, 2.5mm, 2mm, and 1.5mm). This plastic section is surrounded by water and also contains a large acrylic
peg and large polyethylene peg for measuring the linearity of the CT numbers.

5. A 6 inch diameter slice thickness / MTF section is a plastic section which contains two foil strip ramps or wedges whose angle is 14 degrees
from the phantom’s central axis. These ramps are used for measuring slice thickness. Also imbedded in this plastic section is a .05mm
diameter tungsten wire used for line spread function measuremnts leading to MTF results.

6. The last section is a removeable 1 inch diameter plastic cylinder which contains a central pin which is useful for phantom centering and
alignment with the systems central axis of rotation.

Philips Medical Systems. Confidential and Proprietary information. Refer to Title Page.
DESIGN
The following list contains descriptions of the AcQSim CT System’s design and notes differences from the Ultra Z product (version 1.0) that
are relevant for this T95 document:

Detectors and Detector Modules:

The gantry ring has 2400 individual CdWO4 detector elements. These detector elements are divided into 120 detector modules.
Each Module contains two (10 element) crystal arrays (29mm long and 2.26mm thick);
Each Crystal array (21.92mm wide) has 10 defined channels ;
Each Channel has a 1.58mm detector space;
Detector (center–to–center) distance is 2.17mm.

SDD:
The radial distance (863mm) of the detector hoop is maintained from the distance established by the Ultra Z. The SCD (focal spot to imaging
isocenter) is extended with respect to the Ultra Z from 635mm to 651mm for Rhino 4/5/6.5 X–ray tubes.

Dose Efficiency:
Assuming negligible spacing between modules and crystals:
Detector Dose EfficiencyAcQSim CT = Q.D.E.*Geometric Efficiency
QDE~100%
Geometric Efficiency= Detector space/(Module space + Intermodule dead space)
Geometric Efficiency~ 15.8/(21.9+ (2*Pi*13/240)) ~ 15.8/22.3= 70%
Geormetric Does Efficiency: Since the tube has been moved out to accomodate the larger bore, the dose to the patient will be reduced
(with respect to the Ultra Z).

Sampling:
Half Field scans are not supported by the AcQSim CT system.
In Full–field, 3 samples per detector angle of rotation (.15 degrees) for 512 detectors.

FOV
The Full Field field of view is extended from 48 cm (Ultra Z) to 60 cm.

Philips Medical Systems. Confidential and Proprietary information. Refer to Title Page.
PREREQUISITES
1. The factory laser alignment procedure has been successfully completed.
2. Couch calibration has been completed and tilt position is correct.
3. A complete calibration, i.e. changed tube calibration, has run successfully. This complete calibration means that electronic centering,
DAC, air calibration, MA curves, pilot cals, spectrum and scaling constants have been generated. It also means that mechanical alignment
of the x–ray tube, both lateral and axial have been generated.
4. This procedure is intended to be used only on systems running with AcQSim CT 1.0 Software (or higher) system software and AcQSim
CT 1.0 (or higher) diagnostic software.
5. All diagnostic programs and software tools referenced within this document, or their functional equivalent, must be resident in the software
(i.e. cna baco, cna resolver, cna water, mtf, kvhvl, lowcon, slice thickness, and uniformity).
6. AutoVoice and auto–archive must be ”OFF” for all tests. Data Save must be off unless otherwise specified.
7. Prior to beginning this performance test, it must be verified that an open circuit (>10 Mohm) exists between the ground block (DC
Common) and the AC Common wire. This can be performed simply by removing the green/yellow striped wire from the ground block located
on the cardfile and measuring with an ohmmeter (20M range).
8. Ensure that the face of the phantoms used during these tests are positioned parallel to the central xray of the fan beam. Run
Center_Phantom to insure correct positioning of the Philips Medical Systems performance test phantom.
9. The number and location of bad detecters is within the system specification for bad detecters. See below.
System Spec for Bad Detectors
a. There can be no more than 16 bad detectors per system / else replace the module with the most bad detectors.
b. There can be no more than 3 bad channels per detector module / else replace the module.
c. There can be no more than 2 adjacent bad detectors, either in a module or in adjacent modules / else replace the module.
d. No defective channel can adversely effect other channels in a quadrature manner / else replace the defective component causing
the adverse effect.
e. Any module with a defective ARDAS channel must be replaced.
**** VERIFICATION ****
1. A permanent record (as a logfile or data sheet) of all system performance data of the scanner must be stored
via digital archive or hard copy.

Philips Medical Systems. Confidential and Proprietary information. Refer to Title Page.
TEST 1 – LASER ALIGNMENT TEST – FIRST PILOT –AUTO POSITIONING
Purpose: To verify that the alignment laser beams align with the transaxial x–ray beam. Also to verify the pilot scan operation and the couch
positioning are correct. Test Parameters and Method: Manual

1. Enter the Clinical Scanning or Console mode of operation.

2. Select the Adult Brain protocol.
3. Center and align the 6 inch water section of the Philips Medical Systems Performance Phantom on the CT System couch and gantry
using the patient alignment lasers. The laser lights should bisect the phantom.
4. Perform a vertical pilot scan of the phantom with a pilot range of +150 to –150 mm. After the pilot image is displayed, note that the
image of the phantom is centered in he the pilot scanned area. Adjust the window setting and zoom the image to optimally view the
phantom.
5. In the pilot scan find the dark rectangular portion in the last section of the phantom that is a slot for hanging the centering rod or
additional phantoms. Position the plan line at the exact bottom of this rectangular region which is between the endplate and the slice
thickness/mtf section.
6. Select a Cine scan type and record the the co–ordinate location of the plan line under Extent: _________________.
7. Start the Cine scan and observe the resulting axial image. Set the level to 100 and the window to 200. The table is positioned properly
if the two parallel bars (slice thickness wedges) and the oval portion (bisecting the upper bar) are visible in the image. Note the final
couch position recorded under scan status: ________________.
8. Turn on the lasers and verify that the beams fall directly on the seam between the mtf/slice thickness section and the endplate. If
necessary, adjust laser positions on the x–ray frame and repeat the laser alignment test if one or more of the lasers do not fall on the
seam.
9. Record all test results below or on a system performance data sheet.
Results and Specification:

Pilot Scan Operation [pilot image centered] ( ok )

Pre Cine Scan Plan Location [extent position]
Post Scan Couch Location (within .5mm of previous line)
Couch Positioning (Parallel bars and oval visible in image) ( ok )
Laser / X–Ray Beam Alignment (Laser line falls on phantom seam correctly) (+/– 0.5mm)

Philips Medical Systems. Confidential and Proprietary information. Refer to Title Page.
TEST 2 – CHECK FOR BAD DETECTORS
Tests and Purposes: BadDetsBaco: Determine each detector’s background noise and offset level and compare against specification.
BadDetsWater: Determine each detector’s noise level on a subtracted 12 inch water phantom scan and compare against specification.
Insure that there is no air bubble in the phantom as this could cause the test to fail.
BadDetsAir: Determine each detectors dc response level for an air scan and compare against specification.
BadDetsPEG: Determine each detector’s pin area on a subtracted peg from pin scan and compare against specification.
Test Parameters: (All set automatically by the service application software test method)

KV 100 130 130 130

Filter 0 0 0 0
Focal Spot Small Small Small Small
Scan Field Full Full Full Full
Slice Thickness 8mm 8mm 8mm 5mm
MA 30 130 90 70
Frame Speed 2 4 4 4
Matrix_Y 512 512 512 512
Recon_type Normal Over Over Over
Recon_Field na 600 600 600
Couch na +106mm #1 –160mm –39mm for scan #1
+108mm #2 –60mm for scan #2
Conditions
Acq_chspd 0 0 0 0
Samples/unit 3 3 3 3
Src_active_dets 648 648 648 648
Calcium_correction Off Off Off Off
Scan_Start_Degrees Variable Variable Variable Variable
Off set Frequency 12 KHz na na na
Scan Type na Scan Scan Scan
Command_type Scan Scan Scan Scan

Philips Medical Systems. Confidential and Proprietary information. Refer to Title Page.
Test Method:
· Service Application
· Calibrate WorkStep
· Center_Phantom
· Find_BadDets Reason

–BadDetsBaco
–BadDetsWater
–BadDetsAir
–BadDetsPeg

Results and Specification:

BadDetsBaco BadDetsWater
Ave offset: ______________________________( ref. e–02v ) Water Ave. Noise:__________________________( ref. e–04v )
Max offset: ____________________________ ( –3.50e–02 v) Water Max Noise: _________________________( 6.00e–04 v )
Min offset: _____________________________ ( –2.50e–02 v) Water Min Noise: _________________________(> 1.70e–04 v )
Ave noise: _____________________________ ( ref. e–05v )
Max noise: ____________________________ ( 7.00e–05 v )
Min noise: _____________________________ (> 1.5.e–05 v )

BadDetsAir BadDetsPeg
Air Ave. Response:__________________________( ref. +00v ) Peg Area Ave. : ___________________ ( ref. e +04 )
Air Max Response : _________________________(–6.00e+00 v) Peg Area Max. :____________________ ( ref. e +04 )
Air Min Response: __________________________( –2.00e+00 v) Peg Area Min. :____________________ ( ref. e +04 )

All detector Peg Area Values must be within +/–12% of the system average, else place the offending detector on the bad list.
Specification: All BadDets tests must run to completion without errors.

Philips Medical Systems. Confidential and Proprietary information. Refer to Title Page.
TEST 3 – PERFORM CNA (COHERENT NOISE ANALYSIS)
Tests and Purposes: Perform CNABaco: Perform spectrum analysis on detector fans for a background scan and verify that background
noise is within specifications.
Perform CNAWater: Perform Spectrum Analysis on detector fans of two subtracted 8 inch water scans and verify that the noise amplitudes
are within specification.
Perform CNAResolver: Perform spectrum analysis of detector fan data of a digital check scan and verify that the peak to peak arc–sec
amplitudes are within specification.
Key Test Parameters: (All set automatically by software method)

KV 130 130 130

Filter 0 0 0
Focal Spot Large Large Large
Slice Thickness 8mm 8mm 8mm
MA 120 150 120
Scan Field Full Full Full
Frame Speed 2 2 2
Matrix_Y 512 512 512
Recon_type Normal Over Norm
Conditions
Samples/unit 3 3 3
Src_active_dets 648 648 648
Acq_chspd 3 3 3
Command_type Scan Scan Scan
Scan_Start_Degrees Variable 0 degrees Variable
Scan Digital Check Freq. na na 2MHz
Background Freq 12kHz na na

Philips Medical Systems. Confidential and Proprietary information. Refer to Title Page.
Test Method:
· Service Application
· Calibrate WorkStep
· Perform _CNA Reason
–CnaBaco
–CnaWater
–CnaResolver

Test Results and Specifications:

CnaBaco
Frequency Measured Result Specification
Any one > 30 hz Highest Value = < 4.00e–06 vp
White Noise (Total) < 5.0e–05 vp

CnaWater
Frequency Range (hz) Highest Measured Value Specification (vp)
10 – 100hz < 3.5e–04 vp
100 – 399hz < 9.0e–04vp
400 – 650hz < 3.7e–04vp
> 650hz < 1.4e–04vp
White Noise (Total) < 5.0e–03 vp

CnaResolver
Frequency Measured Result Specification (arc sec)
450 cycles/rev < 3.35 arc–sec p–p
Any frequency other than 450cycles/rev Highest Value = < 1.67 arc–sec p–p
White Noise (Total) < 2.0e+01 arc–sec p–p

Philips Medical Systems. Confidential and Proprietary information. Refer to Title Page.
TEST 4 – BEAM QUALITY – KVHVL

Purpose: Measure the half value layer of the system and verify that it meets specification.

Test Parameters: : (All set automatically by the service application software test method:

Compensator None
KV 130
Filter 0
Focal Spot Large
Scan Field Full
Slice Thickness 2mm
MA 130
Frame Speed 4
Matrix_Y 512
Recon_type Over
Recon_Field 240
Algorithm Smooth
Couch Move couch –159mm relative to phantom 0 for scan #1 with kvhvl fixture
Move couch –161mm relative to phantom 0 for scan #2 w/o kvhvl fixture
Conditions
Acq_chspd 0
Scan Type Scan
Samples/unit 3
Src_active_dets 648
Calcium_correction Off
Command_type Scan
Scan_Start_Degrees 0

Philips Medical Systems. Confidential and Proprietary information. Refer to Title Page.
Test Method:
· Service Application
· Calibrate WorkStep
· Perform_KVHVL Reason

Test Results and Specifications:

HVL (@130 KV) ______________________(3.7 to 4.5 mm of aluminum)

HVL (@100 KV) ______________________extrapolated from 130 KV measurement (2.8 to 3.7 mm)
Calculated KVp ______________________(For reference only; approx. 130KVp)

Philips Medical Systems. Confidential and Proprietary information. Refer to Title Page.
TEST 5 – MTF

Purpose: Determine the Modulation Transfer Function (MTF) by scanning a thin wire and verifiying that the system meets specification.

Test Parameters: : All set automatically by the service application software test method:

3 MTF Measurements are made: #1 #2 #3

KV 130
Filter 0
Focal Spot Small Large Small
Scan Field Full
Slice Thickness 8mm
MA 130
Frame Speed 4 4 1
Matrix_Y 512
Scan Type Scan
Recon_type NORM
Recon_Field 60mm
Algorithm MTF
Couch Move couch to –9mm relative to phantom 0 for scan #1, #2, #3.
Conditions
3 MTF Measurements are made:
Command_type Scan
Scan_Start_Degrees Variable
Samples/unit 3
Src_active_dets 648
Calcium_correction Off
Acq_chspd 0

Philips Medical Systems. Confidential and Proprietary information. Refer to Title Page.
Test Method:
· Service Application
· Calibrate WorkStep
· Perform_MTF Reason

Test Results and Specifications:

Scan #1 (Small Spot) Scan #2 (Large Spot) Scan #3 (1 sec; Small Spot)
50% modulation _________ ( 7.0 lp/cm) __________ (6.8 lp/cm) __________ ( 7.0 lp/cm)
10% modulation _________ (12.0 lp/cm) __________ (11.5 lp/cm) __________ (11.5 lp/cm)
5% modulation _________ (13.0 lp/cm) __________ (12.6 lp/cm) __________ (12.6 lp/cm)

Philips Medical Systems. Confidential and Proprietary information. Refer to Title Page.
TEST 6 – SLICE THICKNESS

Purpose: Measure various slice thicknesses and verify that the system meets the specification.

Test Parameters: All set automatically by the service application software test method.

KV 130 130 130 130

Filter 0 0 0 0
Focal Spot Large Large Large Large
Scan Field Full Full Full Full
Slice Thickness 8mm 5mm 3mm 2mm
MA 100 100 100 100
Frame Speed 4 4 4 4
Matrix_Y 512 512 512 512
Recon_type Norm Norm Norm Norm
Recon_Field 60mm 60mm 60mm 60mm
Conditions:
Acq_chspd 0 0 0 0
Scan Type Scan Scan Scan Scan
Samples/unit 3 3 3 3
Src_active_det 648 648 648 648
Calcium_correction Off Off Off Off
Command_type Scan Scan Scan Scan
Scan_Start_Degrees Variable Variable Variable Variable

Test Method:

Service Application
Calibration Workstep
Perform_

Philips Medical Systems. Confidential and Proprietary information. Refer to Title Page.
Test Results and Specifications:

Nominal Slice Thickness Results Specification

8mm 7.2 to 8.8mm
5mm 4.5 to 5.5mm
3mm 2.5 to 3.5mm
2mm 1.5 to 2.5mm

Philips Medical Systems. Confidential and Proprietary information. Refer to Title Page.
TEST 7 – WATER UNIFORMITY AND NOISE

KV 80 100 120 130 140

Scan Field Full Full Full Full Full
Filter 0 0 0 0 0
Focal Spot Large Large Large Large Large
Algorithm Soft Tissue Soft Tissue Soft Tissue Soft Tissue Soft Tissue
MA 130 130 130 130 130
Frame Speed 4 4 4 4 4
Slice Thickness 8mm 8mm 8mm 8mm 8mm
Recon Field 480 mm 480 mm 480 mm 480 mm 480 mm

Test Method:
· Service Applications
· Calibrate WorkStep
· Perform_Uniformity: Measurements made on center of fov, at 1/2 radius for peripherals. Measurements using a 2000mm2 square ROL.

Results and Specifications:

FF Uniformity and Noise ( Filter 0 ) 80KV 100KV 120KV 130KV 140KV

Center Value (0) = (0 +/– 2.0)
Highest Perif Value (0) =(C.V. +/–3.0)
Full Field Noise Spec (x10) 7.5 7 7 7 7
(Max. Std. Dev. in HU)

Philips Medical Systems. Confidential and Proprietary information. Refer to Title Page.
TEST 8 – LOW CONTRAST RESOLUTION

Purpose: To measure the low contrast resolution of the system under certain clinical parameters and determine if the low contrast resolution
is within specification.

Test Parameters: (All set automatically by the service application software test method)

KV 130
Filter 0
Focal Spot Small
Scan Field Full
Slice Thickness: 8mm
MA 160
Frame Speed 4
Matrix_Y 512
Recon Type Over
Recon Field 250
Algorithm Soft Tissue
Couch Move couch +16mm relative to phantom 0 for scan #1
Move couch +40mm relative to phantom 0 for scan #2
Conditions:
Acq_chsp 0
Scan Type Scan
Samples/Unit 3
Src_active_dets 648
Calcium_correction Off
Command_type Scan
Scan_start_degrees Variable

Philips Medical Systems. Confidential and Proprietary information. Refer to Title Page.
Test Method:
· Service Applications
· Calibrate WorkStep
· Perform_LowCon_Reason

Test Results and Specifications:

Low Contrast Measurement 0.25 to 0.55%

Noise in Low Con Section </= 1.55 HU std. dev. of water
Hole Size at 0.35% contrast </= 3.5mm
CT Number of Water 0 +/– 5 HU
CT NUmber of Acrylic (peg1) 120 +/– 10 HU
CT Number of Polyethylene (peg2) –96 +/– 5 HU

Philips Medical Systems. Confidential and Proprietary information. Refer to Title Page.
TEST 9 – MULTI–SLICE STUDY CYCLE TIME
Purpose: Measure the study cycle time for a common time consuming multi–slice study and verify that the system meets the timing
specification.

Test Parameters: This is a manual test.

Test Object 8” Water Phantom

Protocol Abdomen
Algorithm Soft Tissue
Scan Time 1.5 sec
mA 120
KV 130
Slice Thick 8mm
Scan Angle normal
Couch Increment 8mm
Data save Off

Test Method:

1. Verify that the starting tube heat is less than 30%.

2. Plan an axial scan sequence of 30 axial images and Plan / Edit any of the specified scan parameters of the protocol to match the above
specified parameters.
3. Total study time is measured from x–ray on of the first scan to image preview complete for the 30 th scan.
Results and Specification:

Time from first to last exposure = ___________ (< 85sec.)

Total time from first exposure to last image review = ___________ (< 90sec.)

Philips Medical Systems. Confidential and Proprietary information. Refer to Title Page.
TEST 10 – SPIRAL SCAN STUDY CYCLE TIME
Purpose: Measure the spiral study cycle time for a common time consuming spiral study and verify that the system meets the timing
specification.

Test Parameters: This is a manual test.

Test Object 8” Water Phantom

Protocol Abdomen
Algorithm Soft Tissue
Scan Time 1.5 sec per revolution
mA 120
KV 130
Slice Thick 8 mm
Index 8 mm
Pitch 1
Interpolation Standard
PVC Off
Data save Off

Test Method:

1. Verify that the starting tube heat is less than 30%.

2. Plan a spiral scan sequence of 29 axial images and Plan/Edit any of the specified scan parameters of the protocol to match the above
specified parameters.
3. Total study time is measured from x–ray on of the first scan to image preview complete for the 29th scan.
Use either the system’s line profile and distance measurement utilities or the background to disappearing ramp method. See the CTDI
document for a detailed description of this latter method].

Time from first to last exposure = ____________ (< 48sec.)

Total time from first exposure to last image review = ____________ (< 80sec. )

Philips Medical Systems. Confidential and Proprietary information. Refer to Title Page.
TEST 11 – BACKUP TIMER (OPTIONAL)

PURPOSE
This procedure defines the methods to be followed to verify the scan time, pilot time and x–ray back–up timer are within design parameters.

EQUIPMENT REQUIRED
Standard Test Technician Tool Box.

Gould RS 3200 strip chart recorder.

CAUTION
WHEN HANDLING PRINTED CIRCUIT BOARDS OR ANY ESD SENSITIVE DEVICES
USE APPROPRIATE ESD GROUNDING PRECAUTIONS.

NOTE
Unless otherwise specified the system should be powered up and the computer booted
up.

NOTE
Ensure the tube has been properly warmed up prior to performing sections that pro-
duce x–rays.

PROCEDURE

1. Raise the patient support to a height that will allow the carbon top to pass through the center of the scanner before starting the test.
2. Put the GPUC on an extender card.
3. Attach a chip clip to U13.

Philips Medical Systems. Confidential and Proprietary information. Refer to Title Page.
 CAUTION
THE LENGTH OF THE CHIP CLIP CAUSES THE PINS TO BE VERY CLOSE TO THE
GANTRY SIDE COVER. CARE MUST BE TAKEN THAT THE CHIP CLIP LEADS DO
NOT SHORT AGAINST THE GANTRY SIDE COVER.

4. On the Gould chart recorder set the D.C. amplifier (channel 1) as follows:
Full Scale Voltage .05

Sensitivity x100

Filter OFF

5. Connect both leads of channel 1 of the chart recorder to TP1 (D.C. common on the GPUC card).
6. Start the chart recorder at a speed of 5 mm per sec, center the ink pen on the graph, and stop the chart recorder.
7. Connect the signal lead of channel 1 to the x–ray start/ stop pulse (XRSTSP) located at U13 pin 3 on the GPUC board. Connect the
negative lead to TP1.
8. Modify CENTER CAL protocol in the CLINICAL mode as follows:
SCAN TIME: 4 FOV: LARGE SCAN ANGLE: OVER

9. Perform a scan. Prior to clicking the ’start’ button on the screen, start the chart recorder at a speed of 100mm/sec.
10. At the completion of the scan, stop the recorder and compute the time between the two ”XRSTSP” pulse transitions. Record this time
on data sheet.
11. Modify CENTER CAL protocol in the CLINICAL mode as follows:
SCAN TIME: 2 FOV: LARGE SCAN ANGLE: NORM

12. Perform a scan. Prior to clicking the ’start’ button on the screen, start the chart recorder at a speed of 100mm/sec.
13. At the completion of the scan, stop the recorder and compute the time between the two ”XRSTSP” pulse transitions. Record this time
on data sheet.

Philips Medical Systems. Confidential and Proprietary information. Refer to Title Page.
14. Modify CENTER CAL protocol in the CLINICAL mode to perform a pilot scan. Position the patient support top to allow for a travel of
256mm on each side of the landmark. Change the PILOT RANGE to:
START: –256 END: +256

15. Perform a pilot scan. Prior to clicking the ’start’ button on the screen, start the chart recorder at a speed of 100mm/sec.
16. At the completion of the pilot scan, stop the recorder and compute the time between the two ”XRSTSP” pulse transitions. Record this
time on data sheet.
17. Move the carbon top to its outermost position. Ensure there are no obstructions in the scan field.
18. Switch from CLINICAL to DIAGNOSTIC MODE.
19. On the Gould chart recorder set the D.C. amplifier (channel 1) as follows:
Full Scale Voltage .25

Sensitivity x100

Filter OFF

20. Connect both leads of channel 1 of the chart recorder to DC common.

21. Start the chart recorder at a speed of 5 mm per sec, center the ink pen on the graph, and stop the chart recorder.
22. Remove the J1 connector from VFSC board 5 (For AcQSim CT use VFSC board 7). Insert an extender pin in J1 pin 4 and J1 pin 1.
Connect the chart recorder positive lead to pin 1 and the common lead to pin 4.
23. From an Xterm window change the directory by typing: cd/opt/PICKER/picr/service_util/diagnostics/pq2000p/olevel/bin
24. At the prompt type: backup_timer

Philips Medical Systems. Confidential and Proprietary information. Refer to Title Page.
25. Execute macro @povt4. Start the chart recorder at a speed of 100mm/sec when instructed to do so. This macro will generate an
exposure to verify the back–up timer.
26. Stop the chart recorder once the x–ray over time error occurs.
27. Compute the actual exposure time from the strip chart read–out. Record this time on data sheet.
28. Execute macro @povt2. Start the chart recorder at a speed of 100mm/sec when instructed to do so. This macro will generate an
exposure to verify the back–up timer.
29. Stop the chart recorder once the x–ray over time error occurs.
30. Compute the actual exposure time from the strip chart read–out. Record this time on data sheet.
31. Return the system to the original configuration.

Philips Medical Systems. Confidential and Proprietary information. Refer to Title Page.
SYSTEM PERFORMANCE DATA SHEET Date:______________ System I.D.:_____________________________
TEST 1: COUCH/LASER POSITION

Pilot Scan Operation [ pilot image centered ] __________ ( ok )

Pre Cine Scan Plan Location [extent position] __________
Post Scan Couch Location [ within .5mm of previous line ] __________
Couch Positioning [Parallel bars and oval visible in image ] __________ ( ok )
Laser / X–Ray Beam Alignment [Laser line falls on phantom seam correctly] __________ (+/– .5mm)

TEST 2: CHECK FOR BAD DETECTORS

BadDetsBaco Ave offset ____________________________ ( ref. e–02v )

Max offset ____________________________ (–3.50e–02 v)
Min offset ____________________________ ( –2.50e–02 v)
Ave noise ____________________________ ( ref. e–05v )
Max noise ____________________________ (7.00e–05 v )
Min noise ____________________________ (> 1.5.e–05 v )

BadDetsWater Water Ave. Noise ____________________________( ref. e–04 v )

Water Max Noise ___________________________ ( 6.00e–04 v )
Water Min Noise ____________________________ (> 1.70e–04 v)

BadDetsAir Air Ave. Offset ____________________________ ( ref. +00v )

Air Max Offset ____________________________ ( –6.00e+00 v )
Air Min Offset ____________________________ ( –2.00e+00 v )

BadDetsPeg Peg Area Ave. Offset ____________________________ ( ref. e +04 )

Peg Area Max. Offset ____________________________ ( ref. e +04 )
Peg Area Min. Offset ____________________________ ( ref. e +04 )

All detector Peg Area Values must be within +/– 12% of the system average, else place the offending detector on the bad list.
Specification: All BadDets tests must run to completion without errors.

Philips Medical Systems. Confidential and Proprietary information. Refer to Title Page.
TEST 3: COHERENT NOISE ANALYSIS (CNA)

CnaBaco Frequency Measured Result Specification

Any one > 30 hz Highest Value = < 4.00e–06 vp
White Noise (Total) < 5.0e–05vp

CnaWater Frequency Range (hz) Highest Measured Value Specification (vp)

10 – 100hz < 3.5e–04 vp
100 – 399hz < 5.0e–04vp
400 – 650hz < 3.7e–04vp
> 650hz < 1.4e–04vp
White Noise (Total) < 5.0e–03 vp

CnaResolver Frequency Measured Result Specification (arc sec)

450 cycles/rev < 3.35 arc–sec p–p
Any freq other than 450cycles/rev Highest Value = < 1.67 arc–sec p–p
White Noise (Total) < 2.0e+01 arc–sec p–p

Philips Medical Systems. Confidential and Proprietary information. Refer to Title Page.
TEST 4: BEAM QUALITY – KVHVL

HVL (@130 KV ) ______________________ (3.7 to 4.5 mm of aluminum)

HVL (@100 KV ) ______________________ extrapolated from 130 KV measurement (2.8 to 3.7 mm)
Calculated KVp _______________________ For reference Only; approx. 130KV)

TEST 5: MTF

Scan #1 (Small Spot) Scan #2 (Large Spot) Scan #3 (1 sec; Small)

50% modulation _________ (7.0 lp/cm) __________ (6.8 lp/cm) _________ (6.8 lp/cm)
10% modulation _________ (12.0 lp/cm) __________ (11.5 lp/cm) _________ (11.5 lp/cm)
5% modulation _________ (13.0 lp/cm) __________ (12.6 lp/cm) _________ (12.6 lp/cm)

TEST 6: SLICE THICKNESS

Nominal Slice Thickness Results Specification

8mm 7.2 to 8.8mm
5mm 4.5 to 5.5mm
3mm 2.5 to 3.5mm
2mm 1.5 to 2.5mm

TEST 7: WATER UNIFORMITY AND NOISE

FF Uniformity and Noise ( Filter 0 ) 80KV 100KV 120KV 130KV 140KV

Center Value (0) = (0 +/– 2.0)
Highest Perif Value (0) =(C.V. +/– 3.0)
FF (0) Noise Spec (x10) 7.5 7.00 7.00 7.0 7.00
(Max. Std. Dev. in HU)

Philips Medical Systems. Confidential and Proprietary information. Refer to Title Page.
TEST 8: LOW CONTRAST RESOLUTION

Low Contrast Measurement _________________ (0.25 to 0.55%)

Noise in Low Con Section _________________ (< 1.5 HU std. dev. of water)
Hole Size at 0.35% contrast _________________ (< 3.5mm)
CT Number of Water _________________ (0 +/– 5 HU)
CT Number of Acrylic (peg 1) _________________ (120 +/– 10 HU)
CT Number of Polyethylene (peg 2) _________________ (–96 +/– 5 HU)

TEST 9: MULTI–SLICE STUDY CYCLE TIME (30 Axial Slice Sequence)

Time from first to last exposure = ___________ (< 85sec.)

Total time from first exposure to last image review = ___________ (< 90sec. )

TEST 10: SPIRAL SCAN STUDY CYCLE TIME (30 Spiral Slice Sequence)

Time from first to last exposure = ____________ (< 48sec.)

Total time from first exposure to last image review = ____________ (< 80sec. )

TEST 11: BACKUP TIMER (OPTIONAL)

TIME SPECIFICATIONS
Description Results Specification Initials Date
Obtained
4.2 sec. Scan time sec 3.79 to 4.61 secs. NA NA
2 sec. Scan time sec 1.80 to 2.19 secs. NA NA
Full field pilot sec 4.20 to 6.00 secs. NA NA
Back–up timer sec ≤ 4.45 secs. NA NA
Back–up timer sec ≤ 2.225 secs NA NA

Philips Medical Systems. Confidential and Proprietary information. Refer to Title Page.
ACQSIM CT PLANNED MAINTENANCE
This manual provides the operational guidelines and planned maintenance checks to be done on Philips Medical System’s AcQSim CT
system. All system values measured must be within the allowable tolerances noted in the procedure sections. Repair action description
and the completion date of the action should also be entered in the Data Sheet. Data sheets are provided separately on paper.
GENERAL
Some procedure intervals (e.g. air filters) may vary slightly per system environmental conditions. Maintenance time should be prearranged
with the customer to assure ample time for the system checks without any loss of patient scan time.

The following sections consist of the maintenance procedures to be done during the PM checks. Any parameter measurements made
should be within the denoted tolerance, and checked off in the system log book once within specifications. PM frequency is quarterly, but
may vary slightly according to specific conditions and customer use.
POWER UP/DOWN PROCEDURE
Power up/power procedures are accessible via a hyperlink to that procedure: Power Up/Down
MA CURVE CALIBRATION
Executed from the AutoCalibration Service Application. Refer to the AUTOCAL Manual.
SPECTRUM (LEVEL) PROGRAM
Executed from the AutoCalibration Service Application. Refer to the AUTOCAL Manual.
ERROR LOGGER
The error log should be reviewed and cleared at each PM. This is done via the Service Applications GUI. The report generated should then
be viewed for the validity, frequency, and severity of the errors. Any errors should be addressed during the service call.
PERFORMANCE TESTS
The Quarterly Planned Maintenance for the AcQSim CT requires the Service Engineer to run Standard Performance through Autocal. Refer
to the AUTOCAL Manual for procedures and specifications.
Archiver Transfer and Setup
The phone number of WHQ Performance Archiver database is ”dictated” by the .MAIN_PHONEHOME_CONF file. This allows changes
to the telephone number directly from WHQ Engineering. Use the PhoneHome program to set the performance archiver transfer for once
every three months.

Philips Medical Systems. Confidential and Proprietary information. Refer to Title Page.
GANTRY CLEANING–INTERNAL

Introduction: This procedure is used to perform a general cleaning of the Gantry interior.

Tools Required: FSE Tool Kit

Vacuum Cleaner

Materials Required: P/N 311275

Estimated Time: 15 Minutes

Interior

WARNING
USE EXTREME CARE WHEN WORKING INSIDE THE GANTRY. 480 & 208 AC, 5
AND 15 VOLTS DC ARE EXPOSED WHEN THE GANTRY COVERS ARE OPEN.
ACCIDENTAL CONTACT WITH THESE VOLTAGES MAY CAUSE SERIOUS INJURY
OR DEATH TO THE SERVICE PERSONNEL.

1. Remove Gantry power. Refer to the Power Up/Down procedure. Remove Gantry power at the wall box.
2. Open the top front gantry cover. Remove the bottom front gantry cover. Refer to the Gantry Cover Removal procedure.

WARNING
GANTRY COVERS ARE VERY HEAVY. OPEN GANTRY COVERS MUST BE
PROPERLY SECURED OR REMOVED FROM THE IMMEDIATE SERVICE AREA.
FAILURE TO COMPLY COULD RESULT IN SERIOUS PERSONAL INJURY.

3. Use mild, non–abrasive cleaner applied to a cloth to remove soil marks from the painted surfaces.
4. Continue to the Slip Ring Cleaning procedure.

Philips Medical Systems. Confidential and Proprietary information. Refer to Title Page.
SLIP RING CLEANING (QUARTERS 2 AND 4)
Introduction : This procedure covers cleaning the slip–rings using a vacuum cleaner.
Tools Required: FSE Tool Kit, Vacuum Cleaner

WARNING
USE EXTREME CARE WHEN WORKING INSIDE THE GANTRY. 480 & 208 AC, 5
AND 15 VOLTS DC ARE EXPOSED WHEN THE GANTRY COVERS ARE OPEN.
ACCIDENTAL CONTACT WITH THESE VOLTAGES MAY CAUSE SERIOUS INJURY
OR DEATH TO THE SERVICE PERSONNEL.

1. Remove Gantry power. Refer to the Power Up/Down procedure. Remove Gantry power at the wall box.
2. Open and secure the top front gantry cover and remove the bottom cover. Refer to the Gantry Cover Removal procedure. Remove
the gantry cone. Refer to the Front Cone Removal procedure in the same chapter.

NOTE
The Slip Ring Guard Access Window Cover is held in place by velcro strips. Do not cut
the single cable tie that holds the cover.

3. Lift the Slip Ring Guard Access Window Cover and move it aside. Manually rotate the Scan Frame in the CCW direction and vacuum
any dust or debris that may have collected in the area.

CAUTION
ONLY ROTATE THE SCAN FRAME IN THE CCW DIRECTION. FAILURE TO COMPLY
MAY DO DAMAGE TO THE SLIP RING BRUSHES.

4. Replace the cone and top and bottom covers and return system to normal.

NOTE
The only approved cleaning solvent for the Poly Sci Slip Ring is 90% isopropyl alcohol.
Cramolin Deoxit Wipes and Pink Pearl Erasers are no longer approved.The alcohol is
to be purchased locally and must not contain any impurities, such as camphor, menthol.

Philips Medical Systems. Confidential and Proprietary information. Refer to Title Page.
GANTRY CLEANING EXTERNAL

Materials Required: 1. Spray touch up paint – Philips White P/N T53ZG–77, Philips Blue P/N T53ZG–76
2. General purpose, mild, non–abrasive solvent (409, Fantastic, or Glass Plus.)
3. Cleaning cloth or paper towels
4. 20 x 25 x 1 Air Filter

Estimated Time: 15 minutes

General Cleaning

1. Remove Gantry power. Refer to the Power Up/Down procedure. Remove Gantry power at the wall box.
2. Use solvent cleaner to remove soil marks from painted Gantry surfaces.
Paint Touch Up
1. Clean any remaining surfaces and inspect for scratches in the paint. Touch up any blemishes found using the paints listed above.
Be careful not to overspray. To repair small scratches, apply paint using a small brush or cotton swab.
Air Filter

1. Locate the air filter access slots in the rear of the gantry base.
2. Apply Gantry power. Refer to the Power Up/Down procedure.
3. Remove the gantry front bottom cover. (Filters are removed from the front).
4. Position the new air filter into the slot in the gantry base and slide the filter in until it stops.
5. Remove gantry power.
Cables

1. Check cables and harness drapes/routings for possible damage from heat and/or moving components. Reposition and/or secure as
required.
2. Check cables for loose or damaged connectors on all power and signal cable/wires. Tighten as required.
3. Check for oil leaks around Federal Connectors. Remove, clean, re–oil both Federal Connectors.
4. Ensure no cables can be moved to touch the detector modules or mother boards.

Philips Medical Systems. Confidential and Proprietary information. Refer to Title Page.
Tilt Position Drive Belt
1. Check the tilt position drive belt for tension and signs of wear. Belt tension should be snug but not tight. Approximately 1/8” slack is
appropriate for belt tension.
Gantry Control Panel
1. Apply gantry power. Refer to the Power Up/Down procedure. Open and secure the top front gantry cover.

WARNING
ROTATING MACHINERY. STAND CLEAR OF ROTATING FRAME WHEN
EQUIPMENT IS OPERATED. FAILURE TO COMPLY MAY CAUSE SERIOUS INJURY
OR DEATH.

WARNING
LASER SOURCE PRESENT. DO NOT LOOK DIRECTLY INTO LASER SOURCE.
FAILURE TO COMPLY MAY RESULT IN SERIOUS EYE DAMAGE OR BLINDNESS.

2. Verify the following:

d. Both Gantry blowers operate.
e. Vertical, Horizontal, Tilt and Laser displays and controls operate correctly.
f. Verify that the X–ray Tube Heat Exchanger fans are operating.

Philips Medical Systems. Confidential and Proprietary information. Refer to Title Page.
GANTRY – VISUAL INSPECTION

1. Visually inspect for loose components.

2. Visually inspect for loose bolts, i.e., lock washers not in compression.

NOTE
If any bolts are in need of tightening, refer to the Repair Manual for torque specs.

Laser Radiation Caution Labels

1. Inspect the four laser radiation caution labels. If any are missing or illegible, they must be replaced.

Philips Medical Systems. Confidential and Proprietary information. Refer to Title Page.
GANTRY – LUBRICATION (QUARTERS 1 AND 3)

Introduction: This procedure outlines the steps to be followed for lubrication of the gantry subsystem which is to be done on
six month intervals.

Introduction:

Tools Required: 1. FSE tool kit.

2. Grease Gun with swivel tip.

Material Required: Mobilgrease 28 – P/N – 95749

Estimated Time: 25 minutes

Main Bearing – Grease

1. Remove Gantry power. Refer to the Power Up/Down procedure. Remove Gantry power at the wall box. Manually position the gantry
frame such that the x–ray tube is at 12 o’clock position The access hole to the grease fitting is found at the 10 o’clock position (rear
of gantry).
2. Using a grease gun, inject a small amount of grease into the fitting. Manually rotate the frame 60 degrees and add another small
amount of grease, continue 60 degree rotation and greasing until 360 degrees are covered.

Philips Medical Systems. Confidential and Proprietary information. Refer to Title Page.
Z–BALANCE COUNTERWEIGHT TORQUE CHECK

Physically check the torque of the 3/4 in. (19.05mm) nuts securing the Z–Balance (triangular–shaped) counterweights to the scanframe
standoffs of the AcQSim CT Scanner. The left and right–hand Z–balance counterweight assemblies are shown below. This torque check
should be performed at EVERY preventive maintenance visit.

1. Turn gantry power off completely.

2. Open the front gantry gullwing cover.
3. Remove the front cone.
4. Locate the Z–Balance (triangular) weights. There are two sets of these triangular weights held in place with two nuts each, 4 total.
Check the torque of each nut and ensure 80 ft–lb. (108 Nm) These do not require loctite. Ensure the lockwasher is in place and
compressed.
5. Install the front cone.
6. Close the front gullwing cover.

ENSURE THESE FOUR NUTS SHOWN

ON THE Z–BALANCE COUNTER-
WEIGHTS ARE TIGHTENED TO 80 FT–LB
(108 N/m AT EVERY PM INTERVAL

Philips Medical Systems. Confidential and Proprietary information. Refer to Title Page.
ACQIMAGE CABINET AIR FILTER CHECK

Introduction: This procedure is used to clean or replace the AcQImage Cabinet air filter.

Tools Required: FSE Tool Kit

Material Required: AcQImage Cabinet Air filter, P/N 83885 (If replacement is needed)

Estimated TIme: 15 Minutes

1. Remove AcQImage power. Refer to the Power Up/Down procedure.

2. Remove the outside cosmetic cover and inside steel cover. Refer to the AcQImage Cover Removal procedure.
3. Remove the air filter by grasping it’s front tab and sliding it out forward. Apply power and verify that the cooling fans are running.
4. The filter is designed to be cleaned and washed. Inspect the filter. If it has an excessive amount of dirt, replace it, otherwise simply
clean it. Ensure that the filter is dry before replacing.
5. Replace the covers on the cabinet. Refer to the AcQImage Covers Removal procedure in the Repair manual.

Philips Medical Systems. Confidential and Proprietary information. Refer to Title Page.
AIR FILTER
(SLIDE OUT)

FIGURE 112 ACQIMAGE CABINET AIR FILTER LOCATION

Philips Medical Systems. Confidential and Proprietary information. Refer to Title Page.
ACQIMAGE CABINET CLEANING – EXTERNAL
Introduction: This procedure is for the cleaning operation to be done on the AcQImage Cabinet.

Materials Required: 1. Spray touch up paint – Light Pearl P/N T53ZG–33 (variation -), Philips White P/N T53ZG–77 (variation A)
2. General purpose, mild, non–abrasive solvent (409, Fantastic, or Glass Plus.)
3. Cleaning cloth or paper towels

Estimated Time: 15 minutes

1. Remove Display Tower power. Refer to the Power Up/Down procedure.

2. Use solvent cleaner to remove soil marks from painted surfaces.
Paint Touch Up
1. Clean any remaining surfaces and inspect for scratches in the paint. Touch up any blemishes found using the paints listed above.
Be careful not to overspray. To repair small scratches, apply paint using a small brush or cotton swab.

CAUTION
DO NOT APPLY CLEANING SOLUTION DIRECTLY TO THE FACE OF THE SCREEN,
THE FACE OF THE CRT MONITOR, KEYBOARD OR TABLE TOP. APPLY THE
CLEANER TO A TOWEL FIRST THEN WIPE.

Philips Medical Systems. Confidential and Proprietary information. Refer to Title Page.
DISPLAY TOWER AIR FILTER CHECK

Introduction: This procedure is used to clean or replace the Display Tower air filter.

Tools Required: None

Material Required: Display Console Air Filter, P/N 83942 (If replacement is needed)

Estimated TIme: 5 Minutes

1. If the Display Tower is close to a wall on the right side, unlock the wheels and roll it out a bit to gain access to the air filter, located on
the rear panel.

NOTE
For units that have seismic brackets installed, the supplied template allows for right side
air filter clearance of 14”.

2. Grab the air filter and slide it up and out. Verify that both fans are running.
3. The filter is designed to be cleaned and washed. Inspect the filter. If it has an excessive amount of dirt, replace it, otherwise simply
clean it. Ensure that the filter is dry before replacing.
4. Roll the Display Tower back into place and lock the wheels.

Philips Medical Systems. Confidential and Proprietary information. Refer to Title Page.
DISPLAY TOWER CLEANING – EXTERNAL

Introduction: This procedure is used to perform a general cleaning of the Display Tower exterior and related components.

Tools Required: FSE Tool Kit

Materials Required: Spray touch up paint – Philips White P/N T53ZG–77.

Soft, lint free, pre–wetted cleaning towelettes.
8mm Tape Cleaning Kit – P/N 95877

Estimated TIme: 15 Minutes

1. Clean any surfaces and inspect for scratches in the paint. Touch up any blemishes found using the paints listed above. Be careful
not to overspray. To repair small scratches, apply paint using a small brush or cotton swab.
8mm TAPE DRIVE
2. Inspect the tape drive, ensure that the drive has been cleaned by the operators.

NOTE
The tape drive’s top and bottom lights will flash when tape cleaning is required.

3. If the lights indicate that cleaning is needed, insert a cleaning tape and head cleaning will automatically start. The lights will stop flashing
and the cleaning tape will be ejected when the cleaning cycle is completed.
CRT MONITOR
4. Clean the viewing monitor with pre–wetted paper towelettes.

Philips Medical Systems. Confidential and Proprietary information. Refer to Title Page.
KEYBOARD / MOUSE
5. Vacuum the keyboard using a soft bristle brush. Clean the keyboard using pre–wetted paper towelettes.
6. Open the bottom of the mouse (see figure on right) and clean the ball using tap water. If needed, use a mild detergent. Dry with a
lint–free cloth. Clean the ball cage inside the mouse. Close your eyes and blow into the ball cage to remove dust.

TABLE TOP
7. Clean the table top where required, using pre–wetted paper towelettes.
PAINT TOUCH UP
8. Clean any remaining surfaces and inspect for scratches in the paint. Touch up any blemishes found
using the above listed paint. Avoid runs by applying thinner coats more times, rather than trying to cover all in
one coat. Be careful of any overspray that may occur. For small scratches, a small brush or cotton swab may
be used to apply the paint.

Philips Medical Systems. Confidential and Proprietary information. Refer to Title Page.
PATIENT SUPPORT CLEANING–EXTERNAL
Introduction: This procedure is used to perform general Patient Support cleaning.
Tools Required: 1. FSE Tool Kit
Materials Required: 1. Spray Paint - Gray P/N T55ZG-33 and Philips White P/N T55ZG–77.
2. General purpose, mild , non–abrasive solvent, such as Formula 409, etc.
3. Cleaning cloth or paper towels.
ESTIMATED TIME: 15 Minutes
General Cleaning
1. Apply cleaning spray to a paper towel to remove soil marks from the exterior of the Patient Support system. Pay specific attention to
the side panels that collapse at the couch base.
Paint Touch up
2. Use spray paint to repair any scratches to exterior paint.

Philips Medical Systems. Confidential and Proprietary information. Refer to Title Page.
PATIENT SUPPORT CLEANING – INTERIOR
Introduction: This section describes the process of cleaning the patient support subsystem. General surface cleaning should be
performed.
Tools Required: FSE Tool Kit
Materials Required: 1. Spray Touch Up Paint – Gray P/N T53ZG–33, Philips White P/N T53ZG–77.
2. General purpose, mild , non–abrasive solvent such as Formula 409, etc.
3. General purpose cleaning cloth or paper towels.
Estimated Time: 15 Minutes.

WARNING
THE TELESCOPING BASE COVERS ARE HEAVY AND ARE HELD ONTO THE
SUB–FRAME BY FOUR SCREWS. REMOVE THE MOUNTING SCREWS ONLY
WHEN THE PATIENT SUPPORT IS AT ITS LOWEST POSITION OR ONLY AFTER
THE TELESCOPING BASE COVERS ARE PROPERLY SECURED AND BLOCKED.
FAILURE TO COMPLY MAY RESULT IN SERIOUS INJURY TO SERVICE
PERSONNEL AND MAY CAUSE EQUIPMENT DAMAGE.

1. Remove system power. Refer to the Power Up/Down procedure.

2. Remove Patient Support covers. Refer to the Patient Support Covers instructions.
3. Apply system power. Refer to the Power Up/Down procedure.
4. Raise the Patient Support to its maximum height with the Gantry Control panel switches.
5. Remove system power. Refer to the Power Up/Down procedure.
6. Use mild, non–abrasive cleaner applied to a cleaning cloth to remove soil marks from painted interior surfaces.

Philips Medical Systems. Confidential and Proprietary information. Refer to Title Page.
 ÓÓÓÓÓÓÓ
ÓÓÓÓÓ
GROUNDED TO SUB FRAME
LEFT

Ô Ô
ÓÓÓÓÓÓÓ
ÓÓÓÓÓÓ Ó
ÓÓÓÓÓÓÓ
ÓÓÓÓÓÓÔÔ
Ó
ÓÓÓÓÓÓÓ
Ó
ÓÓÓÓÓÓÓ
ÓÓÓÓÓÓÓ
ÓÓÓÓÓÓÓ
ÓÓÓÓÓÓ
ÓÓÓÓÓÓÓ ÔÔ
Ó
ÓÓÓÓÓÓÓ
ÓÓÓÓÓÓÓ
ÓÓÓÓÓÓ
ÓÓÓÓÓÓÓ
ÓÓÓÓÓÓÓ
ÇÇÓ
ÓÓÓÓÓÓÓ
ÓÓÓÓÓÓ
GROUND LUG

FRONT
ÓÓÓÓÓÓÓ
ÓÓÓÓÓÓÓ
ÓÓÓÓÓÓÓ
ÇÇ
ÇÇ
ÓÓÓÓÓÓÓ
ÇÇ
ÓÓÓÓÓÓÓ NOTE
REMOVE THE GROUND
FLAT BRAIDED CABLE WIRES ONLY FROM THE
COVERS THAT ARE TO

ÓÓÓÓÓÓÓ
SAME ON BE REMOVED

ÓÓÓÓÓÓÓ
BOTH SIDES

ÓÓÓÓÓÓ
ÓÓÓÓÓÓÓ
ÓÓÓÓÓÓ
ÓÓÓÓÓÓÓ
ÓÓÓÓÓÓÓ
ÓÓÓÓÓÓ
ÓÓÓÓÓÓÓ Ó
ÔÔ
ÓÓÓÓÓÓÓ
ÓÓÓÓÓÓ Ó
ÓÓÓÓÓÓÓ
ÓÓÓÓÓÓ Ó
Ô ÔÔÔ
ÓÓÓÓÓÓÓ
ÓÓÓÓÓÓ Ó
ÓÓÓÓÓÓÓ
Ó
D0161 ÓÓÓÓÓ
ÓÓÓÓÓÓÓ RIGHT

FIGURE 113 TELESCOPING BASE COVERS – GROUND CONNECTIONS

Table Rails and Rollers

NOTE
The tabletop must move freely and smoothly in and out of the Gantry when power is
off to the Patient Support, or when power is off to the drive motor. After time the bearings
for the carbon top may require additional grease.

Philips Medical Systems. Confidential and Proprietary information. Refer to Title Page.
PATIENT SUPPORT – INSPECTION
Introduction: This procedure describes the process for inspecting the patient support subsystem for any problems that may have
developed over time. This check should include rollers, belt tensions, limit switch assemblies and the scissor/slide
shaft parts.
Tools Required: FSE Tool Kit
Materials Required: None
Estimated Time: 15 Minutes

WARNING
DANGEROUS VOLTAGES MAY BE PRESENT. ENSURE ALL POWER IS REMOVED
FROM THE PATIENT SUPPORT SUBSYSTEM BEFORE CONTINUING. FAILURE
TO COMPLY MAY RESULT IN SERIOUS INJURY.

Hardware
1. Remove system power. Refer to the Power Up/Down procedure.
2. Look into the support pedestal area for loose or missing hardware and tighten or replace as needed.
Cables
3. Inspect all cable routings for proper placement and worn or damaged cables. Ensure all connectors are properly seated.

Philips Medical Systems. Confidential and Proprietary information. Refer to Title Page.
Belts
4. Look up under the support table top and inspect the drive belt in the table resolver assembly for any excessive wear or damage
such as grooves or slipping. Refer to Figure 114. Repair/replace as needed.
5. Inspect for dirt or dust on the drive belt and pulleys. Clean drive belt and pulleys with a clean dry cloth if needed.

Limit Switches

Drive Belt

Coarse Pot

FIGURE 114 INSPECTION POINTS

Table Top Rails and Rollers
With the gantry power OFF and the table raised high enough so that the top can be extended through the patient aperture of the gantry,
move the top manually through its entire travel. The action of the table should be smooth, quiet and easy throughout its entire travel.

Philips Medical Systems. Confidential and Proprietary information. Refer to Title Page.
1. Remove the rail covers. Refer to the Patient Support Covers procedure.
2. Visually inspect the rails for defects or debris.
3. Move the table top fully into then out of the patient aperture. If the carbon top is difficult to move or it sounds like the linear bearings
for the top need grease, then remove the front and rear covers and the mechanical stops at the end of the rails. Refer to the Patient
Support Covers procedure.
4. Move the carbon top to the rear of the Patient Support to make the grease fittings accessible on the rear linear bearing blocks. Use
a grease gun with Mobilgrease 28 and proper fittings and grease the bearing blocks.
5. Move the carbon top to the front of the patient support and repeat the greasing procedure for the front linear bearing blocks..
6. Move the Carbon top fully out of the patient aperture and replace the mechanical stops and the front and rear covers.

Philips Medical Systems. Confidential and Proprietary information. Refer to Title Page.
PATIENT SUPPORT – LUBRICATION – (ANNUALLY)
Introduction This procedure explains the procedure for lubrication of the Patient Support Subsystem.
Tools Required: FSE Tool Kit
Materials Required: 1. Paper towels
2. Dow Corning G–n paste lubricant – P/N 81709
3. Mobilgrease 28 – P/N 95749
Estimated Time: 15, Minutes

NOTE
Use a paper towel or some other suitable material or tool to apply grease to the ball–
screw.

BALL SCREW/BEARING
1. Remove system power. Refer to the Power Up/Down procedure.
2. Use a paper towel to remove any old, dirty lubricant from the ballscrew and bearing assembly shown in Figure 115. Use a paper towel
to apply a conservative amount of Mobilgrease 28 to the ballscrew and wipe away the excess.

Philips Medical Systems. Confidential and Proprietary information. Refer to Title Page.
 BALLSCREW AND
BEARING ASSEMBLY

SLIDE SLEEVE BARS

FIGURE 115 DRIVE SYSTEM LUBRICATION

Slide Sleeve Bars
3. Use a paper towel to wipe the slide sleeve bars completely.
4. Either brush or wear rubber gloves and apply by hand a thin layer of Dow Corning G–n paste to all surfaces of the slide sleeve bars.
Refer to Figure 115.

Philips Medical Systems. Confidential and Proprietary information. Refer to Title Page.
VERTICAL TRAVEL LIMIT SWITCHES – (quarters 2 and 4)
1. Check the Up and Down Limit Switches by depressing the Gantry Control Panel switches and as the table is moving depress the
limit switch (use a rod to reach the limit switch) and verify that motion stops.

NOTE
An alterative method of testing the limit switches is to apply a cable tie around the switch
so that the switch is closed and verifying no motion occurs when the respective Gantry
Control Switches are depressed.

COVER RE–ASSEMBLY

1. Lower the Patient Support to its lowest position.

2. Remove system power. Refer to the Power Up/Down procedure.
3. Carefully replace the side panels. Connect the ground wires to the side panel surfaces. Refer to Figure 113.
4. Replace the 2 screws in both the outer cover ends. Front and rear (4 total). Refer to Figure 116.
5. Replace the four phillips head screws and washers that attach the telescoping base cover panels to the subframe. Refer to
Figure 116.

Philips Medical Systems. Confidential and Proprietary information. Refer to Title Page.
 LEFT HAND PANEL

GROUND LUG

GROUND LUG

RIGHT HAND
PANEL

MOUNTING SCREWS
AND WASHERS (4)

FIGURE 116 PATIENT SUPPORT TELESCOPING BASE COVERS

Philips Medical Systems. Confidential and Proprietary information. Refer to Title Page.
PM LOG
Introduction

Results of the PM procedures should be recorded on the data sheets provided in the Data Section. If a parameter measurement is required,
the value measured should be noted in the comments and calibrated to specification as needed. When action is required, a check mark
should be entered in the ”Action Item” column on the Data Sheet. When the action item is completed, the date should be entered in the
”Data Corrected” column. Any additional comments should be recorded on the data sheets.

A copy of the completed log sheets is to be kept in the log book at the customer site and a copy is to be sent to the District Office.

Each quarterly PM will take approximately 4–5 hours to complete. This time will vary from unit to unit dependent upon problems found.

Philips Medical Systems. Confidential and Proprietary information. Refer to Title Page.
PM Log Sheet – AcQSim CT
AcQSim CT Log Sheet
Q1 Date Q2 Date Q3 Date Q4 Date: Date Action
Initials: Initials: Initials: Initials: Corrected Item
_______ _______ _______ _______
No. PROCEDURE
1 Boot System
2 MA Curve Calibration
3 Spectrum (Level) Prog.
4 Error Logger
5 Performance Tests
6 Internal Gantry Cleaning
7 Slip Ring Cleaning
8 External Gantry Cleaning
9 Gantry Visual Inspection
10 Gantry Lube (annual)
11 Z–Balance CW Check
12 AcQImage Cabinet Filter
13 AcQ. Cabinet Cleaning
14 Display Tower Filter
15 Display Tower Cleaning
16 Couch External Cleaning
17 Couch Internal Cleaning
18 Couch – Inspection
19 Couch – Lube (Annual)

Philips Medical Systems. Confidential and Proprietary information. Refer to Title Page.
Philips Medical Systems. Confidential and Proprietary information. Refer to Title Page.
 ACQSIM CT

Philips Medical Systems. Confidential and Proprietary information. Refer to Title Page.
Philips Medical Systems. Confidential and Proprietary information. Refer to Title Page.
Philips Medical Systems. Confidential and Proprietary information. Refer to Title Page.
ACQSIM CT DIAGNOSTICS

DISPLAY CONSOLE DIAGNOSTICS

DIAGNOSTIC GRAPHICAL USER INTERFACE (DIAG GUI)

Z LOGS

Philips Medical Systems. Confidential and Proprietary information. Refer to Title Page.
DISPLAY CONSOLE DIAGNOSTICS
The AcQSim CT Display Console is equipped with several different peripherals (e.g., CD–ROM, 8mm tape, etc). Diagnostics are detailed
here to help you verify / troubleshoot a problem associated with some of the peripherals and other hardware areas. The 8mm tape,
CD–ROM drive verifications and 10MB ethernet port and network tests may be used to troubleshoot/diagnose RDS+ problems.

The following verification procedures are:

8mm Tape Drive Test

Optical Drive Test

CD–ROM Drive Verification

Autovoice Test

10MB ETHERNET PORT AND NETWORK TESTS

100MB Ethernet Link Tests

Forth Diagnostics (Sparc)

Philips Medical Systems. Confidential and Proprietary information. Refer to Title Page.
8MM TAPE DRIVE TEST

NOTE
This test will verify that the 8mm tape drive hardware is properly installed and function-
ing. It will verify that a file can be transferred to and read back from the tape drive.

NOTE
This test requires at least a functional Display Tower or RDS+ loaded with applications
software on disk0. Only use 8mm tapes that have not been written to by older 8mm tape
drives on other systems.

Required: 96033 – 8mm data cartridge, 54 meter

1. From the Service Diagnostic GUI select XTERM from the UTILITIES menu. To start the Diagnostic GUI, refer to the Service Application
manual.
2. Install a non–write protected 8mm tape into the tape drive and wait for the green “ready” LED.
COPY FILE TO TAPE:

NOTE
This creates a new tape. It will write over any data currently on the tape.

If testing the primary 8mm tape drive: If testing the secondary 8mm tape drive:
At the % prompt, type At the % prompt type
tar –cvf /dev/rst29 /kernel/genunix tar –cvf /dev/rst28 /kernel/genunix
and press <CR>. and press <CR>.

This will copy the file named genunix from the kernel directory onto the 8mm tape.
COPY FILE FROM TAPE TO DIR:
3. At the % prompt, type cd /tmp and press <CR>. This changes to the tmp directory. The tmp directory will be used to copy the file
from the tape to this directory.

Philips Medical Systems. Confidential and Proprietary information. Refer to Title Page.
 NOTE
The /tmp directory is always emptied at boot up.

To test the primary 8mm tape drive: To test the secondary 8mm tape drive:
At the % prompt, type At the % prompt type
tar –xvf /dev/rst29 genunix and press <CR>. tar –xvf /dev/rst28 genunix
and press <CR>.

This will extract the file genunix to the tmp directory.

6) At the % prompt type ls and press <CR>. This will print the tmp directory to the screen. You will see the genunix file listed.
VERIFY FILE TRANSFERRED SUCCESSFULLY
4. At the % prompt type cmp /kernel/genunix genunix and press <CR>.
The cmp command will compare the files from the original to the one transferred from the 8mm tape. Any difference in the two files will
show up on the screen. (Files differ: char x line x; x is the position in the file). There should be no differences.

5. The test is now complete. You may eject the tape. At the % prompt type exit and press <CR> key to leave the xterm window. You
may now exit the Diagnostic GUI.

Philips Medical Systems. Confidential and Proprietary information. Refer to Title Page.
OPTICAL DRIVE TEST

NOTE
This test will verify whether the magneto–optical disk hardware is properly installed and
functional. It will verify that files can be transferred to the optical drive and read back
successfully. This test requires at least a functional display tower with application soft-
ware running on disk0.

Requires: Magneto–optical media 83977

1. Insert a magneto–optical disk into the Optical drive.

2. Launch the Diagnostic GUI. To start the Diagnostic GUI, refer to the Service Application manual. Select xterm from the UTILITIES
menu.
3. Enter superuser mode by typing su and press the RETURN key. At the password prompt, type picker and press <CR>.
4. If the magneto–optical media has a file system already, then go to the Verify Optical Drive section. If you are unsure, perform the
following procedure to determine:
At the # prompt type mkdir /optical and press <CR>.
At the # prompt type mount /dev/dsk/c0t3d0s2 /optical and press <CR>.

If the # prompt appears without errors go to Verify Optical Drive.

If you get an error then you must perform the Create a File System procedure.
Create a File System

NOTE
This procedure is run if errors were encountered in the file system procedure in step 4.
If no errors were encountered and you know the magneto–optical has a file system al-
ready, then go to the Verify Optical Drive section.

1. At the # prompt type format and press <CR>.

Philips Medical Systems. Confidential and Proprietary information. Refer to Title Page.
2. At the Available disk selection prompt, specify the disk. Enter the selection for c0t3d0 from the menu (Usually selection 2).
3. At the Available drive types prompt, select the number for “other.” (Usually 16)
4. At the Enter number of data cylinders: prompt, type 1773 and press <CR>.
5. At the Enter number of alternate cylinders: [2] prompt, press <CR>.
6. At the Enter number of physical cylinders: [1775] prompt, press <CR>.
7. At the Enter number of heads: prompt, type 16 and press <CR>.
8. At the Enter physical number of heads [default]: prompt, press <CR>.
9. At the Enter number of data sectors/track: prompt, type 78 and press <CR>.
10. At the Enter number of physical sectors/track [default]: prompt, press <CR>.
11. At the Enter RPM of drive [3600]: prompt, press <CR>.
12. At the Enter format time [default]: prompt, press <CR>.
13. At the Enter cylinder skew [default]: prompt, press <CR>.
14. At the Enter track skew [default]: prompt, press <CR>.
15. At the Enter tracks per zone [default]: prompt press <CR>.
16. At the Enter alternate tracks [default]: prompt press <CR>.
17. At the Enter alternate sectors [default]: prompt, press <CR>.
18. At the Enter cache control [default]: prompt, press <CR>.
19. At the Enter prefetch threshold [default]: prompt, press <CR>.
20. At the Enter minimum prefetch [default]: prompt, press the <CR>.
21. At the Enter maximum prefetch [default]: prompt, press <CR>.
22. At the Enter disk type name (remember quotes): prompt, type “C1113F_1GB” and press <CR>.
The prompt should be at the FORMAT menu

23. Type partition and press <CR>.

Philips Medical Systems. Confidential and Proprietary information. Refer to Title Page.
24. At the partition prompt, enter a 2 and press <CR>.
25. At the Enter partition id tag [backup]: prompt, press <CR>.
26. At the Enter partition permission flags [wu]: prompt, press <CR>.
27. At the Enter new starting cy [0]: prompt, press <CR>.
28. At the Enter partition size [0b, 0c, 0.00mb]: prompt, type 2212704b and press <CR>.
29. At the partition prompt, type quit and press <CR>.
The prompt should be at the FORMAT menu.

30. At the format prompt, type label and press <CR>.

31. When the prompt Ready to label disk, continue? appears, type y and press <CR>.
The label will be written to the magneto–optical disk.

32. At the format prompt, type quit and press <CR>. The # prompt should appear.
33. At the # prompt, type newfs /dev/rdsk/c0t3d0s2 and press <CR>.
34. At the prompt newfs: Construct a new file system /dev/dsk/c0t3d0s2 (y/n)?, type y and press <CR>.
The file system creation takes about 3 minutes. You will see the block numbers as the file system is created. At completion the # prompt
will appear again.

Philips Medical Systems. Confidential and Proprietary information. Refer to Title Page.
Verify Optical Drive

NOTE
If you have performed the step to determine if you have a file system on your magneto–
optical media then skip steps 1. and 2.

1. Type mkdir /optical and press <CR>. This will create a directory named optical. It will be used as the mount point for the optical disk.
2. Type mount /dev/dsk/c0t3d0s2 /optical and press <CR>. This mounts the optical disk to the /optical directory.
3. At the # prompt, type cp /etc/hosts /optical and press <CR>. This copies the file named hosts from the /etc directory to the
magneto–optical disk in /optical.
4. At the # prompt, type ls /optical and press<CR>. This will let you see the contents of directory /optical. You should see hosts as one
of the files.
5. At the # prompt, type cp /optical/hosts /tmp/tmphosts and press <CR>. This will copy the file on the optical disk to the /tmp directory
as a file named tmphosts.
6. At the # prompt, type cmp /etc/hosts /tmp/tmphosts and press <CR>. This will compare the original file hosts with the file copied
to and from the magneto–optical disk named tmphosts in the /tmp directory.
7. If no errors are seen, the compare files command passes and the optical drive is functional. Any errors will show a difference in the
two files. (files differ: char x, line x, where x is the char and line number )
8. At the # prompt, type rm /optical/hosts and press <CR>. This will delete the file hosts from the magneto–optical disk.
9. At the # prompt, type rm /tmp/tmphosts and press <CR>. This will delete the file copied from the magneto–optical disk to the /tmp
directory.
10. At the # prompt, type umount /optical and press <CR>to unmount the optical drive from the directory /optical.
11. At the # prompt, type rm –r optical and press <CR>. This removes the directory named optical from the hard disk.
12. Press the eject button on the optical drive to eject the media. If that doesn’t work, type eject /dev/dsk/c0t3d0s2 and press <CR>.
13. At the # prompt, type exit and press <CR> to leave the xterm window. You may now exit the Diagnostics GUI.

Philips Medical Systems. Confidential and Proprietary information. Refer to Title Page.
CD–ROM DRIVE VERIFICATION

NOTE
This test will verify whether the CD–ROM drive hardware is properly installed, function-
ing or not. It will verify that the drive can read data from a CD–ROM disk.

1. On boot–up of the system. When the video begins to appear, you will see:
initializing memory.....

2. At that point, press the STOP and A keys on the keyboard. The “ok” prompt will appear.
3. Press the eject button on the CD–ROM drive to open its drawer. Insert a Software install Release CD and press the button again to
close the drawer.
4. At the “ok” prompt, type boot cdrom and press <CR>. The disk should start to be read.
5. Verification is accomplished if the CD–ROM drive reads the CD and the Software Installation main menu appears on the screen.
6. To exit, eject the CD, remove the CD and close the CD drawer.
7. Press STOP and A. At the “ok” prompt, type boot and press <CR>. This will reboot the system.

Philips Medical Systems. Confidential and Proprietary information. Refer to Title Page.
AUTOVOICE TEST

NOTE
The AutoVoice is tested via the Diagnostic GUI.

Philips Medical Systems. Confidential and Proprietary information. Refer to Title Page.
10MB ETHERNET PORT AND NETWORK TESTS

NOTE
This test will verify whether the 10mbit external Ethernet port is functional and can com-
municate with Ethernet devices at external network IP addresses.

This test assumes that the Display Console Diagnostic GUI is running (or the RDS+
Diagnostic GUI is running if the test is being performed on an RDS+ workstation). The
Ethernet port must be locally configured and connected to a working network.

1. Enter the Diagnostics GUI Utility menu. To start the Diagnostic GUI, refer to the Service Application manual. Select XTERM from the
UTILITIES menu. This will open up a terminal screen.
2. At the % prompt, enter the command ping and the IP address of another working node on the network and press <CR>. (Example–
ping 199.99.1.1 <CR>). The node will respond with a message conveying that it is “alive” if the ping command was received. This
will confirm that your Ethernet port is working and the path to the other node is working as well.

NOTE
Do not use your own local IP address as a destination for a ping as this will not ade-
quately test your local SPARC port although it may show an “is alive” message.

3. To perform a more rigorous test of your network port and the network connections, you may execute the following repetitive test. This
test will do a multiple pass ping test with a larger size packet. This test will take a few minutes to complete. You can watch the progress
on your screen as it goes through the multiple passes. At the end, there will be a summary report presented outlining the results of
the test. This may help in diagnosing occasional or intermittent failures.
To launch the test at the % prompt, enter:
ping –s IP address 1000 100 and press <CR>.

This will cause a message packet size of 1000 to be sent 100 times.

4. At the # prompt, type exit and press <CR> to leave the xterm window. You may now exit the Diagnostics GUI.

Philips Medical Systems. Confidential and Proprietary information. Refer to Title Page.
100MB ETHERNET LINK TESTS

NOTE
This test will verify whether the 100mbit link hardware is functional between the Display
Console and the AcQImage cabinet.

This test assumes that the Display GUI is running and the AcQImage cabinet has been
powered.

1. Enter the Diagnostics GUI Utility menu. To start the Diagnostic GUI, refer to the Service Application manual. Select xterm from the
UTILITIES menu. This will open up a terminal screen.
2. At the % prompt, type ping 144.54.50.2 and press the RETURN key.
3. The 100mb hardware link is functional if an “is alive” message is returned.
4. To perform a more rigorous test of your link you may execute the following repetitive test. This test will do a multiple pass ping test
with a larger size packet. This test will take a few minutes to complete. You can watch the progress on your screen as it goes through
the multiple passes. At the end, there will be a summary report presented outlining the results of the test. The test should report 100%
functionality. This may help in diagnosing occasional or intermittent failures.
To launch the test at the % prompt, enter:
ping –s 144.54.50.2 1000 100 and press <CR>.

This will cause a message packet size of 1000 to be sent 100 times.

5. To exit, close the xterm window by typing exit and press <CR>. You may now exit the Diagnostic GUI.

Philips Medical Systems. Confidential and Proprietary information. Refer to Title Page.
FORTH–BASED PROM DIAGNOSTICS (SPARC)
Introduction

The AcQSim CT Display Tower is powered by an Ultra Sparc series computer. In the event that system diagnostics cannot be run due to
the system not booting, Forth–Based PROM Diagnostics can be run.

1. Forth Based diagnostics are started just after the system is powered. Ensure that the monitor power is turned ON. Just as the system
starts to boot, you will see a revolving cursor – press the STOP and A keys. The system will stop booting and the “ok” prompt will
be displayed.

WARNING
THE DIAG–SWITCH? MUST BE SET TO FALSE AFTER THE DIAGNOSTICS ARE
COMPLETED. FAILURE TO COMPLY CAN RESULT IN UNCOMMANDED GANTRY
MOTION AND POSSIBLE INJURY OR DEATH TO SERVICE PERSONNEL. (SEE
DIAG–SWITCH? INSTRUCTIONS BELOW)

The Diag–switch? parameter must be set to false after the diagnostics are completed. This can be
be confirmed as follows:
1. At the OK prompt, type printenv and press <CR>.
2. Press the space bar to scroll through all of the environment settings. The last environment parameter
in the list is the diag–switch? status.
3. The first column will display either true or false. Set the diag–switch? parameter to false by typing
setenv diag–switch? false and press <CR>. The response will be “diag–switch? = false.”

Philips Medical Systems. Confidential and Proprietary information. Refer to Title Page.
On–Board Diagnostics Available
The tables below list useful Forth–Based PROM Diagnostics on the AcQSim CT:

Test Description Preparation When to Use

probe–scsi Returns the SCSI devices (internal/ Connect external SCSI de- Determine if SCSI
external) and their SCSI targets vices to the system and periph. is “talking”
connected to the built–in SCSI port. turn on their power. to the system.
1. At the OK prompt, type probe–scsi and press <CR>.
2. The following note will be displayed:
This command may hang the system if a Stop–A or halt command has been executed.
Please type reset–all to reset the system before executing this command.
Do you wish to continue? (y/n)

3. Press y and <CR>. After a pause (up to 30 sec), similar results will be displayed:
Target 0
Unit 0 Disk HP C3725S 5153
Target 1
Unit 0 Disk HP C3725S 5153
Target 3
Unit 0 Removeable Disk HP C1113F 1.48
Target 5
Unit 0 Removeable Tape Exabyte EXB–8505HE–00000085
Target 6
Unit 0 Removeable Read Only Device Plextor CD–ROM PX–12TS 1.02

Philips Medical Systems. Confidential and Proprietary information. Refer to Title Page.
Test Description Preparation When to Use
test screen Tests the system video graphics The diag–switch? NVRAM When video is not
hardware and monitor parameter must be set to fully operational.
true.
1. Type test screen and press <CR>.
2. A similar screen will be displayed:
Testing cgsix
FBC register test
Font test
Data lines test – succeeded.
Address quick test – succeeded.
Data size test – succeeded.
Data bits test

The screen will change to all white and return the OK prompt when complete.

Test Description Preparation When to Use

test keyboard Executes a keyboard self test. The Keyboard must be con- When keyboard
four LEDs should flash at once, nected. seems to be mal-
and a “Keyboard present” message functioning.
should appear.
1. Type test keyboard and press <CR>.
2. The four keyboard LEDs will flash once and the screen will return a “keyboard present” message.

Philips Medical Systems. Confidential and Proprietary information. Refer to Title Page.
Test Description Preparation When to Use
test net–tpe Performs an internal and external A cable must be con- Helps diagnose
loopback test on the twisted pair nected to the system TPE network problems.
Ethernet (TPE) interface. port and to a TPE hub or
the test will fail the exter-
nal loopback phase.
If the tpe–link–test? pa-
rameter is false (disabled),
the external loopback test
will appear to pass even if
a cable is not connected.
1. Type test net–tpe and press <CR>.
2. The following will be displayed on the screen:
Using TP Ethernet Interface
Lance Register test – succeeded.
Internal loopback test – succeeded.
External loopback test – succeeded.

Philips Medical Systems. Confidential and Proprietary information. Refer to Title Page.
Test Description Preparation When to Use
test net Performs an internal and external A cable must be con- Helps diagnose
loopback test on the auto–selected nected to the system & to network problems.
system Ethernet interface. Ethernet tap hub or exter-
nal loopback test will fail.
1. The AUI ethernet connection and the TP ethernet connection are both tested.
2. At the OK prompt, type test net and press <CR>.
3. The following will be displayed on the screen:
Using AUI Ethernet Interface
Lance Register test – succeeded.
Internal loopback test – succeeded.
External loopback test – Lost carrier. (Transceiver cable problem?)

Using TP Ethernet Interface

Lance Register test – succeeded.
Internal loopback test – succeeded.
External loopback test – succeeded.

Note: Only a TP connection is used. This will cause unconnected AUI port to fail external loopback test.

Type of Test Description Preparation When to Use

watch–tpe Monitors broadcast Ethernet pack- Connect the system to the Help verify Ether-
ets (10Base5T––Twisted Pair network via the desired net operation.
Ethernet) on the Ethernet cable(s) Ethernet port.
connected to the system.
See watch–aui for typical test results.

Philips Medical Systems. Confidential and Proprietary information. Refer to Title Page.
Test Description Preparation When to Use
watch–aui Monitors broadcast Ethernet pack- Connect the system to the Help verify Ether-
ets (10Base5–Thicknet) on the network via the desired net operation.
Ethernet cable(s) connected. Ethernet port.
1. At the OK prompt, type watch–aui and press <CR>.
2. The following messages will be displayed:
Using AUI Ethernet Interface
Lance Register test – succeeded.
Internal loopback test – succeeded.
External loopback test – Lost carrier. (Transceiver cable problem?)

Looking for Ethernet packets.

’.’ is a good packet. ’X’ is a bad packet.
Type any key to stop.

3. Until you press a key, dots or Xs will appear as long as the packets appear on the network.

Test Description Preparation When to Use

watch–clock Displays seconds from the sys- None. Verifies Time–
tem’s Time–of–Day chip. of_day chip opera-
tion.
1. At the OK prompt, type watch–clock and press <CR>.
2. The following messages will be displayed:
Watching the ’seconds’ register of the real time clock–chip.
It should be ’ticking’ once a second.
Type any key to stop.
[ ] display seconds

Philips Medical Systems. Confidential and Proprietary information. Refer to Title Page.
DIAGNOSTIC GRAPHICAL USER INTERFACE (GUI)
Access to the various diagnostic programs created for the AcQSim CT is accomplished via the Diagnostic GUI. Each selection is shown
briefly, with more detail on following pages. Blue underlined text indicates a hyperlink to an area with more detail on that respective Diag
GUI option.
Starting the Diag GUI
At the main bootup screen, click the mouse once in the lower left corner. Then type PICKER (all caps) and press <CR>. Refer to Figure 117.
The Board Status window will also be displayed.
At system bootup, the main system bootup screen will appear. See Figure 117. If you are already at the Operator Application screen or
Service Application screen, first select SHUTDOWN from the GENERAL UTILITIES menu. From the Shutdown menu, select SHUTDOWN
CONSOLE. After a moment, the main bootup screen will appear. The Hardware Status Screen will also be displayed.

Clinical Scanning

Service

FOR DIAG GUI:

Click here with the
mouse, then type
PICKER and press
<CR>.
FIGURE 117 MAIN BOOTUP SCREEN –DIAG GUI STARTUP

Philips Medical Systems. Confidential and Proprietary information. Refer to Title Page.
Acqim Gantry Sun Utilities Exit

Before running diagnostics. wait

until all boards are alive and
communicating as shown above.

FIGURE 118 MAIN DIAGNOSTIC GUI – with BOARD STATUS WINDOW

Click the respective Diagnostic selection in Figure 118 for description, procedure and expected results.

Philips Medical Systems. Confidential and Proprietary information. Refer to Title Page.
 CP
Acqim
GAM

AP

Projector

The ACQIM (AcQImage) Top Level button yields the following diagnostic selections: CP, GAM, AP and Projector. Each selection has
sub–selections. Click on the arrow next to the board of choice. The following illustrations detail the four options under the Acqim selection:

CP GAM AP Projector
Flash Diagnostics SCSI AP Memory Projector Memory
GAM Memory DSP Diagnostics Projector Pipeline
DSP Diagnostics VME Test Projector Broadcast
VME Test Flash Diagnostics VME Test
Flash Diagnostics Asic Test
Flash Diagnostics

The following illustrations detail the three remaining Top Level options: Gantry, Sun and Utilities:

Gantry Manexp Sun SUN Diagnostics Utilities Hardware Status / Control

Gscope Smpte Flash Burner
GPU / XSC Downloader Enet
Gputty+ Dicom–Echo
Gena Telnet Session
Ring Kermit2
Xterm
Error Logs
Autovoice
Set Color
Board Status

The following pages detail the menu options. In EDOC, simply click on the blue underlined option for detail.

Philips Medical Systems. Confidential and Proprietary information. Refer to Title Page.
AcQIM – CP

NOTE
You must have a null modem serial cable plugged into the CP board and port A on the
SUN to run this test. (Type exit <CR> at the pSH+> prompt to exit the Xterm window.)

Ensure the Num Lock key is de–activated (LED off) before opening multiple windows
on the display. Having the Num Lock key active with multiple windows open could
cause system lock–up.

Description: A collection of tests that allow various hardware components of the AP, the PB, the CP, and the GAM to be tested on power–up
and after power–up. Power–up test results are communicated via the diagnostic display on the AP, the PB, and the GAM. The CP uses
the board fail LED. Tests embedded in flash can also be accessed after power–up and run by the operator.
BOARD LEVEL TEST/UTILITY MENU
1.) Diagnostics
2.) Environmental Stress Screening
3.) NVRAM maintenance
4.) Exit
Select option:

BOARD LEVEL TEST/UTILITY MENU – Option 1: Diagnostics Menu

DIAGNOSTICS MENU
1.) CPU Version
2.) Diagnostic FLASH CRC
3.) Operating System FLASH CRC
4.) Select
5.) Ethernet
6.) Serial 16C552
7.) Serial 16C552 with external loop back plug
8.) VME chip2
9.) CIO Z8536
10.) NVRAM
11.) Instruction cache enable
12.) Instruction/data cache disable
13.) Access utility
14.) Return

More details about flash can be seen in the GAM Flash. (Type exit <CR> at the pSH+> prompt to exit the Xterm window.)

Philips Medical Systems. Confidential and Proprietary information. Refer to Title Page.
AcQIM – GAM / SCSI
Description: The SCSI diagnostics run on the CP and GAM boards. Diagnostics designed for the CP will not run on the GAM and vice
versa due to differences in the board support packages. The SCSI diagnostics consist of two separate parts: Bus level and Board level
diagnostics. The bus level diagnostic contains all SCSI bus tests and its agents (disk drives) on the bus. The bus level diagnostic makes
use of the SCSI driver supplied by the operating system. The board level diagnostic contains the tools for testing the SCSI controller chip.

1. After the tests are initiated, the following menu is displayed:

SCSI DIAGNOSTIC MAIN MENU

1. Board Level Diagnostic

2. Bus Level Diagnostic
3. Quit

Please enter your selection (1–3):

2. Select option 1 for Board Level Diagnostics. The sub menu will appear:
BOARD LEVEL DIAGNOSTIC MENU

1. All Tests
2. PCI Test
3. Device Access Test
4. Register Access Test
5. SCSI FIFO Test
6. DMA FIFO Test
7. SCRIPTS Processor Test
8. Interrupt Test
9. Return to Main Menu

Please enter your selection (1–9):

The following details each of the possible selections (2–8) in the Board Level Diagnostics menu:
PCI Test tests the ability to read the PCI configuration registers and and
verifies their content.
Device Access Test tests the accessibility of the controller
Register Access Test tests the register functionality by witting and reading to/from differ-
ent registers of the NCR.
SCSI FIFO Test fills the SCSI FIFO with data, reads the status, reads the data out
of the FIFO, verifies their accuracy and checks the status again.

Philips Medical Systems. Confidential and Proprietary information. Refer to Title Page.
DMA FIFO Test writes lane by lane, verifies if lanes are full, reads lane by lane,
checks accuracy of the data and checks if the lanes are empty.
SCRIPTS Processor Test not implemented yet.
Interrupt Test not implemented yet.

3. If you select option 2, PCI Test a similar message will be displayed:

running pci access test
PCI ACCESS TEST COMPLETED SUCCESSFUL – NO ERRORS

4. The Board Level Diagnostic menu is displayed again. Similar messages are displayed for each of the individual tests. If you select
option 1, All Tests, similar messages will be displayed
DEVICE ACCESS TEST COMPLETED – NO ERRORS
REGISTER ACCESS TEST COMPLETED – NO ERRORS
WRITE SCSI FIFO COMPLETED – NO ERRORS
READ SCSI FIFO COMPLETED – NO ERRORS
SCSI FIFO TEST COMPLETED – NO ERRORS
DMA FIFO TEST COMPLETED – NO ERRORS
running scripts processor test
running interrupt test

5. Press 9 to return to the main menu.

6. From the main menu, select option 2 for Bus Level Diagnostics. The program searches for devices on the SCSI bus and presents
a similar list of devices (disks) found:
ID: 0 NO DEVICE FOUND
ID: 1 NO DEVICE FOUND
ID: 2 Model: 11 Vendor: DSHW
BID: 3 Model: 11 Vendor: DSHW
Blocksize: 512 # of Blocks: 8080524
Blocksize: 512 # of Blocks: 8080524
ID: 4 Model: SA2654 Vendor: Fujitsu
Blocksize: 512 # of Blocks: 444020
ID: 5 Model: SA2654 Vendor: Fujitsu
Blocksize: 512 # of Blocks: 444020
ID: 6 NO DEVICE FOUND

7. After the system looks for the SCSI devices, you are prompted with the following menu:

Philips Medical Systems. Confidential and Proprietary information. Refer to Title Page.
 SCSI DEVICE SELECTION MENU

1. SCSI ID: 2 VENDOR: DHSW MODEL 11

2. SCSI ID: 3 VENDOR DHSW MODEL 11
3. Return to Main Menu

Please enter your selection (1–3):

8. Select any of the listed devices to test. The following will be displayed:
BUS LEVEL DIAGNOSTIC MENU

1. All non destructive tests

2. Test Unit Ready
3. Write/Read RAM Buffer Test
4. Oscillating Read Test
5. Write/Read Test – non destructive test
6. Write/Read Test – destructive test
7. Format Disk Drive
8. Return to SCSI DEVICE SELECTION MENU
Please enter your selection (1–8):

The following details each of the possible selections (2–7) in the Bus Level Diagnostic menu:

Test Unit ready test Tests if the drive is spun up and ready to accept commands.
Write/Read RAM Buffer writes to the on disk RAM buffer, reads and verifies the correct-
ness of the read data. Does not alter the contents of the disk.
Oscillating Read Test is a stress test for the read head and verifies the disks ability to
position the head correctly by oscillating between track 0 and all
the other tracks on the disk, up to the last track.
Read/Write non destr. test Reads the information on the disk, backs it up,writes a pattern,
reads and verifies that pattern and restores original information.
Write/Read destr. test writes a data pattern disk without backing up original data, reads
and verifies the pattem. Test alters the contents of the disk
Format disk. allows the user to format the current disk drive. Please note that
the formatting process is not to be interrupted.

9. You may select individual tests here or run all of the non–destructive tests. Progress and results will be updated on the screen. The
non–destructive READ/WRITE test will prompt you to use the default configuration or to customize the test:

Philips Medical Systems. Confidential and Proprietary information. Refer to Title Page.
 Starting test at block address: 0
Default configuration: Ending test at highest block number: 8812868

1. Use default test configuration

2. Customize the test

10. Custom start and end block numbers should be entered in hex. The default test configuration will take a long time to run. The display
will inform you of the ”Percent of Reading” that has completed. The menu will return after the test is completed.
11. Press 8 to return to the SCSI DEVICE SELECTION MENU.
12. You may test another device now or return to the main menu. Press 3 to exit the SCSI tests.
13. The Main Menu also contains two hidden options – 4 and 5:
Option 4 is a runtime DEBUG flag which will cause the printout of main status information throughout the program. To turn it off, go back
to the main menu and select option 4 again. When the program is restarted, this flag will automatically be reset.

Option 5 allows the user to switch to different languages, the menus will be presented in English (default), German or French. The error
messages remain in English. Please note, that in the current configuration up to 20 languages could be supported.

(Type exit <CR> at the pSH+> prompt to exit the Xterm window.)

Philips Medical Systems. Confidential and Proprietary information. Refer to Title Page.
ERROR MESSAGES
In the event of an error, an error message is displayed on the screen, but not logged to the error logger. The following error messages will
be printed if the driver call fails:
STAT_CHECKCOND – target wants to give some info
STAT_ERR – SCSI error that may be retried
STAT_TIMEOUT – Target selection timed out – device may not be present on SCSI bus
STAT_BUSY – target busy try again
STAT_SEMFAIL – semaphore call failed
STAT_NOMEM – no memory available for request
STAT_RETRYEXC – Failed after allotted retries
STAT_RESET – SCSI bus reset (should retry)
STAT_BADSIZE – Drive shows no blocks
STAT_BUSY – target busy try again
STAT_SEMFAIL – semaphore call failed
STAT_NOMEM – no memory available for request
STAT_RETRYEXC – Failed after allotted retries
STAT_RESET – SCSI bus reset (should retry)
STAT_BADSIZE – Drive shows no blocks
STAT_NOMEDIA – Removeable disk not in drive
STAT_BLANK – end of recorded data
STAT_BAD_CMD – Target reports Illegal Request
STAT_NO_SENSE – request sense returned no sense
EERR_NODR – No driver provided – requested driver not present on system
RR _IODN – Illegal device (major) number – wrong device or driver selected
Test Unit Ready Test – Errors
If the Test Unit Ready Test fails, it will report:
DEVICE at SCSI ID: X is NOT READY – Bad Disk Drive

Philips Medical Systems. Confidential and Proprietary information. Refer to Title Page.
RAM Buffer Test – Errors

If errors are encountered during the RAM Buffer Test, the RAM address as well as expected data and actual data are displayed:
ERROR – DATA at RAM address: XXXXXXX DO NOT MATCH,

EXPECTED: XXXXXXX RECEIVED: XXXXXXXX

Oscillating Read Test – Errors

The oscillating read test will display the block address where the error occurred:
ERROR – at BLOCKADDRESS: XXXXXXXX

Read/Write destructive and non destructive Test – Errors

Both tests report the blockaddress, the expected and actual data.
ERROR – BLOCKADDRESS: XXXXXXXX DATA DO NOT MATCH

EXPECTED: XXXXXXXX RECEIVED: XXXXXXXX

Format Disk Drive

If the formatting fails, a driver error will be displayed along with:

ERROR – COULDN’T FORMAT DISK DRIVE AT ID: XX

Board Level Test Error Messages

All Board Level messages report the register which failed the test, the expected and actual contents. The FIFO tests report in addition the
lane number or FIFO status if an error occurred.

Safety

A safety analysis does not apply.

Philips Medical Systems. Confidential and Proprietary information. Refer to Title Page.
AcQIM – GAM / GAM Memory
Description: Tests the internal SRAM of each DSP and external DRAM of the DSP cluster for the Gantry Acquisition Module board. This
test does not test the CPU memory. All of the CPU memory is tested on power–up via the flash based tests.

1. After the test is initiated, the following Main Menu will appear:
GAM BOARD MEMORY TEST

0.) All listed memories

1.) DSP internal SRAM
2.) DSP external DRAM
3.) Exit

Select option:

2. Option 0 will test all of the available internal SRAM and external DRAM and display the results.
3. Option 1 responds with:
0.) All listed memories
1.) DSP one internal SRAM
2.) DSP two internal SRAM
3.) DSP three internal SRAM
4.) Return

Select option:

Results of the three DSP tests above:

Testing Memory Starting @ e0280000

Fill with pattern
Read pattern, write invert – PASSED
Read invert, writer pattern – PASSED
Test the set to clear transition – PASSED

The test passed!

4. Press 4 to return to the Main Menu.

Philips Medical Systems. Confidential and Proprietary information. Refer to Title Page.
5. Option 2 (DSP external DRAM) of the Main Menu responds with:
0.) All listed tests
1.) DSP external DRAM word test
2.) DSP external dRAM byte test
3.) Return

Select option:

6. Options 1 and 2 will perform write and read sequences in the memory. When finished, the test will return a pass or fail notice.
7. Press 3 to return to the previous menu and 3 again to return to the main menu.
8. (Type exit <CR> at the pSH+> prompt to exit the Xterm window.)

Philips Medical Systems. Confidential and Proprietary information. Refer to Title Page.
AcQIM – GAM / DSP Diagnostics
1. After the test is selected, the following Main Menu appears:
Process all options
PCI Setup Test
Cluster Interface Test
IOP Register Read/Write
Slave DMA Test
DSP download
DSP Cluster Interrupts
DSP Cluster Error Interrupts
DSP Cluster External RAM DMA Test
DSP Prefetch FIFO Test
GAM Internal Link Port
GAM PCI Master Accesses
DSP Core R/W of External Memory
Exit

2. Enter the selection of the test(s) that you want or enter ”0” to perform all tests. When a selection is made, you are prompted to select
the following options:
Test Control Mode is [STOP ON FAILURE]
Loop Count is [20]
Test Reporting Mode is [TERSE]
Enter <CR> to accept, any other key to change>

Note: Selection ”A” must be capped.

3. If the options listed are correct, press <CR>. If you want to change an option, press any key to get the following option screen:
1 – STOP ON FAILURE
2 – LOOP ON FAILURE
3 – LOOP UNTIL FAILURE
4 – CONTINUE ON FAILURE
5 – LOOP ON TEST
6 – STEP THROUGH TEST
7 – LOOP ON TEST SUITE
<CR> for [STOP ON FAILURE]

4. Enter your selection and press <CR>. You will be prompted to enter the Loop Count number:
Specify the Loop Count [20]:

5. Enter a new number or <CR> to keep the present value. You will be prompted to enter the Test Reporting Mode:

Philips Medical Systems. Confidential and Proprietary information. Refer to Title Page.
 Test Reporting Mode is [TERSE]
1 – VERBOSE
2 – TERSE
3 – PASS/FAIL ONLY
<CR> for [TERSE]

6. The Verbose mode prints to the screen a large amount of information, the Terse mode prints what test has passed or failed and the
pass/fail mode merely prints if the selected tests passed or failed. Select the Test Reporting Mode and press <CR>.
7. The test(s) will proceed and display the results in the mode chosen.
8. (Type exit <CR> at the pSH+> prompt to exit the Xterm window.)

Philips Medical Systems. Confidential and Proprietary information. Refer to Title Page.
AcQIM – GAM / VME Test
Description: Allows two boards populated with the Universe VME interface chip to exchange data sets over the VME bus backplane. This
includes interaction between the Array Processor, Gantry Acquisition Module, and the Projector Boards. This excludes the CP board. The
VME test must be run on ALL boards (except CP), then two boards are selected – one as a Master and one as a Slave. For the board that
is not participating in the current test, the VME test is started, but the Master/Slave selection is not made. After the test on the first two boards
completes, the operator must then reverse the Master/Slave relationship and run the test on those two boards again. This process is
repeated on the remaining two combinations of boards. A table of these combinations is provided below.

1. After the VME Test is initiated, the following menu will be displayed:
VME Bus Test – Main Menu
========================================================
M – Set this board to be Test Master (Sets up PCI Slave)
S – Set this board to be Test Slave (Sets up VME Slave)
Q – Quit
========================================================
Advanced Universe Configuration
U – Toggle Local Universe Slave Posted Writes/PreReads Current = 0 (1=ON, 0=OFF)

2. DO NOT make a menu selection at this time. Run the VME test again on the other two boards from their respective pulldown menus
(in this case, the AP and Projector).
3. Press S to set up the first board as the slave. The slave window will appear at the bottom half of the monitor and the following will be
displayed:
Vme Bus Test Slave Enabled (VME Slave is Active)
Press ANY KEY to Disable and Return to Main Menu

4. Set up the other board as the Master . Move the forefront window out of the way. Press M <CR>:

Philips Medical Systems. Confidential and Proprietary information. Refer to Title Page.
 TEST MASTER MENU
===========================================================
R – Run memory test
A – Address range to test (VME Base Address and Block Size)
Q – Return to Main menu
Advanced Settings:
C – retry Count. Current = 10
P – Pass count. Current = 1
T – Cycle Type Current = 0 (0=BOTH, 1=SINGLE, 2=DMA)
L – Loop to beginning on FAILURE Current = 0 (1=ON, 0=OFF)
V – Verbose mode Toggle Current = 0 (1=ON, 0=OFF)
E – Enhanced Test Toggle Current = 0 (1=ON, 0=OFF)
U – Toggle Posted Writes Current = 0 (1=ON, 0=OFF)
M – Menu Display Toggle Current = 1 (1=ON, 0=OFF)
S – Single cycle Stop on error Current = 1 (1=ON, 0=OFF)
W – What to do if the test hangs
NOTES: 1. You must Set A Test Master on another board before running!
2. Before using Enhanced Test (choice E), read the instructions in choice W.
===========================================================
Enter R, A, Q, C, P, T, L, V, E, U, M, S or W and Press ENTER:
5. After the Master is set up, press r <CR> to run the test. If this portion of the test passes, the Slave and Master roles must be reversed.
Quit the test on the two participating boards from their respective menus (”Q” on Master menu, any key then “Q” on the Slave menu.)
6. Run the test again on the same two boards, but REVERSE their roles – make the Slave the Master and the Master the Slave. After
the test is complete, quit the test on the participating boards. Restart the VME test on these two boards again.
7. Set up one of the previously tested boards as the Slave. Select the remaining untested board as the Master. Once this test completes,
reverse their roles as you did in step 5. Run the Slave/Master test one more time on the remaining combination of boards, reversing
their relationships as before. The table below will give you a better idea of the (three) two–pair board combinations and how each board
should be set up with respect to the other:

AP GAM Projector AP GAM Projector

Slave Master not tested not tested Slave Master
Master Slave not tested Master not tested Slave
not tested Master Slave Slave not tested Master

Philips Medical Systems. Confidential and Proprietary information. Refer to Title Page.
Detail of options from the TEST MASTER MENU:

A:

VME Bus Test – VME Bus Range Menu

=============================================================
B – Set VME Base Address – Current Base = 0x02000000
L – Set VME block Size – Current Size = 0x00100000
Q – Return to previous menu
=============================================================
Enter B, L, or Q and Press ENTER:

8. Set new VME base address and/or VME block size here, otherwise, press Q to use the current values and return to the previous menu.

Q:

Returns to the Main Menu

Advanced settings:

C:

Master Retry count = 10

Enter the number of times for the Test Master to attempt to make a connection with the test slave.
Type a number of passes then press ENTER:

P:

Pass count = 1
Type number of passes then press ENTER:

T:

Cycle Type = 0
Type 0 = Both, 1 = Single or 2 = DMA
Then press Enter

If option 2 = DMA is selected, the following submenu will be displayed:

Philips Medical Systems. Confidential and Proprietary information. Refer to Title Page.
 0.) All
1.) Random
2.) Alternating 64 bit 0x00’s and 0xf’s
3.) Alternating 64 bit 0x5a’s and 0x5’s
4.) Walking 1 in a field of 0’s
5.) Walking 0 in a field of 1’s
6.) Alternating 32 bit 0x00’s and 0xff’s
7.) Alternating 32 bit 0x00’s and 0xff’s

L:
Test will loop to beginning on failure!

V:
Verbose mode is ON

Press any key to continue

E:
Enhanced Mode is ON
WARNING: Test will run considerably slower

Press any key to continue

M:
Menu Display is OFF
Press any key to continue

(Note that if this is enabled only the lettered options will be displayed.)

S:
Single cycle stop on error handling is OFF
Press any key to continue

When stop on error is OFF and the operator selects S, they get:

Single cycle stop on error handling is ON

Press any key to continue

Philips Medical Systems. Confidential and Proprietary information. Refer to Title Page.
W:
What to do when the test hangs

If Verbose mode is ON and no new status messages appear for two or more minutes then follow the instructions below:

A. Record the base address from the last status message displayed
B. Manually reset the Test Master and Test Slave boards
C. From the Test Master Menu, Change the Address range to the base address you recorded in step A and a size of
0x0010000
D. From the Test Master Menu, set the Posted Writes option to OFF
E. Run the test again

NOTE: Enhanced mode will considerably slow test performance

Press any key to continue

R:
Runs the test and responds with a similar screen:
VME Test running – Press any key to exit...
Pass Number: 1
Testing block 1 of 1, Base Address: 0x02000000 Block Size: 0x00100000
VME BUS Test PASSED!

Test completed!

U – Toggle Posted Writes

Used to make a change to the configuration of the VME bus interface chip Universe II.

D – Disable all VME/PCI Slaves

Disable a Picker board (BP, AP, or GAM) from using the VME Bus.

If you run the VME Bus test between a BP and an AP, you want to make sure that the GAM doesn’t try to use the VME bus at the same
time. This option tells the GAM to not use the bus. Additionally, if you get the following message, then choose option D for all Picker Boards
on the system before running the test.
”ERROR – Could not establish communication with Test Slave!”

(Type exit and press <CR> at the pSH+> prompt to exit the Xterm window.)

Philips Medical Systems. Confidential and Proprietary information. Refer to Title Page.
AcQIM – GAM / Flash Diagnostics
Description: A collection of tests that allow various hardware components of the AP, the PB, the CP, and the GAM to be tested on power–up
and after power–up. Power–up test results are communicated via the diagnostic display on the AP, the PB, and the GAM. The CP uses
the board fail LED. Tests embedded in flash can also be accessed after power–up and run by the operator.

NOTE
You must have a null modem serial cable plugged into the GAM board and port A on
the SUN to run this test.

1. Press 5 to get the board level diagnostics main menu:

BOARD LEVEL TEST/UTILITY MENU

1.) Diagnostics
2.) Environmental Stress Screening
3.) NVRAM maintenance
4.) Exit

Select option:

(The following section refers to tests done in the TEST mode, which is intended for field service use. This is set via option 3 of the main
menu – NVRAM Maintenance. Some of the tests will vary depending on the present mode, DIAG or TEST. Default setting is TEST.)

BOARD LEVEL TEST/UTILITY MENU – Option 1: Diagnostics Menu

DIAGNOSTICS MENU

1.) Diagnostic FLASH CRC

2.) Operating System FLASH CRC
3.) Select
4.) Ethernet
5.) NVRAM
6.) Cluster memory
7.) SCSI chip one
8.) SCSI chip two
9.) Instruction cache enable
10.) Instruction/data cache disable
11.) Access utility
12.) Return

Philips Medical Systems. Confidential and Proprietary information. Refer to Title Page.
DIAGNOSTICS MENU – Options 1 and 2: will pause and let you know if the test passed or failed:
The test passed!

Hit return to continue

If an error occurs:
There is an error on the board

The test failed!

Hit return to continue

DIAGNOSTICS MENU – Option 3:

The test passed!

Hit return to continue

DIAGNOSTICS MENU – Option 4: Ethernet

This test checks the ethernet port of the respective board. Successful transmission will return:
The test passed!

Hit return to continue

DIAGNOSTICS MENU – Option 5: NVRAM

This test .....

DIAGNOSTICS MENU – Option 6: Access Utility

1.) Write
2.) Read
3.) Write/Read
4.) Quit

All three options above will prompt you for the same set of input:

Philips Medical Systems. Confidential and Proprietary information. Refer to Title Page.
 1.) I/O enabled
2.) I/O disabled

Select option:

1: I/O enabled will return information to the screen about what the test is currently doing. However, this
will slow down the test.
2. I/O disabled will run faster but will not return information to the screen.
Select either I/O enabled or disabled. This will return:
Select loop quantity:
Loop quantity can be any hex number from 1 to FFFFFFFF. Use ”0” if you prefer infinite loop testing. Power down or reset is needed to
end infinite loop testing. The next menu is displayed:
1.) Eight bits
2.) Sixteen bits
3.) Thirty–two bits
Select the size of the data transfer. The next prompt is displayed:
Select Data:
Enter the actual data to be used in the transaction. Refer to the previous choice when deciding. For example, if eight bits was chosen,
select 1C (eight bits), etc. The next prompt is displayed:
Select address:

Enter the address where the transaction will begin (e.g. 600000). The next prompt is displayed:
Select expanse:

Indicates the range of addresses where the transaction will occur, starting from the above selected address.
1. Press 4 to return to the BOARD LEVEL/UTILITY MENU.
BOARD LEVEL TEST/UTILITY MENU – Option 2: Environmental Stress Screening
If you simply press 2, the following will be displayed:
ENVIRONMENTAL STRESS SCREENING
Start Time: Start Date: Total Iterations: 0
No tests were selected for execution through the ESS test selection menu!
Hit return to proceed

To prevent the above message, set up the ESS options before execution:

Philips Medical Systems. Confidential and Proprietary information. Refer to Title Page.
1. Press <CR> if you had initiated the ESS by pressing 2.
2. Select Option 3, NVRAM Maintenance.
3. Select Option 2, ESS control/information:
DISABLED 1.) Diagnostic FLASH CRC
DISABLED 2.) Operating System FLASH CRC
DISABLED 3.) Select
DISABLED 4.) Serial 16C552 internal
DISABLED 5.) Serial 16C552 external
DISABLED 6.) NVRAM
DISABLED 7.) Continue

Select option:

4. Selecting the respective number will toggle DISABLED to ENABLED. Hitting it again will cause ENABLED to be toggled to DISABLED.
The state selected will survive powerdowns of the board. After the tests are set, press 7 to return. Press 3 to return to the NVRAM
MAINTENANCE MENU.
5. Press 6 to return to the BOARD LEVEL TEST/UTILITY MENU. If an ESS test was enabled, you can press 2, Environmental Stress
Screening, to execute the enabled test(s). This basically can run some or all of the options from the main Diagnostics menu. The screen
will report on any errors.
BOARD LEVEL TEST/UTILITY MENU – Option 3: NVRAM Maintenance Menu
1.) Error Log Maintenance
2.) ESS control/information
3.) Diagnostic remote download
4.) Remote test location
5.) Test/diagnostic mode [TEST]
6.) Return

1. Press 1 from NVRAM Maintenance Menu:

ERROR LOG MAINTENANCE MENU

1.) Display error log

2.) Clear error log
3.) Error handling [CONT]
4.) Error log handling [STOP WHEN BUFFER FULL]
5.) Error log length [16]
6.) Return

1: Display error log: Shows the contents of the error log

Philips Medical Systems. Confidential and Proprietary information. Refer to Title Page.
2: Clear error log: Will delete the current contents of the error log

3: Error handling: Returns three options to handle the testing after an error: Continue: running other tests, Stop: report error and stop all
testing, or Skip: report error, do not execute failing test again.

4: Error log handling returns three options for error logging: Circular buffer: errors are written to the log so that the oldest entry is overwritten.
Stop logging when buffer is full: self–explanatory. Logging off: used to prevent loss of information in the log.

5: Error log length – choose number from 1 to 16.

2. Press 6 to return to NVRAM Maintenance Menu.

3. Press 2 from the NVRAM Maintenance Menu:
ESS CONTROL/INFORMATION MENU

1.) ESS test selection

2.) Display ESS statistics
3.) Return

The available tests are dependent upon what is present in FLASH and the particular board.

1: ESS test selection returns three options that let you disable or enable Diagnostic FLASH CRC or Operating System Flash CRC or Select
(from the DIAGNOSTICS MENU.)

2: Show the start time, date and total iterations. Displays statistics on a previous ESS run.

4. Press 3 to return.
NVRAM Maintenance Menu – Option 3: Diagnostic remote download – (Currently not implemented)

NVRAM Maintenance Menu – Option 4: Remote test location

1.) Host IP address [Currently not implemented]
2.) Download pathname [Currently not implemented]
3.) Return

1. Press 3 to return.
NVRAM Maintenance Menu – Option 5: Test/Diagnostic mode – (Toggles DIAG and TEST modes)

1. Press 6 to Return to the BOARD LEVEL TEST/UTILITY MENU. (end of TEST mode FLASH diagnostics)
(Type exit <CR> at the pSH+> prompt to exit the Xterm window.)

Philips Medical Systems. Confidential and Proprietary information. Refer to Title Page.
==========================================================================

(The following section refers to tests done in the DIAG mode, which was intended for factory and engineering use. This is set via option
3 of the BOARD LEVEL TEST/UTILITY MENU – NVRAM Maintenance. Some of the tests will vary depending on the present mode, DIAG
or TEST.)

BOARD LEVEL TEST/UTILITY MENU – Option 1: Diagnostics Menu

DIAGNOSTICS MENU

1.) Diagnostic FLASH CRC

2.) Operating system FLASH CRC
3.) Select
4.) Ethernet
5.) NVRAM
6.) Access Utility
7.) Return

DIAGNOSTICS MENU – Option 1 and 2: will pause and let you know if the test passed or failed:
The test passed!

Hit return to continue

If an error occurs:
There is an error on the board

The test failed!

Hit return to continue

DIAGNOSTICS MENU – Option 3: SELECT

Philips Medical Systems. Confidential and Proprietary information. Refer to Title Page.
 Devices Found
Device # Vendor Device Type Select Test
===================================================
11 Intel SIO ISA Bridge Passed
12 NCR 53C825 SCSI Bridge Passed
13 Newbridge Univers VME Interface Passed
14 DEC Ethernet Controller Passed
15 Picker GAM DSP Cluster Passed
16 NCR 53C825 SCSI Bridge Passed
==================================================
To see the CONFIGURATION SPACE REGISTERS for a DEVICE, type the number of the DEVICE and press the ENTER key
To return to the previous menu, type Q and press the ENTER key. To run the select test again, type R and presS
the ENTER key

1. Press Q and <CR> to see if the test passed or failed.

DIAGNOSTICS MENU – Option 4:Ethernet

DIAGNOSTICS MENU – Option 5: NVRAM
Machine Check Excep Running: ***** ISR *****
––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––

DIAGNOSTICS MENU – Option 6: Access Utility

1.) Write
2.) Read
3.) Write/Read
4.) Quit

All three options above will prompt you for the same set of input:
1.) I/O enabled
2.) I/O disabled

Select option:

1: I/O enabled will return information to the screen about what the test is currently doing. However, this will slow down the test.
2. I/O disabled will run faster but will not return information to the screen.

Philips Medical Systems. Confidential and Proprietary information. Refer to Title Page.
Select either I/O enabled or disabled. This will return:
Select loop quantity:

Loop quantity can be any hex number from 1 to FFFFFFFF. Use ”0” if you prefer infinite loop testing. Power down or reset is needed to
end infinite loop testing. The next menu is displayed:
1.) Eight bits
2.) Sixteen bits
3.) Thirty–two bits

Select the size of the data transfer. The next prompt is displayed:
Select Data:

Enter the actual data to be used in the transaction. Refer to the previous choice when deciding. For example, if eight bits was chosen,
select 1C (eight bits), etc. The next prompt is displayed:
Select address:

Enter the address where the transaction will begin (e.g. 600000). The next prompt is displayed:
Select expanse:

Indicates the range of addresses where the transaction will occur, starting from the above selected address.

1. Press 4 to return to the BOARD LEVEL/UTILITY MENU.

BOARD LEVEL TEST/UTILITY MENU – Option 2: Environmental Stress Screening

If you simply press 2, the following will be displayed:

ENVIRONMENTAL STRESS SCREENING

Start Time: Start Date: Total Iterations: 0

No tests were selected for execution through the ESS test selection menu!
Hit return to proceed

To prevent the above message, set up the ESS options before execution:

1. Press <CR> if you had initiated the ESS by pressing 2.

2. Select Option 3, NVRAM Maintenance.

Philips Medical Systems. Confidential and Proprietary information. Refer to Title Page.
3. Select Option 2, ESS control/information:
DISABLED 1.) Diagnostic FLASH CRC
DISABLED 2.) Operating System FLASH CRC
DISABLED 3.) Select
DISABLED 4.) Serial 16C552 internal
DISABLED 5.) Serial 16C552 external
DISABLED 6.) NVRAM
7.) Continue

Select option:

4. Selecting the respective number will toggle DISABLED to ENABLED. After each test is set, press 7 to return. Press 3 to return to the
NVRAM MAINTENANCE MENU.
5. Press 6 to return to the BOARD LEVEL TEST/UTILITY MENU. If an ESS test was enabled, you can press 2, Environmental Stress
Screening, to execute the enabled test(s). The screen will report on any errors. Reset button will stop the test (reboot the board).
BOARD LEVEL TEST/UTILITY MENU – Option 3: NVRAM Maintenance Menu
1.) Error Log Maintenance
2.) ESS control/information
3.) Diagnostic remote download
4.) Remote test location
5.) Test/diagnostic mode [TEST]
6.) Return

1. Press 1 from NVRAM Maintenance Menu:

ERROR LOG MAINTENANCE MENU

1.) Display error log

2.) Clear error log
3.) Error handling [CONT]
4.) Error log handling [STOP WHEN BUFFER FULL]
5.) Error log length [16]
6.) Return

1: Display error log: Shows the contents of the error log

2: Clear error log: Will delete the current contents of the error log

3: Error handling: Returns three options to handle the testing after an error: Continue, Stop or Skip.

Philips Medical Systems. Confidential and Proprietary information. Refer to Title Page.
 4.): Error log handling returns three options for error logging.

5.): Error log length – choose number from 1 to 16.

2. Press 6 to return to NVRAM Maintenance Menu.

3. Press 2 from the NVRAM Maintenance Menu:
ESS CONTROL/INFORMATION MENU

1.) ESS test selection

2.) Display ESS statistics
3.) Return

1: ESS test selection returns three options that let you disable or enable Diagnostic FLASH CRC or Operating System Flash CRC or Select
(from the DIAGNOSTICS MENU.)

2 :Show the start time, date and total iterations. Displays statistics on a previous ESS run.

4. Press 3 to return.
5. NVRAM Maintenance Menu – Option 3: Diagnostic remote download
(Currently not implemented)

6. NVRAM Maintenance Menu – Option 4: Remote test location

1.) Host IP address [Currently not implemented]
2.) Download pathname [Currently not implimented]
3.) Return

7. Press 3 to return.
8. NVRAM Maintenance Menu – Option 5: Test/Diagnostic mode
(Toggles DIAG and TEST modes)

9. Press 6 to Return
(end of NVRAM Maintenance menu)
(Type exit <CR> at the pSH+> prompt to exit the Xterm window.)

Philips Medical Systems. Confidential and Proprietary information. Refer to Title Page.
AcQIM – AP / AP Memory
Description: Tests the internal SRAM of each DSP and external DRAM of the DSP cluster(s) for the Array Processor board. This test does
not test the CPU memory. All of the CPU memory is tested on power–up via the flash based tests.
After the test is initiated, the following Main Menu will appear:
ARRAY PROCESSOR BOARD MEMORY TEST
0.) All listed memories
1.) Cluster one memories
2.) Exit
Select option:

Option 1 responds with:

ARRAY PROCESSOR BOARD MEMORY TEST
0.) All listed memories
1.) DSP internal SRAM
2.) DSP external DRAM
3.) Return
Select option:

Option 0 will test ALL DSP internal SRAM and external DRAM memory.
Option 1 tests the DSP internal SRAM memory. Responds with:

ARRAY PROCESSOR BOARD MEMORY TEST

0.) All listed memories
1.) DSP one internal SRAM
2.) DSP two internal SRAM
3.) DSP three internal SRAM
4.) DSP four internal SRAM
5.) DSP five internal SRAM
6.) DSP six internal SRAM
7.) Return
Select option:

Select any individual tests or ”0” to test all of the listed memories. The menu will return after the test has completed. Press 7 to return:

Philips Medical Systems. Confidential and Proprietary information. Refer to Title Page.
 ARRAY PROCESSOR BOARD MEMORY TEST

0.) All listed memories

1.) DSP internal SRAM
2.) DSP external DRAM
3.) Return

Select option:

Option 2 tests the DSP external DRAM memory on the AP. When selected, the test runs immediately and will not prompt for an additional
menu. Will return the menu when complete. This test takes approximately about 35 seconds.
Press 3 to return to the main menu.

(Type exit <CR> at the pSH+> prompt to exit the Xterm window.)

Philips Medical Systems. Confidential and Proprietary information. Refer to Title Page.
AcQIM – AP / DSP Diagnostics
1. After the option is selected, the following Main Menu appears:
Process all options
PCI Setup Test
Cluster Interface Test
IOP Register Read/Write
Slave DMA Test
DSP download
DSP Cluster Interrupts
DSP Cluster Error Interrupts
DSP Cluster External RAM DMA Test
DSP Prefetch FIFO Test
GAM Internal Link Port
GAM PCI Master Accesses
DSP Core R/W of External Memory
GAM/Gantry Link Port
Exit

2. Enter the selection of the test(s) that you want or enter ”0” to perform all tests. When a selection is made, you are prompted to select
the following options:
Test Control Mode is [STOP ON FAILURE]
Loop Count is [20]
Test Reporting Mode is [TERSE]
Click on Change or Continue

Note: Selection ”A” must be capped.

3. If the options listed are correct, press <CR>. If you want to change an option, press any key to get the following option screen:
1 – STOP ON FAILURE
2 – LOOP ON FAILURE
3 – LOOP UNTIL FAILURE
4 – CONTINUE ON FAILURE
5 – LOOP ON TEST
6 – STEP THROUGH TEST
7 – LOOP ON TEST SUITE
<CR> for [STOP ON FAILURE]

4. Enter the selection of your choice and press <CR>. You will be prompted to enter the Loop Count number:
Specify the Loop Count [20]:

5. Enter a new number or <CR> to keep the present value. You will be prompted to enter the Test Reporting Mode:

Philips Medical Systems. Confidential and Proprietary information. Refer to Title Page.
 Test Reporting Mode is [TERSE]
1 – VERBOSE
2 – TERSE
3 – PASS/FAIL ONLY
<CR> for [TERSE]

6. The Verbose mode prints to the screen a large amount of information, the Terse mode prints what test has passed or failed and the
pass/fail mode merely prints if all selected tests passed or failed. Select the Test Reporting Mode and press <CR>.
7. The test(s) will proceed and display the results in the mode chosen.
8. (Type exit <CR> at the pSH+> prompt to exit the Xterm window.)

Philips Medical Systems. Confidential and Proprietary information. Refer to Title Page.
AcQIM – AP / VME Test
Description: Allows two boards populated with the Universe VME interface chip to exchange data sets over the VME bus backplane. This
includes interaction between the Array Processor, Gantry Acquisition Module, and the Projector Boards. This excludes the CP board. The
VME test must be run on ALL boards (except CP), then two boards are selected – one as a Master and one as a Slave. For the board that
is not participating in the current test, the VME test is started, but the Master/Slave selection is not made. After the test on the first two boards
completes, the operator must then reverse the Master/Slave relationship and run the test on those two boards again. This process is
repeated on the remaining two combinations of boards. A table of these combinations is provided below.

1. After the VME Test is initiated, the following menu will be displayed:
VME Bus Test – Main Menu
========================================================
M – Set this board to be Test Master (Sets up PCI Slave)
S – Set this board to be Test Slave (Sets up VME Slave)
Q – Quit
========================================================
Advanced Universe Configuration
U – Toggle Local Universe Slave Posted Writes/PreReads Current = 0 (1=ON, 0=OFF)

2. DO NOT make a menu selection at this time. Run the VME test again on the other two boards from their respective pulldown menus
(in this case, the GAM and Projector).
3. Press S to set up the first board as the slave. The slave window will appear at the bottom half of the monitor and the following will be
displayed:
Vme Bus Test Slave Enabled (VME Slave is Active)
Press ANY KEY to Disable and Return to Main Menu

4. Set up the other board as the Master . Move the forefront window out of the way. Press M <CR>:

Philips Medical Systems. Confidential and Proprietary information. Refer to Title Page.
 TEST MASTER MENU
===========================================================
R – Run memory test
A – Address range to test (VME Base Address and Block Size)
Q – Return to Main menu
Advanced Settings:
C – retry Count. Current = 10
P – Pass count. Current = 1
T – Cycle Type Current = 0 (0=BOTH, 1=SINGLE, 2=DMA)
L – Loop to beginning on FAILURE Current = 0 (1=ON, 0=OFF)
V – Verbose mode Toggle Current = 0 (1=ON, 0=OFF)
E – Enhanced Test Toggle Current = 0 (1=ON, 0=OFF)
U – Toggle Posted Writes Current = 0 (1=ON, 0=OFF)
M – Menu Display Toggle Current = 1 (1=ON, 0=OFF)
S – Single cycle Stop on error Current = 1 (1=ON, 0=OFF)
W – What to do if the test hangs
NOTES: 1. You must Set A Test Master on another board before running!
2. Before using Enhanced Test (choice E), read the instructions in choice W.
===========================================================
Enter R, A, Q, C, P, T, L, V, E, U, M, S or W and Press ENTER:
5. After the Master is set up, press r <CR> to run the test. If this portion of the test passes, the Slave and Master roles must be reversed.
Quit the test on the two participating boards from their respective menus (”Q” on Master menu, any key then “Q” on the Slave menu.)
6. Run the test again on the same two boards, but REVERSE their roles – make the Slave the Master and the Master the Slave. After
the test is complete, quit the test on the participating boards. Restart the VME test on these two boards again.
7. Set up one of the previously tested boards as the Slave. Select the remaining untested board as the Master. Once this test completes,
reverse their roles as you did in step 5. Run the Slave/Master test one more time on the remaining combination of boards, reversing
their relationships as before. The table below will give you a better idea of the (three) two–pair board combinations and how each board
should be set up with respect to the other:

AP GAM Projector AP GAM Projector

Slave Master not tested not tested Slave Master
Master Slave not tested Master not tested Slave
not tested Master Slave Slave not tested Master

Philips Medical Systems. Confidential and Proprietary information. Refer to Title Page.
Detail of options from the TEST MASTER MENU:

A:

VME Bus Test – VME Bus Range Menu

=============================================================
B – Set VME Base Address – Current Base = 0x02000000
L – Set VME block Size – Current Size = 0x00100000
Q – Return to previous menu
=============================================================
Enter B, L, or Q and Press ENTER:

8. Set new VME base address and/or VME block size here, otherwise, press Q to use the current values and return to the previous menu.

Q:

Returns to the Main Menu

Advanced settings:

C:

Master Retry count = 10

Enter the number of times for the Test Master to attempt to make a connection with the test slave.
Type a number of passes then press ENTER:

P:

Pass count = 1
Type number of passes then press ENTER:

T:

Cycle Type = 0
Type 0 = Both, 1 = Single or 2 = DMA
Then press Enter

If option 2 = DMA is selected, the following submenu will be displayed:

Philips Medical Systems. Confidential and Proprietary information. Refer to Title Page.
 0.) All
1.) Random
2.) Alternating 64 bit 0x00’s and 0xf’s
3.) Alternating 64 bit 0x5a’s and 0x5’s
4.) Walking 1 in a field of 0’s
5.) Walking 0 in a field of 1’s
6.) Alternating 32 bit 0x00’s and 0xff’s
7.) Alternating 32 bit 0x00’s and 0xff’s

L:
Test will loop to beginning on failure!

V:
Verbose mode is ON

Press any key to continue

E:
Enhanced Mode is ON
WARNING: Test will run considerably slower

Press any key to continue

M:
Menu Display is OFF
Press any key to continue

(Note that if this is enabled only the lettered options will be displayed.)

S:
Single cycle stop on error handling is OFF
Press any key to continue

When stop on error is OFF and the operator selects S, they get:

Single cycle stop on error handling is ON

Press any key to continue

Philips Medical Systems. Confidential and Proprietary information. Refer to Title Page.
W:
What to do when the test hangs

If Verbose mode is ON and no new status messages appear for two or more minutes then follow the instructions below:

A. Record the base address from the last status message displayed
B. Manually reset the Test Master and Test Slave boards
C. From the Test Master Menu, Change the Address range to the base address you recorded in step A and a size of
0x0010000
D. From the Test Master Menu, set the Posted Writes option to OFF
E. Run the test again

NOTE: Enhanced mode will considerably slow test performance

Press any key to continue

R:
Runs the test and responds with a similar screen:
VME Test running – Press any key to exit...
Pass Number: 1
Testing block 1 of 1, Base Address: 0x02000000 Block Size: 0x00100000
VME BUS Test PASSED!

Test completed!

U – Toggle Posted Writes

Used to make a change to the configuration of the VME bus interface chip Universe II.

D – Disable all VME/PCI Slaves

Disable a Picker board (BP, AP, or GAM) from using the VME Bus.

If you run the VME Bus test between a BP and an AP, you want to make sure that the GAM doesn’t try to use the VME bus at the same
time. This option tells the GAM to not use the bus. Additionally, if you get the following message, then choose option D for all Picker Boards
on the system before running the test.
”ERROR – Could not establish communication with Test Slave!”

(Type exit and press <CR> at the pSH+> prompt to exit the Xterm window.)

Philips Medical Systems. Confidential and Proprietary information. Refer to Title Page.
AcQIM – AP / Flash Diagnostics
Description: A collection of tests that allow various hardware components of the AP, the PB, the CP, and the GAM to be tested on power–up
and after power–up. Power–up test results are communicated via the diagnostic display on the AP, the PB, and the GAM. The CP uses
the board fail LED. Tests embedded in flash can also be accessed after power–up and run by the operator.

NOTE
You must have a null modem serial cable plugged into the AP board and port A on the
SUN to run this test.

BOARD LEVEL TEST/UTILITY MENU – Option 1: Diagnostics Menu

DIAGNOSTICS MENU

1.) CPU Version

2.) Diagnostic FLASH CRC
3.) Operating System FLASH CRC
4.) Select
5.) Ethernet
6.) NVRAM
7.) Cluster Memory
8.) Instruction cache enable
9.) Instruction/data cache disable
10.) Access utility
11.) Return

(Type exit <CR> at the pSH+> prompt to exit the Xterm window.)

Philips Medical Systems. Confidential and Proprietary information. Refer to Title Page.
AcQIM – Projector / Projector Memory
Description: Tests the shape table memory, the output memory, and all of the memory internal to each of the Panther ASICs of the mother
board/daughter card(s) for the Projector board. This test does not test the CPU memory. All of the CPU memory is tested on power– up
via the flash based tests.

After the test is initiated, you are prompted with the Main Menu:
PROJECTOR BOARD MEMORY TESTS

0.) All listed memories (DO NOT DO AT THIS TIME!)

1.) Shape Table
2.) Output memories
3.) Daughterboard memories
4.) Exit

Select option:

Main Menu options are detailed below:

1.) Shape Table: Will return “The Test Passed” or print the associated error.
2.) Output Memories: (Brian?) This option will display a sub–menu:
PROJECTOR BOARD MEMORY TEST

0.) All listed memories

1.) Output memory accumulator bank zero
2.) Output memory accumulator bank one
3.) Output memory buffer
4.) Return

Each of these tests will run and return with a “Test Passed” message or an associated error.

3.) Daughter board memories: This option will display a sub–menu: The following only shows the subsequent menus. The methodfor
choosing the options follows immediately after the menus.

Philips Medical Systems. Confidential and Proprietary information. Refer to Title Page.
 0.) All listed memories
1.) Daughter board zero memories (FUP)
2.) Daughter board one memories
3.) Daughter board two memories
4.) Daughter board three memories
5.) Daughter board four memories
6.) Daughter board five memories
7. Return

Select option:

Each of these seven options (0–6) will return the following sub–menu. You will need to know what Asics are physically populating the
respective board to correctly run this test:
0.) All listed memories
1.) ASIC zero
2.) ASIC one
3.) ASIC two
4.) ASIC three
5.) Return

Select option:

Each one of the five options (0–4) will return the following sub–menu:
0.) All listed memories
1.) Pipeline Zero
2.) Pipeline One
3.) Return

Select option:

(Type exit <CR> at the pSH+> prompt to exit the Xterm window.)

Philips Medical Systems. Confidential and Proprietary information. Refer to Title Page.
AcQIM – Projector / Projector Pipeline
Description: Tests the Projector board’s ability to perform pipeline operations on different data sets designed to test various capabilities
of the board. Input data sets are manipulated by hardware and the results are compared with known good values.

1. After the test is initiated, the following Main Menu will be displayed:
PROJECTOR BOARD PIPELINE UTILITY

0.) Pipeline operations

1.) Configuration
2.) Exit

Select option:

2. Select option 1, Configuration:

PROJECTOR BOARD PIPELINE UTILITY

1.) File I/O

2.) Registers
3.) Miscellaneous
4.) Return

Select option: 1

3. Select option 1, File I/O:

Philips Medical Systems. Confidential and Proprietary information. Refer to Title Page.
 PROJECTOR BOARD PIPELINE UTILITY

1.) Coefficient files [/../common/coefff.bin]

2.) Shape table [/../common/shape.dat]
3.) Table one [/]
4.) Table two [/../common/ffm2t2.bin]
5.) Table three [/]
6.) Output memory accumulator [/omacc.hrd]
7.) Output memory buffer [/ombuf.0]
8.) Output memory init [/]
9.) View memory [/views.bin]
10.) FP scale [/]
11.) Host IP address [0x90362e0a]
12.) Host directory [/client/picker/bp_aqi/BAY3/waterFF]
13.) Return

Select option:

4. (Explain choices 1–12 here.) Press 13 to return:

PROJECTOR BOARD PIPELINE UTILITY

1.) File I/O

2.) Registers
3.) Miscellaneous
4.) Return

Select option:

5. Select option 2, Registers:

PROJECTOR BOARD PIPELINE UTILITY

1.) Narrowcast
2.) Broadcast
3.) Return

Select option:

6. Select from the two choices:

Narrowcast: (explain here)
Broadcast: (explain here)

Either of the choices will prompt you to select a daughterboard and asic number:

Philips Medical Systems. Confidential and Proprietary information. Refer to Title Page.
 Select daughter board [4–5]:

Select ASIC [0–3]:

7. After the daughterboard and asic are selected, you will be prompted to enter values for __?_:
PROJECTOR BOARD PIPELINE UTILITY

1.) FP_SCALE [0xffffffff]

2.) SIG_AN [0xffffffff]
3.) OMINIT [0xffffffff]
4.) OFFSET [0xffffffff]
5.) VIEWLEN [0xffffffff]
6.) CONFIG1 [0xffffffff]
7.) CONFIG2 [0xffffffff]
8.) CONSTAT [0x0]
9.) Return

Select option:

8. Each of the options (1–8) will prompt you to enter a value.:

Enter value:

9. After the values are entered, press 9 to return:

PROJECTOR BOARD PIPELINE UTILITY

1.) Narrowcast
2.) Broadcast
3.) Return

Select option:

10. Option 2, Broadcast will prompt for the same input as Narrowcast. Press 3 to return:
PROJECTOR BOARD PIPELINE UTILITY

1.) File I/O

2.) Registers
3.) Miscellaneous
4.) Return

Select option:

Philips Medical Systems. Confidential and Proprietary information. Refer to Title Page.
11. Select option 3, Miscellaneous:

PROJECTOR BOARD PIPELINE UTILITY

1.) Number of views [2400]

2.) Database header size [0x0]
3.) View header size [0x0]
4.) Operation mode [HARDWARE]
5.) View size [1024]
6.) Return

Select option:

12. Each of the options (1, 2, 3 and 5) will prompt you to enter a value. Option 4 will toggle between HARDWARE and SIMULATION.
After the values are entered, press 6 to return:
PROJECTOR BOARD PIPELINE UTILITY

1.) File I/O

2.) Registers
3.) Miscellaneous
4.) Return

Select option:

13. Press 4 to return to the Main Menu.

14. Press 2 from the Main Menu if you wish to exit the PROJECTOR BOARD PIPELINE UTILITY.
15. (Type exit <CR> at the pSH+> prompt to exit the Xterm window.)

Philips Medical Systems. Confidential and Proprietary information. Refer to Title Page.
AcQIM – Projector / Projector Broadcast
Description: Tests the broadcast capability of the Projector board’s Panther ASIC’s.

1. After the option is selected, you will see the following display:

A (motherboard with one daughter card)

B (motherboard with two daughter cards)
C (motherboard with three daughter cards)
D (motherboard with four daughter cards)
E (motherboard with five daughter cards)
None (motherboard with no daughter cards)

Make a selection based on the system’s AcQImage board.

PROJECTOR BOARD BROADCAST TEST

The test has begun..

The test passed!
Hit return to proceed
or
PROJECTOR BOARD BROADCAST TEST

The test has begun..

The test failed!
Hit return to proceed

Broadcast failure! Write: YYYYYYYY Read: XXXXXXXX Address: XXXXXXXX

Where YYYYYYYY could be 00000000, ffffffff, 55555555, or aaaaaaaa and XXXXXXXX could be anything.

(Type exit <CR> at the pSH+> prompt to exit the Xterm window.)

Philips Medical Systems. Confidential and Proprietary information. Refer to Title Page.
AcQIM – Projector / VME Test
Description: Allows two boards populated with the Universe VME interface chip to exchange data sets over the VME bus backplane. This
includes interaction between the Array Processor, Gantry Acquisition Module, and the Projector Boards. This excludes the CP board. The
VME test must be run on ALL boards (except CP), then two boards are selected – one as a Master and one as a Slave. For the board that
is not participating in the current test, the VME test is started, but the Master/Slave selection is not made. After the test on the first two boards
completes, the operator must then reverse the Master/Slave relationship and run the test on those two boards again. This process is
repeated on the remaining two combinations of boards. A table of these combinations is provided below.

1. After the VME Test is initiated, the following menu will be displayed:
VME Bus Test – Main Menu
========================================================
M – Set this board to be Test Master (Sets up PCI Slave)
S – Set this board to be Test Slave (Sets up VME Slave)
Q – Quit
========================================================
Advanced Universe Configuration
U – Toggle Local Universe Slave Posted Writes/PreReads Current = 0 (1=ON, 0=OFF)

2. DO NOT make a menu selection at this time. Run the VME test again on the other two boards from their respective pulldown menus
(in this case, the AP and GAM).
3. Press S to set up the first board as the slave. The slave window will appear at the bottom half of the monitor and the following will be
displayed:
Vme Bus Test Slave Enabled (VME Slave is Active)
Press ANY KEY to Disable and Return to Main Menu

4. Set up the other board as the Master . Move the forefront window out of the way. Press M <CR>:

Philips Medical Systems. Confidential and Proprietary information. Refer to Title Page.
 TEST MASTER MENU
===========================================================
R – Run memory test
A – Address range to test (VME Base Address and Block Size)
Q – Return to Main menu
Advanced Settings:
C – retry Count. Current = 10
P – Pass count. Current = 1
T – Cycle Type Current = 0 (0=BOTH, 1=SINGLE, 2=DMA)
L – Loop to beginning on FAILURE Current = 0 (1=ON, 0=OFF)
V – Verbose mode Toggle Current = 0 (1=ON, 0=OFF)
E – Enhanced Test Toggle Current = 0 (1=ON, 0=OFF)
U – Toggle Posted Writes Current = 0 (1=ON, 0=OFF)
M – Menu Display Toggle Current = 1 (1=ON, 0=OFF)
S – Single cycle Stop on error Current = 1 (1=ON, 0=OFF)
W – What to do if the test hangs
NOTES: 1. You must Set A Test Master on another board before running!
2. Before using Enhanced Test (choice E), read the instructions in choice W.
===========================================================
Enter R, A, Q, C, P, T, L, V, E, U, M, S or W and Press ENTER:
5. After the Master is set up, press r <CR> to run the test. If this portion of the test passes, the Slave and Master roles must be reversed.
Quit the test on the two participating boards from their respective menus (”Q” on Master menu, any key then “Q” on the Slave menu.)
6. Run the test again on the same two boards, but REVERSE their roles – make the Slave the Master and the Master the Slave. After
the test is complete, quit the test on the participating boards. Restart the VME test on these two boards again.
7. Set up one of the previously tested boards as the Slave. Select the remaining untested board as the Master. Once this test completes,
reverse their roles as you did in step 5. Run the Slave/Master test one more time on the remaining combination of boards, reversing
their relationships as before. The table below will give you a better idea of the (three) two–pair board combinations and how each board
should be set up with respect to the other:

AP GAM Projector AP GAM Projector

Slave Master not tested not tested Slave Master
Master Slave not tested Master not tested Slave
not tested Master Slave Slave not tested Master

Philips Medical Systems. Confidential and Proprietary information. Refer to Title Page.
Detail of options from the TEST MASTER MENU:

A:

VME Bus Test – VME Bus Range Menu

=============================================================
B – Set VME Base Address – Current Base = 0x02000000
L – Set VME block Size – Current Size = 0x00100000
Q – Return to previous menu
=============================================================
Enter B, L, or Q and Press ENTER:

8. Set new VME base address and/or VME block size here, otherwise, press Q to use the current values and return to the previous menu.

Q:

Returns to the Main Menu

Advanced settings:

C:

Master Retry count = 10

Enter the number of times for the Test Master to attempt to make a connection with the test slave.
Type a number of passes then press ENTER:

P:

Pass count = 1
Type number of passes then press ENTER:

T:

Cycle Type = 0
Type 0 = Both, 1 = Single or 2 = DMA
Then press Enter

If option 2 = DMA is selected, the following submenu will be displayed:

Philips Medical Systems. Confidential and Proprietary information. Refer to Title Page.
 0.) All
1.) Random
2.) Alternating 64 bit 0x00’s and 0xf’s
3.) Alternating 64 bit 0x5a’s and 0x5’s
4.) Walking 1 in a field of 0’s
5.) Walking 0 in a field of 1’s
6.) Alternating 32 bit 0x00’s and 0xff’s
7.) Alternating 32 bit 0x00’s and 0xff’s

L:
Test will loop to beginning on failure!

V:
Verbose mode is ON

Press any key to continue

E:
Enhanced Mode is ON
WARNING: Test will run considerably slower

Press any key to continue

M:
Menu Display is OFF
Press any key to continue

(Note that if this is enabled only the lettered options will be displayed.)

S:
Single cycle stop on error handling is OFF
Press any key to continue

When stop on error is OFF and the operator selects S, they get:

Single cycle stop on error handling is ON

Press any key to continue

Philips Medical Systems. Confidential and Proprietary information. Refer to Title Page.
W:
What to do when the test hangs

If Verbose mode is ON and no new status messages appear for two or more minutes then follow the instructions below:

A. Record the base address from the last status message displayed
B. Manually reset the Test Master and Test Slave boards
C. From the Test Master Menu, Change the Address range to the base address you recorded in step A and a size of
0x0010000
D. From the Test Master Menu, set the Posted Writes option to OFF
E. Run the test again

NOTE: Enhanced mode will considerably slow test performance

Press any key to continue

R:
Runs the test and responds with a similar screen:
VME Test running – Press any key to exit...
Pass Number: 1
Testing block 1 of 1, Base Address: 0x02000000 Block Size: 0x00100000
VME BUS Test PASSED!

Test completed!

U – Toggle Posted Writes

Used to make a change to the configuration of the VME bus interface chip Universe II.

D – Disable all VME/PCI Slaves

Disable a Picker board (BP, AP, or GAM) from using the VME Bus.

If you run the VME Bus test between a BP and an AP, you want to make sure that the GAM doesn’t try to use the VME bus at the same
time. This option tells the GAM to not use the bus. Additionally, if you get the following message, then choose option D for all Picker Boards
on the system before running the test.
”ERROR – Could not establish communication with Test Slave!”

(Type exit and press <CR> at the pSH+> prompt to exit the Xterm window.)

Philips Medical Systems. Confidential and Proprietary information. Refer to Title Page.
AcQIM – Projector / Asic Test
Description: Tests various aspects of the Projector board’s Panther ASIC’s.

1. After the ASIC tests are initiated from the Diag GUI, you are prompted to enter the Board Assembly number from the board face plate:
178064 – AP, / 178142 – Proj, / 178141 – GAM.
2. You then pick the Version Specifier, which indicates to the diagnostic how many daughterboards are on the respective board.
3. Then, the following Main Menu appears:
ASIC TESTS (BP)
================================================================
1 – Auto Mode – Coefficient Memory
2 – Manual Mode – Coefficient Memory
3 – Auto Mode – View Memory
4 – Manual Mode – View Memory
5 – Walking Bit – Register Tests: OMINIT, SIG_AN, FP_SCALE.......
6 – Cubic Spine – Pipe One, View Memory
7 – Cubic Spine – Pipe Two, View Memory
8 – Forward Proj. – Table 3
9 – Forward Proj. – Table 2 Part 1
10– Forward Proj. – Table 2 Part 2
11– Forward Proj. – Table 2 Part 3
12– Forward Proj. – Table 2 Part 4
13– Forward Proj. – Table 2 Part 5
14– Forward Proj. – Table 2 All Parts
M – More Tests
T – Test Options Menu
Q – Quit Tests
==============================================================
Enter Choice then press ENTER:

4. Press M and <CR> to show the rest of the available tests:

Philips Medical Systems. Confidential and Proprietary information. Refer to Title Page.
 ASIC TESTS
==============================================================
15– Table Two Mem Rnd – Use Output Bank 0 Mem A
16– Table Two Mem Rnd – Use Output Bank 0 Mem B
17– Table Two Mem Rnd – Use Output Bank 1
18– Table Two Mem Rnd – Use Output Buffer
19– Signature Analyzer – Only Valid for ASIC: 3 DB: 5
20– Signature Analyzer – ALL ASICs

M – More Tests
T – Test Options Menu
Q – Quit Tests
=============================================================
Enter Choice then press ENTER:

5. Press T to enter the Test Options Menu:

TEST OPTIONS
======================================================================
S – SET PASS COUNT Current = 1
R – RUN ALL TESTS
A – Asic to test Current DB:5 ASIC: 5
D – DISPLAY MENU ON/OFF Current = 1 (1=ON 0=OFF)
C – CONTINUE/HALT TESTING AFTER FAILURE Current =1 (1=HALT 0=CONT.)
L – Loop
======================================================================

6. Type a TEST OPTION then press ENTER: (Test Option descriptions are on following page).

7. After you select the Daughterboard and ASIC, the screen will inform you of your selection and prompt you to press ENTER.
8. After pressing <CR>, the screen will return to the Main Menu. If you wish to set another TEST OPTION, press T.
9. If you want to test all of the ASICs, see option 6.
10. After all of the Test Options have been selected, press ”R” to run all tests. You will begin to see each of the tests and an indication
whether it PASSED or FAILED. The tests (all) take about 1 minute. When finished, the screen will display:

Tests Completed – Press ENTER to Continue

11. Press Q to quit the ASIC tests. (Type exit <CR> at the pSH+> prompt to exit the Xterm window.)

Philips Medical Systems. Confidential and Proprietary information. Refer to Title Page.
Description of TEST OPTIONS:

1 – SET PASS COUNT: sets how many times the test(s) will be run.

2 – RUN ALL TESTS: Press ”R” to run every test from the menu. (As opposed to running specific tests from the Main Menu)

3 – Asic to Test: Press ”A” to Choose a Daughterboard:

Choose a DAUGHTERBOARD NUMBER 0, 1, 2, 3, 4 or 5 : Choose an ASIC NUMBER 0, 1, 2 or 3 :

4 – DISPLAY MENU ON/OFF: Will inform you that the menus will not be displayed. You will be given the first letter of each test:
Menus will NOT be displayed
Press ENTER to Continue
Enter Test Number, S,R,D,C,T,M,A,L OR Q then press ENTER :

5 – CONTINUE/HALT TESTING AFTER FAILURE: Useful if you do not want the tests to stop after an error has occurred.

6 – LOOP THROUGH ALL EXISTING ASICS: Tests all ASICS, so option 3 above will not have to be selected. When this selection is toggled
by pressing ”L” you will be informed that the test will or will not loop through the ASICs.

This option is toggled but not indicated on the Test Options menu, so it is important to watch the response to your ”L” command.

Philips Medical Systems. Confidential and Proprietary information. Refer to Title Page.
AcQIM – Projector / Flash Diagnostics
Description: A collection of tests that allow various hardware components of the AP, the PB, the CP, and the GAM to be tested on power–up
and after power–up. Power–up test results are communicated via the diagnostic display on the AP, the PB, and the GAM. The CP uses
the board fail LED. Tests embedded in flash can also be accessed after power–up and run by the operator.

NOTE
You must have a null modem serial cable plugged into the BP board and port A on the
SUN to run this test.

BOARD LEVEL TEST/UTILITY MENU – Option 1: Diagnostics Menu

DIAGNOSTICS MENU

1.) CPU Version

2.) Diagnostic FLASH CRC
3.) Operating System FLASH CRC
4.) Select
5.) Ethernet
6.) NVRAM
7.) Memory
8.) Broadcast
9.) Instruction cache enable
10.) Instruction/data cache disable
11.) Access utility
12.) Return

(Type exit <CR> at the pSH+> prompt to exit the Xterm window.)

Philips Medical Systems. Confidential and Proprietary information. Refer to Title Page.
GANTRY – MANEXP

Description: The MANEXP program allows you to season the tube, perform stationary exposures and warm up the tube.

One default optable will be stored within the program for modification by the user or automatic modification by the seasoning or warmup
program.

In the interactive mode the user will be presented with a menu which contains 4 buttons:

MANUAL EXPOSURE BUTTON: Starts and allows only modification of kV, mA, Time and Scanspeed.

TUBE SEASONING BUTTON: The Tube Seasoning file is read from the disk and the exposures are performed accordingly without any
user interaction. The default optable is modified with the parameters in the seasoning file.

WARMUP BUTTON: The Warmup file is read from the disk and the exposures are performed accordingly without any user interaction. The
default optable is being modified with the parameters in the seasoning file.

ENGINEERING OPTABLE EDITOR BUTTON: A START button will be painted on the screen and if pressed, the optable will be converted
to a scantable and submitted to the gantryserver, where the exposure is commanded. The optable editor contains a status window, where
the COMPLETE or ERROR Message will be displayed if the exposure completes or fails. No other requests can be sent until the status
of the operation is received. Please note that a –1 in the scanspeed field does not move the scanframe and a stationary exposure is taken.

NOTE
The engineering optable editor button is password protected since the optable editor
allows to edit all fields in the optable.

When the program is initiated, the following Main Screen will appear (Figure 119).

For MANUAL EXPOSURE, refer to Figure 120.

For TUBE SEASONING, refer to Figure 121.

For TUBE WARMUP, refer to Figure 122.

For MECHANICAL TUBE ALIGNMENT, refer to Figure 123.

Philips Medical Systems. Confidential and Proprietary information. Refer to Title Page.
 Manexp
Service Utilities Status Window GANTRY MONITOR

submitt xxx KV 80 MA 30 Frame_speed 0 Exposure time 2 kV

MANUAL EXPOSURE Frame_position –1 Filter 0 Beam_Limiter OFF 0
Command_type MANX mA
TUBE SEASONING 0
Tube Heat (%)
WARMUP 0
mech TUBE ALIGN
Rotor Speed (Hz)
mech TUBE ALIGN 0

X–RAYS
Preheat Calibration ON

OFF
Beam/Det Alignment

FIGURE 119 MANEXP MAIN SCREEN

Click on the left hand Service Utilities to hyperlink to their respective screens.

Philips Medical Systems. Confidential and Proprietary information. Refer to Title Page.
 MANUAL EXPOSURE

Service Utilities Status Window

EXIT
MANUAL EXPOSURE stop_signal bay00
Stop Message sentF

TUBE SEASONING

WARMUP

mech TUBE ALIGNMENT

PREHEAT CALIBRATION

BEAM/DET. ALIGNMENT

Loop (1–255):
Filter (0,1,2):

KV (80–140):
Beam Limiter (ON/OFF):
mA 30–400:
Focal Spot (SMALL/LARGE):
Scanspeed (0–12):
Compensator (FULL/HALF/NONE):
Exposure Time (0–120 secs.):
Collimator (1–10):
Frame Position (–1–2399):

WARNING: SCAN FRAME WILL MOVE AFTER YOU

HIT THE START BUTTON, X–RAYS ARE EMITTED!!!

RETURN STOP START

FIGURE 120 MANUAL EXPOSURE SCREEN

Philips Medical Systems. Confidential and Proprietary information. Refer to Title Page.
 Manexp
Service Utilities Status Window
EXIT
submitt xxx KV 80 MA 30 Frame_speed 0 Exposure time 2
MANUAL EXPOSURE
Frame_position –1 Filter 0 Beam_Limiter OFF

Command_type MANX
TUBE SEASONING

WARMUP

mech TUBE ALIGN

Preheat Calibration

Beam/Det Alignment

TUBE SEASONING
Please ensure that all personel have cleared the scanner room.

WARNING: SCANFRAME WILL MOVE AFTER YOU

HIT THE START BUTTON, X–RAYS WILL BE EMITTED!!!

RETURN STOP START

FIGURE 121 TUBE SEASONING SCREEN

Philips Medical Systems. Confidential and Proprietary information. Refer to Title Page.
 Manexp
Service Utilities Status Window
EXIT
submitt xxx KV 80 MA 30 Frame_speed 0 Exposure time 2
MANUAL EXPOSURE
Frame_position –1 Filter 0 Beam_Limiter OFF

Command_type MANX
TUBE SEASONING

WARMUP

mech TUBE ALIGN

Preheat Calibration

Beam/Det Alignment

WARMUP

Please ensure that all personell have cleared the scanner room.

WARNING: SCANFRAME WILL MOVE AFTER YOU

HIT THE START BUTTON, X–RAYS WILL BE EMITTED!!!

RETURN STOP START

FIGURE 122 TUBE WARMUP SCREEN

Philips Medical Systems. Confidential and Proprietary information. Refer to Title Page.
 Manexp
Service Utilities Status Window
EXIT

MANUAL EXPOSURE submitt xxx KV 80 MA 30 Frame_speed 0 Exposure time 2

Frame_position –1 Filter 0 Beam_Limiter OFF

Command_type MANX
TUBE SEASONING

WARMUP

mech TUBE ALIGN

Preheat Calibration

Beam/Det Alignment

MECHANICAL TUBE ALIGNMENT

Please place film securely at the 6 o’clock position

on the inner cone of the gantry and hit the START button.

WARNING: SCANFRAME WILL MOVE AFTER YOU

HIT THE START BUTTON, X–RAYS WILL BE EMITTED!!!
(Follow initial instructions in left window.
Alignment continued on next page.)

RETURN STOP START

FIGURE 123 MECHANICAL TUBE ALIGNMENT SCREEN

Philips Medical Systems. Confidential and Proprietary information. Refer to Title Page.
Tube Alignment Procedure
1. After following the initial instructions on the Manexp window and both scans are complete, develop the film and inspect for a narrow,
white band superimposed on a wider, darker band. (Type 52 Polaroid film needs the Polaroid Model 545 Film holder for developing).
Measure the distance from the front edge (see Figure 124) of the narrow, darker band to the front edge of the wide, lighter band
(referred to as distance D1).
2. Measure the distance from the back edge of the narrow, darker band to the back edge of the wide, lighter band (referred to as D2).
FILM

CCW

PAPER CLIP CAN BE SEEN IN IMAGE

D2
D1

CW

FIGURE 124 EXPOSED FILM

3. Determine the distance between the band centers by the following equation:
Distance between band centers (D) = D1 – D2
2
4. Multiply the distance between band centers (D) by 0.417 to determine the distance the X–ray tube must move:
If “D” is positive, rotate axial adj screw CCW
If “D” is negative, rotate axial adj screw CW

NOTE
Approx. 4 turns spans the width of the D1, D2 gray areas on the film.

Philips Medical Systems. Confidential and Proprietary information. Refer to Title Page.
 Manexp
Service Utilities Status Window
EXIT

MANUAL EXPOSURE submitt xxx KV 80 MA 30 Frame_speed 0 Exposure time 2

Frame_position –1 Filter 0 Beam_Limiter OFF

Command_type MANX
TUBE SEASONING

WARMUP

mech TUBE ALIGN

Preheat Calibration

Beam/Det Alignment

PREHEAT CALIBRATION
Please ensure that all personnel have cleared the scanner roon

WARNING: X–RAYS WILL BE EMITTED WHEN YOU

HIT THE START BUTTON!!!

Status

RETURN STOP START

FIGURE 125 PREHEAT CALIBRATION SCREEN

Philips Medical Systems. Confidential and Proprietary information. Refer to Title Page.
 Manexp
Service Utilities Status Window
EXIT

MANUAL EXPOSURE submitt xxx KV 80 MA 30 Frame_speed 0 Exposure time 2

Frame_position –1 Filter 0 Beam_Limiter OFF

Command_type MANX
TUBE SEASONING

WARMUP

mech TUBE ALIGN

Preheat Calibration

Beam/Det Alignment

BEAM/DETECTOR ALIGNMENT

Please place the beam alignment fixtures and the film in the appropriate
position and click the START button.
**CURRENTLY A FACTORY ONLY PROCEDURE**

WARNING: SCANFRAME WILL MOVE AFTER YOU

HIT THE START BUTTON, X–RAYS ARE EMITTED!!!

RETURN STOP START

FIGURE 126 BEAM / DETECTOR ALIGNMENT SCREEN – (MANUF. PROCEDURE ONLY)

Philips Medical Systems. Confidential and Proprietary information. Refer to Title Page.
GANTRY – GSCOPE
Description: GSCOPE was created to give the AcQSim CT the ability to collect data using the GAM and to provide IQOUT functionality
similar to what Field Service was accustomed.

Gantry Scope Lite, now referred to as GScope, bypasses the server architecture of the AcQSim CT. One benefit is that GScope can run
and save data to disk, WITHOUT requiring Recon software to be functional.

Gscope is a Diagnostic tool, thus software defects in other parts of the system should not affect its functionality

GScope works independent of the normal data flows of the system: Commands are sent and intercepted by using the Gserv Commando
for communication with the Gantry. Data is collected on the GAM using the GAM diagnostics routines (which are used to test the GAM
at Manufacturing.)

Gscope commands that are executed via remote access are limited. Operations such as making xrays and gantry or couch movement
are disabled. The following commands may be executed remotely:

BG, BS, CR, DD, DF, DV, ES, FD, GA, GB, GE, GL, GS, GT, GV, GX, LS, NR, SA, SC,SD, SS, TW, WR, OL, XE, XS and XV. Details on
each of these may be obtained from typing “help xx” at the CMD> prompt (where “xx” is the command.)

Special Notes

WARNING
GSCOPE HAS THE ABILITY TO COMMAND THE SYSTEM TO GENERATE X–RAYS.
USE APPROPRIATE RADIATION SAFEGUARDS. FAILURE TO COMPLY CAN
RESULT IN SERIOUS INJURY OR DEATH.

WARNING
GSCOPE HAS THE ABILITY TO COMMAND GANTRY AND COUCH MOTION.
STAND CLEAR OF EQUIPMENT WHEN MOTION IS COMMANDED. FAILURE TO
COMPLY CAN RESULT IN SERIOUS INJURY OR DEATH.

To exit Gscope, type qu in the COMMAND window.

Philips Medical Systems. Confidential and Proprietary information. Refer to Title Page.
START GSCOPE
1. Start Gscope from the Gantry pulldown menu of the Diagnostic GUI. Type qu and press <CR> at the CMD> prompt to exit.

STATUS Window: The Status of the Gantry Server is displayed in this window and updated only when a change occurs, and change
monitored twice a second.
The following indicators are used for marking the currently active system (from left to right, top to bottom in the Status Window above):
GSRV:
IN_ERR 0x8000 Set Bit to mark GPU in error
RES_IN_ERR 0x7FFF Reset Bit to mark GPU in error
ERR_LOCK 0x4000 Set Bit to lock errarry[]
RES_ERR_LOCK 0xBFFF Reset lock to errarry[]
IN_ERROR 0xC000 Bits to mark GPU in error
INIT –1 GPU in soft/hardware startup
GPUIDLE 0 Nothing happening
SCANACTV 1 Scan system active
PILTACTV 2 Pilot system active
VOLMACTV 3 Volume scan system active
BACKACTV 4 Background in progress
STADACTV 5 Stationary data in progress
MAX_GSTATE 5 For ascii error string use

Philips Medical Systems. Confidential and Proprietary information. Refer to Title Page.
scns: Active scan/pilot system state:

0: Scan Idle
1: In Pre–scan
2: At start button
3: In image acquisition sequence before data collection
4: Data collection active
5: In image acquisition sequence after data collection
6: In Post–scan

funs:

Function status – unused at this time.

cont:

Contactor status: 0 = off, 1 = on

rotr:

Rotor status: 0 = off, rotor speed, (in Herz) x78 = 120

flmt:

Filament status: 0 = off, 1 = on

xray:

Xray status: 0 = Xrays off, 1 = Xrays on

fltr:

Filter Position: 0 = no filtration, 1 = x.x mm AI, 2 = x.x mm AI

comp:

Compensator Position: 0 = none, 1 = Full Field, 2 = Half Field

coll:

Philips Medical Systems. Confidential and Proprietary information. Refer to Title Page.
 Collimator Position: 10 to 100 (tenths of a mm)

lasr:

Laser status: 0 = off, 1 = on

shut:

Beam Shutter state: 0 = closed, 1 = open

spot:

Focal Spot status: 0 = small spot, 1 = large spot

blim:

Beam Limiter status: 0 = off, 1 = on

kv:

kV status : actual kV (in kilovolts)

ma:

mA status : actual mA (in milliamps)

heat:

Tube Heat status: percent tube heat

fspd:

Scan Speed: 0 = off, 10–120 (tenths of a second/revolution/bit)

fpos:

Scan Position: Range: 0–xxxx ticks (1/16 detecotr/bit)

cspd:

Philips Medical Systems. Confidential and Proprietary information. Refer to Title Page.
 Couch Speed: Range: 0–3200 ticks (1/32 mm/sec/bit)

chor:

Couch Horizontal Position Range: 0–57696 bits (0–1803 mm)

cver:

Couch Vertical Position: Range: 0–1016 bits (0–508 mm) (Soft Limit = 484 mm)

tilt:

Gantry Tilt Position: Range: –30.0 to +30.0 degrees (1/4 degree/bit MSB active = forward)

back:

Background Taken: 0 = incomplete, 1 = background complete

Philips Medical Systems. Confidential and Proprietary information. Refer to Title Page.
COMMAND Window: The commands a user types to control the GantryScope are entered in this window. Every command is
time stamped, and a history of 1000 lines is kept. Command definitions are covered here:
All commands and responses are in the following format:

AA (xx (yy (zz))) ()denotes command parameters.

Where: AA – 2 byte ASCII mnemonic

A – xx, yy, zz –– integer parameters

The parameters are interpreted as either hex or decimal (hex being the default) depending on the current I/O selected. The third letter of
the screen prompt will be either an ”H” or ”D”, indicating either hexadecimal or decimal, respectively. This applies to the user entry screen
only. The real time data screen always displays in the hex mode. A command is entered by simply entering the proper mnemonic. The
mnemonics are all described in Command Definitions.

Commands may be entered in small or capital letters.

If a necessary parameter is not entered with a command, a default parameter of 0 is then used. Many commands don’t have direct replies,
but effect the state of the system, such as collimator movement. A response for these will not be displayed on the reply screen, but the
change will be reflected in the Response Window.

There is no longer a STOP button. The nowait command causes a command (like TS – take scan) to stop an infinite wait for a response.
You can use this command when it seem no response is coming back.

NOTE
The “nowait” command is NOT a software substitute for a mechanical STOP button.

Commands may be entered into a standard ASCII file and executed in a macro sequence. Refer to the macro description for more detail.

A command (or macro) may be repeated by typing ’!’ followed by a carriage return.

Philips Medical Systems. Confidential and Proprietary information. Refer to Title Page.
GScope commands are listed under their respective HELP menus. Simply type:

help software
help gpu
help xsc
help galil

to get the commands displayed (detailed screens follow).

Gscope has four different categories of commands:

 SOFTWARE
 GPU
 XSC
 GALIL
Help on Help for Gscope
––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––
help soft Get help on everything
help gpu Get help on the GantryScope Software commands
help xsc Get help on the XSC+ commands
help galil Get help on the Galil mode commands

All commands are case sensitive

Gscope provides online help for all commands. In the COMMAND window, type help and press <cr>. The following will appear in the
RESPONSE window:

NOTE
Help screens reflect all commands no matter what mode you are in (local or remote).
If you try to use a local command when in the remote mode, the message ”Unknown
or Disabled function” will be displayed.

Gscope commands are listed under their respective HELP menus.

Philips Medical Systems. Confidential and Proprietary information. Refer to Title Page.
Software Commands (type help soft in the COMMAND window):
DL secs Delay <secs>
QU Quit OR exit Galil mode
EXIT Exit looping or macro
SEXIT Exit nested lopping & macros.
bail Quit
EE <0–off 1–on> Error exit lopping & macros
GC Change to Galil Couch mode
GF Change to Galil Frame Mode
DE Set Display to DEcimal mode
LP <count> <delay> Loop the next command CP board <count> times, delay <delay .01 secs>
Any subseqent xsc/gpu command will stop the looping. Only one respnse.
ML <count> <delay> Macro Loop the next command <count> times, with <delay secs.>
All responses returned. exit will stop looping.
HE Set Display to HEx mode
GAMLOAD Load GAM Diagnostics on DSP
GAMCOLLECT <#fans><fansize><timeout> Collect Data to GAM Memory
GAMSAVE <file><fansize> Save data collected to file, specify fansize in 32 bit words
LDIR DIRectory of Local (SUN) drive
NOWAIT Cause a command(like TS–take scan, IJ–on/off) to stop an infinite wait for a
response. Try this when no responses are being received.
system execute unix command
systemr as above but output to reponse window
@macro execute built–in macro read (file path/macro_file_name) execute user macro
GSTAT Toggle status display on/off in single screen remote access mode
ME Message to response window’;

For details on each command, type help xx and press <cr> where “xx” is the command.

Philips Medical Systems. Confidential and Proprietary information. Refer to Title Page.
GPU Commands (type help gpu in the COMMAND window):
GPU Commands
–––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––
AL boolean autolight BG boolean take background
BS boolean bs to gpu CA speed position abs couch move
CR speed distance rel couch move CW register.val load count word
DD device boolean gcp disable DF num.detectors det fan size
DV register.val load DPPC VFSC ES ticks set eof
FD detector first detector GA detector.num set gapa
GB detector set gapb GE info request
GL num.detectors set gap length GR boolean reset
GS status update GT horz+ vert+ Max tilt request
GV soft revision GX boolean xray status to GP
IJ boolean Injector ON/OFF IP 1/lOmsecs int period
LS boolean laser status NR revs num revs
SD stationary data SA sampling/det sampling
SS ticks sof SN speed(1/10sec/rev) Scan frame on
SF stop.position scan frame off TP speed length take pilot
TS take scan TW register–val set time word
SC num.detectors set scatter len TV take volume
WR group word word read WW group word value word write

For details on each command, type help xx and press <cr> where “xx” is the command.

Philips Medical Systems. Confidential and Proprietary information. Refer to Title Page.
XSC Commands (type help xsc in the COMMAND window):
XSC Commands
–––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––
BL boolean Beam limiter CL position Move Collimator
CM position Move Compensator CP kv ma exptime Change param
DP Default preheat ER ticks.per.slice request
FN Turn Filament on FF filament off
FL pos openflag Set filter/shutter FP delta fudge param
FS size Focal spot LF laser off
LN Turn Laser on OL expr expr open loop
PC Paramter check RN freq timeout warm Turn Rotor on
RF rotor off XA Xray arm
XE info request XF Xray off
xi init XN Xray on
XS device xray status XR Xray reset
xv soft revision DL Delay

For details on each command, type help xx and press <cr> where “xx” is the command.

Philips Medical Systems. Confidential and Proprietary information. Refer to Title Page.
GALIL Commands (type help galil in the COMMAND window):
Galil Commands
–––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––
AB abort AC expr accel
BG begin DB expr deadband
DF dir forward DH define home
DR dir reverse DS expr dir on switch
ER expr err limit ES expr stop switch
FE find edge GN expr gain
im inc mode IP expr inc position
KI expr kill MO motor off
OE expr stop on error OF expr offset
PA expr position abs PL expr pole
PR expr position rel RD expr report done
RP expr repeat RR expr repeat revs
RS expr reset SH servo here
SM expr pulse width SN expr stop from run
SP expr speed SS expr start on sw
ST stop sv servo mode
TC tell stop code TE tell error
TI tell status TL expr torque limit
TM expr sample time TO expr stop on timer
TP tell position TQ expr torque
TT tell torque TV tell velocity
vm velocity mode WT expr wait
ZR expr zero

For details on each command, type help xx and press <cr> where “xx” is the command.

Philips Medical Systems. Confidential and Proprietary information. Refer to Title Page.
RESPONSE Window: Every GantryScope command has a response. and is displayed here. (Response of the “xe,” xsc info request
command is shown here.)

ERROR Window: Errors and Help to the user are displayed here.

Philips Medical Systems. Confidential and Proprietary information. Refer to Title Page.
MACRO–COMMAND EXECUTION
The commands documented may be entered into a preset sequence in a standard ASCII file and executed by typing an @ followed by the
name of the file. One command is decoded per line. Any line that starts with the character ; is ignored. The ; line may be useful for
comments.
Macro names MUST contain only upper case letters or numbers and must reside in the
/opt/picr/service_util/diagnostics/pq2000p/gscope/macro dir. Names cannot be longer than 6 characters.
Any UNIX standard editor may be used to create macros. The microemacs program is installed on the AcQSim CT scanner and may be
used for this purpose. To start it, type me at the % prompt and press <cr>. You may refer to the MicroEmacs manual.
Macros may be looped on with the ml command with the delay executed (if non–zero) between the execution of the complete file. When
complete, the prompt will be redisplayed. The STOP button may be used to terminate macro execution. The following is an example of
a macros written to command X–rays.

1. From the MicroEmacs screen, enter the command sequence. For X–rays it is as follows:
CP 130 20 400
XR
ER
FN
DL 3
XA
XN
DL 4
XF
FF

This sequence will command an exposure at 130 kV, 20 mA for 4 seconds.

Philips Medical Systems. Confidential and Proprietary information. Refer to Title Page.
2. Save the file by typing: CONTROL X, CONTROL S.
3. Exit the emacs editor by typing: CONTROL X, then CONTROL C.
4. Enter the Gscope program. To execute this macor: type @XRAY and press <CR>.

CURRENT STANDARD MACROS

@ring: A new macro has been written (3–16–98): @ring will perform a scanner operation similar to the RING program on the Q–Series
scanners. This procedure is required for operations such as Brush Block Alignment. However, the RING program can now be executed
viat the Diagnostic GUI. See RING hyperlink.
@XC_INIT and @AUTOXCTEST: These setup to take a transfer counter scan and get transfer counter data (incrementing channel #’s)
from the gantry. The command: system $PICR_ROOT_DIR/service_util/diagnostics/pq2000p/gscope/bin/data_check
/client/pic/data/xctest.dat address. In autoxctest, the data in the file /client/pic/data/xctest.dat. is checked.

The Service Person must look in the window or xterm where gscope was started to determine whether or not it passed. If it passed it prints:
data_check complete with no errors found

on error prints 1 error:

Error detected
Source fan
error #, error text
Expected #
Condition #
Error location #

Philips Medical Systems. Confidential and Proprietary information. Refer to Title Page.
xcinit macro listing:
he
gr 1
gamload
ss 18
ww 4 1 18
nr 1
fd 0
df 200
sa 4
dv 400
sc 0
ww e 1 0
@autoxctest

autoxctest macro listing:

he
ww e 1 0
de
gamcollect 9600 259 0
ww 1 3 0
dl 5
gamsave 99.0/pic/data/xctest.dat 259
system $PICR_ROOT_DIR/service_util/diagnostics/pq2000p/gscope/bin/data_check/client/pic/data/xctest.dat address error

restart

Philips Medical Systems. Confidential and Proprietary information. Refer to Title Page.
STANDARD COMMAND SEQUENCES
When using Gscope to make X–rays, perform a stationary data transfer, take a scan, expose film or take a pilot scan, a sequence of
commands is followed. Use the following command sequences when trying to do one of these procedures:
Make X–Rays
RN Rotor On (ensure this command is entered with either a xxx dec or xx hex
DL 6 Allows a six second delay for the rotor to get up to speed.
CP Change parameters (set desired kV, mA, time)
XR X–ray reset (to ensure generator is reset)
ER Exposure Request (look for a reply of ER 0 0 0 before proceeding)
FN Filament On (if being entered into a macro sequence, give 6 second delay.
DL 6 Allows a six second delay for the filament to heat up.
XA X–ray arm (6 second timeout)
XN X–rays On
DL xx Enter the same amount of time as entered in the CP command.
XF X–rays Off
FF Filament Off
FR FIFO read
Stationary Data Transfer
IP Integration Period (entered as .1ms/bit)
FD First Detector (Set desired starting detector)
DF Detector Fan (Set desired detector fan size)
SD Stationary Data (Executes the transfer)
Take Scan
SS Start of Field (entered as [1/32 detector/bit for IQ] [1/8 detector/bit for PQ])
ES End of Field (entered as [1/32 detector/bit for IQ] [1/8 detector/bit for PQ])
NR Number of Revolutions (number of revs before EOF interrupt)
SN Scan Frame Speed
DF Detector Fan Size (use approximately 5)
WC Write to control reg. (Enter 200 to set scan enable bit)
TS Take Scan
FR FIFO Read

Philips Medical Systems. Confidential and Proprietary information. Refer to Title Page.
Pilot Scan
SF Set first detectors
DF Detector fan size
WC Write to control reg. (set to 200 to set scan enable bit)
TP Take Pilot
Expose Film
DE (Places IQOUT in decimal mode)
RN 60[PQ=180] (Turns rotor on )
DL 6 (Allows a six second delay)
CP 80 20 300 (changes parameters to 80kV, 20mA and 3 sec. exposure)
XR (XSC Reset)
ER (Exposure request)
FN (Filament on)
DL 6 6 sec. delay for filament)
FL 0 1 (no filter, shutter open)
DL 2 (2 sec. delay)
CL 100 (collimator to 10 mm)
DL 2 (2 sec. delay)
CM 0 (no compensator)
DL 2 (2 sec. delay)
XA (X–ray arm)
XN (X–ray on)
DL 3 (3 sec. delay)
XF (X–ray off)
FF (Filament off)
A number of preprogrammed macros are included with Gscope. These macros force hexadecimal mode. These are:
DSx This macro sets and displays the chosen display switch continuously. ’x’ is the switch number. Valid entries are 1 to 9.
BZ Loads zeroes into the background RAM’s.
BG Loads normal values into the background RAM’s
DC Takes a digital check scan at the frequency ’x’. Valid entries are 10K,20K,1M, & 2M.

Philips Medical Systems. Confidential and Proprietary information. Refer to Title Page.
NMSCAN Takes a normal scan (a very short one) without X–rays. The background RAM’s are zeroed so the data is the background
value.
NMSX This is a normal mode scan, with X–rays (130kV, 20 mA), for approximately 1 second. The rotor must already have been
spun up.
XCSCAN Performs a maintenance mode scan (no gaps).
XCTST Performs a transfer counter test data transfer with 5 detector gaps.

Philips Medical Systems. Confidential and Proprietary information. Refer to Title Page.
GANTRY – GPU / XSC DOWNLOADER

Downloads the latest software to the GPU and XSC from disk. Used after a recent software installation.

After entering the CP board name, the downloader option screen will be displayed. Refer to Figure 128.

Select the download you wish to perform. During the download, a progress screen in displayed. The the system reboots the Gantry server
for you (you will not be prompted and will not have to do a reboot).

bay00–1

FIGURE 127 GPUXSC Downloader Window

Philips Medical Systems. Confidential and Proprietary information. Refer to Title Page.
 FIGURE 128 OPTION / STATUS WINDOW

Philips Medical Systems. Confidential and Proprietary information. Refer to Title Page.
GANTRY – GPUTTY+

Description: The GPUSPY diagnostics are resident on the GPU. A program called gena checks to see if the diagnostics are locked and
if not locked, enables GPUSPY. Gputty+ actually consists of calibration utilities as well as diagnostics.

Upper and lower case input with commands and spaces are delimiters are allowed. All commands are two letters followed by appropriate
parameters. Data checks are made to help prevent illegal inputs from the keyboard.
Running Gputty+
After the communication with the GPU is established, you will see the AcQSim CT> prompt.

Press the letter “r” to run the program. Enter a ? to display the available options:
Shift Control E return to Quit
MM(maintenance reg) SS(scan sequence diags) ?(help)
PA(use) CT(cntrl) DD(main drive displays)
TX(temp xducers CC(couch horz. cal)
AD (starts a –> d convert)
MC(main drive cal)
BA(main drive balancing software)
BT(main drive bearing test)
EF(enables Fifo) RF(reads fifo)
GL(galil direct comm mode) GE(GPU status)
SO(set overspeed control bit)PS(PSDC status registers)

REMINDER: Indicator beeps will be heard when your adjustment is in range. Many of the steps DO NOT require pressing
<SPACEBAR> <CR> and will time out automatically.

Below are descriptions and procedures for running the various Gputty+ options:

Philips Medical Systems. Confidential and Proprietary information. Refer to Title Page.
Gpuspy command set

All commands are two letters followed by the appropriate parameter. Data checks are made to prevent illegal inputs from the keyboard.
Calibration/Utilities are underlined.

Command Description
AD Starts Analog to Digital conversion.
BA Main drive balancing utility.
BT Main drive bearing test.
CC Couch horizontal calibration utility.
CD Displays ds4, ds5, ds6, st 8a and couch horizontal position. The display switches and
status register are always displayed in hex and couch position is in mm’s to the left of
the decimal point and in .0625mm to the right.
CM Performs the command requested. In loop mode the repetition rate is every few mi-
croseconds unless an additional parameter is added to the command line. That will
cause a delay of 10 milliseconds per bit between commands. A delay of up to two
seconds may be entered. Example; cm 18 10 loops at .1 second rate.
CO Puts control loops into continuous mode. Once called, any process will loop until a
space bar and a return is entered
CT Performs a control register operation. The valid registers are 0x40 through 0x50. Typ-
ing ’CT xx’ where xx is any valid register, causes that registers’ value to be displayed
in the selected format. Typing ’CT xx xxxx’ causes the second the second parameter
to be loaded into the register defined by the first parameter. Typing ’CT’ displays the
last selected registers’ contents.
DD Displays ds1, ds2, ds3, and normal scan position simultaneously. The display
switches appear in hex format only. Nsp is in detector number to the left of the deci-
mal point and 1/8’s of a detector number to the right of the decimal point for a 1200
detector machine. For a 4800 detector machine the nsp display is the detector num-
ber divided by four. Normal scan position is in detector number to the left of the deci-
mal point and .125 of a detector to the right.
DE Causes integer display format
DI Calls up the acquisition diagnostic menu

Philips Medical Systems. Confidential and Proprietary information. Refer to Title Page.
DS Reads the current value of the selected display switch. The display switch is selected
by entering it after the command. (e.g. DS 4 <CR> will output the contents of display
switch 4.)
DT Initiates a data transfer at the selected channel. The user must control the integration
period, transfer length, and data acquisition mode. The user must have Scan Data
Enable (WC 200 in HEX mode, IQOUT) active on the SIF or the data cable discon-
nected, otherwise a data transfer timeout will occur. The maximum repetition rate is
70 transfers a second decreasing as the integration period is made longer. There is a
maximum transfer length that must be set due to the way the starting address is cal-
culated. The center channel has half of the transfer length subtracted from it and the
address is loaded to CT45. The grabber is loaded with the channel plus four for log
mode, plus two for linear mode transfers. The minimum transfer length in log mode
is three and in linear mode it is actually zero. Error messages are: ”Too many parame-
ters” if command line is wrong. ”Invalid detector” if the requested detector number is
invalid. ”Invalid ip” if the integration period is set to 0.
EF Enables FIFO.
GE GPU status
GL Galil direct comm mode
HE Causes HEX display format.
MC Main Drive Calibration.
MM Loads the maintenance mode position register and connects the register to the posi-
tion bus. The format is MM xxxx, where xxxx is the desired position. Continuous
writes are permitted, but there is no provision for readback in hardware or software.
PA Accepts a parameter for programmed pauses to support slow terminals. The valid
range is from 0 to 1 second with a resolution of 10 msec. Most slow terminals will
work with a pa 10 or less and a VT320 or equivalent will work with a pa 0. The pause
period is appended to any other operation being done at the time. For example, this
will slow down data transfers.
PS PSDC status registers
RD Sends a message to the read exchange. You are prompted for input by the display.
Enter, in hex, command p1 p2 p3.
RF Reads FIFO.

Philips Medical Systems. Confidential and Proprietary information. Refer to Title Page.
RS Issues a general reset to the Gantry electronics, re–initializes the galils and if followed
by a 1, reloads the control words to their default values.
SE Sends a message to the ‘GPMN’ exchange. You are prompted for an input by the
display. Enter, in hex, command p1 p2 p3.
SG Puts control loops into single mode.
SO Set overspeed control bit
SS Calls up a general diagnostic menu.
ST Performs a status register operation. Usage is similar to the ’CT’ command, except
’ST’ is a read only operation. Valid registers are 0x80 through 0x90
TX Causes the temp monitor reading to be displayed. Also works in continuous mode.

UTILITIES

The following GPUSPY utility commands are available:

CD (Couch Displays)
ds4 = 22 ds5= 633 ds6= 218C st8a= C7CE chp = 418.14

DD (Main Drive Displays)

ds3= CE3D nsp= 2199.21

TX (Temperature Xducers)
IN DEGREES CELCIUS

TX1 = TX2 = TX3 = TX4 =0 0 31 27

The following procedures cover calibrations or utilities and are listed in alphabetical order.

Philips Medical Systems. Confidential and Proprietary information. Refer to Title Page.
BA (MAIN DRIVE BALANCING UTILITY)

WARNING
THIS UTILITY CAUSES THE SCAN FRAME TO MOVE. STAY CLEAR OF THE
GANTRY. FAILURE TO COMPLY CAN RESULT IN INJURY OR DEATH TO
PERSONNEL.

1. Type ba at the prompt to display:

!! WARNING, ANSWERING YES WILL CAUSE MAIN DRIVES TO
!! MOVE AT SPEED TWO, ANSWER NO TO ABORT
!! ENTER ONE FOR YES, ZERO TO ABORT

2. Press 1 to continue:
WAITING FOR DRIVES TO SETTLE
ACQUIRING DATA FROM GALIL
sorting....
DOING DFT ON FILTERED DATA
AVERAGE VOLTAGE =’s 1.699
ANGLE OF PEAK POSITIVE TORQUE =’s 242.899
PEAK –> PEAK AMPLITUDE OF FUNDAMENTAL =’s 0.031 VOLTS
IMBALANCE IS = 0.8 FOOT–LBS.
SCAN FRAME IN SPEC (A)
!! WARNING, ANSWERING YES WILL CAUSE MAIN DRIVES TO
!! MOVE , ANSWER NO TO SKIP
ENTER ONE FOR YES, ZERO TO SKIP

Philips Medical Systems. Confidential and Proprietary information. Refer to Title Page.
3. Press 1 to continue with balancing, or 0 if frame is within spec (see “A” above)
POSITIONING FRAME SO THAT HEAVIEST PART IS NEXT TO
DETECTOR ZERO
IT WOULD TAKE x.x POUNDS ADDED BY DET 1200 TO BALANCE
OR THE SAME AMOUNT REMOVED BY DET ZERO

ADJUSTING WEIGHTS ADJUSTING WEIGHTS

FIGURE 129 SCAN FRAME ADJUSTMENT WEIGHT LOCATIONS

Philips Medical Systems. Confidential and Proprietary information. Refer to Title Page.
BT (MAIN DRIVE BEARING TEST)
1. Type bt at the prompt to display:
DO YOU WISH TO EXIT NOW?
ENTER ONE FOR YES, ZERO TO CONTINUE
>0

!! WARNING, ANSWERING YES WILL CAUSE MAIN DRIVES TO

!! MOVE AT SPEED ONE, ANSWER NO TO ABORT
ENTER ONE FOR YES, ZERO TO ABORT

>1
ABORTING MOTOR, ACQUIRING DATA

The system will pause and then plot the coastdown curve. It should look similar to the following:
| XX
| XX
| X
| XX
| XX
| XX
| XX
| XX
| XXX
| XX
| XX
| XXX
| XXX
| XXXX
| XXX
| XXXX
| XXXX
| XXXX
| XXXXX
| XXXXXX
| XXXXXXX
| XXXXXXX
|_________________________________________________________________________XXXXXX
PLOT OF COAST DOWNMAX SPEED =’s 60 RPMTOTAL TIME =’s 16.7AVERAGE FRICTION =’s 62.1 FT.–LBS.SPACEBAR RETURN TO EXIT
!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
!!! REMEMBER TO REPLACE FUSE !!!!
!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!

Philips Medical Systems. Confidential and Proprietary information. Refer to Title Page.
CC (HORIZONTAL COUCH CALIBRATION)

1. Before this procedure can be run, you must first power down the system. Refer to the PowerUp/Down procedure.
2. Lower the telescoping covers on the couch and remove the panel at the underneath rear of the couch. Refer to the telescoping base
cover removal procedure.
3. Remove the bottom rear panel from the couch. Disconnect the red and black connector that is attached to the couch servo motor leads.
4. Remove the Gantry cardfile access cover.
5. Apply power to the system. Refer to the PowerUp/Down procedure. At the 3 Button Screen, start the Diagnostic GUI.
6. Select Gputty+ from the GANTRY pulldown menu. Press the letter “r” to execute (Shift Control E to exit at any time).

NOTE
<sb cr> refers to pressing the Spacebar and Return key. Beeps indicate adjustment
within range.

NOTE
A step that does not tell you to ”<sb cr>” will automatically time out. Adjustments should be
made quickly since you cannot go back a step.

7. Type cc at the prompt to display:

SPACE BAR AND RETURN STEPS THROUGH TESTS, YOU WILL SEE A <sb, cr> PROMPT
A –> SIGN PROMPTS YOU TO SETUP OR ADJUSTMENT
HINT: 0x BEFORE A NUMBER IS A HEXIDECIMAL NUMBER !!!!!
DISCONNECT OR DISABLE COUCH HORZ. MOTOR
!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
DO YOU WISH TO CONTINUE ? 1=YES, 0= EXIT>

8. Press 1 to continue. Push the couch toward the scan frame and mark two positions from the back seam of the patient support with
a pencil: 180mm and 1180mm. Refer to Figure 130.
9. The pots are 20 turn pots. Turn them at least 20 times ccw or until you hear or feel them click against their stops.
10. Refer to Figure 132 for location of adjustment pots on the CTCC. Follow the on–line instructions:

Philips Medical Systems. Confidential and Proprietary information. Refer to Title Page.
 TURN BOTH HORIZ ZERO (R12) AND
SCALE POTS (R11) FULLY CCW, THEN <sb cr>

SET THE MULT SCALE ADJ. SWITCHES (SW1, 2 AND 3) TO 0x800, THEN <sb cr>

11. Refer to Figure 132:

*** PUSH VERTICAL ENABLE ON GCP WHEN ADJUSTMENT IS COMPLETE
MOVE TOP SO DS5 READS BETWEEN 0xE80 AND 0x1180
AND ADJUST RESOLVER FEEDBACK (R7) FOR 2.0 V RMS
BEEPER WILL SOUND AT CORRECT ADJUSTMENT
DS5 Vrms
1038 1.97

12. Refer to Figure 131:

PUT END OF COUCH TOP 180MM (7 1/16 IN) FROM SEAM
THEN <sb cr>
PUSH VERTICAL ENABLE ON GCP TO LEAVE LOOP

SET HORZ POT TO –1.0 ––> –1.5 VOLTS THEN TIGHTEN

–1.475

PUSH VERTICAL ENABLE ON GCP TO LEAVE LOOP

CAUTION
EXERCISE EXTREME CARE WHILE MOVING AND ALIGNING RESOLVER TO
PREVENT ANY BENDING OR MISALIGNMENT ON RESOLVER SHAFT.

13. Without moving the carbon top, carefully loosen 3 cleat screws just enough to rotate the housing.
14. Turn resolver body housing until DS5 output reads zero +/– –0x1016.

TURN RESOLVER BODY HOUSING TO READ ZERO +/– 0x10 AND RETURN
DS5 10

15. Tighten the resolver mounting cleat screws ensuring the rounded portion of all three retaining elements are engaged in the resolver
body. Torque cleat screws to 3–4 lb–in.
16. Verify that the display word still reads 000 + / – decimal after torque.

Philips Medical Systems. Confidential and Proprietary information. Refer to Title Page.
17. Repeat adjustment procedure if necessary.

PUSH VERTICAL ENABLE ON GCP WHEN ADJUSTMENT IS COMPLETE

ADJUST COARSE ZERO POT. DS4 SHOULD BE 0x10
DS4 FF

This step will automatically time out (no <sb cr>).

MOVE COUCH IN UNTIL READOUT IS ABOUT –9.49
BEEP –8.67 BEEPER WILL SOUND WHEN IN RANGE

This step will automatically time out (no <sb cr>).

NOW MOVE UNTIL READOUT IS ABOUT 0x0 +/– 0x20
DS5 0

This step will automatically time out (no <sb cr>).

ADJUST HORIZ SCALE POT (R11) TO READ 0x90
DS4 90

This step will automatically time out (no <sb cr>).

PUT END OF COUCH TOP 180MM (7 1/16 IN) FROM SEAM
THEN <sb cr>

ADJUST HORZ ZERO POT (R12) DS4 SHOULD BE 0x10

DS4 10

This step will automatically time out (no <sb cr>).

MOVE COUCH IN UNTIL READOUT IS ABOUT –9.47
DS5 –9.47

BEEP –9.47 BEEPER WILL SOUND WHEN IN RANGE

This step will automatically time out (no <sb cr>).

NOW MOVE UNTIL READOUT IS ABOUT 0x0 +/– 0x20
DS5 0

This step will automatically time out (no <sb cr>).

Philips Medical Systems. Confidential and Proprietary information. Refer to Title Page.
 ADJUST HORIZ SCALE POT (R11) TO READ 0x90.
DS4 90

This step will automatically time out (no <sb cr>).

MOVE TO EXACTLY 1180MM FROM SEAM (47 7/16 IN) THEN <sb cr>

SET MULT SCALE ADJ SWITCHES (SW1, 2 AND 3) TO xxxx THEN <sb cr>

Refer to Figure 132 for switch locations.

HORIZONTAL CAL COMPLETE
REMEMBER TO RECONNECT THE MOTOR

MARK 180mm AND 1180mm

FIGURE 130 180mm and 1180mm COUCH MARKINGS

Philips Medical Systems. Confidential and Proprietary information. Refer to Title Page.
 ADJUST RESOLVER
CAUTION: EXERCISE EXTREME CARE WHILE MOVING AND ALIGNING RESOLVER
TO PREVENT ANY BENDING OR MISALIGNMENT ON RESOLVER SHAFT.

D0232

FIGURE 131 COUCH RESOLVER AND POTENTIOMETER LOCATION

Refer to Figure 132.

• The ”old” MSB hex switch has been hardwired to a value of ”C.” SW1 is the second MSB, SW2 and SW3 follow.

18. After the calibration procedure is complete, exit from the CC program. At the AcQSim CT> prompt, press Shift Control E to exit Gputty+.
19. Exit the Diagnostic GUI and remove power from the system. Refer to the PowerUp/Down procedure.
20. Attach the red and black connector that is attached to the couch servo motor leads.
21. Replace the telescoping couch base covers and rear panel. Refer to the telescoping base cover removal procedure.

Philips Medical Systems. Confidential and Proprietary information. Refer to Title Page.
 CTCC BOARD

FIGURE 132 CTCC BOARD COMPONENT LOCATIONS DETAIL

Philips Medical Systems. Confidential and Proprietary information. Refer to Title Page.
DI (DATA ACQUISITION MENU)

1. Type di at the prompt to display:

DATA ACQUISITION DIAGNOSTICS

0 – QUIT 1 – LIN, XC & LOG

2 – BACKGROUND 3 – DELTA DATA
4 – AVERAGING 5 – DIGITAL CHECK
6 – STATIONARY DATA 7 – ALL TESTS IN ORDER

Enter your choice >

2. Enter a 7 to run all tests in order:

LINEAR
LINEAR PASSED !
XC TEST
TEST PASSED !
LOGTEST
HARDCODED TESTS PASSED
TEST ONE, COUNT = 1, TIME INCREMENTED
TEST TWO, TIME = 3FFF, COUNT INCREMENTED
ALL TESTS PASSED !
BKGD
HARDCODED TESTS
TEST PASSED !
ADDRESS TEST
TESTING RAM !
TEST PASSED !
TEST ONE, TIMEWORD = 0x3FFF
TEST TWO, TIMEWORD = 0x3FFF
ALL TESTS PASSED
DELTAD
COUNT TEST
COUNT TEST PASSED !
LOG TEST
LOG TEST PASSED !
RAM ADDRESS TEST
DELTA DATA TEST PASSED !
AVG
ADDER AND MUX TEST

Philips Medical Systems. Confidential and Proprietary information. Refer to Title Page.
 LOADING RAM
TESTING RAM
LOADING RAM
TESTING RAM
LOADING RAM
TESTING RAM
AVGING PASSED!
DIGCHECK
DIGITAL CHECK PASSED !
CHANNELS WITHIN 5000 AND 11000 Hz. CONSIDERED GOOD
USUAL RESULTS 8 KHZ +/– 15%
1858 out of usual range, freq = 6022

SPACE BAR AND RETURN TO QUIT

3. Press <SPACE BAR><CR> to return to the main menu.

Philips Medical Systems. Confidential and Proprietary information. Refer to Title Page.
MC (MAIN DRIVE CALIBRATION)

NOTE
The following procedure utilizes the SCLC cable (P/N L179528) and adapter (P/N
L11413) in order to perform Main Drive Calibration.

1. Remove power from the system. Refer to the PowerUp/Down procedure.

2. Disable the main drive by placing the drives switch to the ”0” position. Also, remove fuses F310, F311, F312 on the AC Control Panel.
The software will not continue if drives are not enabled.
3. Apply power to the system. Refer to the PowerUp/Down procedure. At the 3 button screen, start the Diagnostic GUI. Select Gputty+
from the GANTRY pulldown menu.
4. Type mc at the AcQSim CT> prompt to display:
PMDC / MAIN DRIVE CAL

SPACE BAR & RETURN STEPS THROUGH TESTS, YOU WILL SEE A <sb,cr> PROMPT
HINT: 0x BEFORE A NUMBER IS A HEXADECIMAL NUMBER
!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
WARNING: DISABLE DRIVE SWITCH ON AC CONTROL PANEL
ALSO REMOVE FUSES F310, F311, F312 ON AC CONTROL PANEL
IT IS BEST TO TURN OFF GANTRY, REMOVE FUSES, AND RESTART PROCEDURE
!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
DO YOU WISH TO SKIP TO MOTOR POLES ?
1 = Yes, 0 = No
>

5. Refer to Figure 134 for switch and pot locations. Answer NO (0) to this question. The following will appear:
SET POS OFFSET (SW3 and SW4) SWITCHES TO 0x00 THEN <sb cr>

MOVE FRAME COUNTERCLOCKWISE SO THAT DSW3 READS 0x40 +/– 0x20

AND ADJUST RESOLVER FEEDBACK POT (EXC, R28) FOR 2.0 Vrms

THE SYSTEM WILL BEEP AND AUTOMATICALLY ADVANCE WHEN THE ADJUSTMENT IS IN SPEC

DSW3: SIN FEEDBACK VOLTS RMS

55 1.99

RESOLVER FEEDBACK NOW IN SPEC

This step will automatically time out (no <sb cr>).

Philips Medical Systems. Confidential and Proprietary information. Refer to Title Page.
 NOTE
Reading must be initially below 2.0 for beep to occur.

PHASE REFERENCE ADJUSTMENT

TURN FINE REF ADJ (R27) COUNTERCLOCKWISE

UNTIL DS1 LED (SYNC POINT) TURNS OFF,
THEN TURN CLOCKWISE UNTIL DS1 LED JUST TURNS FULLY ON THEN STOP ADJUSTMENT <sb,cr>

TESTING ZERO GATE OPTO INTERRUPTER

–> ROTATE DRIVE CCW TO CENTER ZERO GATE FLAG IN INTERRUPTER <sb cr>

Refer to Figure 133 for flag interrupter reference:

Optical Sensor

Interrupter Flag
Front upper–right view
of rotational frame

FIGURE 133 FLAG INTERRUPTER THROUGH ZERO GATE

Philips Medical Systems. Confidential and Proprietary information. Refer to Title Page.
 –> NOW MOVE FLAG CLEAR OF OPTO INTERRUPTER <sb cr>

–> NOW ROTATE DRIVE CCW SO FLAG PASSES THROUGH ZERO OPTO INTERRUPTER

SET POS OFFSET SWITCHES (SW3 and SW4) TO AF, THEN <sb cr>

–> NOW ROTATE MAIN DRIVE CCW SO FLAG PASSES THROUGH ZERO OPTO INTERRUPTER TWICE
–> THE FIRST REV INITIALIZES NSP WITH SWITCH SETTINGS
–> THE SECOND REV CHECKS NSP AT CENTER OF FLAG TO BE CLOSE TO ZERO

SET POS SWITCHES (SW3 AND SW4) TO XX THEN <sb cr>

NOW ROTATE TWO REVS CCW SO THE FLAG GOES THROUGH GATE

This step will automatically time out (no <sb cr>). The display will read:
FOUND EDGES XXA7 FOR CCW AND XX FOR CW
WIDTH OF FLAG =’S AB
NSP AT CENTER OF FLAG =’S 95FC
SCAN POSITION IN SPEC
PLEASE SET PHASE ADJ SWITCHES (SW1 AND SW2) TO 0x00 <sb, cr>

DOING MOTOR POLE OFFSET, SETTING SATURATED GALIL COMMAND (DERSIG)

OF PMDC TO +10 VOLTS PROGRAM ISSUES AB, MO, SM GALIL COMMANDS

DO YOU WISH TO USE SCLC CABLE FOR MOTOR POLES?

1 = YES, 0 = NO

If you have the SCLC cable, answer YES (1).

MAKE SURE CABLE IS CONNECTED PROPERLY

PLUG SIGNAL END CONNECTOR INTO SCLC P4

PUT BLACK CLIP LEAD ON MOTOR NEUTRAL, LOCATED AT TB616–4
PUT RED CLIP LEAD ON MOTOR PHASE A, TB616–3

–> SPIN DRIVE CCW AT ABOUT 6 SECONDS / REV, BEEPER WILL SOUND

Philips Medical Systems. Confidential and Proprietary information. Refer to Title Page.
6. Make connections of special cable according to above display. Refer to Figure 135 for detail. Make sure cable is not within scan frame.
After rotating the scan frame ccw at approx. 6 sec/rev, the following will be displayed:
ACQUISITION DONE!
SET PHASE ADJ SWITCHES (SW1 AND SW2) TO xx THEN <sb cr>

NOW WE CHECK SETTINGS–

SPIN DRIVE CCW AT ABOUT 6 SEC/REV

PHASE ADJUSTMENT CORRECT!

DISCONNECT CABLE NOW, THEN <SB CR>

REMEMBER TO CHECK COUCH RESOLVER FEEDBACK CAL

7. If an error occurs, you will see a similar display:

PHASING DID NOT OCCUR PROPERLY,FOUND 60 MISMATCHES
I SUGGEST RETRYING OR USING SCOPE METHOD
DISCONNECT CABLE NOW, THEN <sb cr>

NOTE
After completing the Main Drives Calibration procedure, complete the Resolver Error
Correction Calibration procedure in the next paragraph.

Philips Medical Systems. Confidential and Proprietary information. Refer to Title Page.
 PHASE ADJ POS OFFSET
MSB LSB MSB LSB

SW1 SW2 SW3 SW4

AMP ADJ ADJ

MULT SCALE ADJ R7

MSB LSB

R25 SW6

FINE REF
0 ADJ EXC

HORIZ VERT
R27 R28

TILT SCALE ZERO ZERO SCALE

R10 R11 R12 R13 R14

FIGURE 134 PMDC SWITCH SETTING LOCATIONS – (via access panel)

Philips Medical Systems. Confidential and Proprietary information. Refer to Title Page.
 REAR OF GANTRY

TB616 or TB16:
4= GROUND (BLACK)

1 2
34
5
3= HOT (WHITE)

6
TB

7
61
6
TB616

(PLUG END GOES TO P4 ON THE SCLC)

GLENTEK
CONTROLLER

FIGURE 135 SCLC CABLE HOOKUP TO TB616

Philips Medical Systems. Confidential and Proprietary information. Refer to Title Page.
RESOLVER ERROR CORRECTION CALIBRATION PROCEDURE

NOTE
This procedure should be performed after completing the Main Drives Calibration
procedure.

1. At the PMDC board, attach an oscilloscope probe to TP8 (the 225 Hz signal). Set the scope for DC coupled, 0.5 V/div, and a time
base of 2 ms/div.
2. On the PMDC board, make sure that switch 1 of SW5 is in the ”ON”, or closed, position. This is the normal position of the switch.
3. With the Diagnostic GUI on your screen. in Board Status box, select X–Ray Momentary enable in the Hardware Control Status box,
then CLICK HERE TO CONTINUE. Select Gantry then Ring, continue,continue, and OK to start the ring diagnostic program. Type
r (Enter) to run the program then when asked to enter Scan Frame Velocity, type 2 to rotate the scan frame at 2 sec/rev.
4. While observing the waveform on the scope, adjust potentiometer R25 in a clockwise direction. Adjust the potentiometer to obtain the
smallest amplitude possible.
5. While observing the waveform on the oscilloscope, adjust hex switch SW6 in single digit increments. If the amplitude of the waveform
increases, decrease the setting of the hex switch. The hex switch should be adjusted to produce the smallest amplitude possible on
the scope. Adjust the scope vertical deflection setting if needed.
6. After adjusting the hex switch, again adjust potentiometer R25 to fine–tune the waveform to its smallest amplitude. Alternate
adjustments of the hex switch and potentiometer to achieve the smallest waveform possible.
7. Press (Enter) at the console to stop the scan frame and Q to exit the Ring program. Next type exit (Enter) to close the unix window.
8. Shutdown the Gantry.
9. Disconnect the test equipment from the scanner and the circuit boards. Select the Exit tab to close Diags and click yes.
10. After the resolver error correction circuit has been calibrated, run the Perform_Lateral_ Centering calibration procedures. Exit out of
Diagnostics. At the four button screen, select Service.
11. Start the Gantry. If the X–ray tube has not been previously warmed up, do it now.
12. Select the Calibrate button, click on the Please Select Reason button and select the Perform_Lateral_Centering reason, next click
Advance to Scan then Start Scan and the calibration will run automatically displaying complete when finished.
13. Select General Utilities from the bottom tool bar, then Shutdown Console from the shutdown menu.

Philips Medical Systems. Confidential and Proprietary information. Refer to Title Page.
SS (SCAN SEQUENCE )

1. Type ss at the prompt to display:

GENERAL DIAGNOSTICS

0 – QUIT 1 – CONTROL WORDS

2 – SCAN SEQUENCE 3 – IP TIMER AND PD2
4 – PD4 & PD5 5 – AVERAGING INITIAL VIEWS
6 – DSCC SKIP 7 – XFR LENGTH TEST
8 – GATE ARRAY DELTA D 9 – V–>F LINEARITY
10 – BAC0 DELTA DATA 11 – PSDC SELECTS
12 – ALL TESTS

Enter your choice >

Option #1 will return:

CONTROL WORD TEST
PASSED!

Option #2 will return:

PPI
SCAN SEQUENCE
START ADDRESS
0
1
2
3
ALL TESTS PASSED

Option #3 will return:

DI TIMER TEST, .1 –> 16.4 msec
IP TIMING TEST, .025 –> 3.28 sec.
IP TIMING PASSED !

Option #4 will return:

TESTING PD4, PRIMARY START ADDRESS
TESTING OVERRIDING LOAD OF START ADDRESS COUNTERS
TESTING PD5, SCATTER START ADDRESS
TESTS PASSED !

Philips Medical Systems. Confidential and Proprietary information. Refer to Title Page.
Option #5 will return:
AVERAGING INITIAL XFER TESTS
PASSED

Option #6 will return:

DATA SKIP DSCC TEST
TESTING SKIP, XFR LENGTH = 282, SKIP LENGTH = 2
START ADDRESS INCREMENTED
SKIP TEST WITH SKIP LENGTH INCREMENTED FROM 2 TO 255
FIXED LOCATIONS AND FAN LENGTH
SKIP PASSED

Option #7 will return:

PRIMARY RING XFR LENGTH TEST
SCATTER RING XFR LENGTH TEST
SCATTER TRANSFER LENGTH TEST PASSED !
ALL TESTS PASSED

Option #8 will return:

FIRST TRANSFER SUPPRESSION TEST
PRIMARY RING GATE ARRAY DELTA DATA TEST
TEST 0 CT48 = C037 TESTING FOR 0x1000
TEST 1 CT48 = C036 TESTING FOR 0x1800
TEST 2 CT48 = C034 TESTING FOR 0x4D27
TEST 3 CT48 = C035 TESTING FOR 0x4527
PASSED

Option #9 will return:

V –> F LINEARITY TEST, PRIMARY AND SCATTER
TESTING QUADRANT 0
TESTING QUADRANT 1
TESTING QUADRANT 2
TESTING QUADRANT 3
PASSED!

Philips Medical Systems. Confidential and Proprietary information. Refer to Title Page.
Option #10 will return:
PRIMARY RING BAC0 DELTA DATA NOISE TEST, 300 usec IP, 12 KHZ OFFSET
SCATTER RING BAC0 DELTA DATA TEST, 1.2 msec IP, 12 KHZ
ACQUISITION DONE
CHECKING PRE DATA TAGS
SHUFFLING
ANALYZING NOISE
PASSED

Option #11 will return:

TESTING SELECTS, GPU SELECT MODE
TESTING START ADDRESS HALF OF SELECT CIRCUITRY
TESTS PASSED !

Option #12 will return the results of all 11 tests.

Option #0 will quit the diagnostics.

Philips Medical Systems. Confidential and Proprietary information. Refer to Title Page.
GANTRY – GENA

Gena is a utility that enables the built–in GPU diagnostics. This is used when a service person has a vt100 compatible terminal or laptop
connected to the GPU board.
Enabling Gputty+ via the laptop (GENA Selection from GANTRY pulldown)
1. Connect a serial cable from the DB25 connector at the rear left bottom of the gantry to the serial port on the laptop computer.
2. When using a laptop, a communication program capable of emulating an ANSI standard terminal is required (e.g. HyperTerminal).
Set the communication port on the laptop to 9600 baud, 8 data bits, no parity, 1 stop bit, flow control Xon/Xoff, ANSI or VT100 emulation
and select Com1 or Com2 depending on the connector into which you have plugged the serial cable.
3. Enable Gena from the GANTRY pulldown menu. See Figure 136. Click on Continue and OK at the screen prompts. After completion,
the screen will indicate “GPU Enable done.”
4. Click in the blue window to continue. The AcQSim CT> prompt should appear on the laptop screen. Enter a ? to display the available
options. Details of the program can be seen in the Gputty+ description.
5. (Type exit <CR> at the pSH+> prompt to exit the Xterm window.)
6. To EXIT GPUSPY, press <Ctrl><Shift>E. (At this time, this does not work – instead, exit the terminal program.)
For a laptop connection, the following serial cable wiring configuration is used:
SERIAL CABLE FOR LAPTOP

~ 10 feet GPU ENABLE

(FEMALE
CONNECTOR) SHIELD (#5) System name: bay00
(MALE CONNECTOR)
Board name: 1
RED (#3)
WHITE (#2)
Quit Continue
RED (#2)
D0218
SHIELD (#7)
WHITE (#3)

FIGURE 136 SERIAL CABLE CONFIGURATION / GPU ENABLE WINDOW

Philips Medical Systems. Confidential and Proprietary information. Refer to Title Page.
GANTRY – RING

RING tests the ability of the XSC (Xray System Control board) to communicate over the slip ring to the CP board. It will report ACK NAK
BREAK Errors with respect to frame position(detector number). The intent here is to try and determine where on the communications slip
ring there is a problem. It is assumed that there is no problem with the communications between the GPU and the CP boards. The test
will also print out a coverage listing. Test Coverage shows the number of times a frame position(detector number) was received up to 9,
+ indicates > 9 times. Each row is 100 detectors wide. A column is 24 deep, therefore 2400 detectors.

1. Ensure the AcQImage Cabinet, Gantry Power are enabled before running the test.
2. Launch the RING program from the GANTRY pulldown menu. When the window appears, click on Continue. See Figure 137.

FIGURE 137 Ring Diagnostic Window

3. A warning window will remind you that they gantry and xray power must be on and the main drives are enabled to run this test. Click
on OK in the warning window. The Ring program will start. Select “R” to run Ring. Refer to Figure 138.
4. Enter a scan frame velocity of 0 or 0.92 to 7 secs/rev. (8=abort). If “0” is entered, the scan frame will not rotate. You will be warned
that the scan frame will move after <CR> is pressed.
5. Press any key to stop scan frame motion. The coverage will be reported with each individual detector status represented as a “1” or
a “0.” Refer to Figure 139 for a sample status window.
6. Type exit <CR> at the pSH+> prompt to exit the Xterm window. (Letters will not display when typing exit).

Philips Medical Systems. Confidential and Proprietary information. Refer to Title Page.
Beginning ring diagnostic test
Turning rotor on, this may take more than 15 seconds
Don not push the Emergency Stop Button during rotor spin up

PICKER XSC RING COMMUNICATIONS TEST

VERSION 3.00
Picker International, Inc. 2/30/98
All Rights Reserved

(Q)UIT
(R)UN

Command: []

FIGURE 138 RING WINDOW

Philips Medical Systems. Confidential and Proprietary information. Refer to Title Page.
 FIGURE 139 SAMPLE RING STATUS WINDOW

Philips Medical Systems. Confidential and Proprietary information. Refer to Title Page.
SUN – SMPTE

The SMPTE pattern is displayed to assist in calibrating the display monitor.

1. After the Smtpe option is selected, the SMPTE test pattern will appear. Adjust the screen height to the full viewable area, then adjust
the width so that the squares in the SMPTE are square.
2. To remove it from the screen, click on it with the mouse. The pattern is shown on the next page.

Philips Medical Systems. Confidential and Proprietary information. Refer to Title Page.
Philips Medical Systems. Confidential and Proprietary information. Refer to Title Page.
UTILITIES – HARDWARE STATUS CONTROL

NOTE
This test will verify that the System Power Controller Board ( board) is able to communi-
cate with the SPARC parallel port. This test also will verify if the SPC board is reading
and writing status and control signals to the I/O ports. A Display Console with Diagnos-
tics running on disk0 must be available.

1. Verify the Gantry key switch is in normal mode.

2. Gain access to the SPC board L.E.D. status indicators: Remove either the top or left side cover on the Display Console.
3. Enter the Diagnostics GUI.

NOTE
To simplify viewing and operation, any window that appears before the DIAGNOSTIC
SOFTWARE TEST MENU should be closed. Do this by clicking on either the OK but-
ton, the QUIT button or the upper left hand corner of the window (a dash) and clicking
on the Close button.

4. At the DIAGNOSTIC SOFTWARE TEST MENU window select the UTILITIES menu and click on the HARDWARE STATUS/CONTROL
selection.
5. The HARDWARE STATUS/CONTROL window will open. Click on the REFRESH button to update the STATUS part of the window.

Philips Medical Systems. Confidential and Proprietary information. Refer to Title Page.
 Hardware Control / Status

CONTROL

Display Tower

AcQImage Box Power

*** WARNING ! ***

Gantry motion could occur once this Gantry Enable

message is cleared! Please ensure
that the gantry covers are closed
before closing this message! Failure X–Ray Enable
to adhere to this warning may result
in serious injury or death. STATUS

*** WARNING! *** Key Status

Emergency Stop Status

24 VAC Status

Refresh

FIGURE 140 Hardware Status Control Window

6. Verify the KEY STATUS and 24 VAC STATUS are enabled (red square). Verify the SPC board’s KEY and 24VAC status L.E.D.’s are
on.
7. Press and release the Emergency Stop switch on the front panel of the Display Console. As you press it verify the ESTOP status L.E.D.
on the SPC board comes on and then turns off when the switch is released.

Philips Medical Systems. Confidential and Proprietary information. Refer to Title Page.
 CAUTION
If the gantry and patient support are turned on at the time of test they will power down
when the E–stop switch is pressed.

8. Click the REFRESH button on the HARDWARE STATUS/CONTROL window. Verify the EMERGENCY STOP STATUS indicator is
red. Click the REFRESH button. Verify the EMERGENCY STOP STATUS indicator is not red.
9. Click the DISPLAY POWER selection in the CONTROL window. The square should be red. This verifies that the SPARC is writing
to the Display Power signal. Click the DISPLAY POWER selection again, the square should not be red.
10. Click the DISPLAY POWER selection again and verify the DISP status L.E.D. on the SPC board comes on and then goes off again
after 22 seconds. Verify the DISPLAY POWER status indicator is red. Click the REFRESH button. The DISPLAY POWER status
indicator will not be red.
11. Click the ACQIMAGE BOX POWER selection in the CONTROL window. Verify the status indicator is red. Verify the RECON status
L.E.D. on the SPC board is lit. Verify the AcQImage cabinet powers up.
12. Click the ACQIMAGE BOX POWER selection again in the CONTROL window. Verify the status indicator is not red. Verify the SPC
board RECON status L.E.D. turns off and the ACQImage cabinet powers down.
13. Click the GANTRY ENABLE selection in the CONTROL window.

NOTE
A warning message stating that the gantry may move will appear. Click on it to enable
the gantry.

14. Verify the GANTRY ENABLE status indicator in the CONTROL window turns red. Verify the GAN status L.E.D. on the SPC is on.
15. Click the X–RAY ENABLE selection in the CONTROL window.

NOTE
A warning message stating that the gantry may move will appear. Click on it to enable
the X–RAY generator power.

Philips Medical Systems. Confidential and Proprietary information. Refer to Title Page.
16. Verify the X–RAY ENABLE status indicator turns red. Verify the START status L.E.D. on the SPC is on for approximately 2 seconds
and turns off. Verify that the X–RAY generator power comes on.
17. Click the REFRESH button. Verify the X–RAY ENABLE selection is not red.
18. Press the Emergency Stop switch on the front of the Display Console. Verify the GAN status L.E.D. on the SPC board turns off. Also
the gantry should be powered off. Click on the REFRESH button. Verify the GANTRY ENABLE selection is not red.
19. Exit the HARDWARE STATUS/CONTROL window by clicking on the dash in the upper left corner of the window. Click on CLOSE.
The window will close.
20. You may now exit the SOFTWARE DIAGNOSTIC MENU.

Philips Medical Systems. Confidential and Proprietary information. Refer to Title Page.
UTILITIES – FLASH BURNER
21. After the GPU/XSC downloader is complete, run the Flash Burner from the Diag GUI. The flash burner is a utility for transferring
executable code from a directory on the SPARC disk to the Flash of a board of interest.

22. Enter the board number (1 for CP).

23. An Xterm will be displayed. Select option 1.) Transfer OS. When completed, the board will reboot.
24. Restart the the Flash burner from the GUI in Figure 141again on the same board. Then select option 2.) Transfer Diags.
25. When completed, the board will reboot. Now one board is done. Repeat this process on the remaining three boards. Board numbers
are: 2 for GAM, 3 for DSP/AP, 4 for BP. You can view the date of the Flash OS via a Telnet session. At the pSH+> prompt, type romver
and press <CR>.

FIGURE 141 Flash Burner

UTILITIES – ENET

ENET OUTPUT

localhost, IP address xxx.x.x.x : localhost is alive

ctscanner1, IP address 1xx.xx.xx.xx : ctscanner1 is alive
ct2a, IP address 1xx.xx.xx.xx : ct2a is alive
FIGURE 142 Enet Window

Philips Medical Systems. Confidential and Proprietary information. Refer to Title Page.
UTILITIES – DICOM ECHO

Trying 1xx.xx.xx. .....

Connected to ctscanner1
Escape character is ’^]’

pSOSystem (1xx.xx.xx.xx)

Copyright (c) Integrated Systems, Inc., 1992

Welcome to pSOSystem (NUPPC.2.0.1)...

[cp/sft01–1] pSH+> []

FIGURE 143 Dicom Echo Window

Philips Medical Systems. Confidential and Proprietary information. Refer to Title Page.
UTILITIES – TELNET SESSION

Allows communication from an Xterm window to a specific board where commands such as reset, etc. can be executed.

When the diag gui first starts, the Reset Boards window will appear. Before entering the system number, note the board numbers for the
BP, AP and GAM. These are necessary if a specific board reset is needed. The order should be: 1–CP, 2–GAM, 3–DSP/AP, 4–BP.

NOTE
If the AcQImage Cabinet front covers are removed, the LED on the front of the boards
will display the board number – 4 (BP), 3 (AP) or 2 (GAM). The CP board is board 1.

To reset a specific board from the Diag gui:

1. Select Telnet session from the Utilities pull down. At the Telnet Session window, select the board you wish to reset and press Continue.
2. The telnet window will appear. At the pSH+> prompt, type reset and press <CR>. The specific board will then reset.
3. The telnet session window will not dismiss itself. Move the mouse pointer to the upper bar and press the right mouse button – select
Close to dismiss the window.

FIGURE 144 Telnet Session Window

Philips Medical Systems. Confidential and Proprietary information. Refer to Title Page.
UTILITIES – KERMIT2

A terminal connection and file transfer program primarily used on the AcQSim CT to connect to the sun serial ports to run serial port only
diags.

FIGURE 145 Kermit2 Window

Philips Medical Systems. Confidential and Proprietary information. Refer to Title Page.
UTILITIES – XTERM

Simply provides an Xterm window in which specific commands can be entered via the keyboard.

Sun Microsystems Inc. Sun OS X.X.X Dec. 31, 1999 11:59:59

<== Commands are typed here

FIGURE 146 Xterm Window

XTERM UTILITIES – WHAT CAN BE RUN VIA AN XTERM WINDOW

There are several utilities you can run directly from the Xterm window. The following are covered:

Ping, Telnet and Reset

Arc Dump
SUN Logs
EEPROM

PING
Tests the status of a node on the network by sending out a quick signal and receiving a quick response if a connection was made.

At the % prompt, type ping [and the internet address] of the board or machine you wish to reach and press <CR>. The response will show
the status of the ping attempt {address is “alive” or address doesn’t respond].

TELNET
Log onto a board to reset it or check its configuration. At the % prompt, type telnet bay00–n , where “n” is the board number:
n = 1 for CP
n = 2 for GAM
n = 3 for AP
n = 4 for BP

Philips Medical Systems. Confidential and Proprietary information. Refer to Title Page.
At the % prompt, type board and press <CR>. A list of board information , including ethernet address will be displayed.
RESET
Reset an individual board. At the % prompt, type reset bay00–n , where “n” is the board number:
n = 1 for CP
n = 2 for GAM
n = 3 for AP
n = 4 for BP

Philips Medical Systems. Confidential and Proprietary information. Refer to Title Page.
ARC DUMP
There is a Sun command that will capture a snapshot of all the log files produced. This snapshot is useful for CT Engineering to help
diagnose system problems based on the history of certain events. The progam is contained in picr $path:
/opt/PICKER/picr/service_util/diagnostics/pq2000p/diag_gui/bin.

Running arcdump (or logdump) will switch to $LOG_DIR, get info from the pSOS boards & then archive all files to a .tar file, excluding any
existing .tar files. It creates the tar file name from the system name, plus date & time and adds the .tar extension, such as:
bay00.12–31–1999.11:59.tar

To run arcdump at the system:

Open an Xterm window via the Diagnostic GUI. Change directory (cd) to /opt/PICKER/picr/service_util/diagnostics/pq2000p/diag_gui/bin.
At the % prompt, type arcdump and press <CR>. The system will begin generating the arcdump and it will take a few minites to create
the file, which is typically in the 5MB range.

To run arcdump remotely:

You can run arcdump remotely via telnet, if the system is set up to receive a telnet command. You will need the IP address of the system,
log in as scanvis with picker as the password. Change directory (cd) to opt/PICKER/picr/service_util/diagnostics/pq2000p/diag_gui/bin.
At the % prompt, type arcdump and press <CR>. The system will begin generating the arcdump and it will take a few minites to create
the file, which is typically in the 5MB range. Copy the file to a tape (tar –cv filename.tar) and send to CT engineering at WHQ. Or, the .tar
file can be uploaded to ServeCom. If you feel you can decifer the individual error logs, you can extract the files and view each one:

To extract the information in the newly created .tar file, change directory (cd) to $LOG_DIR (/opt/PICKER/users/scanvis/logs). Create a
new directory of your choice using the mkdir command (e.g. mkdir arcdump1). Move the newly created .tar file to this directory using the
mv command (e.g. mv bay00.12–31–99.11:59.tar /opt/PICKER/users/scanvis/logs/arcdump1 and press <CR>.)

After the file is moved to the new directory, uncompress the file by typing tar –xvf .tar filename (The .tar file name will be different each
time – for this example, you would type tar –xvf bay00.12–31–99.11:59.tar and press <CR>.) The file will uncompress.

Philips Medical Systems. Confidential and Proprietary information. Refer to Title Page.
SUN LOGS
The location of SUN log files is /var/adm and the file names begin with messages. These files are rolled once a certain size is reached
so the most current file is messages. Once the files are rolled, a .<number> suffix is added to each file.

Currently, there is not a method to view these log files other than using the xterm window and paging out the files.

At the % prompt, type cd /var/adm and press <CR>. Then type ls –l /var/adm/messages*. A similar listing will be displayed:
–rw–r––r–– 1 root 0 Feb 13 04:05 /var/adm/messages
–rw–r––r–– 1 root 6097 Feb 12 16:15 /var/adm/messages.0
–rw–r––r–– 1 root 21915 Feb 4 16:28 /var/adm/messages.1
–rw–r––r–– 1 root 49461 Jan 29 10:34 /var/adm/messages.2
–rw–r––r–– 1 root 7548 Jan 22 14:44 /var/adm/messages.3

Below is a printout of one pariticular SUN log:

Feb 1 03:29:44 suntan ypbind[2050]: NIS server for domain ”ct.picker.com” OK

Feb 1 09:07:21 suntan automountd[153]: server three not responding

Feb 1 09:07:29 suntan last message repeated 1 time
Feb 1 09:47:56 suntan automountd[153]: server openwin not responding
Feb 1 15:02:46 suntan automountd[153]: server openwin not responding
Feb 1 15:03:58 suntan automountd[153]: server openwin not responding
Feb 2 09:09:19 suntan unix: SunOS Release 5.6 Version Generic [UNIX(R) System V Release 4.0]
Feb 2 09:09:19 suntan unix: Copyright (c) 1983–1997, Sun Microsystems, Inc.
Feb 2 09:09:19 suntan unix: vac: enabled
Feb 2 09:09:19 suntan unix: cpu0: FMI,MB86904 (mid 0 impl 0x0 ver 0x4 clock 70 MHz)
Feb 2 09:09:19 suntan unix: mem = 57344K (0x3800000)
Feb 2 09:09:19 suntan unix: avail mem = 53276672
Feb 2 09:09:19 suntan unix: Ethernet address = 8:0:20:73:97:8d
Feb 2 09:09:19 suntan unix: root nexus = SUNW,SPARCstation–5
Feb 2 09:09:19 suntan unix: iommu0 at root: obio 0x10000000
Feb 2 09:09:19 suntan unix: sbus0 at iommu0: obio 0x10001000
Feb 2 09:09:19 suntan unix: espdma0 at sbus0: SBus slot 5 0x8400000
Feb 2 09:09:19 suntan unix: esp0: esp–options=0x46
Feb 2 09:09:19 suntan unix: esp0 at espdma0: SBus slot 5 0x8800000 sparc ipl 4
Feb 2 09:09:19 suntan unix: sd3 at esp0: target 3 lun 0
Feb 2 09:09:19 suntan unix: sd3 is /iommu@0,10000000/sbus@0,10001000/espdma@5,8400000/esp@5,8800000/sd@3,0...
Feb 2 09:09:19 suntan unix: SUN2.1G cyl 2733 alt 2 hd 19 sec 80>
Feb 2 09:09:19 suntan unix: root on /iommu@0,10000000/sbus@0,10001000/espdma@5,8400000/esp@5,8800000/sd@3
Feb 2 09:09:19 suntan unix: obio0 at root

Philips Medical Systems. Confidential and Proprietary information. Refer to Title Page.
Feb 2 09:09:19 suntan unix: zs0 at obio0: obio 0x100000 sparc ipl 12
Feb 2 09:09:19 suntan unix: zs0 is /obio/zs@0,100000
Feb 2 09:09:19 suntan unix: zs1 at obio0: obio 0x0 sparc ipl 12
Feb 2 09:09:19 suntan unix: zs1 is /obio/zs@0,0
Feb 2 09:09:19 suntan unix: cgsix0 at sbus0: SBus slot 3 0x0 SBus level 5 sparc ipl 9
Feb 2 09:09:19 suntan unix: cgsix0 is /iommu@0,10000000/sbus@0,10001000/cgsix@3,0
Feb 2 09:09:19 suntan unix: cgsix0: screen 1152x900, single buffered, 1M mappable, rev 7
Feb 2 09:09:19 suntan unix: cpu 0 initialization complete – online
Feb 2 09:09:19 suntan unix: ledma0 at sbus0: SBus slot 5 0x8400010
Feb 2 09:09:19 suntan unix: le0 at ledma0: SBus slot 5 0x8c00000 sparc ipl 6
Feb 2 09:09:19 suntan unix: le0 is /iommu@0,10000000/sbus@0,10001000/ledma@5,8400010/le@5,8c00000
Feb 2 09:09:19 suntan unix: dump on /dev/dsk/c0t3d0s1 size 262184K
Feb 2 09:09:23 suntan unix: pseudo–device: pm0
Feb 2 09:09:23 suntan unix: pm0 is /pseudo/pm@0
Feb 2 09:09:26 suntan unix: pseudo–device: vol0
Feb 2 09:09:26 suntan unix: vol0 is /pseudo/vol@0
Feb 2 09:17:10 suntan unix: SunOS Release 5.6 Version Generic [UNIX(R) System V Release 4.0]
Feb 2 09:17:10 suntan unix: Copyright (c) 1983–1997, Sun Microsystems, Inc.
Feb 2 09:17:10 suntan unix: vac: enabled
Feb 2 09:17:10 suntan unix: cpu0: FMI,MB86904 (mid 0 impl 0x0 ver 0x4 clock 70 MHz)
Feb 2 09:17:10 suntan unix: mem = 57344K (0x3800000)
Feb 2 09:17:10 suntan unix: avail mem = 53276672
Feb 2 09:17:10 suntan unix: Ethernet address = 8:0:20:73:97:8d
Feb 2 09:17:10 suntan unix: root nexus = SUNW,SPARCstation–5
Feb 2 09:17:10 suntan unix: iommu0 at root: obio 0x10000000
Feb 2 09:17:10 suntan unix: sbus0 at iommu0: obio 0x10001000
Feb 2 09:17:10 suntan unix: espdma0 at sbus0: SBus slot 5 0x8400000
Feb 2 09:17:10 suntan unix:esp0: esp–options=0x46
Feb 2 09:17:10 suntan unix: esp0 at espdma0: SBus slot 5 0x8800000 sparc ipl 4
Feb 2 09:17:10 suntan unix: sd3 at esp0: target 3 lun 0
Feb 2 09:17:10 suntan unix: sd3 is /iommu@0,10000000/sbus@0,10001000/espdma@5,8400000/esp@5,8800000/sd@3,0
Feb 2 09:17:10 suntan unix: <SUN2.1G cyl 2733 alt 2 hd 19 sec 80>
Feb 2 09:17:10 suntan unix: root on /iommu@0,10000000/sbus@0,10001000/espdma@5,8400000/esp@5,8800000/sd@3...
Feb 2 09:17:10 suntan unix: obio0 at root
Feb 2 09:17:10 suntan unix: zs0 at obio0: obio 0x100000 sparc ipl 12
Feb 2 09:17:10 suntan unix: zs0 is /obio/zs@0,100000
Feb 2 09:17:10 suntan unix: zs1 at obio0: obio 0x0 sparc ipl 12
Feb 2 09:17:10 suntan unix: zs1 is /obio/zs@0,0
Feb 2 09:17:10 suntan unix: cgsix0 at sbus0: SBus slot 3 0x0 SBus level 5 sparc ipl 9
Feb 2 09:17:10 suntan unix: cgsix0 is /iommu@0,10000000/sbus@0,10001000/cgsix@3,0
Feb 2 09:17:10 suntan unix: cgsix0: screen 1152x900, single buffered, 1M mappable, rev 7
Feb 2 09:17:10 suntan unix: cpu 0 initialization complete – online
Feb 2 09:17:10 suntan unix: ledma0 at sbus0: SBus slot 5 0x8400010

Philips Medical Systems. Confidential and Proprietary information. Refer to Title Page.
 Feb 2 09:17:10 suntan unix: le0 at ledma0: SBus slot 5 0x8c00000 sparc ipl 6
Feb 2 09:17:10 suntan unix: le0 is /iommu@0,10000000/sbus@0,10001000/ledma@5,8400010/le@5,8c00000
Feb 2 09:17:10 suntan unix: dump on /dev/dsk/c0t3d0s1 size 262184K
Feb 2 09:17:14 suntan unix: pseudo–device: pm0
Feb 2 09:17:14 suntan unix: pm0 is /pseudo/pm@0
Feb 2 09:17:18 suntan unix: pseudo–device: vol0
Feb 2 09:17:18 suntan unix: vol0 is /pseudo/vol@0
Feb 2 13:52:51 suntan automountd[155]: server openwin not responding
Feb 3 08:35:19 suntan automountd[155]: server openwin not responding
Feb 3 08:36:59 suntan su: ’su root’ failed for aria on /dev/pts/4
Feb 3 08:46:20 suntan automountd[155]: server openwin not responding
Feb 3 10:07:14 suntan su: ’su root’ failed for aria on /dev/pts/7
Feb 3 11:36:47 suntan automountd[155]: server openwin not responding
Feb 3 11:57:14 suntan automountd[155]: server openwin not responding
Feb 3 13:28:06 suntan automountd[155]: do_mapent_hosts: ultrawoman: export list: RPC: Unable to receive
Feb 3 13:28:06 suntan last message repeated 5 times
Feb 4 14:09:59 suntan automountd[155]: server openwin not responding
Feb 4 14:32:51 suntan automountd[155]: server openwin not responding
Feb 4 15:42:38 suntan automountd[155]: server openwin not responding
Feb 5 08:06:11 suntan automountd[155]: server openwin not responding
Feb 5 09:58:41 suntan automountd[155]: server openwin not responding
Feb 5 10:36:27 suntan automountd[155]: server openwin not responding
Feb 6 20:32:03 suntan ypbind[5717]: NIS server not responding for domain ”ct.picker.com”; still trying
Feb 6 20:32:08 suntan ypbind[5718]: NIS server for domain ”ct.picker.com” OK

The following are detailed descriptions of common Solaris errors reported via the SUN Logs:

Philips Medical Systems. Confidential and Proprietary information. Refer to Title Page.
Solaris Common Error Messages

The following are Solaris Common Error Messages (alphabetized) DETAIL DESCRIPTION:

***** FILE SYSTEM WAS MODIFIED *****

====================================
This comment from the fsck(1M) command tells you that it changed the filesystem it was checking.

If fsck was checking the root filesystem, reboot the system immediately to avoid corrupting the / partition. If fsck was checking a mounted
filesystem, unmount that filesystem and run fsck again, so that work done by fsck is not undone when in–memory file tables are written
out to disk.

** Phase 1–– Check Blocks and Sizes

===================================
The fsck(1M) command is checking the filesystem shown in the messages that are displayed before this one. The first phase checks the
inode list, finds bad or duplicate blocks, and verifies the inode size and format.

If more than a dozen errors occur during this important phase, you might want to restore the filesystem from backup tapes. Otherwise it
is fine to proceed with fsck.

** Phase 1b–– Rescan For More DUPS

==================================
The fsck(1M) command detected duplicate blocks while checking a filesystem, so fsck is rescanning the filesystem to find the inode that
originally claimedthat block.

If fsck executes this optional phase, you will see additional DUP/BAD messages in phases 2 and 4.

** Phase 2–– Check Pathnames

============================
The fsck(1M) command is checking a filesystem, and fsck is now removing directory entries pointing to bad inodes that were discovered
in phases 1 and 1b. This phase might ask you to remove files, salvage directories,fix inodes, reallocate blocks, and so on.

If more than a dozen errors occur during this important phase, you might want to restore the filesystem from backup tapes. Otherwise it
is fine to proceed with fsck.

Philips Medical Systems. Confidential and Proprietary information. Refer to Title Page.
** Phase 3–– Check Connectivity
===============================
The fsck(1M) command is checking a filesystem, and fsck is now verifying the integrity of directories. You mightbeasked to adjust, create,
expand, reallocate, or reconnect directories.

You can usually answer yes to all these questions without harming the filesystem.

** Phase 4–– Check Reference Counts

===================================
The fsck(1M) command is checking a filesystem, and fsck is now checking link count information obtained in phases 2 and 3. You might
be asked to clear or adjust link counts.

You can usually answer yes to all these questions without harming the filesystem.

** Phase 5–– Check Cyl groups

=============================
The fsck(1M) command is checking a filesystem, and fsck is now checking the free–block and used–inode maps. You might be asked to
salvage free blocks or summary information.

You can usually answer yes to all these questions without harming the filesystem.
451 timeout waiting for input during variable
=============================================
When sendmail(1M) reads from anything that might time out, such as an SMTP connection, it sets a timer to the value of the r processing
option before reading begins. If the read doesn’t complete before the timer expires, this message appears and reading stops. (Usually this
is during RCPT.) The mail message is then queued for later delivery.

If you see this message often, increase the value of the rprocessing option in the /etc/mail/sendmail.cf file. If the timer is already set to a
large number, look for hardware problems such as poor network cabling or connections.

550 variable... Host unknown

============================
This sendmail(1M) message indicates that the destination host machine, specified by the address portion after the @ (at–sign), was not
found during DNS (Domain NamingSystem) lookup.

Philips Medical Systems. Confidential and Proprietary information. Refer to Title Page.
Use the nslookup(1M) command to verify that the destination host exists in that or other domains, perhaps with a slightly different spelling.
Failing that, contact the intended recipient and ask for a proper address.

Sometimes thisreturn message indicates that the intended host is merely down, rather than unknown. If a DNS record contains an unknown
alternate host, and the primary host is down, sendmail returns a ”Host unknown” message from the alternate host.¤ For uucp mail
addresses, the ”Host unknown” message probably means that the destination hostname is not listed in the /etc/uucp/Systems file.

¤ This is a known sendmail version 8.6.7 bug.

550 variable... User unknown

============================
This sendmail(1M) message indicates that the intended recipient, specified by the address portion before the @ (at–sign), could not be
located on the destination host machine.

Check the e–mail address and try again, perhaps with a slightly different spelling. If this doesn’t work, contact the intended recipient and
ask for a proper address.

554 variable... Local configuration error

=========================================
This sendmail(1M) message usually indicates that the local host is trying to send mail to itself. Check the value of the $j macro in the
/etc/mail/sendmail.cf file to ensure that this value is a fully–qualified domain name.
When the sending system provides its hostname to the receiving system (in the SMTP HELO command), the receiving system compares
its name to the sender’s name. If these are the same, the receiving system issues this error messageand closes the connection. The name
provided in the HELO command is the value of the $j macro.

A command window has exited because its child exited.

=====================================================
The argument to a cmdtool(1) or a shelltool(1) window looks like it is supposed to be a command, but the system cannot find the command.

To run this command inside a cmdtool or a shelltool, make sure the command is spelled correctly and is in your search path (if necessary,
use a full path name). If you intended this argument as an option setting, use a minus sign (–) at the beginning of the option. Both the cmdtool
and the shelltool are OpenWindows terminal emulators.

Philips Medical Systems. Confidential and Proprietary information. Refer to Title Page.
admintool: Received communication service error 4
=================================================
AdminTool could not start a display method because a remote procedure call timed out, so it can’t send the request. This error results when
admintool tries to access the NIS or NIS+ tables when networking is not enabled.

Verify the system network status with ifconfig –a to make sure the system is connected to the network. Make sure the ethernet cable is
connected and the system is configured to run NIS or NIS+.

answerbook: XView error: NULL pointer passed to xv_set

======================================================
The AnswerBook navigator window comes up, but the document viewer window does not. This message appears on the console, and
themessage ”Could not start new viewer” appears in the navigator window. This situation indicates that you have an unknown client or a
problem with the network naming service.

Run the ypmatch(1) or nismatch(1) command o determine if the client hostname is in the hosts map. If it isn’t, add it to to NIS hosts map
on the NIS master server. Then make sure the /etc/hosts file on the client contains an IP address and entry for that hostname followed by
loghost (reboot if you changed the /etc/hosts file). Check that the ypmatch or nismatch client hosts command returns the same IP host
address as in the /etc/hosts file. Finally, quit all existing AnswerBooks and restart.

Arg list too long

=================
The system could not handle the number of arguments given to a command or program when it combined those arguments with the
environment’s exported shell variables. The argument list limit is the size of the argument list plus the size of the environment’s exported
shell variables.

The easiest solution is to reduce the size of the parent process environment by unsetting extraneous environment variables. (See the man
page for the shell you’re using to find out how to list and change your environment variables.) Then run the program again. An argument
list longer than ARG_MAX bytes was presented to a member of the exec() family of system calls. The symbolic name for this error is E2BIG,
errno=7.

Argument out of domain

======================
This is a programming error or a data input error.

Philips Medical Systems. Confidential and Proprietary information. Refer to Title Page.
Ask the program’s author to fix this condition,or supply data in a different format.

This indicates an attempt to evaluate a mathematical programming function at a point where its value is not defined. The argument of a
programming function in the math package (3M) is out of the domain of the function. This could happen when taking the square root, power,
or log of a negative number, when computing a power to a non–integer, or when passing an out–of–range argument to a hyperbolic
programming function. To help pinpoint a program’s math errors, use the matherr(3M) facility. The symbolic name for this error is EDOM,
errno=33.

Arguments too long

==================
This C shell error message indicates that there are too many arguments after a command. For example, this can happen by invoking rm
* in a huge directory. The C shell cannot handle more than 1706 arguments.

Temporarily start a Bourne shell with sh and run the command again. The Bourne shell dynamically allocates command line arguments.
Return to your original shell by typing exit.

assertion failed: variable, file variable, line N

=================================================
A condition in the program that was never expected to happen has happened.

Contact the vendor or author of the program to ask why it failed. If you have the source code for the program, you can look at the file and
line number where the assertion failed. This might give you an idea of how to run the program differently.

This message results from a diagnostic macro called assert() that a programmerinserted into the specified line of a source file. The
expression that evaluated untrue precedes the file name and line number.

automountd[N]: No network locking on variable: contact admin to install server change

=====================================================================================
See ”WARNING: No network locking on variable: contact admin to install server” message for details. If the server is not changed, data
loss is possible in applications that depend on locking.

automountd[N]: server variable not responding

=============================================

Philips Medical Systems. Confidential and Proprietary information. Refer to Title Page.
This automounter message indicates that the system tried to mount a filesystem from an NFS server that is either down or extremely slow
to respond. In some cases thismessage indicates that the network link to the NFS server is broken, although that condition produces other
error messages as well.

If you are the system administrator responsible for the non– responding NFS server, check it out to see whether the machine needs repair
or rebooting. Encourage your user community to report such problems quickly but only once. When the NFS server is back in operation,
the automounter will be able to access the requested filesystem.

automount[N]: variable: Not a directory

=======================================
The file specified after the first colon is not a valid mount point because it is not a directory.

Ensure that the mount point is a directory, and not a regular file or a symbolic link.

Bad address
===========
The system encountered a hardware fault in attempting to access a parameter of a programming function.

Check if the bad address resulted from supplying the wrong device or option to a command. If that is not the problem, contact the vendor
or author of the program for an update.

This error could occur any time a function that takes a pointer argument is passed an invalid address. Because processors differ in their
ability to detect bad addresses, on some architectures passing bad addresses can result in undefined behaviors. The symbolic name for
this error is EFAULT,errno=14.

BAD/DUP FILE I=i OWNER=o MODE=m SIZE=s MTIME=t

=============================================== CLEAR?=======
While checking inode link counts during phase 4, fsck(1M) found a file (or directory) that either does not exist or exists somewhere else.

To clear the inode of its reference to this file or directory, answer yes. With the –p (preen) option, fsck automatically clears bad or duplicate
file references, so answering yes to this question seldom causes a problem.

Philips Medical Systems. Confidential and Proprietary information. Refer to Title Page.
Bad file number
===============
Generally this is a program error, not a usage error. Contact the vendor or author of the program for an update.

Either a file descriptor refers to no open file, or a read (or write) request is made to a file that is open only for writing (or reading). The symbolic
name for this error is EBADF, errno=9.

N BAD I=N
=========
Upon detecting an out–of–range block, fsck(1M) prints the bad block number and its containing inode (after I=).

In fsck phases 2 and 4, you will decide whether ornot to clear these bad blocks. Before committing to repair with fsck, you could determine
which file contains this inode by passing the inode number to the ncheck(1M) command: by passing the inode number to the ncheck(1M)
command: # ncheck –iinum filesystem

bad module/chip at: variable

============================
This message from the memory management system often appears with parity errors, and indicates a bad memory module or chip at the
position listed. Data loss is possible if the problem occurs other than at boot time.

Replace the memory module or chip at the indicated position. Refer to the vendor’s hardware manual forhelp finding this location.

BAD SUPER BLOCK: variable

=========================
This message from fsck(1M) indicates that a filesystem’s super– block is damaged beyond repair and must be replaced. At boot time (with
the –p option) this message is prefaced by the filesystem’s device name. After this message comes the actual damage recognized (see
Action). Unfortunately fsck does not print the number of the damaged super–block.

The most common cause of this error is overlapping disk partitions. Donot immediately rerun fsck as suggested by the lines that display
after the error message. First make sure that you have a recent backup of the filesystem involved; if not, try to back up the filesystem now
using ufsdump(1M). Then run the format(1M) command, select the disk involved, and print out the partition information.

# format : N > partition > print

Philips Medical Systems. Confidential and Proprietary information. Refer to Title Page.
Note whether the overlap occurs at the beginning or end of the filesystem involved. Then run newfs(1M) with the –N option to print out
the filesystem parameters, including the location of backup super–blocks.

# newfs –N /dev/dsk/device

Select a super–block from a non–overlapping area of the disk, but note that in most cases you have only one chance to select the proper
replacement super–block, which fsck soon propagates to all the cylinders. If you select the wrong replacement super–block, data corruption
will probably occur, and you will have to restore from backup tapes. After you select a new super–block, provide fsck with the new master
super–block number:

# fsck –o b=NNNN /dev/dsk/device

Specific reasons for a damaged super–block include: a wrong magic number, out of range NCG (number of cylinder groups) or CPG
(cylinders per group), the wrong number of cylinders, a preposterously large super–block size, and trashed values in super–block. These
reasons are generally not meaningful because a corrupt super–block is usually extremely corrupt.

BAD TRAP
========
A bad trap can indicate faulty hardware or a mismatch between hardware and its configuration information. Data loss is possible if the
problem occurs other than at boot time.

If you recently installed new hardware, verify that the software was correctly configured. Check the kernel traceback displayed on the
console to see which device generated the trap. If the configuration files are correct, you will probably have to replace the device. In some
cases, the bad trap message indicates a bad or down–rev CPU.

A hardware processor trap occurred, and the kernel trap handler was unable to restore system state. This is a fatal error that usually
precedes a panic, after which the system performs a sync, dump, and reboot. The following conditions can cause a bad trap: a system text
or data access fault, a system data alignment error, or certain kinds of user software traps.

bad trap = N
============
See the message ”BAD TRAP” for details.

Philips Medical Systems. Confidential and Proprietary information. Refer to Title Page.
/bin/sh: variable: too big
==========================
This Bourne shell message indicates a classic ”no memory” error. While trying to load the program specified after thefirstcolon, the shell
noticed that the system ran out of virtual memory (swap space).

See the message ”Not enough space” for information on reconfiguring your system to add more swap space.

Block device required

=====================
A raw (character special) device was specified where a block device was required, such as during a call to the mount(1M) command.

To see which block devices are available, use ls –l to look in /devices. Then specify a block device instead of a character device. Block device
modes start with a b, whereas raw character device modes start with a c.

The symbolic name for this error is ENOTBLK, errno=15.

Boot device: /iommu/sbus/variable/variable/sd@3,0

=================================================
This message alwaysappears at the beginning of rebooting. If there is a problem, the system hangs, and no other messages appear. This
condition is caused by conflicting SCSI targets for the boot device, which is almost always target 3. The boot device is usually the machine’s
internal disk drive, target 3. Make sure that external and secondary disk drives are targeted to 1, 2, or 0, and do not conflict with each other.
Also, make sure that tape drives are targeted to 4 or 5, and CD drives to 6, avoiding any conflict with each other or with the disk drives.
You can set a device’s target number using pushbutton switches or a dial on the back near the SCSI cables. If the targeting of the internal
disk drive is in question, check it by powering off the machine, removing all external drives, turning the power on, and running the
probe–scsi–all or probe–scsi command from the PROM monitor.

Broadcast Message from root (pts/N) on server [date]

====================================================
This message from the wall(1M) command gets transmitted to all users logged into a system. You could see it during a rlogin or telnet
session, or on terminals connected to a timesharingsystem.

Carefully read the broadcast message. Often this broadcast is followed by a shutdown warning. See the message ”The system will be shut
down in N minutes” for details about system shutdown.

Philips Medical Systems. Confidential and Proprietary information. Refer to Title Page.
Broken pipe
===========
This condition is often normal, and the message is merely informational (as when piping many lines to the head program). The condition
occurs when a write on a pipe does not find a reading process. This usually generates a signal to the executing program, but this message
displays when the program ignores the signal.

Check the process at the end of the pipe to see why it exited. The symbolic name forthis error is EPIPE, errno=32.

Bus Error
=========
A process has received a signal indicating that it attempted to perform I/O to a device that is restricted or that does not exist. This message
is usually accompanied by a core dump, except on read–only filesystems.

Use a debugger to examine the core file and determine what program fault or system problem led to the bus error. If
possible, check the program’s output files for data corruption that might have occurred before the bus error.

Bus errors canresult from either programming error or device corruption on your system. Some common causes of bus errors are:invalid
file descriptors, unreasonable I/O requests, bad memory allocation, misaligned data structures, compiler bugs, and corrupt boot blocks.

Cannot allocate colormap entry for ”variable”

=============================================
This message from libXt (X Intrinsics library) indicates that the system colormap was full even before the color name specified in quotes
was requested. Some applications can continue after this message. Other applications, such as Workspace Properties Color, fail to come
up when the colormap is full.

Exit the programs that make heavy use of the colormap, then restart the failed application and try again.

Can’t create public message device (Device busy)

================================================
This message comes from the lp print scheduler, indicating that it is either extremely busy or hung.
If print jobs are coming out of the printer in question, wait until they are finished and then resubmit this print job. If you see this message
again, the lp system is probably hung. See the message ”lp hang” for a procedure to clear the queue. If lp is unable to create a device
for printer messages, the message FIFO could be already in use, or locked by another print job.

Philips Medical Systems. Confidential and Proprietary information. Refer to Title Page.
Can’t invoke /etc/init, error N
===============================
This message can appear while a system is booting, indicating that the init program is missing or corrupted. Note that /etc/init is a symbolic
link to /sbin/init.

Boot the miniroot so you can replace init. Halt the machine by typing Stop–A or by pressing the reset button. Reboot single–user from
CDROM, the net, or diskette. For example, type boot cdrom –s at the ok prompt to boot from CDROM. After the system comes up and gives
you a # prompt, mount the device corresponding to the original / partition somewhere, with a command similar to the mount command below.
Then copy the init program from the miniroot to the original / partition, and reboot the system.

# mount /dev/dsk/c0t3d0s0 /mnt # cp /sbin/init /mnt/sbin/init # reboot If this doesn’t work, other files might be corrupted, and you might
need to reinstall the entire system.The error number is 2 if /sbin/init is missing, or 8 if /sbin/init has an incorrect executable format. This is
usually followed by a ”panic:icode” message. The system tries to reboot itself, but goes into a loop, because rebooting is impossible without
init.

can’t synchronize with hayes

============================
This message sometimes appears when using a modem that the system regards as a ”Hayes” type modem, which includes most modems
manufactured today. The message can be caused by incorrectswitch settings, by poor cable connections, or by not turning the modem on.

Check that the modem is on and that the cables between the modem and your system are securely connected. Check the internal and
external modem switch settings. Turn themodem off and then on again, if necessary.

cd: Too many arguments

======================
The C shell’s cd(1) command takes only one argument. Either more than one directory was specified, or a directory name containing a space
was specified. Directory names with spaces are easy to create with File Manager. Use only one directory name. To change to a directory
whose name contains spaces, enclose the directory name in double (”) or single (’) quotes, or use File Manager.

Channel number out of range

===========================
The system has run out of stream devices. This error results when a stream head attempts to open a minor device that does not exist or
that is currently in use.

Philips Medical Systems. Confidential and Proprietary information. Refer to Title Page.
Check that the stream device in question exists and was created with an appropriate number of minor devices. Make sure that the hardware
corresponds to this configuration. If the stream device configuration is correct, try again later when more system resources might be
available. The symbolic name for this error is ECHRNG, errno=37.

chmod: ERROR: invalid mode

==========================
This message from the chmod(1) command indicates a problem in the first non–option argument.

If you are specifying a numeric file mode, you can provide any number of digits (although only the final one to four are considered), but
all digits must be between 0 and 7. If you are specifying a symbolic file mode, use the syntax provided in the chmod usage message to
avoid the ”invalid mode” error message:

Usage: chmod [ugoa][+–=][rwxlstugo] file ...

Note that some combinations of symbolic keyletters produce no error message but fail to have any effect. The first group,ugoa], is truly
optional. The second group, [+–=], is mandatory for chmod to have an effect. The third group,[rwxlstugo], is also mandatory for effect, and
can be used in combination when that combination does not conflict.

Command not found

=================
The C shell could not find the program you gave as a command. Check the form and spelling of the command line. If that looks correct,
echo $path to see if the user’s search path is correct. When communications are garbled, it is possible to unset a search path to such an
extent that only built–in shell commands are available. Here is a command to reset a basic search path:

% set path = (/usr/bin /usr/ccs/bin /usr/openwin/bin .)

If the search path looks correct, check the directory contents along the search path to see if programs are missing or if directories are not
mounted.

Connection closed.
==================
This message can appear when using rlogin(1) to another system if the remote host cannot create a process for this user, if the user takes
too long to type the correct password, if the user interrupts the network connection, or if the remote host goes down. Data loss is possible
if files were modified and not saved before the connection closed. Try again. If the other system has gone down, wait for it to reboot first.

Philips Medical Systems. Confidential and Proprietary information. Refer to Title Page.
Connection closed by foreign host.
==================================
When a user telnets to another system, this message can appear if the user takes too long to type the correct password, if the remote host
cannot create a login for this user,or if theremote host goes down or terminates the connection. Data loss is possible if files were modified
and not saved before the connection closed. Just try again. If the other system has gone down, wait for it to reboot first.

[Connection closed.Exiting]
============================
After using the talk(1) command to communicate with another user, the other person enters an interrupt (usually Control–c), and this
message appears on your screen.

Sending an interrupt like this is the usual wayof exiting the talk program. The talk session is over and you can return to your work.

Connection refused
==================
No connection could be made because the target machine actively refused it. This happens either when trying to connect to an inactive
service or when a service process is not present at the requested address.

Activate the service on the target machine, or start it up again if it has disappeared. If for security reasons you do not intend to provide this
service, inform the user community, possibly suggesting an alternative.

The symbolic name for this error is ECONNREFUSED, errno=146.

Connection timed out

====================
This occurs either when the destination host is down or when problems in the network cause lost transmission.

First check the operation of the host system, for example by using ping(1M) and ftp (1), then repair or reboot as necessary. If that doesn’t
solve the problem, check the network cabling and connections. No connection was established in aspecified time. A connect or send
request failed because the destination host did not properly respond after a reasonable interval. (The timeout period is dependent on the
communication protocol.)

The symbolic name for this error is ETIMEDOUT, errno=145.

Philips Medical Systems. Confidential and Proprietary information. Refer to Title Page.
console login:
===========================
This usually occurs because OpenWindows exited abnormally, leaving the system’s keyboard in the wrong mode. The characters that
appear when someone attempts to login are garbage transliterations of what someone types.

Find another machine and remote login to this system, then run this command:
$ /usr/openwin/bin/kbd_mode –a
This puts the console back into ASCII mode. Note that kbd_mode is not a windows program, it just fixes the consolemode. The usual reason
for this problem occurring is an automated script run from cron that clears out the /tmp directory every so often. Ensure that any such scripts
do not remove the /tmp/.X11– pipe or /tmp/.X11–unix directories, or any files therein.

core dumped
===========
A core file contains an image of memory at the point of software failure, and is used by programmers to find the reason for the failure.

To see which program produced a core file, run either the file(1) command or the adb (1) command. The following examples show the output
of the file and adb commands on a core file from the dtmail program.

$ file core core: ELF 32–bit MSB core file SPARC Version 1, from‘dtmail’

$ adb core core file = core –– program ‘dtmail’ SIGSEGV 11: segmentation violation ^D (use Control–d to quit the program)

Ask the vendor or author of this program for a debugged version. Some signals, such as SIGQUIT, SIGBUS, and SIGSEGV, produce a
core dump. See the signal(5) man page for a complete list. If youhave the source code for the program, you can try compiling it with cc
–g, and debugging it yourself using dbx or a similar debugger. The where directive of dbx provides a stack trace.

On mixed networks, it can be difficult to discern which machine architecture produced a particular core dump, since adb on one type of
system generally cannot read a core file from another type of system, and will produce an ”unrecognized file” message. Run adb on various
machine architectures until youfind the right one. The term ”core” is archaic–– ferrite core memory was supplanted by silicon RAM in the
1970s, although spaceships still employ core memory for its imperviousness to radiation.

For information on saving and viewing crash informationsee the System Administration Guide, Volume II. If you are using the AnswerBook,
”system crash” is a good search string.

Philips Medical Systems. Confidential and Proprietary information. Refer to Title Page.
Could not initialize tooltalk (tt_open): TT_ERR_NOMP
====================================================
Various desktop tools display or print this message when the ttsession(1) process is not available. The TookTalk service generally tries to
restart ttsession if it is not running. So this error indicates that the ToolTalk service is either not installed or is not installed correctly.

Verify that the ttsession command exists in /usr/openwin/bin or /usr/dt/bin. If this command is not present, ToolTalk is not installed correctly.
The packages constituting ToolTalk are the runtime SUNWtltk, developer support SUNWtltkd, and the manualpages SUNWtltkm. CDE
ToolTalk packages have the same names with ”.2” appended. The full TT_ERR_NOMP message string reads as follows: ”No ttsession
is running, probably because tt_open() has not been called yet. If this is returned from tt_open() it means ttsession could not be started,
which generally means ToolTalk is not installed on the system.”

Could not start new viewer

==========================
This message appears in the AnswerBook navigator window, along with an XView error messageon the console. See the message
”answerbook: XView error: NULL pointer passed to xv_set” for details.

cpio: Bad magic number/header.

==============================
A cpio(1) archive has either become corrupted or was written out with an incompatibleversion of cpio.

Use the –k option to cpio to skip I/O errors and corrupted file headers. This might permit you to extract other files from the cpio archive.
To extract files with corrupted headers, try editing the archive with a binary editor such asemacs. Each cpio file header contains a filename
as a string. For more information on magic numbers, see magic(4).

Cross–device link
=================
An attempt was made to make a hard link to a file on another device, such as on another filesystem. Establish a symbolic link using ln –s
instead. Symbolic links are permitted across filesystem boundaries. The symbolic name for this error is EXDEV, errno=18.

data access exception

=====================
This message can result from running an old version of the operating system that does not support new hardware, or by running an operating
system that is not configured for new hardware. It can also result from incorrectly installed DSIMMs or from a disk problem.

Philips Medical Systems. Confidential and Proprietary information. Refer to Title Page.
Upgrade your operating system toa version that supports the new hardware or machine architecture. For example, upgrading a
SPARCstation 2 (with sun4c kernel architecture) to a SPARCstation 0 (with sun4m kernel architecture) requires an operating system
upgrade or reconfiguration.

Data fault
==========
This is a kind of bad trap that usually causes a system panic. When this message appears after a bad trap message, a system text or data
access fault probably occurred.¤ In the absence of a bad trap message, this message might indicate a user text or data access fault. Data
loss is possible if the problem occurs other than at boot time.

Make sure the machine can reboot, then check the log file /var/adm/messages for hints about what went wrong. ¤ See the message ”BAD
TRAP” for more information.

Deadlock situation detected/avoided

===================================
A programming deadlock situation was detected and avoided. If the system had not detected and avoided a deadlock, a piece of software
would have hung. Run the program again. The deadlock might not reoccur.

This error usually relates to file and record locking, but can also apply to mutexes, semaphores, condition variables, and read/write locks.
The symbolic name for this error is EDEADLK, errno=45. See the section on deadlock handling in the System Interface
Guide. See the section on avoiding deadlock in the Multithreaded Programming Guide.

Device busy
===========
An attempt was made to mount a device that was already mounted or to unmount a device containing an active file (such as an open file,
a current directory, a mount point, or a running program). Thismessage also occurs when trying to enable accounting that is already
enabled.

To unmount a device containing active processes, close all the files under that mount point, quit any programs started from there, and
change directories out of that hierarchy. Then try to unmountagain.

Mutexes, semaphores, condition variables, and read/write locks set this error condition to indicate that a lock is held. The symbolic name
for this error is EBUSY, errno=16.

Philips Medical Systems. Confidential and Proprietary information. Refer to Title Page.
/dev/rdsk/variable: CAN’T CHECK FILE SYSTEM.
============================================
The system cannot automatically clean (preen) this file systembecause it appears to be set up incorrectly or is having hard disk problems.
This message asks that you run fsck(1M) manually, since data corruption might already haveoccurred.
Run fsck to clean the filesystem in question. See the message ”/dev/rdsk/N: UNEXPECTED INCONSISTENCY; RUN fsck MANUALLY”
for proper procedures.

/dev/rdsk/variable: UNEXPECTED INCONSISTENCY; RUN fsck MANUALLY.

================================================================
At boot time the /etc/rcS script runs the fsck(1M) command to check the integrity of filesystems marked ”fsck” in /etc/vfstab. f fsck cannot
repair a filesystem automatically, it interrupts theboot procedure and produces this message. When fsck gets into this state, it cannot repair
a filesystem without losing one or more files, so it wants to defer this responsibility to you, the administrator. Data corruption has probably
already occurred.

First run fsck –n on the filesystem, to see how many and what type of problems exist. Then run fsck again to repair the filesystem. If you
have a recent backup of the filesystem, you can generally answer ”y” to all the fsck questions. It’s a good idea to keep a record of all
problematic files and inode numbers for later reference. To run fsck yourself, specify options as recommended by the boot script. For
example: # fsck /dev/rdsk/c0t4d0s0

Usually the files lost during fsck repair are these that were created just before a crash or power outage, and they cannot be recovered. If
you lose important files, you can recover them from backup tapes. If you don’t have a backup, ask an expert to run fsck for you.

Directory not empty

===================
The directory operation that was attempted, such as directory removal with rmdir, can be performed only on an empty directory.
To removethe directory, first remove all the files that it contains. A quick way to remove a non–empty directory hierarchy is with the rm –r
command. The symbolic name for this error is ENOTEMPTY, errno=93.

Disc quota exceeded

===================
The user’sdisk limit has been exceeded on a user filesystem, usually because a file was just created or enlarged beyond the limit. This
almost always refers to a magnetic disk, and not to an optical disc. Any data created after this condition occurs will be lost.

Philips Medical Systems. Confidential and Proprietary information. Refer to Title Page.
The user can delete files to bring disk usage under the limit, or the server administrator can use the edquota(1M) command to increase
the user’s disk limit. The symbolic name for this error is EDQUOT, errno=49.

dumptm: Cannot open ‘/dev/rmt/variable’: Device busy

====================================================
During filesystem backup, the dump program cannot open the tape drive because some other process is holding it open. Find the process
that has the tape drive open, and either kill(1) the process or wait for it to finish.

# ps –ef | grep /dev/rmt # kill –9 processID

DUP/BAD I=i OWNER=o MODE=m SIZE=s MTIME=t FILE=f REMOVE?
=========================================================
During phase 1, fsck(1M) found duplicate blocksor bad blocks associated with the file or directory specified after FILE= whose inode number
appears after I= (with other information).

To remove this file or directory, answer yes. If you end up removing more than a few files in this manner, data loss will result, so it might
be preferable to restore the filesystem from backup tapes.

N DUP I=N
=========
Upon detecting a block that is already claimed by another inode, fsck(1M) prints the duplicate block number and its containing inode (after
I=).

In fsck phases 2 and 4, you will decide whether or not to clear these bad blocks. Before committing to repairwith fsck, you could determine
which file contains this inode by passing the inode number to the ncheck(1M) command: # ncheck –iinum filesystem

error: DPS has not initialized or server connection failed

==========================================================
This message appears when trying to run AnswerBook with a generic X11 window server or on a generic X terminal.

Running AnswerBook requires Display PostScript (DPS), or a NeWS server, or the Adobe DPS NS remote display software. In addition,
a complete LaserWriterII Type–1 font set (including Palatino) should be installed on the X server. To find out if your X server has DPS, run
xdpyinfo(1) to verify the presence of an ”Adobe–DPS–Extension” line. X servers without this line don’t know about DPS.

Philips Medical Systems. Confidential and Proprietary information. Refer to Title Page.
ERROR: missing file arg (cm3)
=============================
An attempt was madd to run some sccs(1) operation that requires a filename, such as create, edit, delget, or prt.
Supply the appropriate filename after the SCCS operation.

ERROR [SCCS/s.variable]: ‘SCCS/p.variable’ nonexistent (ut4)

============================================================
An attempt was made to sccs edit or sccs get a file that is not yet under SCCS control. Run sccs create on that file to place it under SCCS
control.

ERROR [SCCS/s.variable]: writable ‘variable’ exists (ge4)

=========================================================
An attempt was made to sccs edit a file that is writable, probably because it is already checked out.
Run sccs info to see who has the file checked out. If it is you, go ahead and edit it. If it is somebody else, ask that personto check in the
file.

esp0: data transfer overrun

===========================
When a user tries to mount a CDROM on a third–party CD drive, mount(1M) fails with the above error, followed by the ”sr0: SCSI transport
failed” message. The CD drive probably comes from a vendor unknown to the system.

Third–party CD drives generally have an 8192 block size, as opposed to the 512 block size on supported Sun drives. Check with the vendor
to see if any special configuration is possible to allow the drive to operate on a Sun workstation.

Event not found

===============
This C shell message indicates that a user tried to repeat a command from the history list, but that command or number does not exist in
the list.

Run the C shell history command to display recent events in the history list. If a user often tries to run commands that have disappeared
from the history list, make the list longer by setting history to a higher value. For more information about the C shell, see csh(1).

Philips Medical Systems. Confidential and Proprietary information. Refer to Title Page.
EXCESSIVE BAD BLKSI=N CONTINUE?
==================================
During phase 1, fsck(1M) found more than 10 bad (out–of–range) blocks associated with the specified inode number. With this many bad
blocks, it might be preferable to restore the filesystem from backup tapes.

EXCESSIVE DUP BLKS I=N CONTINUE?

==================================
During phase 1, fsck(1M) found more than 10 duplicate (previously claimed) blocks associated with the specified inode number. With this
many duplicate blocks, it might be preferable to restore the filesystem from backup tapes.

Exec format error

=================
This often happens when trying to runsoftware compiled for different systems or architectures, such as when executing Solaris 2.x programs
on a SunOS 4.1.x system, or when trying to execute SPARC–specific programs on an x86 machine. On a Solaris 2.x system, it can also
occur if the BinaryCompatibility Package was not installed.

Make sure that the software matches the architecture and system you’re using. The file(1) command can help you determine the target
architecture. If you’re using SunOS 4.1.x softwareon a Solaris 2.x system, make sure that the Binary Compatibility Package is installed.
You can check for it using this command: $ pkginfo | grep SUNWbcp

A request was made to execute a file that, although it has the appropriate permissions, does not start with a valid format. The symbolic
name for this error is ENOEXEC, errno=8. See the a.out(4) man page for a description of executable files.
fd0: unformatted diskette or no diskette in the drive
=====================================================
This message appears on the system console to indicate that the floppy driver fd(7) could not read the label on a diskette. Usually this
is either because a new diskette has not yet been formatted, or a formatted diskette has become corrupted. This message often appears
along with ”read failed” and ”bad format” messages after volcheck(1) is run.

If you are certain that the diskette contains no data, run fdformat –d to format the diskette in DOS format. (You can also format a diskette
in UFS format if you like, although then it is not transportable to most other systems.) When the diskette is formatted, you can write on it,
if it was not corrupted beyond repair.

Philips Medical Systems. Confidential and Proprietary information. Refer to Title Page.
File exists
===========
The name of an existing file was mentioned in an inappropriate context. For example,it is not allowed to establish a link to an existing file,
or to overwrite an existing file when the csh(1) noclobber option is set.

Look at the names of files in the directory, then try again with a different name or after renaming or removing the existing file. The symbolic
name for this error is EEXIST, errno=17.

File locking deadlock

=====================
This is a programming problem, in some cases unavoidable. All a user can do is restart the program and hope deadlock does not reoccur.

Inthe file locking subsystem, two processes tried to modify some lock at the same time. In the multithreading subsystem, two threads
became deadlocked and could not continue. When a program using the threads library encounters this error, it should restart the
deadlocked threads. The symbolic name for this error is EDEADLOCK, errno=56.

filemgr: mknod: Permission denied

=================================
File Manager issues this message and fails to come up whenever the /tmp/.removable directory is owned by another user and is not 1777
mode. This can happen, for example, when multiple users share a workstation.

Have the original owner change the mode ((chmod(1)) of this file back to 1777, its default creation mode. Rebooting the workstation also
resolves this problem. This is a known problem that was fixed in Solaris 2.4.

File name too long

==================
The specified file name has too many characters. If a file name or path name component is too long, devise a
shorter name. If the totalpath name is longer than PATH_MAX characters, first change to an intermediate directory, then specify a shorter
path name. Newly–created data will be lost unless written to another file with a shorter name.
In a UFS or NFS–mounted UFS filesystem, the length of a path name component exceeds MAXNAMLEN (255) characters, or the total
length of the path name exceeds PATH_MAX (1024) characters. In a System V filesystem, the length of a path name component exceeds
NAME_MAX (14) characters while no–truncation mode is in effect. These values are defined in the /usr/include/limits.h(4) file. The symbolic
name for this error is ENAMETOOLONG, errno=78.

Philips Medical Systems. Confidential and Proprietary information. Refer to Title Page.
FILE SYSTEM STATE IN SUPERBLOCK IS WRONG; FIX?
==============================================
The fsck(1M) command has just checked a filesystem, and has determined that the filesystem is clean. The filesystem’s superblock,
however, still thinks the filesystem is ”dirty” in some way If you believe that the filesystem is adequately repaired, answer yes to mark the
filesystem as clean.

Different ”dirty” filesystem types are listed in /usr/include/sys/fs/ufs_fs.h, and include FSACTIVE, FSBAD, FSFIX,
FSLOG, and FSSUSPEND.

File table overflow

===================
The kernel file table is full because too many files are open on the system. Temporarily, no more files can be opened. New data created
under this condition will probably be lost.

Simply waiting often gives the system time to close files. However, if this message occurs often, reconfigure the kernel to allow more open
files. To increasethe size of the file table in Solaris 2.x, increase the value of maxusers in the /etc/system file. The default maxusers value
is the amount of main memory in MB, minus 2. The symbolic name for this error is ENFILE, errno=23.

File too large

==============
The file size exceeded the limit specified by ulimit(1), or the file size exceeds the maximum supported by the file system. New data created
under this condition will probably be lost.

In the C shell, use the limit command to see or set the default file size. In the Bourne or Korn shells, use the ulimit –a command. Even when
the shells claim that the file size is unlimited, in fact the system limit is FCHR_MAX (usually 1 gigabyte). The symbolic name for this error
is EFBIG, errno=27.

FREE BLK COUNT(S) WRONG IN SUPERBLK SALVAGE?

=============================================
During phase 5, fsck(1M) detected that the actual number of free blocks in the filesystem did not match the superblock’s free block count.The
df(1M) command accesses this free block count when measuring filesystem capacity. Generally you can answer yes to this question without
harming the filesystem.

Philips Medical Systems. Confidential and Proprietary information. Refer to Title Page.
fsck: Can’t open /dev/dsk/variable
==================================
The fsck(1M) command cannot open the disk device, because although a similar filesystem exists, the partition specified does not.
Run the mount(1M) or the format(1M) command to see what filesystems are configured on the machine. Then run fsck again on an existing
partition.

fsck: Can’t stat /dev/dsk/variable

==================================
The fsck(1M) command cannot open the disk device, because the specified filesystem does not exist. Run the mount(1M) or the format(1M)
command to see what filesystems are configured on the machine. Then run fsck again on an existing filesystem.

giving up
=========
This message appears in the SCSI log to indicate that a read or write operation has been retried until it timed out. With SCSI disk the timeout
period is usually 30 seconds; with tape the period is usually 20 attempts. Timeout periods are generally coded into the drivers.

Check that all SCSI devices are connected and powered on. Make sure that SCSI target numbers are correct and not in conflict. Verify all
cables are no longer than six meters, total, and that all SCSI connections are properly terminated. The scsi_log(9F) routine usually displays
messages on the system console and in the /var/adm/messages file. Run the dmesg(1M) command to see the most recent message buffer.

Graphics Adapterdevice /dev/fb is of unknown type

==================================================
The /dev/fb driver is either missing or corrupted. See ”InitOutput: Error loading module for /dev/fb” for details.

group.org_dir: NIS+ servers unreachable

=======================================
This is the second of three messages that an NIS+ client prints when it cannot locate an NIS+ server on the network. See the message
”hosts.org_dir: NIS+ servers unreachable” for details.

/home/variable: No such file ordirectory

=========================================
An attempt was made to change to a user’s home directory, but either that user does not exist or the user’s fileserver has not shared
(exported) that filesystem.

Philips Medical Systems. Confidential and Proprietary information. Refer to Title Page.
To check on the existence of a particular user, run the ypmatch(1) or nismatch(1) command, specifying the user name and then the passwd
map.

To export filesystems from the remote fileserver, become superuser on that system and run the share(1M) command with the appropriate
options. If that system is sharing (exporting) filesystems for the first time, also invoke
/etc/init.d/nfs.server start to begin NFS service.

Host is down
============
A transport connection failed because the destination host was down. For example, mail delivery was attempted over several days, but
the destination machine was not available during any of these attempts.

Report this error to the system administrator for the host. If you are the person responsible for this system, check to see if the machine needs
repair or rebooting. This error results from status information delivered by the underlying communication interface. If there is no known
connection to the host, a different message usually results. See ”No route to host” for details. The symbolic name for this error is
EHOSTDOWN, errno=147.

host name configuration error

=============================
This is an old sendmail message, which replaced ”I refuse to talk tomyself” and is now replaced by the ”Local configuration error” message.
See the message ”554 variable... Local configuration error” for details.

hosts.org_dir: NIS+ servers unreachable

=======================================
This is the third of three messages that an NIS+ client prints when it cannot locate an NIS+ server on the network.

If other NIS+ clients are behaving normally, check the Ethernet cabling on the workstation showing this message. On SPARC machines,
disconnected network cablingalso produces a series of ”no carrier” messages. On x86 machines, the NIS+ messages might be your only
indication that network cabling is disconnected.

If many NIS+ clients on the network are giving this message, go to the NIS+ server in question and reboot or repair it, as necessary. When
the server machine is back in operation, NIS+ clients will give an ”NIS server for domain OK” message.

Philips Medical Systems. Confidential and Proprietary information. Refer to Title Page.
I can’t read your attachments. What mailer are you using?
=========================================================
The SunView mailtool andpre–3.3 OpenWindows mailtool produce this message when they cannot cope with an attachment. The
attachment is probably in MIME (Multipurpose Internet Mail Extensions) format, using base64 encoding.

To read a mail message containing MIME attachments, use mailtool(1) from Solaris 2.3 or later. If you are running an earlier version of
Solaris, rlogin(1) to a later version of Solaris, set the DISPLAY environment variable back to the first system, and run mailtool remotely. If
those options prove impossible, ask the originator to send the message again using mailtool, or using the CDE dtmail compose
File–>SendAs–>SunMailTool option.

Standard MIME attachments with base64 encoding, for example, produce this message and fail to display in older mailtools. Look into
using metamail, available on the Internet, which allows you to send and receive MIME attachments.

ie0: Ethernet jammed

====================
This message can appear on SPARCservers or x86 machines with an Intel 82586 Ethernet chip. It indicates that 16 successive transmission
attempts failed, causing the driver to give up on the current packet.

If this error occurs sporadically or at busy times, it probably means that the network is saturated. Wait for network traffic to clear. If bottlenecks
arise frequently, think about reconfiguring the network or adding subnets.

Another possible cause of this message is a noise source somewhere in the network, such as a loose transceiver connection. Use
snoop(1M)or a similar program to isolate the problem area, then check and tighten network connectors as necessary.

ie0: no carrier
===============
This message can appear on SPARCservers or x86 machines with an Intel 82586 Ethernet chip. It indicates that thechip has lost input to
its carrierdetect pin while trying to transmit a packet, causing the packet to be dropped.

Check that the Ethernet connector is not loose or disconnected. Other possible causes include an open circuit somewhere in the network
and noise on the carrier detect linefrom the transceiver. Use snoop(1M) or a similar program to isolate the problem area, then check the
network connectors and transceivers, as needed.

Philips Medical Systems. Confidential and Proprietary information. Refer to Title Page.
Illegal Instruction
===================
A process has received a signal indicating that it attempted to execute an instruction that is not allowed by the kernel. This usually results
from running programs compiled for a slightly different machine architecture. This message is usually accompanied by a core dump,
excepton read–only filesystems.

If you are booting from CDROM or from the net, check README files to make sure you are using an image appropriate for your machine
architecture. Run df to make sure there is enough swap space on the system; too little swap space can cause this error. If you recently
upgraded your CPU to a new architecture, replace your operating system with one that supports the new architecture (an operating system
upgrade might be required). Sometimes this condition results from programming error, such as when a program attempts to execute data
as instructions. This condition can also indicate device file corruption on your system.

Illegal instruction ”0xN” was encountered at PC 0xN

===================================================
The machine is trying to boot from a non–boot device, or from a boot device for a different hardware architecture.

If you are booting from the net, check README files to make sure you are using a boot image for that architecture. If you are booting from
disk, make sure the system is looking at the right disk, which is usually SCSI target 3. Failing these solutions, connect a CD drive to the
system and boot from CDROM.

Illegal seek
============
Using a pipe (”|”) on the command line doesn’t work here. Rather than using a pipe on the command line, redirect the output of the first
program into a file and then run the second program on that file.

A call to lseek(2) was issued to a pipe. This error condition can also be fixed by altering the program to avoid using lseek(). The symbolic
name for this error is ESPIPE, errno=29.

Image Tool: Unable to open XIL Library.

=======================================
This message follows multiple multi–line ”XilDefaultErrorFunc” errors, indicating that ImageTool could not locate the X Imaging Library.
Many OpenWindows and CDE deskset programs require XIL. Run pkginfo(1) to determine what packages are installed on the system.
If the following packages are not present, install them from CDROM or over thenet: SUNWxildg, SUNWxiler, SUNWxilow, and SUNWxilrt.

Philips Medical Systems. Confidential and Proprietary information. Refer to Title Page.
Inappropriate ioctl for device
==============================
This is a programming error.

Ask the program’s author to fix this condition. The program needs to be changed so it employs a device driver that can accept special
character device controls.

The ioctl() system call was given as an argument for a file that is not a special character device. This message replaces the traditional but
puzzling ”Not a typewriter” message. The symbolic name for this error is ENOTTY, errno=25.

INCORRECT BLOCK COUNT I=N (should be N) CORRECT?

=================================================
During phase 1, fsck(1M) determined that the specified inode pointed to a number of bad or duplicate blocks, sothe block count should be
corrected to the actual number shown. Generally you can answer yes to this question without harming the filesystem.

inetd[N]: execv /usr/sbin/in.uucpd: No such file or directory

=============================================================
This message indicates that the Internet services daemon inetd(1M) tried to start up the UUCP service without the UUCP daemon existing
on the system.

The SUNWbnuu package must be installed before the machine can run UUCP. Run pkgadd(1M) to install this package from the distribution
CDROM or over the network.

inetd[N]: variable/tcp: unknown service

=======================================
This message indicates that the Internet services daemon inetd(1M) could not locate the TCP service specified after the first colon.

Check the current machine’s /etc/services file, and the NIS services map, to see if the service is described. To start this service, add an
appropriate entry into the /etc/services file and possibly the services map as well. Note that NIS+ does not consult the local /etc/services
file unless you put ”files” right after ”nisplus” on the services line of the system’s /etc/nsswitch.conf file.

If you do not want to start this service, edit the system’s /etc/inetd.conf file and delete the entry that tries to start it up.

Philips Medical Systems. Confidential and Proprietary information. Refer to Title Page.
inetd[N]: variable/udp:unknown service
=======================================
This message indicates that the Internet services daemon inetd(1M) could not locate the UDP service specified after the first colon. See
the message ”inetd[N]: variable/tcp: unknown service” for a solution.

inetd: Too many open files

==========================
This message can appear when someone runs a command from the shell or uses a third–party application. The sar(1M) command does
not indicate that the system–wide open file limit has been exceeded.

The probable cause for this is that the shell limit has been exceeded. The default open file limit is 64, but can be raised to 256. See the
message ”Too many open files” for a solution.

INIT: Cannot create /var/adm/utmp or /var/adm/utmpx

===================================================
This console message indicates that init(1M) cannot write in the /var directory, which is usually part of the / (root) filesystem. Some other
messages follow, andthe system usually comes up single–user. The problem is often that / or /var is mounted read–only. Sometimes a brief
power outage leaves the system believing that many filesystems are still mounted.

If /var is a separate filesystem on the machine, andis not yet not mounted, mount it now. If the filesystem containing /var is mounted
read–only, remount it read–write with a command similar to this:

# mount –o rw,remount /

Then type Control–d and try to bring up the system multi–user. If that fails, the root filesystem is probably corrupted. Run fsck(1M) on the
root filesystem, halt the machine, power cycle the CPU, and wait for the system to reboot. Should this problem still occur, restore the root
filesystem from backup tapes, or re–install the system from net or CDROM to replace the root filesystem.

InitOutput: Error loading module for /dev/fb

============================================
This fatal X server error message indicates that /dev/fb, the ”dumb frame buffer,” is either missing or corrupted. It is usually followed by
a ”giving up” message and a few xinit errors. If other devices on the system are working correctly, the most
likely reason for this error is that the SUNWdfb package was removed or never installed. Insert the installation CD–ROM, change to the

Philips Medical Systems. Confidential and Proprietary information. Refer to Title Page.
Solaris_2.xdirectory, and run the following command to install the packages SUNWdfbh and SUNWdfb (for your machine architecture):

pkgadd –d .

If other devices on the system are not working correctly, the system might havea corrupt /devices directory. Halt the system and boot using
the –r (reconfigure) option. The system will run fsck(1M) if the /devices filesystem is corrupted, most likely fixing the problem.

Interrupted system call

=======================
The user issued an interrupt signal (usually Control–c) while the system was in the middle of executing a system call. When network
service is slow, interrupting cd(1) to a remote–mounted directory can produce this message. Proceed with your work, this message is purely
informational.

An asynchronoussignal (such as interrupt or quit), which a program was set up to catch, occurred during an internal system call. If execution
is resumed after processing the signal, it will appear as if the interrupted programming function returned this error condition, so the program
might exit with an incorrect error message. The symbolic name for this error is EINTR, errno=4.

Invalid argument
================
An invalid parameter was specified that the system cannot interpret. For example, trying to mount an uncreated filesystem, printing without
sufficient system support, or providing an undefined signal to a signal(3c) library function, can all produce this message.

If you see this message when you are trying to mount a filesystem, make sure that you have run newfs(1M) to create the filesystem. If you
see this message when you are trying to read a diskette, make sure that the diskette was properly formatted with fdformat(1), either in DOS
format (pcfs) or as a UFS filesystem. If you see this message while you are trying to print, make sure that the print service is configured
correctly.

The symbolic name for this error is EINVAL, errno=22.

Invalid null command

====================
This C shell message results from a command line with two pipes (|)in a row or from a pipe without a command afterwards. Change the
command line so that each pipe is followed by a command.

Philips Medical Systems. Confidential and Proprietary information. Refer to Title Page.
I/O error
=========
Some physical Input/Output error has occurred. If the process was writing a file, data corruption is possible. First find out which device
is experiencing the I/O error. If the device is a tape drive, make sure a tape is inserted into the drive. When this error occurs with a tape
in the drive, it is likely that the tape contains an unrecoverable bad spot.

If the device is a floppy drive, an unformatted or defective diskette could be at fault. Format the diskette, or obtain a replacement. If the
device is a hard disk drive, you might need to run fsck(1M) and possibly even reformat the disk. In some cases this error might occur on
a call following the one to which it actually applies. The symbolic name for this error is EIO, errno=5.

Is a directory
==============
An attempt was made to read or write a directory as if it were a file.

Look at a listing of all the files in the current directory and try again, specifying a file instead of a directory. The symbolic name for this error
is EISDIR, errno=21.

kernel read error

=================
This message appears when savecore(1M), if activated, tries to copy a debugging image of kernel memory to disk but cannot read various
kernel data structures correctly. Generally this occurs after a system panic has corrupted main memory. Data corruption on the systemis
possible.

Look at the kernel error messages that preceded this one to try to determine the cause of the problem. Error messages such as ”BAD TRAP”
usually indicate faulty hardware. Until the problem that caused the kernel panic is resolved, a kernel core image cannot be saved for
debugging.

Killed
======
This message is purely informational. If the killed process was writing a file, some data might be lost. Continue with your work.

This message from the signal handler or various shells indicates hat a process has been terminated with a SIGKILL. However, if you don’t
see this message and cannot terminate a process with a IGKILL, you might have to reboot the machine to get rid of that process.

Philips Medical Systems. Confidential and Proprietary information. Refer to Title Page.
kmem_free block already free
============================
This is a programming error,probably from a device driver.

Determine which driver is giving this message and contact the vendor for a software update, as this message indicates a bug in
the driver.

This message is from the DDI programming function kmem_free(9F), which releases a block of memory at address addr of size siz that
was previously allocated by the DDI function kmem_alloc(9F). Both addr and siz must correspond to the original allocation. If you have
source code for the driver, follow kmem_alloc() and kmem_free() in the code to make sure they allocate and free the same chunk of memory.

last message repeated N times

=============================
This message comes from syslog(1M), the facility that prints messages on the console and records them in /var/adm/messages. To reduce
the log size and minimize buffer usage, syslog collapses any identical messages it sees during a 20 second period, then prints this message
with the number of repetitions.

Look above this message to see which message was repeated so often. Then consider the repeated message and take action
accordingly. If repeated log entries such as ”su ... failed” appear, consider the possibility of a security breach.

ld.so.1: variable: fatal: relocation error: symbol not found: variable

======================================================================
This message from the run–time linker ld.so.1 indicates that in trying to execute the application given after the first colon, the specified
symbol could not be found for relocation. The message goes on to say in what file the symbol was referenced. Since this is a fatal error,
the application terminates with this message.

Run the ldd –d command on the application to show its shared object dependencies and symbols that aren’t found. Probably your system
contains an old version of the shared object that should contain this symbol. Contact the library vendor or author for an update.

This error does not necessarily occur when you first bring up an application. It could take months to develop, if ordinary use of the application
seldom references the undefined symbol.

Philips Medical Systems. Confidential and Proprietary information. Refer to Title Page.
ld.so.1: variable: fatal: variable: can’t open file: errno=2
==============================================
This message indicates that the run–time linker, ld.so.1, while running the program specified after the first colon, could not find the shared
object specified after the third colon. (A shared object is sometimes called a dynamically linked library.) Error number 2 translates to ”No
such file or directory” (ENOENT).

As a workaround, set the environment variable LD_LIBRARY_PATH to include the location of the shared object in question, for example:
/usr/dt/lib:/usr/openwin/lib. Better yet, if you have accessto source code, recompile the program using the –Rpath loader option. Using
LD_LIBRARY_PATH is discouraged because it slows down performance.

le0: Memory error!

==================
This message indicates that the network interface encountered an access time–out from the CPU’s main memory. There is probably nothing
wrong except system overload.

If the system is busy with other processes, this error can occur frequently. If possible, try to reduce the system load by quitting applications
or killing some processes.

The Lance Ethernet chip timed out while trying to acquire the bus for a DVMA transfer. Most network applications wait for a transfer to occur,
so generally no data gets lost. However, data transfer might fail after too many time–outs.

le0: No carrier–– cable disconnected or hub link test disabled?

===============================================================
Standalone machines with no Ethernet port connection get this error when the system triesto access the network. If the Ethernet cable is
disconnected, SPARC machines with the sun4m architecture usually display this message, whereas machines with the sun4c architecture
usually display the ”le0: No carrier––transceiver cable problem” message instead. If the Ethernet cable is connected, this message could
result from a mismatch between the machine’s NVRAM settings and the Ethernet hub settings.

If this message is continuous, try to save any workto local disk. When a machine is configured as a networked system, it must be
plugged into the Ethernet with a twisted pair J45 connector. If the Ethernet cable is plugged in, find out whether or not the
Ethernet hub does a Link Integrity Test. Then become superuser to check and possibly set the machine’s NVRAM. If the hub’s Link Integrity
Test is disabled, set this variable to false. # eeprom | grep tpe tpe–link–test?=true # eeprom ’tpe–link–test?=false’

Philips Medical Systems. Confidential and Proprietary information. Refer to Title Page.
The default setting is true. If for some reason tpe–link–test? was set to false,and the hub’s Link Integrity Test is enabled,
set this variable to true.

le0: No carrier–– transceiver cable problem?

============================================
Standalone machines with no Ethernet port connection get this error when the system tries to access the network. If this message is
continuous, try to save any work to local disk. When a machine is configured as a networked system, it must be plugged into the Ethernet
with either a twisted pair J45
connector or thicknet 10Base–T connector (depending on the building’s Ethernet cable type).

Older workstations have a thicknet connection on the back instead of a twisted pair Ethernet connection, so they require a thicknet
to twisted pair transceiver to translate between cabling types.

LINK COUNT FILE I=i OWNER=o MODE=m SIZE=s MTIME=t COUNT... ADJUST?
===================================================================
During phase 4, fsck(1M) determined that the inode’s link count for the specified file is wrong, and asks if you want to adjust it to the value
given. Generally you can answer yes to this question without harming the filesystem.

LL105W: Protocol error detected.

================================
This error message comes from Lifeline Mail, an unbundled PC compatibility application. The likeliest cause for this problem is that
someone set up a user account without a password. Assign the user a password to
solve this problem.

ln: cannot create /dev/fb: Read–only file system

================================================
During device reconfiguration at boot time, the system cannot link to the frame buffer because /dev is on a read–only filesystem. Check
that /dev/fb is a symbolic link to the hardware frame buffer, such as cgsix or tcx. Ensure that the filesystem containing /dev is mounted
read–write.

lockd[N]: create_client: no name forinet address 0xN

=====================================================
This lock daemon message usually indicates that the NIS hosts.byname and hosts.byaddr maps are not coordinated. Wait a short time

Philips Medical Systems. Confidential and Proprietary information. Refer to Title Page.
for the maps to synchronize. If they don’t, takesteps to coordinate them.

Login incorrect
===============
This message from the login(1) program indicates an incorrect combination of login name and password. There is no way to tell whether
what’s wrong is the login name, the password, or both. Other programs such as ftp(1), rexecd(1M), sulogin(1M), and uucp(1C) alsogive
this error under similar conditions.

Check the /etc/passwd file and the NIS or NIS+ passwd map on the local system to see if an entry exists for this user. If a user has simply
forgotten the password, su and set a new one with the passwd usernamecommand. This command automatically updates the NIS+ passwd
map, but with NIS you’ll need to coordinate the update with the passwd map.

The ”Login incorrect” problem can also occur with older versions of NIS when the user name has more than eight characters. If this is the
case, edit the NIS password file, change the user name to have eight or fewer characters, and then remake the NIS passwd map.

If you cannot log in to the system as root, despite knowing the proper password, it is possible that the /etc/passwd file is corrupted. Try to
log in as a regular user and su to root If that doesn’t work, see the message ”su: No shell” and follow most of the instructions given there.
Instead of changing the default shell however, make the password field blank in /etc/shadow.

lp hang
=======
On a print server, the queue continues to grow but nothing comes out of the printer. The printer daemon is hung. Here is a simple procedure
for flushing a hung printing queue:
1. Login or switch user to root.
2. Issue the reject printername command to make sure no one sends any job to the printer.
3. Turn off power to the printer.
4. If the active job appears to be causing the hang, remove it from the print queue with the cancel jobnumber command, and ask the owner
to requeue that print job.
5. Shut down the print queue with the /usr/lib/lpshut command.
6. Remove the lock file /var/spool/lp/SCHEDLOCK and the temporary files /var/spool/lp/tmp/*/*.
7. Turn the printer back on.
8. Restart the print queue with the /usr/lib/lpsched command.

Philips Medical Systems. Confidential and Proprietary information. Refer to Title Page.
mailtool: Can’t create dead letter: Permission denied
=====================================================
An attempt was made to send a message with mailtool(1) from a directory where the user does not have write permission, and the
user’s home directory is currently unavailable. Change to another directory and start mailtool again, or use chmod(1) to change permissions
for the directory (if possible).

mailtool: Could not initialize the Classing Engine

==================================================
When a user runs mailtool(1) on a remote machine, setting the DISPLAY environment back to the local machine, this message might appear
inside a dialog box window. The dialog box goes on to say that the Classing Engine must be installed to use Attachments. This problem
occurs because rlogin(1) does not propagate the user’s environment.

Exit mailtool and set your OPENWINHOME environment variable to /usr/openwin. Then run mailtool again. The error message will
not appear, and you will be able to use Attachments. Classing Engine is a new name for Tool Talk. Earlier versions of
mailtool said ”Tool Talk: TT_ERR_NOMP” instead of Classing Engine.

Mail Tool is confused about the state of your Mail File.

========================================================
This message appears in a pop–up dialog box whenever you ask mailtool(1) to access messages after another mail reader has modified
your inbox. A request follows: ”Please Quit this Mail Tool.”

Click ”Continue” to close the dialog box, then exit mailtool. If you continue trying to read mail, messages deleted by the other mail reader
will never appear, and mailtool will fail to see any new messages.

mail: Your mailfile was found to be corrupted (Content–length mismatch).

=======================================================================
This message comes from mail(1) or mailx(1) whenever it detects messages with a different content length than advertised. The mail
program tells you which message might be truncated or might have another message concatenated to it.

Two common causes of content length mismatches are the simultaneous use of different mail readers (such as mail and mailtool), or using
a mail reading program (or an editor) that does not update the Content–Length field after altering a message. The mailx program can usually
recover from this error and delineate mail message boundaries correctly. Pay close attention to the message that might be truncated or
combined with another message, and to all messages after that one. If a mail file becomes hopelessly corrupted, run it through a text editor

Philips Medical Systems. Confidential and Proprietary information. Refer to Title Page.
to eliminate all Content–Length lines, and ensure that each message has a From (no colon) line for each message, preceded by a blank
line. To avoid mailfile corruption, exit from mailtool without saving changes when you are currently running mail or mailx.

Memory address alignment

========================
This message can occur when printing large files on a SPARCprinter attached to a SPARCstation 2 Replace the SPARCstation 2 CPU with
one that isat the most recent dash level.

memory leaks
============
An application uses up more and more memory, until all swap space is exhausted.

Many developers have found that third party software (such as Purify) can help identify memory leaks in their applications. If you suspect
that you have a memory leak, you can use sar(1) to check on the Kernel Memory Allocation (KMA). Any driver or module that uses KMA
resources, but does not specifically return the resources before it exits, can create a memory leak.

mount: /dev/dsk/variable is already mounted, /variable is busy, or...

=====================================================================
While trying to mount a filesystem, the mount(1M) command received a ”Device busy” (EBUSY) error code.There are several possible
reasons: this /dev/dsk filesystem is already mounted on a different directory, the busy path name is the working directory of an active
process, or the system has exceeded its maximum number of mount points (unlikely).

Run /etc/mount to see if the filesystem is already mounted. If not, check to see if any shells are active in the busy directory (did the user
cd into the directory?), or if any processes in the ps(1) listing are active in that directory. If the reason for the error message isn’t obvious,
try using a different directory for the mount point.

mount: giving up on: /variable

==============================
An existing server did not respond to an NFS mount request, so after retrying a number of times (default1000), the mount(1M)
command has given up. Nonexistent servers or bad mount points produce different messages.

If the ”RPC: Program not registered” message precedes this one, the requested mount serverprobably did not share (export) any
filesystems, so it has no NFS daemons running. Have the superuser on the mount server share(1M) the filesystem, then run

Philips Medical Systems. Confidential and Proprietary information. Refer to Title Page.
/etc/init.d/nfs.server start to begin NFS service. f the requested mount server is down or slow to respond, check to see whether the machine
needs repair or rebooting.

mount: mount–point /variable does not exist.

============================================
Someone tried to mount a filesystem onto the specified directory, but there is no suchdirectory. If this is the directory name you want,run
mkdir(1) to create this directory as a mount point.

mount: the state of /dev/dsk/variable is not okay

=================================================
The system was unable to mount the filesystem that was specified because the super–block indicates that the filesystem might be
corrupted. This is not an impediment for read–only mounts.

If you don’t need to write on this filesystem, mount(1M) it using the –o ro option. Otherwise, do as one of the message continuation lines
suggests and run fsck(1M) to correct the filesystem state and update the super–block.

/net/variable: No such file or directory

========================================
A user tried to change directory (for example with cd) to a network partition on the system specified after /net/, but this host either does
not exist or has not shared (exported) any filesystem. To gain access to files on this system, try rlogin(1).

To export filesystems from the remote system, become superuser on hat system and run the share(1M) command with the appropriate
options. If that system is sharing filesystems for the first time, also run /etc/init.d/nfs.server start to begin NFS service.

Network is down
===============
A transport connection failed because it encountered a dead network.

Report this error to the system administrator for the network. If you are the person responsible for this network, check to see why the network
is dead and what repairs are necessary. This error results from status information delivered by the underlying communication interface.
The symbolic name for this error is ENETDOWN, errno=127.

Philips Medical Systems. Confidential and Proprietary information. Refer to Title Page.
Network is unreachable
======================
An operational error occurred either because there was no route to the network or because negative status information was returned by
intermediate gateways or switching nodes.

The returned status is not always sufficient to distinguish between a network that is down and a host that is down. See the ”No route to host”
message. Check the network routers and switches to see if they are disallowing these packet transfers. If they areallowing all packet
transfers, check network cablingand connections. The symbolic name for this error is ENETUNREACH, errno=128.

NFS getattr failed for server variable: RPC: Timed out

======================================================
This message appears on an NFS client that requested a service from an NFS server whose hardware is failing. Often the message ”NFS
read failed” appears along with this message. If the server were merely down or slow to respond, the ”NFS server not responding” message
would appear instead. Data corruption on the server system is possible. Because this message usually indicates server hardware failure,
initiate repair procedures as soon as possible. Check the memory modules, disk controllers, and CPU board.

nfs mount: Couldn’t bind to reserved port

=========================================
This message appears when a client attempts to NFS mount a filesystem from a server that has more than one Ethernet interface configured
on the same physical subnet. Always connect multiple Ethernet interfaces on one router system to different physical subnetworks.

nfs mount: mount: variable: Device busy

=======================================
This message appears when the superuser attempts to NFS mount on top of an active directory. The busy device is actually the working
directory of a process. Determine which shell on the workstation is currently located below the mount point, and change out of that directory.
Be wary of subshells (such as su shells) that could be in different working directories while the parents remain below the mount point.

NFS mount: /variable mounted OK

===============================
While booting, the system failed to mount the directory specified after the first colon, probably because the NFS server involved was down
or slow to respond. The mount ran in the background and successfully contacted the NFS server. This is a purely informative message
to let you know that the mount process has completed.

Philips Medical Systems. Confidential and Proprietary information. Refer to Title Page.
NFS read failed for server variable
===================================
This is generally a permissions problem. Perhaps a directory or file permission was changed while the client held the file open. Perhaps
the filesystem’s share or netgroup permissions changed. If the server were down or the network saturated, the ”NFS server not responding”
message would appear instead.

Log in to the NFS server and check the permissions of directories leading to the file. Make certain that the filesystem is shared with (exported
to) the client experiencing an NFS read failure.

nfs_server: bad getargs for N/N

===============================
This message comes from the NFS server when it gets a request with unrecognized or incorrect arguments. Typically, it means the request
could not be XDR decoded properly. This can result from corruption of the packet over the network, or from an implementation bug causing
the NFS client to improperly encode its arguments.

If this message originates from a single client, investigate that machine for NFS client software bugs. If this message appears all over a
network, especially accompanied by other networking errors, investigate the network cabling and connectors.

NFS server variable not responding still trying

===============================================
In mostcases this very common message indicates that the system has requested a service from an NFS server that is either down or
extremely slow to respond. In some cases this message indicates that the network link to this NFS server is broken, although usually that
condition generates other error messages as well. In a few cases this message indicates NFS client set–up problems.

Check the non–responding NFS server to see whether the machine needs repair or rebooting. Encourage your user community to
report such problems quickly but only once. Should this message appear when booting a diskless client, make sure that the client’s
/etc/hosts file and the network naming service (NIS, NIS+, or other /etc/hosts files on the network) have been updated.

NFS server variable ok

======================
This message is the follow–up to the ”NFS server not responding” error. It indicates that the NFS server is back in operation. When an
NFS server first comes up, it will be busy fulfilling client requests for a while. Be patient and wait for your client system to respond. Making
many extraneous requests only further slows the NFS server response time.

Philips Medical Systems. Confidential and Proprietary information. Refer to Title Page.
nfs umount:variable: is busy
=============================
This message appears when the superuser attempts to unmount an active NFS filesystem. The busy point is the working directory of
a process.

Determine which shell (or process) on the workstation is currently located in the remotely mounted filesystem, and change (cd) out of that
directory. Be wary of subshells (such as su shells) that could be in different directories while the parent shells remain in the NFS filesystem.

NFS write error on host variable: No space left on device.

==========================================================
This console message indicates that an NFS–mounted partition has filled up and cannot accept writing of new data. Unfortunately, software
that attempts to overwriteexisting files will usually zero out all data in these files. This is particularly destructive on NFS–mounted /home
partitions.

Find the user or process that is filling up the filesystem, and get the out–of–control process stopped as soon as you can. Then delete files
as necessary to create more space on the filesystem (large core files are good candidates for deletion). Have users write any modified files
to local disk if possible. If this error occurs often, redistribute directories to ease demandon this partition.

NFS write failed for server variable: RPC: Timed out

====================================================
This error can occur when a file system is soft–mounted, and server or network response time lags. Any data written to the server during
this period could be corrupted.

If you intend to write on a filesystem, never specify the soft mount option. Use the default hard mount for all the filesystems that are mounted
read–write.

NIS+ authentication failure

===========================
This is a Federated Naming Service message. The operation could not be completed because the principal making the request could not
be authenticated with the name service involved.

Run the nisdefaults(1) command to verify that you are identified as the correct NIS+ principal. Also check that the system has specified
the correct public key source.

Philips Medical Systems. Confidential and Proprietary information. Refer to Title Page.
No buffer space available
=========================
An operation on a transport endpoint or pipe was not performed because the system lacked sufficient buffer space or because a queue
was full. The target system probably ran out of memory or swap space. Any data written during this condition will probably be lost.

To add more swap area, use the swap –a command on the target system. Alternatively, reconfigure the target system to have more swap
space. As a general rule, wwap space should be two to three times as large as physical memory. The symbolic name for this error is
ENOBUFS,errno=132.

No child processes
==================
This message can appear when an application tries to communicate with cooperating process that do not exist.

Restart the parent process so it can create the child processes again. If that doesn’t help, this could be the result of programming error;
contact the vendor or author of the program for an update. A wait(2) system call was executed by a process that had no existing or
unwaited–for child processes. The child process escould have exited prematurely, or might never have been created.

The symbolic name for this error is ECHILD, errno=10.

No default media available

==========================
The volume manager issues this message if a user makes an eject(1) request when the drives containno diskette or CDROM to eject.
Insert a diskette or CDROM. If the volume manager is confused and there actually is a diskette or CDROM in a drive, run volcheck to update
the volume manager. If the system remains confused, try booting with the –r option to reconfigure devices.

No directory! Logging in with home=/

====================================
The login(1) program could not find the home directory listed in the password file or NIS passwd map, so it deposited the user in the root
directory.

Check that the user’s home directory is mounted and is owned by and accessible to that user. Perhaps the automounter tried to mount the
home directory, but the NFS server did not respond quicklyenough. Try listing the files in /home/username. If the NFS server responds to
this request, have the user log out and log in again.

Philips Medical Systems. Confidential and Proprietary information. Refer to Title Page.
It is possible that the automounter daemon is not running. Run the ps command to see if automountd is present. If not,run the second
command; if it appears to be wedged, run both these commands: # /etc/init.d/autofs stop # /etc/init.d/autofs start. When the automounter
daemon is running, verify that the /etc/auto_master file has a line like this: /home auto_home

Verify that the /etc/auto_home file has a line like this: +auto_home These entries depend on the NIS auto_home map. It is also possible
that the NFS server has not shared (exported) this /home directory, or that the NFS daemons on the server have disappeared.

No message of desired type

==========================
An attempt was made to receive a message of a type that does not exist on the specified message queue. See the msgop(2) man page
for details.

This indicates an error in the System V IPC message facility. Generally the message queue is empty or devoid of the desired message
type, while IPC_NOWAIT is set. The symbolic name for this error is ENOMSG, errno=35.

No recipients specified
=======================
This message comes from the mailx(1) command whenever a user doesn’t provide an address in the To: field. See the message ”Recipient
names must be specified” for details.

No record locks available

=========================
No more record locks are available. The system lock table is full. The symbolic name for this error is ENOLCK, errno=46.

Perhaps a process called fcntl(2) with the F_SETLK or F_SETLKW option, and the system maximum was exceeded. The system contains
several different locking subsystems, including fcntl,the NFS lock daemon, and mail locking, all of which can produce this
error. Try again later, when more locks might be available.

No route to host
================
An operational error occurred because there was no route to the destination host, or because of status information returned by intermediate
gateways or switching nodes. The returned status is not always sufficient to distinguish between a host that is down and a network that
isdown. See the ”Network is unreachable” message.

Philips Medical Systems. Confidential and Proprietary information. Refer to Title Page.
Check the network routers and switches to see if they are disallowing these packet transfers. If they are allowing all packet transfers, check
network cabling and connections. The symbolic name for thiserror is EHOSTUNREACH, errno=148.

No shell Connection closed

===========================
A user has attempted to remote login to the system, and has a valid account name and password, but the shell specified for their account
is not available on that system. For example, the seventh field could request the GNUBourne–again shell /bin/bash, which does not exist
on standard Solaris distributions. If you have a copy of the requested shell, become superuser and install the missing shell on that system.
Otherwise, change the user’s password file entry (perhaps only in the NIS+ or NIS passwd map) to specify an available shell such as /bin/csh
or /bin/ksh.

No space left on device

=======================
While writing an ordinary file or creating a directory entry, there was no free space left on the device. The disk, tape, or diskette is full of
data. Any data written to that device during this condition will be lost.

Remove unneeded files from the hard disk or diskette until there is space for all the data you are writing. It might be advisable to move some
directories onto another filesystem and create symbolic links accordingly. When a tape is full, continue on another one, use a higher density
setting, or obtain a higher–capacity tape. To create multi–volume tapes or diskettes, use the pax(1) or cpio(1) command; tar(1) is still limited
to a single volume. The symbolic name for this error is ENOSPC, errno=28.

No such device
==============
An attempt was made to apply an operation to an inappropriate device, such as writing to a nonexistent device. Look in the /devices directory
to see why this device does not exist, or why the program expects it to exist. The similar ”No such device or address” message tends to
indicate I/O problems with an existing device, whereas this message tends to indicate a device that does not exist at all. The symbolic name
for this error is ENODEV, errno=19.

No such device or address

=========================
This can occur when a tape drive is off–line or when a device has been powered off or removed from thesystem. For tape drives, make
sure the device is connected, powered on, and toggled on–line (if applicable). For disk and CDROM drives, check that the device is
connected and powered on.

Philips Medical Systems. Confidential and Proprietary information. Refer to Title Page.
With all SCSI devices, ensure that the target switch or dial is set to the number where the system originally mounted it. To inform the system
of a change to the target device number, reboot using the –r (reconfigure) option.

This message results from I/O to a special file’s subdevice that either does not exist or that exists beyond the limit of the device. The symbolic
name for this error is ENXIO, errno=6.

No such file or directory

=========================
The specified file or directory does not exist. Either the file name or path name was entered incorrectly.

Check the file name and path name for correctness and try again. If the specified file or directory is a symbolic link, it probably points to
a nonexistent file or directory. The symbolic name for this error is ENOENT, errno=2.

no such map in server’s domain

==============================
A user or an application tried to look up something using Network Information Services (NIS), but NIS has no corresponding database for
this request.

Make sure the NIS map name is spelled correctly. To see a list of nicknames for the various NIS maps, run the ypcat –x command. To see
a full list of the various NIS maps (databases), run the ypwhich –m command. If the NIS service were not running on the current machine,
these commands would result in a ”can’t communicate with ypbind” message.

No such process
===============
This process cannot be found. The process could have finished execution and disappeared, or it might still be in thesystem under a different
numeric ID. Use the ps(1) command tocheck that the process ID you’re supplying is correct.

No process corresponds to the specified process ID (PID), light–

weight process ID, or thread_t. The symbolic name for this error is ESRCH, errno=3.

No such user as variable–– cron entries not created

===================================================
A file exists in /var/spool/cron/crontabs for the specified user, but this user is not in /etc/passwd or the NIS passwd map. The system cannot

Philips Medical Systems. Confidential and Proprietary information. Refer to Title Page.
create cron entries for nonexistent users.

To eliminate this message at boot time, remove the cron file for the nonexistent user, or rename it if the user’s login name has changed.
If this is a valid user, create an appropriate password entry for this name.

Not a directory
===============
A non–directory was specified where a directory is required, such as in a path prefix or as an argument to the chdir(2) system call. Look
at a listing of all the files in the current directory and try again, specifying a directory instead of a file. The symbolic name for this error is
ENOTDIR, errno=20.

Not enough space

================
This message indicates that the system is running many large applications simultaneously, and has run out ofswap space (virtual memory).
It could also indicate that applications failed without freeing pages from the swap area. Swap space is an area of disk set aside to store
portions of applications and data not immediately required in memory. Any data written during this condition will probably be lost.

Reinstall or reconfigure the system to have more swap space. A general rule of thumb is that swap space should be two to three times as
large as physical memory. Alternatively, use mkfile(1M) and swap(1M) to add more swap area. This example shows how to add 16 MB
of virtual memory in the /usr/swap file (any filesystem with enough free space would work): # mkfile 16m /usr/swap # swap –a /usr/swap

To make this automatic at boot time, add the following line to the /etc/vfstab file: /usr/swap – – swap – no –

In calling the fork(2), exec(2), sbrk(2), or malloc(3C) routine, a program asked for more memory than the system could supply. This is not
a temporary condition; swap space is a system parameter. The symbolic name for this error is ENOMEM, errno=12.

not found
=========
This message indicates that the Bourne shell could not find the program name given as a command. Check the form and spelling of the
command line. If that looks correct, echo $PATH to see if the user’s search path is correct. When communications are garbled, it is possible
to unset a search path to such an extent that only built–in shell commands are available. Here is a command to reset a basic search path:

$ PATH=/usr/bin:/usr/ccs/bin:/usr/openwin/bin:. If the search path looks correct, check the directory contents along the search path to see

Philips Medical Systems. Confidential and Proprietary information. Refer to Title Page.
if programs are missing or if directories are not mounted.

NOTICE: /variable: out of inodes

================================
The filesystem specified after the first colon probably contains many small files, exceeding the per–filesystem limit for inodes (file
information nodes).

If many small files were created unintentionally, removing them will resolve the problem.

Otherwise, follow these steps to increase filesystem capacity for small files. Make several backup copies of the filesystem on different tapes
(for safety), then bring the machine down to single–user mode. Use the newfs(1M) command with the –i option to increase inode density
for this filesystem. Here is an example:

# newfs –i 1024 /dev/rdsk/partition

Finally, restore the filesystem from a backup tape. Note that increasing the inode density slightly reduces total filesystem
capacity.

Not login shell

===============
This message results when a user triesto logout(1) from a shell other than the one started at login time. To quit a non–login shell, use the
exit(1) command. Continue doing so until you have logged out.

Not on system console

=====================
A user tried to login(1) to a system as the superuser (uid=0, which is not necessarily root) from a terminal other than the
console.

Login to that system as a normal user, then run su(1M) to become superuser. To allow superuser logins from any terminal, comment out
the CONSOLE line in /etc/default/login (this is not recommended for security reasons).

Philips Medical Systems. Confidential and Proprietary information. Refer to Title Page.
Not owner
=========
Either an ordinary user tried to do something reserved for the superuser, or the user tried to modify a file in a way restricted to the file’s owner
or to the superuser. Switch user to root and try again. The symbolic name for this error is EPERM, errno=1.

Not supported
=============
This version of the system does not support the feature requested, although future versions of the system might provide support.

This is generally not a system message from the kernel, but an error returned by an application. Contact the vendor or author of the
application for an update. The symbolic name for this error is ENOTSUP, errno=48. ok ==

This is the OpenBoot PROM monitor prompt. From this prompt, you can boot the system (from disk, CDROM, or net), or you can use the
go command to continue where you left off.

If you suddenly see this prompt, look at the messages above it to see if the system crashed. If no other messages appear, and you just
typed Stop–A or plugged in a new keyboard, type go to continue. You might need to Refresh the window system from its Workspace Menu.

Never invoke sync from the ok prompt without first running the fsck(1M) command, especially if the filesystem has changed.

operation failed [error 185], unknown group error 0, variable

=============================================================
When you use admintool to add a user to a newly–created group, admintool issues this error. Apply patch 101384–05 to fix bug ID 1151837
and to provide a workaround for bug ID 1153087.

Operation not applicable

========================
This error indicates that no system support exists for some function that the application requested. Ask the system vendor for an upgrade,
or contact the vendoror author of the application for an update. This message indicates that no system support exists for an operation.
Many modules set this error when a programming function is not yet implemented. If you are writing a program that produces this message
while calling a system library, try to find and use an alternative library function. Future versions of the system might support this operation;
check system release notes for further information. The symbolic name for this error is ENOSYS, errno=89.

Philips Medical Systems. Confidential and Proprietary information. Refer to Title Page.
out of memory
=============
Hundreds of different programs can produce this message when the system is running many large applications simultaneously. This
message usually means that the system has run out of swap space (virtual memory).

See the message ”Not enough space” for details. Any data written during this condition will probably be lost.

PARTIALLY ALLOCATED INODE I=N CLEAR?

=====================================
During phase 1, fsck(1M) found that the specified inode was neither allocated nor unallocated. The reason is probably that the system
crashed in the middle of a sync(2) or write(2) operation.

Should you answer yes to this question, ”UNALLOCATED” messages might result during phase 2, if any directory entries point to this inode.
If you are being careful, exit fsck(1M) and run ncheck(1M) (specifying the inode number after the –i option) to determine which file or
directory is involved here. You might be able restore this file or directory from another system. It is also possiblethat fsck will copy this file
to the lost+found directory in a later phase.

For more information, see the chapter on checking filesystem integrity in the System Administration Guide, Volume I.

passwd.org_dir: NIS+ servers unreachable

========================================
This is the first of three messages thatan NIS+ client prints when it cannot locate an NIS+ server on the network. See the message
”hosts.org_dir: NIS+ servers unreachable” for details.

Password does not decrypt secret key for unix.uid@variable

==========================================================
This message appears at login time when a user’s password is not identical to the user’s keylogin network password. When a system is
running NIS+, the login program firstperforms UNIX authentication, and then attempts a keylogin(1) for secure RPC authentication.

To gain credentials for secure RPC, users can run keylogin (after login) and type in their secret key. To stop this message from appearing
at login time, users can run the chkey –p command and set their network password to bethe same as their NIS+ password. If a user doesn’t
remember the network password, the system administrator should delete and re–create the user’s credentials table entry so the user can
establish a new network password with chkey.

Philips Medical Systems. Confidential and Proprietary information. Refer to Title Page.
Permission denied
=================
An attempt was made to access a file in a way forbidden by the protection system. Check the ownership and protection mode of the file
(with a long listing from the ls–l command) to see who is allowed to access the file. Then change the file or directory permissions as
needed. The symbolic name for this error is EACCES, errno=13.

Please specify a recipient.

===========================
With mailtool, this message comes up in a dialog box whenever a user tries to deliver a message with no address in the To: field. See the
message ”Recipient names must be specified” for details.

Protocol not supported

======================
The requested networking protocol hasnot been configured into the system, or no implementation for it exists. (A protocol is a formal
description of the messages to be exchanged and the rules to be followed when systems exchange information.) Verify that the protocol
is in the /etc/inet/protocols file and in the NIS protocols map, if applicable. If the protocol is not listed, and you want to permit its use, configure
the protocol as documented or as required. The symbolic name for this error is EPROTONOSUPPORT, errno=120.

Protocol wrong type for socket

==============================
This message indicates either application programming error, or badly configured protocols. Make sure that the /etc/protocols file
corresponds number–for– number with the NIS protocols map. It it does, ask the vendor or author of the application for an update.

A protocol was specified that does not support the semantics of the socket type requested. This amounts to a request for an unsupported
type of socket. Look at the source code that made this socket request and check that it requested one of the types specifiedin
/usr/include/sys/socket.h. The symbolic name for this error is EPROTOTYPE, errno=98.

Read error from network: Connection reset by peer

=================================================
This message appears when a user is remotely logged into a machine that crashes or gets rebooted during the rlogin(1) or rsh(1) session.
Any data changes that were not saved are probably lost. Sometimes this message appears only when the user types something, even
though the system went down hours before. Try torlogin again, perhaps after waiting a few minutes for the system to reboot.

Philips Medical Systems. Confidential and Proprietary information. Refer to Title Page.
Read–only file system
=====================
Files and directories on filesystems that are mounted read–only cannot be changed. If you only modify these files and
directoriesoccasionally, rlogin(1) to the servers from which the filesystems are mounted and change the files or directories there. If you
change these files and directories frequently, mount(1M) the filesystems read/write. The symbolic name for this error is EROFS, errno=30.

rebooting...
============
This message appears on the console to indicate that the machine is booting, either after the superuser issued a reboot command,
or after a system panic if the EEPROM’s watchdog–reboot? variable is set to true. Allow the machine to boot itself. In case of a system
panic, look above this message for other indications of what went wrong.

Recipient names must be specified

=================================
Somebody sent mail without a valid recipient in the To: field, so sendmail could not deliver the mail message. Using mail(1), the recipient’s
address might have been specified using spaces or non–alphanumeric characters. The mailtool(1)and mailx(1) commands try to prevent
this by issuing ”Please specify a recipient” or ”No recipients specified” messages instead. If there is at least one valid recipient, each invalid
recipient address will generate a ”User unknown” message. Look in the sender’s dead.letter file for the automatically saved message,
andhave the originator send it again, this time specifying a recipient.

Reset tty pgrp from N to N

==========================
The C shell sometimes issues this message when it clears away the window process group after the user exits the window system. This
can happen when the window system doesn’t clean up after itself. Proceed with your work. This message is purely informational.

Resource temporarily unavailable

================================
This indicates that the fork(2) system call failed because the system’s process table is full, or that a system call failed because of insufficient
memory or swap space. It is also possible that a user is not allowed to create anymore processes. Simply waiting often gives the system
time to free resources. However if this message occurs often on a system, reconfigure the kernel and allow more processes. To increase
the size of the process table in Solaris 2.x, increase the value of maxusers in the /etc/system file. The default maxusers value is the amount
of main memory in MB, minus 2.

Philips Medical Systems. Confidential and Proprietary information. Refer to Title Page.
If one user is not allowed to create any more processes, that user has probably exceeded the memorysize limit; see the limit(1) man page
for details. The symbolic name for this error is EAGAIN, errno=11.

Result too large

================
This is a programming error or a data input error. Ask the program’s author to fix this condition. This indicates an attempt to evaluate a
mathematical programming function at a point where its value would overflow or underflow. The value of a programming function in the
math package (3M) is not representable within machine precision. This could occur after floating point overflow or underflow (either single
or double precision), or after total loss of numeric significance in Bessel functions.

Note that this message can indicate ”Result too small” in the case of floating pointunderflow. To help pinpoint a program’s math errors,
use the matherr(3M) facility. The symbolic name for this error is ERANGE, errno=34.

rmdir: variable: Directory not empty

====================================
The rmdir(1) command can remove empty directories, only. The directory whose name appears after the first colon in the message still
contains some files or directories.

Use rm(1) instead of rmdir. To remove this directory and everything underneath it, use the rm –ir command to recursively descend the
directory, being asked if you want to delete each element. To remove the directory and all its contents without being asked for approval,
use the rm –r command.

ROOT LOGIN /dev/console

=======================
This syslog message indicates that someone has logged in as root on the system console. If you have just logged in as root, don’t worry.
If this is not you, consider the possibility of a security breach. The best site–wide policy is for all system administrators to su instead oflogging
in as root.

ROOT LOGIN /dev/pts/N FROM variable

===================================
This syslog message indicates that someone has remote logged in as root on a pseudo–terminal from the system specified after the
FROM keyword. For security reasons, it is a bad idea to allow root logins from anywhere besides the console. To restrict superuser logins
to the console, remove the comment from the CONSOLE line in /etc/default/login.

Philips Medical Systems. Confidential and Proprietary information. Refer to Title Page.
rx framing error
================
Usually this error indicates a hardware problem. Check the Ethernet cabling and connectors to locate a problem.
A framing error occurs when the Ethernet I/O driver receives a non–integral unit of octets, such as 63 bytes and then 3 bits. (Ethernet
specifies the use of octets.) Framing errors are caused by corruption of the starting or ending frame delimiters. These can be corrupted
by some violation of the encoding scheme.

Framing errors are a subset of CRC errors, which are usually caused by anomalies on the physical media.An ”alignment/framing error”
is a type of CRC error where octet boundaries do not line up.

SCSI bus DATA IN phase parity error

===================================
The most common cause of this problem is unapproved hardware. Some SCSI devices for thePC market do not meet the high I/O speed
requirements for the UNIX market. Other possible causes of this problem are improper cabling or termination, and power fluctuations. Data
corruption is possible but unlikely to occur, because this parity error prevents data transfer.

Check that all SCSI devices on the bus are Sun approved hardware. Then verify that all cables are no longer than six meters, total, and
that all SCSI connections are properly terminated. If power fluctuations are occuring, invest in an uninterruptible power supply.

SCSI transport failed: reason ’reset’

=====================================
This message indicates that the system sent data over the SCSI bus, but the data never reached its destination because of a SCSI bus
reset. The most common cause of this condition is conflicting SCSI targets.¤Data corruption is possible but unlikely to occur, because this
failure prevents data transfer. Verify that all cables are no longer than six meters, total, and that all SCSI connections are properly
terminated. If power surges are a problem, acquire a surge suppressor or uninterruptible power supply.

The AcQSim CT SCSI IDs are: 0 Boot Disk (standard), 1 Main Image Disk (standard), 2 Secondary Image Disk, (optional) 3 Optical Disk
(optional), 4 Secondary Tape (optional), 5 Primary Tape (standard), 6 CD ROM Drive (standard), 7 Host CPU.

If SCSI device targeting is acceptable, memory configuration could be the problem, especially for machines with the sun4c architecture.
Ensure that high–capacity memory chips (such as 4MB SIMMs) are in lower banks, while lower–capacity memory chips (such as 1MB
SIMMs) are in the upper banks.

Philips Medical Systems. Confidential and Proprietary information. Refer to Title Page.
Note that SPARC systems do not always support third party CDROM drives, and might generate a similar ”unknown vendor” error message.
Check with the CDROM vendor for specific configuration requirements. Some third party disk drives have a read–ahead cache that
interferes with Solaris device drivers. Make sure that any existing read–ahead cache facility is turned off.

Segmentation Fault
==================
Segmentation faults usually result from programming error. This message is usually accompanied by a core dump, except on read–only
filesystems.

To see which program produced a core file, run either the file(1) command or the adb (1) command. The following examples show the
output of the file and adb commands on a core file from the dtmail program. $ file core core: ELF 32–bit MSB core file SPARC Version 1,
from ‘dtmail’

$ adb core core file = core –– program ‘dtmail’ SIGSEGV 11: segmentation violation ^D (use Control–d to quit the adb rogram) Ask
the vendor or author of this program for a debugged version.

A process has received a signal indicating that it attempted to access an area of memory that is protected or that does not exist. The two
most common causes of segmentation faults are attempting to dereference a null pointer or indexing past the bounds of an array.

sendmail[N]: NOQUEUE: SYSERR: net hang reading from variable

============================================================
This is a sendmail message that appears on the console and in the log file /var/adm/messages. If this message occurs once for a particular
user, it is possible that a mail message from this user ends with a partial line (having no terminating newline character). If this message
appears frequently or at busy times, especially along with other networking errors, it could indicate network problems.
Check the user’s mail spool file to see if a message ends without a newline character. If so, talk with the user and determine how to prevent
the problem from occurring again. If these messages are the result of network problems, you could try moving the mail spool directory to
another machine with a faster network interface.

During the SMTP receipt of DATA phase, a message–terminating period on a line of its own never arrived, so sendmail timed out and
produced this error.

Philips Medical Systems. Confidential and Proprietary information. Refer to Title Page.
setmnt: Cannot open /etc/mnttab for writing
===========================================
The system is having problems writing to /etc/mnttab. It is possible that the filesystem containing /etc is mounted read–only, or is not
mounted at all. Check that this file exists and is writable by root. If so, ensure that the /etc filesystem has been mounted, and is mounted
read–write rather than read–only.

share_nfs: /home: Operation not applicable

==========================================
This message usually indicates that the system has a local filesystem mounted on /home, which is where the automounter usually mounts
users’ home directories. When a systemis running the automounter, do not mount local filesystems on the /home directory. Mount them
on another directory, such as /disk2, which on most systems you will have to create.You could also change the automounter auto_home
entry, but that is a more difficult

solution. Soft error rate (N%) during writing was too high
================================================
This message from the SCSI tape drive appears when Exabyteor DAT tapes generate too many soft (recoverable) errors. It is followed bythe
advisory ”Please, replace tape cartridge” message. Soft errors are an indication that hard errors could soon occur, causing data corruption.
First clean the tape head witha cleaning tape as recommended by the manufacturer. If that doesn’t work, replace the tape cartridge. You
might need to replace the tape drive if the problem still occurs with new tape cartridges.

Soft error rate (retries = N) during writing was too high

=========================================================
This message from the SCSI tape drive appears when Archive tapes generate too many soft (recoverable) errors. It is followed by the
advisory ”Periodic head cleaning required and/or replace tape cartridge” message. Soft errors are an indication that hard errors couldsoon
occur, causing data corruption.

First clean the tape head with a cleaning tape as recommended by the manufacturer. If that doesn’t work, replace the tape cartridge.
Youmight need to replace the tape drive if the problem still occurs with new tape cartridges.

NOTE
Soft Error rate errors are very common with the Exabyte Eliant 820 8mm tape drive,
even with a brand new tape.

Philips Medical Systems. Confidential and Proprietary information. Refer to Title Page.
Stale NFS file handle
=====================
A file or directory that was opened by an NFS client was either removed or replaced on the server. If you were editing this file, write it to
a local filesystem instead. Try remounting the filesystem on top of itself or shutting down any client processes that refer to stale file handles.
If neither of these solutions works, reboot the system. The original vnode isno longer valid. The only way to get rid of this error is to force
the NFS server and client to renegotiate file handles. The symbolic name for this error is ESTALE, errno=151.

statd: cannot talk to statd at variable

=======================================
This message comes from the NFS status monitor daemon statd, which provides crash recovery services for the NFS lock daemon lockd.
The message indicates that statd has left old references in the /var/statmon/sm and /var/statmon/sm.bak directories. After a user has
removed or modified a host in the hosts database, statd might not properly purge files in these directories, which results in its trying to
communicate with a nonexistent host.

Remove the file named variable (where variable is the hostname) from both the /var/statmon/sm and /var/statmon/sm.bak directories. Then
kill the statd daemon and restart it. If that doesn’t get rid of the message, kill and restart lockd as well. If that doesn’t work, reboot the machine
at your convenience.

stty: TCGETS: Operation not supported on socket

===============================================
This message results when a user tries to remote copy with rcp(1) or remote shell with rsh(1) from one machine to another, but has an stty(1)
command in the remote. The solution is to move the stty command to the user’s .login (or equivalent) file. Alternatively, execute the stty
command in .cshrc only when the shell is interactive. Here is a test to do just that: if ($?prompt) stty ... The rcp andrsh commands make
a connection using sockets, which do not support stty’s TCGETS ioctl.

su: No shell
============
This message indicates that someone changed the default login shell for root to a program missing from the system. For example, the final
colon–separated field in /etc/passwd could have been changed from /sbin/sh to/usr/bin/bash, which does not exist in that location. Possibly
an extra space was appended at the end of line. The outcome is that you cannot login as root or switch user to root, and so cannot directly
fix this problem.

Philips Medical Systems. Confidential and Proprietary information. Refer to Title Page.
The only solution is to rebootthe system from another source, then edit the password file to correct this problem. Invoke sync(1M) several
times, then halt the machine by typing Stop–A or by pressing the reset button. Reboot single–user from CDROM, the net, or diskette, such
as by typing boot cdrom –s at the ok prompt.

After the system comes up and gives you a # prompt, mount the device corresponding to the original / partition somewhere, such as with
a mount(1M) command similar to the one below. Then run an editor on the newly–mounted system password file (use ed(1) if terminal
support is lacking): # mount /dev/dsk/c0t3d0s0 /mnt # ed /mnt/etc/passwd

Use the editor to change the password file’s root entry to call an existing shell, such as /usr/bin/csh or /usr/bin/ksh. To keep the ”No shell”
problem from happening, habitually use admintool or /usr/ucb/vipw to edit the password file. These tools make it difficult to change password
entries in ways that make the system unusable.

su: ’su root’ failed for variable on /dev/pts/N

===============================================
The user specified after ”for” tried to become superuser, but typed the wrong password.

If the user is supposed to know the root password, wait to see if the correct password is supplied. If the user is not supposed to know the
root password, ask why he or she is attempting to become superuser.

su: ’su root’ succeeded for variable on /dev/pts/N

==================================================
The user specified after ”for” just became superuser by typing the root password.

If the user is supposed to know the root password, this message is purely informational. If the user is not supposed to know the root
password, change this password immediately and ask how the user learned it.

syncing file systems...

=======================
This indicates that the kernel is updating the super–blocks before taking the system down, to ensure filesystem integrity. This message
appears after a halt(1M) or reboot (1M) command. It can also appear after a system panic, in which case the system might contain corrupted
data.

If you just halted or rebooted the machine, don’t worry–– this message is normal. In case of a system panic, look up the panic messages

Philips Medical Systems. Confidential and Proprietary information. Refer to Title Page.
that appear above this one. Your system vendor might be able to help diagnose the problem. So that you can describe the panic to the
vendor, either leave your system in its panicked state or be sure that you can reproduce the problem. Numbers that sometimes display
after the three dots in the message show the count of dirty pages that are being written out. Numbers in brackets show an estimate of the
number of busy buffers in the system.
syslog service starting.
========================
During system reboot, this message might appear and theboot seems to hang. After starting syslogd(1M) service, the system runs
/etc/rc2.d/S75cron, which in turn calls ps(1). Sometimes after an abrupt system crash /dev/bd.off becomes a link to nowhere, causing the
ps command to hang indefinitely.

Reboot single user (for example with boot –s) and run ls –l /dev/bd* to see if this is the problem. If so, remove /dev/bd.off, then run bdconfig
off or reboot with the –r (reconfigure) option. This is the most commonly reported situation that causes ps to
hang.

tar: /dev/rmt/0: No such file or directory

==========================================
The default tape device /dev/rmt/0, or possibly the device specified by the TAPE environment variable, is not currently connected to the
system, is not configured, or its hardware symbolic link is broken.

List the files in the /dev/rmt directory to see which tape devices are currently configured. If none are configured, ensure that a tape device
is correctly attached to the system, and reboot with the –r option to reconfigure devices. If tape devices other than /dev/rmt/0 are configured,
you could specify one of them after the –f option of tar(1).

tar: directory checksum error

=============================
This error message from tar(1) indicates that the checksum of the directory and the files it has read from tape does not match the checksum
advertised in the header block. Usually this indicates the wrong blocking factor, although it could indicate corrupt data on tape.

To resolve this problem, make certain that the blocking factor you specify on the command line (after –b) matches the blocking factor
originally specified. If in doubt, leave out the block size and let tar determine it automatically. If that doesn’t help, tape data could be
corrupted.

Philips Medical Systems. Confidential and Proprietary information. Refer to Title Page.
tar: tape write error
=====================
A physical write error has occurred on the tar(1) output file, which is usually a tape, although it could be a diskette or disk file. Look on the
system console, where the device driver should provide the actual error condition. This might be a write–protected tape, a physical I/O error,
an end–of–tape condition, or a File too large limitation.
In the case of write–protectedtapes, enable the write switch. For physical I/O errors, the best course of action is to replace the tape with
a new one. For end–of–tape conditions, try using a higher density if the device supports one, or use cpio(1) or pax (1) for their multi–volume
support., When encountering File too large limitations, use the parent shell’slimit(1) or ulimit facility to increase the maximum file size.

Text is lost because the maximum edit log size has been exceeded.
=================================================================
This message appears at the beginning of a cmdtool(1) session after 100,000 characters have gone by in the scrolling window. Clicking
on the top rectangle of the scrollbar might display this message. No data were lost, but the user cannot scroll back before this wraparound
point. To increase the maximum size of the Command Tool log file, use cmdtool with the–M option, specifying more than 100,000 bytes.

THE FOLLOWING FILE SYSTEM(S) HAD AN UNEXPECTED INCONSISTENCY:

============================================================
At boot time the /etc/rcS script runs the fsck(1M) command to check the integrity of filesystems marked ”fsck” in /etc/vfstab. If fsck cannot
repair a filesystem automatically, it interrupts the boot procedure and produces this message. When fsck gets into this state, it cannot repair
filesystems without losing one or more files, so it wants to defer this responsibility to you, the administrator. Data corruption has probably
already occurred.
First run fsck –n on the filesystem, to see how many and what type of problems exist. Then run fsck again to repair the filesystem. If you
have a backup of the filesystem, you can generally answer ”y” to all the fsck questions. It’s a good idea to keep a record of all problematic
files and inode numbers for later reference. To run fsck yourself, specify options as recommended by the boot script. For example:

# fsck /dev/rdsk/c0t4d0s0. Usually, files lost during fsck repair were created just before a crash or power outage, and cannot be recovered.
If important files are lost, you can recover them from backup tapes. If you don’t havea backup, ask an expert to run fsck for you.

The SCSI bus is hung. Perhaps an external device is turned off.

===============================================================
This message appears near the beginning of rebooting, immediately after a ”Boot device: ...” message, and then the system hangs. The
problem is conflicting SCSI targets for a non–boot device. Having an external device turned off is unlikely to cause this problem.

Philips Medical Systems. Confidential and Proprietary information. Refer to Title Page.
THE SYSTEM IS BEING SHUT DOWN NOW !!!
=====================================
This message means the system is going down immediately and it’s too late to save any changes.

This message is often preceded by messages telling you that the system is going down in 15 minutes, 10 minutes, and so on. When you
see these initial broadcast shutdown messages, save all your work, send any e–mail you’re working on, and close your files. Fortunately
vi sessions are automatically saved for later recovery, but many otherapplications have no crash protection mechanism. Data loss is likely.

For more information on shutting down the system, see the System Administration Guide, Volume I. If you are using the AnswerBook,
”halting the system” is a good search string.

The system will be shut down in N minutes

=========================================
Thismessage from the system shutdown(1M) script informs you that the superuser is taking down the system.

Save all changes now or your work will be lost. Write out any files you were changing, send any e–mail messages you were
composing, and close your files.

This mail file has been changed by another mail reader.

=======================================================
This message appears in a pop–up dialog box whenever you start mailtool(1) while another mail reader has the inbox locked. A question
follows: ”Do you wish to ask that mail reader to save the changes?” You are given three choices.

If you choose ”Save Changes” mailtool will request the other mail reader to relinquish its lock and write out any changes it has made to
your inbox. If you choose ”Ignore” mailtool will read your inbox without locking it. If you choose ”Cancel” mailtool will exit.

Timeout waiting for ARP/RARP packet

===================================
This problem can occur while booting from the net, and indicates a network connection problem. Make sure the Ethernet cable is connected
to the network. Check that this system has an entry in the NIS ethers map or locally on the boot server. Then check the IP address of the
server and the client to make sure they are on the same subnet. Local /etc/hosts files must agree with each other and withthe NIS hosts
map.

Philips Medical Systems. Confidential and Proprietary information. Refer to Title Page.
If those are not causing the problem, go to the system’s PROM monitor ok prompt and run test net to test the network connection. (On older
PROM monitors, use test–net instead.) If the network test fails, check the Ethernet port, card, fuse, and cable, replacing them if necessary.
Also check the twisted pair port to make sure it is patched to the correct subnet.

For more information on packets, see SPARC: Installing Solaris Software. If you are using the AnswerBook, ”ARP/RARP” isa good search
string.

Too many links

==============
An attempt was made to create more than the maximum number of hard links (LINK_MAX, by default 32767) to a file. Because each
subdirectory is a link to its parent directory, the same error results from trying to create too many subdirectories.

Check to see why there are so many links to the same file. To get more than the maximum number of hard links, use symbolic links
instead.

The symbolic name for this error is EMLINK, errno=31.

Too many open files

===================
A process has too many files open at once. The system imposes a per–process soft limit on open files, OPEN_MAX (usually 64), which
can be increased, and a per–process hard limit (usually 1024), which cannot be increased.

You can control the soft limit from the shell. In the C shell, use the limit command to increase the number of descriptors. In the Bourne or
Korn shells, use the ulimit command with the –n option to increase the number of file descriptors.

If the window system refuses to start new applications because of this error, increase the open file limit in your login shell before starting
the window system. The symbolic name for this error is EMFILE, errno=24.

umount: warning: /variable not in mnttab

========================================
This message results when the superuser attempts to unmount a filesystem that is not mounted. Note that subdirectories of
filesystems,such as /var, cannot be unmounted.

Philips Medical Systems. Confidential and Proprietary information. Refer to Title Page.
Run the mount(1M) or df(1M) command to see what filesystems are mounted. If you really want to unmount one of them, specify the
existing mount point.

Unable to install/attach driver ’variable’

==========================================
These messages appear in /var/adm/messages at boot time, when the system tries to load drivers for devices the machine does not have.
Despite the alarmist tone, this message is intended as purely informational. You probably don’t want all these device drivers, because they
make your system kernel larger, requiring more memory.

undefined control
=================
This message, prefaced by the file name and line number involved, is from the C preprocessor /usr/ccs/lib/cpp, and indicates a line starting
with a sharp (#) but not followed by a valid keyword such as define or include.

A piece of software might be running the C preprocessor on an initialization file that you thought was interpreted by a shell. In most shells,
the sharp (#) indicates a comment. The C preprocessor considers comments to be anythingbetween /* and */ delimiters.

Unmatched ‘
===========
This message from the C shell csh(1) indicates that a user typed a command containing a backquote symbol (‘) without a closeing
backquote. Similar messages result from an unmatched single quote (’) or an unmatched double quote (”). Other shells generally give a
continuation prompt when a command line contains an unmatched quote symbol.

Correct the command line and try again. To continue typing on another line, give the C shell a backslash right before the newline.

UNREF FILE I=i OWNER=o MODE=m SIZE=s MTIME=tCLEAR?

=============================================
During phase 4, fsck(1M) discovered that the specified file was orphaned because the inode had no record of its pathname. In other words,
the file was not connected into any directory.

Answer yes to reconnect the file into the lost+found directory. Then contact the file’s owner to ask whether they want it back, and where
they want you to place it.

Philips Medical Systems. Confidential and Proprietary information. Refer to Title Page.
Use ”logout” to logout.
=======================
This C shell message might come as a surprise to Bourne or Korn shell users accustomed to logging out with a Control–d.

When ignoreeof is set, the C shell requires users to logout by typing logout or exit. Write any modified files to disk before
exiting.

/usr/openwin/bin/xinit: connection to X server lost

===================================================
This means that the xinit(1) program, which sets up X11 resources and starts a window manager, failed to locate the X server process.
Perhaps the user interrupted window system startup, or exited abnormally from OpenWindows (for example, by killing processes or by
rebooting). It is possible that the X server crashed. Data loss is possible in some cases. Depending on process timing, this message might
be normal when OpenWindows exits during a system reboot.

The only solution is to exit and restart OpenWindows. You do not need to reboot the system unless it hangs and fails to give you a
console prompt. To exit OpenWindows, select Workspace–>Exit. To restart OpenWindows, type openwin at the system prompt.

Value too large for defined data type

=====================================
The user ID or group ID of an IPC object or file system object was too large to be stored in an appropriate member of the caller–provided
structure. Run the application on a newer system, or ask the program’s author to fix this condition.

This error occurs only on systems that support a larger range of user or group ID values than a declared member structure can support.
This condition usually occurs because the IPC or file system object resides on a remote machine with a larger value of type uid_t, off_t,
or gid_t than that of the local system. The symbolic name for this error is EOVERFLOW, errno=79.

WARNING: Clock gained N days–– CHECK AND RESET THE DATE!

========================================================
Each workstation contains an internal clock powered by a rechargeable battery. After the system is halted and turned off, the internal clock
continues to keep time. When the system is powered on and reboots, the system notices that the internal clock has gained time since the
workstation was halted.

In most cases, especially if the power has been off for less than a month, the internal clock keeps the correct time, and you do not have

Philips Medical Systems. Confidential and Proprietary information. Refer to Title Page.
to reset the date. Use the date(1) command to check the date andtime on your system. If the date or time is wrong, become superuser and
use the date(1) command to reset them.

WARNING: No network locking on variable: contact adminto install server change

==========================================================================
The Solaris 2.x mount(1M) command issues this message whenever it mounts a filesystem that doesn’t have NFS locking, such as a
standard SunOS 4.1.x exported filesytem. Data loss is possible in applications that depend on locking.

On the remote SunOS 4.1.x system, install the appropriate rpc.lockd jumbo patch to implement NFS locking. For SunOS 4.1.4, install patch
#102264; for SunOS 4.1.3, install patch #100075; for earlier 4.1 releases, install patch #101817.

WARNING: processorlevel 4 interrupt not serviced

=================================================
This message is basically a diagnostic from the SCSI driver. Especially on machineswith the sun4c architecture, it can appear on the
console every 10 minutes or so. To reduce the frequency of this message, add this line near the bottom of the /etc/system file and reboot:
set esp:esp_use_poll_loop=0 You might also see this message repeatedly after manually removing a CD when it was busy. Don’t do this!
To get the system back to normal, reboot the system with the –r (reconfigure) option.

WARNING: Thermal Warning Detected

==========================================================
This is an abnormal shutdown of the system caused by overheating of the host CPU. Because this is an abnormal shutdown, data
loss/corrup[tion is possible.

The most likely cause for thie shutdown is clogged air filters in the console itself.

WARNING: /tmp: File system full, swap space limit exceeded

==========================================================
The system swap area (virtual memory) has filled up. You need to reduce swap space consumption by killing some processes or
possibly by rebooting the system. See the message ”Not enough space” for information about increasingswap space.

WARNING: TOD clock not initialized–– CHECK AND RESET THE DATE!
========================================================–=====
This message indicates that the Time Of Day (TOD) clock reads zero, so its time is the beginning of the UNIX epoch: midnight 31 December

Philips Medical Systems. Confidential and Proprietary information. Refer to Title Page.
1969. On a brand–new system, the manufacturer might have neglected to initialize the system clock. On older systems it is more likely that
the rechargeable battery has run out and requires replacement.

First replace the batteryaccording to the mnufacturer’s instructions. Then become superuser and use the date(1) command to set the time
and date. On SPARC systems the clock is powered by the same battery as the NVRAM, so a dead battery also causes loss of the machine’s
Ethernet address and host ID, which are more serious problems for networked systems.

WARNING: Unable to repair the / filesystem. Run fsck

====================================================
This message comes at boot time from the /etc/rcS script whenever it gets a bad return code from fsck(1) after checking a filesystem. The
message recommends an fsck command line, and instructs you to exit the shell when done to continue booting. Then the script places
the system in single–user mode so fsck can be run effectively.

See ”/dev/rdsk/variable: UNEXPECTED INCONSISTENCY” for information about repairing UFS filesystems. See ”THE FOLLOWING FILE
SYSTEM(S) HAD AN UNEXPECTED INCONSISTENCY” for information about repairing non–UFS filesystems.

Watchdog Reset
==============
This fatal error usually indicates some kind of hardware problem. Data corruption on the system is possible.

Look for some other message that might help diagnose the problem. By itself, a watchdog reset doesn’t provide enough information;
because traps are disabled, all information has been lost. If all that appears on the console is an ok prompt, issue the PROM command
below to view the final messages that occurred just before system failure: ok f8002010 wector p Yes, that word iswector, not vector. The
result is a display of messages similar to those produced by the dmesg(1M) command. These messages can be useful in finding the cause
of system failure. This message doesn’t come from the kernel, but from the OpenBoot PROM monitor, a piece of Forth software that gives
you the ok prompt before you boot UNIX. If the CPU detects a trap when traps are disabled (an unrecoverable error), it signals a watchdog.
The OpenBoot PROM monitor detects the watchdog, issues this message, and brings down the system.

Watchdog Reset, Rebooting.

==========================
See the message ”Watchdog Reset” for details. This rebooting message occurs under the same conditions, but when the EEPROM’s
watchdog–reboot? variable is set to true, causing the machine to automatically reboot itself. Data corruption on the system is possible.

Philips Medical Systems. Confidential and Proprietary information. Refer to Title Page.
Who are you?
============
Many networking programs can print this message, including from(1B), lpr(1B), lprm(1B), mailx(1), rdist(1), sendmail(1M), talk(1), and
rsh(1). The command prints this message when it cannot locate a password file entry for the current user. This might occur if a user logged
in just before the superuser deleted that user’s password entry, or if the network naming service fails for a user who has no entry in the
local password file.
If a user’s password file entry was accidentally deleted, restore it from backups or from another password file. If a user’s login name or user
ID was changed, ask that user to logout and login again. If the network naming service failed, check the NIS server(s) and repair or reboot
as necessary. There is a known problem (bug 1138025) with starting hundreds of rsh processes on another machine. This message
appears because rsh hangs while binding to a reserved port, and responds too slowly to interact with the network naming service.

Window Underflow
================
This message often occurs at boot time, sometimes along with a ”Watchdog Reset” error. It comes from the OpenBoot PROM monitor, which
was passed a processor trap from the hardware. This error indicates that some programtried to access a SPARC register window that wasn’t
accessible from the processor.

On some system architectures, specifically sun4c, the problem could be that different capacity memory chips are mixed together. Someone
might have placed 1MB SIMMs in the same bank with 4MB SIMMs. If this is so, rearrange the memory chips. Make sure to put
higher–capacity SIMMs in the first bank(s), and lower–capacity SIMMs inthe remaining bank(s); never mix different capacity SIMMs in the
same bank. The problem could also be that cache memory on the motherboard has gone bad and needs replacement. If main memory
is installed correctly, try swapping the motherboard. The best way to isolate the problem is to look at the %pc register to see where it got
its arguments from, and why the arguments were bad. If you can reproduce the condition causing this message, your system vendor might
be able to help diagnose the problem.

X connection to variable:0.0 broken (explicit kill or server shutdown).

=======================================================================
This means that the client has lost its connection to the X server. The ”0.0” represents the display device, which is usually the console. This
message can appear when a user is running an X application on a remote system with the DISPLAY set back to the original system and
the remote system’s X server disappears, perhaps because someone exited X windows orrebooted the machine. It sometimes appears
locally when a user exits the window system. Dataloss is possible if applications were killed before saving files. Try to run the application
again in a few minutes after the system has rebooted and the window system is running.

Philips Medical Systems. Confidential and Proprietary information. Refer to Title Page.
xinit: not found
================
OpenWindows was probably not installed properly, and the openwin(1) program could not find xinit(1) to start up the X windows system.
If the user is running another version of X windows, such as the MIT X11 distribution, the startx program serves the same function as xinit.
Check the PATH environment variable to make sure it contains the appropriate X windows install directory. Verify that xinit is in this directory
as an executable program.
XIO: fatal IO error 32 (Broken pipe) on X server ”variable:0.0”
===============================================================
This means that I/O with the X server has been broken. The ”0.0” represents the display device, which is usually the console. This message
can appear when a user is running Display PostScript applications and the X server disappears or the client is shut down. Data loss is
possible if applications disappeared before saving files Try to run the application again in a few minutes after the system has rebooted and
the window system is running.

Xlib: Client is not authorized to connect to Server

===================================================
See the message ”Xlib: connection to ... refused by server” for details.

Xlib: connection to ”variable:0.0” refused by server

====================================================
This message is immediately followed by the ”Xlib: Client is not authorized to connect to Server” message. These messages indicate that
an X windows application tried to run on the X server specified inside double quotes, which did not allow the request.
The ”0.0” represents the display device, which is usually the console. If no server name appears, the superuser probably tried to run an
X application on the current machine in an X session that was owned by somebody else.

To allow this client to connect to the X server, run xhost +clientname on the X server system. Only the owner of the current X session (who
is not necessarily the superuser) isallowed to run the xhost command. If somebody else is running X windows on the server, ask them to
log out and then start your own X session on that server; remote X connections are usually allowed for the same user ID.

xterm: fatal IO error 32 (Broken Pipe) or KillClient on X server ” variable:0.0”

=============
This means that xterm(1) has lost its connection to the X server. The ”0.0” represents the display device, which is usually the console. This
message can appear when a user is running xterm and the X server disappears or the client gets shut down. Data loss is possible if
applications were killed before saving files. Try to run the terminal emulator again in a few minutes after the system has rebooted and the

Philips Medical Systems. Confidential and Proprietary information. Refer to Title Page.
window system is running.

XView warning: Cannot load font set ’variable’ (Font Package)

=============================================================
This message from the XView library warns that a requested font is not installed on the X server. Often multiple warnings appear about
the same font. The set of available fonts can vary from release to release.
To see which fonts are available on the X server, run the xlsfonts(1) program. Then specify another font name that you see in the output
of xlsfonts. Sometimes it is possible to locate a similar font from a different vendor.

There are two packages of X windowsfonts: the common but not required fonts (SUNWxwcft), and the optional fonts (SUNWxwoft). Run
pkginfo(1) to see if both these packages are installed, and add them to the system as you wish.

ypbind[N]: NIS server for domain ”variable” OK

==============================================
This message appears after an ”NIS server not responding” message to indicate that ypbind(1M is able to communicate with an NIS server
again. Proceed with your work. This message is purely informational.

ypbind[N]: NIS server not responding for domain ”variable”; still trying
========================================================================
This means that the NIS client daemon ypbind(1M) cannot communicate with an NIS server for the specified domain. This message appears
when a workstation running the NIS naming service has become disconnected from the network, or when NIS servers are down or extremely
slow to respond.

If other NIS clients are behaving normally, check the Ethernet cabling on the workstation that is getting this message. On SPARC machines,
disconnected network cabling also produces a series of ”no carrier” messages. On x86 machines, the above message might be your only
indication that network cabling is disconnected.

If many NIS clients on the network are giving this message, go to the NIS server in question and reboot or repair as necessary. To locate
the NIS server for a domain, run the ypwhich(1) command. When the server machine comes back in operation, NIS clients give an ”NIS
server for domain OK” message.

Philips Medical Systems. Confidential and Proprietary information. Refer to Title Page.
ypwhich: can’t communicate with ypbind
======================================
This message from the ypwhich(1) command indicates that the NIS binder process ypbind(1M) is not running on the local machine.

If the system is not configured to use NIS, this message is normal and expected. Configure the system to use NIS if necessary. If the system
is configured to use NIS, but the ypbind process is not running, invoke the following command to start it up:
# /usr/lib/netsvc/yp/ypbind –broadcast

zsN: silo overflow

==================
This message means that the Zilog 8530 character input silo (or serial portFIFO) overflowed before it could be serviced. The zs(4S) driver,
which talks to a Zilog Z8530 chip, is reporting that the FIFO (holding about two characters) has been overrun. The number after zs shows
which serial port experienced an overflow:

zs0 – tty serial port 0 (/dev/ttya) zs1 – tty serial port 1 (/dev/ttyb) zs2 – keyboard port (/dev/kbd) zs3 – mouse port (/dev/mouse)

Silo overflows indicate that data in the respective serial port FIFO has been lost. However, consequences of silo overflows might be
negligible if the overflows occur infrequently, if data loss is not catastrophic, or if data can be recovered or reproduced. For example,
although a silo overflow on the mouse driver (zs3) indicates that the system could not process mouse events quickly enough, the user can
perform mouse motions again. Similarly, lost data from a silo overflow on a serial port with a modem connection transferring data using
uucp(1C) will be recovered when uucp discovers the loss of data and requests retransmission of the corrupted packet.

Frequent silo overflow messages can indicate a zs hardware FIFO problem, a serial driver software problem, or abnormal data or system
activity. For example, the system ignores interrupts during system panics, so mouse and keyboard activity result in silo overflows.

If the serial ports experiencing silo overflows are not being used, a silo overflow could indicate the onset of a hardware problem.

Another type of silo overflow is one that occurs during reboot when an HDLC line is connected to any of the terminal ports. For example,
an X.25 network could be sending frames before the kernel has been told to expect them. Such overflow messages can be ignored.

Philips Medical Systems. Confidential and Proprietary information. Refer to Title Page.
EEPROM

Shows configuration of the Sparc EEPROM. Type eeprom <CR> at the % prompt. A sample screen is shown below:
tpe–link–test?=true
scsi–initiator–id=7
keyboard–click?=false
keymap: data not available.
ttyb–rts–dtr–off=false
ttyb–ignore–cd=true
ttya–rts–dtr–off=false
ttya–ignore–cd=true
ttyb–mode=9600,8,n,1,–
ttya–mode=9600,8,n,1,–
sbus–probe–list=012
mfg–mode=off
diag–level=min
#power–cycles=135
system–board–serial#=5013084042511
system–board–date=IST_1121
fcode–debug?=false
output–device=screen
input–device=keyboard
load–base=16384
boot–command=boot
auto–boot?=true
watchdog–reboot?=false
diag–file: data not available.
diag–device=disk0
boot–file: data not available.
boot–device=disk0
local–mac–address?=false
ansi–terminal?=true
screen–#columns=80
screen–#rows=34
silent–mode?=false
use–nvramrc?=falsenvramrc: data not available.
security–mode=none
security–password: data not available.
security–#badlogins=0oem–logo=
oem–logo?=true
oem–banner= Rev: AcQSim CT.PICR.1.00X.19980815.1
AcQSim CT.ACQIM.1.00X.19980820.1 oem–banner?=true hardware–revision: data not available. last–hardware–update:
data not available. diag–switch?=false name=options rds4 %

Philips Medical Systems. Confidential and Proprietary information. Refer to Title Page.
UTILITIES – ERROR LOGS

Errors created during abnormal system operation are recorded in the Error Logger. The contents of the Error Logger can be displayed from
the Diagnostic GUI Error Log option. Figure 147 shows the initial Error Log screen. shows the search capabilities screen, and shows
the results when searching for a “512” error.

Processed 140 Errors

Processed 160 Errors
Reading File
/opt/PICKER/users/scanvis/logs/picr_
errlog
Processed 20 Errors
Processed 40 Errors
Processed 60 Errors
Processed 80 Errors
Processed 100 Errors
Processed 120 Errors
Processed 140 Errors
Processed 160 Errors
Processed 180 Errors
Processed 200 Errors
Processed 220 Errors
Processed 240 Errors
Processed 260 Errors
Processed 280 Errors
Processed 300 Errors
Processed xx filess in 4 seconds
Total execution time was 31 seconds

FIGURE 147 Log Viewer Window

Philips Medical Systems. Confidential and Proprietary information. Refer to Title Page.
 Enter Search Pattern: 512

Continue

FIGURE 148 Search for a 512 Error

07:20:23 SYSTEM: SCAN ERROR: 512 APEID: 0xFFFFFFFF

FILE: Errr.cpp (707)
DATE: Mon Nov 2, 1009
INFO: ANB error Max. retires (GPU port)
SYSNAME: AcQSim CT
Data Type: 0x00000001
–––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––
07:20:23 SYSTEM: SCAN ERROR: 512 APEID: 0xFFFFFFFF
FILE: Errr.cpp (707)
DATE: Mon Nov 2, 1009
INFO: ANB error Max. retires (GPU port)
SYSNAME: AcQSim CT
Data Type: 0x00000001
–––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––
07:20:23 SYSTEM: SCAN ERROR: 512 APEID: 0xFFFFFFFF
FILE: Errr.cpp (707)
DATE: Mon Nov 2, 1009
INFO: ANB error Max. retires (GPU port)
SYSNAME: AcQSim CT
Data Type: 0x00000001
–––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––

Search Again Exit

FIGURE 149 Search Results

Philips Medical Systems. Confidential and Proprietary information. Refer to Title Page.
UTILITIES – AUTOVOICE

NOTE
This test requires at least a functional Display Tower loaded with applications software
on disk. The Gantry must be powered up to test the gantry autovoice.

This test will verify that the Autovoice audio channel from the SPARC to the Operator Intercom and to the Gantry are functioning.

NOTE
To simplify viewing and operation any window that appears before the DIAGNOSTIC
SOFTWARE TEST MENU should be closed. Do this by clicking on either the OK but-
ton, the QUIT button or the upper left hand corner of the window (a dash) and clicking
on the close button.

1. Enter the Diagnostic GUI.

2. At the DIAGNOSTIC SOFTWARE TEST MENU window, select the UTILITIES menu and click on Autovoice Diagnostics. The
Autovoice Diagnostics window will appear:
3. Choose the amount of record time by sliding the Record Time bar to the left or right. The default is 5 seconds. If required, up to 60
seconds of record time can be selected.
4. Click the Play Location required, either Console or Gantry. A status indicator next to the selection will turn red to indicate the choice.

FIGURE 150 Autovoice Window

Philips Medical Systems. Confidential and Proprietary information. Refer to Title Page.
5. Click the Record button. Speak into the Operator Intercom microphone. The Record button will stay depressed as long as the
Autovoice is in the record mode. When the recording time ends, the Record button will return to the unclicked position.
6. Click on the Play button. The audio will be played back to the Play Location previously selected.
7. Click on the Quit button to exit the Autovoice Diagnostics.

NOTE
Additional Autovoice Testing can be performed using the General Utilities section on
Autovoice in the Scanner Application. In addition to record and playback of messages,
the playback volume can also be set from minimum to maximum. Refer to the Opera-
tor’s manual for instructions.

UTILITIES – SET COLOR

If for some reason, the system colors need to be modified, use the Set Color Options menu selection to do so.

Philips Medical Systems. Confidential and Proprietary information. Refer to Title Page.
 FIGURE 151 SET COLORS SCREEN

Philips Medical Systems. Confidential and Proprietary information. Refer to Title Page.
UTILITIES – BOARD STATUS
At the start of the Diagnostic GUI, the status of the AcQImage boards is shown via the Board Status window. This window can be called
up at any time from the Utilities pulldown menu.

FIGURE 152 BOARD STATUS WINDOW

EXIT
The EXIT options prompts you before terminating the program:

Philips Medical Systems. Confidential and Proprietary information. Refer to Title Page.
(This ends the Diagnostic GUI section).

DITA – SEE SERVICE APPLICATIONS MANUAL

Philips Medical Systems. Confidential and Proprietary information. Refer to Title Page.
Z LOGS
Z Logs is a Log viewing utility available with software release 1.2.3 or higher.

Z Logs provides for the following basic functions:

• Error log viewing (Similar to erp on the IQ/PQ).

• Service log for FSE (Used like the Service Log in the IQ/PQ showlogs).
• Tube Log for recording tube change data.
• Calibration/Performance Test log viewing.
• Bad Detector log viewing.

LAUNCHING Z LOGS

Z Logs can be launched from the Xterm window.

1. Open an Xterm window (double click the Xterm icon in the bottom right hand corner of the screen).
2. Type zlogs at the prompt.

Philips Medical Systems. Confidential and Proprietary information. Refer to Title Page.
3. The sign on screen appears in the figure below.

Philips Medical Systems. Confidential and Proprietary information. Refer to Title Page.
4. After the initial sign on, the main menu will appear as in the figure below.

Philips Medical Systems. Confidential and Proprietary information. Refer to Title Page.
USING Z LOGS

The usage of Z Logs is very basic and self–explanatory. Type the number of the log you wish view. The following information is provided
as a reference.

FSE LOGS

Selecting 1 from the main menu opens the FSE Logs menu. From here you can enter the Service Log or the Tube Log. These are text
logs used for the purpose of keeping notes from service calls and tube changes.

Philips Medical Systems. Confidential and Proprietary information. Refer to Title Page.
ERROR LOGS

Selecting 2 from the main menu opens the Error Log menu. System error logs can be viewed from this menu. Advanced Log viewer allows
you to view individual error log files, select a error log file from a directory and change display option for the error log viewer.

Philips Medical Systems. Confidential and Proprietary information. Refer to Title Page.
SYSTEM TEXT LOGS

Selecting 3 from the main menu allows you to view the System Text Logs. This includes the Bas Detector Log, Calibration/Performance
Log and other system logs that can be selected from the System Log Directory.

Philips Medical Systems. Confidential and Proprietary information. Refer to Title Page.
ADVANCED CAL
Advanced Calibration (Autocalibration) is run via the Service Application.

Philips Medical Systems. Confidential and Proprietary information. Refer to Title Page.
ACQSIM CT PARTS MANUAL

CLICK ON SECTION
YOU WISH TO SEE.

SECTION TWO

SECTION THREE

CT0128

SECTION ONE

C2209A

Philips Medical Systems. Confidential and Proprietary information. Refer to Title Page.
Patient Support Parts

CARBON TOP – 17199

FRONT COVER – 97984

COVER LEFT SIDE SUBFRAME – 97982

MECHANICAL STOP –
97991, 9799

ROLLER SUPPORT – 85799 ROLLER SHAFT

COVER RIGHT SIDE SUBFRAME –

97982

HORIZONTAL DRIVE COVER REAR COVER – 97985

– 97997

FOOT TROUGH – 86753 TROUGH

COVER – 86755 TAPE SWITCH – 86756

TELESCOPING COVERS – 86841

FIGURE 153 PATIENT SUPPORT ASSEMBLY

Philips Medical Systems. Confidential and Proprietary information. Refer to Title Page.
 DRIVE ASS’Y – 171976
LIMIT SWITCHES – DRIVE HOUSING –
T29A–145 86798 10K 10 TURN POT –
T6K–939

DRIVE ASSEMBLY –
171965
DRIVE FRONT END
ASS’Y – 171975

GEARBELT PULLEY – 97799

HOOK –
85996

BALLSCREW – 85721

TRANSDUCER – 85791
CONTROL ASS’Y –
177022

FIGURE 154 PATIENT SUPPORT ASSEMBLY – 171850A

Philips Medical Systems. Confidential and Proprietary information. Refer to Title Page.
 TIMING BELT PULLEY – 97944

RESOLVER – T93N–38 RESOLVER BRACKET – 97946

HORIZONTAL DRIVE MOTOR – T93N–42

GEARBELT PULLEY – 97798

TIMING BELT – T26A–85

HOUSING – 86761
MOTOR PULLEY – 95178
FIGURE 155 HORIZONTAL DRIVE ASSEMBLY – 171976

Philips Medical Systems. Confidential and Proprietary information. Refer to Title Page.
 TRANSFORMER – T86E–197

CONTROL PCB – 176960

ELEC. CAPACITOR – T45C–571

DIODE BRIDGE – T80–391

FIGURE 156 PATIENT SUPPORT CONTROL ASSEMBLY – 177022

Philips Medical Systems. Confidential and Proprietary information. Refer to Title Page.
 SLO–BLO 8A FUSE – T27A–197 PWM SERVO AMP – T99–165
SLO–BLO FUSE – T27A–26

CAPACITOR – 33UF, 100V – T45C–607

SOLID STATE RELAY – T19A–500

RELAY 3FRM
C120VAC –
T19A–325

FIGURE 157 PATIENT SUPPORT CONTROL PCB ASSEMBLY – 176960

Philips Medical Systems. Confidential and Proprietary information. Refer to Title Page.
VERTICAL DRIVE BRAKE – 85790

VERTICAL DRIVE MOTOR – T93F–79

FIGURE 158 VERTICAL DRIVE ASSEMBLY – 171965

Philips Medical Systems. Confidential and Proprietary information. Refer to Title Page.
 COUPLING W/ SET SCREW – 85732

PHENOLIC INSERT – 85735

THRUST BEARING – T12–850

SPACER MOTOR
COUPLING – 86845

85732
HARD LIMIT SWITCH – T29A–144

SOFT LIMIT SWITCH – T29A–132

FIGURE 159 VERTICAL MOTOR COUPLING

Philips Medical Systems. Confidential and Proprietary information. Refer to Title Page.
 LINEAR BEARING ASS’Y – 88938
BELT MTG. BRACKET – 97988

FLEX CABLE BRACKET – 97996

DRIVE BELT CONNECTOR – 97989

BELT CLAMP – 97990

DRIVE BELT – 86787
97988

SCREW – S619–37

FIGURE 160 PATIENT SUPPORT ASSEMBLY – 171850A

Philips Medical Systems. Confidential and Proprietary information. Refer to Title Page.
Gantry Parts

178989 GANTRY
DISPLAY ASSEMBLY

312666 TOP PANEL

312971 CONTROL
PANEL ASSEMBLY
(LEFT)
312972 CONTROL
PANEL ASSEMBLY
(RIGHT)

EMERGENCY STOP SWITCH?

CT0128

FIGURE 161 GANTRY TOUCH PANEL CONTROLS

Philips Medical Systems. Confidential and Proprietary information. Refer to Title Page.
 312861 FRONT UPPER PANEL
178986 FRONT CONE (not shown)

761–7180–0717
OPERATIONAL
PANEL COVER,
761–7180–0618 OPERATIONAL
LEFT (Haifa part)
PANEL COVER, RIGHT (Haifa part)

LEFT PANEL

312862 FRONT LOWER PANEL 311162?? RIGHT COLUMN COVER

FIGURE 162 GANTRY COVERS

Philips Medical Systems. Confidential and Proprietary information. Refer to Title Page.
312794 RIGHT REAR PANEL 312795 LEFT REAR PANEL

FIGURE 163 REAR PANELS

Philips Medical Systems. Confidential and Proprietary information. Refer to Title Page.
T29–325 (?)–
GULLWING
PUSH/PULL
SWITCH

– FUSE,
30A, 600V (LOCATED
ON SERVO AMP

178985
SERVO DRIVE
ASSEMBLY

311247 – RIGHT
AIR DUCT

311242 – BLOWER
311248 – LEFT ASSEMBLY
AIR DUCT
178148 – DETECTOR
MODULE, CONTAINS
174638 – DETECTOR
MOTHERBOARD
CT0133

FIGURE 164 FRONT VIEW OF ACQSIM CT GANTRY

Philips Medical Systems. Confidential and Proprietary information. Refer to Title Page.
 178920 SMALL RHINO 6.5A X-RAY TUBE #CTR1793RGQ
DRIVES RELAY
BRD
362059 TUBE CRADLE ASS’Y
XRAY
CONTROL MODULE 362058 TUBE SHELF

HIGH VOLTAGE
ASSEMBLY (400R)

178979–
COLLIMATOR
ASSEMBLY

312569 POWER 312567 SIGNAL

BRUSH BLOCK BRUSH BLOCK

178893–INVERTER
CHASSIS CRX400RA

178369 AC INPUT CHASSIS

W/ HSS STARTER

FIGURE 165 ACQSIM CT GANTRY – ROTATING SECTION

Philips Medical Systems. Confidential and Proprietary information. Refer to Title Page.
 178962 LASER
“Z” BRACKET (2)
83952 LASER
MODULE (2)
178961 LASER
“L” BRACKET, HORIZONTAL
T80S–1031 LASER
MODULE, HORIZONTAL

178960 LASER
“L” BRACKET, VERTICAL
T80S–1030 LASER
MODULE, VERTICAL

FIGURE 166 ACQSIM CT LASERS

Philips Medical Systems. Confidential and Proprietary information. Refer to Title Page.
178151 – 8 KVA
UTILITY
TRANSFORMER – MOTOR
CONTROLLER

178662 – ZERO
INTERRUPTER
BOARD 178032 – FUSE
CONTACTOR
ASSEMBLY
362252 – DC
POWER PANEL

T27A–168– (8)
FUSES, MDQ–3, T86E–223
3A, 250V (ON 1.1 KVA
POWER PANEL) TRANSFORMER
(?)

178810– AC
CONTROL
PANEL

178980 REAR CONE

– 3 PHASE,
480V
TRANSFORMER,
8KVA

C0134

FIGURE 167 GANTRY – REAR

Philips Medical Systems. Confidential and Proprietary information. Refer to Title Page.
 CTCC 174650 174654 PMDC (OLD)
178990 PMDC (NEW)
GPUC 178598

DSCC 174652 PSDC 362232

SCLC 362233 DPPC 174651
VFSC (4) 174657 VFSC (4) 174657

REAR VIEW
FRONT VIEW

Note: Remove boards with PC board

ejector, part number 312874. ––>

FIGURE 168 ACQSIM CT GANTRY CARDFILE ASSEMBLY – 362226

Philips Medical Systems. Confidential and Proprietary information. Refer to Title Page.
 FIGURE 169 AC CONTROL PCB – 178253

Philips Medical Systems. Confidential and Proprietary information. Refer to Title Page.
 –SOFT
LIMIT SWITCH

–HARD
LIMIT SWITCH

T84D–121–
PULLEY

–TILT T26A–77
AUX PCB ASS’Y TIMING BELT

T6K–555
POTENTIO–
METER
174988 –DYNAMIC
BRAKE ASS’Y

311217 TILT
ACTUATOR

–
311216 TILT LEFT COLUMN RIGHT COLUMN LIFT SWITCH
ACTUATOR – LIFT SWITCH

FIGURE 170 TILT ASSEMBLY

Philips Medical Systems. Confidential and Proprietary information. Refer to Title Page.
 177851 XSC+
XSC+ SLIP
PCB ASSEMBLY
RING FUSE, 62mA

FIGURE 171 XSC PLUS CONTROL MODULE (PART A)

Philips Medical Systems. Confidential and Proprietary information. Refer to Title Page.
 + 5V
POWER SUPPLY

XSC+
15V
POWER
SUPPLY

FIGURE 172 XSC PLUS CONTROL MODULE (PART B)

Philips Medical Systems. Confidential and Proprietary information. Refer to Title Page.
AcQSim CT Operator Console Parts
ENGLISH KEYBOARD 178918 (178234 OLD)
ENGLISH KEYBOARD UDW 178919
GERMAN KEYBOARD 178918–A 96803 – DISPLAY MONITOR
GERMAN KEYBOARD UDW 178919–A
CANADIAN KEYBOARD IS US W/ P/N 312729

83857 KEYBOARD EXT. CABLE

1XXXXX OPERATOR
INTERCOM ASSEMBLY

ACQIMAGE
CABINET
178220
XXXXX – XXXXX
MOUSE PAD OPERATOR
312733 – DESK
MOUSE

DISPLAY
83848 TOWER
OPERATOR 178927
CHAIR

FIGURE 173 SECTION THREE – COMPLETE OPERATOR CONSOLE

Philips Medical Systems. Confidential and Proprietary information. Refer to Title Page.
 312918 – DISK
DRIVE COVER

178656–
FRONT COVER ASS’Y,
INCLUDES:
312222
312249
312918

312249 – FASCIA

INTERNAL VIEW OF
FRONT COSMETIC
COVER

311686 –
ANTI TIP BAR
312222 – BEZEL,
DECORATIVE

FIGURE 174 DISPLAY TOWER, (178927) – FRONT COSMETIC COVER ASSEMBLY

Philips Medical Systems. Confidential and Proprietary information. Refer to Title Page.
 312967–TOP COVER 312214
FILTER

178666–UPPER
REAR COVER
178656 – FAN
ASSEMBLY
312968– LEFT/RIGHT-
SIDE COVER

178667–REAR
AC PANEL
ASSEMBLY

312968– LEFT/RIGHT-
83840– SIDE COVER
FRONT
COVER

FIGURE 175 DISPLAY TOWER COVERS (no components shown, excluding cosmetic cover)

Philips Medical Systems. Confidential and Proprietary information. Refer to Title Page.
For 178659 UZX Host
Assembly detail, see
Figure 178.

81739– CD ROM DRIVE

310558– 8MM TAPE DRIVE

For 178665 Power
T27A–1001–
Distribution Chassis
F1, 1A
detail, see Figure 177.
(ON INT PWR
MOD.)

174894– INTERCOM
POWER MODULE ASS’Y 96264– 18 GB
DISK DRIVES
174670– INTERCOM
MIXER ASSEMBLY

362050– SYSTEM POWER

CONTROLLER

178669–POWER
SUPPLY ASSEMBLY T28A–1001– CASTERS

FIGURE 176 DISPLAY TOWER – SIDE, INNER FRONT AND REAR COVERS REMOVED

Philips Medical Systems. Confidential and Proprietary information. Refer to Title Page.
 174894– INTERCOM POWER MODULE ASS’Y

174670– INTERCOM MIXER ASSEMBLY

362050– SYSTEM POWER CONTROLLER

178669–POWER
SUPPLY ASSEMBLY

FIGURE 177 POWER DISTRIBUTION CHASSIS, 178665

Philips Medical Systems. Confidential and Proprietary information. Refer to Title Page.
 178658 PERIPHERAL FAN ASSEMBLY

312221 FRAME BUFFER

312850 PCI FAST ETHERNET

178659 UZX HOST ASSEMBLY
(SEE DETAIL AT RIGHT) 312849 PCI AUDIO INTERFACE
311929 128MB DIMM MEMORY (8)

311927 SPARC 444MHZ

MOTHERBOARD

FIGURE 178 DISPLAY TOWER – 178659 ULTRA ZX HOST ASSEMBLY AND DETAIL

Philips Medical Systems. Confidential and Proprietary information. Refer to Title Page.
 83894– FRONT TOP COVER

83894– FRONT LOWER COVER

FIGURE 179 ACQIMAGE CABINET – FRONT

Philips Medical Systems. Confidential and Proprietary information. Refer to Title Page.
 83889 – TOP COVER

178224 – ACQIMAGE DISK ASS’Y

310374– CP (311283 DISK DRIVES – 2)
(IN BACK OF HUB) 178142– BP
178270 – PROGRAMMED VERSION

178064–A– AP
96242– HUB
(IN FRONT OF CP) 178141–D – GAM

83888– LEFT 83888– RIGHT

SIDE COVER
OPEN SIDE COVER

83885– FAN FILTER

T93A–1003– DC FAN, 24VDC, .5A

(SIX INSIDE THIS FAN TRAY)
FAN TRAY

FIGURE 180 ACQIMAGE CABINET – ACQIMAGE BOARDS – (TYPICAL ASSEMBLY)

Philips Medical Systems. Confidential and Proprietary information. Refer to Title Page.
 LEFT REAR SIDE RIGHT REAR SIDE

T19A–1005–
RELAY, SPDT, 178155–
24VDC TRANSITION
(INSIDE AC MODULE PCB
CHASSIS)

FIGURE 181 RECON TOWER – RIGHT AND LEFT REAR, INSIDE

Philips Medical Systems. Confidential and Proprietary information. Refer to Title Page.
 T27B–1002– CIRCUIT BREAKER, 15A

T36G–1011– TWIST LOCK

T36G–1012– TWIST LOCK FLANGE, 30A
RECEPTACLE, 30A NEM

FIGURE 182 RECON TOWER – REAR OUTSIDE

Philips Medical Systems. Confidential and Proprietary information. Refer to Title Page.
 83889– TOP COVER

83893– VME BACKPLANE

178221 POWER SUPPLY ASSY (OLD)

CONSISTS OF T99A–1005 (3.3V) AND
T99A–1004 (5V, +12V, –12V)

174648– J3 POWER DISTRIBUTION PCB

178826 POWER SUPPLY ASSY (OLD)
CONSISTS OF T99A–1021 QUAD
OUTPUT POWER SUPPLY

362402 POWER SUPPLY ASSY (NEW)

CONSISTS OF 314095 FOUR
OUTPUT POWER SUPPLY T27A–61– FUSE,
4A,SB, 3AG, 250V

FIGURE 183 RECON TOWER – REAR INSIDE

Philips Medical Systems. Confidential and Proprietary information. Refer to Title Page.
 T99A–1005– POWER SUPPLY – 3.3 V
(PART OF 178221 P.S. ASSY – OLD) T36S–343– DUPLEX
REPLACED BY 362042 P.S. ASSY RECEPTACLE, 15/20A
REFER TO PREVIOUS FIGURE

T99A–1004– POWER SUPPLY – +/– 12V, +5V

(PART OF 178221 P.S. ASSY – OLD)
REPLACED BY 362042 P.S. ASSY
REFER TO PREVIOUS FIGURE

FIGURE 184 RECON TOWER, INSIDE, FROM TOP

Philips Medical Systems. Confidential and Proprietary information. Refer to Title Page.
CONSOLE ASSEMBLY CABLES

NOTE
Below is a list of external cables and AcQImage internal cables.
Cabling connection details can be found in the Installation manual.

CABLE CABLE CABLE FROM LOCATION AND TO LOCATION AND

NUMBER LENGTH DESCRIPTION CONNECTOR CONNECTOR
L11038 50 FT. Gantry Signal Cable Gantry Backplane, J103 AcQImage CabinetJ1193
L11038–A 25 FT. (Use P1193 end)

L11036 50 FT. Gantry Data (Ribbon) Gantry Backplane, J101 AcQImage Cabinet
L11036–A 25 FT. Backplane, #11 on J2

L11037 50 FT. Gantry Power Cable Gantry Left Column, AcQImage Cabinet,
L11037–A 25 FT. TB12 J1100

L11039 50 FT. Ethernet Cable –100 AcQImage Cabinet, Display Cabinet, SUN
Base T4 J1195 Motherboard, J1252
L11039–A 10 FT. (Run inside cabinet)
L11040 50 FT. Power Cable AcQImage Cabinet, Display Cabinet, J1200
L11040–A 10 FT. J1101

L11041 50 FT. Display Signal Cable AcQImage Cabinet, Display Cabinet, J1211
J1194
L11041–A 10 FT. (Use P1194 end)
L7161 12 FT. Couch Signal Cable Couch Control Assembly Gantry Backplane, J108
PCB, P402
L7272 16 FT. Couch Power Cable Couch Control Assembly Gantry Left Column,
PCB, P417 TB13
FT. RAMiX to I/O CP – bottom connector Inside of J1195 I/O port
L11043 FT. Internal Ethernet 10MB GAM, AP, BP front Ethernet Hub
L11051 FT. SCSI Data (GAM) External GAM connector Disk Drive
312257 –– SCSI Terminator Physical end of SCSI bus ––

Philips Medical Systems. Confidential and Proprietary information. Refer to Title Page.
Detector Cable Assembly

Ultra Z AcQSim CT
MB#8, 5, 2, 11 MB#8, 4, 12
J14 V/F_4 (J2) (J2) V/F_8 (J2)
J13 V/F_4 (J1) J13 V/F_8 (J1)
J12 V/F_3 (J2) J12 V/F_7 (J2)
J11 V/F_3 (J1) J11 V/F_7 (J1)

MB#7, 4, 1, 10 MB#7, 3, 11
J14 V/F_2 (J2) J14 V/F_6 (J2)
J13 V/F_2 (J1) J13 V/F_6 (J1)
J12 V/F_1 (J2) J12 V/F_5 (J2)
J11 V/F_1 (J1) J11 V/F_5 (J1)

MB#6, 3, 12, 9 MB#6, 2, 10

J14 V/F_6 (J2) J14 V/F_4 (J2)
J13 V/F_6 (J1) J13 V/F_4 (J1)
J12 V/F_5 (J2) J12 V/F_3 (J2)
J11 V/F_5 (J1) J11 V/F_3 (J1)

MB#5, 1, 9
J14 V/F_2 (J2)
J13 V/F_2 (J1)
J12 V/F_1 (J2)
J11 V/F_1 (J1)

Philips Medical Systems. Confidential and Proprietary information. Refer to Title Page.
Spare Parts Kit – part number 174983

Part Number Description Qty Part Number Description Qty

T27A–212 Fuse, 2.5A 5 T80MB–358 Air Flow Detector 1
T27A–232 Fuse, 35A 3 XT27A–12/01 Fuse, 10A 250V Ceramic SBlpkg 1
T27A–233 Fuse, 4A 5 XT27A–15/01 Fuse, 2A (5/pkg) 1
T27A–234 Fuse, 1A 5 XT27A–18/01 Fuse, 15A (5/pkg) 1
T27A–235 Fuse, 40A 600V DE TD 3 XT27A–192/01 Fuse, 5A (5/pkg) 1
T27A–237 Fuse, KLKD–30A 3 XT27A–26/01 Fuse, 0.5A (5/pkg) 1
T29–325 Switch Front InterIock 2 XT27A–31/01 Fuse, 1A 250V Glass SB (5/pkg) 1
T29A–27 Switch 1 XT27A–42/01 Fuse, 0.25A (5/pkg) 1
T29F–26 Switch Thermo 1 XT27A–57/01 Fuse, 2A 250V Glass SB (5/pkg) 1
T29F–29 Switch Thermo 1 XT27A–60/01 Fuse, 3A 250V Glass SB (5/pkg) 1
T29J–149 Switch Lockwash (5/pkg) 5 XT27A–96/01 Fuse, 10A (10/pkg) 1
T29J–156 Switch Limit 1 Pole 1 171956 Phantom Water Bottle 1
T36S–45 Connector 1 375270 Plano Box #1152 1
T48S–1 Wire 30GA Blue 50ft 50ft 398853 Daisy Chain (25pcs/pkg) 1
T66–200 Cable Clamp #3484–1000 10 77683 DC#4 Compound 5.3oz. 1
T66G–1 Tie–Wraps (Cable Ties 100/pkg) 1 81731 Velcro Tie–wraps 1
T66G–2 Tie–Wraps (Wire Ties 100/pkg) 1 87678 Shim Kit 1
T66G–35 Mounting Plate 25 S301–115 Adhesive, Loctite #609 1
T66G–36 Mounting Plate 25 S301–145 Adhesive, Loctite #242 1
T66G–38 Tie–Wraps (100/pkg) 1 S301–181 Adhesive, Loctite #416 1
T66G–44 Tie–Wrap Clamp 10 S301–196 Adhesive, Loctite #425 1
T66G–48 Tie–Wrap Holder 25 T19A–295 Relay pbkup 14a15 24v 1
T80–391 Bridge Rectifier 1 T19A–325 Relay kup I 4a3 5 2
T80–546 Bridge 2A 200V 1 T19A–352 Solid State Relay 1
T80–555 Bridge 1 T19A–386 Solid State Relay ct6 1

Philips Medical Systems. Confidential and Proprietary information. Refer to Title Page.
Part Number Description Qty Part Number Description Qty
T19A–492 Solid State Relay 25amp 1 T27A–168 Fuse, 3A 500V DE TD 5
T19A–494 Aux Contact 1 T27A–174 Fuse, 3.15A 250V TD 5
T19A–498 Relay Contact 3c 1 T27A–175 Fuse, 1A 250V Quick Act 5
T19A–500 Solid State Relay 1 T27A–176 Fuse, 30A 600V 2
T19A–502 Relay DIP 4 1 T27A–197 Fuse, 8A 250V Glass 3
T19A–503 Relay DIP 4 1
T19A–535 Relay 115VAC 1
T19A–540 Relay Contact 1
T19A–551 Solid State Relay 1
T2–935 Screw, Self–Locking 5
T27–66 Fuse, Tubular 0.062 5
T27–89 Fuse, Micro 0.062A 5
T27–90 Fuse, Micro 0.25A 5
T27A–96 Fuse, I OA 5
T27A–100 Fuse, I OA T.D. 5
T27A–114 Fuse, Holder 30A 2
T27A–117 Fuse, 5A 250V Glass SB 5
T27A–122 Fuse, 5A 250V SB 5
T27A–143 Fuse, 0.075A 250V Glass SB 5
T27A–145 Fuse, 6.25A 5
T27A–148 Fuse, 15A 500V TD 5
T27A–149 Fuse, 5A 500V TD 1
T27A–157 Fuse, 25A 500V DE TD 5
T27A–159 Fuse, 6A 500V non delay 5
T27A–161 Fuse, 7A 250V Clip Type 5
T27A–166 Fuse, 20A 60OVDC non tim 4

Philips Medical Systems. Confidential and Proprietary information. Refer to Title Page.
REPAIR / REPLACEMENT

PATIENT SUPPORT

GANTRY

CONSOLE

Philips Medical Systems. Confidential and Proprietary information. Refer to Title Page.
 AcQSIM CT – Patient Support Components Repair

PATIENT SUPPORT COVERS

CARBON TOP

TAPE SWITCH

SUPPORT ROLLER

BEARING – CARBON TOP

TAPE SWITCH – FOOT

HORIZ DRIVE MOTOR

HORIZ DRIVE BELT

HORIZ RESOLVER

HORIZ POSITION POTENTIOMETER

HORIZ TIMING BELT

HORIZ HARD LIMIT SWITCH

VERTICAL DRIVE MOTOR

VERTICAL BRAKE

VERTICAL TRANSDUCER

VERTICAL LIMIT SWITCH

CONTROL PCB

BALLSCREW

Philips Medical Systems. Confidential and Proprietary information. Refer to Title Page.
PATIENT SUPPORT COVERS

Introduction: This procedure is used to remove and replace all Patient Support covers.

NOTE
Two service persons are recommended to perform these procedures.

Tools Required: 1. FSE Tool Kit

Estimated Time: 45 min.

TELESCOPING BASE COVER REMOVAL (FULL DOWN POSITION; PREFERRED METHOD):

WARNING
THE TELESCOPING BASE COVERS ARE HEAVY AND ARE HELD ONTO THE
SUBFRAME BY FOUR SCREWS. REMOVE THE MOUNTING SCREWS ONLY
WHEN THE PATIENT SUPPORT IS AT ITS LOWEST POSITION OR ONLY AFTER
THE TELESCOPING BASE COVERS ARE PROPERLY AND SECURELY BLOCKED.
FAILURE TO COMPLY CAN RESULT IN DAMAGE TO EQUIPMENT AND/OR
SERIOUS INJURY TO PERSONNEL.

NOTE
For most Removal/Replacement and Calibration procedures, only the top section of the
Telescoping Base Covers need be removed.

1. Apply Gantry power. Refer to the PowerUp/PowerDown procedure.

2. Lower the Patient Support to its lowest position with the Gantry Control Panel Switches.

Philips Medical Systems. Confidential and Proprietary information. Refer to Title Page.
 WARNING
USE EXTREME CAUTION WHEN OPERATING OR WORKING ON EQUIPMENT
WITH COVERS REMOVED. DANGEROUS VOLTAGES ARE EXPOSED WHEN THE
GANTRY COVERS ARE REMOVED. FAILURE TO COMPLY CAN CAUSE SERIOUS
INJURY OR DEATH TO PERSONNEL.

3. Remove the four screws and Washers that attach the Telescoping Base Cover Panels to the Subframe. Refer to Figure 185.

Left Hand Panel

Right Hand
Panel

Ground Lug

Ground Lug

Mounting Screws
and Washers (4)

FIGURE 185 PATIENT SUPPORT TELESCOPING BASE COVERS

Philips Medical Systems. Confidential and Proprietary information. Refer to Title Page.
4. Using the Gantry Control Panel Switches, raise the Patient Support approximately 10 inches to allow access to internal cables.
5. Remove Gantry power. Refer to the PowerUp/PowerDown procedure.
6. Remove the two screws from both Outer Cover ends (front & rear, 4 total). Refer Figure 185.
7. Disconnect the two Ground Wires connected to the inside Panel surfaces. Refer to Figure 186. Tag the Panels left and right. Carefully
separate the Panels and slide them out to the sides. Store the Covers in a secure area until reinstallation is required.
Grounded to
Sub-Frame

JJJJJJ
JJJJJ
Ó Ó JJ Left

JJJJJJ
Ó
JJJJJJJ
JJJJJJ
JJJJJJJ
ÓÓJJ
JJ
Ó
JJJJJJÓ
JJJJJJJ
JJJJJJ JJ
JJJJJJ
JJJJJJJ
JJJJJJ
JJJJJJJ JJ
Ó
Ground Lug

JJJJJJ
JJJJJJJ
JJJJJJ
JJJJJJJ
JJJJJJJ
JJJJJJ
JJJJJJJ ÜÜ
JJJJJJ
JJJJJJJ Ü
Ü
Front

JJJJJJ
JJJJJJJ
ÜÜ
Flat
Braided
JJJJJJJ
ÜÜ
Cable
JJJJJJJ
JJJJJJJ
Same on
Both Sides Note

JJJJJJJ
JJJJJJ Remove the ground

JJJJJJJ
JJJJJJ
JJJJJJJ
JJJJJJJ
wires only from the

JJJJJJ
JJJJJJJ
JJJJJJ
covers that are to

JJJJJJJ
JJJJJJ
JJJJJJJ
JJJJJJ Ó
JJ
be removed.

JJJJJJ
JJJJJJJ
JJJJJJJJ
JJJJJJ
JJJJJJJ
JJJJJJ JJ
Ó
JJJJJJJ
JJJJJJ
Ó Ó JJ
JJJJJJ
JJJJJ JJ
JJJJJ
FIGURE 186 TELESCOPING BASE COVERS – GROUND CONNECTIONS
Right

8. Repeat steps 6. and 7. to remove the remaining cover sections.

Philips Medical Systems. Confidential and Proprietary information. Refer to Title Page.
TELESCOPING BASE COVER REMOVAL (AT ANY RAISED POSITION OTHER THAN FULL DOWN):

9. Remove Gantry power. Refer to the PowerUp/PowerDown procedure.

10. Block the Telescoping Panels under the second Panel and the third Panel from the top. Place Blocks at the front and rear of each side
Figure 187 .

Top Panels

Second Panels

Support
Blocks

FIGURE 187 TELESCOPING PANELS BLOCKED BEFORE REMOVAL

11. Remove the four Screws and Washers that attach the Telescoping Base Cover Panels to the Subframe. Refer Figure 185.
12. Remove the two Screws from both ends of the Top Panels (front & rear, 4 total). Figure 185.

Philips Medical Systems. Confidential and Proprietary information. Refer to Title Page.
13. Carefully separate the Panels and remove Ground Wires connected to the inside Panel surfaces. Tag the Panels left and right and store
them in a safe place.
14. Repeat steps 12. and 13. for the second Panel. Carefully slide the Panels out to the sides removing the Blocks for that layer in the
process. DO NOT remove the blocks supporting the next lower layer.
15. Repeat steps 12. through 15. for the remaining Panels to be removed.

CAUTION
GROUND STRAP CABLES MAY BE SECURED TO THE INSIDE OF THE PATIENT
SUPPORT COVERS. DURING COVER ASSEMBLY, RE–SECURE ALL CABLES AND
WIRES EXACTLY AS THEY WERE. FAILURE TO COMPLY MAY RESULT IN SEVERE
DAMAGE TO THE EQUIPMENT.

TELESCOPING BASE COVER REPLACEMENT:

16. Install the Patient Support Telescoping Base Covers by reversing the steps of Telescoping Base Cover Removal (at the full down or
raised position).

FRONT COVER REMOVAL:

17. Remove the two Phillips Head Screws from the underside of the front Cover. See Figure 188.
18. Remove the four Phillips Head Screws on the front side of the front Cover while holding the Cover.

FRONT COVER REPLACEMENT:

19. Install the Patient Support front Cover by reversing steps 17. and 18.

REAR COVER REMOVAL:

20. Remove the two Phillips Head Screws from underneath the Sub–frame that secure the rear Cover. See Figure 188.
21. Remove the rear Cover by pulling down and then out.

Philips Medical Systems. Confidential and Proprietary information. Refer to Title Page.
 Carbon
Top Side Front Cover
Cover
Horizontal
Drive Cover

Left Hand
Cover

Right
Mounting Hand
Screws (2) Cover

Foot
Switch
Cover

Rear Cover

FIGURE 188 PATIENT SUPPORT COVERS

Philips Medical Systems. Confidential and Proprietary information. Refer to Title Page.
REAR COVER REPLACEMENT:

22. Install the Patient Support rear Cover by reversing steps 20. and 21.

HORIZONTAL DRIVE COVER REMOVAL:

23. Remove the four Pan Head Screws, Lock Washers, and Flat Washers from underneath the Table at the rear end, to gain access to
the Horizontal Drive. Refer to Figure 188.

HORIZONTAL DRIVE REPLACEMENT:

24. Install the Horizontal Drive Cover by reversing step 23.

CARBON TOP SIDE COVERS (LEFT AND RIGHT) REMOVAL:

25. Position the Carbon Top by hand fully into the Gantry. This is required for some older Side Cover designs.
26. Remove the two Mounting Screws that attach the Carbon Top Side Cover to the J–Bracket. Refer to Figure 188.
27. Remove the Carbon Top Side Cover.

CARBON TOP SIDE COVERS REPLACEMENT:

28. Replace the Carbon Top Side Cover by reversing steps 25. through 27. Refer to the Horizontal Drive Belt repair procedure.

RAIL COVERS (LEFT AND RIGHT) REMOVAL:

29. Remove the rear–most front cover Screw that secures the front Cover and Side Rail to the Sub–frame. Refer to Figure 188.
30. Move the Carbon top by hand until it is against its front Mechanical Stop.
31. Remove the Patient Support rear Cover. Refer to Rear Cover Removal in this procedure.
32. Remove the Flat Head Screws from the underside of the Rail Cover. If both Rail Covers are removed at the same time, tag them left
and right. See Figure 188.
33. Slide the Rail Cover toward the rear until it is clear of the overhanging Carbon top Side Cover.
34. Remove the Rail Cover.

Philips Medical Systems. Confidential and Proprietary information. Refer to Title Page.
CARBON TOP SIDE REPLACEMENT:
35. Install the Patient Support Rail Covers by reversing steps 29. through 34.

FOOT SWITCH COVER REMOVAL:

36. Apply Gantry power. Refer to the PowerUp/PowerDown procedure.
37. Tilt the Gantry to +5_ (degrees) with the Gantry Control Panel Switches.
38. Remove Gantry power. Refer to the PowerUp/PowerDown procedure.
39. Remove the two screws and Washers that attach the Foot Switch Cover. Firmly grasp the Foot Switch with both hands and pull the
Cover straight up. See Figure 189.

WARNING
USE EXTREME CAUTION WHEN OPERATING OR WORKING ON EQUIPMENT
WITH COVERS REMOVED. DANGEROUS VOLTAGES ARE EXPOSED WHEN THE
GANTRY COVERS ARE REMOVED. FAILURE TO COMPLY CAUSE SERIOUS
INJURY OR DEATH TO PERSONNEL.

TROUGH COVER

DOUBLE SIDED TAPE

BOTTOM TROUGH

TAPE SWITCH DOUBLE SIDED TAPE

FIGURE 189 FOOT SWITCH COVER

Philips Medical Systems. Confidential and Proprietary information. Refer to Title Page.
FOOT SWITCH COVER REPLACEMENT:

40. Install the Foot Switch Cover by reversing step 39.

41. Apply Gantry power. Refer to the PowerUp/PowerDown procedure.
42. Activate the Footswitch and manually move the Table to verify Footswitch operation.
43. Using the Gantry Control Panel Switches, tilt the Gantry to zero degrees.
44. Remove Gantry power. Refer to the PowerUp/PowerDown procedure.

Philips Medical Systems. Confidential and Proprietary information. Refer to Title Page.
CARBON TOP
Introduction: This procedure is used to remove and replace the Patient Support Carbon Top.

Tools Required: 1. FSE tool kit

Estimated Time: 30 min.

CARBON TOP REMOVAL PROCEDURE:

1. Prepare a padded area with soft material to rest the Carbon Top after it is removed.
2. Apply Gantry power. Refer to the PowerUp/PowerDown procedure.

WARNING
USE EXTREME CAUTION WHEN OPERATING OR WORKING ON EQUIPMENT
WITH COVERS REMOVED. DANGEROUS VOLTAGES ARE EXPOSED WHEN THE
GANTRY COVERS ARE REMOVED. FAILURE TO COMPLY CAN CAUSE SERIOUS
INJURY OR DEATH TO PERSONNEL.

3. Raise the Patient Support to its maximum height with the Gantry Control Panel Switches.
4. Remove Gantry power. Refer to the PowerUp/PowerDown procedure.
5. Manually position the Carbon Top to the front Stop.
6. Tag and remove the left and right Carbon Top Side Covers. Refer to the Patient Support Covers Removal/Replacement procedure
and Figure 190.

WARNING
SCISSOR–ACTION MECHANISM IS EXPOSED WHEN THE PATIENT SUPPORT
TELESCOPING BASE COVERS ARE REMOVED. KEEP EQUIPMENT AND
PERSONNEL AWAY FROM THE MECHANICAL ACTION OF THESE PARTS.
FAILURE TO COMPLY CAN CAUSE SERIOUS DAMAGE TO EQUIPMENT AND/OR
SERIOUS INJURY OR DEATH TO PERSONNEL.

Philips Medical Systems. Confidential and Proprietary information. Refer to Title Page.
 Carbon
Side Cover

Carbon Side Cover

Mounting Screws (2)

FIGURE 190 CARBON TOP SIDE COVERS

7. Disconnect the Tape Switch from the Ribbon Cable Assembly on the left side of the Carbon Top. See Figure 191.
8. Cut the three Tie Wraps that hold the Tape Switch Wires to the side of the J–Block.

Philips Medical Systems. Confidential and Proprietary information. Refer to Title Page.
 J–Block
Mounting
The Screws (4 Ea.)
Bearing Block

Tie Wrap
Mounts
Ribbon
Cable Assembly
Mounting
Screws (2)
Ribbon Cable
Assembly

FIGURE 191 J Block

9. Remove the sixteen screws that mount the Carbon Top to the J–Blocks.

10. Use two persons to lift the Carbon Top off the J–Blocks. Place it on the soft surface prepared earlier.

CARBON TOP REPLACEMENT:

11. Install the Patient Support Carbon Top by reversing steps 2. through 10.

Philips Medical Systems. Confidential and Proprietary information. Refer to Title Page.
TAPE SWITCH – CARBON TOP
Introduction: This procedure is used to remove and replace the Patient Support Carbon Top Tape Switch(es).

Tools Required: 1. FSE tool kit

Material Required: 1. Double–Sided Tape 1/2 in. wide (P/N 76950)

Butt Splices (P/N T18A–34, 22–16 AWG)
Scraping Tool (e.g, razor blade)

Estimated TIme: 1.0 HR.

TAPE SWITCH REMOVAL PROCEDURE:

1. Apply Gantry power. Refer to the PowerUp/PowerDown procedure.

2. Manually position the Carbon Top against its rear Mechanical Stop.
3. Using the Gantry Control Panel Switches, raise the Patient Support to its highest position.
4. Remove Gantry power. Refer to the PowerUp/PowerDown procedure.
5. Remove the Carbon Top. Refer to the Carbon Top Removal/Replacement procedure.
6. Locate the Splices where the defective Tape Switch is joined to the Wire Harness. Cut the defective Switch Wires at the Splices. See
Figure 192.
7. Remove the defective Tape Switch from the Carbon Top. The Tape Switch is held onto the Carbon Top by double–sided tape. It may
be necessary to pull the defective Switch while scraping the adhesive with a razor blade.

Philips Medical Systems. Confidential and Proprietary information. Refer to Title Page.
 Tape Switch

Butt
Splice

Location of Tape Switch

Tape Switch Butt Splices

Grommet (Ref)

FIGURE 192 BOTTOM VIEW OF CARBON TOP

TAPE SWITCH REPLACEMENT:

8. Install the replacement Tape Switch using double–sided tape to fasten it to the Carbon Top.
9. Route the Wires from the replacement Tape Switch along the same path as the defective Tape Switch.
10. Strip 1/4” of insulation from the ends of the Tape Switch Wires and the Harness Wires.
11. Connect the Tape Switch Wires to the Harness Wires using Butt Splices.

Philips Medical Systems. Confidential and Proprietary information. Refer to Title Page.
12. Tie and secure the replacement Tape Switch Wires in the same manner as the original Tape Switch Wires.
13. Install the Carbon Top. Refer to the Carbon Top Removal/Replacement procedure.

Philips Medical Systems. Confidential and Proprietary information. Refer to Title Page.
SUPPORT ROLLER
Introduction: This procedure is used to remove and replace the Patient Support Carbon Top Support Roller.

Tools Required: 1. FSE tool kit

2. Snap Ring Pliers (90 degree bend)

Estimated Time: 20 min.

SUPPORT ROLLER REMOVAL PROCEDURE:

1. Apply Gantry power. Refer to the PowerUp/PowerDown procedure.

2. Raise the Patient Support to its highest position with the Gantry Control Panel Switches if not already in this position.
3. Remove Gantry power. Refer to the PowerUp/PowerDown procedure.
4. Move the Carbon Top to the front of the Patient Support so that it does not rest on the Support Roller.
5. Remove the four Mounting Bolts and Washers from the Support Roller Bracket that fasten the Bracket to the sub frame. See
Figure 193.
6. Remove one of the Snap Rings holding the Support Roller Pin.
7. Support the Roller and push or pull the Pin out.

Philips Medical Systems. Confidential and Proprietary information. Refer to Title Page.
 Support Roller

Support Roller Pin

Snap Ring

Support Roller
Bracket

Mounting Bolts
and Washers (4)

FIGURE 193 SUPPORT ROLLER ASSEMBLY

SUPPORT ROLLER REPLACEMENT:
8. Place the new Roller in position and slide the Pin through the Bracket and Roller.

9. Replace the Snap Ring onto the Pin. Ensure Snap Ring is completely seated in the groove of the Pin.

10. Replace the four Mounting Bolts and Washers for the Support Roller Bracket and fasten the Bracket to the Carbon Top.

11. Check Roller operation by moving the Carbon Top over the Roller to ensure that the Roller moves freely.

Philips Medical Systems. Confidential and Proprietary information. Refer to Title Page.
BEARING – CARBON TOP
Introduction: This procedure is used to remove and replace the Patient Support Carbon Top Bearings.

Tools Required: 1. FSE Tool kit

Estimated TIme: 1 HR.

BEARING – CARBON TOP REMOVAL PROCEDURE:

1. Remove power and the Carbon Top. Refer to the Carbon Top Removal/Replacement procedure.

NOTE
The Patient Support should be at its maximum height with power to the system removed
due to following the Carbon Top Removal procedure.

2. Remove the Patient Support front, rear, Rail, and Horizontal Drive Covers. Refer to the Patient Support Covers Removal/Replacement
procedure.
3. Remove the front or rear Mechanical Stops (as appropriate for the bearings being replaced). Refer to Figure 194.

Philips Medical Systems. Confidential and Proprietary information. Refer to Title Page.
 Front Cover

Mechanical Stops
(2 Each Side)

Rear Cover

FIGURE 194 MECHANICAL STOPS

4. Disconnect the Horizontal Drive–Belt Connector to Belt–Hook Mounting Block from the J–block (if required). See Figure 195.
5. Remove the J–Block with the defective Bearing by sliding it off the end of the Linear Bearing Rail.

Philips Medical Systems. Confidential and Proprietary information. Refer to Title Page.
 Carbon Top
Side Cover
Mounting Screws

Carbon Top
Side Cover

Horizontal
Drive–Belt
Connector

Belt Hook

Horizontal Drive–Belt Connector

To Belt–Hook Mounting Screws (2)
Belt Hook
Screws (2)

FIGURE 195 BELT BLOCK LOCATION ON CARBON TOP

6. Remove the defective Bearing by taking out the four Screws and pulling the THK Bearing Block from the J–Block. See Figure 196 and
Figure 197.

Philips Medical Systems. Confidential and Proprietary information. Refer to Title Page.
 J–Bracket

Horizontal–Drive
Belt Connector

The Bearing
Block Mounting
Screws (4)

Horizontal–Drive
Belt Connector
Mounting Screws (3)
The Bearing Block

FIGURE 196 RIGHT REAR MOUNTING BLOCK ASSEMBLY

BEARING – CARBON REPLACEMENT:

7. Install the replacement Bearing by reversing the process in step 6.

8. Replace the J–Block by CAREFULLY sliding it back onto the Linear Bearing Rail. Care must be taken not to jar the ball bearings out
of the channels.

Philips Medical Systems. Confidential and Proprietary information. Refer to Title Page.
 The
Bearing Block
J–Block
Mounting Screws
(4 Ea.)

Tie Wrap
Mounts
Ribbon Cable
Assembly
Mounting Screws (2)

Ribbon Cable
Assembly

FIGURE 197 LEFT REAR MOUNTING BLOCK ASSEMBLY

9. Replace the Carbon Top. Refer to the Carbon Top Removal/Replacement procedure.
10. Move the Carbon Top by hand to verify smooth operation.
11. Install the Patient Support front and rear covers, Rail Covers and the Horizontal Drive Cover. Refer to the Patient Support Covers
Removal/Replacement procedure .

Philips Medical Systems. Confidential and Proprietary information. Refer to Title Page.
TAPE SWITCH – FOOT
Introduction: This procedure is used to remove and replace the Patient Support foot actuated Tape Switch.

Tools Required: 1. FSE tool kit

Material Required: 1. Double Sided Tape (P/N 76950)

Butt Splices (P/N T18A–34, 22–16 AWG)
Scraping Tool (e.g., razor blade)

3. Crimp tool

Estimated Time: 20 min.

TAPE SWITCH REMOVAL PROCEDURE:

1. Apply Gantry power. Refer to the PowerUp/PowerDown procedure.

2. Tilt the Gantry +5 degrees with the Gantry Control Panel Switches.
3. Remove Gantry power. Refer to the PowerUp/PowerDown procedure.
4. Remove the two screws and Washers that attach the Foot Switch Cover to its base. Grasp both sides of the Cover and pull it straight
off. See Figure 198.
5. The Tape Switch is held on by double–sided tape. Remove the defective Tape Switch by pulling it from the Base. Remove any tape
residue that may be on the Switch Base.
6. Cut the wires of the defective Switch(es) at the Switch Body.

Philips Medical Systems. Confidential and Proprietary information. Refer to Title Page.
 Crimp Here

Foot Switch Cover

Butt Splices

Butt Splice

Tape Switch

Cut Here

X
X

Tape Switch
X
X
Factory Butt Splice
(Leave Intact)
Tape Switch New Splices

(Before) (After)

FIGURE 198 PATIENT SUPPORT FOOT SWITCH

Philips Medical Systems. Confidential and Proprietary information. Refer to Title Page.
TAPE SWITCH REPLACEMENT:

7. Strip 1/4” of insulation from the cut leads coming from the Patient Support.
8. Strip 1/4” of insulation from the wires on the new replacement Tape Switch(es).
9. Connect the cut leads from the Patient Support cable to the leads on the replacement Tape Switch with Butt Splices.
10. Use tie wraps to secure the wires away from the Cover.
11. Apply Gantry power. Refer to the PowerUp/PowerDown procedure.
12. Verify that both sides of the Foot Switch operate to allow free–floating movement of the Carbon Top.
13. Replace the Foot Switch Cover by reversing the process in step 4.

Philips Medical Systems. Confidential and Proprietary information. Refer to Title Page.
HORIZONTAL DRIVE MOTOR
Introduction: This procedure is used to remove and replace the Patient Support Horizontal
Drive Motor.
Tools Required: 1. FSE tool kit
2. Flat thickness gauge
Material Required: 1. Tie–wraps
2. Butt Splices (P/N T–18A–34, 22–16 AWG)
Estimated Time: 30 min.

DRIVE MOTOR REMOVAL PROCEDURE:

1. Apply Gantry power. Refer to the PowerUp/PowerDown procedure.
2. Raise the Patient Support to its highest position with the Gantry Control Panel Switches.
3. Remove Gantry power. Refer to the PowerUp/PowerDown procedure.
4. Remove the rear, right Rail, and Horizontal Drive Covers. Refer to the Patient Support Covers Removal/Replacement procedure.
5. Note the Cable routing and cut all Tie Wraps that secure the Motor Cables.
6. Disconnect the Horizontal Drive Motor Cable.
7. Support the Horizontal Drive Motor and remove the four Socket Head Cap Screws and the Washers that hold the Assembly to its
Mounting Bracket. See Figure 199.
8. Remove the Horizontal Drive Motor.

NOTE
Measure the distance between the Motor Mounting Plate and the edge of the Motor
Pulley.

9. Remove the Pulley from the Motor Shaft by loosening the two Set Screws. Note the location and orientation of the Pulley on the Motor
Shaft.

Philips Medical Systems. Confidential and Proprietary information. Refer to Title Page.
10. Attach the Pulley to the new Motor Shaft in the same location as the old Pulley.

Power Connector Horizontal Drive Motor

Resolver
Cut Here
4–6 In.

Crimp Rear Pulley

Here

Motor Mounting Screws (4) Motor Mounting Bracket

Pulley

FIGURE 199 HORIZONTAL MOTOR ASSEMBLY

Philips Medical Systems. Confidential and Proprietary information. Refer to Title Page.
DRIVE MOTOR REPLACEMENT

NOTE
If the replacement Motor has a connector already attached steps 11. through 13. may
be omitted.

11. Cut the Power Connector off the old Motor as shown Figure 199.
12. Strip 1/4” of insulation from the cut leads on both the replacement Motor and the Power Connector.
13. Connect the cut Leads from the new Motor and the Connector with Butt Splices.
14. Place the Timing Belt around the Pulley and mount the replacement Horizontal Drive Motor to the Mounting Bracket with the four (4)
Socket Head Capscrews.
15. Attach the Horizontal Drive Motor Wires to the Horizontal Drive Motor Power Cable.
16. Apply Gantry power. Refer to the PowerUp/PowerDown procedure.
17. Check the operation of the Horizontal Motor using the Gantry Control Panel Switches.

WARNING
USE EXTREME CAUTION WHEN OPERATING OR WORKING ON EQUIPMENT
WITH COVERS REMOVED. DANGEROUS VOLTAGES ARE EXPOSED WHEN THE
GANTRY COVERS ARE REMOVED. FAILURE TO COMPLY CAN CAUSE SERIOUS
INJURY OR DEATH TO PERSONNEL.

18. Route the Horizontal Drive Motor Cable as it was in step 5. and replace all Tie Wraps that were removed.
19. Remove Gantry power. Refer to the PowerUp/PowerDown procedure in the Introduction section.
20. Replace the rear, right Rail, and Horizontal Drive Covers. Refer to the Patient Support Covers Removal/Replacement procedure.

Philips Medical Systems. Confidential and Proprietary information. Refer to Title Page.
HORIZONTAL DRIVE BELT
Introduction: This procedure is used to remove and replace the Patient Support Horizontal
Drive Belt.

Tools Required: 1. FSE tool kit

Estimated Time: 45 min.

DRIVE BELT REMOVAL PROCEDURE:

1. Apply Gantry power. Refer to the PowerUp/PowerDown procedure.

2. Raise the Patient Support to its highest position with the Gantry Control Panel Switches.
3. Remove Gantry power. Refer to the PowerUp/PowerDown procedure.
4. Remove the right Side Rail Cover and the right Carbon Top Side Cover. Refer to the Patient Support Covers Removal/Replacement
procedure.
5. Manually move the Carbon Top to position the Belt Hook approximately midway between the Belt Pulleys. See Figure 200.

Philips Medical Systems. Confidential and Proprietary information. Refer to Title Page.
 Temporary Reference Mark
Front J–Bracket

Belt Hook

Front Pulley Temporary Reference Mark

Rear Pulley
with Mark at
12:00 Position

Front J–Bracket

Horizontal Drive–Belt Connector

Horizontal Drive–Belt
Connector to Belt Hook Mounting
Screws (2)

FIGURE 200 HORIZONTAL DRIVE–BELT ASSEMBLY

6. Place a temporary reference mark on the Sub–Frame in line with the front edge of the Belt Hook. Place a mark on the front Pulley in
the 12:00 position. Refer to Figure 200.

Philips Medical Systems. Confidential and Proprietary information. Refer to Title Page.
7. Place a temporary reference mark on the edge of the lower Belt half at the center (not a critical dimension) and a corresponding mark
on the side Channel.
8. Disconnect the Belt Hook from the Horizontal Drive–Belt Connector by removing the two Mounting screws and Washers. Refer to
Figure 200.
9. Loosen the four front Pulley Mounting Plate Screws. Loosen Belt tension by screwing the Horizontal Drive Belt Adjusting Bolt into the
Thrust Block until the Belt Hook Assembly rests on the lower Belt surface. See Figure 201.

Located Behind
Right Channel

Front Rear

Belt Hook

Thrust Block

Belt Tension Adj. Bolt

Viewed from Left Side
of Patient Support
FIGURE 201 BELT TENSION ADJUST
10. Carefully remove the Belt and Belt Hook Assembly from both Pulleys.

Philips Medical Systems. Confidential and Proprietary information. Refer to Title Page.
11. Remove the two Screws that attach the top and bottom clamp of the Belt Hook Assembly. See Figure 202.

Belt Ends
Top Clamp (Channel)

Belt

Bottom Clamp
Belt Section

Screws (2)

FIGURE 202 Belt Hook Assembly

DRIVE BELT REPLACEMENT:

12. Lay the replacement Belt and the defective Belts on a flat surface side–by–side with the ends aligned.
13. Place a temporary mark on the edge of the replacement Belt to align with the ”near center” mark on the defective Belt.
14. Assemble the replacement Belt and Belt Hook.

Philips Medical Systems. Confidential and Proprietary information. Refer to Title Page.
15. Position the replacement Belt Assembly in the right Channel so the ”near center” marks align.
16. Keeping the ”near center” marks aligned, carefully loop the Belt over the end Pulleys. Verify that the mark on the front Pulley is in the
12:00 position.
17. Tighten (or loosen) the Belt Tension Adjusting Bolt until the Belt Hook Assembly just rests on the lower Belt Surface. Place a temporary
reference mark on the Bolt Head. Turn the Tension Adjusting Bolt two and one half (2 1/2) complete turns tightening the Belt. This
is the correct Belt tension setting.
18. Manually move the Carbon Top until the Horizontal Drive–Belt Connector aligns with the holes in the Belt Hook Assembly. The front
of the Belt Hook should be in line with the temporary reference mark made in step 6.
19. Secure the Belt Hook Assembly to the Horizontal Drive–Belt Connecting Bracket with the two Horizontal Drive–Belt Connector to Belt
Hook Mounting Screws.
20. Calibrate Horizontal Position using the CC (Couch Calibration) in GPUSPY manual.
21. Replace the right Side Rail and right Carbon Top Side Covers. Refer to the Patient Support Covers Removal/Replacement procedure.

Philips Medical Systems. Confidential and Proprietary information. Refer to Title Page.
HORIZONTAL RESOLVER
Introduction: This procedure is used to remove and replace the Patient Support Horizontal Resolver. Return the information
sheet and resolver from system in the included packaging. Resolver may terminate with either connector
contacts or bare leads. Follow the appropriate procedure.

NOTE
Two service persons are recommended to perform this procedure.

Tools Required: FSE Toolkit

Material Required: Resolver

Time Estimate: Three hours for resolver replacement and couch calibration

INITIAL CONDITIONS:

• Patient Support rear end, right Side Rail and Horizontal Drive Covers removed. Refer to the Patient Support Covers
Removal/Replacement procedure.
• Lower telescoping covers removed. Refer to the Telescoping Base Cover Removal Procedures.
• Patient Support raised to its highest position with the Gantry Control Panel Switches.
• Gantry power removed. Refer to the PowerUp/PowerDown procedure.
• Identify and record the Resolver Wires by color and their position in Connector P408. Refer to Figure 203.
• Document locations of ty–wraps and cable routing.

Philips Medical Systems. Confidential and Proprietary information. Refer to Title Page.
 RESOLVER WIRING

RESOLVER

FIGURE 203 RESOLVER WIRING DIAGRAM

Philips Medical Systems. Confidential and Proprietary information. Refer to Title Page.
REMOVAL PROCEDURE FOR RESOLVER P/N T93N–38 (BARE LEADS)

NOTE
For resolver p/n 4535 671 04171 go to step 6 of this procedure.

1. Cut ty–wraps used to bind the Resolver Wires to other cables or structure.
2. Select a convienient location for splicing all six wires between connector P408 and the resolver. Cut the wires, leaving the P408
contacts intact.

3. Loosen, but do not remove, the three (3) Cleat Screws holding the Resolver in place. See figure below.

(3) Cleat Screws and Resolver Bracket

Retaining Washers

Resolver
Assembly

Set Screws (2)

Philips Medical Systems. Confidential and Proprietary information. Refer to Title Page.
4. Turn the Cleat Retaining Washers so the flat sides face the Resolver, then tighten the Cleat Screws.

CAUTION
EXERCISE EXTREME CARE WHILE REMOVING AND INSTALLING RESOLVER TO
PREVENT ANY BENDING OR MISALIGNMENT ON RESOLVER SHAFT.

5. Loosen the two (2) Set Screws on the Resolver Pulley. Remove the Resolver from the Pulley and away from the Bracket. Continue
at resolver installation step 1.
6. Applicable for resolver p/n 4535 671 04171. Cut ty–wraps used to bind the resolver wires to other cables or structure.
7. Remove the Resolver Wires from Connector P408. To release the Socket Contact Retention Blade, press against it with the point of
a small object, while pulling on the Wire until the Contact is clear of the connector shell. Refer to Figure 204.
8. Loosen, but do not remove, the three (3) Cleat Screws holding the Resolver in place.
9. Turn the Cleat Retaining Washers so the flat sides face the Resolver, then tighten the Cleat Screws.
10. Loosen the two (2) Set Screws on the Resolver Pulley. Remove the Resolver from the Pulley and away from the Bracket.

Philips Medical Systems. Confidential and Proprietary information. Refer to Title Page.
 Crimp

Pull Wire

Retention Blade

Socket Contact

Connector
P408

Pointed Tool

FIGURE 204 REMOVING RESOLVER PINS FROM THE CONNECTOR

Philips Medical Systems. Confidential and Proprietary information. Refer to Title Page.
RESOLVER INSTALLATION:

CAUTION
EXERCISE EXTREME CARE WHILE REMOVING AND INSTALLING RESOLVER TO
PREVENT ANY BENDING OR MISALIGNMENT ON RESOLVER SHAFT.

1. Place the Resolver into the Resolver Bracket opening.

2. Carefully insert the shaft of the replacement Resolver into the Resolver Pulley. Verify that the resolver flange is completely contacting
the mounting bracket. Equally tighten the Pulley Set Screws just enough to keep the Pulley on the shaft.

CAUTION
DO NOT BUMP OR MOVE THE RESOLVER DURING THE FOLLOWING STEPS.

3. Loosen the three Cleat Screws and turn the Cleat Retaining Washers so the flat edge faces away from the resolver. Ensure that the
Cleat Retaining Washers fit into the groove on the side of the Resolver. Refer to photograph on next page.
4. Turn the Resolver so the leads are at approximately the 10 o’clock position (as shown in photo).
5. Slightly tighten each cleat screw to assure resolver is uniformly seated to resolver bracket.

Philips Medical Systems. Confidential and Proprietary information. Refer to Title Page.
CLEAT RETAINING WASHERS INSTALLATION

Philips Medical Systems. Confidential and Proprietary information. Refer to Title Page.
6. Tighten the pulley set screws to 10 in–lbs.

NOTE
During the Horizontal Couch Calibration, the resolver may need to be rotated (reference
figure 7). Tighten resolver cleat screws sufficiently to prevent resolver housing rotation
until calibration is completed.

7. Route resolver wires as recorded in Initial Conditions paragraph (before removal). Secure wires away from moving parts with ty–wraps.
8. Refer to the Wire color and locations shown in Figure 203.

For p/n 4535 671 10171 – install the resolver leads into connector P408

For p/n T93N–38 – splice six wires to each respective wire clipped in removal step 3.
9. Calibrate Carbon Top Horizontal Position using CC (Couch Calibration).
10. When couch calibration is completed, verify Gantry power is removed. Refer to the PowerUp/PowerDown procedure.
11. Apply loctite to (3x) cleat screws at bracket interface and torque to 3–4 in–lbs.
12. Replace any remaining Patient Support Covers. Refer to the Patient Support Covers Removal/Replacement procedure.

Philips Medical Systems. Confidential and Proprietary information. Refer to Title Page.
HORIZONTAL POSITION POTENTIOMETER
Introduction: This procedure is used to remove and replace the Patient Support Horizontal Position Potentiometer.

Tools Required: 1. FSE tool kit

2. Crimper

Material Required 1. Insert Contacts (P/N T18–195, 24–20 AWG)

Estimated Time: 30 min.

POTENTIOMETER REMOVAL PROCEDURE:

1. Apply Gantry power. Refer to the PowerUp/PowerDown procedure.

2. Raise the Patient Support to its highest position with the Gantry Control Panel Switches.
3. Remove Gantry power. Refer to the PowerUp/PowerDown procedure.
4. Remove the Patient Support front end Covers. Refer to the Patient Support Covers Removal/ Replacement procedure.
5. Loosen and remove the Pan Head Screw to the Retainer Bracket and the two Set Screws to the Position Pot. Refer to Figure 205.
6. Remove the Position Pot from the Gearbelt Pulley and disconnect Connector J420.
7. Remove the Retainer Bracket from the Position Pot and cut the Tiewrap that anchors the Cable. See Figure 206.

Philips Medical Systems. Confidential and Proprietary information. Refer to Title Page.
 Retainer
Set Screws Bracket

J420

Potentiometer

FIGURE 205 HORIZONTAL DRIVE GANTRY END ASSEMBLY

NOTE
Ensure that the Pan Head Screw that passes through the Retainer Bracket does not
press against the Bracket. The purpose of this Screw is only to prevent the Retaining
Bracket from rotating. Leave a small gap during replacement.

Philips Medical Systems. Confidential and Proprietary information. Refer to Title Page.
 Locknut
Note
Pan Head The pan head screw is there to ensure that the bracket
Screw (1) does not rotate. Leave a small gap between the head of
the screw and the bracket.

Retainer Bracket

Position Pot

3 1 2

Red
Black
Brown
C0852B

Set
Screws
(2)

J420

FIGURE 206 REMOVING POSITION POTENTIOMETER

Philips Medical Systems. Confidential and Proprietary information. Refer to Title Page.
POTENTIOMETER REPLACEMENT:

8. Trim the replacement Potentiometer leads to the proper length to reach Connector J420. Strip the ends and crimp an Insert Contact
onto each lead.
9. Install the replacement Position Pot by reversing the process in step 5. through 7.
10. Calibrate the Carbon Top Horizontal Position using the CC (Couch Calibration) section of the GPUSPY manual.
11. Remove Gantry power. Refer to the PowerUp/PowerDown procedure .
12. Replace the Patient Support Covers. Refer to the Patient Support Removal/ Replacement procedure.

Philips Medical Systems. Confidential and Proprietary information. Refer to Title Page.
HORIZONTAL TIMING BELT
Introduction: This procedure is used to remove and replace the Patient Support Horizontal Timing Belt.

Tools Required: 1. FSE tool kit

Estimated Time: (30 min.)

TIMING BELT REMOVAL PROCEDURE:

1. Apply Gantry power. Refer to the PowerUp/PowerDown procedure.

2. Raise the Patient Support to its highest position with the Gantry Control Panel Switches.
3. Remove Gantry power. Refer to the PowerUp/PowerDown procedure.
4. Remove the Patient Support Gantry end and right Side Rail Covers. Refer to the Patient Support Covers Removal/Replacement
procedure, or hange the resolver bracket assembly so there is no tension on the wires.
5. Remove the Resolver as outlined in the Resolver Removal/Replacement procedure.
6. Loosen the Resolver Bracket Mounting Screw and remove the Resolver Bracket Assembly from the Horizontal Drive Motor Housing
Assembly. Refer to Figure 207.

Philips Medical Systems. Confidential and Proprietary information. Refer to Title Page.
 Resolver Bracket

Horizontal Drive Motor Resolver Bracket Mounting Screw

Resolver
Resolver Pulley

Motor Resolver Pulley

Pulley Set Screw
Horizontal Timing Belt

Housing

FIGURE 207 Horizontal Drive Assembly

7. Slide the Timing Belt off the Resolver Pulley and remove it from the Motor Pulley.

Philips Medical Systems. Confidential and Proprietary information. Refer to Title Page.
TIMING BELT REPLACEMENT

NOTE
Timing Belt tension is factory–set. Do not loosen the Horizontal Drive Motor Mounting
Screws unless absolutely necessary.

8. Slide the replacement Timing Belt over the Motor Pulley and onto the Resolver Pulley. Refer to Figure 207.
9. Install the Resolver and Bracket Assembly by reversing steps 5. and 6.
10. Calibrate Horizontal Position using the CC (Couch Calibration) section of the GPUSPY manual.
11. Remove Gantry power. Refer to the PowerUp/PowerDown procedure.
12. Replace the Patient Support Covers. Refer to the Patient Support Covers Removal/Replacement procedure.

Philips Medical Systems. Confidential and Proprietary information. Refer to Title Page.
HORIZONTAL “HARD” LIMIT SWITCH
Introduction: This procedure is used to remove and replace the Patient Support Horizontal Travel “Hard” Limit Switches.

Tools Required: 1. FSE tool kit

Estimated Time: 15 min.

LIMIT SWITCH REMOVAL PROCEDURE:

1. Apply Gantry power. Refer to the PowerUp/PowerDown procedure.

2. Raise the Patient Support to its highest position with the Gantry Control Panel Switches.
3. Remove Gantry power. Refer to the PowerUp/PowerDown procedure.
4. Remove the Patient Support right Side Rail Cover. Refer to the Patient Support Covers Removal/ Replacement procedure.
5. Manually move the Carbon Top until the Belt Hook is centered between the front and rear Pulleys.
6. Tag (if needed) and remove the Wires connected to the Switch(es) to be removed. See Figure 208.

Philips Medical Systems. Confidential and Proprietary information. Refer to Title Page.
Front Right Side Rear

LImit Switch

Switch Mounting
Screws (2)

FIGURE 208 HORIZONTAL LIMIT SWITCH ASSEMBLY

Philips Medical Systems. Confidential and Proprietary information. Refer to Title Page.
7. Remove the two Switch Mounting Screws.
8. Remove the Switch(es).

LIMIT SWITCH REPLACEMENT

9. Install the Switch(es) using the two Mounting Screws.

10. Connect the Wires to the Limit Switch(es).
11. Apply Gantry power. Refer to the PowerUp/PowerDown procedure.
12. Calibrate the Horizontal Travel Limit Switch(es). Refer to the Horizontal Travel Limit Switches procedure in the Mechanical Calibration
Manual.
13. Remove Gantry power. Refer to the PowerUp/PowerDown procedure in the Introduction section.
14. Replace the Patient Support right Side Rail Cover. Refer to the Patient Support Covers Removal/Replacement procedure.

Philips Medical Systems. Confidential and Proprietary information. Refer to Title Page.
VERTICAL DRIVE MOTOR

INTRODUCTION: This procedure is used to remove and replace the patient support vertical drive motor.

TOOLS REQUIRED: 1. FSE tool kit

MATERIAL REQUIRED: 1. Butt splices (P/N T18A–34, 22–16 AWG)

ESTIMATED TIME: 1 HR.

WARNING
DO NOT PERFORM THIS PROCEDURE IF THE VERTICAL SUPPORT BRACE IS
NOT INSTALLED. REFER TO MANDATORY LETTER #376. FAILURE TO COMPLY
MAY RESULT IN SERIOUS INJURY AND/OR DEATH TO SERVICE PERSONNEL.

VERTICAL DRIVE MOTOR REMOVAL PROCEDURE:

1. Apply gantry power. Refer to the Powerup/Powerdown procedure.

2. Lower the patient support to its lowest position with the gantry control panel switches. This step is required for cover removal by the
preferred method. If the patient support cannot be lowered, continue to step 3.

WARNING
USE EXTREME CAUTION WHEN OPERATING OR WORKING ON EQUIPMENT
WITH COVERS REMOVED. DANGEROUS VOLTAGES ARE EXPOSED WHEN THE
GANTRY COVERS ARE REMOVED. ACCIDENTAL CONTACT WITH THESE
VOLTAGES MAY CAUSE SERIOUS INJURY AND/OR DEATH TO SERVICE
PERSONNEL.

3. Remove the patient support telescoping base covers. Refer to the Patient Support Covers Removal/ Replacement procedure.

Philips Medical Systems. Confidential and Proprietary information. Refer to Title Page.
 WARNING
SCISSOR–ACTION MECHANISM IS EXPOSED WHEN THE PATIENT SUPPORT
TELESCOPING BASE COVERS ARE REMOVED. KEEP EQUIPMENT AND
PERSONNEL AWAY FROM THE MECHANICAL ACTION OF THESE PARTS.
FAILURE TO COMPLY MAY RESULT IN EQUIPMENT DAMAGE AND/OR SERIOUS
INJURY AND/OR DEATH TO SERVICE PERSONNEL.

4. Raise the patient support to its maximum height with the gantry control panel switches.
5. Locate the green safety vertical support brace mounted to face of scissor. Cut the tie–wrap that confines the brace cable and remove
the brace from the holder. Install the brace as shown in Figure 209.

WARNING
DO NOT DRIVE THE SCISSORS CARRIAGE INTO THE VERTICAL SUPPORT
BRACE. FAILURE TO COMPLY WILL CAUSE SERIOUS DAMAGE TO THE
BALLSCREW.

6. Lower the patient support slowly. Stop the scissor carriage just before it touches the brace. Do not drive carriage into brace as this
may cause misalignment of the vertical drive mechanism. See Figure 209.
7. Remove gantry power. Refer to the PowerUp/PowerDown procedure.
8. Disconnect P415 from the control pcb on the patient support control assembly.
9. Remove the vertical motor ground wire (green/yellow) from the patient support control assembly.

CAUTION
THE SET SCREWS IN THE MOTOR MOUNTING PLATE ARE FACTORY ADJUSTED.
DO NOT ATTEMPT TO ADJUST THESE SET SCREWS. FAILURE TO COMPLY MAY
CAUSE MISALIGNMENT AND SERIOUS DAMAGE TO THE MOTOR AND DRIVE
MECHANISM.

Philips Medical Systems. Confidential and Proprietary information. Refer to Title Page.
LEFT
SCISSOR

CABLE
VERTICAL
SUPPORT
BRACE AND
HOLDER

TIE WRAP
SHOULD BE C0665–A
REPLACED
AFTER
EACH USE
PLACEMENT OF VERTICAL
SUPPORT BRACE
PATIENT
SUPPORT
BASE
SCISSOR
SLIDE
BALLSCREW

FIGURE 209 VERTICAL SUPPORT BRACE HOLDER & PLACEMENT

Philips Medical Systems. Confidential and Proprietary information. Refer to Title Page.
10. Remove the four mounting plate screws and washers. See Figure 210.

WARNING
WITH THE VERTICAL MOTOR REMOVED, THE PATIENT SUPPORT IS
UNCONTROLLED AND FREE TO FALL QUICKLY. SECURE THE SCISSORS
MECHANISM WITH THE VERTICAL SUPPORT BRACE TO PREVENT BALL
SCREW MOVEMENT AND THE SUPPORT TOP FROM DROPPING. FAILURE TO
COMPLY MAY RESULT IN EQUIPMENT DAMAGE, SERIOUS INJURY OR DEATH
TO SERVICE PERSONNEL.

VERTICAL DRIVE MOTOR

MOTOR MOUNTING PLATE

SET SCREW
MOTOR MOUNTING PLATE 1/32 INCH GAP
SCREWS AND WASHERS (4)
BALLSCREW COUPLING

MOTOR COUPLING C0861B

FIGURE 210 VERTICAL DRIVE MOTOR MOUNTING PLATE SCREWS

Philips Medical Systems. Confidential and Proprietary information. Refer to Title Page.
11. Grasp the vertical motor, rotate it slightly away from the frame, and slide it to the rear of the patient support until the couplings disengage
(shaft keys, plastic insert, end pieces). Remove the motor.

12. Remove the four mounting bolts and washers from the motor side of the vertical motor mounting plate. See Figure 211.

VERTICAL DRIVE MOTOR

MOUNTING PLATE

MOUNTING BOLTS
AND WASHERS
SET SCREWS
(DO NOT ADJUST)

MOTOR SHAFT

SHAFT KEY

C0860A

FIGURE 211 VERTICAL MOTOR MOUNTING PLATE

Philips Medical Systems. Confidential and Proprietary information. Refer to Title Page.
 BRAKE MOUNTING SCREW
VERTICAL BRAKE AND LOCKWASHER (2)
ASSEMBLY

END OF
MOTOR SHAFT

TOP OF MEASURE
BRAKE HUB THIS
DISTANCE

SET SCREWS (2)

C0860B

FIGURE 212 VERTICAL BRAKE ASSEMBLY

13. Remove the vertical brake assembly and the gasket (if present). DO NOT cut the brake wires as stated in the brake procedure. Refer
to the Vertical Brake removal/replacement procedure and Figure 212.
14. Measure and record the distance from the top of the brake hub to the end of the motor shaft. Refer to Figure 212.
15. Remove the brake hub at the top of the motor.
16. Cut the motor wires 6” from connector P415. See Figure 214.
17. Loosen the set screw on the motor coupling and remove the coupling from the shaft. See Figure 213.

Philips Medical Systems. Confidential and Proprietary information. Refer to Title Page.
 VERTICAL DRIVE MOTOR

SHAFT KEYS

MOTOR
COUPLING

BALLSCREW COUPLING

PLASTIC SAFETY
RING BEARING
SET SCREW

PLASTIC INSERT

BALLSCREW DRIVE
C0861A

FIGURE 213 COUPLING EXPLODED VIEW

Philips Medical Systems. Confidential and Proprietary information. Refer to Title Page.
 BRAKE CRIMP HERE
ASSEMBLY
BRAKE MOUNTING
CAP
SCREWS AND WASHERS
BUTT (2 SETS)
VERTICAL SPLICE
BRAKE
CUT HERE
ASSEMBLY
BRAKE PAD
4–6 IN.
P415
GASKET

BRAKE HUB

VERTICAL
DRIVE
C0645
MOTOR
OLD STYLE C0646
STEARNS BRAKE

NEW STYLE
STEARNS BRAKE

C0860B DELTRAN BRAKE

FIGURE 214 VERTICAL MOTOR AND BRAKE

Philips Medical Systems. Confidential and Proprietary information. Refer to Title Page.
VERTICAL DRIVE MOTOR REPLACEMENT:
18. Install the brake hub onto the top shaft of the replacement motor in the same location as recorded in step 14. Refer to Figure 212.
19. Install the brake assembly onto the replacement motor. Refer to the Vertical Brake Removal/Replacement procedure.
20. Connect the wires from the replacement motor to the wires that were cut from connector P415 using crimp–type butt splices.
21. Secure the motor to the mounting plate with the four mounting bolts and their respective washers. Refer to Figure 211.
22. Slide the plastic safety ring, shaft key and motor coupling onto the motor shaft. Do not tighten the motor coupling set screw at this time.
Refer to Figure 213.
23. Place the plastic insert inside the jaw of the ballscrew shaft coupling.

CAUTION
CRITICAL ALIGNMENT. DO NOT USE EXCESSIVE FORCE WHEN TIGHTENING
THE MOUNTING PLATE SCREWS. FAILURE TO COMPLY MAY CAUSE MIS-
ALIGNMENT AND SERIOUS DAMAGE TO THE MOTOR AND DRIVE MECHANISM.

24. Maneuver the motor assembly into position and secure the motor mounting plate to the patient support frame with the four motor
mounting plate screws and their washers. Refer to Figure 210.
25. On the motor shaft, slide the motor coupling along the shaft until there is a 1/32 inch gap between the motor coupling and the ballscrew
coupling. Refer to Figure 210.
26. Tighten the set screws on the motor coupling half.
27. Connect cable P415 at the control pcb.

WARNING
USE EXTREME CAUTION WHEN OPERATING OR WORKING ON EQUIPMENT
WITH COVERS REMOVED. DANGEROUS VOLTAGES ARE EXPOSED WHEN THE
GANTRY COVERS ARE REMOVED. ACCIDENTAL CONTACT WITH THESE
VOLTAGES MAY CAUSE SERIOUS INJURY AND/OR DEATH TO SERVICE
PERSONNEL.

28. Apply gantry power. Refer to the PowerUp/PowerDown procedure.

29. Raise the patient support to its maximum height with the gantry control panel switches.

Philips Medical Systems. Confidential and Proprietary information. Refer to Title Page.
 WARNING
LOWERING THE PATIENT SUPPORT WITH THE VERTICAL SUPPORT BRACE IN
PLACE WILL DAMAGE THE BALLSCREW DRIVE. FAILURE TO REMOVE THE
VERTICAL SUPPORT BRACE WILL RESULT IN EQUIPMENT DAMAGE AND/OR
SERIOUS INJURY AND/OR DEATH TO SERVICE PERSONNEL.

SCISSOR–ACTION MECHANISM IS EXPOSED WHEN THE PATIENT SUPPORT

TELESCOPING BASE COVERS ARE REMOVED. KEEP EQUIPMENT AND
PERSONNEL AWAY FROM THE MECHANICAL ACTION OF THESE PARTS.
FAILURE TO COMPLY MAY RESULT IN EQUIPMENT DAMAGE AND/OR SERIOUS
INJURY AND/OR DEATH TO SERVICE PERSONNEL.

30. Remove the vertical support brace and return it to its holder on the face of the scissor. Refer to Figure 209.
31. Secure the brace cable with an 8 inch long tie–wrap fed through the bottom of the support brace holder. Refer to Figure 209.
32. Raise and lower the patient support to verify operation of the motor with the gantry control panel switches. If an audible knocking is
detected in the vertical movement, loosen the four motor mounting plate screws by one turn each.

WARNING
LOOSEN MOTOR MOUNTING PLATE SCREWS ONE TURN ONLY. FAILURE TO
COMPLY MAY CAUSE THE MOTOR AND BALLSCREW COUPLINGS TO
DISENGAGE, RESULTING IN SERIOUS INJURY OR DEATH DUE TO COLLAPSE
OF THE PATIENT SUPPORT.

33. Move the patient support up and down with the gantry control panel switches, allowing motor to align itself. Hold motor in place and
tighten the four motor mounting plate screws.
34. Repeat this process as necessary until the knocking is resolved.
35. Lower patient support to its lowest position with the gantry control panel switches.
36. Remove gantry power. Refer to the PowerUp/PowerDown procedure.
37. Replace the patient support telescoping base covers. Refer to the Patient Support Covers Removal/ Replacement procedure.

Philips Medical Systems. Confidential and Proprietary information. Refer to Title Page.
VERTICAL BRAKE

INTRODUCTION: This procedure is used to remove and replace the brake on the patient support vertical drive motor.

TOOLS NEEDED: 1. FSE Tool Kit

ESTIMATED TIME: 30 min

WARNING
DO NOT PERFORM THIS PROCEDURE IF THE VERTICAL SUPPORT BRACE IS
NOT INSTALLED. REFER TO MANDATORY LETTER #376. FAILURE TO COMPLY
MAY RESULT IN SERIOUS INJURY AND/OR DEATH TO SERVICE PERSONNEL.

VERTICAL BRAKE REMOVAL PROCEDURE:

1. Apply gantry power. Refer to the PowerUp/PowerDown.

2. Position the carbon top by hand against its front mechanical stop.

3. Lower the patient support to its lowest position with the gantry control panel switches. This step is required for cover removal by the
preferred method. If the patient support cannot be lowered, continue to step 4.

WARNING
USE EXTREME CAUTION WHEN OPERATING OR WORKING ON EQUIPMENT
WITH COVERS REMOVED. DANGEROUS VOLTAGES ARE EXPOSED WHEN THE
GANTRY COVERS ARE REMOVED. ACCIDENTAL CONTACT WITH THESE
VOLTAGES MAY CAUSE SERIOUS INJURY AND/OR DEATH TO SERVICE
PERSONNEL.

4. Remove the patient support telescoping base covers. Refer to the Patient Support Covers Removal/Replacement procedure.

Philips Medical Systems. Confidential and Proprietary information. Refer to Title Page.
 WARNING
SCISSOR–ACTION MECHANISM IS EXPOSED WHEN THE PATIENT SUPPORT
TELESCOPING BASE COVERS ARE REMOVED. KEEP EQUIPMENT AND
PERSONNEL AWAY FROM THE MECHANICAL ACTION OF THESE PARTS.
FAILURE TO COMPLY MAY RESULT IN EQUIPMENT DAMAGE AND/OR SERIOUS
INJURY AND/OR DEATH TO SERVICE PERSONNEL.

5. Raise the patient support to its highest position with the gantry control panel switches.
6. Locate the green safety vertical support brace mounted to face of scissor. Cut the tie–wrap that confines the brace cable and remove
the brace from the holder. Install the brace as shown in Figure 215.

WARNING
DO NOT DRIVE THE SCISSORS CARRIAGE INTO THE VERTICAL SUPPORT
BRACE. FAILURE TO COMPLY WILL CAUSE SERIOUS DAMAGE TO THE
BALLSCREW.

7. Lower the patient support slowly. Stop the scissor carriage just before it touches the brace. Do not drive carriage into brace as this
may cause misalignment of the vertical drive mechanism. See Figure 215.
8. Remove gantry power. Refer to the PowerUp/PowerDown.
9. Remove the connector from J415 on the patient support control pcb.
10. Cut tie wraps as required to completely free the brake cable. Note the wire orientation; it will be important during replacement.
11. Cut the two wires in the cable that connect to the brake assembly. Cut the wires four to six inches from connector P415. See Figure 216.

Philips Medical Systems. Confidential and Proprietary information. Refer to Title Page.
LEFT
SCISSOR

VERTICAL CABLE
SUPPORT
BRACE
AND
HOLDER

TIE WRAP
SHOULD BE
REPLACED C0665–A
AFTER
EACH USE
PLACEMENT OF VERTICAL
SUPPORT BRACE
PATIENT
SUPPORT
SCISSOR BASE
SLIDE
BALLSCREW
FIGURE 215 VERTICAL SUPPORT BRACE HOLDER & PLACEMENT

NOTE
Some new style Stearns brakes have an in–line plug. If the faulty and new brakes both
have this feature, simply unplug the old brake and plug in the new one.

Philips Medical Systems. Confidential and Proprietary information. Refer to Title Page.
 BRAKE CRIMP HERE
ASSEMBLY
BRAKE MOUNTING
CAP
SCREWS AND WASHERS
BUTT (2 SETS)
VERTICAL SPLICE
BRAKE
CUT HERE
ASSEMBLY
BRAKE PAD
4–6 IN.
P415
GASKET

BRAKE HUB

VERTICAL
DRIVE
C0645
MOTOR
OLD STYLE C0646
STEARNS BRAKE

NEW STYLE
STEARNS BRAKE

C0860B DELTRAN BRAKE

FIGURE 216 VERTICAL MOTOR AND BRAKE

Philips Medical Systems. Confidential and Proprietary information. Refer to Title Page.
Old Style Stearns Brake:
12. Remove the two cap nuts which secure the brake assembly cover. Remove the brake cover.
13. Remove the two screws that hold the brake assembly to the motor casing. Note the brake orientation and remove the brake from the
motor.
14. Loosen the set screws on the brake hub and remove the hub from the motor shaft.
New Style Stearns Brake and Deltran Brake:
15. Remove the two screws and lockwashers that hold the brake assembly to the motor casing. Note the brake orientation and remove
the brake from the motor.
16. If the replacement brake is different than the original brake, loosen the set screws and remove the hub from the motor shaft.

VERTICAL BRAKE REPLACEMENT:

17. Strip 1/4” of insulation from the end of the leads on the replacement brake.
18. Strip 1/4” of insulation from the end of the cut leads originating at connector P415.
19. Use a crimp–type butt splice to connect one wire from connector P415 to one wire from the brake assembly.
20. Splice the remaining wire from P415 to the remaining wire from the brake assembly using a butt splice.
New Style Stearns Brake:
21. Ensure the keystock is in place. Install the new brake hub onto the motor shaft by locating the bottom of the hub 40 to 50 thousandths
above the shoulder of the motor, tighten set screws. See Figure 217.
22. Place the new brake assembly onto the motor in the same orientation as noted in step 13. or 15.
23. Secure the brake assembly to the motor with the two screws and lockwashers. Refer to Figure 216.

Philips Medical Systems. Confidential and Proprietary information. Refer to Title Page.
 BOTTOM OF HUB
BOTTOM OF HUB
FLUSH WITH TOP SET SCREW
SET SCREW 0.04”–0.05” ABOVE
OF MOTOR
TOP OF MOTOR
SHOULDER
TOP OF SHOULDER HUB TOP OF
MOTOR HUB MOTOR
SHOULDER SHOULDER
0.04” – 0.05”

NEW STYLE STEARNS BRAKE NEW STYLE DELTRAN BRAKE

TOP OF MOTOR

FIGURE 217 NEW STYLE STEARNS AND DELTRAN HUB LOCATION

New Style Deltran Brake:

24. Ensure the keystock is in place. Install the new brake hub onto the motor shaft by locating the bottom of the hub flush with the shoulder
of the motor, tighten set screws. Refer to Figure 217.

25. Place the new brake assembly onto the motor in the same orientation as noted in step 13. or 15.

26. Secure the brake assembly to the motor with the two screws and lockwashers. Refer to Figure 216.

27. Connect P415 to J415 on patient support control pcb.

28. Temporarily secure the wires away from the mechanical moving parts until initial power checks are completed.

29. Apply gantry power. Refer to the PowerUp/PowerDown in the introduction section.

Philips Medical Systems. Confidential and Proprietary information. Refer to Title Page.
 WARNING
USE EXTREME CAUTION WHEN OPERATING OR WORKING ON EQUIPMENT
WITH COVERS REMOVED. DANGEROUS VOLTAGES ARE EXPOSED WHEN THE
GANTRY COVERS ARE REMOVED. ACCIDENTAL CONTACT WITH THESE
VOLTAGES MAY CAUSE SERIOUS INJURY AND/OR DEATH TO SERVICE
PERSONNEL.

WARNING
SCISSOR–ACTION MECHANISM IS EXPOSED WHEN THE PATIENT SUPPORT
TELESCOPING BASE COVERS ARE REMOVED. KEEP EQUIPMENT AND
PERSONNEL AWAY FROM THE MECHANICAL ACTION OF THESE PARTS.
FAILURE TO COMPLY MAY RESULT IN EQUIPMENT DAMAGE AND/OR SERIOUS
INJURY AND/OR DEATH TO SERVICE PERSONNEL.

30. Raise the patient support to its maximum height with the gantry control panel switches.

WARNING
LOWERING THE PATIENT SUPPORT WITH THE VERTICAL SUPPORT BRACE IN
PLACE WILL DAMAGE THE BALLSCREW DRIVE. FAILURE TO REMOVE THE
VERTICAL SUPPORT BRACE WILL RESULT IN EQUIPMENT DAMAGE AND/OR
SERIOUS INJURY AND/OR DEATH TO SERVICE PERSONNEL.

31. Remove the vertical support brace and return it to its holder on the face of the scissor. Refer to Figure 215.
32. Secure the brace cable with an 8 inch long tie–wrap fed through the bottom of the support brace holder. Refer to Figure 215.

Philips Medical Systems. Confidential and Proprietary information. Refer to Title Page.
 WARNING
LOOSEN MOTOR MOUNTING PLATE SCREWS ONE TURN ONLY. FAILURE TO
COMPLY MAY CAUSE THE MOTOR AND BALLSCREW COUPLINGS TO
DISENGAGE, RESULTING IN SERIOUS INJURY OR DEATH DUE TO COLLAPSE
OF THE PATIENT SUPPORT.

33. Use the gantry control panel switches to check the operation of the brake. First raise the patient support a few centimeters, then lower
it a few centimeters. Verify that vertical motion stops almost immediately when the switches are released. Vertical down may coast
about 3.5mm.

NOTE
If the brake makes an excessive amount of noise or the patient support does not stop
immediately, check the wiring connections and the position of the brake hub. If the
brake hub is not properly aligned, the brake will make a loud chattering noise and may
fail to stop the patient support.

34. Tie wrap all wires and cables in same manner and position as they were originally.
35. Lower the patient support to its lowest vertical position using the gantry control panel switches.
36. Remove gantry power. Refer to the PowerUp/PowerDown.
37. Replace the telescoping bas covers. Refer to the Patient Support Covers Removal/Replacement procedure.

Philips Medical Systems. Confidential and Proprietary information. Refer to Title Page.
VERTICAL TRANSDUCER
Introduction: This procedure is used to remove and replace the Vertical Transducer in the Patient Support.

Tools Required: 1. FSE tool kit

Estimated Time: 20 min

VERTICAL TRANSDUCER REMOVAL

1. Position the Carbon Top by hand against its rear Mechanical Stop.
2. Apply Gantry power. Refer to the PowerUp/PowerDown procedure.
3. Lower the Patient Support to its lowest position with the Gantry Control Panel Switches.

WARNING
USE EXTREME CAUTION WHEN OPERATING OR WORKING ON EQUIPMENT
WITH COVERS REMOVED. DANGEROUS VOLTAGES ARE EXPOSED WHEN THE
GANTRY COVERS ARE REMOVED. FAILURE TO COMPLY CAN CAUSE SERIOUS
INJURY OR DEATH TO PERSONNEL.

4. Remove the top section only of the Patient Support Telescoping Base Covers. Refer to the Patient Support Covers
Removal/Replacement procedure.

WARNING
SCISSOR–ACTION MECHANISM IS EXPOSED WHEN THE PATIENT SUPPORT
TELESCOPING BASE COVERS ARE REMOVED. KEEP EQUIPMENT AND
PERSONNEL AWAY FROM THE MECHANICAL ACTION OF THESE PARTS.
FAILURE TO COMPLY CAN CAUSE SERIOUS DAMAGE TO EQUIPMENT AND/OR
SERIOUS INJURY OR DEATH TO PERSONNEL.

5. Raise the Patient Support to its highest position with the Gantry Control Panel Switches.
6. Remove Gantry power. Refer to the PowerUp/PowerDown procedure.

Philips Medical Systems. Confidential and Proprietary information. Refer to Title Page.
 CAUTION
THE TRANSDUCER WIRE IS UNDER SPRING TENSION. WHEN DISCONNECTING
OR CONNECTING THE WIRE, HOLD THE END SECURELY AND CAREFULLY LOW-
ER OR RAISE IT SO THAT THE CLIP DOES NOT SNAP INTO THE TRANSDUCER
HOUSING. FAILURE TO COMPLY MAY RESULT IN DAMAGE TO THE EQUIPMENT.

7. Remove the Transducer Hook from the Eyebolt on the bottom of the Subframe. See Figure 218.
8. Remove the Connector from J406 on the Transducer Assembly.

Eyebolt

Transducer Hook

Wire

J406 Vertical Transducer

Mounting
Screws (2)

FIGURE 218 Patient Support Vertical Transducer

Philips Medical Systems. Confidential and Proprietary information. Refer to Title Page.
9. Remove the two Socket Head Cap Screws from the Transducer base. Remove the Transducer from the Patient Support.

VERTICAL TRANSDUCER REPLACEMENT

10. Position replacement Transducer on Base support and install the two Socket Head Mounting Screws.
11. Reconnect the Cable to J406 on the Transducer.
12. Attach the Transducer Hook to the Eyebolt on the bottom of the Subframe.
13. Apply Gantry power. Refer to the PowerUp/PowerDown procedure.

WARNING
USE EXTREME CAUTION WHEN OPERATING OR WORKING ON EQUIPMENT
WITH COVERS REMOVED. DANGEROUS VOLTAGES ARE EXPOSED WHEN THE
GANTRY COVERS ARE REMOVED. FAILURE TO COMPLY CAN CAUSE SERIOUS
INJURY OR DEATH TO PERSONNEL.

WARNING
SCISSOR–ACTION MECHANISM IS EXPOSED WHEN THE PATIENT SUPPORT
TELESCOPING BASE COVERS ARE REMOVED. KEEP EQUIPMENT AND
PERSONNEL AWAY FROM THE MECHANICAL ACTION OF THESE PARTS.
FAILURE TO COMPLY CAN CAUSE SERIOUS DAMAGE TO EQUIPMENT AND/OR
SERIOUS INJURY OR DEATH TO PERSONNEL.

14. Check the operation of the Vertical Transducer by raising and lowering the Patient Support. Verify that the Vertical Position Display
increases or decreases in value in accordance with the motion.
15. Calibrate the Vertical Transducer. Refer to the Patient Support Vertical Position procedure in the Mecanical Calibration manual
16. Position the Patient Support to its lowest vertical position with the Gantry Control Panel Switches.
17. Remove Gantry power. Refer to the PowerUp/PowerDown procedure in the Introduction section.
18. Replace the Patient Support Telescoping Base Covers. Refer to the Patient Support Covers Removal/Replacement procedure.

Philips Medical Systems. Confidential and Proprietary information. Refer to Title Page.
VERTICAL LIMIT SWITCH
Introduction: This procedure is used to remove and replace the Patient Support Vertical Limit Switches.

Tools Required: 1. FSE tool kit

2. Offset Philips Screwdriver

Estimated Time 20 min.

Vertical Limit Switch Removal Procedure:

1. Apply Gantry power. Refer to the PowerUp/PowerDown procedure.

2. Lower the Patient Support to its lowest position using the Gantry Control Panel Switches.

WARNING
USE EXTREME CAUTION WHEN OPERATING OR WORKING ON EQUIPMENT
WITH COVERS REMOVED. DANGEROUS VOLTAGES ARE EXPOSED WHEN THE
GANTRY COVERS ARE REMOVED. FAILURE TO COMPLY CAN CAUSE SERIOUS
INJURY OR DEATH TO PERSONNEL.

3. Disconnect the Patient Support Telescoping Base Covers from the Subframe. Refer to the Patient Support Covers
Removal/Replacement procedure.

WARNING
SCISSOR–ACTION MECHANISM IS EXPOSED WHEN THE PATIENT SUPPORT
TELESCOPING BASE COVERS ARE REMOVED. KEEP EQUIPMENT AND
PERSONNEL AWAY FROM THE MECHANICAL ACTION OF THESE PARTS.
FAILURE TO COMPLY CAN CAUSE SERIOUS DAMAGE TO EQUIPMENT AND/OR
SERIOUS INJURY OR DEATH TO PERSONNEL.

4. Raise the Patient Support to the center of its vertical travel with the Gantry Control Panel Switches.

Philips Medical Systems. Confidential and Proprietary information. Refer to Title Page.
5. Remove Gantry power. Refer to the PowerUp/PowerDown procedure.
6. Before removing a Switch, record the color and terminal connection for all wires attached to the Switch.
7. Remove the two Switch Mounting Screws. See Figure 219.
8. Remove the Limit Switch(es).
Vertical
Down Limit
Switches

Switch
Mounting Screw
(Typical)

Vertical Up Limit Switches

FIGURE 219 Vertical Limit Switches

Vertical Limit Switch Replacement:

9. Mount the replacement Switch and install the two Mounting Screws.

Philips Medical Systems. Confidential and Proprietary information. Refer to Title Page.
10. Attach the Switch wires according to the colors and terminals recorded in step 6.

WARNING
USE EXTREME CAUTION WHEN OPERATING OR WORKING ON EQUIPMENT
WITH COVERS REMOVED. DANGEROUS VOLTAGES ARE EXPOSED WHEN THE
GANTRY COVERS ARE REMOVED. FAILURE TO COMPLY CAN CAUSE SERIOUS
INJURY OR DEATH TO PERSONNEL.

11. Apply Gantry power. Refer to the PowerUp/PowerDown procedure.

12. Adjust the Limit Switch(es). Refer to Vertical Travel Limit Switches procedure in the Mechanical Calibration manual.
13. Lower the Patient Support to its lowest position with the Gantry Control Panel Switches.
14. Remove Gantry power. Refer to the PowerUp/PowerDown procedure.

WARNING
SCISSOR–ACTION MECHANISM IS EXPOSED WHEN THE PATIENT SUPPORT
TELESCOPING BASE COVERS ARE REMOVED. KEEP EQUIPMENT AND
PERSONNEL AWAY FROM THE MECHANICAL ACTION OF THESE PARTS.
FAILURE TO COMPLY CAN CAUSE SERIOUS DAMAGE TO EQUIPMENT AND/OR
SERIOUS INJURY OR DEATH TO PERSONNEL.

15. Connect the Patient Support Telescoping Base Covers to the Subframe. Refer to the Patient Support Covers Removal/Replacement
procedure.

Philips Medical Systems. Confidential and Proprietary information. Refer to Title Page.
PATIENT SUPPORT CONTROL PCB
Introduction: This procedure is used to remove and replace the Patient Support Control Circuit Board.
Tools Required: 1. FSE tool kit
2. Offset Philips Screwdriver
Estimated Time: 30 min.

PCB REMOVAL PROCEDURE:

1. Apply Gantry power. Refer to the PowerUp/PowerDown procedure.
2. Position the Patient Support to its lowest position with the Gantry Control Panel Switches. This step is to prepare for Cover removal.
If the Patient Support cannot be lowered, continue to step 3.
3. Remove Gantry power. Refer to the PowerUp/PowerDown procedure.
4. Disconnect the Patient Support Telescoping Base Covers from the Subframe. Refer to the Patient Support Covers
Removal/Replacement procedure.

WARNING
USE EXTREME CAUTION WHEN OPERATING OR WORKING ON EQUIPMENT
WITH COVERS REMOVED. DANGEROUS VOLTAGES ARE EXPOSED WHEN THE
GANTRY COVERS ARE REMOVED. FAILURE TO COMPLY CAN CAUSE SERIOUS
INJURY OR DEATH TO PERSONNEL.

5. Apply Gantry power. Refer to the PowerUp/PowerDown procedure.

WARNING
SCISSOR–ACTION MECHANISM IS EXPOSED WHEN THE PATIENT SUPPORT
TELESCOPING BASE COVERS ARE REMOVED. KEEP EQUIPMENT AND
PERSONNEL AWAY FROM THE MECHANICAL ACTION OF THESE PARTS.
FAILURE TO COMPLY CAN CAUSE SERIOUS DAMAGE TO EQUIPMENT AND/OR
SERIOUS INJURY OR DEATH TO PERSONNEL.

Philips Medical Systems. Confidential and Proprietary information. Refer to Title Page.
6. Raise the Patient Support to its highest position with the Gantry Control Panel Switches.
7. Remove Gantry power. Refer to the PowerUp/PowerDown procedure.
8. Tag and remove all Cables connected to the Patient Support Control PCB.
9. Disconnect the Vertical Motor Ground Wire (GRN/YEL) from the Control Assembly Ground Stud next to the Transformer.
10. Remove the nine Mounting Screws that secure the PCB to the Control Assembly. See Figure 220.
11. Remove the Patient Support Control PCB.

PCB Mounting
Screws(9) Typical

Patient
Patient Support Control
Support Assembly
Control
Assembly
PCB

Patient
Support Control
Mounting Screws
(4) Typical

FIGURE 220 Patient Support Control PCB

Philips Medical Systems. Confidential and Proprietary information. Refer to Title Page.
PCB REPLACEMENT:

12. Fasten the Patient Support Control PCB to the Control Assembly using nine (9) Mounting Screws.
13. Connect the Cables to the Patient Support Control PCB.

WARNING
USE EXTREME CAUTION WHEN OPERATING OR WORKING ON EQUIPMENT
WITH COVERS REMOVED. DANGEROUS VOLTAGES ARE EXPOSED WHEN THE
GANTRY COVERS ARE REMOVED. FAILURE TO COMPLY CAN CAUSE SERIOUS
INJURY OR DEATH TO PERSONNEL.

WARNING
SCISSOR–ACTION MECHANISM IS EXPOSED WHEN THE PATIENT SUPPORT
TELESCOPING BASE COVERS ARE REMOVED. KEEP EQUIPMENT AND
PERSONNEL AWAY FROM THE MECHANICAL ACTION OF THESE PARTS.
FAILURE TO COMPLY CAN CAUSE SERIOUS DAMAGE TO EQUIPMENT AND/OR
SERIOUS INJURY OR DEATH TO PERSONNEL.

14. Apply Gantry power. Refer to the PowerUp/PowerDown procedure.

15. Check the operation of the Patient Support by moving it vertically and horizontally with the Gantry Control Panel Switches.
16. Lower the Patient Support to its lowest position with the Gantry Control Panel Switches.
17. Remove Gantry power. Refer to the PowerUp/PowerDown procedure in the Introduction section.
18. Connect the Patient Support Telescoping Base Covers to the Subframe. Refer to the Patient Support Covers Removal/Replacement
procedure.

Philips Medical Systems. Confidential and Proprietary information. Refer to Title Page.
BALLSCREW

INTRODUCTION: This procedure is used to remove and replace the patient support ballscrew mechanism.

TOOLS REQUIRED: 1. Standard FSE Toolkit

2. 1½ ” Box or Crescent Wrench
3. #18 Drill bit, Drill
4. Gear Puller

Material Required: 1. 5/16”–18 x ½ ” Dog point set screw (P/N S620–124)

2. Mobile 28 grease (P/N 95749) or #7 Aeroshell (P/N 95617)

Estimated Time: 90 min.

WARNING
DO NOT PERFORM THIS PROCEDURE IF THE VERTICAL SUPPORT BRACE IS
NOT INSTALLED. REFER TO MANDATORY LETTER #376. FAILURE TO COMPLY
MAY RESULT IN SERIOUS INJURY AND/OR DEATH TO SERVICE PERSONNEL.

1. Apply gantry power. Refer to the PowerUp\PowerDown procedure.

2. Lower the patient support to its lowest position with the gantry control panel switches. This step is required for cover removal by the
preferred method. If the patient support cannot be lowered, continue to step 3.

3. Remove the patient support telescoping base covers. Refer to the Patient Support Covers Removal/Replacement procedure.

WARNING
USE EXTREME CAUTION WHEN OPERATING OR WORKING ON EQUIPMENT
WITH COVERS REMOVED. DANGEROUS VOLTAGES ARE EXPOSED WHEN THE
GANTRY COVERS ARE REMOVED. FAILURE TO COMPLY CAN CAUSE SERIOUS
INJURY OR DEATH TO PERSONNEL.

Philips Medical Systems. Confidential and Proprietary information. Refer to Title Page.
 WARNING
SCISSOR–ACTION MECHANISM IS EXPOSED WHEN THE PATIENT SUPPORT
TELESCOPING BASE COVERS ARE REMOVED. KEEP EQUIPMENT AND
PERSONNEL AWAY FROM THE MECHANICAL ACTION OF THESE PARTS.
FAILURE TO COMPLY CAN CAUSE SERIOUS DAMAGE TO EQUIPMENT AND/OR
SERIOUS INJURY OR DEATH TO PERSONNEL.

4. Raise the patient support to its maximum height with the gantry control panel switches.
5. Locate the green safety vertical support brace mounted to the face of scissor mechanism. Cut the tie–wrap that confines the brace
cable and remove the brace from the holder. Install the brace as shown in Figure 221.

LEFT
SCISSOR

VERTICAL
SUPPORT CABLE
BRACE
AND
HOLDER

TIE–WRAP
SHOULD BE
REPLACED
AFTER EACH
USE

PATIENT
SUPPORT PLACEMENT OF VERTICAL
BASE SUPPORT BRACE
SCISSOR
SLIDE
BALLSCREW

FIGURE 221 Metal Brace in Scissor Mechanism

Philips Medical Systems. Confidential and Proprietary information. Refer to Title Page.
 WARNING
DO NOT DRIVE THE SCISSORS CARRIAGE INTO THE METAL BRACE. FAILURE
TO COMPLY WILL CAUSE SERIOUS DAMAGE TO BRACE OR OTHER PATIENT
SUPPORT COMPONENTS.

6. Lower the patient support slowly. Stop the scissor carriage just before it touches the brace. Do not drive carriage into brace as this
may cause misalignment of the vertical drive mechanism.
7. Remove gantry power. Refer to the PowerUp/PowerDown procedure. POWER OFF AT WALLBOX.
8. Disconnect P415 from the control pcb on the patient support control assembly.
9. Remove the vertical motor ground wire (green/yellow) from the patient support control assembly.
10. Remove the four mounting plate screws and washers. See Figure 222.

WARNING
WITH THE VERTICAL MOTOR REMOVED, THE PATIENT SUPPORT IS
UNCONTROLLED AND FREE TO FALL QUICKLY. THE PATIENT SUPPORT WILL
COAST DOWN UNTIL THE SCISSORS SLIDE RESTS AGAINST THE VERTICAL
SUPPORT BRACE. EXCERCISE EXTREME CAUTION WHILE THE BALLSCREW
AND COUPLING ARE TURNING. FAILURE TO COMPLY MAY RESULT IN
EQUIPMENT DAMAGE AND/OR SERIOUS INJURY OR DEATH TO SERVICE
PERSONNEL.

Philips Medical Systems. Confidential and Proprietary information. Refer to Title Page.
 VERTICAL
DRIVE
MOTOR

MOTOR
MOUNTING
PLATE
PLASTIC SAFETY RING

SET SCREW
1/32 INCH GAP
MOTOR MOUNTING
PLATE SCREWS AND
WASHERS (4) BALLSCREW COUPLING

MOTOR COUPLING C0861B

FIGURE 222 Vertical Drive Motor Mounting Plate Screws

11. Grasp the vertical motor, rotate it slightly away from the frame, and slide it to the rear of the patient support until the couplings disengage
(shaft keys, plastic insert, end pieces). Remove the motor.

Philips Medical Systems. Confidential and Proprietary information. Refer to Title Page.
12. Remove coupling plastic insert if still in place.
13. Loosen set screw from coupling on end of ballscrew and remove coupling.

NOTE
A gear puller may be necessary to remove the coupling.

14. Remove key from end of ballscrew.

15. Remove first thrust bearing from end of ballscrew (3 PIECES). Refer to Figure 223.
16. Turn threaded wormgear portion of the ballscrew clockwise by hand until motor end of ballscrew clears bearing retainer.
17. Remove second thrust bearing from end of ballscrew (3 PIECES).
18. Remove square ballscrew retaining nut from scissors slide by unscrewing it with a wrench.
19. Remove defective ballscrew by maneuvering it free of the base.

BALLSCREW REPLACEMENT

20. Insert replacement ballscrew and thread square retaining nut into scissors slide.
21. Turn ballscrew by hand to position shown in Figure 224.

Philips Medical Systems. Confidential and Proprietary information. Refer to Title Page.
 SQUARE
FIRST
BALLSCREW
THRUST
RETAINER
BEARING
NUT

COUPLING
BALLSCREW
INSERT

SECOND
BEARING THRUST
RETAINER BEARING

FIGURE 223 Ballscrew, Couplings, Thrust Bearings and Retainer Nut

Philips Medical Systems. Confidential and Proprietary information. Refer to Title Page.
BEARING
RETAINER

THRUST
BEARING
BALLSCREW
SHAFT KEY

END OF
BALLSCREW

FIGURE 224 2nd Thrust Bearing Replacement Position

Philips Medical Systems. Confidential and Proprietary information. Refer to Title Page.
22. Replace 2nd thrust bearing over end of ballscrew.
23. Turn threaded wormgear portion of ballscrew counterclockwise by hand until thrust bearing is fully seated inside bearing retainer.

NOTE
From this point forward, refer to Figure 223 for proper location of items.

24. Replace remaining thrust bearing over end of ballscrew.

25. Replace ballscrew key.
26. Remove coupling set screw and discard.
27. Slide coupling over end of replacement ballscrew.
28. Rotate coupling/ballscrew by hand such that the threaded coupling set screw hole faces up (on top).
29. Push coupling and thrust bearing against vertical wall of bearing retainer so that no gaps are present and secure (clamp).
30. Drill a hole in end of ballscrew with #18 bit 3/16” to 1/4” in depth using the coupling’s set screw hole as the pilot hole.
31. Completely remove all debris from hole.
32. Fully insert the S620–124 dog point set screw into coupling. END OF SET SCREW SHOULD BE FLUSH WITH OUTER DIAMETER
OF COUPLING.
33. Place the plastic coupling insert into the jaws of the ballscrew coupling.
34. Install the vertical drive motor by engaging the motor coupling into the ballscrew coupling. Leave a 1/32” gap between the jaws of the
couplings. Refer to Figure 222.
35. Secure the motor mounting plate to the base with the four motor mounting plate screws and washers. Refer to Figure 222 .
36. Connect P415 from the motor/brake assembly to the patient support control pcb.
37. Reinstall the vertical motor ground wire (green/yellow) to the patient support control pcb.
38. Apply gantry power. Refer to the PowerUp/PowerDown procedure in the introduction section.
39. Raise the patient support to its maximum height with the gantry control panel switches.

Philips Medical Systems. Confidential and Proprietary information. Refer to Title Page.
 WARNING
LOWERING THE PATIENT SUPPORT WITH THE VERTICAL SUPPORT BRACE IN
PLACE WILL DAMAGE THE BALLSCREW DRIVE. FAILURE TO REMOVE THE
VERTICAL SUPPORT BRACE WILL RESULT IN EQUIPMENT DAMAGE AND/OR
SERIOUS INJURY AND/OR DEATH TO SERVICE PERSONNEL.

40. Remove the vertical support brace and return it to its holder on the face of the scissor. Refer to Figure 221.
41. Secure the brace cable with an 8 inch long tie–wrap fed through the bottom of the support brace holder. Refer to Figure 221.
42. Apply Mobile 28 grease or #7 AeroShell grease to ballscrew. Raise and lower patient support, adding grease until ballscrew retainer
nut is packed with grease.

WARNING
LOOSEN MOTOR MOUNTING PLATE SCREWS ONE TURN ONLY. FAILURE TO
COMPLY MAY CAUSE THE MOTOR AND BALLSCREW COUPLINGS TO
DISENGAGE, RESULTING IN SERIOUS INJURY OR DEATH DUE TO COLLAPSE
OF THE PATIENT SUPPORT.

43. Move the patient support up and down with the gantry control panel switches. If an audible knocking is detected in the vertical
movement, loosen the four motor mounting plate screws by one turn each.
44. Move the patient support up and down with the gantry control panel switches, allowing motor to align itself. Hold motor in place and
tighten the four motor mounting plate screws.
45. Repeat this process as necessary until the knocking is resolved.
46. Lower patient support to its lowest position with the gantry control panel switches and replace the patient support telescoping base
covers. Refer to the Patient support covers removal/replacement procedure.

Philips Medical Systems. Confidential and Proprietary information. Refer to Title Page.
POWER UP / DOWN PROCEDURE
This section describes the system start–up/shutdown procedures. Power–UP is accomplished via the keyswitch on the Display Tower.
Power DOWN of the entire system is accomplished via the General Utilities GUI. This is accessed via the “Service” option from the opening
bootup GUI. This procedure covers the Service Application mode. Scanning Application mode procedure is in the OP manual.

SYSTEM POWER UP
1. Make sure the Gantry keyswitch is in the normal position. Turn the Display Tower keyswitch to the ON position. After the system
boots, you will be prompted with the startup application display (or “4 Button Screen.”) You have 4 boot options. Refer to Figure 225.:
A.) Select Clinical Scanning (or do nothing) and the system will start and connect to the acquisition server. The acquisition server will
then power up the AcQImage Cabinet, and if that is done successfully, the acquisition server will power up the gantry and X–ray system.
B.) Select the Service Application option (within 15 seconds) by clicking on the Service button with the mouse pointer.
C.) Reboot the system. D. ) Start the Diagnostic GUI (within 15 seconds) by clicking once in the bottom left corner, then entering
PICKER <CR>. (All caps). The AcQImage board LEDs will display a power up test sequence. Refer to the LED Interpretations.

Clinical Scanning

Service

Shutdown

FOR DIAG GUI:

Click here with the mouse, then
type PICKER and press <CR>.

FIGURE 225 4 BUTTON SCREEN

Philips Medical Systems. Confidential and Proprietary information. Refer to Title Page.
PREPARE THE SYSTEM FOR USE (X–Ray Tube Warmup)
2. The X–Ray system needs to be properly warmed up prior to executing a scan procedure. X–Ray System Warmup must be completed
at the start of every scan day or when the tube heat is below 6%. Tube heat is displayed in the Tube Warmup window.
3. To perform a tube warm–up, click on the Tube Warm Up button with the mouse pointer. Refer to Figure 225. This will initiate the
warm–up sequence and X–RAYS WILL BE EMITTED. The tube warm–up status is displayed is displayed in the Tube Warmup
Window. Refer to Figure 226.

Progress

Status Scan Status

Tube : %
Start Stop
Scan Scan kv :

mA :
TubeHeat
Time :
0%
Tilt :+

Couch :

SPOV :

FIGURE 226 TUBE WARM–UP STATUS WINDOW

Philips Medical Systems. Confidential and Proprietary information. Refer to Title Page.
SYSTEM POWER DOWN

1. From the 4 Button Screen (Figure 225) click on SHUTDOWN with the mouse pointer.

CAUTION
DO NOT POWER DOWN THE SYSTEM WITH THE TUBE HEAT AT OR ABOVE 35%.
FAILURE TO COMPLY MAY RESULT IN SHORTENED TUBE LIFE AND/OR ERRATIC
TUBE BEHAVIOR.

System shutdown ensures that all images on disk are properly closed, all image maintenance functions properly terminated, the gantry
parked, the X–Ray system sufficiently cooled and all films printed.

There are three shutdown selections: Shutdown Gantry, Shutdown Console, Shutdown System and Switch to Console as seen in
Figure 227.

SHUTDOWN

Shutdown System...

Shutdown Console...

Start Gantry

Switch to Console...

FIGURE 227 SHUTDOWN SCREEN

Philips Medical Systems. Confidential and Proprietary information. Refer to Title Page.
Shutdown Gantry: This option should be used, if possible, in place of the e–stop switches. An orderly shutdown of the gantry will be
performed. Display Tower and/or AcQImage Cabinet operation may continue after selected. To cancel shutdown,
click the Abort button.
Shutdown System: Performs an orderly shutdown of the entire scanner system. To cancel shutdown, click the Abort button.
Shutdown Console: This option shuts down only the console units. An orderly shutdown of the image archiver, filming and file system
will be done.
Start Gantry: Toggles Start/Shutdown Gantry depending on status of Gantry power.
Switch to Console: Changes the GUI to the Console Application (Operator) screen.

WARNING
THE GUI SHUTDOWN REMOVES POWER FROM THE SYSTEM, BUT NOT AT THE
INCOMING POWER LINES. DANGEROUS VOLTAGES ARE EXPOSED WHEN THE
GANTRY COVERS ARE REMOVED. BEFORE SERVICING EQUIPMENT, REMOVE
POWER FROM THE WALL BOX. FAILURE TO COMPLY CAN CAUSE SERIOUS
INJURY OR DEATH TO PERSONNEL.

2. When prompted via a dialog box, turn the Display Tower keyswitch to the OFF position.
3. On the AcQImage Cabinet and Display Tower, ensure the rear breaker switch is turned off.
AcQImage Boards – Power Up Test LED Interpretations
AP, PB, GAM Board Diagnostic Flash Version 1.1.2

Philips Medical Systems. Confidential and Proprietary information. Refer to Title Page.
0 Hardware Initialization
1 CPU Version Check
2 Diagnostic Flash CRC Check
3 Operating System Flash CRC Check
4 CPU Memory Test
5 Data Cache Test
6 Unexpected Exception Test
7 IBC Test
8 NVRAM Single Location Test
9 PCI Bus Select Test
A Ethernet Loopback Test
B UART Loopback Test
C apmem for AP, pbmem for PB, gamem for GAM

C CIO Test (CP Board Diagnostic Flash Version 1.1.2)

D Synchronous Serial Chip Loopback Test (CP Board Diagnostic Flash Version 1.1.2)

Philips Medical Systems. Confidential and Proprietary information. Refer to Title Page.
 AcQSim CT – Gantry Components Repair

GANTRY COVERS

GANTRY COVER INTERLOCK

GANTRY CONTROL PANEL

GANTRY DISPLAY ASSEMBLY

X–RAY TUBE AND HEAT EXCHANGER

X–RAY CONTROL CHASSIS

COLLIMATOR ASSEMBLY

SMALL DRIVES RELAY PCB

HIGH VOLTAGE MODULE

INVERTER CHASSIS

INVERTER MODULES

HIGH VOLTAGE TRANSFORMER

HIGH VOLTAGE GENERATOR CONTROL BOARDS

AC INPUT CHASSIS

AC DIAGNOSTIC BOARD

3KVA SCAN DRIVE TRANSFORMER

SERVO AMPLIFIER

SCAN DRIVE CONTROL: SOLID STATE RELAY & BRIDGE RECTIFIER

Philips Medical Systems. Confidential and Proprietary information. Refer to Title Page.
SERVO–CONTROLLER FAN

GANTRY AIR BLOWER

GANTRY AIR FILTER

INDIVIDUAL CARDFILE CIRCUIT BOARD

GANTRY TILT ACTUATOR

GANTRY TILT POTENTIOMETER BELT

GANTRY TILT POT & PULLEY

GANTRY TILT LIMIT SWITCHES

LASER ASSEMBLY

HIGH SPEED STARTER

BRUSH BLOCK

SLIP RING DUST COVER

POWER MONITOR / CARDFILE FILTER BOARD / DC POWER SUPPLY

FUSE/CONTACTOR CHASSIS

AC CONTROL CHASSIS PRINTED CIRCUIT BOARD

DETECTOR MODULE AND DETECTOR MOTHERBOARD

GANTRY COLUMN E–STOP SWITCH

1.1 KVA TRANSFORMER

8 KVA TRANSFORMER

Philips Medical Systems. Confidential and Proprietary information. Refer to Title Page.
GANTRY COVERS

The following procedure shows how to open/close, install, remove/replace and adjust the various AcQSim CT Gantry covers.

Front Upper Cover

1. Loosen the captive screws on the front cover, lift up and secure. Refer to Figure 228.

LOOSEN TWO SCREWS (ONE COVER LOCK DETAIL

ON EACH SIDE OF THE CONE)
GRASP HERE TO OPEN COVER

UPPER
MOUNTING
BRACKET

SECURE BRACE
IN NOTCH TO
HOLD UP THE
UPPER COVER

FIGURE 228 GANTRY UPPER PANEL OPENING

Philips Medical Systems. Confidential and Proprietary information. Refer to Title Page.
Lower Front Cover

1. Remove the screws that secure the lower Gantry cover. Lift the cover up and off the bottom latches and slide the cover away from
Gantry. Store the cover in a secure place.. Refer to Figure 229.

INSIDE
LOWER
COVER

FIGURE 229 GANTRY FRONT LOWER COVER – DETAIL

Philips Medical Systems. Confidential and Proprietary information. Refer to Title Page.
Rear Covers

CAUTION
Before removing the rear covers, unplug the two connectors from the cables that lead
to the speaker and x–ray light. Failure to do this will result in damage to the cables and/
or connectors.

1. Remove the screws that secure the rear Gantry covers. Lift up and away on each of the covers and set aside in a safe place. Refer
to Figure 230.

TOP OF RIGHT REAR COVER HOOK TAB ONTO LIP

REAR COVERS

COVER TAB

C02255

FIGURE 230 REAR COVER REMOVAL

Philips Medical Systems. Confidential and Proprietary information. Refer to Title Page.
Lower Side Cover Installation
1. Remove Lower Right Column Cover (p/n 312863) from shipping box. Remove the small bag attached to the inside surface of the cover,
which contains the mounting screws and washers. Set it aside.
2. Open the Front Upper Cover and lock in place.
3. Uninstall the E–Stop Switch located on the right side column.
4. Install the E–Stop Switch in the Lower Right Side Column. Refer to Figure 231.

REMOVE ESTOP
SWITCH FROM
BRACKET

INSTALL
ESTOP
SWITCH
IN COVER

FIGURE 231 ESTOP SWITCH LOCATION

Philips Medical Systems. Confidential and Proprietary information. Refer to Title Page.
5. Install the Lower Right Column Cover onto the right side column. Align and insert Locating pins on Lower Right Column Cover with
the V groove features on the Side Column. Refer to Figure 232.

PINS
ALIGN
WITH
GROOVES

FIGURE 232 LOWER RIGHT COLUMN COVER

Philips Medical Systems. Confidential and Proprietary information. Refer to Title Page.
6. Fasten the Lower Right Column Cover to the Gantry Column using the two screws (1/4”–20 x 3/4”, Pan Head) and two nylon washers
provided. Maintain a gap between the top of the Column Cover and Gantry Side Panel in the range of 0.050 to 0.250 inch. Refer to
Figure 233.

MAINTAIN A
GAP OF 0.050
TO 0.250
INCHES HERE

INSTALL SCREWS
AND WASHERS HERE

FIGURE 233 FASTENING LOWER SIDE COVER

Philips Medical Systems. Confidential and Proprietary information. Refer to Title Page.
7. Lower the Front Upper Cover. Make sure the Front Upper Cover is seated firmly against the Lower Front Cover.
8. Check the clearance between the Lower Right Column Cover and the Front Upper Cover as shown in Figure 234. It should measure
between 0.100 to 0.250 inch. If the gap measures within the allowable range, assemble the Lower Left Side Cover (p/n 312865) in
the same fashion as the right cover. If not, continue to step 9.

GAP = 0.100” TO
0.250”

GAP
DETAIL

FIGURE 234 GAP BETWEEN SIDE COVER AND FRONT UPPER COVER

Philips Medical Systems. Confidential and Proprietary information. Refer to Title Page.
9. If the gap is not within the allowable range, raise the Front Upper Cover, remove the Lower Right Column Cover, and adjust the height
of the V–groove Mounting Bracket. Refer to Figure 235. Continue to check the clearance between the Lower Right Column Cover
and the Front Upper Cover and make sure it is within the allowable range of 0.100 to 0.250 inch.
10. Prior to final installation of Lower Right Side Cover, make sure wires are reconnected to E–Stop Switch.
11. Assemble the Lower Left Side Cover (p/n 312865) in the same fashion as the right cover.

LOOSEN NUTS
TO ADJUST
V–GROOVE
BRACKET

FIGURE 235 V–GROOVE BRACKET ADJUST

Philips Medical Systems. Confidential and Proprietary information. Refer to Title Page.
UPPER SIDE COVER INSTALLATION
1. Remove Upper Right Column Cover (p/n 362096) from shipping box.
2. Align and insert the pins on the Upper Right Column Cover into the holes on the Cover Mounting Bracket which is a attached to the
Gantry Side Panel. Refer to Figure 236.

INSERT PINS INTO HOLES

THUMBSCREW
THAT SECURES
BACK PART OF
UPPER PANEL

METAL BRACKET ATTACHES

TO MAGNET ON GANTRY
FIGURE 236 UPPER SIDE COVER

Philips Medical Systems. Confidential and Proprietary information. Refer to Title Page.
3. Swing the lower side of the Upper Right Column Cover down until it comes into contact with the Gantry Side Panel. A magnetic latch
should attract and hold the cover in place.
4. Visually locate the thumbscrew through the hole on the back side of the Upper Right Column Cover. Insert a long, narrow slotted
screwdriver into the hole and lightly tighten the thumbscrew. This is a blind connection, so ensure you get the right “feel” of the captive
screw starting correctly. Refer to Figure 237.

INSERT
SLOTTED
SCREWDRIVER
HERE TO
LIGHTLY
TIGHTEN
THUMBSCREW

FIGURE 237 THUMBSCREW LOCATION

Philips Medical Systems. Confidential and Proprietary information. Refer to Title Page.
5. Check clearance ”A” between the Upper Right Column Cover and Lower Right Column Cover. Also check the uniformity of the gap
between the Upper Right Column Cover and the Upper Front Cover. Refer to Figure 238.

MAINTAIN
VISUALLY
UNIFORM GAP
ALONG THIS EDGE

CLEARANCE “A” IS
0.100 TO 0.250 INCH

VISUALLY MATCH GAP

SIZES IF POSSIBLE

FIGURE 238 CLEARANCE “A” CHECK

Philips Medical Systems. Confidential and Proprietary information. Refer to Title Page.
6. Check clearance ”B”, between the Upper Right Column Cover and the Lower Right Column Cover. Refer to Figure 239.

7. If clearances ”A” and ”B” are within the allowable ranges and the gap uniformity looks good, than skip to the Hole Plug Installation
procedure. If the clearances are not within tolerance, continue to the next page.

CLEARANCE “B”
IS 0.100 TO
0.250 INCH

FIGURE 239 CLEARANCE “B” CHECK

Philips Medical Systems. Confidential and Proprietary information. Refer to Title Page.
8. If clearance ”A” is outside the allowable range or the gap between the Upper Right Column Cover and the Upper Front Cover does
not visually appear uniform, remove the Upper Right Column Cover, and adjust the Cover Mounting Bracket by loosening the two bolts
as shown below.

CLEARANCE “B”
IS 0.100 TO 0.250
INCH

Gantry Cardfile
Access Panel

ADJUST THUMBSCREW
BRACKET IF NECESSARY TO
AVOID INTERFERENCE WITH
THE SIDE COLUMN BRACKET

FIGURE 240 ADJUSTING CLEARANCE “A”

Philips Medical Systems. Confidential and Proprietary information. Refer to Title Page.
9. If clearance ”B” is outside the allowable range, than remove the Upper Right Column Cover, and adjust the Mounting Brackets located
inside the Upper Right Column Cover by loosening the bolts as shown below.

10. Assembly of the Upper Left Column Cover (p/n 362097) follows this same procedure.

LOOSEN BOLTS AND ADJUST

BRACKETS TO CORRECT
CLEARANCE “B” IF NECESSARY

FIGURE 241 ADJUSTING CLEARANCE “B”

Philips Medical Systems. Confidential and Proprietary information. Refer to Title Page.
HOLE PLUG INSTALLATION

1. Install the Hole Plugs (p/n T39A–1013) at the four locations shown in Figure 242.

INSTALL HOLE
PLUGS HERE

FIGURE 242 FRONT HOLE PLUG INSTALLATION

2. Install the Hole Plugs (p/n T39A–1013) at the two locations shown in Figure 243.

INSTALL HOLE
PLUGS HERE

FIGURE 243 REAR HOLE PLUG INSTALLATION

Philips Medical Systems. Confidential and Proprietary information. Refer to Title Page.
GANTRY COVER INTERLOCK
Introduction: This procedure is used to remove and replace the Gantry Front Cover Interlock Switch.

Tools Required: 1. None

Estimated Time: 20 Min.

GANTRY COVER INTERLOCK REMOVAL PROCEDURE:

1. Remove Gantry power. Refer to the PowerUp/PowerDown procedure.
2. Open the Gantry upper Front Cover.
3. Tag and remove the two wires connected to the Interlock Switch. See Figure 244.

WIRES IN BACK
INTERLOCK
SWITCH

FIGURE 244 Interlock Switch Location

Philips Medical Systems. Confidential and Proprietary information. Refer to Title Page.
4. Depress the two latches and remove the switch toward the Gantry front.

GANTRY COVER INTERLOCK REPLACEMENT:

5. Install the Interlock Switch by reversing steps 3. and 4.

6. Apply Gantry power. Refer to the PowerUp/PowerDown procedure.

WARNING
USE EXTREME CAUTION WHEN OPERATING OR WORKING ON EQUIPMENT
WITH COVERS REMOVED. DANGEROUS VOLTAGES ARE EXPOSED WHEN THE
GANTRY COVERS ARE REMOVED. FAILURE TO COMPLY CAN CAUSE SERIOUS
INJURY OR DEATH TO PERSONNEL.

WARNING
ROTATING MACHINERY. STAND CLEAR OF ROTATING FRAME WHEN
EQUIPMENT IS OPERATED. FAILURE TO COMPLY MAY RESULT IN SERIOUS
INJURY OR DEATH TO PERSONNEL.

7. Check the Interlock Switch operation by attempting to rotate the Scan Frame by pressing the laser button while the upper Front Cover
is open. STAY CLEAR OF THE SCAN FRAME. The Scan Frame should not move. Pull the Switch and check operation. The Scan
Frame should rotate.
8. Push the scan frame a bit CCW to get it off of “home” position. Now return the Switch to its center position, close and secure the upper
Front Cover and again attempt to rotate the Scan Frame. The Scan Frame should rotate as commanded.

Philips Medical Systems. Confidential and Proprietary information. Refer to Title Page.
GANTRY CONTROL PANEL
Introduction: The following procedure is used to remove and replace Gantry Control Panels.

Tools Required: 1. #1 Tip Phillips Screwdriver

Estimated Time: 15 Min.

GANTRY CONTROL PANEL REMOVAL:

1. Remove Gantry power. Refer to the PowerUp/PowerDown procedure.

2. Open the Gantry Front Cover and secure it in the open position.
3. Remove the ground wire, ribbon cable and the nine screws that secure the control panel assembly to the inside of the upper cover.
Refer to Figure 245.

WARNING
USE EXTREME CAUTION WHEN SERVICING EQUIPMENT WHILE UPPER GULL
WING PANEL IS OPEN. THE PANEL HAS SHARP EDGES. FAILURE TO COMPLY
COULD RESULT IN SERIOUS INJURY TO PERSONNEL.

WARNING
USE EXTREME CAUTION WHEN OPERATING OR WORKING ON EQUIPMENT
WITH COVERS REMOVED. DANGEROUS VOLTAGES ARE EXPOSED WHEN THE
GANTRY COVERS ARE REMOVED. FAILURE TO COMPLY CAN CAUSE SERIOUS
INJURY OR DEATH TO PERSONNEL.

Philips Medical Systems. Confidential and Proprietary information. Refer to Title Page.
 Remove

Inside View of
Control Panel

FIGURE 245 Gantry Control Panel

4. Remove the Control Panel from the inside of the Gantry Front Cover.

GANTRY CONTROL PANEL REPLACEMENT:

5. Place the new control panel where the old one was removed.
6. Attach the nine screws to secure the panel. Attach the ribbon cable and groud cable. Close the upper cover.
7. Apply power and verify the Control Panel’s operation. Drive the Patient Support vertical or horizontal, activate the Laser, or tilt the
Gantry as appropriate.

Philips Medical Systems. Confidential and Proprietary information. Refer to Title Page.
GANTRY DISPLAY ASSEMBLY
Introduction: The following procedure is used to remove and replace the gantry display assembly, part no. 178989.

Tools Required: #1 Tip Phillips Screwdriver

Estimated Time: 15 Minutes

GANTRY DISPLAY ASSEMBLY REMOVAL:

1. Remove Gantry power. Refer to the PowerUp/PowerDown procedure.

2. Open the Gantry Front Cover and secure it in the open position.

WARNING
USE EXTREME CAUTION WHEN SERVICING EQUIPMENT WHILE UPPER GULL
WING PANEL IS OPEN. THE PANEL HAS SHARP EDGES. FAILURE TO COMPLY
COULD RESULT IN SERIOUS INJURY TO PERSONNEL.

WARNING
USE EXTREME CAUTION WHEN OPERATING OR WORKING ON EQUIPMENT
WITH COVERS REMOVED. DANGEROUS VOLTAGES ARE EXPOSED WHEN THE
GANTRY COVERS ARE REMOVED. FAILURE TO COMPLY CAN CAUSE SERIOUS
INJURY OR DEATH TO PERSONNEL.

3. Remove cable connectors from display board plugs P1, P2, P3, P4, P5, and P6. Remove cable connector from front auto–lite. Remove
screw and flat washer securing two ground lugs to display board, and remove ground lugs. Refer to Figure 246.
4. Remove six screws, flat washers, and standoffs securing the front display shroud to the display board, and remove shroud from the
front of the gantry cover. Refer to Figure 247.
5. Remove three remaining screws and flat washers securing the display board to the gantry “U” brackets, and remove display board.

Philips Medical Systems. Confidential and Proprietary information. Refer to Title Page.
 DISPLAY BOARD DISPLAY SHROUD FRONT AUTO–LITE

SCREWS AND FLAT

GROUND LUGS (2) WASHERS (4)

FIGURE 246 Gantry Display Assembly (as viewed from underneath gantry front cover).

OUTLINE OF DISPLAY SCREWS, FLAT WASHERS,

SHROUD AND STANDOFFS (6)
DISPLAY BOARD

P6 P5
P2 P1
P4 P3

FIGURE 247 Display Shroud Positioning on Display Board (as viewed from underneath gantry front cover).

Philips Medical Systems. Confidential and Proprietary information. Refer to Title Page.
GANTRY DISPLAY ASSEMBLY REPLACEMENT:

1. Place the new display board where the old board was removed.
2. Install four screws and flat washers securing the display board to the gantry “U” brackets. Install two ground lugs to display board with
screw and flat washer. Refer to Figure 246.
3. Position front display shroud over gantry front cover, and install six screws, flat washers, and standoffs securing the shroud to the
display board. Refer to Figure 247.
4. Install cable connectors to display board connectors P1, P2, P3, P4, P5, and P6. Install cable connector to front auto–lite.
5. Close the gantry front cover.
6. Apply power and verify the display assembly operation. Drive the Patient Support vertical or horizontal, activate the Laser, or tilt the
Gantry as appropriate.

Philips Medical Systems. Confidential and Proprietary information. Refer to Title Page.
X–RAY TUBE AND HEAT EXCHANGER
The process for replacing the X–ray tube and heat exchanger is as follows:

• Perform physical replacement of X–ray tube and heat exchanger (this paragraph)
• Perform Preheat Calibration procedure from MANEXP program
• Perform Tube Seasoning procedure from MANEXP program
• Perform Mechanical Tube Alignment procedure from MANEXP program
• Perform Lateral Centering procedure from Service Applications
• Perform Image Calibration procedure from Service Applications
• Perform Find_BadDets procedure from Service Applications
• Perform Check_Performance procedure from Service Applications
• Perform KVHVL procedure from Service Applications

INTRODUCTION:

The following procedure is used to remove and replace the X–Ray Tube and Heat Exchanger.

Tools Required: 1. 9/16”, 3/4”Socket, Ratchet

2. 5/32” Hex Key

3. Hoist Assembly

4. Tube Mounting Tray Assembly

Material Required: 1. Transformer oil – 10cc

Tube Weight: 132 pounds (7” Tube with Cradle)

Heat Exchanger Wt: 45 pounds

Estimated Time 1 hour

Philips Medical Systems. Confidential and Proprietary information. Refer to Title Page.
REMOVAL PROCEDURE:

CAUTION
DO NOT ATTEMPT TO REPLACE THE X–RAY TUBE UNTIL TUBE HEAT IS AT 35%
OR LOWER ANODE HEAT.

1. Remove Gantry power. Refer to the PowerUp/PowerDown procedure.

2. Open the Gantry Front Covers and remove the Front Cone. Refer to the Gantry Covers procedure.

WARNING
USE EXTREME CAUTION WHEN SERVICING EQUIPMENT WHILE UPPER GULL
WING PANEL IS OPEN. THE PANEL HAS SHARP EDGES. FAILURE TO COMPLY
COULD RESULT IN SERIOUS INJURY OR TO PERSONNEL.

3. Rotate the Scan Frame counterclockwise by hand until the X–Ray tube is at the 12:00 position. Lock the scan frame with the locking
pin. Pull the top pin out from the bottom cover mounting bracket. Push the bracket down to allow room for heat exchanger removal.
See Figure 248.

Philips Medical Systems. Confidential and Proprietary information. Refer to Title Page.
 Pin Location
X-Ray Tube

Caution
Clockwise rotation of the scan frame may
cause damage to the slip ring brushes.
Ring brushes rotate the scan frame
counter clockwise only.

Heat Exchanger
Bottom Cover Mounting Bracket
(pull out top pin and hinge down)
FIGURE 248 SCANNED FRAME PINNED WITH TUBE AT 12:00 POSITION

4. Secure Hoist Assembly to Patient Support. Make sure Clamp Base is seated firmly in position on Patient Support and that Knob Bolts
are screwed in securely. See Figure 249.

Philips Medical Systems. Confidential and Proprietary information. Refer to Title Page.
 Center Mount
Side Mount Hoist Assembly Hoist Assembly

Patient Support

Patient Support

Knob Bolts

Knob Bolts
Clamp Base

FIGURE 249 HOIST ASSEMBLY

5. Loosen and remove the four Cradle Locking Hex Head Bolts. See Figure 250.

Philips Medical Systems. Confidential and Proprietary information. Refer to Title Page.
 Tube Shelf

Cradle
Pivot Block

Tube Shelf Cradle Locking Hex Head Bolts

(2 on other side)

Axial Alignment
Block Mounting Screws (2)
Axial Alignment
Block

FIGURE 250 XRAY TUBE MOUNTING

Philips Medical Systems. Confidential and Proprietary information. Refer to Title Page.
6. Install the tube mounting tray in front of the xray tube and secure with the appropriate bolts. Refer to
Figure 251.

SECURE MOUNTING TRAY SECURE MOUNTING TRAY

TO SHELF TO SHELF

TUBE SHELF

TUBE
MOUNTING TRAY

(TUBE NOT SHOWN)

FIGURE 251 XRAY TUBE MOUNTING TRAY ON TUBE SHELF

Philips Medical Systems. Confidential and Proprietary information. Refer to Title Page.
7. Tag and disconnect the Quick Disconnects labeled J4 (Rotor Cable) and J6 (Thermal Switch Cable) that are located just behind and
to the left of the X–Ray Tube.
8. Tag and remove High Voltage Federal Connectors from Anode and Cathode High Voltage Modules. Touch each High Voltage Federal
Connector conductor to ground to bleed off any residual capacitive charge.

WARNING
MAKE NO ATTEMPT TO REMOVE THE HIGH VOLTAGE FEDERAL CONNECTORS
FROM THE X–RAY TUBE. THEY ARE PERMANENTLY ATTACHED AND STAY WITH
THE TUBE. REMOVING THESE CONNECTORS WILL CAUSE SERIOUS DAMAGE
AND/OR DESTRUCTION OF THE TUBE.

9. Loosen one of the two Axial Alignment Block Mounting Screws and remove the other. Let the Block swing down to allow removal of
the X–Ray Tube Cradle. Refer to Figure 250.

NOTE
This method minimizes the need for lateral adjustment of the X–Ray Tube if the Axial
Pivot Block is not loosened. However, care must be exercised not to damage the Pa-
tient Support. Place a protective cover on the Carbon Top before setting the Tube and
Cradle on it.

10. Remove Hose Clamps and any Tie Wraps securing Oil Hoses to Scan Frame. Pull X–Ray Tube out along mounting tray (6”–10” max)
in order to route Lifting Strap through Cradle Holes. See Figure 252.

Philips Medical Systems. Confidential and Proprietary information. Refer to Title Page.
 ANODE
ROUTE STRAP
THROUGH EYELETS

ROUTE STRAP
THROUGH CRADLE HOLES

CATHODE

UNDERNEATH TUBE

MOUNTING TRAY

FIGURE 252 LIFTING STRAP ROUTING

11. Route Lifting Strap through one eyelet, under X–Ray Tube and up other side through other eyelet. Route second Lifting Strap through
one Cradle hole at other end of X–Ray Tube, under X–Ray Tube and through hole on opposite side. Refer to Figure 252.

Philips Medical Systems. Confidential and Proprietary information. Refer to Title Page.
12. Place Lifting Strap ends onto the Hoist Clip and lock Clip. Remove slack and carefully pull Tube and Cradle Assembly to the end of
Mounting Rails.

13. Carefully pull Tube Assembly from Mounting Rails. Brace Tube Assembly to keep it from rocking.

14. Carefully move Patient Support away from Gantry, swing X–Ray Tube to the right and lower Tube to floor. Lay Tube on its back with
Shutter side up.

15. Remove Lifting Straps from Tube and Cradle Assembly and then remove Cradle from Tube.

16. Tag and disconnect the Quick Disconnect labeled J5 (Heat Exchanger Power) at the High Speed Starter.

17. Remove the two bolts on the heat exchanger supports. Slide the heat exchanger out and away from the gantry. See Figure 253.

HEAT EXCHANGER STANDOFFS

HEAT EXCHANGER

REMOVE BOLTS

FIGURE 253 HEAT EXCHANGER MOUNTING HARDWARE

Philips Medical Systems. Confidential and Proprietary information. Refer to Title Page.
 CAUTION
THE HEAT EXCHANGER WEIGHS 45 LBS. USE CAUTION WHEN HANDLING THIS
ITEM. FAILURE TO COMPLY MAY RESULT IN EQUIPMENT DAMAGE AND/OR SE-
RIOUS INJURY TO PERSONNEL.

18. Remove the Heat Exchanger Mounting bolts. Set them aside for later installation on the replacement unit.

XRAY TUBE REPLACEMENT:

19. Place box with replacement X–Ray Tube on left side of Patient Support. Open shipping container of replacement Tube and remove
packaging material from container.
20. Lift Heat Exchanger from container and place it on floor near front of Gantry.

NOTE
Cover the Patient Support before placing the Tube on it or the Carbon Top may be dam-
aged by the heavy Tube.

21. Place Lifting Straps through eyelets of Tube. Lift the X–Ray Tube from its vertical position within its container and position it with the
Cradle Side up on the Patient Support.
22. With Tube Port facing upwards, remove protective metal covering. Check for the plastic covering over Tube Port opening and check
for dirt/dust. Remove any debris found on the plastic. DO NOT REMOVE PLASTIC

Philips Medical Systems. Confidential and Proprietary information. Refer to Title Page.
23. Attach Cradle Assembly to Xray Tube. Follow illustration in Figure 254 for proper installation. Torque Mounting Hex Head and Socket
Head Screws to 15 ft–lbs.lignment Pins.

Cathode Xray Tube

Anode

Cradle Assembly

Lockwasher

Long Socket Cradle End Plate

Head Capscrew (2)

FIGURE 254 Cradle Assembly

24. Remove Packing Slips and Cable Ties from the Tube. Wipe off the Tube with cloth and check for container–debris.

25. (If possible) Rotate the Tube so that its Cradle side is facing down and its Oil Hoses facing left on the Patient Support.

Philips Medical Systems. Confidential and Proprietary information. Refer to Title Page.
 NOTE
Ensure the Carbon Top has a protective cover to prevent damage by the Axial Align-
ment Pivot Block attached to the Cradle.

26. Remove the Lifting Straps from the eyelets. Reposition one strap through one eyelet, under X–Ray Tube and up other side through
other eyelet. Route second strap through one cradle hole, under X–Ray Tube and through hole on opposite side. Refer to Figure 252.
27. Hoist the Tube to the tube tray. Push tube onto tray until back of cradle assembly is flush with front of Tube Shelf.

WARNING
USE EXTREME CAUTION AND VERIFY THAT THE X–RAY TUBE IS FULLY
SUPPORTED BY THE MOUNTING RAILS BEFORE REMOVING THE LIFTING
STRAPS. FAILURE TO COMPLY MAY RESULT IN EQUIPMENT DAMAGE AND/OR
SERIOUS INJURY TO PERSONNEL.

28. Remove Lifting Straps from around Tube and move the hoist assembly out of the way.
29. Check Cables for clearance around the Tube. Push the Tube all the way back onto the Tube Shelf, ensuring the Cradle Assembly is
seated on the Key Block. Refer to Figure 252.
30. Replace the Cradle Locking Bolts and fasten the Cradle down enough to relieve pressure from the tube tray.
31. Remove tube tray and secure Axial Alignment Block in its original position with the Socket Head Capscrew removed earlier.
• Apply Loc–Tite to Alignment Block Screws and tighten to hand–tight.
• Tighten Cradle hardware to 15 ft–lbs.
32. Position the Heat Exchanger on standoffs and push it back into position. Place the Cables behind the Heat Exchanger. Secure with
the two bolts. Refer to Figure 253.
33. Secure Oil Hoses with Hose Clamps. DO NOT OVERTIGHTEN HEX NUTS.

NOTE
Align the Hose Clamps with the labels on the Hoses.

Philips Medical Systems. Confidential and Proprietary information. Refer to Title Page.
34. Reconnect Quick Disconnects J4 (Rotor Cable), J5 (Heat Exchanger Power Cable), and J6 (Thermal Switch Cable).
35. Inspect the Federal Connector for any sign of damage.
36. Using a clean, lint–free wipe and 90% alcohol, wipe the surface clean of dirt or dust.
37. Pour enough Transformer Oil into the Federal Connector receptacles to coat the entire surface of the cable connector after insertion
into the module (10–15 cc). The amount will vary due to slight differences in the connectors.
38. Replace the Anode and Cathode High Voltage Federal Connectors.
39. Rotate the Scan Frame counterclockwise by hand while checking for loose Cables. Also check for clearance over the entire range
of travel between the Rotating Frame Cables and the Stationary Frame.

CAUTION
CLOCKWISE ROTATION OF THE SCAN FRAME MAY CAUSE DAMAGE TO THE
SLIP RING BRUSHES. ROTATE THE SCAN FRAME COUNTERCLOCKWISE ONLY.

40. Align the X–Ray Tube. Refer to X–Ray Tube Mechanical Alignment in the Mechanical Calibration Manual.
41. Apply Gantry power. Refer to the PowerUp/PowerDown procedure.

WARNING
USE EXTREME CAUTION WHEN OPERATING OR WORKING ON EQUIPMENT
WITH COVERS REMOVED. DANGEROUS VOLTAGES ARE EXPOSED WHEN THE
GANTRY COVERS ARE REMOVED. FAILURE TO COMPLY CAN CAUSE SERIOUS
INJURY OR DEATH TO PERSONNEL.

42. Push the bottom cover mounting bracket back up and secure with the locking pin removed earlier. Replace the Gantry Front Cone.
Refer to Front Cone Replacement in the Gantry Covers procedure.

NOTE
Step 42. is necessary to avoid artifacts in the test scans.

Philips Medical Systems. Confidential and Proprietary information. Refer to Title Page.
43. Pull the Front Cover Interlock Switch Plunger out to enable operation while the Front Covers are open.
44. To verify proper System operation, run Full–field Water Phantom Scans and allow the System to process and display an Image.
45. Return the Front Cover Interlock Switch Plunger to its center position.
46. Remove Gantry power. Refer to the PowerUp/PowerDown procedure.
47. Replace the Gantry lower Front Cover, close the upper Front Cover. Refer to Upper Front Gantry Covers Closing procedure in the
Gantry Covers procedure.

Philips Medical Systems. Confidential and Proprietary information. Refer to Title Page.
X–RAY CONTROL CHASSIS

INTRODUCTION: This procedure is used to remove and replace the XSC+.

TOOLS REQUIRED: 1. Slotted Screwdriver

2. 3/4” Socket, Ratchet

3. Torque wrench (75 ft–lb)

ESTIMATED TIME: 45 Min.

CHASSIS WEIGHT: 17 pounds

XRAY CONTROL CHASSIS REMOVAL:

1. Remove Gantry power. Refer to the PowerUp/PowerDown procedure.

2. Open the Gantry Front Covers and remove the Front Cone. Refer to the Gantry Covers procedure.

WARNING
USE EXTREME CAUTION WHEN SERVICING EQUIPMENT WHILE THE UPPER
GULL WING PANEL IS OPEN. THE PANEL HAS SHARP EDGES. FAILURE TO
COMPLY COULD RESULT IN SERIOUS INJURY TO PERSONNEL.

3. Rotate the Scan Frame counterclockwise by hand until the X–Ray Tube is at the 12:00 position. Lock the Scan Frame with the Locking
Pin. See Figure 255.

CAUTION
CLOCKWISE ROTATION OF THE SCAN FRAME MAY CAUSE DAMAGE TO THE
SLIP RING BRUSHES. ROTATE THE SCAN FRAME COUNTERCLOCKWISE ONLY.

Philips Medical Systems. Confidential and Proprietary information. Refer to Title Page.
 PIN LOCATION XRAY TUBE

177987 – XSC+

CAUTION!

ROTATE
CCW ONLY!

FIGURE 255 Scan Frame Pinned with Tube at 12:00 O’clock

CRX–400 SYSTEMS:
177987
4. Remove Hose Clamp from side of the XSC+ Chassis and move Hoses out of the way. See Figure 256.
5. Remove the power cable from the front of the XSC+.
6. Remove the two mounting bolts, their washers and lock washers that secure the XSC+ to the scan frame. Screw extender pins into
the holes – tighten hand tight only. See Figure 256.

Philips Medical Systems. Confidential and Proprietary information. Refer to Title Page.
7. Unscrew the two Captive Slot Head Cover Screws and remove the Cover. See Figure 256.

RemoveHose Clamp

Remove

XSC +
PCB

Mounting Bolts (2)

Captive Cover Power
Retaining Screws (2) Supply Cover

FIGURE 256 XSC+ Chassis Cover and Hose Clamp Removal

8. Tag and remove Cables connected to J2, J3, J5, J9, J10, J11, J14, J15, J21 and J22. Cut and remove any Tie Wraps necessary to
remove Cables. See Figure 257.

Philips Medical Systems. Confidential and Proprietary information. Refer to Title Page.
 J1 J2 J3

LSS HSS
Small Drives Digital Estop
Digital HVG
J5

J9

XSC + PCB
J11

Slip Rings

J15 Analog HVG

HSS J14
Diagnostic
Analog
Mounting Screws Port
(9 Places)
J21 J22

FIGURE 257 XSX+ PCB

9. Secure all Cables safely out of the way.
10. Replace the Cover and secure (only one screw required).
11. Slide the XSC+ Chassis off the Extender Pins removing it from the Gantry.

XSC+ CHASSIS REPLACEMENT:

12. Install the X–Ray Control Chassis by reversing the steps of the above section .
 Torque the Mounting Bolts to 15 ft–lb

Philips Medical Systems. Confidential and Proprietary information. Refer to Title Page.
13. Remove the Scan Frame Locking Pin. Rotate the Scan Frame counterclockwise by hand while checking for loose Cables. Also check
for clearance over the entire range of travel between the Rotating Frame Cables and the Stationary Frame.

CAUTION
CLOCKWISE ROTATION OF THE SCAN FRAME MAY CAUSE DAMAGE TO THE
SLIP RING BRUSHES. ROTATE THE SCAN FRAME COUNTERCLOCKWISE ONLY.

14. Apply Gantry power. Refer to the PowerUp/PowerDown procedure.

WARNING
USE EXTREME CAUTION WHEN OPERATING OR WORKING ON EQUIPMENT
WITH COVERS REMOVED. DANGEROUS VOLTAGES ARE EXPOSED WHEN THE
GANTRY COVERS ARE REMOVED. FAILURE TO COMPLY CAN CAUSE SERIOUS
INJURY OR DEATH TO PERSONNEL.

15. Replace the Gantry Front Cone. Refer to the Gantry Covers procedure. Pull the Front Cover Interlock Switch Plunger out to enable
operation while the Front Covers are open.
16. Push the Laser Button on the Gantry Control Panel to check the operation of the Laser.

WARNING
ROTATING MACHINERY. STAND CLEAR OF ROTATING FRAME WHEN
EQUIPMENT IS OPERATED. FAILURE TO COMPLY MAY RESULT IN SERIOUS
INJURY OR DEATH TO PERSONNEL.

17. Using the diagnostic manexp, check the operation of the X–Ray Generator, Collimator, Compensator, and Shutter/Filter,
by making an exposure from the Operator Console.
18. Return the Front Cover Interlock Switch Plunger to its center position. Remove Gantry power. Refer to the PowerUp/PowerDown
procedure.
19. Replace the Gantry lower Front Cover, close the upper Front Cover. Refer to the Gantry Covers procedure.

Philips Medical Systems. Confidential and Proprietary information. Refer to Title Page.
COLLIMATOR ASSEMBLY
Introduction: The following procedure is used to remove and replace the X–Ray Beam Collimator Assembly.

Tools Required: 1. 3/16” and 7/64” Hex Keys

2. 5/16” Socket, Ratchet

3. Torque wrench (75 ft–lb)

Material Required: 1. Loc–Tite (S301–145)

Chassis Weight: 29 lb.

Estimated Time: 25 MIN.

COLLIMATOR ASSEMBLY REMOVAL:

1. Apply Gantry Power. Refer to the PowerUp/PowerDown procedure.
2. Using the Gantry Control Panel switches, raise the Patient Support to its highest position.
3. Remove Gantry Power. Refer to the PowerUp/PowerDown procedure.
4. Open the Gantry Front Covers and remove the Front Cone. Refer to the Gantry Covers procedure.

WARNING
USE EXTREME CAUTION WHEN SERVICING EQUIPMENT WHILE THE UPPER
GULL WING IS OPEN. THE PANEL HAS SHARP EDGES. FAILURE TO COMPLY
COULD RESULT IN SERIOUS INJURY TO PERSONNEL.

WARNING
USE EXTREME CAUTION WHEN OPERATING OR WORKING ON EQUIPMENT
WITH COVERS REMOVED. DANGEROUS VOLTAGES ARE EXPOSED WHEN THE
GANTRY COVERS ARE REMOVED. FAILURE TO COMPLY CAN CAUSE SERIOUS
INJURY OR DEATH TO PERSONNEL.

Philips Medical Systems. Confidential and Proprietary information. Refer to Title Page.
 NOTE
The Collimator Assembly has been factory aligned. During Removal/Replacement pro-
cedures, be sure to not move the eccentric alignment bolt.

5. Place a reference mark on the Eccentric Adjustment Bolt and Gantry Frame. If the Eccentric Bolt should get moved, use the reference
marks to realign it. Refer to Figure 258.
6. Loosen (but do not remove) the four Collimator Assembly Mounting Screws. See Figure 258.

Eccentric Alignment Bolt

Do Not Remove

Collimator
Mounting
Capscrews (4)

Eccentric Alignment
Bolt Set Screw

FIGURE 258 Collimator Mounting Screws

Philips Medical Systems. Confidential and Proprietary information. Refer to Title Page.
7. Rotate the Gantry Frame counterclockwise by hand until the Collimator Assembly is at the bottom center (6:00 position). The Scan
Frame cannot be locked in this position. See Figure 259.

Collimator assembly at 6:00

X-Ray Tube

FIGURE 259 Collimator Assembly at 6:00

CAUTION
CLOCKWISE ROTATION OF THE SCAN FRAME MAY CAUSE DAMAGE TO THE
SLIP RING BRUSHES. ROTATE THE SCAN FRAME COUNTERCLOCKWISE ONLY.

8. Tag and disconnect all Collimator Assembly Cables from the Collimator Relay Control Board.
9. Carefully remove the four Collimator Mounting Capscrews. Refer to Figure 258.

Philips Medical Systems. Confidential and Proprietary information. Refer to Title Page.
 Lift

Pull Away
From Tubeshelf Collimator
Allen Head Bolts
Removed from
Other Side

Fixed Alignment Pin

Tilt Bottom

Loosen Bolt

Eccentric
Allignment
Pin
Remove Bolt
Tubeshelf

Remove Bolt

FIGURE 260 Collimator Assembly Removal

COLLIMATOR ASSEMBLY REPLACEMENT:

10. Inspect the mounting surfaces on the replacement Collimator Assembly and the Tube Shelf for dirt or foreign particles and clean if
necessary.

Philips Medical Systems. Confidential and Proprietary information. Refer to Title Page.
 NOTE
When installing the collimator assembly, ensure that the reference mark made in step
4. is lined up.

11. Install Collimator Assembly by reversing steps 9. and 8. Apply Loc–Tite to the Mounting Screw threads and torque to 13 ft–lb.
12. Rotate the Scan Frame counterclockwise by hand checking for loose Cables. Also check for clearance over the entire range of travel
between the Rotating Frame Cables and the Stationary Frame.

CAUTION
CLOCKWISE ROTATION OF THE SCAN FRAME MAY CAUSE DAMAGE TO THE
SLIP RING BRUSHES. ROTATE THE SCAN FRAME COUNTERCLOCKWISE ONLY.

13. Replace the Ganrty Front Cone. Refer to the Gantry Covers procedure.
14. Apply Gantry power. Refer to the PowerUp/PowerDown procedure.

WARNING
USE EXTREME CAUTION WHEN OPERATING OR WORKING ON EQUIPMENT
WITH COVERS REMOVED. DANGEROUS VOLTAGES ARE EXPOSED WHEN THE
GANTRY COVERS ARE REMOVED. FAILURE TO COMPLY CAN CAUSE SERIOUS
INJURY OR DEATH TO PERSONNEL.

15. Pull the Front Cover Interlock Switch Plunger out to enable operation while the Front Covers are open.
16. Verify correct movement of the Compensator, Beam Filter and Collimator using gscope.
17. To verify proper system operation, run half–field and full–field water phantom scans and allow the system to process and display an
image.
18. Remove Gantry power. Refer to the PowerUp/PowerDown procedure. Return the Front Cover Interlock Switch Plunger to its center
position.
19. Replace the Gantry lower Front Cover, close the upper Front Cover. Refer to the Gantry Covers procedure.

Philips Medical Systems. Confidential and Proprietary information. Refer to Title Page.
SMALL DRIVES RELAY PCB
Introduction: The following procedure is used to remove and replace the Small Drives Relay Printed Circuit Board.
Tools Required: 1. 7/64” Ball Driver
2. 5/16” Socket, Ratchet
Material Required: 1. Loc–Tite (thread locker)
Estimated Time: 25 Min.

SMALL DRIVES RELAY PCB REMOVAL:

1. Remove Gantry power. Refer to the PowerUp/PowerDown procedure.
2. Open the Gantry Front Covers and remove the Front Cone. Refer to the Gantry Covers procedure.

WARNING
USE EXTREME CAUTION WHEN SERVICING EQUIPMENT WHILE THE UPPER
GULL WING IS OPEN. THE PANEL HAS SHARP EDGES. FAILURE TO COMPLY
COULD RESULT IN SERIOUS INJURY TO PERSONNEL.

WARNING
USE EXTREME CAUTION WHEN OPERATING OR WORKING ON EQUIPMENT
WITH COVERS REMOVED. DANGEROUS VOLTAGES ARE EXPOSED WHEN THE
GANTRY COVERS ARE REMOVED. FAILURE TO COMPLY CAN CAUSE SERIOUS
INJURY OR DEATH TO PERSONNEL.

3. Rotate the Scan Frame counterclockwise by hand until the Small Drives Relay PCB is at the 6:00 position. The scan frame cannot
be locked in this position. See Figure 261.

CAUTION
CLOCKWISE ROTATION OF THE SCAN FRAME MAY CAUSE DAMAGE TO THE
SLIP RING BRUSHES. ROTATE THE SCAN FRAME COUNTERCLOCKWISE ONLY.

Philips Medical Systems. Confidential and Proprietary information. Refer to Title Page.
 COMPONENT LOCATION

FIGURE 261 Small Drives Relay PCB at 6:00

4. Tag and disconnect all Wires/Cables exiting from Small Drives Relay PCB.

CAUTION
STATIC ELECTRICITY. CIRCUIT BOARDS MUST BE HANDLED WITH ANTI–STAT-
IC TECHNIQUES. DISCHARGE YOUR BODY BEFORE HANDLING ANY CIRCUIT
BOARD. KEEP ALL CIRCUIT BOARDS IN ANTI–STATIC BAGS OR ON CONDUC-
TIVE FOAM WHEN NOT INSTALLED IN THE EQUIPMENT. FAILURE TO COMPLY
MAY CAUSE PERMANENT DAMAGE TO COMPONENTS ON CIRCUIT BOARDS.

Philips Medical Systems. Confidential and Proprietary information. Refer to Title Page.
5. Support the Small Drives Relay PCB and remove six Mounting Socket Head Capscrews and the Threaded Rod and Sleeve. Remove
the Small Drives Relay Board. See Figure 262.

Socket Head Capscrews (6)

Threaded Rod Inside Sleeve

Front

FIGURE 262 Small Drives Relay Printed Circuit Board

SMALL DRIVES RELAY PCB REPLACEMENT

6. Install the Small Drives Relay PCB by reversing steps 4. through 5.
 Apply Loc–Tite to the Protective Cover Standoff only on the side that screws into the Tubeshelf and to the six Mounting Socket
Head Capscrews.

Philips Medical Systems. Confidential and Proprietary information. Refer to Title Page.
 CAUTION
CLOCKWISE ROTATION OF THE SCAN FRAME MAY CAUSE DAMAGE TO THE
SLIP RING BRUSHES. ROTATE THE SCAN FRAME COUNTERCLOCKWISE ONLY.

7. Rotate the scan frame counterclockwise by hand while checking for loose cables. Also check for clearance over the entire range of
travel between the rotating frame cables and the stationary frame.
8. Replace the Gantry Front Cone. Refer to Gantry Covers procedure. Apply Gantry power. Refer to the PowerUp/PowerDown
procedure.
9. Pull the Front Cover Interlock Switch Plunger out to enable operation while the Front Covers are open.

WARNING
ROTATING MACHINERY. STAND CLEAR OF ROTATING FRAME WHEN
EQUIPMENT IS OPERATED. FAILURE TO COMPLY MAY RESULT IN SERIOUS
INJURY OR DEATH TO PERSONNEL.

10. Check the operation of the Small Drives Relay PCB by making several Water Phantom Scans using different positions of the Filter,
Compensator, and Collimator. Also, check the Laser operation by using the Gantry Control Panel Switches.
11. Return the Front Cover Interlock Switch Plunger to its center position. Remove Gantry power. Refer to PowerUp/PowerDown
procedures.
12. Replace the Gantry lower Front covers, close the upper Front Cover. Refer to the Gantry Covers procedure.

Philips Medical Systems. Confidential and Proprietary information. Refer to Title Page.
HIGH VOLTAGE MODULE (UPDATE PER NEW MODULE, #178366)
Introduction: The following procedure is used to remove and replace the High Voltage Module.
Tools Required: 1. 1/2” and 9/16” Sockets, Ratchet
2. Torque Wrench (75 ft–lb)
Material Required: 1. Transformer oil
2. Dow Corning #4 Compound
Estimated TIme: 45 Min.
Chassis Weight: 42.0 pounds

HIGH VOLTAGE MODULE REMOVAL:

1. Remove Gantry power. Refer to the PowerUp/PowerDown procedure.
2. Open Gantry Front Covers and remove the Front Cone. Refer to the Gantry Covers procedure.

WARNING
USE EXTREME CAUTION WHEN SERVICING EQUIPMENT WHILE THE UPPER
GULL WING PANEL IS OPEN. THE PANEL HAS SHARP EDGES. FAILURE TO
COMPLY COULD RESULT IN SERIOUS INJURY TO PERSONNEL.

WARNING
USE EXTREME CAUTION WHEN OPERATING OR WORKING ON EQUIPMENT
WITH COVERS REMOVED. DANGEROUS VOLTAGES ARE EXPOSED WHEN THE
GANTRY COVERS ARE REMOVED. FAILURE TO COMPLY CAN CAUSE SERIOUS
INJURY OR DEATH TO PERSONNEL.

3. Rotate the Scan Frame counterclockwise by hand until the X–Ray Tube is at the 12:00 position. Lock the Scan Frame with the Locking
Pin. See Figure 263.

Philips Medical Systems. Confidential and Proprietary information. Refer to Title Page.
 Pin Location
X-Ray Tube

Cathode
High
Voltage
Module
(Rear
Unit)

FIGURE 263 Scan Frame Pinned with X–Ray Tube at 12:00

4. Remove the Anode High Voltage Module. Refer to the Anode High Voltage Module Removal procedure.
5. Tag and disconnect all Cables on the Cathode High Voltage Module. See Figure 264.

WARNING
THE CATHODE HV MODULE WEIGHS 49 LBS. USE EXTREME CAUTION WHEN
HANDLING THIS MODULE. FAILURE TO COMPLY CAN CAUSE SERIOUS
DAMAGE TO THE EQUIPMENT AND/OR SERIOUS INJURY TO PERSONNEL.

6. Remove the two Hex Head Bolts, Washers, and Lock washers that secure the Cathode High Voltage Module to the Gantry Scan Frame.
Refer to Figure 264.
7. Remove the two Hex Head Bolts, Washers and Lockwashers that secure the Cathode High Voltage Module to the Tube Shelf and
remove the module. Refer to Figure 264.

Philips Medical Systems. Confidential and Proprietary information. Refer to Title Page.
 Cathode HV Module

Anode HV Module

Hex Head MountingBolts (2 Each Side)

FIGURE 264 Anode and Cathode HV Modules

CATHODE HIGH VOLTAGE MODULE REPLACEMENT:

8. Install the replacement Cathode High Voltage Module by reversing steps 5. through 7.
9. Torque the Hex Head Mounting Bolts to 15 ft–lbs.
10. Replace the Spellman High Voltage and High Tension Federal Connectors. Refer to the Cable Cleaning and Installation procedure.
11. Replace the Anode High Voltage Module. Refer to the Anode High Voltage Module Replacement procedure.
12. Remove the Scan Frame Locking Pin.
13. Rotate the Scan Frame counterclockwise by hand while checking for loose cables. Also check for clearance over the entire range of
travel between the Rotating Frame cables and the Stationary Frame.

Philips Medical Systems. Confidential and Proprietary information. Refer to Title Page.
 CAUTION
CLOCKWISE ROTATION OF THE SCAN FRAME MAY CAUSE DAMAGE TO THE
SLIP RING BRUSHES. ROTATE THE SCAN FRAME COUNTERCLOCKWISE ONLY.

14. Replace the Gantry Front Cone. Refer to the Gantry Covers procedure.
15. Apply Gantry power. Refer to the PowerUp/PowerDown procedure.

WARNING
USE EXTREME CAUTION WHEN OPERATING OR WORKING ON EQUIPMENT
WITH COVERS REMOVED. DANGEROUS VOLTAGES ARE EXPOSED WHEN THE
GANTRY COVERS ARE REMOVED. FAILURE TO COMPLY CAN CAUSE SERIOUS
INJURY OR DEATH TO PERSONNEL.

16. Pull the Front Cover Interlock Switch Plunger out to enable operation while the Front Covers are open.
17. To verify system operation, run several full–field and half–field water phantom scans and allow the system to process and display an
image.
18. Return the Front Cover Interlock Switch Plunger to its center position.
19. Remove Gantry power. Refer to the PowerUp/PowerDown procedure.
20. Replace the Gantry lower Front Cover, close the upper Front Cover. Refer to the Gantry Covers procedure.

Philips Medical Systems. Confidential and Proprietary information. Refer to Title Page.
INVERTER CHASSIS
Introduction: The following procedure is used to remove and replace the Inverter Chassis. Allow five minutes for the Rail
voltages to discharge after Gantry power has been removed.
Tools Required: 1. 7/16”, 9/16” and 3/4” Sockets, Ratchet
2. #1 tip Phillips Screwdriver
3. 3/16” Hex Key
4. Torque wrench (75 ft–lb)
5. Hoist Assembly
Material Required: None
Chassis Weight: 112 pounds
Estimated Time: 1.0 Hr.

INVERTER CHASSIS REMOVAL:

1. Remove Gantry power. Refer to the PowerUp/PowerDown procedure.
2. Open Gantry Front Covers and remove the Front Cone. Refer to the Gantry Covers procedure.

WARNING
USE EXTREME CAUTION WHEN OPERATING OR WORKING ON EQUIPMENT
WITH COVERS REMOVED. DANGEROUS VOLTAGES ARE EXPOSED WHEN THE
GANTRY COVERS ARE REMOVED. FAILURE TO COMPLY CAN CAUSE SERIOUS
INJURY OR DEATH TO PERSONNEL.

WARNING
USE EXTREME CAUTION WHEN SERVICING EQUIPMENT WHILE THE UPPER
GULL WING IS OPEN. THE PANEL HAS SHARP EDGES. FAILURE TO COMPLY
COULD RESULT IN SERIOUS INJURY TO PERSONNEL.

Philips Medical Systems. Confidential and Proprietary information. Refer to Title Page.
3. Rotate the Scan Frame counterclockwise by hand until the X–Ray Tube is at the 12:00 position. Lock the Scan Frame with the Locking
Pin. See Figure 265.

CAUTION
CLOCKWISE ROTATION OF THE SCAN FRAME MAY CAUSE DAMAGE TO THE SLIP R
BRUSHES. ROTATE THE SCAN FRAME COUNTERCLOCKWISE ONLY.

Inverter Chassis

FIGURE 265 Scan Frame Pinned with Tube at 12:00

Philips Medical Systems. Confidential and Proprietary information. Refer to Title Page.
4. Remove the High Voltage Generator Control Chassis. Refer to the High Voltage Generator Control Chassis Removal procedure.

NOTE
The CRX–400 High Voltage Generator Control Chassis cannot be removed from the
Inverter Chassis.

WARNING
HAZARDOUS VOLTAGES ARE PRESENT ON THE INTERNAL VOLTAGE RAILS.
ALLOW A MINIMUM OF FIVE MINUTES FOR THE RAIL VOLTAGES TO
DISCHARGE AFTER GANTRY POWER IS REMOVED. FAILURE TO COMPLY MAY
RESULT IN SEVERE EQUIPMENT DAMAGE AND/OR SERIOUS INJURY TO
SERVICE PERSONNEL.

5. Remove triangular shaped weights located in front of the inverter chassis. Refer to Figure 265.
6. Tag and remove all Cables at the Inverter Chassis. Use care when handling Ribbon Cables. Cut any tie wraps necessary to free the
Cables.
7. Remove the Mounting Hardware securing the Inverter Chassis to the Scan Frame. See Figure 266.
8. Remove the two Hex Head Bolts and their Washers. Screw Extender Pins into the holes vacated by the two Hex Head Bolts. Tighten
the Extender Pins only hand tight. Refer to Figure 266.

Philips Medical Systems. Confidential and Proprietary information. Refer to Title Page.
 CRX–400 Systems Scan Frame Note:
have studs screwed into the scan frame Mounting Hardware It is extremely important that the hardware used to mount
used for mounting the inverter chassis. the inverter chassis to the scan frame includes both
a lockwasher and a flatwasher.

Hose Clamps

Transformer
Connection

Invertor
Chassis Multi–Pin
Connector

Keps Stud
Nuts
Red and Black
Power Connectors

Extender Pin

Hex Head
Mounting Bolt

FIGURE 266 Inverter Chassis

Philips Medical Systems. Confidential and Proprietary information. Refer to Title Page.
 WARNING
THE INVERTER CHASSIS WEIGHS 112 LBS AND IS TOP HEAVY. USE EXTREME
CAUTION WHEN HANDLING THIS ITEM. FAILURE TO COMPLY CAN CAUSE
SEVERE DAMAGE TO EQUIPMENT AND/OR SERIOUS INJURY TO PERSONNEL.

CAUTION
TWO PEOPLE MAY BE REQUIRED TO MOVE THE INVERTER CHASSIS FROM THE
SCAN FRAME IF IT DOES NOT HAVE A LIFTING BRACKET.

9. Secure the Hoist Assembly to the Patient Support. Make sure that the clamp base is seated firmly in position on the Patient Support
and that the Knob Bolts are screwed in securely. See Figure 267.
10. Connect the Hoist Clip to the Lifting Bracket on top of the Inverter Chassis and lock the Clip. Remove slack.
11. Slide the Inverter Chassis along the Extender Pins and remove it from the Gantry.

Philips Medical Systems. Confidential and Proprietary information. Refer to Title Page.
 Side Mount Hoist Assembly Center Mount
Hoist Assembly

Patient Support

Patient Support

Knob Bolts

Knob Bolts

Clamp Base

FIGURE 267 Hoist Assembly

INVERTER CHASSIS REPLACEMENT:

12. Clean the back surface of the replacement Inverter Chassis and the Scan Frame surface.

13. Connect the Hoist Clip to the Lifting Bracket on top of the Inverter Chassis and lock the Clip. Lift Chassis with Hoist.

14. Slide the replacement Inverter Chassis along the Extender Pins and Inverter Support Rods until it is firmly against the Scan Frame.

Philips Medical Systems. Confidential and Proprietary information. Refer to Title Page.
15. Remove the Extender Pins and replace the two (2) Hex Head Bolts, their Washers and the Scan Frame Mounting Hardware. Refer
to Figure 266.
 Torque all Inverter Chassis Mounting Hardware to 15 ft–lbs.
16. Replace Cables and secure the Heat Exchanger Oil Lines with the Hose Clamps.
17. Install the triangular weights removed earlier. Remove the Locking Pin from the Scan Frame.
18. Rotate the Scan Frame counterclockwise by hand while checking for loose Cables. Also check for clearance over the entire range of
travel between the Rotating Frame Cables and the Stationary Frame.
19. Replace the Gantry Front Cone. Refer to Front Cone Replacement in the Gantry Covers Removal/Replacement procedure.

CAUTION
CLOCKWISE ROTATION OF THE SCAN FRAME MAY CAUSE DAMAGE TO THE
SLIP RING BRUSHES. ROTATE THE SCAN FRAME COUNTERCLOCKWISE ONLY.

20. Apply Gantry power. Refer to the PowerUp/PowerDown procedure.

21. Pull the Front Cover Interlock Switch Plunger out to enable operation while the Front Covers are open.

WARNING
USE EXTREME CAUTION WHEN OPERATING OR WORKING ON EQUIPMENT
WITH COVERS REMOVED. DANGEROUS VOLTAGES ARE EXPOSED WHEN THE
GANTRY COVERS ARE REMOVED. FAILURE TO COMPLY CAN CAUSE SERIOUS
INJURY OR DEATH TO PERSONNEL

22. To verify proper system operation, run several full–field and half–field water phantom scans and allow the system to process and display
an image.
23. Return the Front Cover Interlock Switch Plunger to its center position.
24. Remove Gantry power. Refer to the PowerUp/PowerDown procedure in the Introduction section.
25. Replace the Gantry lower Front Cover, close the upper Front Cover. Refer to the Gantry Covers procedure.

Philips Medical Systems. Confidential and Proprietary information. Refer to Title Page.
INVERTER MODULES
INTRODUCTION: The following procedure is used to remove and replace the inverter modules. Allow three minutes for the rail
voltages to discharge after gantry power has been removed.

TOOLS REQUIRED: 1. #1,#2 tip phillips and ¼

”x4” slotted screwdrivers
2. 3/8” and 5/16” sockets, ratchet

MATERIALS REQUIRED: 1. Loc–Tite (thread locker)

ESTIMATED TIME: 50 Min.

INVERTER MODULE REMOVAL:

1. Remove gantry power AT THE WALLBOX. Refer to the PowerUp/PowerDown procedure.

2. Open gantry front covers and remove the front cone. Refer to the gantry covers procedure.

WARNING
USE EXTREME CAUTION WHEN SERVICING EQUIPMENT WHILE UPPER GULL
WING PANELS ARE OPEN. THE PANELS HAVE SHARP EDGES. FAILURE TO
COMPLY COULD RESULT IN SERIOUS INJURY TO SERVICE PERSONNEL.

WARNING
USE EXTREME CAUTION WHEN OPERATING OR WORKING ON EQUIPMENT
WITH COVERS REMOVED. DANGEROUS VOLTAGES ARE EXPOSED WHEN THE
GANTRY COVERS ARE REMOVED. ACCIDENTAL CONTACT WITH THESE
VOLTAGES MAY CAUSE SERIOUS INJURY OR DEATH TO SERVICE PERSONNEL.

3. Rotate the scan frame counterclockwise by hand until the x–ray tube is at the 12:00 position. Lock the Scan frame with the locking
pin. See Figure 268.

Philips Medical Systems. Confidential and Proprietary information. Refer to Title Page.
 Inverter Chassis

FIGURE 268 SCAN FRAME PINNED WITH TUBE AT 12:00

4. Tag and remove all wires/cables from the high voltage generator control chassis (hvgcc).

NOTE
The hvgcc on CRX–400 and 400R systems is an integral part of the inverter chassis
and cannot be removed from the chassis.

5. Open the hvgcc cover. Tag and remove the ribbon cable connected from the hvgcc control board to the inverter modules. See
Figure 269.

Philips Medical Systems. Confidential and Proprietary information. Refer to Title Page.
 COVER SCREWS
(6 FRONT, 2 SIDES)

CABLE
CLAMP
MODULE
RIBBON
CONNECTOR
CABLE

RIBBON
CABLE

FAN
PLUG

MODULE COVER COVER

CONNECTOR INTERLOCK INTERLOCK
CRX–400 PLUG PLUG
CRX–400R
FIGURE 269 INVERTER CHASSIS COVER SCREWS

Philips Medical Systems. Confidential and Proprietary information. Refer to Title Page.
6. Remove the fan plugs from the front of the inverter modules.
7. Remove the six phillips head screws on the front and two phillips head screws on the side that secure the inverter cover to the inverter
chassis. Refer to Figure 269.
8. Remove the inverter chassis cover. Refer to Figure 269.

NOTE
The inverter modules have heavy heat sinks on the back that are spring–loaded against
the scan frame. Relieve module spring tension by first loosening the inverter
mounting bolts. Protect the back surface of the heat sink because scratching will re-
duce the surface area in contact with the scan frame.

Bottom Module
9. Tag and remove the cover interlock connector from the bottom module and secure it out of the way.
10. Tag and unplug all red and black power rail connectors.

NOTE
The transformer connectors must be supported by hand when loosening/tightening the
hex head nut during removal/replacement.

11. Tag and remove the four transformer connections from the module.
12. Remove the four slot head spring–loading screws to relieve spring compression on the module.

Philips Medical Systems. Confidential and Proprietary information. Refer to Title Page.
 CHOKE BOARD
ASSEMBLY
CHOKE BOARD ASSEMBLY
MOUNTING SCREWS (4)
TRANSFORMER–
MODULE CABLES
(12, 4 EA. MODULE)
SLOT HEAD SPRING–LOADED
SCREWS (4 EA. MODULE)
Referenced as “A” screws on the
cover silk screening

MODULE MOUNTING
SCREWS (4 EA. MODULE)
Referenced as “B” screws on
INVERTER the cover silk screening
MODULES

GRASP THIS PART OF

THE MOUNTING BRACKET
WHEN REMOVING MODULE

COVER
INTERLOCK
COVER PLUG
INTERLOCK

FIGURE 270 CRX–400R INVERTER COMPONENTS

Philips Medical Systems. Confidential and Proprietary information. Refer to Title Page.
13. Remove the four phillips head mounting screws. Grasp the mounting bracket and carefully pull the module out of the inverter chassis.
Middle Module:
14. CRX–400R: Tag and remove the cover interlock connector and secure it out of the way.
15. Tag and unplug the power rail connectors from the middle and top modules.

NOTE
The transformer connectors must be supported by hand when loosening/tightening the
hex head nut during removal/replacement.

16. CRX–400R: Tag and remove the four transformer connections from the middle module.
17. Remove the four slot head spring–loading screws to relieve spring compression on the module.
18. Remove the four phillips head mounting screws. Grasp the mounting bracket and carefully pull the module out of the inverter chassis.
Top Module:
19. Tag and unplug the power rail connectors from the top module.

NOTE
The transformer connectors must be supported by hand when loosening/tightening the
hex head nut during removal/replacement.

20. Tag and remove the four transformer connections from all modules.
21. Remove the four slot head spring–loading screws to relieve spring compression on the module.
22. Remove the four phillips head mounting screws. Grasp the mounting bracket and carefully pull the module out of the inverter chassis.

Philips Medical Systems. Confidential and Proprietary information. Refer to Title Page.
INVERTER MODULE REPLACEMENT:
CRX–400 and 400R Systems:
23. Configure the inverter module(s) as shown in Figure 271.
24. Install the replacement inverter module and secure the inverter chassis by reversing the steps of CRX–400 and 400R systems removal
and the appropriate module sub–section above.
 Apply 30 in–lbs to the module mounting and spring–loading screws.
 Apply 10 in–lbs to the inverter cover mounting screws.
 Re–tighten the four Inverter Chassis mounting bolts loosened to relieve spring tension. Torque the bolts to 15 ft–lbs.
25. Remove the locking pin from the scan frame.
26. Rotate the scan frame counterclockwise by hand while checking for loose cables. Also check for clearance over the entire range of
travel between the rotating frame cables and the stationary frame.

Philips Medical Systems. Confidential and Proprietary information. Refer to Title Page.
 PLACE JUMPERS IN POSITIONS
INSTALL JUMPERS HERE SHOWN FOR INVERTER #2

COMPONENT
SIDE JB1

1 33
RN1
123 JP2

JP1
123 123 123123
A B C D

NOTE

THE INVERTER MODULE MUST BE CONFIGURED

FOR POSITION #2 0R #3 BEFORE INSTALLATION

PLACE JUMPERS IN POSITIONS

SHOWN FOR INVERTER #3

JB1

1 33
RN1
123 JP2

JP1
123 123 123123
A B C D
174387

FIGURE 271 INVERTER MODULE #2 AND #3 JUMPER POSITIONS

Philips Medical Systems. Confidential and Proprietary information. Refer to Title Page.
 CAUTION
CLOCKWISE ROTATION OF THE SCAN FRAME MAY CAUSE DAMAGE TO THE
SLIP RING BRUSHES. ROTATE THE SCAN FRAME COUNTERCLOCKWISE ONLY.

27. Replace the gantry front cone. Refer to gantry covers procedure.
28. Apply gantry power. Refer to the PowerUp/PowerDown procedure.

WARNING
USE EXTREME CAUTION WHEN OPERATING OR WORKING ON EQUIPMENT
WITH COVERS REMOVED. DANGEROUS VOLTAGES ARE EXPOSED WHEN THE
GANTRY COVERS ARE REMOVED. ACCIDENTAL CONTACT WITH THESE
VOLTAGES MAY CAUSE SERIOUS INJURY OR DEATH TO SERVICE PERSONNEL.

29. Pull the front cover interlock switch plunger out to enable operation while the front covers are open.
30. To verify proper system operation, run full–field and half–field water phantom scans and allow the system to process and display an
image.
31. Return the front cover interlock switch plunger to its center position.
32. Remove gantry power. Refer to the PowerUp/PowerDown procedure.
33. Replace the gantry lower front cover, close the upper front cover. Refer to the gantry covers procedure.

Philips Medical Systems. Confidential and Proprietary information. Refer to Title Page.
HIGH VOLTAGE TRANSFORMER
INTRODUCTION: The following procedure is used to remove and replace the high voltage transformer. Allow five minutes for the
rail voltages to discharge after gantry power is off.

TOOLS REQUIRED: 1. Slotted, #1 and #2 tip phillips screwdrivers

2. Small diagonal cutters

MATERIAL REQUIRED: Loc–Tite (Thread Locker)

CHASSIS WEIGHT: 25.7 pounds (CRX–400)

XXX pounds (CRX–400R)

ESTIMATED TIME: 1.0 Hr.

HIGH VOLTAGE TRANSFORMER REMOVAL:

1. Remove gantry power AT THE WALLBOX. Refer to the PowerUp/PowerDown procedure.
2. Open gantry front covers and remove the front cone. Refer to the gantry covers procedure.

WARNING
USE EXTREME CAUTION WHEN SERVICING EQUIPMENT WHILE UPPER GULL
WING PANELS ARE OPEN. THE PANELS HAVE SHARP EDGES. FAILURE TO
COMPLY COULD RESULT IN SERIOUS INJURY TO SERVICE PERSONNEL.

WARNING
USE EXTREME CAUTION WHEN OPERATING OR WORKING ON EQUIPMENT
WITH COVERS REMOVED. DANGEROUS VOLTAGES ARE EXPOSED WHEN THE
GANTRY COVERS ARE REMOVED. ACCIDENTAL CONTACT WITH THESE
VOLTAGES MAY CAUSE SERIOUS INJURY OR DEATH TO SERVICE PERSONNEL.

3. Rotate the scan frame counterclockwise by hand until the x–ray tube is at the 12:00 position. Lock the scan frame with the locking
pin. See Figure 272.

Philips Medical Systems. Confidential and Proprietary information. Refer to Title Page.
 Inverter Chassis

FIGURE 272 SCAN FRAME PINNED WITH TUBE AT 12:00

4. Remove the inverter chassis. Refer to the inverter chassis removal procedure.

NOTE
The inverter modules have heavy heat sinks on the back that are spring–loaded against
the scan frame. They are difficult to handle and will sag down during removal. Protect
the back surface of the heat sink because scratching will reduce the surface area in con-
tact with the scan frame.

Philips Medical Systems. Confidential and Proprietary information. Refer to Title Page.
 TRANSFORMER–MULTIPLIER
CONNECTION RESTRAINT
TRANSFORMER SCREWS (6, 3 EACH SIDE)
TRANSFORMER
MOUNTING
SCREWS
(2 EACH SIDE)

TRANSFORMER–MODULE CABLES
(12, 4 EACH MODULE)

FIGURE 273 HIGH VOLTAGE TRANSFORMER

Philips Medical Systems. Confidential and Proprietary information. Refer to Title Page.
 CHOKE BOARD ASSEMBLY
MOUNTING SCREWS (4)

FIGURE 274 CHOKE BOARD ASSEMBLY

Philips Medical Systems. Confidential and Proprietary information. Refer to Title Page.
5. Place the inverter chassis on a bench (or the floor) with the cover side up and remove the cover. Refer to the appropriate steps of the
inverter module removal procedure and to Figure 269.
6. Remove the transformer–module cables from all modules and free them from the twist–type cable ties. Note cable tags in order to
ensure proper installation of the new transformer. Refer to Figure 273.

NOTE
The transformer connectors must be supported by hand when loosening/tightening the
hex head nut during removal/replacement.

7. Remove the four choke board assembly mounting screws and lift up the choke board assembly. Refer to Figure 274. With the choke
board assembly lifted out of the way, remove the anderson connector from the side of the inverter chassis.
8. Lay the choke board assembly up and over the inverter modules to allow access to the high voltage transformer beneath.
9. Remove the six transformer–multiplier cable restraint screws and release the cable restraints. Refer to Figure 273.
10. Remove the six transformer mounting screws and remove the transformer from the inverter chassis.
HIGH VOLTAGE TRANSFORMER REPLACEMENT:
11. Install the replacement high voltage transformer by reversing the steps of CRX–400 and 400R systems high voltage transformer
removal procedure.
 Apply 20 in–lbs to transformer mounting screws.
12. Remove the locking pin from the scan frame.
13. Rotate the scan frame counterclockwise by hand while checking for loose cables. Also check for clearance over the entire range of
travel between the rotating frame cables and the stationary frame.

CAUTION
CLOCKWISE ROTATION OF THE SCAN FRAME MAY CAUSE DAMAGE TO THE
SLIP RING BRUSHES. ROTATE THE SCAN FRAME COUNTERCLOCKWISE ONLY.

14. Replace the gantry front cone. Refer to the gantry covers procedure.
15. Apply gantry power. Refer to PowerUp/PowerDown procedure.

Philips Medical Systems. Confidential and Proprietary information. Refer to Title Page.
16. Pull the front cover interlock switch plunger out to enable operation while the front covers are open.
17. To verify proper system operation, run full–field and half–field water phantom scans and allow the system to process and display an
image.
18. Return the front cover interlock switch plunger to its center position.
19. Remove gantry power. Refer to the PowerUp/PowerDown procedure.
20. Replace the gantry lower front cover, close the upper front cover. Refer to the gantry covers procedure.

Philips Medical Systems. Confidential and Proprietary information. Refer to Title Page.
HIGH VOLTAGE GENERATOR CONTROL BOARDS

INTRODUCTION: The following procedure is used to remove and replace the high voltage generator system control board.

TOOLS REQUIRED: 1. Slotted and #2 tip phillips screwdrivers

MATERIAL REQUIRED: 1. Static–protective bags or conductive foam suitable to protect gantry

circuit boards.

ESTIMATED TIME: 45 Min.

HIGH VOLTAGE GENERATOR CONTROL BOARD REMOVAL:

1. Remove gantry power AT THE WALLBOX. Refer to the PowerUp/PowerDown procedure.

2. Open the gantry front covers and remove the front cone. Refer to the gantry covers procedures.

WARNING
USE EXTREME CAUTION WHEN SERVICING EQUIPMENT WHILE UPPER GULL
WING PANELS ARE OPEN. THE PANELS HAVE SHARP EDGES. FAILURE TO
COMPLY COULD RESULT IN SERIOUS INJURY TO SERVICE PERSONNEL.

WARNING
USE EXTREME CAUTION WHEN OPERATING OR WORKING ON EQUIPMENT
WITH COVERS REMOVED. DANGEROUS VOLTAGES ARE EXPOSED WHEN THE
GANTRY COVERS ARE REMOVED. ACCIDENTAL CONTACT WITH THESE
VOLTAGES MAY CAUSE SERIOUS INJURY OR DEATH TO SERVICE PERSONNEL.

3. Rotate the scan frame counterclockwise by hand until the x–ray tube is at the 12:00 position. Lock the scan frame with the locking pin.
See Figure 275.

Philips Medical Systems. Confidential and Proprietary information. Refer to Title Page.
 Inverter Chassis

FIGURE 275 SCAN FRAME PINNED WITH TUBE AT 12:00

System Control Board
4. Loosen the two captive cover screws and open the cover. Refer to NO TAG.
5. Tag and remove all cables from the system control pcb at the control chassis.

Philips Medical Systems. Confidential and Proprietary information. Refer to Title Page.
 CAUTION
STATIC ELECTRICITY MAY BE PRESENT. CIRCUIT BOARDS MUST BE HANDLED
WITH STATIC–PROTECTIVE TECHNIQUES. DISCHARGE YOUR BODY BEFORE
HANDLING ANY CIRCUIT BOARD. KEEP ALL CIRCUIT BOARDS IN STATIC–PRO-
TECTIVE BAGS OR ON CONDUCTIVE FOAM WHEN NOT INSTALLED IN THE
EQUIPMENT. FAILURE TO COMPLY MAY CAUSE PERMANENT DAMAGE TO
COMPONENTS ON PRINTED CIRCUIT BOARDS. SEE XR4009 FOR DETAILS.

6. CRX–400R: Remove the two retaining screws which secure the system control board to the control chassis. Slide the board on its
mountings to release it from the slide–fit slots and lift out the board. Store the circuit board in a static–protective bag. See Figure 276.

Philips Medical Systems. Confidential and Proprietary information. Refer to Title Page.
 HVGCC
DOOR

SYSTEM CONTROL BOARD

SLOT–FIT
STANDOFF

MOUNTING SCREWS 4 CRX–400

2 CRX–400R

FIGURE 276 CRX–400R SYSTEM CONTROL BOARD

Philips Medical Systems. Confidential and Proprietary information. Refer to Title Page.
REPLACEMENT:

7. Install the replacement analog or system control board by reversing the steps of the appropriate removal section above.
8. Remove the scan frame locking pin.
9. Rotate the scan frame counterclockwise by hand while checking for loose cables. Also check for clearance over the entire range of
travel between the rotating frame cables and the stationary frame.

CAUTION
CLOCKWISE ROTATION OF THE SCAN FRAME MAY CAUSE DAMAGE TO THE
SLIP RING BRUSHES. ROTATE THE SCAN FRAME COUNTERCLOCKWISE ONLY.

10. Replace the gantry front cone. Refer to the gantry covers procedure.
11. Apply gantry power. Refer to the PowerUp/PowerDown procedure.
12. Pull the front cover interlock switch plunger out to enable operation while the front covers are open.
13. To verify proper system operation, run full–field and half–field water phantom scans and allow the system to process and display an
image.
14. Return the front cover interlock switch plunger to its center position.

WARNING
USE EXTREME CAUTION WHEN OPERATING OR WORKING ON EQUIPMENT
WITH COVERS REMOVED. DANGEROUS VOLTAGES ARE EXPOSED WHEN THE
GANTRY COVERS ARE REMOVED. ACCIDENTAL CONTACT WITH THESE
VOLTAGES MAY CAUSE SERIOUS INJURY OR DEATH TO SERVICE PERSONNEL.

15. Remove gantry power. Refer to the PowerUp/PowerDown procedure.

16. Replace the gantry lower front cover, close the upper front cover. Refer to the gantry covers procedure.

Philips Medical Systems. Confidential and Proprietary information. Refer to Title Page.
AC INPUT CHASSIS

Introduction: The following procedure is used to remove and replace the AC Input Chassis.

Tools Required: 1. 3/4” and 9/16” Sockets, Ratchet

2. Torque wrench (75 ft–lb)

3. Hoist Assembly

Estimated Time: 1 Hr.

AC INPUT CHASSIS REMOVAL:

1. Remove Gantry power. Refer to the PowerUp/PowerDown procedure.

2. Open the Gantry Front Covers and remove the Front Cone. Refer to the Gantry Covers procedure.

WARNING
USE EXTREME CAUTION WHEN SERVICING EQUIPMENT WHILE THE UPPER
GULL WING IS OPEN. THE PANEL HAS SHARP EDGES. FAILURE TO COMPLY
COULD RESULT IN SERIOUS INJURY TO PERSONNEL.

3. Rotate the Scan Frame counterclockwise by hand until the X–Ray Tube is at the 12:00 position. Lock the Scan Frame with the Locking
Pin. See Figure 277.

WARNING
USE EXTREME CAUTION WHEN OPERATING OR WORKING ON EQUIPMENT
WITH COVERS REMOVED. DANGEROUS VOLTAGES ARE EXPOSED WHEN THE
GANTRY COVERS ARE REMOVED. FAILURE TO COMPLY CAN CAUSE SERIOUS
INJURY OR DEATH TO PERSONNEL.

Philips Medical Systems. Confidential and Proprietary information. Refer to Title Page.
 Pin Location
X-Ray Tube

AC Input Chassis

FIGURE 277 Scan Frame Pinned with Tube at 12:00

4. Tag/disconnect all Wires/Cables exiting the AC Input Chassis (top and bottom). Tie and secure them.
5. Remove the two Hex Head Mounting Bolts and screw Extender Pins into the vacated holes. See Figure 278.
6. Remove the two Hex Mounting Nuts and the Washers that secure the AC Input Chassis to the Gantry. See Figure 278.

Philips Medical Systems. Confidential and Proprietary information. Refer to Title Page.
 WARNING
THE AC INPUT CHASSIS WEIGHS 106 LBS. USE CAUTION WHEN HANDLING
THIS ITEM. FAILURE TO COMPLY COULD RESULT IN EQUIPMENT DAMAGE
AND/OR SERIOUS INJURY OR DEATH TO PERSONNEL.

CAUTION
TWO PEOPLE MAY BE REQUIRED TO REMOVE THE AC INPUT CHASSIS FROM
THE SCAN FRAME IF THE SYSTEM IS CRX–400 AND DOES NOT HAVE A LIFTING
BRACKET.

7. Secure the Hoist Assembly to the Patient Support. Make sure that the Clamp Base is seated firmly in position on the Patient Support
and that the Knob Bolts are screwed in securely. See Figure 279.

Philips Medical Systems. Confidential and Proprietary information. Refer to Title Page.
 Scan Frame Mounting
Nut (2 each)

Note
It is extremely important that the
hardware used to mount the AC
input chassis to the scan frame
includes both a lockwasher and a
flat washer.

AC Input Chassis
(CRX-400)

FIGURE 278 CRX400 AC INPUT CHASSIS

Philips Medical Systems. Confidential and Proprietary information. Refer to Title Page.
8. Connect the Hoist Clip to the Lifting Bracket on top of the AC Input Chassis and lock the Clip. Remove slack.

Center Mount
Hoist Assembly
Side Mount Hoist Assembly

Patient
Support

Patient Support

Knob
Bolts

Knob
Bolts

Clamp Base

FIGURE 279 HOIST ASSEMBLY

Philips Medical Systems. Confidential and Proprietary information. Refer to Title Page.
9. Slide the AC Input Chassis along the Extender Pins and remove it from the Gantry.

AC INPUT CHASSIS REPLACEMENT:

10. Install the AC Input Chassis and the X–ray Control Chassis by reversing steps 4. through 9.
 Torque Mounting Bolts to 15 ft–lb.
11. Remove the Scan Frame Locking Pin.
12. Rotate the Scan Frame counterclockwise by hand while checking for loose Cables. Also check for clearance over the entire range of
travel between the Rotating Frame Cables and the Stationary Frame.

CAUTION
CLOCKWISE ROTATION OF THE SCAN FRAME MAY CAUSE DAMAGE TO THE
SLIP RING BRUSHES. ROTATE THE SCAN FRAME COUNTERCLOCKWISE ONLY.

13. Replace the Gantry Front Cone. Refer to the Gantry Covers procedure.
14. Apply Gantry power. Refer to the PowerUp/PowerDown procedure.

WARNING
USE EXTREME CAUTION WHEN OPERATING OR WORKING ON EQUIPMENT
WITH COVERS REMOVED. DANGEROUS VOLTAGES ARE EXPOSED WHEN THE
GANTRY COVERS ARE REMOVED. FAILURE TO COMPLY CAN CAUSE SERIOUS
INJURY OR DEATH TO PERSONNEL.

15. Pull the Front Cover Interlock Switch Plunger out to enable operation while the Front Covers are open.
16. To verify proper System operation, run Full–field and Half–field Water Phantom Scans and allow the System to process and display
an Image.
17. Return the Front Cover Interlock Switch Plunger to its center position.
18. Remove Gantry power. Refer to the PowerUp/PowerDown procedure.
19. Replace the Gantry lower Front Cover, close the upper Front Cover. Refer to the Gantry Covers procedure.

Philips Medical Systems. Confidential and Proprietary information. Refer to Title Page.
AC DIAGNOSTIC BOARD

Introduction: The following procedure is used to remove and replace the AC Diagnostic Board located inside the AC Input
Chassis.

Tools Required: 1. #2 tip Phillips screwdriver

2. 1/4” hex key

Materials Required: 1. Loc–Tite (thread locker)

Eastimated Time: 35 min.

AC DIAGNOSTIC BOARD REMOVAL:

1. Remove Gantry power. Refer to the PowerUp/PowerDown procedure.

2. Open the Gantry Front Covers and remove the Front Cone. Refer to the Gantry Covers procedure.

WARNING
USE EXTREME CAUTION WHEN SERVICING EQUIPMENT WHILE THE UPPER
GULL WING IS OPEN. THE PANEL HAS SHARP EDGES. FAILURE TO COMPLY
COULD RESULT IN SERIOUS INJURY TO PERSONNEL.

3. Rotate the Scan Frame counterclockwise by hand until the X–Ray Tube is at the 12:00 position. Lock the Scan Frame with the Locking
Pin. See Figure 280.

WARNING
USE EXTREME CAUTION WHEN OPERATING OR WORKING ON EQUIPMENT
WITH COVERS REMOVED. DANGEROUS VOLTAGES ARE EXPOSED WHEN THE
GANTRY COVERS ARE REMOVED. FAILURE TO COMPLY CAN CAUSE SERIOUS
INJURY OR DEATH TO PERSONNEL.

Philips Medical Systems. Confidential and Proprietary information. Refer to Title Page.
 Pin Location
X-Ray Tube

Component Located Inside

AC Input Chassis

FIGURE 280 Scan Frame Pinned with Tube at 12:00

4. Remove the seven Cover Screws on the AC Input Chassis. See Figure 281.

NOTE
Some systems will not be equipped with Straps depending on the type of Main Bearing
installed. For these systems the next two steps may be omitted.

Philips Medical Systems. Confidential and Proprietary information. Refer to Title Page.
5. Remove the Socket Head Capscrew securing the Left Strap to the Tube Shelf Bracket. See Figure 282.

6. Remove the Pivot AC Bracket. See Figure 282.

7. Remove the AC Input Chassis Cover.

Cover Screw
(7) Captive
Board
Screws (2)

AC Diagnostic
Board
Grommet
AC Input Chassis
Cover

Non-Captive
Board Screws (4)

AC Input
Chassis

FIGURE 281 AC Input Chassis Cover and Diagnostic Board

Philips Medical Systems. Confidential and Proprietary information. Refer to Title Page.
 Socket Head
Capscrew

Tube Shelf Bracket

Tube Shelf

Pull top of left strap away

from tube shelf.

PIvot Bracket

Pivot AC Bracket secured by

three (3) of seven (7) cover
screws.

FIGURE 282 Left Strap and Pivot AC Bracket

Philips Medical Systems. Confidential and Proprietary information. Refer to Title Page.
8. Tag and disconnect all Wires/Cables connected to the AC Diagnostic Circuit Board.
9. Remove the six PCB Retaining Screws that secure the AC Diagnostic Board and remove the Board by carefully disengaging the
rear–entry Card Connector Pins (JB5) and then working the PCB out of the Chassis. Note: it might be necessary to slightly bend the
PCB to effect removal. Refer to Figure 281.

AC DIAGNOSTIC BOARD REPLACEMENT:

10. Install the AC Diagnostic Board by reversing step 8. and 9.
11. Replace and secure the AC Input Chassis Cover, AC Pivot Bracket and the Socket Head Capscrew for the Left Strap. Apply Loc–Tite
to Cover Screws.
12. Remove the Scan Frame Locking Pin.
13. Rotate the Scan Frame counterclockwise by hand while checking for loose Cables. Also check for clearance over the entire range of
travel between the Rotating Frame Cables and the Stationary Frame.

CAUTION
CLOCKWISE ROTATION OF THE SCAN FRAME MAY CAUSE DAMAGE TO THE
SLIP RING BRUSHES. ROTATE THE SCAN FRAME COUNTERCLOCKWISE ONLY.

14. Replace the Gantry Front Cone. Refer to the Gantry Covers procedure.
15. Apply Gantry power. Refer to the PowerUp/PowerDown procedure.

WARNING
USE EXTREME CAUTION WHEN OPERATING OR WORKING ON EQUIPMENT
WITH COVERS REMOVED. DANGEROUS VOLTAGES ARE EXPOSED WHEN THE
GANTRY COVERS ARE REMOVED. FAILURE TO COMPLY CAN CAUSE SERIOUS
INJURY OR DEATH TO PERSONNEL.

16. Pull the Front Cover Interlock Switch Plunger out to enable operation while the Front Covers are open.
17. To verify proper System operation, run Full–field and Half–field Water Phantom Scans and allow the System to process and display
an Image.

Philips Medical Systems. Confidential and Proprietary information. Refer to Title Page.
18. Return the Front Cover Interlock Switch Plunger to its center position.
19. Remove Gantry power. Refer to the PowerUp/PowerDown procedure.
20. Replace the Gantry lower Front Cover, close the upper Front Cover. Refer to the Gantry Covers procedure.

Philips Medical Systems. Confidential and Proprietary information. Refer to Title Page.
3KVA SCAN DRIVE TRANSFORMER

Introduction: This procedure is used to remove and replace the Scan Drive Motor Controller 3 KVA isolation transformer. Two
people are recommended for this procedure due to the weight of the chassis.

Tools Required: 1. 1/4” x 4” slotted screwdriver

2. 9/16” socket, ratchet

3. Small offset Phillips screwdriver

Chassis Weight: 80 LBS.

Estimated Time: 1.5 Hrs.

TRANSFORMER REMOVAL:

1. Remove Gantry power. Refer to the PowerUp/PowerDown procedure.

2. Open the Gantry Front Covers and remove the Front Cone. Refer to the Gantry Covers procedure.

WARNING
USE EXTREME CAUTION WHEN SERVICING EQUIPMENT WHILE THE UPPER
GULL WING IS OPEN. THE PANEL HAS SHARP EDGES. FAILURE TO COMPLY
COULD RESULT IN SERIOUS INJURY TO PERSONNEL.

WARNING
USE EXTREME CAUTION WHEN OPERATING OR WORKING ON EQUIPMENT
WITH COVERS REMOVED. DANGEROUS VOLTAGES ARE EXPOSED WHEN THE
GANTRY COVERS ARE REMOVED. FAILURE TO COMPLY CAN CAUSE SERIOUS
INJURY OR DEATH TO PERSONNEL.

Philips Medical Systems. Confidential and Proprietary information. Refer to Title Page.
 3 KVA
Transformer

FIGURE 283 Scan Drive Power Transformer Location – Rear of Gantry

3. Remove the six Power Transformer Cover Mounting Screws and remove the Cover.
4. Tag and remove all connections from the load side of the Transformer Terminal Strip. See Figure 284.

Philips Medical Systems. Confidential and Proprietary information. Refer to Title Page.
 Front Back

F201

Remove Wire
Bundle Connections

Transformer
Mounting Nuts
and Washers (4)

FIGURE 284 3 KVA Transformer Mounting and Connections

5. Loosen the top two Transformer Mounting Nuts and remove the Bottom two Nuts and Washers. Refer to Figure 284.

Philips Medical Systems. Confidential and Proprietary information. Refer to Title Page.
 WARNING
USE TWO PERSONS TO HANDLE THE 3 KVA TRANSFORMER. THE 3KVA
TRANSFER WEIGHS 80 LBS. FAILURE TO COMPLY COULD RESULT IN
EQUIPMENT DAMAGE AND/OR SERIOUS INJURY TO PERSONNEL.

6. One person fully support the Transformer weight and the other person remove the upper two Mounting Nuts and Washers.
7. Remove the Transformer from the Gantry.

TRANSFORMER REPLACEMENT:
8. Install the replacement Transformer by reversing steps 4. through 7.
9. Replace the Gantry Front Cone. Refer to Front Cone Replacement in the Gantry Covers Removal/Replacement procedure.

WARNING
USE EXTREME CAUTION WHEN OPERATING OR WORKING ON EQUIPMENT
WITH COVERS REMOVED. DANGEROUS VOLTAGES ARE EXPOSED WHEN THE
GANTRY COVERS ARE REMOVED. FAILURE TO COMPLY CAN CAUSE SERIOUS
INJURY OR DEATH TO PERSONNEL.

10. Apply Gantry power. Refer to the PowerUp/PowerDown procedure.

11. Verify 230 VAC 3q
power on L1, L2 and L3 at the Terminal Block on the front of the Transformer.
12. Replace the Transformer Cover and the six (6) Mounting Screws
13. Pull the Front Cover Interlock Switch Plunger out to enable operation while the Front Covers are open.
14. To verify proper System operation, run Full–field and Half–field Water Phantom Scans and allow the System to process and display
an Image.
15. Return the Front Cover Interlock Switch Plunger to its center position. Remove Gantry power. Refer to the PowerUp/PowerDown
procedure.
16. Replace the Gantry lower Front Cover, close the upper Front and Rear Covers. Refer the Gantry Covers procedure.

Philips Medical Systems. Confidential and Proprietary information. Refer to Title Page.
SERVO AMPLIFIER
Introduction: This procedure is used to remove/replace the scan drive motor cntrl servo amp.
Tools Required: 1. #1 tip Phillips and 1/4” x 4” slottedscrewdriver

Estimated Time: 35 min.

SERVO AMPLIFIER REMOVAL:
1. Remove Gantry power. Refer to the PowerUp/PowerDown procedure.
2. Open the Gantry Front Covers and remove the Front Cone. Refer to the Gantry Covers procedures.

WARNING
USE EXTREME CAUTION WHEN SERVICING EQUIPMENT WHILE THE UPPER
GULL WING IS OPEN. THE PANEL HAS SHARP EDGES. FAILURE TO COMPLY
COULD RESULT IN SERIOUS INJURY TO PERSONNEL.

3. Unscrew the two Phillips Mounting Screws and remove the Clear Lexan Shield from the front of the Servo Amplifier. See Figure 285.

WARNING
USE EXTREME CAUTION WHEN OPERATING OR WORKING ON EQUIPMENT
WITH COVERS REMOVED. DANGEROUS VOLTAGES ARE EXPOSED WHEN THE
GANTRY COVERS ARE REMOVED. FAILURE TO COMPLY CAN CAUSE SERIOUS
INJURY OR DEATH TO PERSONNEL.

Philips Medical Systems. Confidential and Proprietary information. Refer to Title Page.
 Servo Amplifier
Mounting Screws

L201
L201
BR201

L202

C201
L203

R201
F201
Plastic Shield

Cover
Mounting Servo–Amplifier
Screws
Remove
Wires

FIGURE 285 Servo Amplifier Assembly

4. Tag and remove all wires connected from the Gantry frame to the top terminal block. Keep all hardware for reuse during installation.

Philips Medical Systems. Confidential and Proprietary information. Refer to Title Page.
5. Loosen the three Servo Amplifier Mounting Screws (2 top and 1 bottom). Refer to Figure 285.
6. Support the weight of the Amplifier and remove both top Mounting Screws.
7. Tilt the top of the Servo Amplifier away from the Backplane and slide the bottom to the left to clear the bottom Mounting Screw.
8. Remove the Servo Amplifier from the Gantry.

SERVO AMPLIFIER REPLACEMENT:

9. Replace the Servo Amplifier by reversing steps 3. through 8.

10. Replace the Gantry Front Cone. Refer to the Gantry Covers procedure.
11. Apply Gantry power. Refer to the PowerUp/PowerDown procedure.
12. Pull the Front Cover Interlock Switch Plunger out to enable operation while the Front Covers are open.

WARNING
USE EXTREME CAUTION WHEN OPERATING OR WORKING ON EQUIPMENT
WITH COVERS REMOVED. DANGEROUS VOLTAGES ARE EXPOSED WHEN THE
GANTRY COVERS ARE REMOVED. FAILURE TO COMPLY CAN CAUSE SERIOUS
INJURY OR DEATH TO PERSONNEL.

13. To verify proper System operation, run Full–field and Half–field Water Phantom Scans and allow the System to process and display
an Image.
14. Return the Front Cover Interlock Switch Plunger to its center position.
15. Remove Gantry power. Refer to the PowerUp/PowerDown procedure.
16. Replace the Gantry lower Front Cover, close the upper Front Cover. Refer to the Gantry Covers procedure.

Philips Medical Systems. Confidential and Proprietary information. Refer to Title Page.
SCAN DRIVE CONTROL: SOLID STATE RELAY & BRIDGE RECTIFIER
Introduction: This procedure is used to remove and replace the Solid State Relay (SSR) mounted on the back of the Scan
Drive Control Chassis and the Bridge Rectifier mounted on the front of the Chassis.

Tools Required: 1. 5/16” x 6” slotted and #1 tip Phillips screwdrivers

Estimated Time: 1 Hr.

Solid State Relay Removal:
1. Remove Gantry power. Refer to the PowerUp/PowerDown procedure.
2. Open the Gantry Front Covers and remove the Front Cone. Refer to the Gantry Covers procedure.

WARNING
USE EXTREME CAUTION WHEN SERVICING EQUIPMENT WHILE THE UPPER
GULL WING IS OPEN. THE PANEL HAS SHARP EDGES. FAILURE TO COMPLY
COULD RESULT IN SERIOUS INJURY TO PERSONNEL.

WARNING
USE EXTREME CAUTION WHEN OPERATING OR WORKING ON EQUIPMENT
WITH COVERS REMOVED. DANGEROUS VOLTAGES ARE EXPOSED WHEN THE
GANTRY COVERS ARE REMOVED. FAILURE TO COMPLY CAN CAUSE SERIOUS
INJURY OR DEATH TO PERSONNEL.

3. Tag and remove the four wires connected to the SSR terminals. See Figure 286.

Philips Medical Systems. Confidential and Proprietary information. Refer to Title Page.
 Front Rear

F201

Bridge
Rectifier

Solid State
Relay

FIGURE 286 Bridge Rectifier and Solid State Relay Locations

4. Support the SSR and remove the two Mounting Screws. See Figure 287.

Philips Medical Systems. Confidential and Proprietary information. Refer to Title Page.
 Mounting Hardware

Input
Terminals
Output
Terminals

Solid State Relay

FIGURE 287 Solid State Relay and Mounting Hardware

5. Remove the SSR from the Gantry.

Bridge Rectifier Removal:

1. Remove Gantry power. Refer to the PowerUp/PowerDown procedure.

2. Open the Gantry Front Covers and remove the Front Cone. Refer to the Gantry Covers procedure.
3. Tag and remove the 5 wires connected to the Bridge Rectifier terminals (three AC input and two DC output). See Figure 288.

Philips Medical Systems. Confidential and Proprietary information. Refer to Title Page.
 3 Phase AC Input
Connections

DC Out

Solid State Relay

Mounting Hardware

FIGURE 288 Bridge Rectifier

4. Support the Bridge Rectifier and remove the two Mounting Screws.
5. Remove the Bridge Rectifier from the Gantry.
Solid State Relay Replacement:
6. Install the replacement Relay by reversing steps 3. to 5. of Solid State Relay removal.

Philips Medical Systems. Confidential and Proprietary information. Refer to Title Page.
Bridge Rectifier Replacement:
7. Install the replacement Rectifier by reversing steps 3. to 5. of Bridge Rectifier removal.
8. Apply Gantry power. Refer to the PowerUp/PowerDown procedure.

WARNING
USE EXTREME CAUTION WHEN OPERATING OR WORKING ON EQUIPMENT
WITH COVERS REMOVED. DANGEROUS VOLTAGES ARE EXPOSED WHEN THE
GANTRY COVERS ARE REMOVED. FAILURE TO COMPLY CAN CAUSE SERIOUS
INJURY OR DEATH TO PERSONNEL.

9. Pull the Front Cover Interlock Switch Plunger out to enable operation while the Front Covers are open.
10. Turn on the Laser and verify that the Scan Frame moves.

WARNING
ROTATING MACHINERY. STAND CLEAR OF ROTATING FRAME WHEN
EQUIPMENT IS OPERATED. FAILURE TO COMPLY MAY RESULT IN SERIOUS
INJURY OR DEATH TO PERSONNEL.

11. To verify proper System operation, run Full–field and Half–field Water Phantom Scans and allow the System to process and display
an Image.
12. Return the Front Cover Interlock Switch Plunger to its center position.
13. Remove Gantry power. Refer to the PowerUp/PowerDown procedure.
14. Close the upper Front and Rear Covers. Refer to the Gantry Covers procedure.

Philips Medical Systems. Confidential and Proprietary information. Refer to Title Page.
SERVO–CONTROLLER FAN
Introduction: This procedure is used to remove and replace the Servo–Controller Fan.
Tools Required: 1. 5/16” open box end wrench
Estimated Time: 30 min.

SERVO–CONTROLLER FAN REMOVAL:

1. Remove Gantry power. Refer to the PowerUp/PowerDown procedure.
2. Open the Gantry Front Covers and remove the Front Cone. Refer to the Gantry Covers procedure.

WARNING
USE EXTREME CAUTION WHEN SERVICING EQUIPMENT WHILE THE UPPER
GULL WING IS OPEN. THE PANEL HAS SHARP EDGES. FAILURE TO COMPLY
COULD RESULT IN SERIOUS INJURY TO PERSONNEL.

WARNING
USE EXTREME CAUTION WHEN OPERATING OR WORKING ON EQUIPMENT
WITH COVERS REMOVED. DANGEROUS VOLTAGES ARE EXPOSED WHEN THE
GANTRY COVERS ARE REMOVED. FAILURE TO COMPLY CAN CAUSE SERIOUS
INJURY OR DEATH TO PERSONNEL.

3. Tag and disconnect the black and white wires from the Fan Power Terminals.
4. Cut and remove any Tie–Wraps securing the Wire Bundle to the Fan.
5. Remove the four Hex Nuts and Washers that secure the Fan to the Servo–Controller Figure 289.

NOTE
Two of the four Hex Nuts are located behind the 3 KVA Scan Drive Transformer. The
Nuts and Washers are small and can be easily dropped if not handled with care.

Philips Medical Systems. Confidential and Proprietary information. Refer to Title Page.
 Front Back

F201

Fan Mounting
Hardware

Servo–Controller Fan

FIGURE 289 Servo–Controller Fan and Mounting Hardware

SERVO–CONTROLLER FAN REPLACEMENT

6. Install the replacement Fan by reversing steps 3. to 5.

7. Apply Gantry power. Refer to the PowerUp/PowerDown procedure.
8. Block the air flow from the Gantry Air Blowers and check that the Fan stops rotating.
9. Pull the Front Cover Interlock Switch Plunger out to enable operation while the Front Covers are open.

Philips Medical Systems. Confidential and Proprietary information. Refer to Title Page.
10. With the air flow blocked, check that the Fan is operating.
11. Return the Front Cover Interlock Switch Plunger to its center position.
12. Remove Gantry power. Refer to the PowerUp/PowerDown procedure.
13. Close the upper Front and Rear Covers. Refer to the Gantry Covers procedure.

Philips Medical Systems. Confidential and Proprietary information. Refer to Title Page.
GANTRY AIR BLOWER
Introduction: This procedure is used to remove and replace the Gantry Air Blowers. Since both Blowers are the same, this
procedure will apply in either case.

Tools Required: 1. 7/16” socket, ratchet

2. #1 tip Phillips screwdriver

3. 3/16” hex key

Estimated Time: 1.0 hr.

BLOWER ASSEMBLY REMOVAL:

1. Remove Gantry power. Refer to the PowerUp/PowerDown procedure.

2. Open the Gantry Front Covers and remove the Front Cone. Refer to the Gantry Covers procedure.

WARNING
USE EXTREME CAUTION WHEN SERVICING EQUIPMENT WHILE THE UPPER
GULL WING IS OPEN. THE PANEL HAS SHARP EDGES. FAILURE TO COMPLY
COULD RESULT IN SERIOUS INJURY TO PERSONNEL.

WARNING
USE EXTREME CAUTION WHEN OPERATING OR WORKING ON EQUIPMENT
WITH COVERS REMOVED. DANGEROUS VOLTAGES ARE EXPOSED WHEN THE
GANTRY COVERS ARE REMOVED. FAILURE TO COMPLY CAN CAUSE SERIOUS
INJURY OR DEATH TO PERSONNEL.

Philips Medical Systems. Confidential and Proprietary information. Refer to Title Page.
 Gantry Blower
Locations

FIGURE 290 Gantry Air Lower Locations

3. Note routing of Blower Cable and cut Cable Ties securing it to the Gantry.
4. Tag and remove the three in–line connectors on the blower cable assembly connected outside the AC Control Chassis.
5. Remove the four Mounting Screws and remove the Air Inlet Duct. See Figure 291.

Philips Medical Systems. Confidential and Proprietary information. Refer to Title Page.
 Remove
Hex Screws

Mounting
Bolt
Holes

FIGURE 291 Gantry Air Duct (right) / Gantry Blower Assembly

6. Remove the four blower mounting Bolts, Nuts and Washers that secure the Blower Assembly to the Gantry column. See Figure 291.

Philips Medical Systems. Confidential and Proprietary information. Refer to Title Page.
 FIGURE 292 Gantry Air Blower Assembly Detail
7. Support the blower assembly, lift it off the mounting studs and remove it.

BLOWER REMOVAL:
8. Remove the four blower mounting nuts and washers that fasten the Blower to the Mounting Plate. Refer to Figure 292.

REPLACEMENT:
9. Install the replacement Blower by reversing step 8. above and install the Blower Assembly into the Gantry by reversing steps 3. through
7.

Philips Medical Systems. Confidential and Proprietary information. Refer to Title Page.
10. Replace the Gantry Front Cone. Refer to the Gantry Covers procedure.
11. Apply Gantry power. Refer to the PowerUp/PowerDown procedure.

WARNING
USE EXTREME CAUTION WHEN OPERATING OR WORKING ON EQUIPMENT
WITH COVERS REMOVED. DANGEROUS VOLTAGES ARE EXPOSED WHEN THE
GANTRY COVERS ARE REMOVED. FAILURE TO COMPLY CAN CAUSE SERIOUS
INJURY OR DEATH TO PERSONNEL.

12. Check Blower operation by turning the system ON at the the Console and feel the air flow from the Blower.
13. Pull the Front Cover Interlock Switch Plunger out to enable operation while the Front Covers are open.

WARNING
ROTATING MACHINERY. STAND CLEAR OF ROTATING FRAME WHEN
EQUIPMENT IS OPERATED. FAILURE TO COMPLY MAY RESULT IN SERIOUS
INJURY OR DEATH TO PERSONNEL.

14. To verify proper System operation, run Full–field and Half–field Water Phantom Scans and allow the System to process and display
an Image.
15. Return the Front Cover Interlock Switch Plunger to its center position.
16. Remove Gantry power. Refer to the PowerUp/PowerDown procedure.
17. Replace the Gantry lower Front and Rear Covers, close the upper Front and Rear Covers. Refer to the Gantry Covers procedure.

Philips Medical Systems. Confidential and Proprietary information. Refer to Title Page.
GANTRY AIR FILTER
Introduction: This procedure is used to remove and replace the Gantry air filters.
Tools Required: 1. #1 tip Phillips screwdriver
Materials Required: Two air filters
Estimated Time: 10 min.

AIR FILTER REMOVAL:

1. Remove Gantry power. Refer to the PowerUp/PowerDown procedure.
2. Open the Gantry Front Cover. Refer to the Gantry Covers procedure.
3. Remove the Air Filters by sliding them out. See Figure 293.

Filter Loccated Under Each

Blower Duct

FIGURE 293 Gantry Air Filter Location

Philips Medical Systems. Confidential and Proprietary information. Refer to Title Page.
AIR FILTER REPLACEMENT:

4. Be sure that the air flow arrow points up (^) away from the floor before replacing the Air Filters. Position the Air Filter into the slot and
slide the Filter into the Gantry until it is fully in position.
5. Apply Gantry power. Refer to the PowerUp/PowerDown procedure.

WARNING
USE EXTREME CAUTION WHEN OPERATING OR WORKING ON EQUIPMENT
WITH COVERS REMOVED. DANGEROUS VOLTAGES ARE EXPOSED WHEN THE
GANTRY COVERS ARE REMOVED. FAILURE TO COMPLY CAN CAUSE SERIOUS
INJURY OR DEATH TO PERSONNEL.

6. Check that air flows out of the Air Duct in the lower Front Cover (feel air flow with the hand).
7. Remove Gantry power. Refer to the PowerUp/PowerDown procedure.
8. Close and secure the Front Covers. Refer to the Gantry Covers procedure.

Philips Medical Systems. Confidential and Proprietary information. Refer to Title Page.
INDIVIDUAL CARDFILE CIRCUIT BOARD
Introduction: The purpose of this procedure is to remove and replace a typical Gantry Cardfile Circuit Board.

Tools Required: 1. Small Slotted Screwdriver

Estimated Time: 20 Min.

CIRCUIT BOARD REMOVAL:

1. Remove Gantry power. Refer to the PowerUp/PowerDown procedure.

WARNING
USE EXTREME CAUTION WHEN OPERATING OR WORKING ON EQUIPMENT
WITH COVERS REMOVED. DANGEROUS VOLTAGES ARE EXPOSED WHEN THE
GANTRY COVERS ARE REMOVED. FAILURE TO COMPLY CAN CAUSE SERIOUS
INJURY OR DEATH TO PERSONNEL.

2. Remove the gantry cardfile covers by loosening the four captive screws on each cover. See Figure 294.

NOTE
The threaded ends of the gantry cardfile cover screw holes are plasitc. This helps to
hold the screws in place, and are therefore labeled “captive.” However, the screws can
come completely out if loosened too far.

Philips Medical Systems. Confidential and Proprietary information. Refer to Title Page.
 Cardfile Card Covers

Captive Screws

FIGURE 294 Cardfile Cover Removal

CAUTION
STATIC ELECTRICITY. CIRCUIT BOARDS MUST BE HANDLED WITH ANTI–STATIC
TECHNIQUES. DISCHARGE YOUR BODY BEFORE HANDLING ANY CIRCUIT
BOARD. KEEP ALL CIRCUIT BOARDS IN ANTI–STATIC BAGS OR ON CONDUC-
TIVE FOAM WHEN NOT INSTALLED IN THE EQUIPMENT. FAILURE TO COMPLY
MAY CAUSE PERMANENT DAMAGE TO COMPONENTS ON CIRCUIT BOARDS.

3. Provide an Anti–static Bag or piece of Conductive Foam large enough to protect the Circuit Card to be removed.
4. Discharge your body static electricity. Use a Wrist Strap and Ground Wire connected to the grounded Chassis. Board locations can
be seen in Figure 295.
ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ
5. Use the pry tool to disengage the card from the cardfile:
ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ
Philips Medical Systems. Confidential and Proprietary information. Refer to Title Page.
CIRCUIT BOARD REPLACEMENT:

6. Slide the Circuit Board out of the Cardfile and immediately place it in the Anti–static Bag or circuit side down on the Conductive Foam.
7. Install the new circuit board into the Gantry Cardfile by sliding it into the guides in the Cardfile. Push down on the ejectors to seat the
board. Then, firmly push on the top edge of the Circuit Board until the Connector is firmly seated (the ejectors do not seat the board
completely in).
8. Return the cardfile covers back to their original position.
9. Apply Gantry power. Refer to the PowerUp/PowerDown procedure.
10. To verify proper System operation, run Full–field and Half–field Water Phantom Scans and allow the System to process and display
an Image.
11. Remove Gantry power. Refer to the PowerUp/PowerDown procedure.

Philips Medical Systems. Confidential and Proprietary information. Refer to Title Page.
 CTCC 174650 178990 PMDC
GPUC 178598

DSCC 174652 PSDC 362232

SCLC 362233 DPPC 174651
VFSC (4) 174657 VFSC (4) 174657

REAR VIEW
FRONT VIEW

Note: Remove boards with PC board

ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ
ejector, part number 312874. ––>
ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ
FIGURE 295 AcQSim CT Board Locations

Philips Medical Systems. Confidential and Proprietary information. Refer to Title Page.
GANTRY TILT ACTUATOR
Introduction: This procedure is used to remove and replace the Gantry Tilt Actuators. The procedure applies to both
Actuators.

Tools Required: 1. #1 tip Phillips Screwdriver

2. 10” Adjustable Wrench

3. 6” Long Chain Nose Plier

Estimated Time: 50 min.

NOTE
Compressive force on either Actuator cannot be relieved. Expect the Gantry to sag
when the Actuator is removed.

TILT ACTUATOR REMOVAL:

1. Apply Gantry power. Refer to the PowerUp/PowerDown procedure.

2. Remove both Gantry Column Covers. Refer to the Cover Removal procedure.

WARNING
USE EXTREME CAUTION WHEN OPERATING OR WORKING ON EQUIPMENT
WITH COVERS REMOVED. DANGEROUS VOLTAGES ARE EXPOSED WHEN THE
GANTRY COVERS ARE REMOVED. FAILURE TO COMPLY CAN CAUSE SERIOUS
INJURY OR DEATH TO PERSONNEL.

3. Disconnect the Speed Sensor from the operating Actuator. Refer to Figure 296.
4. Tilt the Gantry forward until the Lift Switch on the defective side stops Gantry motion. This will transfer all the force to the operating
Actuator.

Philips Medical Systems. Confidential and Proprietary information. Refer to Title Page.
 GANTRY TILT
MOTOR
GROUND

HALL EFFECT SENSOR

CONNECTOR

DC POWER CONNECTORS
FIGURE 296 GANTRY TILT MOTOR

CAUTION
MAKE SURE THAT THE ACTUATOR NOT CARRYING THE LOAD IS THE ONE YOU
REMOVE.

CAUTION
EXERCISE EXTREME CAUTION WHEN TILTING THE GANTRY WITH ONLY ONE
ACTUATOR OPERATIONAL. THE GANTRY IS IN AN UNSTABLE STATE AND ITS
MOVEMENT SHOULD BE MINIMIZED UNDER THESE CONDITIONS

NOTE
There will still be some pressure on the Actuator due to spring tension in the Mounting
Shoe. If more tilt is required for Actuator removal, place a Tie–Wrap between the Gantry
Coulmn Base and the defective Tilt Actuator’s Limit Switch Activating Arm. This will al-
low for a small amount of additional lift of the defective unit.

Philips Medical Systems. Confidential and Proprietary information. Refer to Title Page.
5. Remove Gantry power at the wallbox. Refer to the Power Up/Down procedure.
6. Tag and remove all Cables/Wires connected to the defective Tilt Actuator.
7. Remove the Cotter Pin at the top of the Motor Drive Screw and remove the Castle Nut and Flat Washer. See Figure 297.

NOTE
Ultra Z lef and right Tilt Actuators CANNOT be interchanged.

COUNTERSINK ON WASHER
FACES AWAY FROM
ACTUATOR EXTENSION SHAFT

THICK WASHER

FLAT WASHER

ACTUATOR STUD

COTTER PIN

EXTENSION SHAFT EYELET

CASTLE NUT

ACTUATOR EXTENSION SHAFT

FIGURE 297 Extension Shaft Removal

Philips Medical Systems. Confidential and Proprietary information. Refer to Title Page.
8. Remove the Actuator Extension Shaft and the thick Washer from the Gantry Pin. Note the the bevel cut in the center of the thick Washer
and how it is assembled onto the Pin.
9. Remove the actuator switch at the base of the tilt arm. This will expose the pin that secures the bottom of the tilt arm. Remove the
pin. See Figure 298.

REMOVE SWITCH

PIN BEHIND SWITCH

FIGURE 298 Tilt Arm– Pin Removal

Philips Medical Systems. Confidential and Proprietary information. Refer to Title Page.
10. Install a 10–32 x 1 inch long Screw into the threaded hole in the end of the Pivot Shaft. Pull on the Screw to remove the Pivot Pin.
11. Rotate the bottom of the Actuator Assembly out of the Mounting Shoe and remove the Actuator Assembly.

TILT ACTUATOR REPLACEMENT:

12. Extend the Actuator Extension Shaft by hand to the length required to match the mounting points on the Shoe Pivot and the Gantry
Pin.
13. Position the Actuator into the Shoe and install the Pivot Pin. Install the Pivot Pin Retaining Screw and Washer. Refer to Figure 298.
DO NOT connect the Actuator Extension Shaft to the Gantry at this time.

NOTE
Before replacing the Pivot Pin, apply a thin coat of Lubriplate grease to the Pin. This
will minimize metallic chattering noise sometimes heard when the Gantry is being tilted.

14. Connect Actuator Power.

15. Apply Gantry power. Refer to the Power Up/Down procedure.

WARNING
USE EXTREME CAUTION WHEN OPERATING OR WORKING ON EQUIPMENT
WITH COVERS REMOVED. DANGEROUS VOLTAGES ARE EXPOSED WHEN THE
GANTRY COVERS ARE REMOVED. FAILURE TO COMPLY CAN CAUSE SERIOUS
INJURY OR DEATH TO PERSONNEL.

NOTE
If the opposite Actuator is operational, remove its power and Speed Sensor connec-
tions prior to performing step 1.

16. Place a temporary mark on the Actuator Extension Shaft and using the Gantry Control Panel Switches, tilt the Gantry 2 or 3 degrees
positive (+). Verify that the Extension Shaft on the replacement Actuator has extended. If the Actuator has retracted, reverse the
Actuator Motor Leads.

Philips Medical Systems. Confidential and Proprietary information. Refer to Title Page.
17. Remove Gantry power. Refer to the PowerUp/PowerDown procedure in the Introduction section.
18. By hand, return the Extension Shaft to the correct length for installation as indicated by the reference mark on the Shaft.
19. Install the Extension Shaft onto the Gantry Pin. Refer to Figure 297.
20. Connect the Speed Sensor Cables (Hall effect) on both Actuators.
21. Apply Gantry power. Refer to the PowerUp/PowerDown procedure.

WARNING
USE EXTREME CAUTION WHEN OPERATING OR WORKING ON EQUIPMENT
WITH COVERS REMOVED. DANGEROUS VOLTAGES ARE EXPOSED WHEN THE
GANTRY COVERS ARE REMOVED. FAILURE TO COMPLY CAN CAUSE SERIOUS
INJURY OR DEATH TO PERSONNEL.

22. Tilt the Gantry in the positive (+) direction with the Gantry Control Panel Switches until the Actuator Mounting Shoe is fully seated.

NOTE
If a Tie–Wrap was used to allow more tilt than that allowed by the Lift Switch, it must
be used again to allow seating of the Mounting Shoe.

23. Tilt the Gantry to plus and minus 30 degrees with the Gantry Control Panel Switches. Verify that the Actuator will operate over the entire
range, that the Limit Switches stop the tilt motion, and that the Display indicates the correct angle.
24. Calibrate the Gantry tilt if required. Refer to the Gantry Tilt Calibration in the Mechanical Calibration Manual.
25. Remove Gantry power. Refer to the PowerUp/PowerDown procedure.
26. Replace the Gantry Column Covers. Refer to the Cover Removal procedure.

Philips Medical Systems. Confidential and Proprietary information. Refer to Title Page.
GANTRY TILT POTENTIOMETER BELT
Introduction: This procedure is used to remove and replace the Tilt Potentiometer Drive Belt in the Gantry.

Estimated Time: 60 Min.

Tools Required: Small Slotted Screwdriver

TILT POTENTIOMETER BELT REMOVAL:

1. Remove Gantry power. Refer to the PowerUp/PowerDown procedure.

2. Remove the Gantry Right Column Cover. Refer to the Gantry Covers procedure.
3. Tag and remove the four wires connected to the Gantry Column E–stop Switch.

Philips Medical Systems. Confidential and Proprietary information. Refer to Title Page.
 E–Stop Switch
Tilt Limit Switch
Actuating Block Right Gantry Column

Potentiometer Bracket

Tilt Limit Switch

Dynamic Tilt Brake
Circuit Board

Belt Potentiometer

Mounting Screws
Front

Lift Switch

FIGURE 299 Tilt Potentiometer Belt

4. Tag and remove the eight Tilt Limit Switch Wires (2 Wires on each Switch).

Philips Medical Systems. Confidential and Proprietary information. Refer to Title Page.
5. Tag and remove the Tilt Actuator Power and Feedback Cables at the Motor.
6. Tag and remove the Tilt Actuator Lift Switch Cable (at the switch).
7. Tag and remove the Wires connected to the Dynamic Tilt Brake Circuit Board.
8. Tag and remove the Wires connected to the Door Switch Interlock Terminal Board.
9. Remove the Cables connected to the Gantry Cardfile. Unlace these Cables and pass them through the Column Spindle.
10. Remove the Column Ground Wire.
11. Loosen the two Potentiometer Mounting Plate Screws and slide the Tilt Potentiometer Assembly to remove tension on the Drive Belt.
Slide the Belt off the Pulley.
12. Slide the Belt toward the Gantry until it clears the Tilt Limit Switch Actuating Block. Lift the Belt over the Block and remove.

TILT POTENTIOMETER BELT REPLACEMENT:

13. Install the Tilt Potentiometer Drive Belt and Cabling by reversing steps 3. through 12.
14. Calibrate the Tilt Potentiometer. Refer to the Gantry Tilt Calibration procedures in the Calibration Manual.
15. Replace the Gantry Right Column Cover. Refer to the Gantry Covers procedure.

Philips Medical Systems. Confidential and Proprietary information. Refer to Title Page.
GANTRY TILT POT & PULLEY
Introduction: This procedure is used to remove and replace the Gantry Tilt Potentiometer and the Potentiometer Pulley.

Tools Required: 1. 5/64” and 3/16” Hex Keys

Estimated Time: 30 Min.

POTENTIOMETER ASSEMBLY REMOVAL:

1. Remove Gantry power. Refer to the PowerUp/PowerDown procedure.

2. Remove the right Gantry Column Cover. Refer to the Gantry Covers procedure.
3. Tag and unsolder the three wires connected to the Tilt Pot. See Figure 300.

Philips Medical Systems. Confidential and Proprietary information. Refer to Title Page.
 Pulley

Mounting Plate

Potentiometer

Set Screws (2)

Mounting Plate Screws Front

FIGURE 300 Potentiometer Assembly – Exploded

4. Loosen the two Pot Mounting Plate Screws.
5. Slide the Tilt Pot Assembly to remove tension on the Drive Belt and slide the Belt off the Pulley.
6. Remove the two Pot Mounting Plate Screws and Washers.
7. Remove the Tilt Pot Assembly.

POTENTIOMETER PULLEY REMOVAL:

8. Loosen the two Pulley Set Screws.

Philips Medical Systems. Confidential and Proprietary information. Refer to Title Page.
9. Slide the Pulley off the Pot Shaft.

POTENTIOMETER REMOVAL:

10. Remove the Potentiometer Pulley. Refer to steps 3. through 9.

11. Remove the Potentiometer Bushing Nut and Washer.
12. Remove the Potentiometer.

POTENTIOMETER REPLACEMENT:

13. Install the Potentiometer onto the Mounting Bracket by reversing steps 11. and 12.

POTENTIOMETER PULLEY REPLACEMENT:

14. Install the Pulley onto the Potentiometer Shaft by reversing steps 8. and 9.

POTENTIOMETER ASSEMBLY REPLACEMENT:

15. Install the Tilt Pot Assembly by reversing steps 4. through 7.

16. Apply Gantry power. Refer to the PowerUp/PowerDown procedure.

WARNING
USE EXTREME CAUTION WHEN OPERATING OR WORKING ON EQUIPMENT
WITH COVERS REMOVED. DANGEROUS VOLTAGES ARE EXPOSED WHEN THE
GANTRY COVERS ARE REMOVED. FAILURE TO COMPLY CAN CAUSE SERIOUS
INJURY OR DEATH TO PERSONNEL.

17. Calibrate the Tilt Pot. Refer to Gantry Tilt Calibration in the Calibration Manual.
18. Remove Gantry power. Refer to the PowerUp/PowerDown procedure.
19. Replace the right Gantry Column Cover. Refer to the Gantry Covers procedure.

Philips Medical Systems. Confidential and Proprietary information. Refer to Title Page.
GANTRY TILT LIMIT SWITCHES
Introduction: This procedure is used to remove and replace the Gantry Tilt Limit Switches. The procedure is written for a
typical switch since all will follow the same sequence.

Tools Required: 1. 9/16” and 11/16” Open End Wrenches

2. 3/16”x3” Slotted Screwdriver

Estimated Time: 20 Min.

LIMIT SWITCH REMOVAL:

1. Remove Gantry power. Refer to the PowerUp/PowerDown procedure.

2. Remove the right Gantry Column Cover. Refer to the Gantry Covers procedure.
3. Tag and remove the two wires connected to the switch. See Figure 301.

Philips Medical Systems. Confidential and Proprietary information. Refer to Title Page.
 Tilt Limit Switch Actuating
Block

Tilt Limit Switch

Tilt Limit Switch

Remove Both Wires

FIGURE 301 Tilt Limit Switches

4. Remove the Switch Mounting Nut.

5. Remove the Switch from the Bracket.

Philips Medical Systems. Confidential and Proprietary information. Refer to Title Page.
 NOTE
If the replacement Switch is not supplied with Adjustment Nuts and Washers, remove
them from the defective Switch and install them on the replacement Switch.

LIMIT SWITCH REPLACEMENT:

6. Install the replacement Tilt Limit Switch by reversing steps 3. through 5.

7. Apply Gantry power. Refer to the PowerUp/PowerDown procedure.

WARNING
USE EXTREME CAUTION WHEN OPERATING OR WORKING ON EQUIPMENT
WITH COVERS REMOVED. DANGEROUS VOLTAGES ARE EXPOSED WHEN THE
GANTRY COVERS ARE REMOVED. FAILURE TO COMPLY CAN CAUSE SERIOUS
INJURY OR DEATH TO PERSONNEL.

8. Adjust the Tilt Limit Switch. Refer to the Gantry Tilt Calibration section in the Calibration Manual.
9. Remove Gantry power. Refer to the PowerUp/PowerDown procedure.
10. Replace the right Gantry Column Cover. Refer to the Gantry Covers procedure.

Philips Medical Systems. Confidential and Proprietary information. Refer to Title Page.
LASER ASSEMBLY
Introduction: This procedure is used to remove and replace a Laser Assembly.

Tools Required: 1. 7/16” Open End Wrench

2. 3/16”, 5/32” and 7/64” Hex Keys

3. Ratchet and 5/16” Socket

4. 3/16”x3” Slotted and #1 Tip Phillips Screwdrivers

5. Torque wrench (0–250 in–lb)

Material Required: None

Estimated Time: 30 Min.

LASER ASSEMBLY REMOVAL:

1. Remove Gantry power. Refer to the PowerUp/PowerDown procedure.

2. Open the Front Gantry Covers and remove the Front Cone. Refer to the Gantry Covers procedure.

WARNING
USE EXTREME CAUTION WHEN SERVICING EQUIPMENT WHILE THE UPPER
GULL WING IS OPEN. THE PANEL HAS SHARP EDGES. FAILURE TO COMPLY
COULD RESULT IN SERIOUS INJURY TO PERSONNEL.

3. Move the Scan Frame by hand until the X–Ray Tube is at the 12:00 position. Lock the Scan Frame with the Locking Pin. See Figure 302.

CAUTION
CLOCKWISE ROTATION OF THE SCAN FRAME MAY CAUSE DAMAGE TO THE
SLIP RING BRUSHES. ROTATE THE SCAN FRAME COUNTERCLOCKWISE ONLY.

Philips Medical Systems. Confidential and Proprietary information. Refer to Title Page.
 Laser
Locations

FIGURE 302 Scan Frame Pinned at 12:00 / Laser Locations

4. Disconnect the two Laser Power Connectors.
5. Carefully remove the hardware securing the Laser Assembly to the Mounting Shaft. Remove the Laser Assembly from the Gantry.
See Figure 303.

Philips Medical Systems. Confidential and Proprietary information. Refer to Title Page.
 #1 Tip Phillips
Adjusting Screws

Socket Head Cap

Adjusting Screw
9 O’clock
Laser
Mounting
Red and Black
Power Connectors
Hex Head
Mounting Bolt
Socket Head Cap
Mounting Screw

12 O’clock and 3 O’clock Torque Mounting Hardware

Laser Mountings to 85–90 In–Lbs

Adjusting Screws

FIGURE 303 Laser Assembly Mounting – “Z” and “L” Models

Philips Medical Systems. Confidential and Proprietary information. Refer to Title Page.
LASER ASSEMBLY REPLACEMENT:

6. Reverse steps 4. and 5. making sure red wires are connected to red wires and black to black.
7. Remove the Locking Pin from the Scan Frame.
8. Rotate the Scan Frame counterclockwise by hand while checking for loose Cables. Also check for clearance over the entire range
of travel between the Rotating Frame Cables and the Stationary Frame.

CAUTION
CLOCKWISE ROTATION OF THE SCAN FRAME MAY CAUSE DAMAGE TO THE
SLIP RING BRUSHES. ROTATE THE SCAN FRAME COUNTERCLOCKWISE ONLY.

9. Apply Gantry power. Refer to the PowerUp/PowerDown procedure.

WARNING
USE EXTREME CAUTION WHEN OPERATING OR WORKING ON EQUIPMENT
WITH COVERS REMOVED. DANGEROUS VOLTAGES ARE EXPOSED WHEN THE
GANTRY COVERS ARE REMOVED. FAILURE TO COMPLY CAN CAUSE SERIOUS
INJURY OR DEATH TO PERSONNEL.

10. Pull the Front Cover Interlock Switch Plunger out to enable operation while the Front Covers are open.
11. Place the Front Cover in its half–open position.
12. Check Laser operation by using the Gantry Control Panel Switches.

WARNING
ROTATING MACHINERY. STAND CLEAR OF ROTATING FRAME WHEN EQUIPMENT IS
OPERATED. FAILURE TO COMPLY MAY RESULT IN SERIOUS INJURY OR DEATH TO
PERSONNEL.

13. Align the Laser Beam Assembly. Refer to Laser Alignment in the Calibration Manual.

Philips Medical Systems. Confidential and Proprietary information. Refer to Title Page.
14. Return the Front Cover Interlock Switch Plunger to its center position. Remove Gantry power. Refer to the PowerUp/PowerDown
procedures.
15. Place the Front Cover in its full–open position.
16. Replace the Front Cone and the lower Gantry Covers. Close the upper Gantry Cover. Refer to the Gantry Covers procedure.

Philips Medical Systems. Confidential and Proprietary information. Refer to Title Page.
HIGH SPEED STARTER
Introduction: The following procedure is used to remove and replace the High Speed Starter, located in the AC Input Chassis.
Tools Required: 1. #1 tip Long Phillips Screwdriver
2. 3/4” Socket, Ratchet
3. Torque wrench (75 ft – lbs)
Material Required: Loc–Tite (Thread Locker)
Estimated Time: 1.0 Hr.

HIGH SPEED STARTER CHASSIS REMOVAL:

1. Remove Gantry power. Refer to the PowerUp/PowerDown procedure.
2. Open Gantry Front Covers and remove the Front Cone. Refer to the Gantry Covers procedure.

WARNING
USE EXTREME CAUTION WHEN SERVICING EQUIPMENT WHILE THE UPPER
GULL WING IS OPEN. THE PANEL HAS SHARP EDGES. FAILURE TO COMPLY
COULD RESULT IN SERIOUS INJURY TO PERSONNEL.

WARNING
USE EXTREME CAUTION WHEN OPERATING OR WORKING ON EQUIPMENT
WITH COVERS REMOVED. DANGEROUS VOLTAGES ARE EXPOSED WHEN THE
GANTRY COVERS ARE REMOVED. FAILURE TO COMPLY CAN CAUSE SERIOUS
INJURY OR DEATH TO PERSONNEL.

CAUTION
CLOCKWISE ROTATION OF THE SCAN FRAME MAY CAUSE DAMAGE TO THE
SLIP RING BRUSHES. ROTATE THE SCAN FRAME COUNTERCLOCKWISE ONLY.

Philips Medical Systems. Confidential and Proprietary information. Refer to Title Page.
3. Rotate the Scan Frame counterclockwise by hand until the X–Ray Tube is at the 12:00 position. Lock the Scan Frame with the Locking
Pin. See Figure 304.

High Speed
Starter inside
of AC Input
Chassis

FIGURE 304 Scan Frame Pinned with Tube at 12:00 / HSS Location

Philips Medical Systems. Confidential and Proprietary information. Refer to Title Page.
4. Remove the Phillips head cover screws and remove the AC Input Chassis Cover. The High Speed Starter will be located near the top,
on one side of the cabinet. Refer to Figure 305 for two views of the High Speed Starter.

5. Remove the red and black power wires and the cables connected to the printed circuit board.

6. With a long phillips head screwdriver, loosen the six captive screwsHigh Speed Starter. See Figure 305.

DISCONNECT
CABLES
CAPTIVE
SCREWS

POWER WIRES – BLACK RED

FIGURE 305 High Speed Starter – Two Different Views

7. Slide the HSS assembly so the cable connectors clear the AC Input Chassis holes, then lift the assembly up and out.

Philips Medical Systems. Confidential and Proprietary information. Refer to Title Page.
HIGH SPEED STARTER CHASSIS REPLACEMENT:

8. Reverse steps 4. through 7.

9. Remove the Scan Frame Locking Pin.
10. Rotate the Scan Frame counterclockwise by hand while checking for loose Cables. Also check for clearance over the entire range of
travel between the Rotating Frame Cables and the Stationary Frame.

CAUTION
CLOCKWISE ROTATION OF THE SCAN FRAME MAY CAUSE DAMAGE TO THE
SLIP RING BRUSHES. ROTATE THE SCAN FRAME COUNTERCLOCKWISE ONLY.

11. Replace the Gantry Front Cone. Refer to the Gantry Covers procedure.
12. Apply Gantry power. Refer to the PowerUp/PowerDown procedure.

WARNING
USE EXTREME CAUTION WHEN OPERATING OR WORKING ON EQUIPMENT
WITH COVERS REMOVED. DANGEROUS VOLTAGES ARE EXPOSED WHEN THE
GANTRY COVERS ARE REMOVED. FAILURE TO COMPLY CAN CAUSE SERIOUS
INJURY OR DEATH TO PERSONNEL.

13. Pull the Front Cover Interlock Switch Plunger out to enable operation while the Front Covers are open.
14. To verify proper System operation, run Full–field and Half–field Water Phantom Scans and allow the System to process and display
an Image.
15. Return the Front Cover Interlock Switch Plunger to its center position.
16. Remove Gantry power. Refer to the PowerUp/PowerDown procedure.
17. Replace the Gantry lower Front Cover, close the upper Front Cover. Refer to the Gantry Covers procedure.

Philips Medical Systems. Confidential and Proprietary information. Refer to Title Page.
BRUSH BLOCK
Introduction: This procedure is used to remove and replace Slip Ring Brush Blocks (power and signal).
Tools Required: 1. 7/64”, 3/16” Hex Keys
2. 9/16 and 5/16” Socket, Ratchet
3. Torque Wrench (75 ft–lb)
Estimated Time: 1.0 Hr.

POWER BRUSH BLOCK REMOVAL:

1. Remove Gantry power. Refer to the PowerUp/PowerDown procedure.
2. Open Gantry Front Covers and remove the Front Cone. Refer to the Gantry Covers procedure.

WARNING
USE EXTREME CAUTION WHEN SERVICING EQUIPMENT WHILE THE UPPER
GULL WING IS OPEN. THE PANEL HAS SHARP EDGES. FAILURE TO COMPLY
COULD RESULT IN SERIOUS INJURY TO PERSONNEL.

WARNING
USE EXTREME CAUTION WHEN OPERATING OR WORKING ON EQUIPMENT
WITH COVERS REMOVED. DANGEROUS VOLTAGES ARE EXPOSED WHEN THE
GANTRY COVERS ARE REMOVED. FAILURE TO COMPLY CAN CAUSE SERIOUS
INJURY OR DEATH TO PERSONNEL.

3. Rotate the Scan Frame counterclockwise by hand until the X–Ray Tube is at the 12:00 position. Lock the Scan Frame with the Locking
Pin. See Figure 306.

CAUTION
CLOCKWISE ROTATION OF THE SCAN FRAME MAY CAUSE DAMAGE TO THE
SLIP RING BRUSHES. ROTATE THE SCAN FRAME COUNTERCLOCKWISE ONLY.

Philips Medical Systems. Confidential and Proprietary information. Refer to Title Page.
 Pin Location

Signal Brush Block

Power Brush Block

FIGURE 306 Scan Frame at 12:00 / Brush Block Locations

4. Tag and remove all Wires/Cables exiting the Power Brush Block.
5. Support the Power Brush Block while loosening the two Socket Head Mounting screws holding the Brush Block to the Mounting Bracket
and remove the Block. See Figure 307.

Philips Medical Systems. Confidential and Proprietary information. Refer to Title Page.
 LOOSEN AND REMOVE RADIAL SCREWS
PL0072

FIGURE 307 Slip Ring Brush Block Mounting

POWER BRUSH BLOCK REPLACEMENT:

6. Remove the Scan Frame Locking Pin.
7. Clean the Slip Ring with a soft cloth and 90% Isopropyl alcohol. Access to the Slip Ring is gained through a removable Cover on the
Slip Ring Dust Cover.
8. Install the new Power Brush Block by reversing steps 4. and 5. of Power Brush Block Removal.
9. Align the Brush Block in the Slip Ring grooves. Refer to the Brush Block Alignment procedure in the Calibration Manual.
10. If only the power brush block is being removed, skip to step 20.

Philips Medical Systems. Confidential and Proprietary information. Refer to Title Page.
===============================================================================

SIGNAL BRUSH BLOCK REMOVAL:

11. Perform steps 1., 2., and 3. of the Power Brush Block Removal Procedure.
12. Remove the Collimator Control Relay PCB. Refer to the Small Drives Relay removal/replacement procedure.
13. Tag and disconnect all Wires/Cables connected to the Signal Brush block.
14. Remove the two Socket Head Mounting Screws that attach the Brush Block to the Mounting Brackets. Refer to Figure 308.
15. Carefully lift the Brush Block up and remove it from the Gantry.

Philips Medical Systems. Confidential and Proprietary information. Refer to Title Page.
 PL0071
LOOSEN AND REMOVE RADIAL SCREWS

FIGURE 308 SIGNAL BRUSH BLOCK

Philips Medical Systems. Confidential and Proprietary information. Refer to Title Page.
SIGNAL BRUSH BLOCK REPLACEMENT:
16. Remove the Scan Frame Locking Pin. Clean the Slip Ring with a soft cloth and 90% Isopropyl alcohol. Access to the Slip Ring is gained
through a removable Cover on the Slip Ring Dust Cover.
17. Install the new Signal Brush Block by reversing steps 13. through 15. Use Lock Washers on all Mounting Hardware.
18. Align the Brush Block in the Slip Ring grooves. Refer to the Brush Block Alignment procedure.

NOTE
Normal Alignment when replacing the Brush Block should not require moving the Brush
Block Mounting Posts. However, if Axial alignment with the drill blanks cannot be
achieved, the posts must be loosened. If the Mounting Posts must be moved, the 3
O’clock Laser Rod must be removed and Laser calibration subsequently performed.

NOTE
Perform step 19. only if the Signal Brush Block was removed.

19. Install the Collimator Control Relay PCB. Refer to the Small Drives Relay PCB removal/replacement procedure.
20. Replace the Gantry Front Cone. Refer to the Gantry Covers procedure.
21. Apply Gantry power. Refer to the PowerUp/PowerDown procedure.

WARNING
USE EXTREME CAUTION WHEN OPERATING OR WORKING ON EQUIPMENT
WITH COVERS REMOVED. DANGEROUS VOLTAGES ARE EXPOSED WHEN THE
GANTRY COVERS ARE REMOVED. FAILURE TO COMPLY CAN CAUSE SERIOUS
INJURY OR DEATH TO PERSONNEL.

22. Pull the Front Cover Interlock Switch Plunger out to enable operation while the Front Covers are open.
23. To verify proper System operation, run Full–field and Half–field Water Phantom Scans and allow the System to process and display
an Image.

Philips Medical Systems. Confidential and Proprietary information. Refer to Title Page.
24. Return the Front Cover Interlock Switch Plunger to its center position.
25. Remove Gantry power. Refer to the PowerUp/PowerDown procedure.
26. Replace the Gantry lower Front Cover, close the upper Front Cover. Refer to the Gantry Covers procedure.

Philips Medical Systems. Confidential and Proprietary information. Refer to Title Page.
SLIP RING DUST COVER
Introduction: This procedure is used to remove and replace the Gantry slip ring dust cover.
Tools Required: 1. 7/64”, 3/16” Hex Keys
2. 9/16 and 5/16” Socket, Ratchet
3. Torque Wrench (75 ft–lb)
Estimated Time: 1.0 Hr.

DUST COVER REMOVAL:

1. Remove Gantry power. Refer to the PowerUp/PowerDown procedure.
2. Open Gantry Front Covers and remove the Front Cone. Refer to the Gantry Covers procedure.

WARNING
USE EXTREME CAUTION WHEN SERVICING EQUIPMENT WHILE THE UPPER
GULL WING IS OPEN. THE PANEL HAS SHARP EDGES. FAILURE TO COMPLY
COULD RESULT IN SERIOUS INJURY TO PERSONNEL.

WARNING
USE EXTREME CAUTION WHEN OPERATING OR WORKING ON EQUIPMENT
WITH COVERS REMOVED. DANGEROUS VOLTAGES ARE EXPOSED WHEN THE
GANTRY COVERS ARE REMOVED. FAILURE TO COMPLY CAN CAUSE SERIOUS
INJURY OR DEATH TO PERSONNEL.

3. Rotate the Scan Frame counterclockwise by hand until the X–Ray Tube is at the 12:00 position. Lock the Scan Frame with the Locking
Pin. See Figure 309.

CAUTION
CLOCKWISE ROTATION OF THE SCAN FRAME MAY CAUSE DAMAGE TO THE
SLIP RING BRUSHES. ROTATE THE SCAN FRAME COUNTERCLOCKWISE ONLY.

Philips Medical Systems. Confidential and Proprietary information. Refer to Title Page.
 Dust Cover

FIGURE 309 Gantry Pinned with Tube at 12:00 / Dust Cover Location
4. Remove the Socket Head Cap Screws holding the Slip Ring Dust Cover to the Scan Frame. See Figure 310.
5. Loosen and swing the lasers out of the way.
6. The Heat Exchanger cables need to be pushed out of the way. Carefully remove the slip ring dust cover (this is a difficult step.)

Philips Medical Systems. Confidential and Proprietary information. Refer to Title Page.
 Laser Rod Location

Mounting Hardware:
3/16” Socket Head Capscrews

Slip Ring Dust Cover

FIGURE 310 Sllip Ring Dust Cover

DUST COVER REPLACEMENT:

7. Install the Slip Ring Dust Cover by reversing steps NO TAG to 6.

8. Remove the Scan Frame Locking Pin.
9. Rotate the Scan Frame counterclockwise by hand while checking for loose Cables. Also check for clearance over the entire range
of travel between the Rotating Frame Cables and the Stationary Frame.

Philips Medical Systems. Confidential and Proprietary information. Refer to Title Page.
 CAUTION
CLOCKWISE ROTATION OF THE SCAN FRAME MAY CAUSE DAMAGE TO THE
SLIP RING BRUSHES. ROTATE THE SCAN FRAME COUNTERCLOCKWISE ONLY.

10. Replace the Gantry Front Cone and lower Front Cover, close the upper Front Cover. Refer to the Gantry Covers procedure.

Philips Medical Systems. Confidential and Proprietary information. Refer to Title Page.
POWER MONITOR / CARDFILE FILTER BOARD / DC POWER SUPPLY
Introduction: The following procedure is used to remove and replace the Gantry DC Power Panel Assembly, Power Monitor
board and/or the Cardfile Filter Assembly Board.
Tools Required: 1. Hex Keys
2. Phillips and slotted screwdrivers
Estimated Time: 25 min.
POWER MONITOR / CARDFILE FILTER BOARD / POWER SUPPLY REMOVAL PROCEDURE:

1. Remove Gantry power. Refer to the PowerUp/PowerDown procedure.

2. Remove the left rear gantry cover. Refer to the Gantry Covers procedure.

WARNING
USE EXTREME CAUTION WHEN OPERATING OR WORKING ON EQUIPMENT
WITH COVERS REMOVED. DANGEROUS VOLTAGES ARE EXPOSED WHEN THE
GANTRY COVERS ARE REMOVED. FAILURE TO COMPLY CAN CAUSE SERIOUS
INJURY OR DEATH TO PERSONNEL.

3. The power supply assembly is located at the middle left side of the gantry. A detailed view is shown in Figure 311.

Philips Medical Systems. Confidential and Proprietary information. Refer to Title Page.
 RAM Front End Power
Distribution Board

Cables

Cables

Slide Assembly
Up and Off
Bolts

Cardfile Filter
Brd.

Loosen Bolt
(one on other side) –20
Power Power +12
Supply Monitor –15
+15
Board +5
GND

Remove Bolt
(one on other side)

FIGURE 311 DC Power Supply / Power Monitor Board / CardFile Filter PCB / Voltage Test Points

Philips Medical Systems. Confidential and Proprietary information. Refer to Title Page.
 NOTE
The level of Service on the Power Supply Assembly is to remove the entire assembly
and replace. The Fault Sense Board can be replaced by itself, if properly determined
to be faulty.

4. POWER MONITOR BOARD: Tag and remove all wires connected to the Fault Sense board. Remove tie wraps as necessary.
5. The board is held on with plastic tabs. Carefully pull up on the PCB just behind the tab to release the board. Repeat at each tab until
the board is able to be lifted off.
6. POWER SUPPLY: Tag and remove all wires connected to the Power Supply. Remove tie wraps as necessary. The Power Monitor,
Cardfile Filter and RAM Front End Power Distribution boards are attached to the power supply and will be removed along with the entire
assembly.
7. Remove the two lower hex head bolts. Loosen the two upper bolts. Refer to Figure 311.
8. Grasp the power supply and raise up and off of the loosened hex bolts. Remove entire assembly.

POWER SUPPLY ASSEMBLY REPLACEMENT

9. POWER SUPPLY: Place the entire power supply assembly over the upper two head head bolts loosened earlier. Insert the two hex
head bolts removed earlier. Tighten all four bolts.
10. Attach all of the wires removed earlier.
11. POWER MONITOR BOARD: (If removed by itself) Align the holes in the PCB with the plastic tabs. Carefully press the PCB onto each
of the tabs. Re–attach the wires removed earlier.
12. Apply Gantry power. Refer to the PowerUp/PowerDown procedure.
13. Verify the +5, +15, –15, +12 and –20 VDC voltages with respect to ground. Refer to Figure 311.

NOTE
There is no calibration adjustment for the DC Power Supply. If the voltages are not in
range, the entire Power Supply must be replaced.

Philips Medical Systems. Confidential and Proprietary information. Refer to Title Page.
14. Remove Gantry power. Refer to the PowerUp/PowerDown procedure.
15. Replace the left Gantry cover. Refer to the Gantry Covers procedure.

Philips Medical Systems. Confidential and Proprietary information. Refer to Title Page.
FUSE/CONTACTOR CHASSIS
Introduction: The following procedure is used to remove and replace the Fuse/Contactor Chassis.

Tools Required: 1. Phillips and Slotted Screwdrivers

2. Hex Key

3. Nut Driver

Estimated Time: 40 min.

FUSE/CONTACTOR REMOVAL:

1. Remove Gantry power. Refer to the PowerUp/PowerDown procedure.

2. Remove the left and right rear Gantry covers. Refer to the Gantry Covers procedure.

WARNING
USE EXTREME CAUTION WHEN OPERATING OR WORKING ON EQUIPMENT
WITH COVERS REMOVED. DANGEROUS VOLTAGES ARE EXPOSED WHEN THE
GANTRY COVERS ARE REMOVED. FAILURE TO COMPLY CAN CAUSE SERIOUS
INJURY OR DEATH TO PERSONNEL.

3. Remove the two Philips Head Screws and remove the clear Fuse/Contactor Cover. See Figure 313.

Philips Medical Systems. Confidential and Proprietary information. Refer to Title Page.
 Fuse Contactor
Assembly

FIGURE 312 Fuse/Contactor Assembly – Upper Right Rear of Gantry

4. Tag and disconnect all Wires/Cables attached to the Fuse/Contactor chassis. Refer to Figure 313.
5. Remove the two hex mounting Bolts and remove the Chassis assembly. Refer to Figure 313.

Philips Medical Systems. Confidential and Proprietary information. Refer to Title Page.
 Remove sets of
three wires on
each terminal

Remove TB–15
wires

Remove Hex Head Remove

Tag and remove two white wires Remove Hex Head Mounting Bolt
Mounting Bolt Last Ground Wire
from each terminal. Last

FIGURE 313 Fuse/Contactor Removal

FUSE/CONTACTOR REPLACEMENT:
6. Install the Fuse/Contactor Chassis by reversing steps 3. through 5.

Philips Medical Systems. Confidential and Proprietary information. Refer to Title Page.
7. Apply Gantry power. Refer to the Power Up/Down procedures.

WARNING
USE EXTREME CAUTION WHEN OPERATING OR WORKING ON EQUIPMENT
WITH COVERS REMOVED. DANGEROUS VOLTAGES ARE EXPOSED WHEN THE
GANTRY COVERS ARE REMOVED. FAILURE TO COMPLY CAN CAUSE SERIOUS
INJURY OR DEATH TO PERSONNEL.

8. To verify proper System operation, run Full–field and Half–field Water Phantom Scans and allow the System to process and display
an Image.
9. Replace the rear Gantry covers. Refer to the Gantry Covers procedure.

Philips Medical Systems. Confidential and Proprietary information. Refer to Title Page.
AC CONTROL CHASSIS PRINTED CIRCUIT BOARD
Introduction: This procedure is used to remove and replace the Gantry AC Control Chassis Circuit Board Assembly.

Tools Required: 1. #2 Phillips Screwdrivers

Estimated Time: 1.0 hr.

PRINTED CIRCUIT BOARD REMOVAL:

1. Remove Gantry power. Refer to the PowerUp/PowerDown procedure. Remove power at wall box.
2. Remove the rear left gantry cover. Refer to the Gantry Covers procedure.

WARNING
USE EXTREME CAUTION WHEN OPERATING OR WORKING ON EQUIPMENT
WITH COVERS REMOVED. DANGEROUS VOLTAGES ARE EXPOSED WHEN THE
GANTRY COVERS ARE REMOVED. FAILURE TO COMPLY CAN CAUSE SERIOUS
INJURY OR DEATH TO PERSONNEL.

3. Remove the ribbon cable from J301. Refer to Figure 314.

4. Tag and unplug the two black wires that are attached to the small board attached to the AC Control Chassis PCB.
5. Remove the black and red wires from the SSR313 terminals. Cut tie wraps as necessary.
6. Remove the two Philips head screws from the small board attached to the AC Control Chassis PCB and remove.
7. Remove the six Philips Screws that hold the AC Control Chassis PCB in place. See Figure 314.

Philips Medical Systems. Confidential and Proprietary information. Refer to Title Page.
 TB301

J301
TB302

FIGURE 314 AC Control Chassis PCB Location

Philips Medical Systems. Confidential and Proprietary information. Refer to Title Page.
8. Carefully pull the Board away from the Chassis. Cut harness ties as required.

PRINTED CIRCUIT BOARD REPLACEMENT:

9. Hold replacement AC Control Board in front of the old one, with the new TB302 just above old TB302.
10. Transfer each wire, one at a time, from the old TB302 to the new TB302.
11. Move the replacement AC Control Board so that the new TB301 is just below the old TB301.
12. Transfer each wire, one at a time, from the old TB301 to the new TB301.
13. Carefully pull the bottom of the replacement AC Control Board out far enough to slide the old Board out from the bottom.
14. Secure the replacement AC Control Board to the Chassis with six Philips Screws removed earlier.
15. Replace Harness Ties as required.
16. Plug the Ribbon Cable into J301.
17. Replace the left rear gantry cover. Refer to the Gantry Covers procedure.
18. Apply Gantry power. Refer to the PowerUp/PowerDown procedure.
19. To verify proper System operation, run Full–field and Half–field Water Phantom Scans and allow the System to process and display
an Image.

Philips Medical Systems. Confidential and Proprietary information. Refer to Title Page.
DETECTOR MODULE AND DETECTOR MOTHERBOARD
Introduction: This procedure is used to remove and replace Detector Module Assemblies and Detector Module
Motherboards.
Tools Required: 1. Phillips Screwdriver, small slotted screwdriver
2. Anti–Static wrist band and bags
DETECTOR MODULE REMOVAL:
1. Remove Gantry power. Refer to the PowerUp/PowerDown procedure.
2. Open the upper front Gantry cover. Remove the lower front gantry cover if the detector being removed is located in the bottom half
of the gantry. Refer to the Gantry covers procedure.

WARNING
USE EXTREME CAUTION WHEN SERVICING EQUIPMENT WHILE THE UPPER
GULL WING PANEL IS OPEN. THE PANEL HAS SHARP EDGES. FAILURE TO
COMPLY COULD RESULT IN SERIOUS INJURY TO PERSONNEL.

WARNING
USE EXTREME CAUTION WHEN OPERATING OR WORKING ON EQUIPMENT
WITH COVERS REMOVED. DANGEROUS VOLTAGES ARE EXPOSED WHEN THE
GANTRY COVERS ARE REMOVED. FAILURE TO COMPLY CAN CAUSE SERIOUS
INJURY OR DEATH TO PERSONNEL.

3. Locate the Detector Module to be removed.

CAUTION
ANTI–STATIC WRIST BAND AND ANTI–STATIC BAGS MUST BE USED IN THE FOL-
LOWING PROCEDURES

4. Remove the slotted head screw from the front of the detector module being removed. You may have to rotate the gantry (ccw) a bit
to gain better access to the head screws. Firmly grasp the front edge of the Detector Module and pull it straight out the front of the
Gantry. See Figure 315.

Philips Medical Systems. Confidential and Proprietary information. Refer to Title Page.
 Pull Detector from Connector

Remove Slotted
Head Screw

FIGURE 315 Detector Module Removal

DETECTOR MODULE REPLACEMENT:

5. Replace Detector Module by reversing step 4.

6. Replace the lower Gantry cover if removed earlier. Close the upper cover. Refer to the Gantry Covers procedure.
7. Apply Gantry power. Refer to the PowerUp/PowerDown procedure.
8. After allowing five minutes for Detector stabilization, run AutoCalibration. Refer to the AutoCalibration Manual.

Philips Medical Systems. Confidential and Proprietary information. Refer to Title Page.
DETECTOR MODULE MOTHERBOARD REMOVAL:

9. Follow steps 1. through 4. of Detector Module removal to remove all Detector Modules from defective Motherboard.
10. Remove four detector cables and power and mux connectors
11. Place Detector Modules into Anti–Static Bags and store in a safe place until replacement.
12. Remove the ten Philips Screws from the Motherboard. Carefully bend mother board up slightly on each end to help desengage the
four connectors located underneath. These connectors plug into the gantry ring. Refer to Figure 316.

Lift Motherboard to
Disengage Connectors
Detector Module
Connector

Remove Phillips
Head Screws

Tag and remove all wires on back of

motherboard

Remove Detectors
Before Motherboard

PL0079

FIGURE 316 Motherboard Removal

Philips Medical Systems. Confidential and Proprietary information. Refer to Title Page.
DETECTOR MODULE MOTHERBOARD REPLACEMENT:

13. Install Motherboard by reversing steps 10. through 12. of Motherboard removal.

NOTE
When replacing Motherboards, the gaps on each side must be exactly the same. Other-
wise the detector modules will not fit properly.

14. Replace and secure the Detector Modules by inserting the new detectors into their respective location. The detector should go in
opposite of that shown in Figure 315.
15. Replace the bottom cover if removed earlier. Close the upper cover. Refer to the Gantry Covers procedure.
16. Apply Gantry power. Refer to the PowerUp/PowerDown procedure.
17. After allowing five minutes for Detector stabilization, verify/perform AutoCalibration. Refer to the AutoCalibration Manual for detailed
information.

Philips Medical Systems. Confidential and Proprietary information. Refer to Title Page.
GANTRY COLUMN E–STOP SWITCH
Introduction: This procedure is used to remove and replace the Gantry Column Emergency Stop (E–stop) Switches.

Tools Required: 1. Philips Screwdriver

Estimated Time: 10 Min.

E–STOP SWITCH REMOVAL:

1. Remove Gantry power. Refer to the PowerUp/PowerDown procedure.

2. Above each gantry column e–stop switch is a small purple button (with a point–down triangle). Grab the edges with your fingernails
and remove. This will expose a phillips head screw –remove the screw. Refer to NO TAG.
3. Pull the curved purple cover that the keyswitch is mounted out a bit. Grasp the square portion of the e–stop switch and pull out so the
two pieces disconnect. Note the orientation of the two pieces as they are not keyed. You can now set the curved purple cover
aside.
4. Unscrew the Switch Collar located on the back side of the purple cover. Remove the switch.

E–STOP SWITCH REPLACEMENT:

5. Install the new column E–Stop switch and secure with the switch collar.
6. Plug the front portion of the switch into the rear portion, exactly as is was removed.
7. Attach the purple cover back to the column and secure with the philips head screw.
8. Apply Gantry power. Refer to the PowerUp/PowerDown procedure.
9. Check the operation of the E–Stop Switch by pressing it and observing that the Scanner shuts down.

Philips Medical Systems. Confidential and Proprietary information. Refer to Title Page.
 TOP VIEW

PURPLE BUTTONS

ESTOP SWITCH
DISCONNECTED

REMOVE SCREW TO
REMOVE PURPLE COVER
COVER LIP HOOKS ON
BRACKET

FIGURE 317 Gantry Column E–Stop Switch

Philips Medical Systems. Confidential and Proprietary information. Refer to Title Page.
1.1 KVA TRANSFORMER
Introduction: This procedure is used to remove and replace the 1.1 KVA Auxiliary Transformer in the Gantry.

Tools Required: 1. Phillips and Slotted Screwdrivers

2. 1/4” Hex Key

Chassis Weight: 25 pounds

Estimated TIme: 25 min.

TRANSFORMER REMOVAL:

1. Remove Gantry power. Refer to the PowerUp/PowerDown procedure.

2. Remove the rear gantry covers. Refer to the Gantry Covers procedure.

WARNING
USE EXTREME CAUTION WHEN OPERATING OR WORKING ON EQUIPMENT
WITH COVERS REMOVED. DANGEROUS VOLTAGES ARE EXPOSED WHEN THE
GANTRY COVERS ARE REMOVED. FAILURE TO COMPLY CAN CAUSE SERIOUS
INJURY OR DEATH TO PERSONNEL.

Philips Medical Systems. Confidential and Proprietary information. Refer to Title Page.
 1.1 KVA
Transformer

FIGURE 318 1.1 KVA Transformer Location

3. Remove the two transformer cover mounting screws. Remove the transformer cover. See Figure 319.

Philips Medical Systems. Confidential and Proprietary information. Refer to Title Page.
 Cover Support

Cover
Mounting
Screws
Transformer

Clear Transformer Cover

C0795

FIGURE 319 1.1 KVA Auxiliary Transformer Clear Cover

4. Tag and remove the eight transformer connections. See Figure 320.

Philips Medical Systems. Confidential and Proprietary information. Refer to Title Page.
 White

Black

Green

Violet

X1
H6

Black (2)

X2
H5

Y1
H4

Y3
H3

Y2
H2

Violet
Black (2)
H1

Y4
White

White

C0797
White

FIGURE 320 1.1 KVA Transformer Connections

Philips Medical Systems. Confidential and Proprietary information. Refer to Title Page.
 WARNING
YOU MAY NEED TO USE TWO PERSONS TO HANDLE THE 1.1 KVA
TRANSFORMER. THE 1.1 KVA TRANSFORMER WEIGHS 25 LBS. FAILURE TO
COMPLY CAN RESULT IN EQUIPMENT DAMAGE AND/OR SERIOUS INJURY TO
PERSONNEL.

NOTE
THE TRANSFORMER COVER SUPPORT AND SPACING WASHERS WILL FALL IF
THEY ARE NOT PROPERLY SUPPORTED WHEN THE TRANSFORMER MOUNT-
ING SCREWS ARE REMOVED.

5. Support the Transformer weight and remove the four Transformer Mounting bolts with the hex head key. Carefully remove the
Transformer, Cover Support, and Spacer Washers. See Figure 321.

Philips Medical Systems. Confidential and Proprietary information. Refer to Title Page.
 Cover Support

C0796

Space washers(2)

Transformer Mounting Hardware (4 Places)

FIGURE 321 1.1 KVA Transformer Mounting Screws

TRANSFORMER REPLACEMENT:
6. Install the 1.1 KVA Transformer by reversing steps 5.and 4.

Philips Medical Systems. Confidential and Proprietary information. Refer to Title Page.
7. Apply Gantry power. Refer to the PowerUp/PowerDown procedure.

WARNING
USE EXTREME CAUTION WHEN OPERATING OR WORKING ON EQUIPMENT
WITH COVERS REMOVED. DANGEROUS VOLTAGES ARE EXPOSED WHEN THE
GANTRY COVERS ARE REMOVED. FAILURE TO COMPLY CAN CAUSE SERIOUS
INJURY OR DEATH TO PERSONNEL.

8. Use a DVM to verify that there is 480 VAC power at terminals H1 and H6 on the 1.1 KVA Transformer.
9. Replace the Transformer Cover by reversing step 3.
10. To verify proper System operation, run Full–field and Half–field Water Phantom Scans and allow the System to process and display
an Image.
11. Remove Gantry power. Refer to the PowerUp/PowerDown procedure.
12. Replace the rear covers. Refer to the Gantry Covers procedure.

Philips Medical Systems. Confidential and Proprietary information. Refer to Title Page.
8 KVA TRANSFORMER
Introduction: This procedure is used to remove and replace the 8 KVA Utility Transformer in the Gantry. Two people are
recommended for this procedure due to the Transformer weight.

Tools Required: 1. Philips and Slotted Screwdrivers

2. 1/4” hex key

Chassis Weight: 130 pounds

Estimated TIme: 35 Min.

8 KVA TRANSFORMER REMOVAL:

1. Remove Gantry power. Refer to the PowerUp/PowerDown procedure. Remove power at the wallbox.
2. Remove the gantry rear covers. Refer to the Gantry Covers procedure.
3. Loosen the two Phillips Cover Screws and remove the Transformer Cover. See Figure 322.

WARNING
USE EXTREME CAUTION WHEN OPERATING OR WORKING ON EQUIPMENT
WITH COVERS REMOVED. DANGEROUS VOLTAGES ARE EXPOSED WHEN THE
GANTRY COVERS ARE REMOVED. FAILURE TO COMPLY CAN CAUSE SERIOUS
INJURY OR DEATH TO PERSONNEL.

Philips Medical Systems. Confidential and Proprietary information. Refer to Title Page.
 Transformer Cover

Phillips CoverScrews (2)

Inside of Lip
C0798

FIGURE 322 8 KVA Transformer Cover

4. Remove the two screws from the terminal block cover. See Figure 323.

Philips Medical Systems. Confidential and Proprietary information. Refer to Title Page.
 Cover Screws (2)

Plexiglass
Terminal
Cover

C0799

FIGURE 323 Terminal Block Cover

5. Tag and remove the five Transformer Wires connected to Terminals X0, X1, X2, and X3 on the Transformer Terminal Block.

Philips Medical Systems. Confidential and Proprietary information. Refer to Title Page.
 Transformer
Mounting Hardware
(4 Places)

Transformer Assembly
Mounting Hardware
(5 Places)
C0800

FIGURE 324 8 KVA Transformer Mounting Bolts

Philips Medical Systems. Confidential and Proprietary information. Refer to Title Page.
6. Tag (if needed) and remove the following Wires from the Fuse Side Terminals:

WIRE FUSE
H1 F307
H2 F308
H3 F309

WARNING
USE TWO PERSONS TO HANDLE THE 8 KVA TRANSFORMER. THE 8 KVA
TRANSFORMER WEIGHS 130 POUNDS. FAILURE TO COMPLY CAN RESULT
IN EQUIPMENT DAMAGE AND/OR SERIOUS INJURY OR DEATH TO PERSONNEL.

7. Remove the Transformer Mounting Hardware and remove the Transformer from the Gantry.

8 KVA TRANSFORMER REPLACEMENT:

8. Install the replacement 8 KVA Transformer by reversing steps 3. through 7.

9. Turn the wallbox power back on. Apply Gantry power. Refer to the PowerUp/PowerDown procedure.
10. Use a DVM to verify that 208 VAC (nominal) 3 phase power is present at terminals X1, X2, and X3 on the Transformer Terminal Block.
11. Replace the Terminal Block Plastic Cover. Refer to Figure 322.
12. Replace the Transformer Housing Cover. Refer to Figure 322.
13. To verify proper System operation, run Full–field and Half–field Water Phantom Scans and allow the System to process and display
an Image.
14. Remove Gantry power. Refer to the PowerUp/PowerDown procedure.
15. Replace the gantry rear covers. Refer to the Gantry Covers procedure.

Philips Medical Systems. Confidential and Proprietary information. Refer to Title Page.
POWER UP / DOWN PROCEDURE
This section describes the system start–up/shutdown procedures. Power–UP is accomplished via the keyswitch on the Display Tower.
Power DOWN of the entire system is accomplished via the General Utilities GUI. This is accessed via the “Service” option from the opening
bootup GUI. This procedure covers the Service Application mode. Scanning Application mode procedure is in the OP manual.

SYSTEM POWER UP
1. Make sure the Gantry keyswitch is in the normal position. Turn the Display Tower keyswitch to the ON position. After the system
boots, you will be prompted with the startup application display (or “4 Button Screen.”) You have 4 boot options. Refer to Figure 325.:
A.) Select Clinical Scanning (or do nothing) and the system will start and connect to the acquisition server. The acquisition server will
then power up the AcQImage Cabinet, and if that is done successfully, the acquisition server will power up the gantry and X–ray system.
B.) Select the Service Application option (within 15 seconds) by clicking on the Service button with the mouse pointer.
C.) Reboot the system. D. ) Start the Diagnostic GUI (within 15 seconds) by clicking once in the bottom left corner, then entering
PICKER <CR>. (All caps). The AcQImage board LEDs will display a power up test sequence. Refer to the LED Interpretations.

Clinical Scanning

Service

Shutdown

FOR DIAG GUI:

Click here with the mouse, then
type PICKER and press <CR>.

FIGURE 325 4 BUTTON SCREEN

Philips Medical Systems. Confidential and Proprietary information. Refer to Title Page.
PREPARE THE SYSTEM FOR USE (X–Ray Tube Warmup)
2. The X–Ray system needs to be properly warmed up prior to executing a scan procedure. X–Ray System Warmup must be completed
at the start of every scan day or when the tube heat is below 6%. Tube heat is displayed in the Tube Warmup window.
3. To perform a tube warm–up, click on the Tube Warm Up button with the mouse pointer. Refer to Figure 325. This will initiate the
warm–up sequence and X–RAYS WILL BE EMITTED. The tube warm–up status is displayed is displayed in the Tube Warmup
Window. Refer to Figure 326.

Progress

Status Scan Status

Tube : %
Start Stop
Scan Scan kv :

mA :
TubeHeat
Time :
0%
Tilt :+

Couch :

SPOV :

FIGURE 326 TUBE WARM–UP STATUS WINDOW

Philips Medical Systems. Confidential and Proprietary information. Refer to Title Page.
SYSTEM POWER DOWN

1. From the 4 Button Screen (Figure 325) click on SHUTDOWN with the mouse pointer.

CAUTION
DO NOT POWER DOWN THE SYSTEM WITH THE TUBE HEAT AT OR ABOVE 35%.
FAILURE TO COMPLY MAY RESULT IN SHORTENED TUBE LIFE AND/OR ERRATIC
TUBE BEHAVIOR.

System shutdown ensures that all images on disk are properly closed, all image maintenance functions properly terminated, the gantry
parked, the X–Ray system sufficiently cooled and all films printed.

There are three shutdown selections: Shutdown Gantry, Shutdown Console, Shutdown System and Switch to Console as seen in
Figure 327.

SHUTDOWN

Shutdown System...

Shutdown Console...

Start Gantry

Switch to Console...

FIGURE 327 SHUTDOWN SCREEN

Philips Medical Systems. Confidential and Proprietary information. Refer to Title Page.
Shutdown Gantry: This option should be used, if possible, in place of the e–stop switches. An orderly shutdown of the gantry will be
performed. Display Tower and/or AcQImage Cabinet operation may continue after selected. To cancel shutdown,
click the Abort button.
Shutdown System: Performs an orderly shutdown of the entire scanner system. To cancel shutdown, click the Abort button.
Shutdown Console: This option shuts down only the console units. An orderly shutdown of the image archiver, filming and file system
will be done.
Start Gantry: Toggles Start/Shutdown Gantry depending on status of Gantry power.
Switch to Console: Changes the GUI to the Console Application (Operator) screen.

WARNING
THE GUI SHUTDOWN REMOVES POWER FROM THE SYSTEM, BUT NOT AT THE
INCOMING POWER LINES. DANGEROUS VOLTAGES ARE EXPOSED WHEN THE
GANTRY COVERS ARE REMOVED. BEFORE SERVICING EQUIPMENT, REMOVE
POWER FROM THE WALL BOX. FAILURE TO COMPLY CAN CAUSE SERIOUS
INJURY OR DEATH TO PERSONNEL.

2. When prompted via a dialog box, turn the Display Tower keyswitch to the OFF position.
3. On the AcQImage Cabinet and Display Tower, ensure the rear breaker switch is turned off.
AcQImage Boards – Power Up Test LED Interpretations
AP, PB, GAM Board Diagnostic Flash Version 1.1.2

Philips Medical Systems. Confidential and Proprietary information. Refer to Title Page.
0 Hardware Initialization
1 CPU Version Check
2 Diagnostic Flash CRC Check
3 Operating System Flash CRC Check
4 CPU Memory Test
5 Data Cache Test
6 Unexpected Exception Test
7 IBC Test
8 NVRAM Single Location Test
9 PCI Bus Select Test
A Ethernet Loopback Test
B UART Loopback Test
C apmem for AP, pbmem for PB, gamem for GAM

C CIO Test (CP Board Diagnostic Flash Version 1.1.2)

D Synchronous Serial Chip Loopback Test (CP Board Diagnostic Flash Version 1.1.2)

Philips Medical Systems. Confidential and Proprietary information. Refer to Title Page.
 CONSOLE COMPONENTS REPAIR/REPLACEMENT

AcQImage cabinet covers

AcQImage cabinet fan assembly

AcQImage cabinet hard disk assembly

AcQImage cabinet hub assembly

AcQImage cabinet boards

AcQImagecabinet ac distribution chassis components

AcQImagecabinet power supply

UZX Display Tower covers

UZX Display Tower power distribution assembly and associated components

UZX Display Tower Sparc motherboard or motherboard components

Philips Medical Systems. Confidential and Proprietary information. Refer to Title Page.
ACQIMAGE CABINET COVERS
REMOVAL / REPLACEMENT
Introduction: The following procedure is used to open, remove, re–install or replace AcQImage Cabinet covers.
Tools Required: Phillips screwdriver
Estimated Time: 5 min.

TOP COVER REMOVAL:

1. Remove AcQImage Cabinet power. Refer to the PowerUp/PowerDown procedure.

WARNING
USE EXTREME CAUTION WHEN OPERATING OR WORKING ON EQUIPMENT
WITH COVERS REMOVED. DANGEROUS VOLTAGES ARE EXPOSED WHEN THE
COVERS ARE REMOVED. FAILURE TO COMPLY CAN CAUSE SERIOUS INJURY
OR DEATH TO PERSONNEL.

NOTE
If the system needs to be moved, release the lock on the wheels before moving. Ensure
wheels are locked after moving.

2. Remove the two Phillips screws from the upper rear of the top cover.
3. Lift the cover up a bit and slide the cover toward the rear, then lift upward.

SIDE COVER REMOVAL:

1. Remove the two lower Phillips screws from the bottom of the side cover.
2. Lift up slightly from the bottom and pull the bottom of the cover toward you. The top will follow after the small tabs have cleared. Refer
to Figure 329.

REAR COVER REMOVAL:

1. Remove the eight Phillips screws – three on each side and two on the bottom. Note that the AC distribution box is attached to the lower
half of the rear cover on the internal side and has cables to remove.

Philips Medical Systems. Confidential and Proprietary information. Refer to Title Page.
2. While holding the large brass ground connector bolt, slide the cover down a little and pull outward from the bottom. Disconnect the
cable that leads to the Transition Module. Refer to Figure 330. Set the cover aside as seen in Figure 329.

FRONT COVER REMOVAL: (EXTERNAL COVERS)

1. The two front decorative cover sections are held on with ball stud and spring clips. Grasp the sides of the bottom portion and pull
outward and downward. Refer to Figure 328.
2. Grasp the middle bottom of the upper portion and pull outward. Refer to Figure 328.

FRONT UPPER EXTERNAL INTERNAL COVER

COVER (AFTER EXTERNAL
COVER IS REMOVED)

FRONT LOWER EXTERNAL

COVER PULLED OFF

FIGURE 328 AcQImage Cabinet – Front Covers, External and Internal

Philips Medical Systems. Confidential and Proprietary information. Refer to Title Page.
FRONT COVER REMOVAL: (INTERNAL COVER)
1. The front covers removed here are mainly cosmetic. To access the recon boards (for removal, diagnostics, etc) you must remove the
internal front internal steel panel by removing the six screws. Refer to Figure 328.

REMOVE CABLE FROM

TRANSITION MODULE TABS FIT UNDER
UPPER FRAME

REAR COVER

FIGURE 329 AcQImage Cabinet – Top, Side, Rear Covers Removed / Transition Module

Philips Medical Systems. Confidential and Proprietary information. Refer to Title Page.
 PULL TAB TO
REMOVE FILTER

FIGURE 330 AcQImage Cabinet – Inside Covers, Fan Filter Removal

AIR FILTER REMOVAL/REPLACEMENT/CLEANING

1. Grasp the tab on the air filter and slide out to remove. Either replace or wash the filter. Ensure filter is dry before sliding back into the
AcQImage cabinet. Refer to Figure 330. (Internal cover does not have to be removed to service the air filter.)

Philips Medical Systems. Confidential and Proprietary information. Refer to Title Page.
TOP COVER REPLACEMENT:

1. Position the rear of the top cover over the two screw holes.
2. Slide the cover forward until it seats. Install and tighten the two screws removed earlier.

SIDE COVER REPLACEMENT:

1. Insert the three upper tabs into the slots and swing the bottom portion in toward the tower.
2. Install the two screws removed earlier.

REAR COVER REPLACEMENT:

1. Ensure any cables removed earlier are put back.

2. While holding the brass ground lug, slide the top portion up under the frame and align the screw holes.
3. Install the eight screws removed earlier.

FRONT COVER REPLACEMENT (INTERNAL):

1. Align the steel inner panel with the six screw holes and install the six screws removed earlier.

FRONT COVER REPLACEMENT (EXTERNAL):

1. Line up the ball stud and spring clips of the top decorative cover and push in until you feel them “pop” in. Repeat this with the bottom
portion.

Philips Medical Systems. Confidential and Proprietary information. Refer to Title Page.
ACQIMAGE CABINET FAN ASSEMBLY
REMOVAL / REPLACEMENT

Introduction: The following procedure is used to remove and replace the fan assembly in the event of a failure.

Tools Required: Phillips Screwdriver

Estimated Time: 10 Min.

FAN ASSEMBLY REMOVAL:

1. Remove the AcQImage Cabinet power. Refer to the PowerUp/PowerDown procedure.

WARNING
USE EXTREME CAUTION WHEN OPERATING OR WORKING ON EQUIPMENT
WITH COVERS REMOVED. DANGEROUS VOLTAGES ARE EXPOSED WHEN THE
COVERS ARE REMOVED. FAILURE TO COMPLY CAN CAUSE SERIOUS INJURY
OR DEATH TO PERSONNEL.

NOTE
If the system needs to be moved, release the lock on the wheels before moving. Ensure
wheels are locked after moving.

2. Remove the lower front decorative cover and left side cover first. Refer to the AcQImage Cabinet Covers Removal procedure.
3. From the left side, follow the red and black wires from the fan assembly strain relief and unplug from the bottom of the backplane.
Remove the ground wire from the internal ground stud.
4. From the front, remove the 4 screws that hold the fan assembly in place. Slide the entire fan assembly out. Refer to Figure 331.

FAN ASSEMBLY REPLACEMENT:

1. From the front, feed the red, black and ground wires into the assembly. Slide the assembly part way in.
2. From the side, pull the wires so they do not get caught under the fan assembly. Pull the fan assembly back and rest it up on the small
ledge.

Philips Medical Systems. Confidential and Proprietary information. Refer to Title Page.
3. Attach the connector and ground wires removed earlier. From the front, replace the four screws. Secure the front decorative cover
and side cover. Refer to the AcQImage Cabinet Covers Removal procedure.

Air Filter

Slide Assembly Out

Fan Assembly

Mounting Screws

FIGURE 331 Fan Assembly Location

Philips Medical Systems. Confidential and Proprietary information. Refer to Title Page.
ACQIMAGE CABINET HARD DISK ASSEMBLY
REMOVAL / REPLACEMENT

Introduction: The following procedure is used to remove and replace a hard disk assembly in the event of a failure.

Tools Required: Phillips Screwdriver

Estimated Time: 15 Min.

FAN ASSEMBLY REMOVAL:

1. Remove the AcQImage Cabinet power. Refer to the Power Up/Power Down procedure.

WARNING
USE EXTREME CAUTION WHEN OPERATING OR WORKING ON EQUIPMENT
WITH COVERS REMOVED. DANGEROUS VOLTAGES ARE EXPOSED WHEN THE
COVERS ARE REMOVED. FAILURE TO COMPLY CAN CAUSE SERIOUS INJURY
OR DEATH TO PERSONNEL.

NOTE
If the system needs to be moved, release the lock on the wheels before moving. Ensure
wheels are locked after moving.

Philips Medical Systems. Confidential and Proprietary information. Refer to Title Page.
2. Remove the front decorative covers. Refer to the AcQImage Cabinet Covers Removal procedure.
3. Remove the front steel panel by removing the six screws. The hard disk assembly is located on the far right board.
4. Disconnect the SCSI cable attached to the GAM board. Refer to Figure 332.
5. Loosen the four captive screws that secure the hard disk assembly in place. Grasp the handles and the slide the assembly part way
out. Refer to Figure 332.
6. Disconnect the power and SCSI connectors from the drive being replaced.
7. While holding the drive, loosen the four screws that secure the drive to the slide–out frame.

HARD DISK ASSEMBLY REPLACEMENT:

1. The drive may need to be configured. Refer to the Peripherals Installation and Configuration manual.
2. Bolt the new drive in where the old one was.
3. Attach the power and SCSI cables to the new drive.
4. Slide the assembly back into the card cage and secure the captive screws.

NOTE
It may be necessary to “dress” the power cable back into place. To do this, remove the
right side cover and pull excess cable out of card cage as disk assembly is pushed back
into place.

5. Plug the SCSI cable back into the GAM board.

6. Install the internal steel cover and decorative covers removed earlier.

Philips Medical Systems. Confidential and Proprietary information. Refer to Title Page.
Decorative Covers and internal steel cover
removed

Disconnect SCSI Cable

Loosen Captive Screws

(2 at top, also)

FIGURE 332 AcQImage Cabinet hard Disk Assembly Location

Philips Medical Systems. Confidential and Proprietary information. Refer to Title Page.
ACQIMAGE CABINET HUB ASSEMBLY
REMOVAL / REPLACEMENT

Introduction: The following procedure is used to remove and replace the AcQImage Cabinet hub assembly in the event of
a failure.

Tools Required: Phillips Screwdriver, slotted screwdriver, 3/8” Nutdriver

Estimated Time: 15 Min.

HUB REMOVAL:
1. Remove the AcQImage Cabinet power. Refer to the PowerUp/PowerDown procedure.

WARNING
USE EXTREME CAUTION WHEN OPERATING OR WORKING ON EQUIPMENT
WITH COVERS REMOVED. DANGEROUS VOLTAGES ARE EXPOSED WHEN THE
COVERS ARE REMOVED. FAILURE TO COMPLY CAN CAUSE SERIOUS INJURY
OR DEATH TO PERSONNEL.

NOTE
If the system needs to be moved, release the lock on the wheels before moving. Ensure
wheels are locked after moving.

Philips Medical Systems. Confidential and Proprietary information. Refer to Title Page.
2. Remove the front decorative cover and internal steel cover. Remove the top cover. Refer to the AcQImage Cabinet Covers Removal
procedure. The Hub assembly is located on the far left side of the card cage. Refer to Figure 333.
3. Loosen the captive screws that secure the hub assembly in place. Grasp the handles and slide the assembly out part way.
4. Remove the blank panel to the right of the Hub assembly for easier access. Disconnect and label all of the ethernet cables from the
Hub assembly.
5. Disconnect the power cable and ground cable fromt the Hub assembly.
6. Cut the tie–wrap that secures the power cable to the bottom of the Hub assembly.
7. Slide the entire Hub assembly out of the card cage.
8. On a secure surface, remove the four bracket nuts that hold the Hub to the slide–out panel.

HUB ASSEMBLY REPLACEMENT:

1. Place the new Hub assembly where the old one was removed. Secure with the bracket and four nuts.
2. Slide the Hub assembly back into the card rack part way. Attach a new tie–wrap to secure the power cord to the bottom of the Hub
assembly.
3. Reconnect the power and ground cables to the Hub assembly.
4. Make sure all external switch settings match those on the original hub.
5. Reconnect the ethernet cables to the Hub. Install the blank panel removed earlier.
6. Slide the Hub assembly in and secure the captive screws.
7. Attach the steel cover with the six screws. Attach the top and bottom decorative covers.

Philips Medical Systems. Confidential and Proprietary information. Refer to Title Page.
 Decorative Covers and internal steel
cover removed

Remove blank for easier access to Hub Assembly

Hub Assembly

Loosen Captive Screws top and bottom)

FIGURE 333 Hub Assembly Location

Philips Medical Systems. Confidential and Proprietary information. Refer to Title Page.
 Front Cover of Hub Assembly

Bracket and Four Securing Nuts

FIGURE 334 Detail of Hub Assembly

Philips Medical Systems. Confidential and Proprietary information. Refer to Title Page.
ACQIMAGE CABINET BOARDS
REMOVAL / REPLACEMENT

Introduction: The following procedure is used to remove and replace any of the AcQImage boards in the event of a failure.

Tools Required: Phillips Screwdriver

Estimated Time: 20 Min.

BOARD REMOVAL:

1. Remove the AcQImage Cabinet power. Refer to the PowerUp/PowerDown procedure.

WARNING
USE EXTREME CAUTION WHEN OPERATING OR WORKING ON EQUIPMENT
WITH COVERS REMOVED. DANGEROUS VOLTAGES ARE EXPOSED WHEN THE
COVERS ARE REMOVED. FAILURE TO COMPLY CAN CAUSE SERIOUS INJURY
OR DEATH TO PERSONNEL.

NOTE
If the system needs to be moved, release the lock on the wheels before moving. Ensure
wheels are locked after moving.

2. The GAM, AP and BP boards may be in different slot locations, with the most common configuration being from left right: BP, AP and
GAM. When the boards are properly booted, the LED status indicator on the front will read “4” for BP, “3” for AP, and “2” for GAM.
Refer to Figure 335.
3. Loosen the top and bottom captive screws from the board you wish to remove. In order to remove the CP, the Hub Assembly must
be removed first. Refer to the Hub Assembly Removal procedure. Refer to Figure 335. Remove and label any cables attached to
the CP board.
4. Push up on the top tab and down on the bottom tab to release the board. Carefully slide the board out until it is free of the enclosure.

Philips Medical Systems. Confidential and Proprietary information. Refer to Title Page.
CP BOARD BEHIND HUB ASSEMBLY

BP LED INDICATORS
(4) AP
(3)

GAM
(2)

FIGURE 335 ACQIMAGE CABINET BOARD LOCATIONS

Philips Medical Systems. Confidential and Proprietary information. Refer to Title Page.
BOARD REPLACEMENT:

CAUTION
THE PLASTIC BOARD GUIDES ARE HELD INTO PLACE BY SMALL PLASTIC TABS
AND CAN EASILY BE REMOVED. ENSURE THAT EACH OF THE GUIDES IS SEPA-
RATED BY TWO HOLES. MISALIGNMENT OF THE GUIDES CAN LEAD TO BOARD/
VME BACKPLANE DAMAGE. REFER TO FIGURE 336.

1. Slide the new board in where the old one was removed and secure the board with the captive screws.
2. Re–attach any cables removed earlier from the old CP.
3. Refer to the Hub Assembly Replacement procedure to put the Hub Assembly back.

Philips Medical Systems. Confidential and Proprietary information. Refer to Title Page.
 UPPER ROW

TOP VIEW OF
ACQIMAGE BOARD SLIDES IN
CABINET ALONG GUIDES

NOTE THAT SLIDE

GROOVE IS TO THE
LEFT – THIS IS THE
ONLY WAY THE
GUIDES SHOULD BE
INSTALLED.

UPPER ROW BOTTOM ROW TWO HOLES

BETWEEN TABS

TABS DETAIL OF TAB HOLE STRUCTURE

SHADED
GRAY EACH BOARD GUIDE TAB FILLS TWO HOLES.

TWO HOLES IN BETWEEN EACH TAB

FIGURE 336 PROPER BOARD GUIDE ALIGNMENT

Philips Medical Systems. Confidential and Proprietary information. Refer to Title Page.
ACQIMAGE CABINET AC DISTRIBUTION CHASSIS COMPONENTS
REMOVAL / REPLACEMENT

Introduction: The following procedure is used to remove and replace AC distribution Chassis components in the event of a
failure.

Tools Required: Phillips Screwdriver

Estimated Time: 25 Min.

AC DISTRIBUTION REMOVAL:
1. Remove the AcQImage Cabinet power. Refer to the PowerUp/PowerDown procedure.

WARNING
USE EXTREME CAUTION WHEN OPERATING OR WORKING ON EQUIPMENT
WITH COVERS REMOVED. DANGEROUS VOLTAGES ARE EXPOSED WHEN THE
COVERS ARE REMOVED. FAILURE TO COMPLY CAN CAUSE SERIOUS INJURY
OR DEATH TO PERSONNEL.

NOTE
If the system needs to be moved, release the lock on the wheels before moving. Ensure
wheels are locked after moving.

2. Remove the rear cover. Refer to the Rear Cover Removal procedure.
3. Disconnect the gray cable that leads to the transition module located on Slot 1 (right side) of J2. Remove the three line cords, two logic
cables and the green/yellow cable from the top of the AC Distribution Chassis.
4. Swing the rear panel out as shown in Figure 337.
5. Remove the six screws from the cover of the AC distribution box. Turn the rear panel as required to get all of the screws out.
6. Once the AC distribution box is open, any or all of the components can be removed and replaced by simply removing their respective
nuts and bolts. Tag and remove any cables associated with the component to be replaced.

Philips Medical Systems. Confidential and Proprietary information. Refer to Title Page.
AC DISTRIBUTION BOX REPLACEMENT:

1. Once the component(s) has/have been removed and replaced, install the cover and secure with the six screws.
2. Ensure that any cables removed earlier are plugged back in.
3. Install the rear cover. Refer to the Rear Cover Replacement procedure.
4. Ensure that the ground cable attached to the AC distribution box is tight.

AC Distribution Box
C2146

FIGURE 337 AC Distribution Box Location

Philips Medical Systems. Confidential and Proprietary information. Refer to Title Page.
ACQIMAGE CABINET POWER SUPPLY ASSEMBLY

REMOVAL / REPLACEMENT

Introduction: The following procedure is used to remove and replace the new power supply assembly (362402) or remove
the older power supply assemblies (178826 or 178221) in the event of a failure. Power supply assemblies
178826 and 178221 are obsolete, and should be replaced with power supply assembly 362402. If replacing
old power supply assembly 178221, resistor assembly 178834 must also be installed.

Tools Required: Phillips screwdriver, slotted screwdriver

Estimated Time: 35 Min.

POWER SUPPLY REMOVAL (APPLICABLE TO ALL VERSIONS):

1. Remove system power. Refer to the PowerUp/PowerDown procedure.

WARNING
USE EXTREME CAUTION WHEN OPERATING OR WORKING ON EQUIPMENT
WITH COVERS REMOVED. DANGEROUS VOLTAGES ARE EXPOSED WHEN THE
COVERS ARE REMOVED. FAILURE TO COMPLY CAN CAUSE SERIOUS INJURY
OR DEATH TO PERSONNEL.

NOTE
If the system needs to be moved, release the lock on the wheels before moving. Ensure
wheels are locked after moving.

2. Remove the rear and right side covers. Refer to the AcQImage Cabinet Cover Removal procedure.. (Right side when facing the front
of the AcQImage Cabinet.)
3. Disconnect the Signal I/O panel cable (gray cable no. L11048) plug P1197 from transition module 178155 connector J1197 located
on the right side of the backplane. Swing the rear panel out as shown in Figure 338.

Philips Medical Systems. Confidential and Proprietary information. Refer to Title Page.
 Mounting
Power supply Bracket

AC Chassis

Cabinet Rear

AC Power Cable on Bottom of Power Supply

FIGURE 338 Power Supply Location on AcQImage Cabinet

Philips Medical Systems. Confidential and Proprietary information. Refer to Title Page.
OLDER POWER SUPPLY ASSEMBLY REMOVAL (178221):
In the event of an older power supply assembly failure (178221) a new assembly (362402) should replace the entire older assembly.
NOTE: Due to the gauge of the wire and size of the terminals of the older supply, the existing power wires cannot be used with the new power
supply.

Therefore, the wires and cabling from the power supply to their destinations must be removed. The new power supply assembly will have
the proper wires attached at the supply side. You will have to route the supply wires to their proper destination. Refer to Figure 339 for
backplane detail.

1. If you have not done so, perform the “Power Supply Removal” procedure from the beginning of this section. The power supply is located
on the far left side when facing the rear of the tower.
2. Disconnect all of the cables from the backplane connections of the power supply assembly. Unplug the power cord that leads to the
AC Chassis plug J1107.
3. Disconnect connector J1 of cable L11046 from the top of the backplane. Disconnect the black and white wires on the other end from
their backplane destinations (BB3–3 and BB4–2). Carefully clip the tie wraps that secure L11046 and remove it.
4. Remove P1194 from J1194 on the AC Distribution Box.
5. Loosen and remove the seven nuts that secure the power supply assembly mounting bracket to the bottom of the cabinet. Lift the entire
assembly out of the cabinet.

OLDER POWER SUPPLY ASSEMBLY REMOVAL (178826):

In the event of an older power supply assembly failure (178826) a new assembly (362402) should replace the entire older assembly.
NOTE: Due to the gauge of the wire and size of the terminals of the older supply, the existing power wires cannot be used with the new power
supply.

Therefore, the wires and cabling from the power supply to their destinations must be removed. The new power supply assembly will have
the proper wires attached at the supply side. You will have to route the supply wires to their proper destination. Refer to Figure 339 for
backplane detail.

1. If you have not done so, perform the “Power Supply Removal” procedure from the beginning of this section. The power supply is located
on the far left side when facing the rear of the tower.
2. Disconnect all of the cables from the backplane connections of the power supply assembly. Unplug the power cord that leads to the
AC Chassis plug J1107.

Philips Medical Systems. Confidential and Proprietary information. Refer to Title Page.
178834 Resistor Cable – From J3 BB to GND BB

BB3–3 +3.3V
J3

J3 Backplane
Detail

BB4–2 BB4–3
GND

BB5–3 +5V

J17 J20 J18

FIGURE 339 RESISTOR ASSEMBLY 178834 INSTALLATION

(ONLY PERFORMED IF REPLACING POWER SUPPLY ASSEMBLY 178221).

Philips Medical Systems. Confidential and Proprietary information. Refer to Title Page.
3. Disconnect connector J1 of cable L11581 from connector P1 on the top of the backplane. Carefully clip the tie wraps that secure L11581
and remove it.
4. Loosen and remove the seven nuts that secure the power supply assembly mounting bracket to the bottom of the cabinet. Lift the entire
assembly out of the cabinet.

NEW POWER SUPPLY ASSEMBLY REMOVAL (362402):

1. If you have not done so, perform the “Power Supply Removal” procedure from the beginning of this section. The power supply is located
on the far left side when facing the rear of the tower.
2. Disconnect all of the cables from the backplane connections of the power supply assembly. Refer to Figure 339 for backplane detail.
Unplug the power cord that leads to the AC Chassis plug J1107.
3. Remove connector J1 of cable L22680 from connector P1 on the top of the backplane. Carefully clip the tie wraps that secure L22680
and remove it.
4. Loosen and remove the seven nuts that secure the power supply assembly mounting bracket to the bottom of the cabinet. Lift the entire
assembly out of the cabinet.

NEW POWER SUPPLY ASSEMBLY INSTALLATION (362402):

1. Install power supply cover plate 314117 over the standoffs at the bottom of the cabinet. Lower the power supply assembly mounting
bracket 362402 onto the cover plate with exhaust fan positioned in cover plate cutout and secure with the seven nuts removed earlier.
2. If replacing old power supply assembly 178221, install the resistor assembly 178834 on backplane as shown in Figure 339. Resistor
assembly 178834 is already installed if power supply assemblies 178826 or 362402 are being replaced.
3. Install cable L22679 on the backplane as follows (refer to Figure 339 for backplane detail):
3.3 V RTN (three black leads) to BB4–2, GND Bus Bar
+3.3 V (three white leads) to BB3–3, +3.3 V Bus Bar
+12 V (two blue leads) to J18, +12 V
12 V RTN (two yellow leads) to J20, 12 V RTN
–12 V (two gray leads) to J17, –12 V
4. Install cable L22678 on the backplane as follows:
BKPLN – (black lead) to BB4–3, GND Bus Bar
BKPLN + (red lead) to BB5–3, + 5 V Bus Bar

Philips Medical Systems. Confidential and Proprietary information. Refer to Title Page.
5. Install the AC power cord L22677 that is attached to new power supply into J1107 on the AC Chassis.
6. Install connector J1 of Control cable L22680 into the 12–pin connector P1 on the top of the J1/J2 backplane. Secure with tie wraps.
Refer to Figure 340.
7. Install Signal I/O panel cable L11048 plug P1197 to transition module connector J1197 located on the right side of the backplane.
8. Re–install the side and rear covers on the cabinet. Refer to the AcQImage Cabinet Cover Removal procedure.
9. Verify that all connections are correct. Prior to returning the AcQImage Cabinet to service, carefully unplug the GAM, DSP–AP,
Projector, and CP cards from the backplane. Remove the DC power connectors to both of the GAM image drives (you will need to
unscrew the drive tray from the AcQImage Cabinet to do this).
10. Power up the new supply and verify all voltages at the appropriate terminals and at the test points on the front panel of the GAM drive
tray assembly. Note that before an accurate voltage measurement can be taken on the new power supply, it may be necessary to
introduce a nominal load to the +5V section (eg. 5. , 5W resistor) in order to bring the entire supply into regulation.
11. Assuming all the supply stages are present and within tolerance (+5V, +3.3V, +12V, and –12V), remove power to the AcQImage
Cabinet, reinstall the PCB’s into the backplane, and reconnect the GAM drive power connectors.

Control Cable
L22680

FIGURE 340 CONTROL CABLE L22680 CONNECTION TO J1/J2 BACKPLANE

Philips Medical Systems. Confidential and Proprietary information. Refer to Title Page.
UZX DISPLAY TOWER COVERS
REMOVAL / REPLACEMENT

Introduction: The following procedure is used to open, reinstall or replace the Display Tower covers.

Tools Required: Phillips screwdriver

Estimated Time: 10 min.

1. Remove Display Tower power. Refer to the PowerUp/PowerDown procedure. Refer to Figure 342 for all of the cover removal /
replacement procedures.

Philips Medical Systems. Confidential and Proprietary information. Refer to Title Page.
 WARNING
USE EXTREME CAUTION WHEN OPERATING OR WORKING ON EQUIPMENT
WITH COVERS REMOVED. DANGEROUS VOLTAGES ARE EXPOSED WHEN THE
COVERS ARE REMOVED. FAILURE TO COMPLY CAN CAUSE SERIOUS INJURY
OR DEATH TO PERSONNEL.

NOTE
If the system needs to be moved, release the lock on the wheels before moving. Ensure
wheels are locked after moving.

FRONT COVER REMOVAL:

1. Refer to Figure 341. The decorative front cover is held on with ball stud and spring clips. Remove the key(s) first. Grasp the hand
hold in the center bottom and pull outward then pull on the sides to remove the entire front decorative cover.
2. The decorative cover removed here is only cosmetic. To access the disk drives and the lower front portion, you must remove the lower
front steel panel by removing the six screws. Refer to Figure 342.
TOP COVER REMOVAL:
1. (The front cover does not have to be removed) Remove the two Phillips screws from the upper rear of the top cover.
2. Slide the cover toward the rear a little and lift the cover upward.

SIDE COVER REMOVAL:

1. (Front decorative cover must be removed first for the left panel.) Remove the two lower Phillips screws from the bottom of the side cover.
2. Lift up slightly from the bottom and pull the bottom of the cover toward you. The top will follow after the small tabs have cleared the
frame.

REAR COVER REMOVAL:

1. Top Rear Cover: Remove the five Phillips screws and move the cover slightly out, being careful not to pull the fan wires. If you want
to move the top panel farther away, push the tab and remove the two power cables from the SPC.

Philips Medical Systems. Confidential and Proprietary information. Refer to Title Page.
2. Bottom Rear Cover: Support the rear lower cover by the brass ground screw and remove the four Phillips screws and place the cover
on the floor. The bottom rear cover holds the AC chassis, which can be disconnected with the cable connector.

Philips Medical Systems. Confidential and Proprietary information. Refer to Title Page.
 178656–
FRONT COVER ASS’Y,
INCLUDES: 312918 – DISK
312222 DRIVE COVER
312249
312918

312249 – FASCIA

LEFT PANEL

312222 – BEZEL,
311686 – DECORATIVE
ANTI TIP BAR INTERNAL VIEW OF FRONT
COSMETIC COVER

FIGURE 341 COSMETIC COVER REMOVAL

Philips Medical Systems. Confidential and Proprietary information. Refer to Title Page.
 ÂÂÂÂÂÂ
ÂÂÂÂÂÂ
312967–TOP COVER
ÂÂÂÂÂÂ
ÂÂÂÂÂÂ
312214
FILTER
178666–UPPER
REAR COVER(WITH
FANS AND FILTER
ATTACHED)
178656 – FAN
ASSEMBLY
312968– LEFT
SIDE COVER

178667–REAR
AC PANEL
ASSEMBLY

312968– RIGHT-
83840– SIDE COVER
FRONT
COVER

FIGURE 342 DISPLAY TOWER – ALL COVERS REMOVED (Internal Components not Shown)

Philips Medical Systems. Confidential and Proprietary information. Refer to Title Page.
TOP COVER REPLACEMENT:

1. Position the rear of the top cover over the two screw holes.
2. Slide the cover forward until it seats. Install and tighten the two screws removed earlier.

SIDE COVER REPLACEMENT:

1. Insert the upper tabs into the slots and swing the bottom portion in toward the tower. Align the vertical tabs with the slot on the chassis
and push inward.
2. Install the two screws removed earlier.

REAR COVER REPLACEMENT:

1. Bottom Rear Cover: The lower rear cover must be put back first. Plug the AC Chassis cable connector back in if removed earlier.
2. Align the cover with the screw holes and install the four screws removed earlier.
3. Top Rear Cover: If the fan power cables were disconnected, plug them back into the SPC.
4. While holding the brass ground lug, slide the top portion up under the frame and align the screw holes.
5. Install the five screws removed earlier.

FRONT COVER REPLACEMENT:

1. Inner steel panel: Align the steel inner panel with the six screw holes and install the six screws removed earlier.
2. Make sure key is removed before installing. Line up the ball stud and spring clips of the top decorative front cover and push in until
you feel them “pop” in.

Philips Medical Systems. Confidential and Proprietary information. Refer to Title Page.
UZX DISPLAY TOWER POWER DISTRIBUTION ASSEMBLY AND ASSOCIATED COMPONENTS

REMOVAL / REPLACEMENT

INTRODUCTION: The following procedure is used to remove and replace the UZX Display Tower power supply and associated
boards: Intercom Mixer and Power modules, System Power Controller and AC Chassis in the event of a failure.

TOOLS REQUIRED: Phillips Screwdriver

ESTIMATED TIME: 35 Min.

POWER SUPPLY REMOVAL:

1. Remove the Display Tower power. Refer to the PowerUp/PowerDown procedure.

WARNING
USE EXTREME CAUTION WHEN OPERATING OR WORKING ON EQUIPMENT
WITH COVERS REMOVED. DANGEROUS VOLTAGES ARE EXPOSED WHEN THE
COVERS ARE REMOVED. FAILURE TO COMPLY CAN CAUSE SERIOUS INJURY
OR DEATH TO PERSONNEL.

NOTE
If the system needs to be moved, release the lock on the wheels before moving. Ensure
wheels are locked after moving.

2. Remove the front cosmetic cover, left side cover and the bottom rear cover. (If the AC Chassis needs to be replaced, it can be done
with this procedure.) Lay the AC Chassis on the floor as in Figure 343 or disconnect the cable connector as shown in Figure 344 and
move the bottom rear panel out of the way.
3. Remove the top rear cover as shown in Figure 343.
4. To remove the power supply, the power distribution chassis must first be removed. Refer to Figure 345. Several cables must be tagged
and removed from the Power Distribution assembly:

Philips Medical Systems. Confidential and Proprietary information. Refer to Title Page.
 TAG and REMOVE THE FOLLOWING CABLES TO REMOVE THE PDC:

All peripheral power cables L11057 (J220 through J226 – some may not be used)

Thick gray cable L11029 or ribbon cable L12052 from SPC J1214
(From parallel port on Motherboard)

Push the single tab and remove fan cables P1230, P1231, and P1232
from upper left of the SPC

Push tab and remove power supply cable P1210 from the upper right of the SPC.
Remove multi–wire P1213 (Estop/K’switch/LED Assy)

Gray cable P1270 that comes from the Intercom board

Multi–wire power cable P1901 that leads to the Sparc motherboard

Loosen the strain relief that secures the video and keyboard cables

The power supply assembly is shipped with all harnesses connected to it so do

not disconnect any cables from it.

FIGURE 343 DISPLAY TOWER WITH REAR COVERS REMOVED

5. With the fan power cables disconnected, remove the five screws from the top rear cover (with fans) and move it out of the way.
6. Once all the cables are disconnected, remove the two sets of screws that secure the Power Distribution assembly to the frame. Slide
the Power Distribution assembly in a bit and then out the left side of the chassis. (The power supply will be easier to remove with the
entire power assembly removed.) Refer to Figure 345.
7. Remove one of the two screws that secure the power supply to the power distribution chassis. This screw is located toward the rear
of the Power Distribution chassis.

Philips Medical Systems. Confidential and Proprietary information. Refer to Title Page.
In order to remove the other screw that secures the power supply, the three boards must first be removed:
Intercom Power Module – Top Board
8. Loosen and remove the four screws that secure the board. If this board needs to be replaced, remove cables P1275 and P1276.
Intercom Mixer Module – Middle Board
9. With the Intercom Power Module removed or moved out of the way, loosen and remove the four standoffs. If this board needs to be
replaced, remove cables P1271 and P1272.
System Power Controller – Lowest Board
10. WIth the top two Intercom boards removed or moved out of the way, remove the four standoffs and two screws that secure the SPC
to the chassis. This will finally get you to the second power supply screw. Support the power supply at the bottom and remove the
second screw. You should be able to pull the power supply out completely.

AC
CHASSIS

POWER
DISTRIBUTION
DISCONNECT THIS CABLE ASSEMBLY

FIGURE 344 AC CHASSIS ASSEMBLY

Philips Medical Systems. Confidential and Proprietary information. Refer to Title Page.
 DISCONNECT THE FAN
REMOVE POWER POWER CABLES 174894– INTERCOM POWER MODULE ASS’Y
CABLE P1210
REMOVE GRAY CABLE P1270 FROM
MIDDLE BOARD (not shown)

174670– INTERCOM MIXER ASSEMBLY

DISCONNECT THIS
CABLE, P1901
FROM
ULTRASPARC 1 of 2 SCREWS THAT SECURE POWER
MOTHERBOARD SUPPLY TO POWER DISTRIBUTION CHASSIS

DISCONNECT THE DC
PERIPHERAL POWER
CABLES HERE STRAIN RELIEF GOES
THROUGH HERE
362050– SYSTEM POWER
CONTROLLER
REMOVE CABLE P1213

178669–POWER
SUPPLY ASSEMBLY

SCREWS HOLDING AC CHASSIS ASSEMBLY

GO IN HERE FROM THE OUTSIDE. SAME ON
THE OTHER SIDE.

DISCONNECT THIS CABLE FROM

LOWER REAR PANEL AC CHASSIS

FIGURE 345 POWER DISTRIBUTION ASSEMBLY REMOVED

Philips Medical Systems. Confidential and Proprietary information. Refer to Title Page.
POWER SUPPLY REPLACEMENT:

1. Note: The new power supply comes with the cables attached to it.
2. Secure the new power supply to the Power Distribution Chassis with the two screws removed earlier.
3. Replace or re–install the SPC, Intercom Mixer and Intercom Power Module boards. Attach any cables that may have been removed
from these boards if they were replaced.
4. Make sure all of the fan and peripheral power cables are pushed toward the front of the cabinet. Slide the Power Distribution Chassis
(PDC) in from the left side and back a bit until it touches the back of the tower chassis. Secure the PDC with the four screws removed
earlier.
5. Attach all of the cables removed earlier, with the exception of the two fan cables from the top rear cover.
6. Plug the lower rear cover AC Chassis cable back in. Secure the chassis to the tower with the four small screws removed earlier.
7. Before securing the upper rear cover to the tower chassis, remember to plug in the two fan cables to the SPC. Secure the cover with
the five captive screws.
8. Re–install the left cover and cosmetic cover, roll back into place and secure the wheels.

Philips Medical Systems. Confidential and Proprietary information. Refer to Title Page.
UZX DISPLAY TOWER SPARC MOTHERBOARD OR MOTHERBOARD COMPONENTS
REMOVAL / REPLACEMENT
Introduction: The following procedure is used to remove and replace the UZX Display Tower UltraSparc motherboard in the
event of a failure. This procedure also covers removal of the motherboard components: Video board, audio
board, ethernet board and CPU fan assembly.
Tools Required: Phillips Screwdriver
Estimated Time: 30 Min.
1. Remove the Display Tower power. Refer to the PowerUp/PowerDown procedure.

WARNING
USE EXTREME CAUTION WHEN OPERATING OR WORKING ON EQUIPMENT
WITH COVERS REMOVED. DANGEROUS VOLTAGES ARE EXPOSED WHEN THE
COVERS ARE REMOVED. FAILURE TO COMPLY CAN CAUSE SERIOUS INJURY
OR DEATH TO PERSONNEL.

NOTE
If the system needs to be moved, release the lock on the wheels before moving. Ensure
wheels are locked after moving.

SPARC MOTHERBOARD REMOVAL:

1. Remove the front cosmetic cover, then the upper rear and left side covers. Refer to the Display Tower Cover Removal procedure for
details.

CAUTION
STATIC ELECTRICITY. CIRCUIT BOARDS MUST BE HANDLED WITH ANTI–STATIC
TECHNIQUES. DISCHARGE YOUR BODY BEFORE HANDLING ANY CIRCUIT
BOARD. KEEP ALL CIRCUIT BOARDS IN ANTI–STATIC BAGS OR ON CONDUC-
TIVE FOAM WHEN NOT INSTALLED IN THE EQUIPMENT. FAILURE TO COMPLY
MAY CAUSE PERMANENT DAMAGE TO COMPONENTS ON CIRCUIT BOARDS.

Philips Medical Systems. Confidential and Proprietary information. Refer to Title Page.
2. Refer to Figure 346. Disconnect (and label if necessary) the cables from the rear of the UltraSparc motherboard. Disconnect the other
cables from the front of the motherboard (SCSI, power cable to SPC, fan power cable, etc).
3. The UltraSparc is mounted on a bracket. You must remove this bracket with the motherboard attached first in order to remove the
motherboard.
Observe static precautions and refer to Figure 347 for the following steps.

4. Loosen the four screws that secure the entire bracket assembly to the tower chassis and slide the entire assembly out through the rear
of the unit. Place the unit on a flat surface.
5. FAN ASSEMBLY: Disconnect the fan power cable from the SPC. Remove the four screws that secure the fan assembly to the
motherboard and remove the fan assembly.
6. MOTHERBOARD COMPONENTS REMOVAL: Remove the screws that secure each of the individual boards (ethernet, etc) from the
motherboard. Take note of the location of each board and then remove each board. See the end of this procedure for more details
on removing these individual components.
7. Remove the screws that secure the support bracket to the mounting bracket and remove.
8. Remove all of the screws that secure the motherboard to the mounting bracket and lift it off.

Philips Medical Systems. Confidential and Proprietary information. Refer to Title Page.
 PARALLEL PORT

SERIAL PORT

KEYBOARD

10MBit ETHERNET

PS/2 PANEL
(NOT USED)

(NOT USED)

VIDEO FFB2+
MONITOR
100MBIT ETHERNET BOARD
SPEAKER OUT

AUX IN
(NOT USED)
LINE IN MIC IN
(NOT USED)

SCSI

FIGURE 346 ULTRA SPARC MOTHERBOARD

Philips Medical Systems. Confidential and Proprietary information. Refer to Title Page.
 2. REMOVE THESE SCREWS TO REMOVE FAN
ASSEMBLY FROM THE MOTHERBOARD

4.
REMOVE
THESE
1. REMOVE THESE SCREWS 3. REMOVE THESE
SCREWS TO TO SCREWS TO REMOVE 1. REMOVE THESE
REMOVE ENTIRE REMOVE BOARDS FROM SCREWS TO REMOVE
ASSEMBLY FROM SUPPORT MOTHERBOARD ENTIRE ASSEMBLY FROM
THE TOWER BRACKET THE TOWER CHASSIS
CHASSIS FROM
MOTHER
BOARD

FIGURE 347 MOTHERBOARD REMOVAL

Philips Medical Systems. Confidential and Proprietary information. Refer to Title Page.
ULTRA SPARC MOTHERBOARD REPLACEMENT:

1. Place the new motherboard onto the mounting bracket and secure with the screws removed earlier.
2. Install the support bracket with the screws removed earlier.
3. Insert all of the individual boards back into their proper locations and secure.
4. Install the fan assembly back into its position with the screws removed earlier.
5. Slide the entire assembly into the tower chassis and secure with the four screws removed earlier.
6. Attach all cables that were removed. Refer to Figure 346 for locations.

ULTRA SPARC MOTHERBOARD COMPONENTS

To remove/replace an UltraSparc motherboard, the individual boards on the motherboard need to be removed. If one of these specific
boards needs to be replaced, see steps 5. and 6. and refer to Figure 348.

NOTE
The Display Tower has three fans. One is on the Ultra Sparc assembly and the removal
is covered in this procedure. The other two fans are connected to the upper rear cover.
Simply remove the fan power cable and the screws that secure it to the back cover to
replace them.

NVRAM FAILS OR IS REPLACED

If seeing: “IDPROM contents are invalid”, or “Timeout waiting for ARP/RARP packet”,

Then the NVRAM is either bad or not configured to boot from disk. To configure it to boot from disk, press STOP–A and get to an OK prompt.

Type printenv and look at the fields for boot–disk, and diag–device. They should be set to disk0, if they say disk net, then the system is
trying to boot from the network and not from the local hard disk. To set this correctly type setenv boot–device disk0 then setenv
diag–device disk0. The system should now boot from disk.

Philips Medical Systems. Confidential and Proprietary information. Refer to Title Page.
 178658 PERIPHERAL FAN ASSEMBLY

(THE OTHER TWO DISPLAY TOWER

FANS ARE ON THE REAR COVER.)

178659 UZX HOST ASSEMBLY

(SEE DETAIL AT RIGHT) 312849 PCI AUDIO INTERFACE

311929 128MB DIMM MEMORY (8)

311927 SPARC 444MHZ

MOTHERBOARD

312850 PCI FAST ETHERNET

CPU MODULE
CURRENTLY NOT A REPLACEMENT 312221 FRAME BUFFER
PART (COMES WITH MOTHERBOARD)

FIGURE 348 MOTHERBOARD COMPONENTS

Philips Medical Systems. Confidential and Proprietary information. Refer to Title Page.
POWER UP / DOWN PROCEDURE
This section describes the system start–up/shutdown procedures. Power–UP is accomplished via the keyswitch on the Display Tower.
Power DOWN of the entire system is accomplished via the General Utilities GUI. This is accessed via the “Service” option from the opening
bootup GUI. This procedure covers the Service Application mode. Scanning Application mode procedure is in the OP manual.

SYSTEM POWER UP
1. Make sure the Gantry keyswitch is in the normal position. Turn the Display Tower keyswitch to the ON position. After the system
boots, you will be prompted with the startup application display (or “4 Button Screen.”) You have 4 boot options. Refer to Figure 349.:
A.) Select Clinical Scanning (or do nothing) and the system will start and connect to the acquisition server. The acquisition server will
then power up the AcQImage Cabinet, and if that is done successfully, the acquisition server will power up the gantry and X–ray system.
B.) Select the Service Application option (within 15 seconds) by clicking on the Service button with the mouse pointer.
C.) Reboot the system. D. ) Start the Diagnostic GUI (within 15 seconds) by clicking once in the bottom left corner, then entering
PICKER <CR>. (All caps). The AcQImage board LEDs will display a power up test sequence. Refer to the LED Interpretations.

Clinical Scanning

Service

FOR DIAG GUI:

Click here with the mouse, then
type PICKER and press <CR>.

FIGURE 349 4 BUTTON SCREEN

Philips Medical Systems. Confidential and Proprietary information. Refer to Title Page.
PREPARE THE SYSTEM FOR USE (X–Ray Tube Warmup)
2. The X–Ray system needs to be properly warmed up prior to executing a scan procedure. X–Ray System Warmup must be completed
at the start of every scan day or when the tube heat is below 6%. Tube heat is displayed in the Tube Warmup window.
3. To perform a tube warm–up, click on the Tube Warm Up button with the mouse pointer. Refer to Figure 349. This will initiate the
warm–up sequence and X–RAYS WILL BE EMITTED. The tube warm–up status is displayed is displayed in the Tube Warmup
Window. Refer to Figure 350.

Progress

Status Scan Status

Tube : %
Start Stop
Scan Scan kv :

mA :
TubeHeat
Time :
0%
Tilt :+

Couch :

SPOV :

FIGURE 350 TUBE WARM–UP STATUS WINDOW

Philips Medical Systems. Confidential and Proprietary information. Refer to Title Page.
SYSTEM POWER DOWN

1. From the 4 Button Screen (Figure 349) click on SHUTDOWN with the mouse pointer.

CAUTION
DO NOT POWER DOWN THE SYSTEM WITH THE TUBE HEAT AT OR ABOVE 35%.
FAILURE TO COMPLY MAY RESULT IN SHORTENED TUBE LIFE AND/OR ERRATIC
TUBE BEHAVIOR.

System shutdown ensures that all images on disk are properly closed, all image maintenance functions properly terminated, the gantry
parked, the X–Ray system sufficiently cooled and all films printed.

There are three shutdown selections: Shutdown Gantry, Shutdown Console, Shutdown System and Switch to Console as seen in
Figure 351.

SHUTDOWN

Shutdown System...

Shutdown Console...

Start Gantry

Switch to Console...

FIGURE 351 SHUTDOWN SCREEN

Philips Medical Systems. Confidential and Proprietary information. Refer to Title Page.
Shutdown Gantry: This option should be used, if possible, in place of the e–stop switches. An orderly shutdown of the gantry will be
performed. Display Tower and/or AcQImage Cabinet operation may continue after selected. To cancel shutdown,
click the Abort button.
Shutdown System: Performs an orderly shutdown of the entire scanner system. To cancel shutdown, click the Abort button.
Shutdown Console: This option shuts down only the console units. An orderly shutdown of the image archiver, filming and file system
will be done.
Start Gantry: Toggles Start/Shutdown Gantry depending on status of Gantry power.
Switch to Console: Changes the GUI to the Console Application (Operator) screen.

WARNING
THE GUI SHUTDOWN REMOVES POWER FROM THE SYSTEM, BUT NOT AT THE
INCOMING POWER LINES. DANGEROUS VOLTAGES ARE EXPOSED WHEN THE
GANTRY COVERS ARE REMOVED. BEFORE SERVICING EQUIPMENT, REMOVE
POWER FROM THE WALL BOX. FAILURE TO COMPLY CAN CAUSE SERIOUS
INJURY OR DEATH TO PERSONNEL.

2. When prompted via a dialog box, turn the Display Tower keyswitch to the OFF position.
3. On the AcQImage Cabinet and Display Tower, ensure the rear breaker switch is turned off.
AcQImage Boards – Power Up Test LED Interpretations
AP, PB, GAM Board Diagnostic Flash Version 1.1.2

Philips Medical Systems. Confidential and Proprietary information. Refer to Title Page.
0 Hardware Initialization
1 CPU Version Check
2 Diagnostic Flash CRC Check
3 Operating System Flash CRC Check
4 CPU Memory Test
5 Data Cache Test
6 Unexpected Exception Test
7 IBC Test
8 NVRAM Single Location Test
9 PCI Bus Select Test
A Ethernet Loopback Test
B UART Loopback Test
C apmem for AP, pbmem for PB, gamem for GAM

C CIO Test (CP Board Diagnostic Flash Version 1.1.2)

D Synchronous Serial Chip Loopback Test (CP Board Diagnostic Flash Version 1.1.2)

Philips Medical Systems. Confidential and Proprietary information. Refer to Title Page.
PERIPHERALS / OPTIONS INDEX
Service Applications

Peripherals – Installation and Configuration

AcQSim CT 1.0 Software Installation Instructions

AcQSim CT 2.0 Software Upgrade Instructions

AcQSim CT 3.1 Software Upgrade Instructions

AcQSim CT 3.1.1 Software Upgrade Instructions

AcQSim CT 4.0 Software Upgrade Instructions

AcQSim CT Patient Support Horizontal Resolver Replacement Instructions

AcQSim CT DICOM Conformance Statement

Philips Medical Systems. Confidential and Proprietary information. Refer to Title Page.
SERVICE APPLICATIONS
Introduction
The Service Application gives Service the ability to easily set up the AcQSim CT system via a Graphical User Interface (GUI). The different
setup menus include General Utilities, DITA, Calibrate/Perf. and Configure.
Service Applications Procedure
1. Boot the system. Select the SERVICE button from the opening screen. Refer to Figure 352. SEE NOTE below:

NOTE
The Diagnostic GUI, which initiates AcQImage Diagnostics, Gantry and other utilities,
may be started at this time (before starting the Service App) by clicking in the bottom
left corner (slightly smaller than 1” square) and typing PICKER <CR>. After exiting the
Diagnostic GUI, the Service Application Selection screen will return (Figure 352).

Clinical Scanning

Service

Clinical Scanning

Clinical Scanning
Service

Reboot
Service
Click once in the bottom left
corner. Type PICKER
(caps) and press <CR> to Shutdown
activate the Diagnostic GUI.
FIGURE 352 SERVICE APPLICATIONS SELECTION SCREEN

Philips Medical Systems. Confidential and Proprietary information. Refer to Title Page.
2. The opening screen defaults to “General Utilities”: At the bottom of the screen are the four major categories of Service Applications:

General
DITA Calibrate Configure
Utilities

FIGURE 353 SERVICE APPLICATIONS – MAIN CATEGORIES

The following procedures detail each individual Service Application, based on Figure 353, going from left to right (General Utilities | DITA
| Calibrate | Configure). Click on the links above for more information.

GENERAL UTILITIES
PICKER AcQSim CT Service

Tube Warm Up ...

Shutdown

Modify Window
Level Presets

Set Date and Time...

FIGURE 354 GENERAL UTILITIES WINDOW

The General Utilities menu includes the following options. Click on the respective buttons in Figure 354 for more information.
Tube Warm Up: Ensures proper tube heat necessary before taking a scan. Press the Start Scan button to begin warmup. Status
is seen in the Progress and Scan Status windows.

Philips Medical Systems. Confidential and Proprietary information. Refer to Title Page.
Shutdown: Used to start/shutdown Gantry, Console –(Display Tower and AcQImage Cabinet) or shut down the entire system.
Switch to Console launches the Console App.
NOTE: If the Gantry power is on, the third button will read “Shutdown Gantry.” If the Gantry power is off, the button will read “Start Gantry.”

Progress
SCAN STATUS
STATUS
Tube : %

kv :

mA :

Time :
TubeHeat
0% Tilt :+

Couch :

SPOV :

FIGURE 355 TUBE WARM UP

Philips Medical Systems. Confidential and Proprietary information. Refer to Title Page.
 SHUTDOWN

Shutdown System...

Shutdown Console...

Start Gantry

Switch to Console...

FIGURE 356 SHUTDOWN SCREEN

Modify Presets: Opens the Window/Level Presets Editor. You may add customized presets or delete existing ones. To add, click
on the ADD button to highlight the next preset row. Click in the cell under the Preset column and type in a preset
name. Repeat this in the window and level cells and click on SAVE. To delete, click on the preset value, then click
on the DELETE button. If you make a mistake, click on the CANCEL button.

Philips Medical Systems. Confidential and Proprietary information. Refer to Title Page.
 WINDOW LEVEL PRESETS EDITOR

Preset Window Width Window Level

Brain 180 45

Mediast. 400 20

Spine 350 70

Abdomen 350 50

Lung 1600 -300

Bone 2000 350

Pilot 800 500

FIGURE 357 MODIFY PRESETS

Philips Medical Systems. Confidential and Proprietary information. Refer to Title Page.
Set Time and Date: Allows you to set the time and date of the system, time zone, and 12/24 hours clock. Use either up/down arrows,
toggle buttons or pulldown menus. When the time settings are correct, click on the SET TIME button. When the
date settings are correct, click on the SET DATE button.
TIME

DATE

APRIL 1998

S M T W T F S
1 2 3 4 5
PM 6 7 8 9 10 11 12
13 14 15 16 17 18 19
Hour MIN AM PM
20 21 22 23 24 25 26

12 HOUR 27 28 29 30
TIMEZONE: US/Eastern
24 HOUR

Set Time Reset Set Date Reset

DONE

FIGURE 358 SET TIME and DATE

Philips Medical Systems. Confidential and Proprietary information. Refer to Title Page.
DITA
The AcQSim CT system supports the storage and display of data at many steps of the reconstruction process. A utility called DITA is used
to display this information and can be used to isolate faults ranging from individual detector channels to failure of entire processing section
such as the AP board. DITA opens with the study selection screen:
Select Raw Data SERIES INFORMATION
Study # Series # Patient Name Date Time Scan Time Data Type First Name:
Last Name:
Reference:
Protocol:

Study No.:
Scan Type:
Data Type:
No. of Revs:

Acq.Data/Time:
Recon. Date/Time

Start Couch Pos.:

End Couch Pos.
Data Location

Filter Raw Data by Type

Source Fan
Detector Fan
Cair Corrected Data Select All
SEARCH SHFL

Clear All
Entry: Next Previous

FIGURE 359 OPEN STUDY LISTING

To the right of this list is the Data Type selection menu. This menu allows you to list the different types of data, Source Fan, Raw Data, CAIR
Correction Data or SHFL. Click on each type to toggle the check mark. Corresponding data will appear in the menu selection list. Highlight
the study of choice, then click on OK.

Philips Medical Systems. Confidential and Proprietary information. Refer to Title Page.
Measure Selection Window
After the data loads, it will be displayed in the right window. The upper left window has three options and defaults to FILM, which would
be used if filming the image was desired.

Click on the MEASURE tab. The Measure Selection box will appear:

Display Mode Selector: Choose the way you want the data to be displayed: Integer, Hex or Volts.

FILM MEASURE BAD DETS

Hints
Press Stop Measurement to cancel

Measurement Display Mode

INT
Report Cursor

Cancel
Data Profile
Stop
Measurement

Clear Last Clear All

Pre Data Words

Updated By ’Report Cursor’ Measurement
View Number *
View Status *
Revolution No. *
Couch Position (mm): *

FIGURE 360 MEASURE WINDOW

Philips Medical Systems. Confidential and Proprietary information. Refer to Title Page.
The MEASURE SELECTION BOX contains the following measurement selections:

REPORT CURSOR: When the Report Cursor from Figure 360 is selected, you can move the cursor to the right window where the data
is displayed. The cursor will change to look like a pencil point. This cursor is used to select and individual detector or area of the data.
When you select a point on the data, a short report will appear. In this example, Detectors 1885, 2105 and 2320 were selected:

DATA PROFILE: When the Data Profile button in Figure 360 is selected, you can select an area of data that you want a profile on using
the pencil point cursor. In this example, detector 2020 was selected:

Philips Medical Systems. Confidential and Proprietary information. Refer to Title Page.
Bad Dets Selection Window
To review the bad detector list, or add/remove a bad detector from the list, click on the BAD DETS tab. The Bad Dets selection window
will be displayed. If you select the “Highlight Bad Dets” button, any listed bad detector will appear on the image data:
BAD DET SELECTION PENCIL DETAIL:

NOTE THAT PENCIL

JUST COVERS THE
DETECTOR LINE.

The Bad Detector List will update immediately after a detector is added or removed from the list. If changes are made to the list and
you do not save it, you will be prompted when exiting DITA (see Figure 363).

Philips Medical Systems. Confidential and Proprietary information. Refer to Title Page.
 FILM MEASURE BAD DETS

Highlight Bad Dets

Add or Remove a Bad Detector

Add: Remove:

Restore Original Bad Dets

Bad Detector List

732

Save
Bad Detector List

FIGURE 361 BAD DETS WINDOW

Philips Medical Systems. Confidential and Proprietary information. Refer to Title Page.
The bottom left window contains AcQuisition Information as seen in Figure 362.

Enter the Detector Number to move the displayed data within the window.

Pan and Zoom: Grab the purple box within the display window. Move the box around to pan, increase the size of the box by pulling
one of the four corner “handles” outward to zoom.

RAW

Total Acqs: 12
Acquisition Selection Acq: 1

Total Revs: 1
Revs Loaded: 1 –1

Rev: 1

Detector: 392

Sample: 679

Window/Level
Zoom: 10.0
W: 1000 L: 0

FIGURE 362 RAW DATA INFORMATION WINDOW

Philips Medical Systems. Confidential and Proprietary information. Refer to Title Page.
If any changes to the bad detector list were made and not saved, the following message will appear before the program terminates:

Warning

The Bad Detector list has not been saved!

More Information

The Bad Detector list has been altered since the last SAVE action.

YES – Continue after saving the Bad Detector list.

No – Continue without saving the Bad Detector list. This action will
cause all changes to the Bad Detector list to be lost.

Cancel – Do not continue, remain in DITA.

YES NO Cancel

FIGURE 363 EXIT WINDOW

Philips Medical Systems. Confidential and Proprietary information. Refer to Title Page.
AUTO–CALIBRATION
Introduction

The calibration worksteps provide a way to calibrate the AcQSim CT scanner. An automatic sequence will control couch movement,
scanning with desired parameters, and running a desired analysis program. It also implements a performance assessment sub–system
for determining the relative performance of a CT system.

The User Interface is no longer via the ELTP like the Q series scanners. All calibration workstep interfaces are GUI based, (Graphical
User Interface) with selections made via a mouse “click.” Each GUI has a cohesive purpose and is described below.

Calibration makes Automatic Bad Detector Entries in the vector database. Calibration will write a list that fails to meet spec (see below).
Calibration will not remove any detectors from the bad list. Manual entry and removal of bad detectors is still available via DITA. Detector
status is also available via DITA.
FIELD DETECTOR MODULE REJECTION CRITERIA
 a. There can be no more than 16 bad detectors per system / else replace the module with the most bad
detectors.
 b. There can be no more than 3 bad channels per detector module / else replace the module.
 c. There can be no more than 2 adjacent bad detectors, either in a module or in adjacent modules / else replace the module.
 d. No defective channel can adversely effect other channels in a quadrature manner / else replace the defective component causing
the adverse effect.
 e. Any module with a defective ARDAS channel must be replaced.
Please promptly return the modules for repair with a description of the defects, date and scanner I.D. Knowledge gained from any reported
defects will be applied to reduce the number of defects in future production.

The next several pages describe the GUI workstep interfaces. The first graphic shows the entire Calibration GUI to visualize where there
individual workstep GUI areas are located. The are detailed in subsequent graphics.

Philips Medical Systems. Confidential and Proprietary information. Refer to Title Page.
 MENU BAR

MESSAGE AREA

PRIMARY AREA PROGRESS AREA

IMAGE AREA

SCAN
STATUS
AREA

SECONDARY AREA
SCAN CONTROL AREA

WORKSTEP AREA

FIGURE 364 CALIBRATION WORKSTEP GUI LAYOUT – FULL SCREEN (NO DETAIL)

Philips Medical Systems. Confidential and Proprietary information. Refer to Title Page.
 Study Display Tools Log Viewing User Level Help
AcQSim CT Service
CALIBRATION AND PERFORMANCE
Hints and Status
REASONMEASURE
Pick Calibration/Performance
Select Calibration/Performance Reason
Changed_Tube Watch this window
for instructions!
Required Operations For Selected Reason
Action Calibration Status Seri
CenterPhantom Next To Scan
BadDetsBaco Waiting To Scan
BadDetsWater Waiting To Scan
BadDetsAir Waiting To Scan Percent Complete
BadDetsPeg Waiting To Scan
Lateral Waiting To Scan 0%
Centering Waiting To Scan
Scan Status
Centering Waiting To Scan

Tube : 20.0 %
Continue Old Calibration
kv : 0

Make Selected Vector Next mA : 0

Time : +0.0
2D
Image Selection Couch :
Se: Im: 1:1 SPOV :

VIEW
Scanner Control

Advance Start Stop Pause

Zoom: To Scan Scan Scan Scan

Filter: Select Calibration/Performance Reason

Auto Manual

Custom W: 1000 L: 0

Command:
General
Utilities DITA Calibrate Configure
PL0078

FIGURE 365 CALIBRATION WORKSTEP – FULL SCREEN (WITH DETAIL)

Philips Medical Systems. Confidential and Proprietary information. Refer to Title Page.
PRIMARY GUI AREA
The PRIMARY AREA contains all ”primary” functions. The calibration workstep divides this area into three major functions: REASON,
MEASURE and FILM. Refer to Figure 366.

Reason GUI (Tab 1):The reason gui allows the user to select the reason for calibrating or doing performance of the system. The gui has
two main parts: the Reason Pull–Down Menu and the Vector Grid:

Reason Pull–Down Menu: This menu lists all possible reasons for calibrating. When starting a calibration or performance the user
simply selects one of these reasons. The calibration workstep will determine all calibration or performance functions required by this
reason. It will fill in the Vector Grid accordingly and then enable the advance to scan button of the X–ray Control GUI.

REASON MEASURE
Select Calibration / Performance
Select Calibration / Performance Reason
See Reason Chart

Required Operations For Selected Reason

Action Calibration Status Seri
BadDetsBaco Scanning
BadDetsWater Next to Scan
BadDetsAir Waiting To Scan
BadDetsAir Waiting To Scan
BadDetsPeg Waiting To Scan
Lateral Waiting To Scan
Centering Waiting To Scan
Lump Waiting To Scan

Continue Old Calibration

Make Selected Vector Next

FIGURE 366 PRIMARY GUI AREA

Philips Medical Systems. Confidential and Proprietary information. Refer to Title Page.
 Vector Grid: The vector grid shows one row for each vector that will be created or SPEC (Scanner Performance, Evaluation, and
Correction) action to be taken. Each row lists the action, an event number, status and the Vector Grid parameters for creating that vector:
KV, MA, etc. The user may (not recommended) start the calibration at any of these rows (vectors or actions) by simply double–clicking
anywhere in that row. The status of each vector, as shown in column three of the vector grid, is very important when problems arise.
You can watch the normal state of progression: Waiting to Scan–>Next to Scan–>Scanning–>Calculating–>Complete
There are other states that may appear FOR A SHORT TIME. Any other vector state which remains for longer than a minute indicates
a problem. In manual mode the states are different.
Measure GUI (Tab 2): The measure gui operates the same as in the scanning workstep and thus will only work when an image is on the
screen and preview is off.
Film GUI (Tab 3): Works the same as the scanning workstep.
Reason Pull Down Menu
REASON DESCRIPTION OF ACTION PERFORMED
Changed_Tube
Changed_Detector_Module
Changed_VFSCCard
Changed_HighVoltgeModule
Changed_Collimator_Module
Changed_Patient_Aperature
Changed/Moved_Motherboard
Changed_XSC
Verify_Gantry
Check_Performance
Center_Phantom
Custom_MTF
Custom_Scan
Clear_BadDetsList
Find_BadDets
Perform_Lateral_Centering
Find_Centering
Find_DAC
Find_Air
Find_MA

Philips Medical Systems. Confidential and Proprietary information. Refer to Title Page.
Find_PilotAir
Find_Flatts
Find_Level
Find_Level2
TouchUp_Air
Perform_MTF
Perform_KVHVL
Perform_LowCon
Perform_CNA
Perform_Uniformity
Perform_SliceThickness
Evaluate_ARDAS
ManBadDets_Baco
ManBadDets_Water
ManBadDets_Air
ManBadDets_Peg
ManPerform_Lateral_Centering
ManFind_Centering
ManFind_DAC
ManFind_Air
ManFind_MA
ManFind_PilotAir
ManFind_FlattsFF
ManFind_LevelFF
ManFind_Level2FF
ManPerform_MTF
ManPerform_KVHVL1
ManPerform_KVHVL2
ManPerform_LowCon
ManPerform_CNABaco
ManPerform_CNAWater
ManPerform_CNAResolver
ManPerform_UniformityFF
ManPerform_SliceThickness

Philips Medical Systems. Confidential and Proprietary information. Refer to Title Page.
SECONDARY GUI AREA
The Secondary Area contains functions considered secondary:
2D View GUI: Works the same as scanning and will only be visible if there is an image on the screen. Some functions only work when
preview is off such as positioning to a new series.
2D

Image Selection
Se:lm: 1:1

VIEW

Zoom: 1.0
Filter:

Window/Level
Custom W: 1000 L: 0

FIGURE 367 SECONDARY GUI

WORKSTEP FLOW AREA

General
DITA Calibrate Configure
Utilities

FIGURE 368 WORKSTEP FLOW AREA GUI

The Workstep Flow area contains the workstep flow buttons. While in the calibration workstep, if calibration is active in any way you will
not be allowed to leave the calibration workstep until all activity has ended.

Philips Medical Systems. Confidential and Proprietary information. Refer to Title Page.
The PREVIEW GUI (Not shown yet) turns previewing of images ON or OFF.
SCANNER CONTROL AREA
Scanner Control

Advance Start Stop Pause

To Scan Scan Scan Scan

Auto Manual

FIGURE 369 SCANNER CONTROL AREA GUI

The Scanner Control area has all scanner control buttons which are described relative to calibration in the next five sections. They include
Advance to Scan, Start Scan, Stop Scan and Pause Scan:

NOTE
The buttons gray out when their meaning is no longer valid for the calibration workstep’s
state. Thus, the pause button is grayed out (inactive) if no reason has been selected.

Advance To Scan: Is enabled once a reason has been asserted and before calibration scanner activity starts. When pressed will
cause the scanner to spin up the rotor and some other preliminary activities which are to be determined.
Start Scan: Actually starts the calibration or performance activity by scanning to collect data. This button is enabled only when we
are ready to scan.

Philips Medical Systems. Confidential and Proprietary information. Refer to Title Page.
 Stop Scanning: Will cause the calibration workstep to stop scanning and stop all math processes, but continues until all queued data
has been consumed. When the math server finishes its calculations, all scanning stops and all plans are stopped the advance to button
is enabled and so is the selection of a new calibration reason.
Pause Scanning: Will cause calibration to stop scanning after the current scan has finished.
Auto/Manual Radio Buttons: If auto is selected calibration proceeds in it’s most automatic mode. That is, minimal operator intervention
is needed. If in the manual mode then the start button must be pressed after each calibration vector action is taken (when a row is
finished in the grid widget).

SCAN STATUS AREA

The Scan Status area shows the status of the Tube heat, tube kV and mA, time elapsed, degree of gantry tilt and the focal spot.
Scan Status

Tube : 10.0%

kV : 0

mA : 0

Time : 0

Tilt : 0

SFOV : Large

FIGURE 370 SCAN STATUS AREA GUI

CALIBRATION / PERFORMANCE PROGRESS

The Calibration / Performance Progress Area indicates the time calibration has been active, an estimate of how much longer it will take,
and the percent complete.

Philips Medical Systems. Confidential and Proprietary information. Refer to Title Page.
NOTE: Errors and pauses will affect the accuracy of this widget.

Cal/Performance Progress

6:29 min 47% 7:18 min

(Time Calibrating) (Time Left)

FIGURE 371 PROGRESS GUI

CALIBRATION MESSAGES
The Calibration Messages area displays operational messages to the user. These messages may help you determine what to do next
or may simply give status.

Hints and Status

Calibrating...watch this status
screen for completion status
or errors.

FIGURE 372 CALIBRATION MESSAGES GUI

DB GUI

Philips Medical Systems. Confidential and Proprietary information. Refer to Title Page.
 Open Incomplete Calibration/Performance Study
STUDY/SELECT STUDY INFORMATION
Study# Scanner Patient Name Date A TY Study Description
First Name:
Last Name:
Sex:
Patient Name:

Comments:

History:
Diagnosis:

Radiologist:
Ref. Phys.:

SEARCH Time:

Entry: NEXT PREVIOUS

FIGURE 373 DB GUI

The DB GUI Appears when you select the “Continue old cal or perf” button in the primary area.
You are responsible for removing the studies created by calibration. Every study created by calibration will have the last name:
CALIBRATION.

CALIBRATION PROCEDURE
Calibrating the AcQSim CT system has been greatly simplified. The Workstep GUIs show most of the information needed to perform a
system calibration. A basic procedure is below:
1. Select a reason from the Primary Area pull–down menu, or select “Continue old Cal or Perf.”
 If an old study DB gui appears on screen or if an old calibration is in the DB and you select “continue”, from the DB area, then
the reason selected will to be the old one.
 If you want manual mode, select it in the Scanner Control area.

Philips Medical Systems. Confidential and Proprietary information. Refer to Title Page.
2. Click on the “Advance to Scan” button in the Scanner Control area.
3. Click on the “Start Scan” button in the Scanner Control area.
 You may have to hit start each time if in manual mode or in lateral centering.
 You may click on “Preview Off“ to use the full features of measure gui.
4. Wait for completion of the calibration sequence, while noting the changing states in the Primary Area vector grid.

AUTOPERFORMANCE

AutoPerfromance is performed in the same manner as Autocalibration, selecting the Performance “Reason” from the REASON tab in the
Primary GUI window. See the Reason Pull Down Menu Display for selections.

Philips Medical Systems. Confidential and Proprietary information. Refer to Title Page.
CONFIGURE
The different CONFIGURE menus for the SCANNER include Camera, Dicom, Network, Options, AcQImage, Boards, and Site
configurations. Refer to Figure 374. UltraZ Diagnostic Workstation Configure follows.

Site Boards Network/Camera AcQImage Options Generic

FIGURE 374 CONFIGURATION SELECTIONS

The following procedures detail each individual configuration, based on Figure 374, going from left to right.

You may click on the buttons in Figure 374 to jump to their respective screens.

Additional information on networking terms can be found in: Understanding IP Addresses, Subnetmasks, and Routing

Philips Medical Systems. Confidential and Proprietary information. Refer to Title Page.
Site: Allows complete SITE configuration.
Site Configuration

Institution Name

Institution Address

Department Name
Station Name
Equipment Manufacturer
Model Name
Equipment Serial Number
Software Version
Spatial Resolution
Image Compression
Last Calibration Date
Last Calibration Time

FIGURE 375 SITE CONFIGURATION

Philips Medical Systems. Confidential and Proprietary information. Refer to Title Page.
Boards: Allows complete system BOARDS configuration.

RECONSTRUCTION BOARD CONFIGURATION

Select Board

Board Type Serial Number Ethernet Address

Delete Board Add Board

Edit Board
CP Serial
GAM Number
DSPAP Ethernet
PROJECTOR Address
Apply

FIGURE 376 BOARDS CONFIGURATION

BOARDS – ETHERNET AND IP ADDRESS CONFIGURATION

There are 3 ethernet networks employed within the product. Refer to Figure 377.

 Private internal ethernet network: Used for communication between boards in the ACQIMAGE CABINET. Configurations may be
necessary.
 Private internal 100 Mbit ethernet network: Used for communication between the ACQIMAGE CABINET and the DISPLAY CONSOLE.
No configuration required.
 Standard ethernet NETWORK PORT on the DISPLAY CONSOLE: Used for network connections to options and external hospital
networks. Configuration is necessary.

Philips Medical Systems. Confidential and Proprietary information. Refer to Title Page.
 NOTE
Refer to the Networking Glossary for assistance with definition of terms.

Systems from the factory will have ethernet addresses already assigned to the AcQImage Cabinet boards. If a board is added or changed
in the field the new ethernet address assigned to the board(s) will need to be entered. Each board is physically labeled with a serial number
and ethernet address. Values are entered in the Configure | Boards option of the Service Application. Refer to Figure 376.

Once the ethernet address(es) has(have) been updated, IP addressing for the board will automatically be generated and loaded into the
configuration file as well. There is no need to establish IP addresses for the boards as they will be assigned according to a predetermined
scheme. Default IP addresses will be assigned to the boards according to the order they are entered in the configuration:

192.168.2.10 – First board

192.168.2.20 – Second board
192.168.2.30 – Third board
192.168.2.40 – Fourth board, etc.
IP ADDRESSING – 100 MB ACQIMAGE / DISPLAYCONSOLE LINK
IP addresses for the 100 MB link are preset to default values by the applications software. The following addresses are assigned and need
not to be changed:

192.168.1.1 DISPLAY CONSOLE 100 MB port,

192.168.1.2 ACQIMAGE CABINET 100MB port

Philips Medical Systems. Confidential and Proprietary information. Refer to Title Page.
 NETWORK #2: ACQSIM CT RDS
PRIVATE
AcQImage NETWORK
cabinet (100 MB TO NETWORK #3:
ACQIMAGE CABINET) EXTERNAL
NETWORK

ETHERNET HUB

LASER
CAMERA
(DICOM)

NETWORK #1:
PRIVATE LI+ FILM
Display Tower SERVER
NETWORK
(ACQIMAGE
BOARDS)
Internal
hub

LASER
CAMERA
(NON–DICOM)

FIGURE 377 EXAMPLE OF PRODUCT’S THREE ETHERNET NETWORKS

Philips Medical Systems. Confidential and Proprietary information. Refer to Title Page.
NETWORK PORT CONFIGURATION

If there are any Picker option (network) devices or hospital network connections in the installation then configuration of the ethernet
NETWORK PORT will be necessary. The NETWORK PORT is not configured as shipped from the factory. Each installation is unique and
must be done on site. It will be necessary to enter IP address information as well as other parameters for the local DISPLAY CONSOLE
and other devices connected to it via the network. This section refers to configuration details for the DISPLAY CONSOLE (and will also
work for the UltraZ Diagnostic Workstation ) . As a rule all other devices connected on the network will need to be configured locally on their
own as well. Refer to individual installation manuals and instructions for these specific devices (e.g. UltraZ Diagnostic Workstation, Voxel–Q,
Li +, Dicom Camera, etc.).

Values are entered in the Configure | Network/Camera option of the Service Application.

The Network/Camera Configure Option consists of Local Parameters and Other Devices tabs:

Philips Medical Systems. Confidential and Proprietary information. Refer to Title Page.
Network/Camera (Local Parameters): Allows complete local Network configuration:

Network Configuration for this Computer

These parameters define how
Host Name: other computes in the network
IP Address: communicate with this computer.
Aliases: The name and address fields are the
name and address of this computer
on the network.
Net Mask: To configure names and addresses of
Default Router: other computers, use the ’General
Network’ tab.
Camera Configuration for this Computer
These parameters are used when
Application Entity Title: communicating with cameras.
The Application Entity Title is the
Connection Timer (secs): name of this computer when
communicating with DICOM
Packet Timer (secs): cameras.
To configure DICOM or NFP cameras,
use the ’Camera Specific’ tab.
DICOM Configuration for this Computer
These parameters define the defaults
Application Entity Title: used by the DICOM software.
PORT: The Application Entity Title is the
Inter PDU Timer (secs.): name of this computer when
Connection Timer (secs.): communicating with DICOM
Idle Timer (secs.): cameras.
To configure DICOM devices,
Maximum PDU Length:
use the ’DICOM Specific’ tab.

FIGURE 378 NETWORK/CAMERA (LOCAL PARAMETERS)

LOCAL PARAMETERS

LOCAL PARAMETERS consists of three subsets, Network Configuration for this Computer, Camera Configuration for this Computer and
DICOM Configuration for this Computer. Refer to Figure 378.

Network Configuration for this Computer

Host Name: Used by other devices on the network to communicate with the DISPLAY CONSOLE. Examples of names might
be st.mary1, oncology2, picker2077, etc. Names must be limited to 16 characters or less.

Philips Medical Systems. Confidential and Proprietary information. Refer to Title Page.
IP Address: Associated with the Host Name. This will be the address through which the DISPLAY CONSOLE will
communicate with network devices. If the scanner system and it’s networked options are contained within a
closed system and not connected to any outside hospital network, then you may choose a suitable IP address.
You must choose an address that conforms with standard networking conventions (refer to NETWORK
ADDRESSING CONVENTIONS for assistance). If the network is not connected as a closed local network, then
you should consult the hospital network administrator or a field service networking specialist for assistance on
the assignment of the IP address.

Aliases: Any alternate names assigned to this host name are entered here. In general no aliases are required.

Net Mask: A default value of 255.255.255.0 may be entered in case you have a closed network. **You must consult the
network administrator or field service networking specialist for information on setting this value if you are
connected to a hospital network.

Default Route: Consult the network administrator or field service networking specialist first for information on setting this value
if you are not part of a closed system. For a closed system, the default route should be a valid address for the
subnet that is not assigned to any device. A default value equal to the first three fields of the IP address (subnet
ID) followed by a 1 in the fourth field would be a good default for a simple closed network. This assumes there
is no 1 device on the net. For example, a good default route value for the 192.168.10.xx subnet would be
192.168.10.1 (refer to NETWORK ADDRESSING CONVENTIONS for assistance).
Camera Configuration for this Computer
This box supplies configuration information for DICOM camera print support supplied by this computer. In the box accept the default timer
values. These should not be changed unless instructed to do otherwise by a field specialist. The default title that appears for the Application
Entity Title is OK as long as there are no other DICOM devices on the net with the same title. This title represents a logical association with
the DICOM process on this computer that supports the camera function. The name chosen for this title is arbitrary in some sense but should
be indicative of it’s functionality for informational purposes. If you rename the title be advised that each Application Entity Title for a device
on the net should be set to a unique, 16 character maximum name.

Philips Medical Systems. Confidential and Proprietary information. Refer to Title Page.
DICOM Configuration for this Computer

This box supplies configuration information for DICOM storage support supplied by this computer. In the box entitled DICOM Configuration
for this Computer, accept the default timer, port, and PDU Length values. These should not be changed unless instructed to do otherwise
by a field specialist. The default title that appears for the Application Entity Title is OK as long as there are no other DICOM devices on the
net with the same title. This title represents a logical association with the DICOM process on this computer that supports the storage
function. The name chosen for this title is arbitrary in some sense but should be indicative of it’s functionality for informational purposes.
If you rename the title be advised that each Application Entity Title for a device on the net should be set to a unique, 16 character maximum
name.

Network Devices
Device Name Type IP Address Description DICOM App. Title
console1 Other xx.xx.xx.xx

Add Modify Selected Delete Selected

Device Device Device
PL0077

FIGURE 379 NETWORK/CAMERA (OTHER DEVICES)

Philips Medical Systems. Confidential and Proprietary information. Refer to Title Page.
OTHER DEVICES
In order that the DISPLAY CONSOLE properly recognize and communicate with other devices on the network it is necessary to provide
configuration information on those devices. Selecting the Other Devices tab displays the screen summary context seen in Figure 379.

OTHER DEVICES consists of three subsets, Device Type, Network Device Configuration and either DICOM Device Configuration. or
Camera Device Configuration. This screen (Figure 380) appears when you choose to Add, Modify or Delete a device from the summary
context screen (Figure 379).
Device Type
Select the type of device to which you will be making changes (RDS/Scanner, Voxel Q, DICOM Network, DICOM Camera, LI+ Camera or
other). The box just below the Network Device Configuration box will change according to the device selected. For example, if you selected
RDS, then fill in as follows:
Network Device Configuration
Device Name: This must match the name given to the RDS in it’s own configuration procedure for the device to be recognized.

IP Address: Must match IP address assigned to the RDS in it’s own configuration procedure.

Device Description: This is the name which you wish the user of the Display Console to see and use when referencing this remote
network device. Examples might be rds_plus, rds_office, etc.

Aliases: Alias names assigned to the RDS. In general, no aliases are required.

If a DICOM device is selected, you will need to supply additional information in the DICOM Device Configuration box. If this is a camera
or Li+ you will also need to supply additional information.

NOTE
Figure 380 shows the DICOM Device Configuration when RDS/Scanner, Voxel Q or DI-
COM Net device types are selected.
Figure 381 shows the Camera Device Configuration when DICOM Cameras or LI+ de-
vice types are are selected. When “other” is selected, a configuration box does not ap-
pear.

Philips Medical Systems. Confidential and Proprietary information. Refer to Title Page.
DICOM Device Configuration
In this box accept the default values if given. These should not be changed unless you are proficient in setting the values or are instructed
to do otherwise by a field specialist. The one exception to this is the Port field. It must be configured to match what the Port value that the
remote box has configured for itself. It will almost always be Port 104, but it can be changed. Refer to Figure 380.

Also it will be necessary to supply an Application Entity Title. This title represents a logical association with the process on that remote box
that supports that particular DICOM function. The Application Entity Title needs to match the title that was configured on the remote box
always (in this example the remote box being the RDS/Scanner).

When completed, select Apply Changes and the entry will be loaded.

Select Done and a summary context screen of Network Devices will be displayed again after a valid transaction has been completed. At
that point you repeat this process for configuration information on additional devices (Voxel Q, DICOM Camera , etc.) until completed.

Philips Medical Systems. Confidential and Proprietary information. Refer to Title Page.
 DEVICE TYPE

RDS/Scanner Voxel Q DICOM Net DICOM LI + Camera OTHER

Camera
Network Device Configuration

Device Name: IP Address:

Device Description: Aliases:

DICOM Device Configuration

Application Entity Title: Port:

Max Time Between PDUs: Connection Wait Time:

Maximum PDU Length: Idle Wait Time:

Insert Length To End Fields

Reset To Defaults

Apply Changes Cancel Changes Done

PL0075

FIGURE 380 NETWORK/CAMERA, (DICOM DEVICE TYPE)

Philips Medical Systems. Confidential and Proprietary information. Refer to Title Page.
Camera Device Configuration
Follow a similar approach as the DICOM Device Configuration example to supply the information required. In addition, you must select a
camera type by clicking, scrolling and selecting from the list. Refer to Figure 381. For the Li+ camera accept all default information unless
you are proficient in setting the values or are instructed to do otherwise by a field specialist. In either case, remember to enter a valid
Application Entity Title as previously discussed.

NOTE
Application Entity Title is NOT required for the LI Plus Film Server.

Other
For other devices that do not fall into the previous categories, complete a Network Device Configuration page from the Other device types
for each device. Refer to Figure 382.

NOTE
If there are multiple devices of the same type on the network that perform similar func-
tions, then each of those devices must be assigned a unique Application Entity Title.
For example, if there were two unique UltraZ Diagnostic Workstation workstations on
the network each would need a unique identifier. As an example if the first one had the
title DICOM_STORAGE then the second one would need to be alternately named DI-
COM_STORAGE2 or STORAGE2 or something unique. In this case, you need to add
each device separately and complete a separate configuration screen for each device.

Philips Medical Systems. Confidential and Proprietary information. Refer to Title Page.
 DEVICE TYPE

RDS/Scanner Voxel Q DICOM Net DICOM Camera LI + Camera Other

Network Device Configuration

Device Name: IP Address:

Device Description: Aliases:

Camera Device Configuration

Application Entity Title: Port:

Print Timer Time Out:

Camera Type:

Read Timer Time Out:

Connection Test Level:

DICOM Print job SOP Class Supported Concurrent Connects:

Reset To Defaults

Apply Changes Cancel Changes Done

FIGURE 381 NETWORK/CAMERA, ADD DEVICE (CAMERA DEVICE TYPE)

Philips Medical Systems. Confidential and Proprietary information. Refer to Title Page.
 Device Type

RDS/Scanner Voxel Q DICOM DICOM Camera LI + Camera Other

Net
Network Device Configuration

Device Name: IP Address:

Device Description: Aliases:

Apply Changes Cancel Changes Done

FIGURE 382 NETWORK/CAMERA, ADD DEVICE (OTHER DEVICE TYPE)

NETWORK ADDRESSING CONVENTIONS

As shown in Figure 383, the AcQSim CT product requires IP network addresses to be configured for the Display console as well as the
networked components of an AcQSim CT system.

In the example shown the display tower needs connected to a RDS, a DICOM laser camera, and a Li Plus server connected to a non DICOM
camera.

Philips Medical Systems. Confidential and Proprietary information. Refer to Title Page.
 ACQSIM CT
RDS
IP ADDRESS =
X.Y.Z.3

ETHERNET
HUB

LASER CAMERA LASER CAMERA

(DICOM) (NON–DICOM)

IP ADDRESS = X.Y.Z.4
ACQSIM CT
OPERATOR
CONSOLE
LI+ FILM
UTP CABLE SERVER

IP ADDRESS = IP ADDRESS =
X.Y.Z.1 X.Y.Z.2

FIGURE 383 AcQSim CT “CLOSED” NETWORK CONFIGURATION

Philips Medical Systems. Confidential and Proprietary information. Refer to Title Page.
In the example the IP addresses are labeled X.Y.Z.# to indicate that the first three digits of the IP address for each component must be the
same when on a closed network. X, Y, and Z can be almost any numbers (See next section).

Figure 383 shows a closed network of only AcQSim CT components and related items. Figure 384 shows a AcQSim CT network connected
to another network.

ACQSIM CT
RDS

IP ADDRESS =
X.Y.Z.3

ETHERNET
HUB
IP ADDRESS= X.Y.Z.1
ROUTER
IP ADDRESS= X.Y.A.1

LASER CAMERA
(DICOM) LASER CAMERA
(NON–DICOM)

IP ADDRESS= X.Y.A.2
ACQSIM CT
OPERATOR
CONSOLE

LI+ FILM
UTP CABLE SERVER

IP ADDRESS = X.Y.Z.4 IP ADDRESS = X.Y.Z.2

FIGURE 384 AcQSim CT CONNECTED TO ANOTHER NETWORK

Philips Medical Systems. Confidential and Proprietary information. Refer to Title Page.
In this example (Figure 384) the DICOM laser camera is connected to the X.Y.A network while the AcQSim CT system (and components)
is connected to the X.Y.Z network. This example shows the use of a router to connect the two network segments together.

PICKING IP ADDRESSES

If a AcQSim CT system is connected to an external network as shown in the second example, a network administrator or other hospital
personnel must provide the IP addresses.

If a AcQSim CT system is connected as closed network, as shown in the first example, and the hospital does not know or care what the
IP addresses are, then any IP addresses can be used. The only stipulation is that the address of each node must have the same network
ID.
Understanding IP Addresses, Subnetmasks, and Routing
Every node on a TCP/IP network is identified by a unique IP address. This address is used to identify a host on a network; it also specifies
routing information on the network. The IP address identifies a computer 32–bit address that is unique across a TCP/IP network. An address
is usually represented in dotted decimal notation, which depicts each octet (eight bits, or one byte) of an IP address as its decimal value
and separates each octet with a period. For example: 138.238.128.28

NOTE
It is important to note that since an IP address identifies a node on a particular network,
each node on the network must be assigned a unique IP address valid for its particular
network. Therefore if a machine was assigned an IP address in the 138.238.135 subnet
and is subsequently moved into the 138.238.128 subnet, a different IP address must
be assigned.

Network ID and Host ID

The IP address contains two pieces of information: the network ID and the host ID for the individual computer.

The network ID identifies a group of computers and other devices that are all located on the same logical network.

The host ID identifies an individual computer within a particular network ID.

Philips Medical Systems. Confidential and Proprietary information. Refer to Title Page.
IP Address Classes
The Internet community has defined address classes to accommodate networks of varying sizes. Each network class can be discerned
from the first octet of its IP address.

The table below shows the relationship between the first octet of a given address and its network ID and host ID fields. It also identifies
the total number of network ID’s and hosts ID’s for each address class in the Internet addressing scheme. In the table a.b.c.d is used to
designate the bytes of the IP address.

Class Available Available

Class Network ID Host ID
Values Networks Hosts/Nets
A 1–126 a b.c.d 126 16,777,214
B 128–191 a.b. c.d 16, 384 65, 534
C 192–223 a.b.c d 2,097,151 254

Note that the network addresses 0 and 127 are reserved. Addresses 224 and above are reserved for special protocols and cannot be used
as network addresses.

Philips Medical Systems. Confidential and Proprietary information. Refer to Title Page.
Subnetting
CLASS A SUBNETTING

A class A address could be diagramed as:

Network Host
+ –––––– + + –––––––––––––––––––––– +
| | | |
[0xxxxxxx][xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx]

which shows the eight network bits followed by the 24 host bits.

In practice, people don’t really attach 16 million hosts to a network so administrators of a Class A site often divide the host address portion
into a (sub)network and host portion. (Subnetting is now supported by most operating systems.) Each Class A network number can support
up to 65,534 subnets (network numbers 0.0 and 255.255 are reserved) with each having 254 hosts (host numbers 0 and 255 are reserved).
This is done by using the 16 high –order bits of the host portion for the subnet number and the lower eight bits for the host as diagramed
below.
Network Subnet Host
+ –––––– + + –––––––––––––– + + –––––– +
| | | | | |

[0xxxxxxx][xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx][xxxxxxxx]

Philips Medical Systems. Confidential and Proprietary information. Refer to Title Page.
CLASS B SUBNETTING

The first two bits of a Class B address are 1 and 0, the next fourteen bits identify the network and the last sixteen the host, as diagramed:
Network Host
+ –––––––––––––– + + –––––––––––––– +
| | | |
[10xxxxxxxxxxxxxx][xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx]

As with the Class A address, we can divide the host portion of a Class B address into subnet and host parts. For instance, let’s split our
Class B network number on the byte boundary, that is, the eight MSB’s of the host portion identifies the subnet and the remaining bits the
host, as diagramed:
Network Subnet Host
+ –––––––––––––– + + –––––– + + –––––– +
| | | | | |
[10xxxxxxxxxxxxxx][xxxxxxxx][xxxxxxxx]

This arrangement allows 254 subnets (0,255 reserved) each with 254 hosts (0,255 reserved).

Philips Medical Systems. Confidential and Proprietary information. Refer to Title Page.
CLASS C SUBNETTING

The first three bits of a Class C address are 1, 1, and 0, the next 21 bits identify the network and the last eight the host, as diagramed:
Network Host
+ –––––––––––––––––––––– + + –––––– +
| | | |
[110xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx][xxxxxxxx]

Class C networks can be subnetted by using 2 bits of the host address as the subnetwork with 6 bits left for host addresses as diagramed:
Network Subnet Host
+ –––––––––––––––––––––– + ++ + –––– +
| | || | |
[110xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx] [xx] [xxxxxx]

This arrangement allows 2 subnets (0,4 reserved) each with 62 hosts (0,63 reserved)

Philips Medical Systems. Confidential and Proprietary information. Refer to Title Page.
SUBNET MASKS

Subnet masks are 32–bit values that allow the recipient of packets to distinguish the network ID portion of the IP address from the host
ID. Like an IP address, the value of a subnet mask is frequently represented in dotted decimal notation.

A subnet mask (or number) is used to determine the number of bits used for the subnet and host portions of the address. The mask is a
32–bit value that uses one–bits for the network and subnet portions and zero–bits for the host portion. For example, below is a Class B
address of 191.70.55.130 and apply some different subnet masks. A bitwise logical AND operation is performed between the IP address
and the subnet mask as shown:

Here we use a mask that retains the default 16 network and host bits for a Class B address:
191 70 55 130

1011 1111 1000 0110 0011 0111 1000 0010 IP address

1111 1111 1111 1111 0000 0000 0000 0000 Subnet mask

1011 1111 1000 0110 0000 0000 0000 0000 Result

191 70 0 0

Philips Medical Systems. Confidential and Proprietary information. Refer to Title Page.
Employed here is a mask that divides the host portion into a subnet and host that are each eight bits wide:
191 70 55 130

1011 1111 1000 0110 0011 0111 1000 0010 IP address

1111 1111 1111 1111 1111 1111 0000 0000 Subnet mask

1011 1111 1000 0110 0011 0111 0000 0000 Result

191 70 55 0

This division allows 254 (256–2 reserved) subnets, each with 254 hosts. This division on a byte boundary makes it easy to determine the
subnet and host from the dotted–decimal IP address.

The subnet–host boundary, however, can be at any bit position in the host portion of the IP address. Here, we use a mask that allows more
subnets (512–2 reserved), but with the trade–off of fewer hosts (128–2) per subnet:
191 70 55 130

1011 1111 1000 0110 0011 0111 1000 0010 IP address

1111 1111 1111 1111 1111 1111 1000 0000 Subnet mask

1011 1111 1000 0110 0011 0111 1000 0000 Result

191 70 55 128

Philips Medical Systems. Confidential and Proprietary information. Refer to Title Page.
The table below shows default subnet masks for standard IP classes:

Address
Default Bits for Subnet Mask Subnet Mask
Class
Class A 11111111 00000000 00000000 00000000 255.0.0.0
Class B 11111111 11111111 00000000 00000000 255.255.0.0
Class C 11111111 11111111 11111111 00000000 255.255.255.0

NOTE
Not all devices support masking to any bit. Some require that the subnet mask be on
byte boundaries only as shown above.

Philips Medical Systems. Confidential and Proprietary information. Refer to Title Page.
The subnet–host number tradeoff

Here’s a table that let’s you see at a glance the trade off between the number of subnets and hosts with different subnet masks for both
Class B and Class C addresses. We’ve already subtracted two from the results in the last two columns to take the reserved network and
host numbers into account:

Class B Subnetting:
# Mask Bits Subnet Mask # Subnets # Hosts

2 255.255.192.0 2 16382
3 255.255.224.0 6 8190
4 255.255.240.0 14 4094
5 255.255.248.0 30 2046
6 255.255.252.0 62 1022
7 255.255.254.0 126 510
8 255.255.255.0 254 254
9 255.255.255.128 510 126
10 255.255.255.192 1022 62
11 255.255.255.224 2046 30
12 255.255.255.240 4094 14
13 255.255.255.248 8190 6
14 255.255.255.252 16382 2

Philips Medical Systems. Confidential and Proprietary information. Refer to Title Page.
Class C Subnetting:
# Mask Bits Subnet Mask # Subnets # Hosts

2 255.255.255.192 2 62
3 255.255.255.224 6 30
4 255.255.255.240 14 14
5 255.255.255.248 30 6
6 255.255.255.252 62 2

Routing

The most common implementation of subnetting is placing routers between the subnets. Routers are physical pieces of equipment that
connect two or more subnetworks.

A router will have two or more ethernet connections (1 connection per subnetwork) and provides the ability to route network packets to the
appropriate subnetwork.

In example 2, the router has connections to the subnetworks X.Y.Z and X.Y.A The router has an IP address of X.Y.Z.1 for connecting to
the X.Y.Z subnetwork as well as and IP address of X.Y.A.1 for connection for the X.Y.A network.

If the AcQSim CT display console sends images to the RDS all of the data is contained in the X.Y.Z network. The router is not used. If the
display console sends images to the DICOM camera then the router is used. The router uses the IP address and subnetmask to determine
where to forward the network packets.

Philips Medical Systems. Confidential and Proprietary information. Refer to Title Page.
What’s It All Mean?

When installing a AcQSim CT system in a closed network environment and the site does not have a specific IP address required, use a
class C address. Do not use .0 or .255 in any of your addressing schemes as they are reserved for special functions. A closed network
in this case is one in which the UltraZ and peripherals like camera, UDW, etc are only connected to each other (i.e., no connections exist
to the hospital or outside network.)

You should use the following scheme for a closed system:

IP Address Device

192.168.10.10 Display Console (Scanner)

192.168.10.20 RDS +
192.168.10.30 DICOM Camera
192.168.10.40 Li + Server

and so on

NOTE
The 192.168.XX.XX IP address range is a universally accepted standard for closed net-
works.

Please note that if the site at a later date wants the equipment connected to a another network, the IP addresses must be changed.

The hospital must provide the IP addresses to use for the AcQSim CT components when connecting the scanner to external networks.

WARNING
Never use the IP addresses 144.54.xx.xx as network addresses as they are reserved
for in–house Picker/Philips networks. Use of these addresses could cause serious
network conflicts

Philips Medical Systems. Confidential and Proprietary information. Refer to Title Page.
CONFIGURE – ACQSIM CT DIAGNOSTIC WORKSTATION
The different CONFIGURE menus for the AcQSim CT Diagnostic Workstation include Site, Network/Camera, Options and Generic
configurations. Refer to Figure 385.

Site Network/Camera Options Generic

FIGURE 385 CONFIGURATION SELECTIONS

The following procedures detail each individual configuration, based on Figure 385, going from left to right. ** Only SITE and
Network/Camera and Options are pertinent for UltraZ Diagnostic Workstation.

You may click on the buttons in Figure 385 to jump to their respective screens.

Philips Medical Systems. Confidential and Proprietary information. Refer to Title Page.
Site: Allows complete SITE configuration.
Site Configuration

Institution Name

Institution Address

Department Name
Station Name

Equipment Manufacturer
Model Name
Equipment Serial Number
Software Version
Spatial Resolution
Image Compression

Last Calibration Date

Last Calibration Time

FIGURE 386 SITE CONFIGURATION

Philips Medical Systems. Confidential and Proprietary information. Refer to Title Page.
ACQSIM CT DIAGNOS-
TIC WORKSTATION
ETHERNET
HUB

LASER CAMERA
(DICOM)

DISPLAY
TOWER

LI+ FILM
SERVER
LASER
CAMERA
(NON–DICOM)

FIGURE 387 EXAMPLE OF ETHERNET NETWORK WITH UltraZ Diagnostic Workstation

Philips Medical Systems. Confidential and Proprietary information. Refer to Title Page.
NETWORK PORT CONFIGURATION

The UltraZ Diagnostic Workstation is a networked device and configuration must be performed for it to properly communicate with other
network devices. Refer to Figure 387 for an example. The NETWORK PORT is not configured as shipped from the factory. Each installation
is unique and must be done on site. It will be necessary to enter IP address information as well as other parameters for the UltraZ
Diagnostic Workstation and other devices connected to it via the network. This section refers to configuration details for the UltraZ
Diagnostic Workstation. As a rule, all other devices connected on the network will need to be configured locally on their own as well. Refer
to individual installation manuals and instructions for these specific devices (e.g. scanner, other UltraZ Diagnostic Workstation, Voxel–Q,
Li +, Dicom Camera, etc.).

Values are entered in the Configure | Network/Camera option of the Service Application.

The Network/Camera Configure Option consists of Local Parameters and Other Devices tabs:

NOTE
Refer to the Networking Glossary for assistance with definition of terms.

Philips Medical Systems. Confidential and Proprietary information. Refer to Title Page.
Network/Camera (Local Parameters): Allows complete local Network configuration:

Network Configuration for this Computer

Host Name: These parameters define how other computes

in the network communicate with this computer.
IP Address:
The name and address fields are the name and address of this
Aliases:
computer on the network.

Net Mask: To configure names and addresses of other computers, use the
’General Network’ tab.
Default Router:

Camera Configuration for this Computer

These parameters are used when communicating

Application Entity Title: with cameras.
The Application Entity Title is the name of this
Connection Timer (secs): computer when communicating with DICOM cameras.

To configure DICOM or NFP cameras, use the

Packet Timer (secs): ’Camera Specific’ tab.

DICOM Configuration for this Computer

Application Entity Title:
These parameters define the defaults used by the
PORT: DICOM software.
Inter PDU Timer secs: The Application Entity Title is the name of this computer
when communicating with DICOM cameras.
Connection Timer secs:
Idle Timer (secs.): To configure DICOM devices, use the ’DICOM
Maximum PDU Length: Specific’ tab.

FIGURE 388 NETWORK/CAMERA (LOCAL PARAMETERS)

Philips Medical Systems. Confidential and Proprietary information. Refer to Title Page.
LOCAL PARAMETERS
LOCAL PARAMETERS consists of three subsets, Network Configuration for this Computer, Camera Configuration for this Computer and
DICOM Configuration for this Computer. Refer to Figure 388.
Network Configuration for this Computer
Host Name: Used by other devices on the network to communicate with the UltraZ Diagnostic Workstation. Examples of
names might be st.mary1, oncology2, picker2077, etc. Names must be limited to 16 characters or less.
IP Address: Associated with the Host Name. This will be the address through which the UltraZ Diagnostic Workstation will
communicate with network devices. If the UltraZ Diagnostic Workstation and networked devices are contained
within a closed system and not connected to any outside hospital network, then you may choose a suitable IP
address. You must choose an address that conforms with standard networking conventions (refer to NETWORK
ADDRESSING CONVENTIONS for assistance). If the network is not connected as a closed local network, then
you should consult the hospital network administrator or a field service networking specialist for assistance on
the assignment of the IP address.
Aliases: Any alternate names assigned to this host name are entered here. In general no aliases are required.
Net Mask: A default value of 255.255.255.0 may be entered in case you have a closed network. **You must consult the
network administrator or field service networking specialist for information on setting this value if you are
connected to a hospital network.
Default Route: Consult the network administrator or field service networking specialist first for information on setting this value
if you are not part of a closed system. For a closed system, the default route should be a valid address for the
subnet that is not assigned to any device. A default value equal to the first three fields of the IP address (subnet
ID) followed by a 1 in the fourth field would be a good default for a simple closed network. This assumes there
is no 1 device on the net. For example, a good default route value for the 192.168.10.xx subnet would be
192.168.10.1 (refer to NETWORK ADDRESSING CONVENTIONS for assistance).
Camera Configuration for this Computer
This box supplies configuration information for DICOM camera print support supplied by this computer. In the box accept the default timer
values. These should not be changed unless instructed to do otherwise by a field specialist. The default title that appears for the Application
Entity Title is OK as long as there are no other DICOM devices on the net with the same title. This title represents a logical association with
the DICOM process on this computer that supports the camera function. The name chosen for this title is arbitrary in some sense but should
be indicative of it’s functionality for informational purposes. If you rename the title be advised that each Application Entity Title for a device
on the net should be set to a unique, 16 character maximum name.

Philips Medical Systems. Confidential and Proprietary information. Refer to Title Page.
DICOM Configuration for this Computer

This box supplies configuration information for DICOM storage support supplied by this computer. In the box entitled DICOM Configuration
for this Computer, accept the default timer, port, and PDU Length values. These should not be changed unless instructed to do otherwise
by a field specialist. The default title that appears for the Application Entity Title is OK as long as there are no other DICOM devices on the
net with the same title. This title represents a logical association with the DICOM process on this computer that supports the storage
function. The name chosen for this title is arbitrary in some sense but should be indicative of it’s functionality for informational purposes.
If you rename the title be advised that each Application Entity Title for a device on the net should be set to a unique, 16 character maximum
name.

Network Devices
Device Name Type IP ADDRESS Description DICOM App. Title
console1 Other xx.xx.xx.xx

Add Modify Selected Delete Selected

Device Device Device
PL0077

FIGURE 389 NETWORK/CAMERA (OTHER DEVICES)

Philips Medical Systems. Confidential and Proprietary information. Refer to Title Page.
OTHER DEVICES
In order that the UltraZ Diagnostic Workstation properly recognize and communicate with other devices on the network it is necessary to
provide configuration information on those devices. Selecting the Other Devices tab displays the screen summary context seen in
Figure 379.

OTHER DEVICES consists of three subsets, Device Type, Network Device Configuration and either DICOM Device Configuration. or
Camera Device Configuration. This screen (Figure 390) appears when you choose to Add, Modify or Delete a device from the summary
context screen (Figure 389).
Device Type
Select the type on which you will be making changes (RDS/Scanner, Voxel Q, DICOM Network, DICOM Camera, LI+ Camera, other). The
box just below the Network Device Configuration box will change according to the device selected, e.g., if you selected RDS/Scanner (for
the scanner), then fill in as follows:
Network Device Configuration
Device Name: This must match the name given to the scanner in it’s own configuration procedure for the device to be
recognized.

IP Address: Must match IP address assigned to the scanner in it’s configuration procedure.

Device Description: This is the name which you wish the user of the UltraZ Diagnostic Workstation to see and use when referencing
this remote network device. Examples might be scanner, scanner_oncology, etc.

Aliases: Alias names assigned to the scanner. In general, no aliases are required.

If a DICOM device is selected, you will need to supply additional information in the DICOM Device Configuration box. If this is a camera
or Li+ you will also need to supply additional information.

NOTE
Figure 390 shows the DICOM Device Configuration when RDS/Scanner, Voxel Q or DI-
COM Net device types are selected.
Figure 391 shows the Camera Device Configuration when DICOM Cameras or LI+ de-
vice types are are selected. When “other” is selected, a configuration box does not ap-
pear.

Philips Medical Systems. Confidential and Proprietary information. Refer to Title Page.
DICOM Device Configuration
In this box accept the default values if given. These should not be changed unless you are proficient in setting the values or are instructed
to do otherwise by a field specialist. The one exception to this is the Port field. It must be configured to match what the Port value that the
remote box has configured for itself. It will almost always be Port 104, but it can be changed. Refer to Figure 390.

It will be necessary to supply an Application Entity Title. This title represents a logical association with the process on that remote box that
supports that particular DICOM function. The Application Entity Title needs to match the title that was configured on the remote box (in this
example, the remote box being the scanner).

When completed, select Apply Changes and the entry will be loaded.

Select Done and a summary context screen of Network Devices will be displayed again after a valid transaction has been completed. At
that point you repeat this process for configuration information on additional devices (Voxel Q, DICOM Camera , etc.) until completed.

Philips Medical Systems. Confidential and Proprietary information. Refer to Title Page.
 Device Type

RDS/Scanner Voxel Q DICOM Net DICOM LI + Camera Other

Camera
Network Device Configuration

Device Name: IP Address:

Device Description: Aliases:

DICOM Device Configuration

Application Entity Title: Port:

Max Time Between PDUs: Connection Wait Time:

Maximum PDU Length: Idle Wait Time:

Insert Length To End Fields

Reset To Defaults

Apply Changes Cancel Changes Done

FIGURE 390 NETWORK/CAMERA, ADD DEVICE (DICOM DEVICE TYPE)

Camera Device Configuration
Follow a similar approach as the DICOM Device Configuration example to supply the information required. In addition, you must select a
camera type by clicking, scrolling and selecting from the list. Refer to Figure 391. For the Li+ camera accept all default information unless
you are proficient in setting the values or are instructed to do otherwise by a field specialist. In either case, remember to enter a valid
Application Entity Title as previously discussed.

Other
For other devices that do not fall into the previous categories, complete a Network Device Configuration page from the Other device types
for each device. Refer to Figure 392.

Philips Medical Systems. Confidential and Proprietary information. Refer to Title Page.
 NOTE
If there are multiple devices on the network, then each of those devices must be as-
signed a unique Application Entity Title. For example, if there were two unique UltraZ
Diagnostic Workstation workstations on the network each would need a unique identifi-
er. As an example if the first one had the title DICOM_STORAGE then the second one
would need to be alternately named DICOM_STORAGE2 or STORAGE2 or something
unique. In this case, you need to add each device separately and complete a separate
configuration screen for each device.

DEVICE TYPE

RDS/Scanner Voxel Q DICOM DICOM Camera LI + Camera Other

Net
Network Device Configuration

Device Name: IP Address:

Device Description: Aliases:

Camera Device Configuration

Application Entity Title: PORT:

Print Timer Time Out:

Camera Type:

Read Timer Time Out:

Connection Test Level:

DICOM Print job SOP Class Supported Concurrent Connects:

Reset To Defaults

Apply Changes Cancel Changes Done

FIGURE 391 NETWORK/CAMERA, ADD DEVICE (CAMERA DEVICE TYPE)

Philips Medical Systems. Confidential and Proprietary information. Refer to Title Page.
 DEVICE TYPE

RDS/Scanner Voxel Q DICOM DICOM Camera LI + Camera Other

Net
Network Device Configuration

Device Name: IP Address:

Device Description: Aliases:

Apply Changes Cancel Changes Done

FIGURE 392 NETWORK/CAMERA, ADD DEVICE (OTHER DEVICE TYPE)

Philips Medical Systems. Confidential and Proprietary information. Refer to Title Page.
NETWORKING GLOSSARY

10Base–2 a transmission medium specified by IEEE 802.3 that carries information at rates up to 10Mbps in baseband form
using low–cost coaxial cable over distances up to 185 meters (607 ft). Also called thin Ethernet, thinnet, thin
coax, or cheapernet.

10Base–5 a transmission medium specified by IEEE 802.3 that carries information at rates up to 10Mbps in baseband form
using 50 ohm coaxial cable over distances up to 500 meters (1,640 ft). Also called thick Ethernet or thicknet
or thick coax, the cable is commonly referred to as yellow cable. Thick Ethernet cable is typically used as a trunk
or backbone path of the network.

10Base–FL IEEE 802.3 Fiber Optic Ethernet. A fiber optic standard that allows up to 2,000 meters (6,560 ft.) of multimode
duplex fiber optic cable in a point–to–point link.

10Base–T a transmission medium specified by IEEE 802.3 that carries information at rates up to 10Mbps in baseband form
using twisted pair conductors. Also called unshielded twisted pair (UTP) wire. Using low cost Level 3 or better
UTP wiring, 100 meters (328 ft.) of point–to–point link segments are possible. Uses RJ45 connectors and
sometimes 50–pin AMP connectors to a patch panel.

100Base–TX A particular alternative within the 100Base–TX CSMA/CD proposals before the IEEE 802.3 for a 100 Mb/s
Ethernet that specifies two pair of UTP5.

100Base–T A generic name for 100 Mb/s twisted pair CSMA/CD proposals before the IEEE 802.3. Specific proposals
include 100Base–Tx and 00Base–T4.

Address a number uniquely identifying each node in a network.

ARP (Address Resolution Protocol) that dynamically maps Internet addresses to physical
(hardware) addresses on a LAN.

ATM (Asynchronous Transfer Mode) a new type of cell switching technology which uses fixed–length packets to
transmit data from source to destination. ATM uses fixed–length 53–byte cell–switching to transmit data, voice
and video over both LANs and WANs. Also referred to as BISDN and Cell Relay.

Philips Medical Systems. Confidential and Proprietary information. Refer to Title Page.
AUI (Attachment Unit Interface) the branch cable interface located between a MAU (transceiver) and a DTE
(typically a workstation). Includes a 15–pin D–sub connector and sometimes a 15–conductor twisted pair cable.
Maximum length is 50 meters (164 ft.).

Backbone any network considered to provide interconnection among subnetworks.

Bridge a LAN interconnection device used to link two or more local or remote LANs. Bridges are used extensively in
LAN systems to extend their physical dimensions or modify their performance. C

Collision an unwanted condition in which two packets are being transmitted over a medium at the same time, resulting
in destruction of the data.

CSMA (Carrier Sense Multiple Access)

A station wishing to transmit first senses the medium and transmits only if the medium is idle.

CSMA/CD (Carrier Sense Multiple Access with Collision Detection) – a refinement of CSMA in which a station ceases
transmission if it detects a collision.

Ethernet the LAN technology that uses CSMA/CD physical access method and 10 Mbps digital transmission. The
forerunner of the IEEE 802.3 CSMA/CD standard.

FDDI (Fiber Distributed Data Interface)

and the topology is a dual–attached, counter–rotating Token Ring. The FDDI protocol has also been adapted
to run over traditional copper wires.

FOIRL (Fiber Optic Inter Repeater Link) – A fiber optic signaling method based on the IEEE 802.3 standard governing
fiber optics. Allows up to 1,000 meters (3,280 ft.) of multimode duplex fiber optic cable in a point–to–point link.

Hub/Repeater the central signal distributor, used in a wiring topology consisting of several point–to–point segments originating
from a central point. The term hub is often used interchangeably with the term repeater. Multiport 10BASE–T,
10BASE2, and fiber optic (10BASE–FL, FOIRL) repeaters are considered hubs.

Philips Medical Systems. Confidential and Proprietary information. Refer to Title Page.
I

IEEE 802.3 a physical layer standard that uses the CSMA/ CD access method on a bus topology LAN.

IEEE 802.5 (Token Ring) the IEEE committee and its specification that defined a LAN protocol suite. Originated by IBM, now an IEEE
standard for a token–passing, ring network that can be configured in a star topology. Token Ring cards are
available in 4 Mb/s and 16 Mb/s versions. Subsequent upgrades for fiber are specified in ANSI X3T9.

IP (Internet Protocol) a connectionless protocol which provides best–effort delivery of datagrams across an internet (the network
layer protocol of the TCP/IP protocol suite).

IPX (Internetwork Packet Exchange) a network layer protocol developed by Novell, Inc. and used in NetWare
implementations.

L LAN (Local Area Network) – a network system that provides a relatively small area with high–speed data
transmission at a low error rate. May include PCs, printers, minicomputers, and mainframes linked by a
transmission medium such as a coaxial cable or twisted pair wiring.

Learning bridge a bridge which automatically learns the topology of the LAN addresses of each node as it receives packets.
Requires little or no setup at time of installation.

MAU (medium attachment unit) – a device used to attach a processing node to a network at the physical level. An
example is the transceiver used to attach devices to an Ethernet cable.

Medium a physical conduit for data transmission, e.g., coaxial cable or radio waves.

Multiport repeater a repeater that collects signals from one transmission channel and, after performing the standard repeater
functions, retransmits the signals to more than one new transmission channel.

Multiport transceiver a transceiver that allows a number of devices to be attached to one LAN transceiver attachment on the
backbone network.

Node a point where one or more functional units interconnect transmission lines.

Philips Medical Systems. Confidential and Proprietary information. Refer to Title Page.
Packet the basic unit of data transfer in LANs. A chain of one or more buffers that compose a network message.

Packet Internet Groper (Ping) – A program used to test reachability of destinations by sending them an ICMP echo request and waiting
for a reply.

Protocol the rules or conventions used to govern the exchange of information between networked nodes.

Repeater a hardware device that regenerates LAN signals to extend the length, topology or interconnectivity of the
network, or converts signals between media at the same time.

Rmon Remote network monitoring probe – a device that was designed to help perform network management on a
network segment.

RJ45 this connector is a 10BASE–T standard for connecting UTP cabling. They are inexpensive and easy to install
onto UTP cable.

Router a hardware/software product which receives network layer datagrams and forwards them to their destination
based on the network layer address in the packet.

SNMP (Simple Network Management Protocol) – a set of rules for performing network management functions.
Approved for use with TCP/IP in UNIX environments. Created within the Internet community using the RFC
process.

Subnetwork a network that has been connected to a larger and more powerful network system by a bridge or router.

TCP (Transmission Control Protocol) the transport protocol offering a connection–oriented transport service in the
Internet suite of protocols.

TCP/IP the internetworking protocols developed by the U.S. government’s Advanced Research Project Agency
(ARPA). Widely adopted and supported by computer and software manufacturers as a standard computer
networking protocol.

Thicknet see 10BASE5

Philips Medical Systems. Confidential and Proprietary information. Refer to Title Page.
Thinnet – see 10BASE2

Token Ring (IEEE 802.5) the IEEE committee and its specification that defined a LAN protocol suite. Originated by IBM, now an IEEE
standard for a token–passing, ring network that can be configured in a star topology. Token Ring cards are
available in 4 Mb/s and 16 Mb/s versions. Subsequent upgrades for fiber are specified in ANSI X3T9.

Topology the physical arrangement of devices in a network, regardless of their logical relationships. Types include star,
ring, and bus.

Transceiver the attachment hardware connecting the controller interface to the transmission cable in IEEE 802.3 networks.

Twisted pair wiring two insulated wires twisted together and used for transmission (the twisting creates a low level of noise
elimination).

UTP Unshielded twisted pair – see 10BASE–T

WAN (wide area network) – a network that includes nodes distributed over a larger geographic area than can be
served by a LAN.

This ends the Network/Camera section of the CONFIGURE option from the main Service Apps menu.

Philips Medical Systems. Confidential and Proprietary information. Refer to Title Page.
 NOTE
The next section displays the AcQImage section of the CONFIGURE option from the
main Service Apps menu. The AcQImage selections have defaults set at the factory.
The following screens have been provided to show the numerous settings/options.

If you wish to change a setting and are unsure of the terminology, contact Service Engi-
neering.

After selecting the AcQImage button from the CONFIGURE menu. Submenus consist of Scan, General, Recon, Detector, Hardware.

Philips Medical Systems. Confidential and Proprietary information. Refer to Title Page.
AcQImage (Scan): Shows the AcQImage Scan configuration. (The opening screen defaults to SCAN:)

Background Flag: Off Log Check: Off

Background Freq.: BACK6K Log Check Time: 0
Background Int. Pd: 5243 Rotor Frequency: 0
Rotor Spin Down Time: 2700

Delta Data Mode: Off Rotor Spin Warning: 120

Detector Averaging: Off

Digital Check Signal: Off Pilot Couch Speed: 100

Check Sig. Frequency: DIG10K Pilot Samples: 8
Logger: Linear Pilot Column Index Direction: Source_Fan
Read Time/Count: Count Pilot Row Index Direction: COUCH
Transfer Counter Test: OFF Pilot Sampling Direction: CCW

FIGURE 393 ACQIMAGE CONFIGURATION – SCAN

Philips Medical Systems. Confidential and Proprietary information. Refer to Title Page.
AcQImage (General): Shows complete AcQImage General configuration:

FILMNTOFF TAKEBACK
Termination Token:
XRAYOFF FRAMEOFF

XSC Used: ON
Number Of Overscan Detectors 120
Number of Partial Angle Scan Detectors: 0

Number of Detectors Ignored (Partial Angle): 0

Units of Table Position 0.02667

Product Type: 2000+

Hangover Time: 10

Software Release: PLUS_1.0

Column Index Direction: X+

Row Index Direction: Y+

GPU Used: On

FIGURE 394 ACQIMAGE CONFIGURATION – GENERAL

Philips Medical Systems. Confidential and Proprietary information. Refer to Title Page.
AcQImage (Recon): Shows complete AcQImage Recon configuration:

Database Network Host: localhost 5 Point Conv. Filter Point 1: .07291

Database Type Identifier: 1.1.1.1 5 Point Conv. Filter Point 2: .25
Adaptive Filter Max. Weight: 1 5 Point Conv. Filter Point 3: 0.354167
Adaptive Filter Floor (No Scatter): 20000 9 Point Conv. Filter Point 1: 0.04
Adaptive Filter Floor (Scatter): 20000 9 Point Conv. Filter Point 2: 0.08
Adaptive Filter Low Bound: 27000 9 Point Conv. Filter Point 3: 0.12
Blown Point Threshold: 2000 9 Point Conv. Filter Point 4: 0.16
Isocenter/Detector Dist.: 200 9 Point Conv. Filter Point 5: 0.2
Calcium Correction: OFF Moving Average Filter Points: 11
Upper Calmp Value: 38500 Reconstruction Shape: SQUARE
Order Of Interpolation: 2 Isocenter/Focal Spot Dist.: 640
Output Image Size: 2M Algorithm Vecotr Source: RAWDATA
Projection Comp. Threshold: 2
Raw Data Save Type: DETECTOR FAN
Reconstruction
Acquisition Last Step: NORMAL_LAST_STEP Last Step: Normal_Last_Step
Acquisition Steps To Skip: NULL Recon. Steps to Skip: NULL

Processing Sequence: NULL

FIGURE 395 ACQIMAGE CONFIGURATION – RECON

Philips Medical Systems. Confidential and Proprietary information. Refer to Title Page.
AcQImage (Detector): Shows complete AcQImage Detector configuration:

Start Of Field Detector: –1

Half Field Full Field

Beam Limiter: Off On

Number of Image Generation Detectors: 256 512

Start of Gap A: 0 0

Start of Gap B: 0 0
First Detector: 0 0
Detectors in Fan Beam: 0 0
Gap Between Reference/Source Detectors: 1920 0
Number of Reference Detectors: 10 20
Number of Scatter Detectors: 18 28
Number of Ripple Threshold: 2048 1024
Maximum Ripple Threshold: 512 256

FIGURE 396 ACQIMAGE CONFIGURATION – DETECTOR

Philips Medical Systems. Confidential and Proprietary information. Refer to Title Page.
AcQImage (Hardware): Shows complete AcQImage Detector configuration:

AP1 Memory Layout: 0x00003f3f Disk Type of GAM: NULL

AP1 603 Memory Amt: 8M DSP Type for SHUF: 21060
AP1 Cluster Memory Amt: 16M Ripple Generation DSP Type: 21060
AP1 Cluster 2 memory Amt: 16M Ripple Correction DSP Type: 21060
AP1 DSP Type: 21060
PB1 603 Memory Amt.: 0

CP1 603 Memory Amt.: 8M PB1 Accumulator Memory Size: 4M

PB1 bitmap for Pipes 32-1: 32
GAM 1 Memory Layout: 0X00000007 PB1 bitmap for Pipes 64-33: 0

GAM 1 603 Memory amt.: 8M

GAM 1 Cluster Memory Amt.: 128M

FIGURE 397 ACQIMAGE CONFIGURATION – HARDWARE

Philips Medical Systems. Confidential and Proprietary information. Refer to Title Page.
Options: Allows complete OPTIONS configuration:

Enabling Key Option Expiration

Enabling key strings will be in these locations

Picker Service

Extra Disks

Host ID Change Validation

Xray Tube Type: RHINO5_0

Auto Send to RDS Support

Auto Send to Voxel Q Support

MO Drive Attachment

Second Tape Drive Attachment

Dumb Injectors Support

C–Arm Present

SVIP Support

CTA Support

MSSI

Pinpoint

FIGURE 398 OPTIONS CONFIGURATION

Philips Medical Systems. Confidential and Proprietary information. Refer to Title Page.
Generic: Allows _______ configuration:
Generic Configuration File Modification

Load File Save File

Parameter Selection
Parameter Name Parameter Value Comment

Delete Line Insert Line

Parameter Editing
Parameter Name Parameter Value Comment

FIGURE 399 GENERAL CONFIGURATION

Philips Medical Systems. Confidential and Proprietary information. Refer to Title Page.
Update: After Configuration is complete, click on the “Update Configuration Files” button:

Reload Configuration Files

Update Configuration Files

Load Factory Defaults

FIGURE 400 UPDATE CONFIGURATION FILES

Philips Medical Systems. Confidential and Proprietary information. Refer to Title Page.
ERROR LOGGER
Introduction

Errors created during abnormal system operation are recorded in the Error Logger. The contents of the Error Logger can be displayed from
the main Service Application pull down menu, called LOG VIEWING.

Study Display Tools Log Viewing User Level

Service Log Forward Chrono
Service Log Reverse Chrono
Calibration Log
Bad Detector Log
All Logs
AcQImage Log
PICR Log

FIGURE 401 LOG VIEWING PULLDOWN MENU

You may select any of the options show in Figure 401. To see samples of the first three error logs, click on the respective heading.
Each of the log listing windows allows you to search for specific words or numbers and includes page up, page down and done buttons.

NOTE
The Study and Display Tools pull down menus are covered in the Operator’s manual.

Philips Medical Systems. Confidential and Proprietary information. Refer to Title Page.
FIGURE 402 SERVICE LOG FORWARD CHRONO – SAMPLE OUTPUT

Philips Medical Systems. Confidential and Proprietary information. Refer to Title Page.
FIGURE 403 SERVICE LOG REVERSE CHRONO – SAMPLE OUTPUT

Philips Medical Systems. Confidential and Proprietary information. Refer to Title Page.
 FIGURE 404 CALIBRATION LOG

Philips Medical Systems. Confidential and Proprietary information. Refer to Title Page.
PERIPHERALS – INSTALLATION AND CONFIGURATION
DISPLAY TOWER – OVERVIEW
This section covers removal, replacement and configuration of the various peripherals contained in the AcQSim CT. The Display Tower
contains the SCSI devices for the display system, including optical disk, 8mm tape, CD–ROM and hard disks. The SCSI (Small Computer
System Interface) bus located within the AcQSim CT Display Tower originates at the Sparc Host Board (p/n 311927). Any peripheral
attached to the SCSI bus must conform to the SCSI–2 standards for single ended devices. Up to seven devices can be connected.
There are two connectors located on the host board for connection to the SCSI bus, one on the rear panel (HD–50 connector, unused).
All peripherals within the Display Tower are interconnected using a 50 conductor non–shielded flat ribbon cable. Connectors are spaced
along the cable to allow a daisy–chain of the devices. Hard drives are wide SCSI–2 and are connected to a 68 pin connector. The SCSI
cable has an adaptor to convert 68 pin to 50 pin. The internal SCSI cable (P/N L11031) originates at the host and is terminated at the primary
8mm tape drive using an in–line terminator (P/N 310576). Figure 405 shows the Display Tower SCSI drives configuration. The SCSI ID
Table identifies the SCSI ID number assignments for the Display Tower peripherals:

P/N 96264 P/N 96264 P/N 96264 P/N 312213 P/N 312400
18 GB 18 GB 18 GB 68M/50F 5.2 GB P/N 310558 P/N 81739 P/N 310558
Adapter

Image Disk 2 8mm Tape

Image Disk 1 Boot/Image Disk Optical Disk 8mm Tape CD–ROM Drive (Primary)
(Optional) (Optional) (Optional) SCSI ID #5
SCSI ID #2 SCSI ID #1 SCSI ID #0 SCSI ID #3 SCSI ID #4 SCSI ID #6

Internal 50 pin Terminator P/N 310576

Internal 68 pin SCSI Cable
L11843
SCSI Cable
L11844

UltraSparc Host P/N 311927

SCSI ID #7 440 MHz

FIGURE 405 DISPLAY TOWER SCSI BLOCK DIAGRAM

Philips Medical Systems. Confidential and Proprietary information. Refer to Title Page.
The SCSI ID Table below identifies the SCSI ID number assignments for the Display Tower peripherals:
SCSI ID AcQSim CT Display Tower Peripherals
0 Hard Drive – Boot Disk
1 Hard Drive – Image Disk 1
2 Hard Drive – Image Disk 2 (optional)
3 Optical Drive (optional)
4 Tape Archive, 8mm (optional)
5 Tape Archive, 8mm (primary)
6 CD–ROM Drive, 4x Speed or higher
7 Host

DISPLAY TOWER DRIVES – CONFIGURATION AND INSTALLATION

Display Tower Removal / Replacement

Introduction: The following procedure is used to remove and replace any of the drives (tape, CD–ROM, hard disk, etc) in the event
of a failure, upgrade or to check configuration. This procedure also instructs how to align the Keyswitch/Emergency
Stop assembly and the Peripheral Bay Assembly.

Tools Required: Phillips Screwdriver

Estimated Time: 20 Min.

DISPLAY TOWER DRIVE REMOVAL:

1. Remove the Display Tower power. Refer to the PowerUp/PowerDown procedure.

WARNING
USE EXTREME CAUTION WHEN OPERATING OR WORKING ON EQUIPMENT
WITH COVERS REMOVED. DANGEROUS VOLTAGES ARE EXPOSED WHEN THE
COVERS ARE REMOVED. FAILURE TO COMPLY CAN CAUSE SERIOUS INJURY
OR DEATH TO PERSONNEL.

Philips Medical Systems. Confidential and Proprietary information. Refer to Title Page.
 NOTE
If the system needs to be moved, release the lock on the wheels before moving. Ensure
wheels are locked after moving.

2. For user peripheral work (CD ROM, etc), remove the front cosmetic cover. To access the hard disk drives, also remove the front cover.
Refer to the Display Tower Covers Removal procedure.
3. Remove the two screws from the bottom of the assembly where the drive to be removed is located. Refer to Figure 406.
4. Slide the assembly out enough to gain access to the screws on the side of the assembly.
5. Disconnect the data and power cables from the drive or drives being removed.
6. Remove the two screws on each side of the drive or drives being removed and pull the drive from the assembly.
All peripherals are mounted in a drive mounting bracket assembly, consisting of: 1) a drive mounting bracket (P/N 81977), a bottom plate
(P/N 81980) and a chassis support (P/N 81981). The chassis support is mounted to the vertical rails of the Display Tower frame. Two screws
are used to retain the drive mounting bracket to the bottom plate in the Display Tower frame. Removal of the two screws allows the drive
mounting bracket to be slid out from the chassis support to service the devices.

The hard drive mounting brackets can hold up to three half height 3 1/2” form factor devices. Half height filler panels (P/N 83994) are used
to fill the space below the last device in the user–accessible peripheral bay. These filler panels are required as they restrict access by
non–service personnel in the event that the front facade assembly (P/N 178656) is removed from the Display Tower.

IMPORTANT NOTE
After a CD ROM, 8mm Tape or Optical Disk Drive has been replaced or added, the disk
must be configured into the system. To do this, reboot the system and while the memory
is being initialized, press STOP A You will get an “ok” prompt. At the ok prompt, type
boot –rv and press <cr>.

Philips Medical Systems. Confidential and Proprietary information. Refer to Title Page.
 8MM TAPE DRIVE

CD ROM DRIVE

OPTIONAL OPTICAL DRIVE WOULD

BE INSTALLED UNDER CD DRIVE
REMOVE SCREWS ON EACH SIDE
TO REMOVE INDIVIDUAL DRIVE
REMOVE SCREWS FIRST TO
SLIDE DRIVE ASSEMBLY OUT.

18GB HARD DRIVES

FIGURE 406 DISPLAY TOWER DRIVE LOCATIONS

Philips Medical Systems. Confidential and Proprietary information. Refer to Title Page.
DISPLAY TOWER DRIVE REPLACEMENT:
1. Ensure the drive is configured correctly. Refer to the Configuration Details for specific drives.
2. Insert the new drive in the assembly where the old one was removed. Line up the holes in the frame and install the four screws removed
earlier. Reconnect the data and power cables.
3. Slide the entire assembly back in, align the holes in the bottom of the respective frame and install the two screws removed earlier.
If the user peripheral assembly was removed, you must re–align the bracket to the center of the access holes on the cosmetic cover.
4. If only a hard drive was replaced, then re–install the covers, roll back into place and secure the wheels. If an additional 8mm tape,
CD ROM or Optical disk drive was installed, the filler panel on the cosmetic cover must be adjusted before replacing the cover.

NOTE
The copper ESD strip (used to conduct static away from the peripherals) is attached
to the front of the cosmetic cover and the unpainted area of the filler panel. Ensure that
the strip is still attached after moving the filler panel.

5. Remove the four screws that secure the filler panel. For each 1/2 height drive added, move the panel down one set of screw holes.
Secure the filler panel with the four screws. Before pushing the cosmetic cover onto the Display Tower, visually align the cover to ensure
proper placement of the filler panel – it should now be just below the lowest drive. Refer to Figure 407.
6. After the alignment is correct, you may push the the cosmetic cover back on to the Display Tower.

Philips Medical Systems. Confidential and Proprietary information. Refer to Title Page.
 178656 ASSEMBLY
(WITH LED)

REMOVE SCREWS
THAT SECURE
FLLER PANEL

FILLER PANEL

ESD STRIP

FIGURE 407 ADJUSTING FILLER PANEL

DISPLAY TOWER FACADE ALIGNMENT PROCEDURE

The alignment procedure provides clearance to operate the emergency stop switch without binding. It also provides clearance around the
user bay peripheral assembly to allow easy removal and installation of the facade assembly.
Keyswitch / Emergency Stop Assembly Alignment
1. Remove the right side cover. Refer to the Display Tower Covers Removal procedure.
2. Loosen the four nuts on the back of the Keyswitch/Emergency stop assembly. Do not remove the nuts.
3. Install the facade assembly onto the Display Tower.

Philips Medical Systems. Confidential and Proprietary information. Refer to Title Page.
4. Adjust the position of the Keyswitch/Emergency Stop assembly until the Emergency Stop switch can be pressed and released without
binding.
5. Tighten the four nuts on the rear of the Keyswitch/Emergency Stop assembly.
6. Press and twist to release if installed the Emergency Stop several times to ensure no binding exists.
7. Install the right side cover. Refer to the Display Tower Covers Removal procedure.

Alignment of User Peripheral Bay Assembly

1. Remove the facade assembly from the Display Tower.
2. Loosen both of the screws that lock in the peripheral bay assembly. Refer to Figure 406.
3. The peripheral bay should be moved horizontally and verically until it appears to be centered. Hold in the position as you tighten the
screws.
4. Install the facade assembly making sure that the peripheral bay assembly does not hit the facade when it is completely installed. The
peripheral bay should have an equal amount of clearance on either side.
5. If the facade is still not clearing the bay, then repeat steps 2. through 4. until the facade can be installed without interferring with the
user peripheral bay assembly.

Philips Medical Systems. Confidential and Proprietary information. Refer to Title Page.
CONFIGURATION DETAILS FOR SPECIFIC DRIVES – DISPLAY TOWER

The following pages diagram the jumper and dip switch settings to properly set configuration parameters and SCSI ID numbers for drives.
Refer to the SCSI ID Table for correct assignment of ID numbers.

The following links will take you to the drive of your choice:

Figure 408 – SEAGATE ST318275LW Hard Drive

Figure 409 – QUANTUM QM318100KN–LW 18 GB Hard Drive

Figure 411 – IBM 25L1900 18 GB Hard Drive

Figure 412 – IBM 07N3110 18GB Hard Drive

Figure 412 – PLEXTOR PX–40TSI 40x CD–ROM Drive

Figure 413 – 8mm TAPE DRIVE EXABYTE ELIANT 820 Tape Drive

Figure 414 – HEWLETT PACKARD C1113J Optical Drive

Philips Medical Systems. Confidential and Proprietary information. Refer to Title Page.
FIGURE 408 SEAGATE ST318275LW 18 GB HARD DRIVE

Philips Medical Systems. Confidential and Proprietary information. Refer to Title Page.
FIGURE 409 QUANTUM QM318100KN–LW 18GB HARD DRIVE

Philips Medical Systems. Confidential and Proprietary information. Refer to Title Page.
 FIGURE 410 IBM 25L1900 18GB HARD DRIVE

Philips Medical Systems. Confidential and Proprietary information. Refer to Title Page.
 FIGURE 411 IBM 07N3110 18GB HARD DRIVE

Philips Medical Systems. Confidential and Proprietary information. Refer to Title Page.
FIGURE 412 PLEXTOR PX–40TSI 40x CD–ROM DRIVE

Philips Medical Systems. Confidential and Proprietary information. Refer to Title Page.
FIGURE 413 EXABYTE RELIANT 820 8mm TAPE DRIVE

Philips Medical Systems. Confidential and Proprietary information. Refer to Title Page.
 DIP SW S501 DIP SW S502
1 Jukebox Eject Distance Override Reserved for Production
2 Dair Enabled Reserved for Production
3 Reserved Reserved for Production
4 Reserved Reserved for Production
5 Reserved for Debug Reserved
6 Reserved for Debug Force Verify, Write Operation
7 Reserved for Debug Fast SCSI Enable
8 Reserved for Debug Reserved

FIGURE 414 HEWLETT PACKARD C1113J OPTICAL DRIVE

Philips Medical Systems. Confidential and Proprietary information. Refer to Title Page.
ACQIMAGE CABINET DRIVES – OVERVIEW

The AcQImage cabinet contains two SCSI disk drives for storage of scan data. The two disk drives are contained on a single board that
is located on the right side (front view) of the AcQImage Cabinet card rack. Refer to Figure 415 and Figure 416.

ACQIMAGE CABINET HARD DISK ASSEMBLY –CONFIGURATION AND INSTALLATION

AcQImage Cabinet Removal / Replacement
Introduction: The following procedure is used to remove and replace an AcQImage Cabinet hard disk drive in the event of
a failure.

Tools Required: Phillips Screwdriver

Small slotted screwdriver

Estimated Time: 15 Min.

AcQImage Cabinet Hard Disk Removal:
1. Remove the AcQImage Cabinet power. Refer to the PowerUp/PowerDown procedure.

WARNING
USE EXTREME CAUTION WHEN OPERATING OR WORKING ON EQUIPMENT
WITH COVERS REMOVED. DANGEROUS VOLTAGES ARE EXPOSED WHEN THE
COVERS ARE REMOVED. FAILURE TO COMPLY CAN CAUSE SERIOUS INJURY
OR DEATH TO PERSONNEL.

NOTE
If the system needs to be moved, release the lock on the wheels before moving. Ensure
wheels are locked after moving.

2. Remove the front cosmetic covers and rear panel first. Refer to the AcQImage Cabinet Covers Removal procedure.
3. Remove the internal front steel panel by removing the six screws. The hard disk assembly is located on the far right side of the card
cage. Refer to Figure 415.

Philips Medical Systems. Confidential and Proprietary information. Refer to Title Page.
4. Disconnect the SCSI cable attached to the GAM board.
5. Loosen the 4 captive screws that secure the hard disk drive assembly in place. Grasp the handles and slide the assembly out part
way. Refer to Figure 415.
6. Disconnect the power and SCSI connectors from the drive. Refer to Figure 416.
7. While holding the drive, loosen the four screws that secure the drive to the slide out frame.

HARD DISK ASSEMBLY

LOCATION.

REFER TO FIGURE 416 FOR

ASSEMBLY DETAIL

FIGURE 415 ACQIMAGE CABINET HARD DISK DRIVE ASSEMBLY LOCATION

Philips Medical Systems. Confidential and Proprietary information. Refer to Title Page.
 Power Cable
SCSI Cable
DISK 2 HAS TERMINATOR, Disk 2
SCSI ID Disk 1
#3 Terminator
DISK 1 DOES NOT. SCSI ID
#6
SCSI Cable
Power Cable

FIGURE 416 LOCATION OF ACQIMAGE DRIVES ON REMOVABLE BOARD

Philips Medical Systems. Confidential and Proprietary information. Refer to Title Page.
 Disk 1 –REAR

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17
(TERMINATOR REMOVED)

Disk 2 – (FRONT)

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17
(TERMINATOR PRESENT)

FIGURE 417 ACQIMAGE DISK DRIVE CONFIGURATIONS

AcQImage Cabinet Hard Disk Replacement:

1. Ensure the drive is configured properly, according to Figure 417.

2. Bolt the new drive in where the old one was.

3. Attach the power and SCSI connectors to the new drive.

4. Slide the assembly back into the card cage and secure the captive screws.

5. Plug the SCSI cable back into the GAM board.

Philips Medical Systems. Confidential and Proprietary information. Refer to Title Page.
ACQSIM CT 1.0 SOFTWARE INSTALLATION INSTRUCTIONS
The following kit instructions should be used when installing 1.0 software onto an AcQSim CT system.

NOTE
This procedure in intended for the first series of software installations on the AcQSim
CT and is not intended to be part of a software upgrade kit.

1. Make a Site tape immediately before installation. If in the Console or Service Application, select Shutdown Console from the General
Utilities button. When the main menu appears, click in the lower left corner of the Main Startup menu and type the word “site” (lower
case) and press <CR>.
2. After the Save Site / Restore Site menu appears, push the tape in, wait for the green light to stop blinking and select “1” to Save Site.
The system will eject the tape when finished.
3. Exit the Save Site Utility. When the Shutdown button becomes available, press it and wait for the system to shut down.
4. Open the CD–ROM drive and insert CD #1. Close the drive.
5. When the ok prompt appears, type boot cdrom and press <CR>. After a few minutes, the password prompt will appear. Type picker
and press <CR>.
6. The system then checks the disk configuration and prompts you with:
Enter the type of system installation:

1. RDS (Note: “RDS” refers to an Ultra Z Diagnostic Workstation, UDW)

2. Scanner Console

q. quit
7. Select option “2,” Scanner Console from the menu. You will see the following menu.
Enter a Console Installation option:

1. Install the OS and Application Software

2. Configure a Replaced Disk(s)
3. Upgrade Application Software Only

q. quit
8. Select option “1,” Install the OS and Application Software from the menu. Answer “y” to the next question. The following will appear:

09/05/00 ULTRA Z 1.1 SOFTWARE UPGRADE 1

Main Menu Option #1 – Reformat and Configure entire system:
Enter IP Address [default xxx.xxx.xx.xx]:
Enter Netmask [default 255.255.255.0]:
Enter Router [default xxx.xx.xx.xx]:
Enter Nodename [default consolexxxx]:
9. Press <CR> to accept the default values. Make sure the Netmask number is 255.255.255.0. After the information is entered, the
system will display your choices as you entered them:
IP Address:
Netmask:
Router:
Nodename:

10. After the “Ready to run the installation. Are you satisfied? (y/n) [n]?” prompt appears:
If you answer NO to “satisfied,” the installation will cancel and take you back to the first sub–menu where you can quit the installation
program, or continue and adjust the network information.

If installation information is correct, choose “y” to “satisfied.”

11. The software will now begin installing from the first CD. This will take about 20 minutes. When the “serial/parallel” change menu
appears, choose “q” and press <CR>. The following menu will appear:
1. Install SCANNER Console Application Software
2. Eject the CD.

Select option “2,” Eject the CD. Remove the first CD and put the second CD in, then close the drive door.

12. Select option “1,” to continue with the installation. You will be prompted with the “satisfied” question again. Select “y” and the system
will continue with the software installation. After the installation is complete, a menu will appear:
1. View the installation error log [/cd_errlog]
2. Eject the CD (it ’ s OK to eject it now)
3. Continue booting the machine

Choice:

NOTE
After the installation has completed, additional messages may be displayed on the
screen, pushing the above menu out of view. Simply press <CR> to see it again.

09/05/00 ULTRA Z 1.1 SOFTWARE UPGRADE 2

13. View the error log by choosing option 1. There should not be any errors in the error log at this time. After viewing, the menu will be
displayed again. Select option 2 to eject the CD. Remove the CD and close the drive door. Then select option 3 to continue booting
to the application software.
14. Perform a Restore Site.

15. After the 1.0 software installation is done and the system has
booted, start the Diagnostic GUI. (To start Diag GUI: Go to Flash Burner
General Utilities, select Shutdown Console to get to the System name: bay00
Startup men. Click on the lower left hand corner, type PICKER Board name: 1
and press <CR>.)
Quit Continue

16. Run the Flash Burner from the Diag GUI. The flash burner is a utility for transferring executable code from a directory on the SPARC
disk to the Flash of the CP, AP, BP or GAM.

17. Enter the board number (1 for CP).

18. An Xterm will be displayed. Select option 1.) Transfer OS. When completed, the board will reboot.

19. Restart the the Flash burner from the GUI again on the same board. Then select option 2.) Transfer Diags.

20. When completed, the board will reboot. Now one board is done. Repeat this process on the remaining three boards. Board numbers
are: 2 for GAM, 3 for DSP/AP, 4 for BP. You can view the date of the Flash OS via a Telnet session. At the pSH+> prompt, type romver
and press <CR>.

21. This completes the 1.0 scanner software portion of the upgrade. After the initialization is complete, run a pilot, axial and spiral scan
to further ensure system functionality. This completes the 1.0 installation. Reboot the system.

09/05/00 ULTRA Z 1.1 SOFTWARE UPGRADE 3

ACQSIM CT 2.0 SOFTWARE UPGRADE INSTRUCTIONS
The following kit should be used when upgrading a 1.0 software based AcQSim CT system with 2.0 software.

Kit # 4535 670 06581

Part Number Description Qty.
4535 670 06281 AcQSim CT 2.0 Operating System Software CD (2 CD’s in set) 1
CT–9369 AcQSim CT 2.0 Software Upgrade Technical Note 1
T55Y–1013 AcQSim CT DICOM Conformance Statement 1
4535 670 06921 AcQSim CT 2.0 Software Upgrade Kit Instructions 1
179971 AcQSim CT 2.0 User Documentation Package 1

1. Be sure all images are archived before starting this upgrade. Make a site tape immediately before installation. If in the Console or
Service Application, select Shutdown Console from the General Utilities button. When the Main Startup menu appears, click in the
lower left hand corner and type the word site (lower case) and press <CR>.
2. After the Save Site / Restore Site menu appears, push the tape in the tape drive, wait for the green light to stop blinking and select
“1” to Save Site. The system will eject the tape when finished.
3. Exit the Save Site Utility. When the Shutdown button becomes available, press it and wait for the system to shut down.
4. Open the CD–ROM drive and insert CD #1. Close the drive.
5. When the ok prompt appears, type boot cdrom (lower case) and press <CR>. After a few minutes, the password prompt will appear.
Type picker (lower case) and press <CR>.

11/22/02 REVISION A ACQSIM CT 2.0 SOFTWARE UPGRADE 1

6. The system then checks the disk configuration and prompts you with:
Enter the type of system installation:

1. RDS (Note: “RDS” refers to an Ultra Z Diagnostic Workstation, UDW)

2. Scanner Console

q. quit
7. Select option “2,” Scanner Console from the menu and press <CR>. You will see the following menu.
Enter a Console Installation option:

1. Install the OS and Application Software

2. Configure a Replaced Disk(s)
3. Upgrade Application Software Only

q. quit

8. Select option “1,” Install the OS and Application Software from the menu and press <CR>. Answer “y” to the next question. The
following will appear:
Main Menu Option #1 – Reformat and Configure entire system:
Enter IP Address [default xxx.xxx.xx.xx]:
Enter Netmask [default 255.255.255.xxx]:
Enter Router [default xxx.xx.xx.xx]:
Enter Nodename [default consolexxxx]:

9. Press <CR> to accept the default values. After the information is entered, the system will display your choices as you entered them:
IP Address:
Netmask:
Router:
Nodename:

11/22/02 REVISION A ACQSIM CT 2.0 SOFTWARE UPGRADE 2

10. After the “Ready to run the installation. Are you satisfied? (y/n) [n]?” prompt appears:
If you answer NO to “Are you satisfied?”, the installation will cancel and take you back to the first sub–menu where you can quit the
installation program, or continue and adjust the network information.

If installation information is correct, choose “y” to “Are you satisfied?” and press <CR>.
11. The software will now begin installing from the first CD. Some time will pass during installation (approximately 25 minutes). DO NOT
PRESS ANY KEYS ON THE KEYBOARD. The following menu will then appear:
1. Install SCANNER Console Application Software
2. Eject the CD.

Select option “2,” Eject the CD. Remove the first CD and put the second CD in, then close the drive door.

12. Select option “1,” to continue with the installation. You will be prompted with the “Are you satisfied?” question again. Select “y”, press
<CR>, and the system will continue with the software installation (approximately 20 to 30 minutes). After the installation is complete,
a menu will appear:
1. View the beginning of the installation error log
2. Eject the CD (it ’ s OK to eject it now)
3. Continue booting the machine

Choice:

NOTE
After the installation has completed, additional messages may be displayed on the
screen, pushing the above menu out of view. Simply press <CR> to see it again.

13. View the error log by choosing option 1. There should not be any errors in the error log at this time. After viewing, the menu will be
displayed again. Select option 2 to eject the CD. Remove the CD and close the drive door. Then select option 3 to continue booting
to the application software and press <CR>.
14. Perform a Restore Site. When the Main Startup menu appears, click in the lower left corner and type the word site (lower case) and
press <CR>.
15. After the Save Site / Restore Site menu appears, push the tape in the tape drive, wait for the green light to stop blinking and select
“2” to Restore Site. The system will eject the tape when finished.
16. Exit the Save Site utility.

11/22/02 REVISION A ACQSIM CT 2.0 SOFTWARE UPGRADE 3

17. After the 1.2 software installation is complete and the system has booted, start the Diagnostics GUI. At the Main Startup menu, click
in the lower left hand corner, type PICKER (upper case) and press <CR>.
18. At the Diagnostics Software Test Menu, click on the “Utilities” button and select “Flash Burner”. The flash burner is a utility for
transferring executable code from a directory on the SPARC disk to the Flash of the CP, DSP/AP, BP and GAM boards.

19. At the Flash Burner dialog box, enter the number of the board selected in the “Board name” category (1 for CP, 2 for GAM, 3 for DSP/AP,
and 4 for BP) and click “Continue”.

Flash Burner
System name: bay00
Board name: 1

Quit Continue

FIGURE 1 FLASH BURNER DIALOG BOX

20. An Xterm window will be displayed. Click the mouse in the Xterm window to activate it. Select option 1.) Transfer OS.

21. At the next menu, select 0.) Start transfer. When completed, the board will reboot.

22. Restart the Flash burner from the GUI again on the same board. Then select option 2.) Transfer Diags.

23. When completed, the board will reboot. The message “Rebooting the board, I/O session is dead” will be displayed. Press <CR> and
repeat steps 18 thru 23 on the remaining three boards. Board numbers are: 2 for GAM, 3 for DSP/AP, 4 for BP. You can view the date
of the Flash OS via a Telnet session. At the pSH+> prompt, type romver and press <CR>. When flash burner is complete on all boards,
select “Exit” to exit the Diagnostics GUI.

Site Protocol Update Program Instructions

Proceed with the following instructions to perform the site protocol update program.

1. Install the AcQSim CT software and restore the site information from tape.
2. At the four–button GUI, click the mouse in the lower left–hand corner. Type pptools and press <CR>.
3. Click in the window that comes up. Type update_protocols and press <CR>.

11/22/02 REVISION A ACQSIM CT 2.0 SOFTWARE UPGRADE 4

4. Type exit and press <CR>.
5. Test a sample of the site defined protocols by scanning.
6. When testing is complete, create a site tape with the new data.
7. This completes the 2.0 scanner software portion of the upgrade. After the initialization is complete, run a pilot, axial and spiral scan
to further ensure system functionality. This completes the 2.0 software upgrade. Reboot the system before turning it over to the
customer.

11/22/02 REVISION A ACQSIM CT 2.0 SOFTWARE UPGRADE 5

 Philips Medical Systems

AcQSim CT 3.1 Software Upgrade

Kit Instructions

Part Number: 4535 670 52251 Revision: A

All pages of this document contain proprietary and confidential information of Philips Medical Systems (Cleveland), Inc. The documents are intended for current Philips Medical
Systems (Cleveland), Inc. personnel or are licensed to Philips Medical Systems (Cleveland), Inc. customer for use by the customer's in-house service employee on equipment
located at the customer's designated site. Copying, disclosure to others or other use is prohibited without the express written authorization of Philips Medical Systems
(Cleveland), Inc. Law Department. Report violation of these requirements to the Philips Medical Systems (Cleveland), Inc. Law Department, Highland Heights, Ohio.

Service Publication, Philips Medical Systems (Cleveland) Inc. Highland Hts., OH 44143
E 2004 All rights reserved under the copyright laws of the United States.
 E 2004

Philips Medical Systems (Cleveland), Inc. Highland Hts., OH 44143

All rights reserved under the copyright laws of the United States
This document prepared by the Service Publications Department.
Note any additions/corrections via an electronic Field Feedback Form.
 SYMBOL DESCRIPTIONS
Attention symbol. Radiation warning symbol.

Laser warning symbol. Biohazard warning symbol.

Magnetism warning symbol. Projectile warning symbol.

Electrical warning symbol.

 REVISION HISTORY
REVISION DATE COMMENTS
–1 11/14/03 First draft
–2 12/15/03 Final review version
A 03/01/04 Release at revision A
 NOTICE
THE INFORMATION CONTAINED IN THIS MANUAL CONFORMS WITH THE CONFIGURATION OF THE EQUIPMENT AS OF THE DATE OF MANUFACTURE. REVISIONS TO THE EQUIPMENT
SUBSEQUENT TO THE DATE OF MANUFACTURE WILL BE ADDRESSED IN SERVICE UPDATES DISTRIBUTED TO PHILIPS MEDICAL SYSTEMS TECHNICAL SERVICE ORGANIZATION.

TO THE USER OF THIS MANUAL

THE USER OF THIS MANUAL IS DIRECTED TO READ AND CAREFULLY REVIEW THE INSTRUCTIONS, WARNINGS AND CAUTIONS CONTAINED HEREIN PRIOR TO BEGINNING
INSTALLATION OR SERVICE ACTIVITIES. WHILE YOU MAY HAVE PREVIOUSLY INSTALLED OR SERVICED EQUIPMENT SIMILAR TO THAT DESCRIBED IN THIS MANUAL, CHANGES IN
DESIGN, MANUFACTURE OR PROCEDURE MAY HAVE OCCURRED WHICH SIGNIFICANTLY AFFECT THE PRESENT INSTALLATION OR SERVICE.
THE INSTALLATION AND SERVICE OF EQUIPMENT DESCRIBED HEREIN IS TO BE PREFORMED BY AUTHORIZED, QUALIFIED PHILIPS MEDICAL SYSTEM PERSONNEL. ASSEMBLERS
AND OTHER PERSONNEL NOT EMPLOYED BY NOR DIRECTLY AFFILIATED WITH PHILIPS MEDICAL SYSTEMS TECHNICAL SERVICES ARE DIRECTED TO CONTACT THE LOCAL
PHILIPS MEDICAL SYSTEMS OFFICE BEFORE ATTEMPTING INSTALLATION OR SERVICE PROCEDURES.

INSTALLATION AND ENVIRONMENT

EXCEPT FOR INSTALLATIONS REQUIRING CERTIFICATION BY THE MANUFACTURER PER FEDERAL STANDARDS, SEE THAT A RADIATION PROTECTION SURVEY IS MADE BY A
QUALIFIED EXPERT IN ACCORDANCE WITH NCRP 102, SECTION 7, AS REVISED OR REPLACED IN THE FUTURE. PERFORM A SURVEY AFTER EVERY CHANGE IN EQUIPMENT,
WORKLOAD, OR OPERATING CONDITIONS WHICH MIGHT SIGNIFICANTLY INCREASE THE PROBABILITY OF PERSONS RECEIVING MORE THAN THE MAXIMUM PERMISSIBLE DOSE
EQUIVALENT.

Diagnostic Imaging Systems – MECHANICAL-ELECTRICAL WARNING

ALL OF THE MOVEABLE ASSEMBLIES AND PARTS OF THIS EQUIPMENT SHOULD BE OPERATED WITH CARE AND ROUTINELY INSPECTED IN ACCORDANCE WITH THE MANUFACTURER’S
RECOMMENDATIONS CONTAINED IN THE EQUIPMENT MANUALS.
ONLY PROPERLY TRAINED AND QUALIFIED PERSONNEL SHOULD BE PERMITTED ACCESS TO ANY INTERNAL PARTS. LIVE ELECTRICAL TERMINALS ARE DEADLY; BE SURE LINE
DISCONNECTS ARE OPENED AND OTHER APPROPRIATE PRECAUTIONS ARE TAKEN BEFORE OPENING ACCESS DOORS, REMOVING ENCLOSURE PANELS, OR ATTACHING
ACCESSORIES.
DO NOT UNDER ANY CIRCUMSTANCES, REMOVE THE FLEXIBLE HIGH TENSION CABLES FROM THE X-RAY TUBE HOUSING OR HIGH TENSION GENERATOR AND/OR THE ACCESS
COVERS FROM THE GENERATOR UNTIL THE MAIN AND AUXILIARY POWER SUPPLIES HAVE BEEN DISCONNECTED. FAILURE TO COMPLY WITH THE ABOVE MAY RESULT IN SERIOUS
OR FATAL BODILY INJURIES TO THE OPERATOR OR THOSE IN THE AREA.

ELECTRICAL-GROUNDING INSTRUCTIONS
THE EQUIPMENT MUST BE GROUNDED TO AN EARTH GROUND BY A SEPARATE CONDUCTOR. THE NEUTRAL SIDE OF THE LINE IS NOT TO BE CONSIDERED THE EARTH GROUND.
ON EQUIPMENT PROVIDED WITH A LINE CORD, THE EQUIPMENT MUST BE CONNECTED TO PROPERLY GROUNDED, THREE-PIN RECEPTACLE. DO NOT USE A THREE-TO-TWO PIN
ADAPTER.

Diagnostic Imaging Systems – RADIATION WARNING

X-RAY AND GAMMA-RAYS ARE DANGEROUS TO BOTH OPERATOR AND OTHERS IN THE VICINITY UNLESS ESTABLISHED SAFE EXPOSURE PROCEDURES ARE STRICTLY OBSERVED.
THE USEFUL AND SCATTERED BEAMS CAN PRODUCE SERIOUS OR FATAL BODILY INJURIES TO ANY PERSONS IN THE SURROUNDING AREA IF USED BY AN UNSKILLED OPERATOR.
ADEQUATE PRECAUTIONS MUST ALWAYS BE TAKEN TO AVOID EXPOSURE TO THE USEFUL BEAM, AS WELL AS TO LEAKAGE RADIATION FROM WITHIN THE SOURCE HOUSING OR
TO SCATTERED RADIATION RESULTING FROM THE PASSAGE OF RADIATION THROUGH MATTER.
THOSE AUTHORIZED TO OPERATE, PARTICIPATE IN OR SUPERVISE THE OPERATION OF THE EQUIPMENT MUST BE THOROUGHLY FAMILIAR AND COMPLY COMPLETELY WITH THE
CURRENT ESTABLISHED SAFE EXPOSURE FACTORS AND PROCEDURES DESCRIBED IN PUBLICATIONS, SUCH AS: SUBCHAPTER J OF TITLE 21 OF THE CODE OF FEDERAL
REGULATIONS, “DIAGNOSTIC X-RAY SYSTEMS AND THEIR MAJOR COMPONENTS”, AND THE NATIONAL COUNCIL ON RADIATION PROTECTION (NCRP) NO. 102, “MEDICAL X-RAY AND
GAMMA-RAY PROTECTION FOR ENERGIES UP TO 10 MEV-EQUIPMENT DESIGN AND USE”, AS REVISED OR REPLACED IN THE FUTURE.
THOSE RESPONSIBLE FOR PLANNING OF X-RAY AND GAMMA-RAY EQUIPMENT INSTALLATIONS MUST BE THOROUGHLY FAMILIAR AND COMPLY COMPLETELY WITH NCRP NO. 49,
“STRUCTURAL SHIELDING DESIGN AND EVALUATION FOR MEDICAL OF X-RAYS AND GAMMA-RAYS OF ENERGIES UP TO 10 MEV”, AS REVISED AND REPLACED IN THE FUTURE. FAILURE
TO OBSERVE THESE WARNINGS MAY CAUSE SERIOUS OR FATAL BODILY INJURIES TO THE OPERATOR OR THOSE IN THE AREA.
 TABLE OF CONTENTS

AcQSim CT 3.1 Software Upgrade Instructions . . . . . . . . . 1

Site Protocol Update Program Instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5

Manufacturer Name Update Instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5

Security Vulnerability Update . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6

Gating Option Activation Instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7

Localization Option Activation Instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8

Connectivity to other Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8

Localization Option Reference Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9

Network/Camera Service Tab Reference Information . . . 10

Printer Setup for Worksheet Printing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11

Voxel Q 4.9.1 Software Update Information . . . . . . . . . . . . 13

ACQSIM CT 3.1 SOFTWARE UPGRADE INSTRUCTIONS
The following kit should be used when upgrading an AcQSim CT system with 3.1 software.

Kit # 4535 670 52811

Part Number Description Qty.
4535 670 52711 AcQSim CT 3.1 System Software CD (2 CD’s in set) 1
4535 670 52841 AcQSim CT 3.1 Software Release Notes 1
4535 670 51481 AcQSim CT 3.1 DICOM Conformance Statement 1
4535 670 52251 AcQSim CT 3.1 Software Upgrade Kit Instructions 1
4535 670 17151 AcQSim CT 3.1 User Documentation Package 1

NOTE
If the customer has purchased the gating option or localization option, it is recom-
mended that the activation key be obtained prior to upgrading the software, if needed.

NOTE
During the upgrade, the hard drive will be reformatted and all patient images will be lost.

1. Be sure all images are archived before starting this upgrade. Make a site tape immediately before installation. If in the Console or
Service Application, select Shutdown Console from the General Utilities button. When the Main Startup menu appears, click in the
lower left hand corner and type the word site (lower case) and press <enter>.
2. After the Save Site / Restore Site menu appears, push the tape in the tape drive, wait for the green light to stop blinking and select
“1” to Save Site. The system will eject the tape when finished.
3. Exit the Save Site Utility. When the Shutdown button becomes available, press it and wait for the system to shut down.
4. Open the CD–ROM drive and insert CD #1. Close the drive.
5. When the ok prompt appears, type boot cdrom (lower case) and press <enter>. After a few minutes, the password prompt will appear.
Type picker (lower case) and press <enter>.

03/01/04 REVISION A ACQSIM CT 3.1 SOFTWARE UPGRADE 1

6. The system then checks the disk configuration and prompts you with:
Enter the type of system installation:

1. RDS (Note: “RDS” refers to an Ultra Z Diagnostic Workstation, UDW)

2. Scanner Console

q. quit
7. Select option “2,” Scanner Console from the menu and press <enter>. You will see the following menu.
Enter a Console Installation option:

1. Install the OS and Application Software

2. Configure a Replaced Disk(s)
3. Upgrade Application Software Only

q. quit

8. Select option “1,” Install the OS and Application Software from the menu and press <enter>. Answer “y” to the next question. The
following will appear:
Please confirm the following network information:

Enter IP Address [default xxx.xxx.xx.xx]:

Enter Netmask [default 255.255.255.xxx]:
Enter Router [default xxx.xx.xx.xx]:
Enter Nodename [default consolexxxx]:

9. Press <enter> to accept the default values. After the information is entered, the system will display your choices as you entered them:
IP Address:
Netmask:
Router:
Nodename:

03/01/04 REVISION A ACQSIM CT 3.1 SOFTWARE UPGRADE 2

10. After the “Ready to run the installation. Are you satisfied? (y/n) [n]?” prompt appears:
If you answer NO to “Are you satisfied?”, the installation will cancel and take you back to the first sub–menu where you can quit the
installation program, or continue and adjust the network information.

If installation information is correct, choose “y” to “Are you satisfied?” and press <enter>.
11. The software will now begin installing from the first CD. Some time will pass during installation (approximately 25 minutes). DO NOT
PRESS ANY KEYS ON THE KEYBOARD. The following menu will then appear:
1. Install SCANNER Console Application Software
2. Eject the CD.

Select option “2,” Eject the CD, and press <enter>. Remove the first CD and put the second CD in, then close the drive door.
12. Select option “1,” and press <enter> to continue with the installation. You will be prompted with the “Are you satisfied?” question again.
Select “y”, press <enter>, and the system will continue with the software installation (approximately 20 to 30 minutes). After the
installation is complete, the system will reboot and the following menu will appear:
1. View the beginning of the installation error log
2. Eject the CD (it’s OK to eject it now)
3. Continue booting the machine

Choice:

NOTE
After the installation has completed, additional messages may be displayed on the
screen, pushing the above menu out of view. Simply press <enter> to see it again.

13. View the error log by choosing option 1. Errors may exist related to pdf help files. Other than these, there should be no errors in the
error log at this time. After viewing, the menu will be displayed again. Select option 2 and press <enter> to eject the CD. Remove
the CD and close the drive door. Then select option 3 to continue booting to the application software and press <enter>.

NOTE
A serial number mismatch error may occur. Close the error window.

14. Perform a Restore Site. When the Main Startup menu appears, click in the lower left corner and type the word site (lower case) and
press <enter>.

03/01/04 REVISION A ACQSIM CT 3.1 SOFTWARE UPGRADE 3

15. After the Save Site / Restore Site menu appears, push the tape in the tape drive, wait for the green light to stop blinking and select
“2” to Restore Site. The system will eject the tape when finished.
16. Exit the Save Site utility.

NOTE
A valid diagnostics key is required to continue. If you can not enter Diagnostics as
instructed in step 17., obtain a Diagnostics key per appropriate procedures.

17. After the 3.1 software installation is complete and the system has booted, start the Diagnostics GUI. At the Main Startup menu, click
in the lower left hand corner, type PICKER (upper case) and press <enter>.
18. At the Diagnostics Software Test Menu, click on the “Utilities” button and select “Flash Burner”. The flash burner is a utility for
transferring executable code from a directory on the SPARC disk to the Flash of the CP, DSP/AP, BP and GAM boards.

19. At the Flash Burner dialog box, enter the number of the board selected in the “Board name” category (1 for CP, 2 for GAM, 3 for DSP/AP,
and 4 for BP) and click “Continue”.

NOTE
The Acqimage Box must be enabled in the Hardware Status window before clicking on
“Continue”.

Flash Burner
System name: bay00
Board name: 1

Quit Continue

FIGURE 1 FLASH BURNER DIALOG BOX

20. An Xterm window will be displayed. Click the mouse in the Xterm window to activate it. Select option 1.) Transfer OS.

21. At the next menu, select 0. Start transfer. When completed, the board will reboot. The message “Rebooting the board, I/O session
is dead” will be displayed. Press <enter> to continue. There may be a delay before the Flash Burner window closes.

03/01/04 REVISION A ACQSIM CT 3.1 SOFTWARE UPGRADE 4

22. Restart the Flash burner from the GUI again on the same board. Then select option 2.) Transfer Diags.

23. When completed, the board will reboot. The message “Rebooting the board, I/O session is dead” will be displayed. Press <enter>
and repeat steps 18 thru 23 on the remaining three boards. Board numbers are: 2 for GAM, 3 for DSP/AP, 4 for BP. You can view
the date of the Flash OS via a Telnet session. At the pSH+> prompt, type romver and press <enter>. When flash burner is complete
on all boards, select “Exit” to exit the Diagnostics GUI.

Site Protocol Update Program Instructions

If upgrading from software version 1.0, proceed with the following instructions to perform the site protocol update program.

1. Restore the site information from tape (If the site information tape has already been restored, it is not necessary to restore it again).
2. At the four–button GUI, click the mouse in the lower left–hand corner. Type pptools and press <enter>.
3. Click in the window that comes up. Type update_protocols and press <enter>.
4. Type exit and press <enter>.
5. Test a sample of the site defined protocols by scanning.
6. When testing is complete, create a site tape with the new data.
7. This completes the 3.1 scanner software portion of the upgrade. After the initialization is complete, run a pilot, axial and spiral scan
to further ensure system functionality. This completes the 3.1 software upgrade. Reboot the system before turning it over to the
customer.
Manufacturer Name Update Instructions
To ensure that the manufacturer name reported on the scanner is ”Philips”, proceed with the following instructions.

1. Restore the site information tape (If the site information tape has already been restored, it is not necessary to restore it again).
2. At the four–button GUI, click the mouse in the lower left–hand corner. Type pptools and press <enter>.
3. Click in the window that comes up. Type update_mfg_name and press <enter>.
4. Type exit and press <enter>.
5. Verify that the manufacturer name is now ”Philips” by entering the Service application from the four–button GUI and checking the name
reported in the Configure Workstep.
6. When the verification is complete, create a site information tape.

03/01/04 REVISION A ACQSIM CT 3.1 SOFTWARE UPGRADE 5

Security Vulnerability Update
Security vulnerabilities have been identified in the AcQSim CT product. The Solaris Operating System commands (sadmind, in.talkd,
rpc.walid, and sendmail) contain security weaknesses that can be exploited. The instructions below edit a configuration file to disable
Solaris files that have been identified as security vulnerabilities. For sendmail, the permissions will be modified to disable outside access
of this command.
1. Get to the four button screen from which the options are ”Clinical Scanning”, ”Service”, ”Reboot”, and ”Shutdown”. If currently in
”Clinical Scanning” or ”Service”, exit the console by selecting ”Shutdown Console” from the General Utilities Shutdown option.
2. Move the mouse pointer into the lower left–hand corner of the four button screen, left click once, and type pptools <enter>. Note that
you will not see anything appearing on the screen as you type. This will launch an xterm window.
3. Click inside the x–term window. From the command prompt, type the following commands followed by <enter>. The commands to
type appear in bold below. You will be prompted for a password upon pressing <enter> following the “su” command below. Use
”picker”. (Unix is case sensitive so make sure that Caps Lock is off).

su <enter>
picker <enter>
cd /etc <enter>
cat inetd.conf > inetd.bak <enter>

NOTE: The following command contains ( ” ” ) and ( | ) that are required to be typed.

The pipe symbols ( | ) within the command are the two vertical lines above one another and commonly looks like a full vertical line.
This symbol is found on the same keyboard key as the backslash ( \ ) key. It is not the letter ” L or l ” or the number ” 1 ”. Make sure
there is a space between the second quotation mark and the term inetd.bak.

egrep –v ”walld|talkd|sadmind” inetd.bak > inetd.conf <enter>

NOTE: The following command contains three consecutive zeros ”000” not the letters ”OOO”.

chmod 000 /usr/lib/sendmail <enter>

4. The update is complete. Type ”exit” at the # prompt to exit the shell. Type ”exit” again in the xterm window and select ”Reboot” from
the four button screen to restart the scanner

03/01/04 REVISION A ACQSIM CT 3.1 SOFTWARE UPGRADE 6

Gating Option Activation Instructions
If customer has purchased Gating option, activate as follows.

1. From the four button main menu screen, select Service.

2. Select configure > options. At the Options Configuration screen, highlight the Gating option.
3. Gain access to Servecom. Follow the menu items, Service, CT, Key Codes, AcQSim CT/Ultra Z Diagnostic Keys. Input the AcQSim
CT serial number to obtain the Gating Key.
4. Enter enabling key information exactly as given to you.
5. Select Update Configuration Files to save information. Note the Gating button at the bottom of the screen will become active. See
Figure 2.

FIGURE 2 GATING AND LOCALIZATION

03/01/04 REVISION A ACQSIM CT 3.1 SOFTWARE UPGRADE 7

Localization Option Activation Instructions
If customer has purchased localization option, activate as follows.

1. From the four button main menu screen, select Service.

2. Select configure > options. At the Options Configuration screen, highlight the Localization option.
3. Gain access to Servecom. Follow the menu items, Service, CT, Key Codes, AcQSim CT/Ultra Z Diagnostic Keys. Input the AcQSim
CT serial number to obtain the Localization Key.
4. Enter enabling key information exactly as given to you.
5. Select Update Configuration Files to save information. Note the Localization button at the bottom of the screen will become active.
See Figure 2.
Connectivity to other Systems
The customers RTP system may require configuration of a “dummy” treatment machine to import the isocenter (RT Plan) from AcQSim
CT 3.1. The treatment machine can be changed within the RTP system after import. Refer to the AcQSim CT 3.1 DICOM Conformance
Statement for details on what tags and values are sent.

03/01/04 REVISION A ACQSIM CT 3.1 SOFTWARE UPGRADE 8

Localization Option Reference Information
To access the Laser Calibration Data, select the Localization button at the bottom of the service applications mode. At the Laser Calibration
Data screen, the recommended values are listed in the table. Measure the laser distance for each point when the laser installation is done
to determine the actual value. It is recommended that these values be verified by on–site hospital personnel. The following reference
information is provided for the Laser Calibration Data screen (see figure 3):

The Treatment Machine name is the name of the linear accelerator (linac) data is sent to. The CT Sim offset is site specific. The CT Sim
offset is the shift between the scan plane and the Laser Marking Plane. The CT Sim offset range of valid values is from 0 to 800.

Select Limit isocenter to slice boundary option to Yes if treatment planning system requires beam isocenters to be on a slice plane. When
this option is set to yes, beam isocenters that are computed or moved in Localization will jump to the nearest slice plane. If you leave this
option set to No, beam isocenters can be computed or moved to locations between slice planes.

The maximum contour points selection represents the maximum number of points per contour stored on the system and sent out through
DICOM transfer. Some treatment planning systems require fewer than the default 512 contour points. This field can be used to limit the
contour points to the amount required by these systems. The maximum contour points range of valid values is 16 to 512.

FIGURE 3 LASER CALIBRATION DATA SCREEN

03/01/04 REVISION A ACQSIM CT 3.1 SOFTWARE UPGRADE 9

Network/Camera Service Tab Reference Information

In the service application mode, some modifications have been made to the menu screen for the Network/Camera tab (see figure 4):

FIGURE 4 NETWORK/CAMERA TAB SCREEN

Under the Device type, the available devices have been updated to include:

UDW (Ultra Z Diagnostic Workstation)

Voxel Q
DICOM Worklist
DICOM Network
DICOM Camera
Li+ Camera
Printer
Other

03/01/04 REVISION A ACQSIM CT 3.1 SOFTWARE UPGRADE 10

Printer Setup for Worksheet Printing
In order to print a worksheet, the software must know about one or more network printers. If there is more than one printer, one of them
must be designated as the default printer.

1. Printer configuration is accomplished by selecting Service from the top level AcQSim CT Startup menu.
2. Once in the service application mode, select Configure, and then the Network/Camera button.
3. Select the Other Devices tab to bring up a list of network devices.
4. Select the Printer radio button.
5. Select either Add Device to add a printer or Modify Selected Device. See figure 5.

FIGURE 5 NETWORK DEVICES SCREEN

03/01/04 REVISION A ACQSIM CT 3.1 SOFTWARE UPGRADE 11

If Add Device is selected, the screen in figure 6 is displayed.

At this screen, enter the device name, its description, and the IP address of the printer’s server.

There are two radio buttons displayed for selection, one to indicate if it is a PostScript printer and another to indicate whether the printer
is the default printer. The default printer is the printer that will be used when the Worksheet button is selected on the Isocenter menu screen.

NOTE
There can be only one default printer.

Once printer properties have been set as desired, select Done and then select Update Configuration Files (located on the left hand side
of the service application mode main screen) to save the new or modified printer configuration information. It is recommended to update
the site tape after printer has been configured.

FIGURE 6 PRINTER DEVICE CONFIGURATION SCREEN

03/01/04 REVISION A ACQSIM CT 3.1 SOFTWARE UPGRADE 12

Voxel Q 4.9.1 Software Update Instructions
If the customer is using the Voxel Q workstation, it must be running software version 4.9.1 or higher in order to import LOC images from
the AcQSim CT running version 3.1 software. If the customer has purchased the LOC package, Voxel Q 4.9.1 software is required.

1. Determine if the Voxel Q is running version 4.9.1 software by launching the vx application.
2. If the Voxel Q is running version 4.9.1 software, you do not need to update the Voxel Q software.
3. If 4.9.1 software is not installed on the Voxel Q, install the Voxel Q V4.9.1 Software Upgrade Kit 4535 670 49101 for AcQPlan units,
or 4535 670 49091 for all other units. Follow the instructions supplied with the kit. This software should be installed on all Voxel Q
systems the customer is using.

03/01/04 REVISION A ACQSIM CT 3.1 SOFTWARE UPGRADE 13

 Philips Medical Systems

AcQSim CT 3.1.1 Software Upgrade

Kit Instructions

Part Number: 4535 670 73151 Revision: A

All pages of this document contain proprietary and confidential information of Philips Medical Systems (Cleveland), Inc. The documents are intended for current Philips Medical
Systems (Cleveland), Inc. personnel or are licensed to Philips Medical Systems (Cleveland), Inc. customer for use by the customer's in-house service employee on equipment
located at the customer's designated site. Copying, disclosure to others or other use is prohibited without the express written authorization of Philips Medical Systems
(Cleveland), Inc. Law Department. Report violation of these requirements to the Philips Medical Systems (Cleveland), Inc. Law Department, Highland Heights, Ohio.

Service Publication, Philips Medical Systems (Cleveland) Inc. Highland Hts., OH 44143
E 2004 All rights reserved under the copyright laws of the United States.
 E 2004

Philips Medical Systems (Cleveland), Inc. Highland Hts., OH 44143

All rights reserved under the copyright laws of the United States
This document prepared by the Service Publications Department.
Note any additions/corrections via an electronic Field Feedback Form.
 SYMBOL DESCRIPTIONS
Attention symbol. Radiation warning symbol.

Laser warning symbol. Biohazard warning symbol.

Magnetism warning symbol. Projectile warning symbol.

Electrical warning symbol.

 REVISION HISTORY
REVISION DATE COMMENTS
–1 07/13/04 Final review copy
A 07/15/04 Release at revision A
 NOTICE
THE INFORMATION CONTAINED IN THIS MANUAL CONFORMS WITH THE CONFIGURATION OF THE EQUIPMENT AS OF THE DATE OF MANUFACTURE. REVISIONS TO THE EQUIPMENT
SUBSEQUENT TO THE DATE OF MANUFACTURE WILL BE ADDRESSED IN SERVICE UPDATES DISTRIBUTED TO PHILIPS MEDICAL SYSTEMS TECHNICAL SERVICE ORGANIZATION.

TO THE USER OF THIS MANUAL

THE USER OF THIS MANUAL IS DIRECTED TO READ AND CAREFULLY REVIEW THE INSTRUCTIONS, WARNINGS AND CAUTIONS CONTAINED HEREIN PRIOR TO BEGINNING
INSTALLATION OR SERVICE ACTIVITIES. WHILE YOU MAY HAVE PREVIOUSLY INSTALLED OR SERVICED EQUIPMENT SIMILAR TO THAT DESCRIBED IN THIS MANUAL, CHANGES IN
DESIGN, MANUFACTURE OR PROCEDURE MAY HAVE OCCURRED WHICH SIGNIFICANTLY AFFECT THE PRESENT INSTALLATION OR SERVICE.
THE INSTALLATION AND SERVICE OF EQUIPMENT DESCRIBED HEREIN IS TO BE PREFORMED BY AUTHORIZED, QUALIFIED PHILIPS MEDICAL SYSTEM PERSONNEL. ASSEMBLERS
AND OTHER PERSONNEL NOT EMPLOYED BY NOR DIRECTLY AFFILIATED WITH PHILIPS MEDICAL SYSTEMS TECHNICAL SERVICES ARE DIRECTED TO CONTACT THE LOCAL
PHILIPS MEDICAL SYSTEMS OFFICE BEFORE ATTEMPTING INSTALLATION OR SERVICE PROCEDURES.

INSTALLATION AND ENVIRONMENT

EXCEPT FOR INSTALLATIONS REQUIRING CERTIFICATION BY THE MANUFACTURER PER FEDERAL STANDARDS, SEE THAT A RADIATION PROTECTION SURVEY IS MADE BY A
QUALIFIED EXPERT IN ACCORDANCE WITH NCRP 102, SECTION 7, AS REVISED OR REPLACED IN THE FUTURE. PERFORM A SURVEY AFTER EVERY CHANGE IN EQUIPMENT,
WORKLOAD, OR OPERATING CONDITIONS WHICH MIGHT SIGNIFICANTLY INCREASE THE PROBABILITY OF PERSONS RECEIVING MORE THAN THE MAXIMUM PERMISSIBLE DOSE
EQUIVALENT.

Diagnostic Imaging Systems – MECHANICAL-ELECTRICAL WARNING

ALL OF THE MOVEABLE ASSEMBLIES AND PARTS OF THIS EQUIPMENT SHOULD BE OPERATED WITH CARE AND ROUTINELY INSPECTED IN ACCORDANCE WITH THE MANUFACTURER’S
RECOMMENDATIONS CONTAINED IN THE EQUIPMENT MANUALS.
ONLY PROPERLY TRAINED AND QUALIFIED PERSONNEL SHOULD BE PERMITTED ACCESS TO ANY INTERNAL PARTS. LIVE ELECTRICAL TERMINALS ARE DEADLY; BE SURE LINE
DISCONNECTS ARE OPENED AND OTHER APPROPRIATE PRECAUTIONS ARE TAKEN BEFORE OPENING ACCESS DOORS, REMOVING ENCLOSURE PANELS, OR ATTACHING
ACCESSORIES.
DO NOT UNDER ANY CIRCUMSTANCES, REMOVE THE FLEXIBLE HIGH TENSION CABLES FROM THE X-RAY TUBE HOUSING OR HIGH TENSION GENERATOR AND/OR THE ACCESS
COVERS FROM THE GENERATOR UNTIL THE MAIN AND AUXILIARY POWER SUPPLIES HAVE BEEN DISCONNECTED. FAILURE TO COMPLY WITH THE ABOVE MAY RESULT IN SERIOUS
OR FATAL BODILY INJURIES TO THE OPERATOR OR THOSE IN THE AREA.

ELECTRICAL-GROUNDING INSTRUCTIONS
THE EQUIPMENT MUST BE GROUNDED TO AN EARTH GROUND BY A SEPARATE CONDUCTOR. THE NEUTRAL SIDE OF THE LINE IS NOT TO BE CONSIDERED THE EARTH GROUND.
ON EQUIPMENT PROVIDED WITH A LINE CORD, THE EQUIPMENT MUST BE CONNECTED TO PROPERLY GROUNDED, THREE-PIN RECEPTACLE. DO NOT USE A THREE-TO-TWO PIN
ADAPTER.

Diagnostic Imaging Systems – RADIATION WARNING

X-RAY AND GAMMA-RAYS ARE DANGEROUS TO BOTH OPERATOR AND OTHERS IN THE VICINITY UNLESS ESTABLISHED SAFE EXPOSURE PROCEDURES ARE STRICTLY OBSERVED.
THE USEFUL AND SCATTERED BEAMS CAN PRODUCE SERIOUS OR FATAL BODILY INJURIES TO ANY PERSONS IN THE SURROUNDING AREA IF USED BY AN UNSKILLED OPERATOR.
ADEQUATE PRECAUTIONS MUST ALWAYS BE TAKEN TO AVOID EXPOSURE TO THE USEFUL BEAM, AS WELL AS TO LEAKAGE RADIATION FROM WITHIN THE SOURCE HOUSING OR
TO SCATTERED RADIATION RESULTING FROM THE PASSAGE OF RADIATION THROUGH MATTER.
THOSE AUTHORIZED TO OPERATE, PARTICIPATE IN OR SUPERVISE THE OPERATION OF THE EQUIPMENT MUST BE THOROUGHLY FAMILIAR AND COMPLY COMPLETELY WITH THE
CURRENT ESTABLISHED SAFE EXPOSURE FACTORS AND PROCEDURES DESCRIBED IN PUBLICATIONS, SUCH AS: SUBCHAPTER J OF TITLE 21 OF THE CODE OF FEDERAL
REGULATIONS, “DIAGNOSTIC X-RAY SYSTEMS AND THEIR MAJOR COMPONENTS”, AND THE NATIONAL COUNCIL ON RADIATION PROTECTION (NCRP) NO. 102, “MEDICAL X-RAY AND
GAMMA-RAY PROTECTION FOR ENERGIES UP TO 10 MEV-EQUIPMENT DESIGN AND USE”, AS REVISED OR REPLACED IN THE FUTURE.
THOSE RESPONSIBLE FOR PLANNING OF X-RAY AND GAMMA-RAY EQUIPMENT INSTALLATIONS MUST BE THOROUGHLY FAMILIAR AND COMPLY COMPLETELY WITH NCRP NO. 49,
“STRUCTURAL SHIELDING DESIGN AND EVALUATION FOR MEDICAL OF X-RAYS AND GAMMA-RAYS OF ENERGIES UP TO 10 MEV”, AS REVISED AND REPLACED IN THE FUTURE. FAILURE
TO OBSERVE THESE WARNINGS MAY CAUSE SERIOUS OR FATAL BODILY INJURIES TO THE OPERATOR OR THOSE IN THE AREA.
 TABLE OF CONTENTS

AcQSim CT 3.1.1 Software Upgrade Instructions . . . . . . . . 1

Site Protocol Update Program Instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6

Manufacturer Name Update Instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6

Security Vulnerability Update . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7

Gating Option Activation Instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8

Localization Option Activation Instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9

Connectivity to other Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9

Localization Option Reference Information . . . . . . . . . . . . 10

Network/Camera Service Tab Reference Information . . . 11

Printer Setup for Worksheet Printing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12

Voxel Q 4.9.1 Software Update Information . . . . . . . . . . . . 14

ACQSIM CT 3.1.1 SOFTWARE UPGRADE INSTRUCTIONS
The following kit should be used when upgrading an AcQSim CT system with 3.1.1 software.

Kit # 4535 670 85281

Part Number Description Qty.
4535 670 90591 AcQSim CT 3.1.1 System Software CD (2 CD’s in set) 1
4535 670 73161 AcQSim CT 3.1.1 Software Release Notes 1
4535 670 89701 AcQSim CT 3.1.1 DICOM Conformance Statement 1
4535 670 73151 AcQSim CT 3.1.1 Software Upgrade Kit Instructions 1
4535 670 55541 AcQSim CT 3.1 User Documentation Package 1

NOTE
If the customer has purchased the gating option or localization option, it is recom-
mended that the activation key be obtained prior to upgrading the software, if needed.

NOTE
During the upgrade, the hard drive will be reformatted and all patient images will be lost.

1. Be sure all images are archived before starting this upgrade. Make a site tape immediately before installation. If in the Console or
Service Application, select Shutdown Console from the General Utilities button. When the Main Startup menu appears, click in the
lower left hand corner and type the word site (lower case) and press <enter>.

NOTE
Make sure the site save tape is not write–protected.

2. After the Save Site / Restore Site menu appears, push the tape in the tape drive, wait for the green light to stop blinking and select
“1” to Save Site. The system will eject the tape when finished.
3. Exit the Save Site Utility. When the Shutdown button becomes available, press it and wait for the system to shut down.

07/15/04 REVISION A ACQSIM CT 3.1.1 SOFTWARE UPGRADE 1

4. Open the CD–ROM drive and insert CD #1. Close the drive.
5. When the ok prompt appears, type boot cdrom (lower case) and press <enter>. After a few minutes, the password prompt will appear.
Type picker (lower case) and press <enter>.
6. The system then checks the disk configuration and prompts you with:
Enter the type of system installation:

1. RDS (Note: “RDS” refers to an Ultra Z Diagnostic Workstation, UDW)

2. Scanner Console

q. quit
7. Select option “2,” Scanner Console from the menu and press <enter>. You will see the following menu.
Enter a Console Installation option:

1. Install the OS and Application Software

2. Configure a Replaced Disk(s)
3. Upgrade Application Software Only

q. quit

NOTE
If you have not archived patient data as instructed in step 1, step 8 will delete all data.

8. Select option “1,” Install the OS and Application Software from the menu and press <enter>. Answer “y” to the next question. The
following will appear:
Please confirm the following network information:

Enter IP Address [default xxx.xxx.xx.xx]:

Enter Netmask [default 255.255.255.xxx]:
Enter Router [default xxx.xx.xx.xx]:
Enter Nodename [default consolexxxx]:

07/15/04 REVISION A ACQSIM CT 3.1.1 SOFTWARE UPGRADE 2

9. Press <enter> to accept the default values. After the information is entered, the system will display your choices as you entered them:
IP Address:
Netmask:
Router:
Nodename:

10. After the “Ready to run the installation. Are you satisfied? (y/n) [n]?” prompt appears:
If you answer NO to “Are you satisfied?”, the installation will cancel and take you back to the first sub–menu where you can quit the
installation program, or continue and adjust the network information.

If installation information is correct, choose “y” to “Are you satisfied?” and press <enter>.
11. The software will now begin installing from the first CD. Some time will pass during installation (approximately 25 minutes). DO NOT
PRESS ANY KEYS ON THE KEYBOARD. The following menu will then appear:
1. Install SCANNER Console Application Software
2. Eject the CD.

Select option “2,” Eject the CD, and press <enter>. Remove the first CD and put the second CD in, then close the drive door.

12. Select option “1,” and press <enter> to continue with the installation. You will be prompted with the “Are you satisfied?” question again.
Select “y”, press <enter>, and the system will continue with the software installation (approximately 20 to 30 minutes). After the
installation is complete, the system will reboot and the following menu will appear:
1. View the beginning of the installation error log
2. Eject the CD (it’s OK to eject it now)
3. Continue booting the machine

Choice:

NOTE
After the installation has completed, additional messages may be displayed on the
screen, pushing the above menu out of view. Simply press <enter> to see it again.

07/15/04 REVISION A ACQSIM CT 3.1.1 SOFTWARE UPGRADE 3

 NOTE
In the error log, errors may exist related to pdf help files. Errors may also exist related
to matlab/etc/license.log. These errors do not affect operation and should be ignored.
Other than these listed errors, there should be no other errors in the error log at this
time.

13. View the error log by choosing option 1. After viewing, the menu will be displayed again. Select option 2 and press <enter> to eject
the CD. Remove the CD and close the drive door. Then select option 3 to continue booting to the application software and press
<enter>.

NOTE
A serial number mismatch error may occur. Close the error window.

14. Perform a Restore Site. When the Main Startup menu appears, click in the lower left corner and type the word site (lower case) and
press <enter>.
15. After the Save Site / Restore Site menu appears, push the tape in the tape drive, wait for the green light to stop blinking and select
“2” to Restore Site. The system will eject the tape when finished.
16. Exit the Save Site utility.

NOTE
A valid diagnostics key is required to continue. If you can not enter Diagnostics as
instructed in step 17., obtain a Diagnostics key per appropriate procedures.

17. After the 3.1.1 software installation is complete and the system has booted, start the Diagnostics GUI. At the Main Startup menu, click
in the lower left hand corner, type PICKER (upper case) and press <enter>.
18. At the Diagnostics Software Test Menu, click on the “Utilities” button and select “Flash Burner”. The flash burner is a utility for
transferring executable code from a directory on the SPARC disk to the Flash of the CP, DSP/AP, BP and GAM boards.

07/15/04 REVISION A ACQSIM CT 3.1.1 SOFTWARE UPGRADE 4

19. At the Flash Burner dialog box (refer to Figure 1), enter the number of the board selected in the “Board name” category (1 for CP, 2
for GAM, 3 for DSP/AP, and 4 for BP) and click “Continue”.

NOTE
The Acqimage Box must be enabled in the Hardware Status window before clicking on
“Continue”.

Flash Burner
System name: bay00
Board name: 1

Quit Continue

FIGURE 1 FLASH BURNER DIALOG BOX

20. An Xterm window will be displayed. Click the mouse in the Xterm window to activate it. Select option 1.) Transfer OS.

21. At the next menu, select 0. Start transfer. When completed, the board will reboot. The message “Rebooting the board, I/O session
is dead” will be displayed. Press <enter> to continue. There may be a delay before the Flash Burner window closes.

22. Restart the Flash burner from the GUI again on the same board. Then select option 2.) Transfer Diags.

23. When completed, the board will reboot. The message “Rebooting the board, I/O session is dead” will be displayed. Press <enter>
and repeat steps 18 thru 23 on the remaining three boards. Board numbers are: 2 for GAM, 3 for DSP/AP, 4 for BP. You can view
the date of the Flash OS via a Telnet session. At the pSH+> prompt, type romver and press <enter>. When flash burner is complete
on all boards, select “Exit” to exit the Diagnostics GUI.

07/15/04 REVISION A ACQSIM CT 3.1.1 SOFTWARE UPGRADE 5

Site Protocol Update Program Instructions
If upgrading from software version 1.0, proceed with the following instructions to perform the site protocol update program.

1. Restore the site information from tape (If the site information tape has already been restored, it is not necessary to restore it again).
2. At the four–button GUI, click the mouse in the lower left–hand corner. Type pptools and press <enter>.
3. Click in the window that comes up. Type update_protocols and press <enter>.
4. Type exit and press <enter>.
5. Test a sample of the site defined protocols by scanning.
6. When testing is complete, create a site tape with the new data.
7. This completes the 3.1.1 scanner software portion of the upgrade. After the initialization is complete, run a pilot, axial and spiral scan
to further ensure system functionality. This completes the 3.1.1 software upgrade. Reboot the system before turning it over to the
customer.
Manufacturer Name Update Instructions
To ensure that the manufacturer name reported on the scanner is ”Philips”, proceed with the following instructions.

1. Restore the site information tape (If the site information tape has already been restored, it is not necessary to restore it again).
2. At the four–button GUI, click the mouse in the lower left–hand corner. Type pptools and press <enter>.
3. Click in the window that comes up. Type update_mfg_name and press <enter>.
4. Type exit and press <enter>.
5. Verify that the manufacturer name is now ”Philips” by entering the Service application from the four–button GUI and checking the name
reported in the Configure Workstep.
6. When the verification is complete, create a site information tape.

07/15/04 REVISION A ACQSIM CT 3.1.1 SOFTWARE UPGRADE 6

Security Vulnerability Update
Security vulnerabilities have been identified in the AcQSim CT product. The Solaris Operating System commands (sadmind, in.talkd,
rpc.walid, and sendmail) contain security weaknesses that can be exploited. The instructions below edit a configuration file to disable
Solaris files that have been identified as security vulnerabilities. For sendmail, the permissions will be modified to disable outside access
of this command.
1. Get to the four button screen from which the options are ”Clinical Scanning”, ”Service”, ”Reboot”, and ”Shutdown”. If currently in
”Clinical Scanning” or ”Service”, exit the console by selecting ”Shutdown Console” from the General Utilities Shutdown option.
2. Move the mouse pointer into the lower left–hand corner of the four button screen, left click once, and type pptools <enter>. Note that
you will not see anything appearing on the screen as you type. This will launch an xterm window.
3. Click inside the x–term window. From the command prompt, type the following commands followed by <enter>. The commands to
type appear in bold below. You will be prompted for a password upon pressing <enter> following the “su” command below. Use
”picker”. (Unix is case sensitive so make sure that Caps Lock is off).

su <enter>
picker <enter>
cd /etc <enter>
cat inetd.conf > inetd.bak <enter>

NOTE: The following command contains ( ” ” ) and ( | ) that are required to be typed.

The pipe symbols ( | ) within the command are the two vertical lines above one another and commonly looks like a full vertical line.
This symbol is found on the same keyboard key as the backslash ( \ ) key. It is not the letter ” L or l ” or the number ” 1 ”. Make sure
there is a space between the second quotation mark and the term inetd.bak.

egrep –v ”walld|talkd|sadmind” inetd.bak > inetd.conf <enter>

NOTE: The following command contains three consecutive zeros ”000” not the letters ”OOO”.

chmod 000 /usr/lib/sendmail <enter>

4. The update is complete. Type ”exit” at the # prompt to exit the shell. Type ”exit” again in the xterm window and select ”Reboot” from
the four button screen to restart the scanner

07/15/04 REVISION A ACQSIM CT 3.1.1 SOFTWARE UPGRADE 7

Gating Option Activation Instructions
If customer has purchased Gating option, activate as follows.

1. From the four button main menu screen, select Service.

2. Select configure > options. At the Options Configuration screen, highlight the Gating option.
3. Gain access to Servecom. Follow the menu items, Service, CT, Key Codes, AcQSim CT/Ultra Z Diagnostic Keys. Input the AcQSim
CT serial number to obtain the Gating Key.
4. Enter enabling key information exactly as given to you.
5. Select Update Configuration Files to save information. Note the Gating button at the bottom of the screen will become active. See
Figure 2.

FIGURE 2 GATING AND LOCALIZATION

07/15/04 REVISION A ACQSIM CT 3.1.1 SOFTWARE UPGRADE 8

Localization Option Activation Instructions
If customer has purchased localization option, activate as follows.

1. From the four button main menu screen, select Service.

2. Select configure > options. At the Options Configuration screen, highlight the Localization option.
3. Gain access to Servecom. Follow the menu items, Service, CT, Key Codes, AcQSim CT/Ultra Z Diagnostic Keys. Input the AcQSim
CT serial number to obtain the Localization Key.
4. Enter enabling key information exactly as given to you.
5. Select Update Configuration Files to save information. Note the Localization button at the bottom of the screen will become active.
See Figure 2.
Connectivity to other Systems
The customers RTP system may require configuration of a “dummy” treatment machine to import the isocenter (RT Plan) from AcQSim
CT 3.1.1. The treatment machine can be changed within the RTP system after import. Refer to the AcQSim CT 3.1.1 DICOM Conformance
Statement for details on what tags and values are sent.

07/15/04 REVISION A ACQSIM CT 3.1.1 SOFTWARE UPGRADE 9

Localization Option Reference Information
To access the Laser Calibration Data, select the Localization button at the bottom of the service applications mode. At the Laser Calibration
Data screen, the recommended values are listed in the table. Measure the laser distance for each point when the laser installation is done
to determine the actual value. It is recommended that these values be verified by on–site hospital personnel. The following reference
information is provided for the Laser Calibration Data screen (see figure 3):

The Treatment Machine name is the name of the linear accelerator (linac) data is sent to. The CT Sim offset is site specific. The CT Sim
offset is the shift between the scan plane and the Laser Marking Plane. The CT Sim offset range of valid values is from 0 to 800.

Select Limit isocenter to slice boundary option to Yes if treatment planning system requires beam isocenters to be on a slice plane. When
this option is set to yes, beam isocenters that are computed or moved in Localization will jump to the nearest slice plane. If you leave this
option set to No, beam isocenters can be computed or moved to locations between slice planes.

The maximum contour points selection represents the maximum number of points per contour stored on the system and sent out through
DICOM transfer. Some treatment planning systems require fewer than the default 512 contour points. This field can be used to limit the
contour points to the amount required by these systems. The maximum contour points range of valid values is 16 to 512.

FIGURE 3 LASER CALIBRATION DATA SCREEN

07/15/04 REVISION A ACQSIM CT 3.1.1 SOFTWARE UPGRADE 10

Network/Camera Service Tab Reference Information

In the service application mode, some modifications have been made to the menu screen for the Network/Camera tab (see figure 4):

FIGURE 4 NETWORK/CAMERA TAB SCREEN

Under the Device type, the available devices have been updated to include:

UDW (Ultra Z Diagnostic Workstation)

Voxel Q
DICOM Worklist
DICOM Network
DICOM Camera
Li+ Camera
Printer
Other

07/15/04 REVISION A ACQSIM CT 3.1.1 SOFTWARE UPGRADE 11

Printer Setup for Worksheet Printing
In order to print a worksheet, the software must know about one or more network printers. If there is more than one printer, one of them
must be designated as the default printer.

1. Printer configuration is accomplished by selecting Service from the top level AcQSim CT Startup menu.
2. Once in the service application mode, select Configure, and then the Network/Camera button.
3. Select the Other Devices tab to bring up a list of network devices.
4. Select the Printer radio button.
5. Select either Add Device to add a printer or Modify Selected Device. See figure 5.

FIGURE 5 NETWORK DEVICES SCREEN

07/15/04 REVISION A ACQSIM CT 3.1.1 SOFTWARE UPGRADE 12

If Add Device is selected, the screen in figure 6 is displayed.

At this screen, enter the device name, its description, and the IP address of the printer’s server.

There are two radio buttons displayed for selection, one to indicate if it is a PostScript printer and another to indicate whether the printer
is the default printer. The default printer is the printer that will be used when the Worksheet button is selected on the Isocenter menu screen.

NOTE
There can be only one default printer.

Once printer properties have been set as desired, select Done and then select Update Configuration Files (located on the left hand side
of the service application mode main screen) to save the new or modified printer configuration information. It is recommended to update
the site tape after printer has been configured.

FIGURE 6 PRINTER DEVICE CONFIGURATION SCREEN

07/15/04 REVISION A ACQSIM CT 3.1.1 SOFTWARE UPGRADE 13

Voxel Q 4.9.1 Software Update Instructions
If the customer is using the Voxel Q workstation, it must be running software version 4.9.1 or higher in order to import LOC images from
the AcQSim CT running version 3.1.1 software. If the customer has purchased the LOC package, Voxel Q 4.9.1 software is required.

1. Determine if the Voxel Q is running version 4.9.1 software by launching the vx application.
2. If the Voxel Q is running version 4.9.1 software, you do not need to update the Voxel Q software.
3. If 4.9.1 software is not installed on the Voxel Q, install the Voxel Q V4.9.1 Software Upgrade Kit 4535 670 49101 for AcQPlan units,
or 4535 670 49091 for all other units. Follow the instructions supplied with the kit. This software should be installed on all Voxel Q
systems the customer is using.

07/15/04 REVISION A ACQSIM CT 3.1.1 SOFTWARE UPGRADE 14

 Philips Medical Systems

AcQSim CT 4.0 Software Upgrade

Kit Instructions

Part Number: 4535 670 49781 Revision: A

All pages of this document contain proprietary and confidential information of Philips Medical Systems (Cleveland), Inc. The documents are intended for current Philips Medical
Systems (Cleveland), Inc. personnel or are licensed to Philips Medical Systems (Cleveland), Inc. customer for use by the customer's in-house service employee on equipment
located at the customer's designated site. Copying, disclosure to others or other use is prohibited without the express written authorization of Philips Medical Systems
(Cleveland), Inc. Law Department. Report violation of these requirements to the Philips Medical Systems (Cleveland), Inc. Law Department, Highland Heights, Ohio.

Service Publication, Philips Medical Systems (Cleveland) Inc. Highland Hts., OH 44143
E 2004 All rights reserved under the copyright laws of the United States.
 E 2004

Philips Medical Systems (Cleveland), Inc. Highland Hts., OH 44143

All rights reserved under the copyright laws of the United States
This document prepared by the Service Publications Department.
Note any additions/corrections via an electronic Field Feedback Form.
 SYMBOL DESCRIPTIONS
Attention symbol. Radiation warning symbol.

Laser warning symbol. Biohazard warning symbol.

Magnetism warning symbol. Projectile warning symbol.

Electrical warning symbol.

 REVISION HISTORY
REVISION DATE COMMENTS
–1 07/22/04 Final review copy
A 07/26/04 Release at revision A
 NOTICE
THE INFORMATION CONTAINED IN THIS MANUAL CONFORMS WITH THE CONFIGURATION OF THE EQUIPMENT AS OF THE DATE OF MANUFACTURE. REVISIONS TO THE EQUIPMENT
SUBSEQUENT TO THE DATE OF MANUFACTURE WILL BE ADDRESSED IN SERVICE UPDATES DISTRIBUTED TO PHILIPS MEDICAL SYSTEMS TECHNICAL SERVICE ORGANIZATION.

TO THE USER OF THIS MANUAL

THE USER OF THIS MANUAL IS DIRECTED TO READ AND CAREFULLY REVIEW THE INSTRUCTIONS, WARNINGS AND CAUTIONS CONTAINED HEREIN PRIOR TO BEGINNING
INSTALLATION OR SERVICE ACTIVITIES. WHILE YOU MAY HAVE PREVIOUSLY INSTALLED OR SERVICED EQUIPMENT SIMILAR TO THAT DESCRIBED IN THIS MANUAL, CHANGES IN
DESIGN, MANUFACTURE OR PROCEDURE MAY HAVE OCCURRED WHICH SIGNIFICANTLY AFFECT THE PRESENT INSTALLATION OR SERVICE.
THE INSTALLATION AND SERVICE OF EQUIPMENT DESCRIBED HEREIN IS TO BE PREFORMED BY AUTHORIZED, QUALIFIED PHILIPS MEDICAL SYSTEM PERSONNEL. ASSEMBLERS
AND OTHER PERSONNEL NOT EMPLOYED BY NOR DIRECTLY AFFILIATED WITH PHILIPS MEDICAL SYSTEMS TECHNICAL SERVICES ARE DIRECTED TO CONTACT THE LOCAL
PHILIPS MEDICAL SYSTEMS OFFICE BEFORE ATTEMPTING INSTALLATION OR SERVICE PROCEDURES.

INSTALLATION AND ENVIRONMENT

EXCEPT FOR INSTALLATIONS REQUIRING CERTIFICATION BY THE MANUFACTURER PER FEDERAL STANDARDS, SEE THAT A RADIATION PROTECTION SURVEY IS MADE BY A
QUALIFIED EXPERT IN ACCORDANCE WITH NCRP 102, SECTION 7, AS REVISED OR REPLACED IN THE FUTURE. PERFORM A SURVEY AFTER EVERY CHANGE IN EQUIPMENT,
WORKLOAD, OR OPERATING CONDITIONS WHICH MIGHT SIGNIFICANTLY INCREASE THE PROBABILITY OF PERSONS RECEIVING MORE THAN THE MAXIMUM PERMISSIBLE DOSE
EQUIVALENT.

Diagnostic Imaging Systems – MECHANICAL-ELECTRICAL WARNING

ALL OF THE MOVEABLE ASSEMBLIES AND PARTS OF THIS EQUIPMENT SHOULD BE OPERATED WITH CARE AND ROUTINELY INSPECTED IN ACCORDANCE WITH THE MANUFACTURER’S
RECOMMENDATIONS CONTAINED IN THE EQUIPMENT MANUALS.
ONLY PROPERLY TRAINED AND QUALIFIED PERSONNEL SHOULD BE PERMITTED ACCESS TO ANY INTERNAL PARTS. LIVE ELECTRICAL TERMINALS ARE DEADLY; BE SURE LINE
DISCONNECTS ARE OPENED AND OTHER APPROPRIATE PRECAUTIONS ARE TAKEN BEFORE OPENING ACCESS DOORS, REMOVING ENCLOSURE PANELS, OR ATTACHING
ACCESSORIES.
DO NOT UNDER ANY CIRCUMSTANCES, REMOVE THE FLEXIBLE HIGH TENSION CABLES FROM THE X-RAY TUBE HOUSING OR HIGH TENSION GENERATOR AND/OR THE ACCESS
COVERS FROM THE GENERATOR UNTIL THE MAIN AND AUXILIARY POWER SUPPLIES HAVE BEEN DISCONNECTED. FAILURE TO COMPLY WITH THE ABOVE MAY RESULT IN SERIOUS
OR FATAL BODILY INJURIES TO THE OPERATOR OR THOSE IN THE AREA.

ELECTRICAL-GROUNDING INSTRUCTIONS
THE EQUIPMENT MUST BE GROUNDED TO AN EARTH GROUND BY A SEPARATE CONDUCTOR. THE NEUTRAL SIDE OF THE LINE IS NOT TO BE CONSIDERED THE EARTH GROUND.
ON EQUIPMENT PROVIDED WITH A LINE CORD, THE EQUIPMENT MUST BE CONNECTED TO PROPERLY GROUNDED, THREE-PIN RECEPTACLE. DO NOT USE A THREE-TO-TWO PIN
ADAPTER.

Diagnostic Imaging Systems – RADIATION WARNING

X-RAY AND GAMMA-RAYS ARE DANGEROUS TO BOTH OPERATOR AND OTHERS IN THE VICINITY UNLESS ESTABLISHED SAFE EXPOSURE PROCEDURES ARE STRICTLY OBSERVED.
THE USEFUL AND SCATTERED BEAMS CAN PRODUCE SERIOUS OR FATAL BODILY INJURIES TO ANY PERSONS IN THE SURROUNDING AREA IF USED BY AN UNSKILLED OPERATOR.
ADEQUATE PRECAUTIONS MUST ALWAYS BE TAKEN TO AVOID EXPOSURE TO THE USEFUL BEAM, AS WELL AS TO LEAKAGE RADIATION FROM WITHIN THE SOURCE HOUSING OR
TO SCATTERED RADIATION RESULTING FROM THE PASSAGE OF RADIATION THROUGH MATTER.
THOSE AUTHORIZED TO OPERATE, PARTICIPATE IN OR SUPERVISE THE OPERATION OF THE EQUIPMENT MUST BE THOROUGHLY FAMILIAR AND COMPLY COMPLETELY WITH THE
CURRENT ESTABLISHED SAFE EXPOSURE FACTORS AND PROCEDURES DESCRIBED IN PUBLICATIONS, SUCH AS: SUBCHAPTER J OF TITLE 21 OF THE CODE OF FEDERAL
REGULATIONS, “DIAGNOSTIC X-RAY SYSTEMS AND THEIR MAJOR COMPONENTS”, AND THE NATIONAL COUNCIL ON RADIATION PROTECTION (NCRP) NO. 102, “MEDICAL X-RAY AND
GAMMA-RAY PROTECTION FOR ENERGIES UP TO 10 MEV-EQUIPMENT DESIGN AND USE”, AS REVISED OR REPLACED IN THE FUTURE.
THOSE RESPONSIBLE FOR PLANNING OF X-RAY AND GAMMA-RAY EQUIPMENT INSTALLATIONS MUST BE THOROUGHLY FAMILIAR AND COMPLY COMPLETELY WITH NCRP NO. 49,
“STRUCTURAL SHIELDING DESIGN AND EVALUATION FOR MEDICAL OF X-RAYS AND GAMMA-RAYS OF ENERGIES UP TO 10 MEV”, AS REVISED AND REPLACED IN THE FUTURE. FAILURE
TO OBSERVE THESE WARNINGS MAY CAUSE SERIOUS OR FATAL BODILY INJURIES TO THE OPERATOR OR THOSE IN THE AREA.
 TABLE OF CONTENTS

AcQSim CT 4.0 Software Upgrade Instructions . . . . . . . . . 1

Site Protocol Update Program Instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6

Manufacturer Name Update Instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6

Security Vulnerability Update . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7

Localization Option Activation Instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8

Connectivity to other Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8

Localization Option Reference Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9

Network/Camera Service Tab Reference Information . . . 10

Printer Setup for Worksheet Printing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11

Voxel Q 4.9.1 Software Update Information . . . . . . . . . . . . 13

ACQSIM CT 4.0 SOFTWARE UPGRADE INSTRUCTIONS
The following kit should be used when upgrading an AcQSim CT system with 4.0 software.

Kit # 4535 670 99671

Part Number Description Qty.
4535 670 99741 AcQSim CT 4.0 System Software CD (2 CD’s in set) 1
4535 670 99711 AcQSim CT 4.0 Software Release Notes 1
4535 670 89931 AcQSim CT 4.0 DICOM Conformance Statement 1
4535 670 49781 AcQSim CT 4.0 Software Upgrade Kit Instructions 1
4535 670 96251 AcQSim CT 4.0 User Documentation Package 1

NOTE
During the upgrade, the hard drive will be reformatted and all patient images will be lost.

1. Be sure all images are archived before starting this upgrade. Make a site tape immediately before installation. If in the Console or
Service Application, select Shutdown Console from the General Utilities button. When the Main Startup menu appears, click in the
lower left hand corner and type the word site (lower case) and press <enter>.

NOTE
Make sure the site save tape is not write–protected.

2. After the Save Site / Restore Site menu appears, push the tape in the tape drive, wait for the green light to stop blinking and select
“1” to Save Site. The system will eject the tape when finished.
3. Exit the Save Site Utility. When the Shutdown button becomes available, press it and wait for the system to shut down.
4. Open the CD–ROM drive and insert CD #1. Close the drive.
5. When the ok prompt appears, type boot cdrom (lower case) and press <enter>. After a few minutes, the password prompt will appear.
Type picker (lower case) and press <enter>.

07/26/04 REVISION A ACQSIM CT 4.0 SOFTWARE UPGRADE 1

6. The system then checks the disk configuration and prompts you with:
Enter the type of system installation:

1. RDS (Note: “RDS” refers to an Ultra Z Diagnostic Workstation, UDW)

2. Scanner Console

q. quit
7. Select option “2,” Scanner Console from the menu and press <enter>. You will see the following menu.
Enter a Console Installation option:

1. Install the OS and Application Software

2. Configure a Replaced Disk(s)
3. Upgrade Application Software Only

q. quit

NOTE
If you have not archived patient data as instructed in step 1, step 8 will delete all data.

8. Select option “1,” Install the OS and Application Software from the menu and press <enter>. Answer “y” to the next question. The
following will appear:
Please confirm the following network information:

Enter IP Address [default xxx.xxx.xx.xx]:

Enter Netmask [default 255.255.255.xxx]:
Enter Router [default xxx.xx.xx.xx]:
Enter Nodename [default consolexxxx]:

07/26/04 REVISION A ACQSIM CT 4.0 SOFTWARE UPGRADE 2

9. Press <enter> to accept the default values. After the information is entered, the system will display your choices as you entered them:
IP Address:
Netmask:
Router:
Nodename:

10. After the “Ready to run the installation. Are you satisfied? (y/n) [n]?” prompt appears:
If you answer NO to “Are you satisfied?”, the installation will cancel and take you back to the first sub–menu where you can quit the
installation program, or continue and adjust the network information.

If installation information is correct, choose “y” to “Are you satisfied?” and press <enter>.
11. The software will now begin installing from the first CD. Some time will pass during installation (approximately 25 minutes). DO NOT
PRESS ANY KEYS ON THE KEYBOARD. The following menu will then appear:
1. Install SCANNER Console Application Software
2. Eject the CD.

Select option “2,” Eject the CD, and press <enter>. Remove the first CD and put the second CD in, then close the drive door.

12. Select option “1,” and press <enter> to continue with the installation. You will be prompted with the “Are you satisfied?” question again.
Select “y”, press <enter>, and the system will continue with the software installation (approximately 20 to 30 minutes). After the
installation is complete, the system will reboot and the following menu will appear:
1. View the beginning of the installation error log
2. Eject the CD (it’s OK to eject it now)
3. Continue booting the machine

Choice:

NOTE
After the installation has completed, additional messages may be displayed on the
screen, pushing the above menu out of view. Simply press <enter> to see it again.

07/26/04 REVISION A ACQSIM CT 4.0 SOFTWARE UPGRADE 3

 NOTE
In the error log, errors may exist related to pdf help files. Errors may also exist related
to matlab/etc/license.log. These errors do not affect operation and should be ignored.
Other than these listed errors, there should be no other errors in the error log at this
time.

13. View the error log by choosing option 1. After viewing, the menu will be displayed again. Select option 2 and press <enter> to eject
the CD. Remove the CD and close the drive door. Then select option 3 to continue booting to the application software and press
<enter>.

NOTE
A serial number mismatch error may occur. Close the error window.

14. Perform a Restore Site. When the Main Startup menu appears, click in the lower left corner and type the word site (lower case) and
press <enter>.
15. After the Save Site / Restore Site menu appears, push the tape in the tape drive, wait for the green light to stop blinking and select
“2” to Restore Site. The system will eject the tape when finished.
16. Exit the Save Site utility.

NOTE
A valid diagnostics key is required to continue. If you can not enter Diagnostics as
instructed in step 17., obtain a Diagnostics key per appropriate procedures.

17. After the 4.0 software installation is complete and the system has booted, start the Diagnostics GUI. At the Main Startup menu, click
in the lower left hand corner, type PICKER (upper case) and press <enter>.
18. At the Diagnostics Software Test Menu, click on the “Utilities” button and select “Flash Burner”. The flash burner is a utility for
transferring executable code from a directory on the SPARC disk to the Flash of the CP, DSP/AP, BP and GAM boards.

07/26/04 REVISION A ACQSIM CT 4.0 SOFTWARE UPGRADE 4

19. At the Flash Burner dialog box (refer to Figure 1), enter the number of the board selected in the “Board name” category (1 for CP, 2
for GAM, 3 for DSP/AP, and 4 for BP) and click “Continue”.

NOTE
The Acqimage Box must be enabled in the Hardware Status window before clicking on
“Continue”.

Flash Burner
System name: bay00
Board name: 1

Quit Continue

FIGURE 1 FLASH BURNER DIALOG BOX

20. An Xterm window will be displayed. Click the mouse in the Xterm window to activate it. Select option 1.) Transfer OS.

21. At the next menu, select 0. Start transfer. When completed, the board will reboot. The message “Rebooting the board, I/O session
is dead” will be displayed. Press <enter> to continue. There may be a delay before the Flash Burner window closes.

22. Restart the Flash burner from the GUI again on the same board. Then select option 2.) Transfer Diags.

23. When completed, the board will reboot. The message “Rebooting the board, I/O session is dead” will be displayed. Press <enter>
and repeat steps 18 thru 23 on the remaining three boards. Board numbers are: 2 for GAM, 3 for DSP/AP, 4 for BP. You can view
the date of the Flash OS via a Telnet session. At the pSH+> prompt, type romver and press <enter>. When flash burner is complete
on all boards, select “Exit” to exit the Diagnostics GUI.

07/26/04 REVISION A ACQSIM CT 4.0 SOFTWARE UPGRADE 5

Site Protocol Update Program Instructions
If upgrading from software version 1.0, proceed with the following instructions to perform the site protocol update program.

1. Restore the site information from tape (If the site information tape has already been restored, it is not necessary to restore it again).
2. At the four–button GUI, click the mouse in the lower left–hand corner. Type pptools and press <enter>.
3. Click in the window that comes up. Type update_protocols and press <enter>.
4. Type exit and press <enter>.
5. Test a sample of the site defined protocols by scanning.
6. When testing is complete, create a site tape with the new data.
7. This completes the 4.0 scanner software portion of the upgrade. After the initialization is complete, run a pilot, axial and spiral scan
to further ensure system functionality. This completes the 4.0 software upgrade. Reboot the system before turning it over to the
customer.
Manufacturer Name Update Instructions
To ensure that the manufacturer name reported on the scanner is ”Philips”, proceed with the following instructions.

1. Restore the site information tape (If the site information tape has already been restored, it is not necessary to restore it again).
2. At the four–button GUI, click the mouse in the lower left–hand corner. Type pptools and press <enter>.
3. Click in the window that comes up. Type update_mfg_name and press <enter>.
4. Type exit and press <enter>.
5. Verify that the manufacturer name is now ”Philips” by entering the Service application from the four–button GUI and checking the name
reported in the Configure Workstep.
6. When the verification is complete, create a site information tape.

07/26/04 REVISION A ACQSIM CT 4.0 SOFTWARE UPGRADE 6

Security Vulnerability Update
Security vulnerabilities have been identified in the AcQSim CT product. The Solaris Operating System commands (sadmind, in.talkd,
rpc.walid, and sendmail) contain security weaknesses that can be exploited. The instructions below edit a configuration file to disable
Solaris files that have been identified as security vulnerabilities. For sendmail, the permissions will be modified to disable outside access
of this command.
1. Get to the four button screen from which the options are ”Clinical Scanning”, ”Service”, ”Reboot”, and ”Shutdown”. If currently in
”Clinical Scanning” or ”Service”, exit the console by selecting ”Shutdown Console” from the General Utilities Shutdown option.
2. Move the mouse pointer into the lower left–hand corner of the four button screen, left click once, and type pptools <enter>. Note that
you will not see anything appearing on the screen as you type. This will launch an xterm window.
3. Click inside the x–term window. From the command prompt, type the following commands followed by <enter>. The commands to
type appear in bold below. You will be prompted for a password upon pressing <enter> following the “su” command below. Use
”picker”. (Unix is case sensitive so make sure that Caps Lock is off).

su <enter>
picker <enter>
cd /etc <enter>
cat inetd.conf > inetd.bak <enter>

NOTE: The following command contains ( ” ” ) and ( | ) that are required to be typed.

The pipe symbols ( | ) within the command are the two vertical lines above one another and commonly looks like a full vertical line.
This symbol is found on the same keyboard key as the backslash ( \ ) key. It is not the letter ” L or l ” or the number ” 1 ”. Make sure
there is a space between the second quotation mark and the term inetd.bak.

egrep –v ”walld|talkd|sadmind” inetd.bak > inetd.conf <enter>

NOTE: The following command contains three consecutive zeros ”000” not the letters ”OOO”.

chmod 000 /usr/lib/sendmail <enter>

4. The update is complete. Type ”exit” at the # prompt to exit the shell. Type ”exit” again in the xterm window and select ”Reboot” from
the four button screen to restart the scanner

07/26/04 REVISION A ACQSIM CT 4.0 SOFTWARE UPGRADE 7

Localization Option Activation Instructions
If customer has purchased localization option, activate as follows.
1. From the four button main menu screen, select Service.
2. Select configure > options. At the Options Configuration screen, highlight the Localization option.
3. Gain access to Servecom. Follow the menu items, Service, CT, Key Codes, AcQSim CT/Ultra Z Diagnostic Keys. Input the AcQSim
CT serial number to obtain the Localization Key.
4. Enter enabling key information exactly as given to you.
5. Select Update Configuration Files to save information. Note the Localization button at the bottom of the screen will become active.
See Figure 2.

FIGURE 2 LOCALIZATION
Connectivity to other Systems
The customers RTP system may require configuration of a “dummy” treatment machine to import the isocenter (RT Plan) from AcQSim
CT 4.0. The treatment machine can be changed within the RTP system after import. Refer to the AcQSim CT 4.0 DICOM Conformance
Statement for details on what tags and values are sent.

07/26/04 REVISION A ACQSIM CT 4.0 SOFTWARE UPGRADE 8

Localization Option Reference Information
To access the Laser Calibration Data, select the Localization button at the bottom of the service applications mode. At the Laser Calibration
Data screen, the recommended values are listed in the table. Measure the laser distance for each point when the laser installation is done
to determine the actual value. It is recommended that these values be verified by on–site hospital personnel. The following reference
information is provided for the Laser Calibration Data screen (see figure 3):

The Treatment Machine name is the name of the linear accelerator (linac) data is sent to. The CT Sim offset is site specific. The CT Sim
offset is the shift between the scan plane and the Laser Marking Plane. The CT Sim offset range of valid values is from 0 to 800.

Select Limit isocenter to slice boundary option to Yes if treatment planning system requires beam isocenters to be on a slice plane. When
this option is set to yes, beam isocenters that are computed or moved in Localization will jump to the nearest slice plane. If you leave this
option set to No, beam isocenters can be computed or moved to locations between slice planes.

The maximum contour points selection represents the maximum number of points per contour stored on the system and sent out through
DICOM transfer. Some treatment planning systems require fewer than the default 512 contour points. This field can be used to limit the
contour points to the amount required by these systems. The maximum contour points range of valid values is 16 to 512.

FIGURE 3 LASER CALIBRATION DATA SCREEN

07/26/04 REVISION A ACQSIM CT 4.0 SOFTWARE UPGRADE 9

Network/Camera Service Tab Reference Information

In the service application mode, some modifications have been made to the menu screen for the Network/Camera tab (see figure 4):

FIGURE 4 NETWORK/CAMERA TAB SCREEN

Under the Device type, the available devices have been updated to include:

UDW (Ultra Z Diagnostic Workstation)

Voxel Q
DICOM Worklist
DICOM Network
DICOM Camera
Li+ Camera
Printer
Other

07/26/04 REVISION A ACQSIM CT 4.0 SOFTWARE UPGRADE 10

Printer Setup for Worksheet Printing
In order to print a worksheet, the software must know about one or more network printers. If there is more than one printer, one of them
must be designated as the default printer.

1. Printer configuration is accomplished by selecting Service from the top level AcQSim CT Startup menu.
2. Once in the service application mode, select Configure, and then the Network/Camera button.
3. Select the Other Devices tab to bring up a list of network devices.
4. Select the Printer radio button.
5. Select either Add Device to add a printer or Modify Selected Device. See figure 5.

FIGURE 5 NETWORK DEVICES SCREEN

07/26/04 REVISION A ACQSIM CT 4.0 SOFTWARE UPGRADE 11

If Add Device is selected, the screen in figure 6 is displayed.

At this screen, enter the device name, its description, and the IP address of the printer’s server.

There are two radio buttons displayed for selection, one to indicate if it is a PostScript printer and another to indicate whether the printer
is the default printer. The default printer is the printer that will be used when the Worksheet button is selected on the Isocenter menu screen.

NOTE
There can be only one default printer.

Once printer properties have been set as desired, select Done and then select Update Configuration Files (located on the left hand side
of the service application mode main screen) to save the new or modified printer configuration information. It is recommended to update
the site tape after printer has been configured.

FIGURE 6 PRINTER DEVICE CONFIGURATION SCREEN

07/26/04 REVISION A ACQSIM CT 4.0 SOFTWARE UPGRADE 12

Voxel Q 4.9.1 Software Update Instructions
If the customer is using the Voxel Q workstation, it must be running software version 4.9.1 or higher in order to import LOC images from
the AcQSim CT running version 4.0 software. If the customer has purchased the LOC package, Voxel Q 4.9.1 software is required.

1. Determine if the Voxel Q is running version 4.9.1 software by launching the vx application.
2. If the Voxel Q is running version 4.9.1 software, you do not need to update the Voxel Q software.
3. If 4.9.1 software is not installed on the Voxel Q, install the Voxel Q V4.9.1 Software Upgrade Kit 4535 670 49101 for AcQPlan units,
or 4535 670 49091 for all other units. Follow the instructions supplied with the kit. This software should be installed on all Voxel Q
systems the customer is using.

07/26/04 REVISION A ACQSIM CT 4.0 SOFTWARE UPGRADE 13

 Philips Medical Systems
AcQSim CT
Patient Support Horizontal Resolver Replacement
Kit Instructions

Part Number: 4535 671 04181 Revision: A

All pages of this document contain proprietary and confidential information of Philips Medical Systems (Cleveland), Inc. The documents are intended for current Philips Medical
Systems (Cleveland), Inc. personnel or are licensed to Philips Medical Systems (Cleveland), Inc. customer for use by the customer's in-house service employee on equipment
located at the customer's designated site. Copying, disclosure to others or other use is prohibited without the express written authorization of Philips Medical Systems
(Cleveland), Inc. Law Department. Report violation of these requirements to the Philips Medical Systems (Cleveland), Inc. Law Department, Highland Heights, Ohio.

Service Publication, Philips Medical Systems (Cleveland) Inc. Highland Hts., OH 44143
E 2004 All rights reserved under the copyright laws of the United States.
 E 2004

Philips Medical Systems (Cleveland), Inc. Highland Hts., OH 44143

All rights reserved under the copyright laws of the United States
This document prepared by the Service Publications Department.
Note any additions/corrections via an electronic Field Feedback Form.
 SYMBOL DESCRIPTIONS
Attention symbol. Radiation warning symbol.

Laser warning symbol. Biohazard warning symbol.

Magnetism warning symbol. Projectile warning symbol.

Electrical warning symbol.

 REVISION HISTORY
REVISION DATE COMMENTS
–1 08/12/04 Final review copy
A 08/19/04 Release at revision A
 NOTICE
THE INFORMATION CONTAINED IN THIS MANUAL CONFORMS WITH THE CONFIGURATION OF THE EQUIPMENT AS OF THE DATE OF MANUFACTURE. REVISIONS TO THE EQUIPMENT
SUBSEQUENT TO THE DATE OF MANUFACTURE WILL BE ADDRESSED IN SERVICE UPDATES DISTRIBUTED TO PHILIPS MEDICAL SYSTEMS TECHNICAL SERVICE ORGANIZATION.

TO THE USER OF THIS MANUAL

THE USER OF THIS MANUAL IS DIRECTED TO READ AND CAREFULLY REVIEW THE INSTRUCTIONS, WARNINGS AND CAUTIONS CONTAINED HEREIN PRIOR TO BEGINNING
INSTALLATION OR SERVICE ACTIVITIES. WHILE YOU MAY HAVE PREVIOUSLY INSTALLED OR SERVICED EQUIPMENT SIMILAR TO THAT DESCRIBED IN THIS MANUAL, CHANGES IN
DESIGN, MANUFACTURE OR PROCEDURE MAY HAVE OCCURRED WHICH SIGNIFICANTLY AFFECT THE PRESENT INSTALLATION OR SERVICE.
THE INSTALLATION AND SERVICE OF EQUIPMENT DESCRIBED HEREIN IS TO BE PREFORMED BY AUTHORIZED, QUALIFIED PHILIPS MEDICAL SYSTEM PERSONNEL. ASSEMBLERS
AND OTHER PERSONNEL NOT EMPLOYED BY NOR DIRECTLY AFFILIATED WITH PHILIPS MEDICAL SYSTEMS TECHNICAL SERVICES ARE DIRECTED TO CONTACT THE LOCAL
PHILIPS MEDICAL SYSTEMS OFFICE BEFORE ATTEMPTING INSTALLATION OR SERVICE PROCEDURES.

INSTALLATION AND ENVIRONMENT

EXCEPT FOR INSTALLATIONS REQUIRING CERTIFICATION BY THE MANUFACTURER PER FEDERAL STANDARDS, SEE THAT A RADIATION PROTECTION SURVEY IS MADE BY A
QUALIFIED EXPERT IN ACCORDANCE WITH NCRP 102, SECTION 7, AS REVISED OR REPLACED IN THE FUTURE. PERFORM A SURVEY AFTER EVERY CHANGE IN EQUIPMENT,
WORKLOAD, OR OPERATING CONDITIONS WHICH MIGHT SIGNIFICANTLY INCREASE THE PROBABILITY OF PERSONS RECEIVING MORE THAN THE MAXIMUM PERMISSIBLE DOSE
EQUIVALENT.

Diagnostic Imaging Systems – MECHANICAL-ELECTRICAL WARNING

ALL OF THE MOVEABLE ASSEMBLIES AND PARTS OF THIS EQUIPMENT SHOULD BE OPERATED WITH CARE AND ROUTINELY INSPECTED IN ACCORDANCE WITH THE MANUFACTURER’S
RECOMMENDATIONS CONTAINED IN THE EQUIPMENT MANUALS.
ONLY PROPERLY TRAINED AND QUALIFIED PERSONNEL SHOULD BE PERMITTED ACCESS TO ANY INTERNAL PARTS. LIVE ELECTRICAL TERMINALS ARE DEADLY; BE SURE LINE
DISCONNECTS ARE OPENED AND OTHER APPROPRIATE PRECAUTIONS ARE TAKEN BEFORE OPENING ACCESS DOORS, REMOVING ENCLOSURE PANELS, OR ATTACHING
ACCESSORIES.
DO NOT UNDER ANY CIRCUMSTANCES, REMOVE THE FLEXIBLE HIGH TENSION CABLES FROM THE X-RAY TUBE HOUSING OR HIGH TENSION GENERATOR AND/OR THE ACCESS
COVERS FROM THE GENERATOR UNTIL THE MAIN AND AUXILIARY POWER SUPPLIES HAVE BEEN DISCONNECTED. FAILURE TO COMPLY WITH THE ABOVE MAY RESULT IN SERIOUS
OR FATAL BODILY INJURIES TO THE OPERATOR OR THOSE IN THE AREA.

ELECTRICAL-GROUNDING INSTRUCTIONS
THE EQUIPMENT MUST BE GROUNDED TO AN EARTH GROUND BY A SEPARATE CONDUCTOR. THE NEUTRAL SIDE OF THE LINE IS NOT TO BE CONSIDERED THE EARTH GROUND.
ON EQUIPMENT PROVIDED WITH A LINE CORD, THE EQUIPMENT MUST BE CONNECTED TO PROPERLY GROUNDED, THREE-PIN RECEPTACLE. DO NOT USE A THREE-TO-TWO PIN
ADAPTER.

Diagnostic Imaging Systems – RADIATION WARNING

X-RAY AND GAMMA-RAYS ARE DANGEROUS TO BOTH OPERATOR AND OTHERS IN THE VICINITY UNLESS ESTABLISHED SAFE EXPOSURE PROCEDURES ARE STRICTLY OBSERVED.
THE USEFUL AND SCATTERED BEAMS CAN PRODUCE SERIOUS OR FATAL BODILY INJURIES TO ANY PERSONS IN THE SURROUNDING AREA IF USED BY AN UNSKILLED OPERATOR.
ADEQUATE PRECAUTIONS MUST ALWAYS BE TAKEN TO AVOID EXPOSURE TO THE USEFUL BEAM, AS WELL AS TO LEAKAGE RADIATION FROM WITHIN THE SOURCE HOUSING OR
TO SCATTERED RADIATION RESULTING FROM THE PASSAGE OF RADIATION THROUGH MATTER.
THOSE AUTHORIZED TO OPERATE, PARTICIPATE IN OR SUPERVISE THE OPERATION OF THE EQUIPMENT MUST BE THOROUGHLY FAMILIAR AND COMPLY COMPLETELY WITH THE
CURRENT ESTABLISHED SAFE EXPOSURE FACTORS AND PROCEDURES DESCRIBED IN PUBLICATIONS, SUCH AS: SUBCHAPTER J OF TITLE 21 OF THE CODE OF FEDERAL
REGULATIONS, “DIAGNOSTIC X-RAY SYSTEMS AND THEIR MAJOR COMPONENTS”, AND THE NATIONAL COUNCIL ON RADIATION PROTECTION (NCRP) NO. 102, “MEDICAL X-RAY AND
GAMMA-RAY PROTECTION FOR ENERGIES UP TO 10 MEV-EQUIPMENT DESIGN AND USE”, AS REVISED OR REPLACED IN THE FUTURE.
THOSE RESPONSIBLE FOR PLANNING OF X-RAY AND GAMMA-RAY EQUIPMENT INSTALLATIONS MUST BE THOROUGHLY FAMILIAR AND COMPLY COMPLETELY WITH NCRP NO. 49,
“STRUCTURAL SHIELDING DESIGN AND EVALUATION FOR MEDICAL OF X-RAYS AND GAMMA-RAYS OF ENERGIES UP TO 10 MEV”, AS REVISED AND REPLACED IN THE FUTURE. FAILURE
TO OBSERVE THESE WARNINGS MAY CAUSE SERIOUS OR FATAL BODILY INJURIES TO THE OPERATOR OR THOSE IN THE AREA.
 TABLE OF CONTENTS

System Data Sheet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . i

Resolver Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1

Resolver Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6

CC (Horizontal Couch Calibration) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8

Patient Support Covers Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14

Power Up / Down Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22

Return this data sheet along with the removed resolver, (re)using the kit shipping materials.

SYSTEM DATA SHEET Date: System I.D.:

FSE: Voice: ( ) e-mail: @philips.com
(PLEASE PRINT YOUR NAME) Cell: ( )
(OPTIONAL)

1. Identify the bracket which most closely resembles system configuration (check only one):

Thin Bracket
Thick Bracket
w/ PEM nut

Loose Nut (3X)

Type 1 - 97946 (Thin) Type 2 - 83882 (Thick)

Page i of iii
Return this data sheet along with the removed resolver, (re)using the kit shipping materials.

2. Measure distance between Resolver Bracket and Drive Wheel at locations A and B:

BRACKET

WHEEL

BEFORE AFTER COMMENTS

DIMENSION A

DIMENSION B

Page ii of iii
Return this data sheet along with the removed resolver, (re)using the kit shipping materials.

3. List any service history related to the horizontal drive module for this system.
Attach documentation, job numbers, defect / resolution, findings, customer comments, etc. (or list below).
Please include dates wherever possible.

Page iii of iii

HORIZONTAL RESOLVER

Introduction: This procedure is used to remove and replace the Patient Support Horizontal Resolver. Return the information
sheet and resolver from system in the included packaging.

NOTE
Two service persons are recommended to perform these procedures.

Tools Required: FSE Toolkit, #2 Phillips screwdriver, flat screwdriver, wire cutter, steel scale 1/64” resolution, 5/64” hex key

Material Required: Resolver, ty–wraps, data sheet (pages i through iii of this document)

Time Estimate: Three hours for resolver replacement and couch calibration

RESOLVER REMOVAL PROCEDURE:

INITIAL CONDITIONS:

• Patient Support rear end, right Side Rail and Horizontal Drive Covers removed. Refer to the Patient Support Covers
Removal/Replacement procedure.
• Lower telescoping covers removed. Refer to the Telescoping Base Cover Removal Procedures.
• Patient Support raised to its highest position with the Gantry Control Panel Switches.
• Gantry power removed. Refer to the PowerUp/PowerDown procedure.
1. Identify and record bracket type on information sheet.
2. Identify and record the Resolver Wires by color and their position in Connector P408. Refer to Figure 1 and Figure 2.
3. Document locations of ty–wraps and cable routing.
4. Measure distance between wheel and resolver bracket in two places and record on data sheet as dimension A and dimension B.
5. Cut ty–wraps used to bind the Resolver Wires to other cables or structure.

08/12/04 Final Review Philips Medical Systems. Confidential and Proprietary information. Refer to Title Page. 1
 FIGURE 1 RESOLVER WIRING

RESOLVER

FIGURE 2 RESOLVER WIRING DIAGRAM

08/12/04 Final Review Philips Medical Systems. Confidential and Proprietary information. Refer to Title Page. 2
6. Remove the Resolver Wires from Connector P408. To release the Socket Contact Retention Blade, press against it with the point of
a small object, while pulling on the Wire until the Contact is clear of the connector shell. Refer to Figure 3.

Crimp

Pull Wire

Retention Blade

Socket Contact

Connector
P408

Pointed Tool

FIGURE 3 REMOVING RESOLVER PINS FROM THE CONNECTOR

08/12/04 Final Review Philips Medical Systems. Confidential and Proprietary information. Refer to Title Page. 3
7. Loosen the three (3) Cleat Screws holding the Resolver in place. See Figure 4.

(3) Cleat Screws and Resolver Bracket

Retaining Washers

Resolver
Assembly

Set Screws (2)

FIGURE 4 HORIZONTAL DRIVE ASSEMBLY

08/12/04 Final Review Philips Medical Systems. Confidential and Proprietary information. Refer to Title Page. 4
8. Turn the Cleat Retaining Washers so the flat sides face the Resolver, then tighten the Cleat Screws.

CAUTION
EXERCISE EXTREME CARE WHILE REMOVING AND INSTALLING RESOLVER TO
PREVENT ANY BENDING OR MISALIGNMENT ON RESOLVER SHAFT.

9. Loosen the two (2) Set Screws on the Resolver Pulley with a 5/64” Hex Key. Remove the Resolver from the Pulley and away from the
Bracket.
10. Measure distance between wheel and resolver bracket in two places and record on data sheet as dimension A and dimension B.

RESOLVER INSTALLATION:

1. Place the Resolver into the Resolver Bracket opening.

2. Carefully insert the shaft of the replacement Resolver into the Resolver Pulley. Verify that the resolver flange is completely contacting
the mounting bracket. Equally tighten the Pulley Set Screws just enough to keep the Pulley on the shaft.

CAUTION
DO NOT BUMP OR MOVE THE RESOLVER DURING THE FOLLOWING STEPS.

3. Loosen the three Cleat Screws and turn the Cleat Retaining Washers so the flat edge faces away from the resolver. Ensure that the
Cleat Retaining Washers fit into the groove on the side of the Resolver. Refer to Figure 5.
4. Turn the Resolver so the leads are at approximately the 10 o’clock position (as shown in Figure 4).
5. Slightly tighten each cleat screw to assure resolver is uniformly seated to resolver bracket.

08/12/04 Final Review Philips Medical Systems. Confidential and Proprietary information. Refer to Title Page. 5
 FIGURE 5 CLEAT RETAINING WASHERS INSTALLATION

08/12/04 Final Review Philips Medical Systems. Confidential and Proprietary information. Refer to Title Page. 6
6. Tighten the pulley set screws to 10 in–lbs.

NOTE
During the Horizontal Couch Calibration, the resolver may need to be rotated (reference
figure 7). Tighten resolver cleat screws sufficiently to prevent resolver housing rotation
until calibration is completed.

7. Route resolver wires per step 3 (removal) above. Secure wires away from moving parts with ty–wraps.
8. Install the Resolver leads into Connector P408. Refer to the Wire color and locations shown in Figure 1 and Figure 2.
9. Calibrate Carbon Top Horizontal Position using CC (Couch Calibration) in the next section.
10. When couch calibration is completed, verify Gantry power is removed. Refer to the PowerUp/PowerDown procedure.
11. Apply loctite to (3x) 8–32 cleat screws at bracket interface and torque to 10 in–lbs.
12. Replace any remaining Patient Support Covers. Refer to the Patient Support Covers Removal/Replacement procedure.

08/12/04 Final Review Philips Medical Systems. Confidential and Proprietary information. Refer to Title Page. 7
CC (HORIZONTAL COUCH CALIBRATION)
INITIAL CONDITIONS:

• Lower the telescoping covers on the couch and ensure the panel at the underneath rear of the couch is removed. Refer to the
telescoping base cover removal procedure.
1. Before this procedure can be run, you must first power down the system. Refer to the PowerUp/Down procedure.
2. Remove the bottom rear panel from the couch. Disconnect the red and black connector that is attached to the couch servo motor leads.
3. Remove the Gantry cardfile access cover.
4. Apply power to the system. Refer to the PowerUp/Down procedure. At the 3 Button Screen, start the Diagnostic GUI.
5. Select Gputty+ from the GANTRY pulldown menu. Press the letter “r” to execute (Shift Control E to exit at any time).

NOTE
<sb cr> refers to pressing the Spacebar and Return key. Beeps indicate adjustment
within range.

NOTE
A step that does not tell you to ”<sb cr>” will automatically time out. Adjustments should be
made quickly since you cannot go back a step.

6. Type cc at the prompt to display:

SPACE BAR AND RETURN STEPS THROUGH TESTS, YOU WILL SEE A <sb, cr> PROMPT
A –> SIGN PROMPTS YOU TO SETUP OR ADJUSTMENT
HINT: 0x BEFORE A NUMBER IS A HEXIDECIMAL NUMBER !!!!!
DISCONNECT OR DISABLE COUCH HORZ. MOTOR
!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
DO YOU WISH TO CONTINUE ? 1=YES, 0= EXIT>

7. Press 1 to continue. Push the couch toward the scan frame and mark two positions from the back seam of the patient support with
a pencil: 180mm and 1180mm. Refer to Figure 6.

08/12/04 Final Review Philips Medical Systems. Confidential and Proprietary information. Refer to Title Page. 8
 MARK 180mm AND 1180mm

FIGURE 6 180mm and 1180mm COUCH MARKINGS

8. The pots are 20 turn pots. Turn them at least 20 times ccw or until you hear or feel them click against their stops.
9. Refer to Figure 8 for location of adjustment pots on the CTCC. Follow the on–line instructions:
TURN BOTH HORIZ ZERO (R12) AND
SCALE POTS (R11) FULLY CCW, THEN <sb cr>

SET THE MULT SCALE ADJ. SWITCHES (SW1, 2 AND 3) TO 0x800, THEN <sb cr>

10.
*** PUSH VERTICAL ENABLE ON GCP WHEN ADJUSTMENT IS COMPLETE
MOVE TOP SO DS5 READS BETWEEN 0xE80 AND 0x1180
AND ADJUST RESOLVER FEEDBACK (R7) FOR 2.0 V RMS
BEEPER WILL SOUND AT CORRECT ADJUSTMENT
DS5 Vrms
1038 1.97

08/12/04 Final Review Philips Medical Systems. Confidential and Proprietary information. Refer to Title Page. 9
11. Refer to Figure 7:
PUT END OF COUCH TOP 180MM (7 1/16 IN) FROM SEAM
THEN <sb cr>
PUSH VERTICAL ENABLE ON GCP TO LEAVE LOOP

SET HORZ POT TO –1.0 ––> –1.5 VOLTS THEN TIGHTEN

–1.475

PUSH VERTICAL ENABLE ON GCP TO LEAVE LOOP

TURN RESOLVER TO READ ZERO +/– 0x10 AND RETURN
DS5 10

PUSH VERTICAL ENABLE ON GCP WHEN ADJUSTMENT IS COMPLETE

ADJUST COARSE ZERO POT. DS4 SHOULD BE 0x10
DS4 FF

ADJUST

RESOLVER

POTENTIOMETER

D0232

FIGURE 7 COUCH RESOLVER AND POTENTIOMETER LOCATION

08/12/04 Final Review Philips Medical Systems. Confidential and Proprietary information. Refer to Title Page. 10
This step will automatically time out (no <sb cr>).
MOVE COUCH IN UNTIL READOUT IS ABOUT –9.49
BEEP –8.67 BEEPER WILL SOUND WHEN IN RANGE

This step will automatically time out (no <sb cr>).

NOW MOVE UNTIL READOUT IS ABOUT 0x0 +/– 0x20
DS5 0

This step will automatically time out (no <sb cr>).

ADJUST HORIZ SCALE POT (R11) TO READ 0x90
DS4 90

This step will automatically time out (no <sb cr>).

PUT END OF COUCH TOP 180MM (7 1/16 IN) FROM SEAM
THEN <sb cr>

ADJUST HORZ ZERO POT (R12) DS4 SHOULD BE 0x10

DS4 10

This step will automatically time out (no <sb cr>).

MOVE COUCH IN UNTIL READOUT IS ABOUT –9.47
DS5 –9.47

BEEP –9.47 BEEPER WILL SOUND WHEN IN RANGE

This step will automatically time out (no <sb cr>).

NOW MOVE UNTIL READOUT IS ABOUT 0x0 +/– 0x20
DS5 0

This step will automatically time out (no <sb cr>).

ADJUST HORIZ SCALE POT (R11) TO READ 0x90.
DS4 90

This step will automatically time out (no <sb cr>).

MOVE TO EXACTLY 1180MM FROM SEAM (47 7/16 IN) THEN <sb cr>

SET MULT SCALE ADJ SWITCHES (SW1, 2 AND 3) TO xxxx THEN <sb cr>

08/12/04 Final Review Philips Medical Systems. Confidential and Proprietary information. Refer to Title Page. 11
Refer to Figure 8 for switch locations.
HORIZONTAL CAL COMPLETE
REMEMBER TO RECONNECT THE MOTOR

Refer to Figure 8.

• The ”old” MSB hex switch has been hardwired to a value of ”C.” SW1 is the second MSB, SW2 and SW3 follow.

12. After the calibration procedure is complete, exit from the CC program. At the AcQSim CT> prompt, press Shift Control E to exit Gputty+.
13. Exit the Diagnostic GUI and remove power from the system. Refer to the PowerUp/Down procedure.
14. Attach the red and black connector that is attached to the couch servo motor leads.
15. Replace the telescoping couch base covers and rear panel. Refer to the telescoping base cover removal procedure.
16. Resume at step 10. of resolver installation.

08/12/04 Final Review Philips Medical Systems. Confidential and Proprietary information. Refer to Title Page. 12
 CTCC BOARD

FIGURE 8 CTCC BOARD COMPONENT LOCATIONS DETAIL

08/12/04 Final Review Philips Medical Systems. Confidential and Proprietary information. Refer to Title Page. 13
PATIENT SUPPORT COVERS
Introduction: This procedure is used to remove and replace all Patient Support covers.

NOTE
Two service persons are recommended to perform these procedures.

Tools Required: 1. FSE Tool Kit

TELESCOPING BASE COVER REMOVAL (FULL DOWN POSITION; PREFERRED METHOD):

WARNING
THE TELESCOPING BASE COVERS ARE HEAVY AND ARE HELD ONTO THE
SUBFRAME BY FOUR SCREWS. REMOVE THE MOUNTING SCREWS ONLY
WHEN THE PATIENT SUPPORT IS AT ITS LOWEST POSITION OR ONLY AFTER
THE TELESCOPING BASE COVERS ARE PROPERLY AND SECURELY BLOCKED.
FAILURE TO COMPLY CAN RESULT IN DAMAGE TO EQUIPMENT AND/OR
SERIOUS INJURY TO PERSONNEL.

NOTE
For most Removal/Replacement and Calibration procedures, only the top section of the
Telescoping Base Covers need be removed.

1. Apply Gantry power. Refer to the PowerUp/PowerDown procedure.

2. Lower the Patient Support to its lowest position with the Gantry Control Panel Switches.

WARNING
USE EXTREME CAUTION WHEN OPERATING OR WORKING ON EQUIPMENT
WITH COVERS REMOVED. DANGEROUS VOLTAGES ARE EXPOSED WHEN THE
GANTRY COVERS ARE REMOVED. FAILURE TO COMPLY CAN CAUSE SERIOUS
INJURY OR DEATH TO PERSONNEL.

08/12/04 Final Review Philips Medical Systems. Confidential and Proprietary information. Refer to Title Page. 14
3. Remove the four screws and Washers that attach the Telescoping Base Cover Panels to the Subframe. Refer to Figure 9.

Left Hand Panel

Right Hand
Panel

Ground Lug

Ground Lug

Mounting Screws
and Washers (4)

FIGURE 9 PATIENT SUPPORT TELESCOPING BASE COVERS

4. Using the Gantry Control Panel Switches, raise the Patient Support approximately 10 inches to allow access to internal cables.
5. Remove Gantry power. Refer to the PowerUp/PowerDown procedure.
6. Remove the two screws from both Outer Cover ends (front & rear, 4 total). Refer Figure 9.

08/12/04 Final Review Philips Medical Systems. Confidential and Proprietary information. Refer to Title Page. 15
7. Disconnect the two Ground Wires connected to the inside Panel surfaces. Refer to Figure 10. Tag the Panels left and right. Carefully
separate the Panels and slide them out to the sides. Store the Covers in a secure area until reinstallation is required.
Grounded to
Sub-Frame
JJJJJJ
JJJJJ Left

JJJJJJ
Ó Ó JJ
JJJJJJJJ
JJJJJJJ Ó
JJJJJJ
JJJJJJJ
JJJJJJ JJ
JJJJJJJJ
JJJJJJJ
JJJJJJ ÓJJ Ground Lug

JJJJJJ
JJJJJJJ
JJJJJJ
JJJJJJJ
JJJJJJJ
JJJJJJ
JJJJJJJ ÜÜ
ÜÜ Front

JJJJJJJ
JJJJJJ
JJJJJJJ
JJJJJJ
JJJJJJJ Ü
ÜÜ
JJJJJJJ
ÜÜ
ÜÜ
JJJJJJJ
Flat
Braided
Cable
ÜÜ
JJJJJJJ
Same on

JJJJJJJ
JJJJJJ
Both Sides Note

JJJJJJJ
JJJJJJ Remove the ground

JJJJJJJ
JJJJJJ
JJJJJJJ
wires only from the
covers that are to

JJJJJJJ
JJJJJJ
JJJJJJJ
JJJJJJ be removed.

JJJJJJJ
JJJJJJ
JJJJJJJ
JJJJJJJJ Ó
JJJJJJ
JJJJJJJ
JJJJJJ JJ
JJJJJJJ
JJJJJJ JJ
Ó
JJJJJJJ
JJJJJJ
Ó Ó JJ
JJJJJJ
JJJJJJJ Right
FIGURE 10 TELESCOPING BASE COVERS – GROUND CONNECTIONS
8. Repeat steps 6. and 7. to remove the remaining cover sections.

08/12/04 Final Review Philips Medical Systems. Confidential and Proprietary information. Refer to Title Page. 16
TELESCOPING BASE COVER REPLACEMENT:

9. Install the Patient Support Telescoping Base Covers by reversing the steps of Telescoping Base Cover Removal.

FRONT COVER REMOVAL:

10. Remove the two Phillips Head Screws from the underside of the front Cover. See Figure 11.
11. Remove the four Phillips Head Screws on the front side of the front Cover while holding the Cover.

FRONT COVER REPLACEMENT:

12. Install the Patient Support front Cover by reversing steps 10. and 11.

REAR COVER REMOVAL:

13. Remove the two Phillips Head Screws from underneath the Sub–frame that secure the rear Cover. See Figure 11.
14. Remove the rear Cover by pulling down and then out.

08/12/04 Final Review Philips Medical Systems. Confidential and Proprietary information. Refer to Title Page. 17
 Carbon
Top Side Front Cover
Cover
Horizontal
Drive Cover

Left Hand
Cover

Right
Mounting Hand
Screws (2) Cover

Foot
Switch
Cover

Rear Cover

FIGURE 11 PATIENT SUPPORT COVERS

08/12/04 Final Review Philips Medical Systems. Confidential and Proprietary information. Refer to Title Page. 18
REAR COVER REPLACEMENT:

15. Install the Patient Support rear Cover by reversing steps 13. and 14.

HORIZONTAL DRIVE COVER REMOVAL:

16. Remove the four Pan Head Screws, Lock Washers, and Flat Washers from underneath the Table at the rear end, to gain access to
the Horizontal Drive. Refer to Figure 11.

HORIZONTAL DRIVE REPLACEMENT:

17. Install the Horizontal Drive Cover by reversing step 16.

CARBON TOP SIDE COVERS (LEFT AND RIGHT) REMOVAL:

18. Position the Carbon Top by hand fully into the Gantry. This is required for some older Side Cover designs.
19. Remove the two Mounting Screws that attach the Carbon Top Side Cover to the J–Bracket. Refer to Figure 11.
20. Remove the Carbon Top Side Cover.

CARBON TOP SIDE COVERS REPLACEMENT:

21. Replace the Carbon Top Side Cover by reversing steps 18. through 20.

RAIL COVERS (LEFT AND RIGHT) REMOVAL:

22. Remove the rear–most front cover Screw that secures the front Cover and Side Rail to the Sub–frame. Refer to Figure 11.
23. Move the Carbon top by hand until it is against its front Mechanical Stop.
24. Remove the Patient Support rear Cover. Refer to Rear Cover Removal in this procedure.
25. Remove the Flat Head Screws from the underside of the Rail Cover. If both Rail Covers are removed at the same time, tag them left
and right. See Figure 11.
26. Slide the Rail Cover toward the rear until it is clear of the overhanging Carbon top Side Cover.
27. Remove the Rail Cover.

08/12/04 Final Review Philips Medical Systems. Confidential and Proprietary information. Refer to Title Page. 19
CARBON TOP SIDE REPLACEMENT:
28. Install the Patient Support Rail Covers by reversing steps 22. through 27.

FOOT SWITCH COVER REMOVAL:

29. Apply Gantry power. Refer to the PowerUp/PowerDown procedure.
30. Tilt the Gantry to +5_ (degrees) with the Gantry Control Panel Switches.
31. Remove Gantry power. Refer to the PowerUp/PowerDown procedure.
32. Remove the two screws and Washers that attach the Foot Switch Cover. Firmly grasp the Foot Switch with both hands and pull the
Cover straight up. See Figure 12.

WARNING
USE EXTREME CAUTION WHEN OPERATING OR WORKING ON EQUIPMENT
WITH COVERS REMOVED. DANGEROUS VOLTAGES ARE EXPOSED WHEN THE
GANTRY COVERS ARE REMOVED. FAILURE TO COMPLY CAUSE SERIOUS
INJURY OR DEATH TO PERSONNEL.

TROUGH COVER

DOUBLE SIDED TAPE

BOTTOM TROUGH

TAPE SWITCH DOUBLE SIDED TAPE

FIGURE 12 FOOT SWITCH COVER

08/12/04 Final Review Philips Medical Systems. Confidential and Proprietary information. Refer to Title Page. 20
FOOT SWITCH COVER REPLACEMENT:

33. Install the Foot Switch Cover by reversing step 32.

34. Apply Gantry power. Refer to the PowerUp/PowerDown procedure.
35. Activate the Footswitch and manually move the Table to verify Footswitch operation.
36. Using the Gantry Control Panel Switches, tilt the Gantry to zero degrees.
37. Remove Gantry power. Refer to the PowerUp/PowerDown procedure.

08/12/04 Final Review Philips Medical Systems. Confidential and Proprietary information. Refer to Title Page. 21
POWER UP / DOWN PROCEDURE
This section describes the system start–up/shutdown procedures. Power–UP is accomplished via the keyswitch on the Display Tower.
Power DOWN of the entire system is accomplished via the General Utilities GUI. This is accessed via the “Service” option from the opening
bootup GUI. This procedure covers the Service Application mode. Scanning Application mode procedure is in the OP manual.

SYSTEM POWER UP
1. Make sure the Gantry keyswitch is in the normal position. Turn the Display Tower keyswitch to the ON position. After the system
boots, you will be prompted with the startup application display (or “4 Button Screen.”) You have 4 boot options. Refer to Figure 13.:
A.) Select Clinical Scanning (or do nothing) and the system will start and connect to the acquisition server. The acquisition server will
then power up the AcQImage Cabinet, and if that is done successfully, the acquisition server will power up the gantry and X–ray system.
B.) Select the Service Application option (within 15 seconds) by clicking on the Service button with the mouse pointer.
C.) Reboot the system. D. ) Start the Diagnostic GUI (within 15 seconds) by clicking once in the bottom left corner, then entering
PICKER <CR>. (All caps). The AcQImage board LEDs will display a power up test sequence. Refer to the LED Interpretations.

Clinical Scanning

Service

FOR DIAG GUI:

Click here with the mouse, then
type PICKER and press <CR>.

FIGURE 13 4 BUTTON SCREEN

08/12/04 Final Review Philips Medical Systems. Confidential and Proprietary information. Refer to Title Page. 22
PREPARE THE SYSTEM FOR USE (X–Ray Tube Warmup)
2. The X–Ray system needs to be properly warmed up prior to executing a scan procedure. X–Ray System Warmup must be completed
at the start of every scan day or when the tube heat is below 6%. Tube heat is displayed in the Tube Warmup window.
3. To perform a tube warm–up, click on the Tube Warm Up button with the mouse pointer. Refer to Figure 13. This will initiate the warm–up
sequence and X–RAYS WILL BE EMITTED. The tube warm–up status is displayed is displayed in the Tube Warmup Window. Refer
to Figure 14.

Progress

Status Scan Status

Tube : %
Start Stop
Scan Scan kv :

mA :
TubeHeat
Time :
0%
Tilt :+

Couch :

SPOV :

FIGURE 14 TUBE WARM–UP STATUS WINDOW

08/12/04 Final Review Philips Medical Systems. Confidential and Proprietary information. Refer to Title Page. 23
SYSTEM POWER DOWN

1. From the 4 Button Screen (Figure 13) click on SHUTDOWN with the mouse pointer.

CAUTION
DO NOT POWER DOWN THE SYSTEM WITH THE TUBE HEAT AT OR ABOVE 35%.
FAILURE TO COMPLY MAY RESULT IN SHORTENED TUBE LIFE AND/OR ERRATIC
TUBE BEHAVIOR.

System shutdown ensures that all images on disk are properly closed, all image maintenance functions properly terminated, the gantry
parked, the X–Ray system sufficiently cooled and all films printed.

There are three shutdown selections: Shutdown Gantry, Shutdown Console, Shutdown System and Switch to Console as seen in Figure 15.
SHUTDOWN

Shutdown System...

Shutdown Console...

Start Gantry

Switch to Console...

FIGURE 15 SHUTDOWN SCREEN

08/12/04 Final Review Philips Medical Systems. Confidential and Proprietary information. Refer to Title Page. 24
Shutdown Gantry: This option should be used, if possible, in place of the e–stop switches. An orderly shutdown of the gantry will be
performed. Display Tower and/or AcQImage Cabinet operation may continue after selected. To cancel shutdown,
click the Abort button.
Shutdown System: Performs an orderly shutdown of the entire scanner system. To cancel shutdown, click the Abort button.
Shutdown Console: This option shuts down only the console units. An orderly shutdown of the image archiver, filming and file system
will be done.
Start Gantry: Toggles Start/Shutdown Gantry depending on status of Gantry power.
Switch to Console: Changes the GUI to the Console Application (Operator) screen.

WARNING
THE GUI SHUTDOWN REMOVES POWER FROM THE SYSTEM, BUT NOT AT THE
INCOMING POWER LINES. DANGEROUS VOLTAGES ARE EXPOSED WHEN THE
GANTRY COVERS ARE REMOVED. BEFORE SERVICING EQUIPMENT, REMOVE
POWER FROM THE WALL BOX. FAILURE TO COMPLY CAN CAUSE SERIOUS
INJURY OR DEATH TO PERSONNEL.

2. When prompted via a dialog box, turn the Display Tower keyswitch to the OFF position.
3. On the AcQImage Cabinet and Display Tower, ensure the rear breaker switch is turned off.

08/12/04 Final Review Philips Medical Systems. Confidential and Proprietary information. Refer to Title Page. 25
AcQImage Boards – Power Up Test LED Interpretations
AP, PB, GAM Board Diagnostic Flash Version 1.1.2

0 Hardware Initialization
1 CPU Version Check
2 Diagnostic Flash CRC Check
3 Operating System Flash CRC Check
4 CPU Memory Test
5 Data Cache Test
6 Unexpected Exception Test
7 IBC Test
8 NVRAM Single Location Test
9 PCI Bus Select Test
A Ethernet Loopback Test
B UART Loopback Test
C apmem for AP, pbmem for PB, gamem for GAM

C CIO Test (CP Board Diagnostic Flash Version 1.1.2)

D Synchronous Serial Chip Loopback Test (CP Board Diagnostic Flash Version 1.1.2)

08/12/04 Final Review Philips Medical Systems. Confidential and Proprietary information. Refer to Title Page. 26
ACQSIM CT DICOM CONFORMANCE STATEMENT – REV. 2.0 SOFTWARE
Medical imaging devices claiming conformance to the DICOM standard must indicate in sufficient detail the service classes and information
objects, as defined by the standard, to which they conform. This document details the conformance of Philips Medical Systems’ AcQSim
CT scanner family to the DICOM standard. The AcQSim CT scanner family requires software revision 1.0 as a minimum. This document
does not attempt to detail any other Philips CT products or other medical imaging devices manufactured by Philips Medical Systems.
1 Implementation Model
This implementation provides for simple transfer of images to and from the AcQSim CT scanner family. The transfer may be started locally
by an operator on the scanner, or remotely by a DICOM compliant node. This implementation also provides for filming of images to DICOM
compliant printers. The AcQSim CT operator initiates a transfer of images to a remote DICOM node by selecting ”Study” from the clinical
scanning application’s menu bar. The operator then selects ”DICOM” and then ”Send”. A dialog box displaying a directory of the data base
and the list of possible destination DICOM nodes will appear. The operator then may select any combination of individual studies, series,
and images to send. The operator must also select the DICOM node to send the images to by clicking on it with the mouse. If the operator
mouse clicks on the ”Cancel” button, the dialog will be dismissed and no action will be taken. If the operator mouse clicks on the ”Send”
button, the dialog will be dismissed and the requested transfers will be started. The operator will be informed of the progress of the transfer
by way of the status area in the lower left corner of the screen. An error message will be displayed if the transfers fail, and a message will
be displayed as each individually selected study/series/image is transferred. Images are sent using the DICOM Storage Service Class.

Other DICOM compliant nodes may retrieve images from the AcQSim CT using the DICOM Query/Retrieve Service class. No local operator
action is required for a remote node to retrieve images.

To print to a DICOM compliant printer, the operator selects the printer from the list supplied in the ”FILMING OPTIONS” dialog box. He
then selects the images to print using the ”Expose” key or clicking on a film cell in the film area on the left side of the screen. When the
operator has selected all of the images he wishes to print, he may click on ”Print” to print the images. Printing will also occur when a sheet
of film is full.

Worklist requests are initiated when the operator specifically requests a worklist. The software package which runs to accomplish the
worklist request and manage the subsequent return of the worklist records will be called the WORKLIST software.

To initiate a manual worklist request, the user must gain access to the worklist operations screen. From the “Study . DICOM” menu bar,
the user selects the Worklist menu item to enter the “DICOM Modality Worklist” screen. From this screen, the user has the option of
narrowing the search by restricting the acceptable returned values of any of the listed fields. Once the search parameters are established,
the user enters the “SEARCH” softkey. The WORKLIST software sends the worklist request to the configured node. It then accepts and
processes any received worklist entries.

11/22/02 REVISION B ACQSIM CT – DICOM CONFORMANCE STATEMENT 1

2 Application Data Flow Diagram

User Images
Selects AUS Stored
Images Remotely
to Send

Remote
Directory System
Information Requests
Provided Directory
APS

Remote
Images System
Sent Requests
Images

User Film
Request Printed
Film
FILM
SERVER
Film
User Completed
Notified or Error

User
Initiated
Manual
Search MODALITY Request Worklist
Worklist
WORKLIST Worklist Entries Entries
INTERFACE
Store
Worklist
Entries
Activities Performed By
External Services

11/22/02 REVISION B ACQSIM CT – DICOM CONFORMANCE STATEMENT 2

One way image data is transferred from the AcQSim CT is when an operator selects a set of studies, series, or images to transfer. The
software which runs to accomplish the transfer is known as the ACR–NEMA User Services (AUS).

Images may be transferred from the AcQSim CT by remote DICOM nodes using the standard DICOM Query/Retrieve Service classes.
The software handles DICOM requests from remote nodes is known as the ACR–NEMA Provider Services (APS). The APS software is
started at system start–up time, and will accept requests from other compliant nodes any time the system is running, subject to the
availability of disk, memory, and network resources.

AcQSim CT operators may film to DICOM compliant printers. The software which controls this is known as the Film Server. The film server
forms an association with a printer when an operator has signalled that a sheet of film should be printed. Once the association is made,
the film server sends the required information to the printer.
2.1 Functional definitions of AE’s
The AUS software begins to run when a user selects DICOM send or DICOM receive from the menu bar. When the AUS software is invoked,
an association will be established with the AE identified by the user. Images will be transferred one at a time until there are no more images
to transfer.The APS software begins to run at system startup time. After initialization, the APS software waits for a connection at the port
address configured for its Application Entity Title. When another node connects, the presentation and application contexts are checked
to see if a valid context has been proposed. Once a valid context is proposed and the association is accepted, APS waits for C–ECHO,
C–FIND and C–MOVE requests from the remote node. The association is maintained until the remote node initiates the release process
or the association has been idle for a specified (configurable) amount of time.

The Film Server software also begins to run at system startup time. The Film Server does not attempt to make an association with a DICOM
print device until it has all of the information needed to print a sheet of film. It then makes the association, sends the necessary information
to the printer, waits for a completion status (if Print Job SOP Class is supported), and breaks the association. The Film Server may also
attempt to make an association when a user selects a printer as a means of checking the printer’s availability.

When the WORKLIST software is invoked, an association will be established with the AE identified by the system configuration.

11/22/02 REVISION B ACQSIM CT – DICOM CONFORMANCE STATEMENT 3

3 AE Specification
3.1 AUS software
The AUS software provides Standard Conformance to the following DICOM SOP Classes as an SCU:

SOP Class Name SOP Class UID

Verification 1.2.840.10008.1.1
CT Image Storage 1.2.840.10008.5.1.4.1.1.2
SC Image Storage 1.2.840.10008.5.1.4.1.1.7
The AUS software never acts in the role of an SCP.
3.1.1 Association Establishment Policies
3.1.1.1 General
The AUS software attempts to establish an association when the operator has chosen a set of images to transfer. The association is
maintained by AUS until the operator has pressed the cancel button, or the images specified by the operator have been transferred.

When transferring images to a remote node, the images are sent one at a time over the open association until either all of the images have
transferred successfully, the remote node’s Service Class Provider software reports an error, or the remote node breaks down the
association. The AUS software waits for a response message after each image is sent.

The AUS software does not place any restrictions on the maximum PDU size. If the Service Class Provider for the association does not
specify a maximum PDU size, the AUS software sends PDU’s of not more than 4096 bytes.
3.1.1.2 Number of Associations
The AUS software creates one association to a remote DICOM node for each user request. It is possible to have more than one association
to a particular remote node if the operator issues multiple requests to the DICOM software in a short period of time. There is no specific
maximum to the number of concurrent associations allowed by the AUS software, but it is constrained by disk and memory resources of
the PQ 2000+ scanner. Also, more than four concurrent connections may result in a performance degradation.
3.1.1.3 Asynchronous Nature
The AUS software waits for a response after each DICOM command is sent before sending the next command. Therefore, there is no
asynchronous activity in this implementation.

The Asynchronous Operations Window negotiation is not supported.

11/22/02 REVISION B ACQSIM CT – DICOM CONFORMANCE STATEMENT 4

3.1.1.4 Implementation Identifying Information
The AUS will provide a single Implementation Class UID which is 2.16.840.1.113662.2.4.
3.1.2 Association Initiation Policy
3.1.2.1 Associated Real World Activity
The AUS software attempts to initiate an association whenever the AcQSim CT operator selects a set of studies for transfer.
3.1.2.2 Proposed presentation contexts.
The AUS software will propose all of the following contexts whenever an association establishment is tried. However, objects will only be
sent over contexts that have been agreed upon.
The implementation described here offers only the default transfer syntax (DICOM Implicit VR Little Endian)
Presentation Context Table
Abstract Syntax Transfer Syntax Role Ext.

Name UID Name UID list

Neg.
CT Imageg Storage g 1.2.840.10008.5.1.4.1.1.2 DICOM Implicit VR Big Endian 1.2.840.10008.1.2.2 SCU None
DICOM Implicit VR Little Endian 1.2.840.10008.1.2.1 SCU None
DICOM Implicit VR Little Endian 1.2.840.10008.1.2 SCU None
SC ImagegStorage g 1.2.840.10008.5.1.4.1.1.7 DICOM Implicit VR Big Endian 1.2.840.10008.1.2.2 SCU None
DICOM Implicit VR Little Endian 1.2.840.10008.1.2.1 SCU None
DICOM Implicit VR Little Endian 1.2.840.10008.1.2 SCU None

3.1.2.3 SOP Specific Conformance Statement

3.1.2.3.1 Real World Activity 1 – Images Selected to Send
The operator is informed when a selected study, series, or image has been transferred. If an attempt to store an image on a remote DICOM
node fails, the operator will be notified and the AUS software will attempt to send the next selected item in the list.
Warning: C–STORE Response statuses are treated the same as successful statuses.
The AcQSim CT scanner saves the following data elements for images created on the scanner. This is the set of optional elements which
will be sent with an image generated on an AcQSim CT scanner. Note: Some of these fields may be absent if the data for them has not
been supplied by the operator.

11/22/02 REVISION B ACQSIM CT – DICOM CONFORMANCE STATEMENT 5

 IOD Attribute Name Attribute Possible Values
Tag

Patient’s Name (0010, 0010) Patient’s Name or NULL

Patient
Patient ID (0010, 0020) Patient ID

Patient’s Birth Date (0010, 0030) NULL

Patient’s Sex (0010, 0040) ”M”, ”F”, ”O” or NULL

Patient Birth Time (0010, 1032) NULL

Ethnic Group (0010, 2160) NULL

Patient Comments (0010, 4000) Comments

Study Instance UID (0020, 000D) UID

General
Study Study Date (0008, 0020) Date

Study Time (0008, 0030) Time

Study ID (0020, 0010) Numeric ID for this Study

Accession Number (0008, 0050) NULL

Referring Physician’s Name (0008, 0090) Physician’s Name or NULL

Name of Physician Reading (0008, 1060) Physician’s name or NULL

Study
Patient Admitting Diagnoses (0008, 1080) NULL
Study Description

Patient’s Age (0010, 1010) Patient’s age or NULL

Patient’s Size (0010, 1020) NULL

Patient’s Weight (0010, 1030) Patient’s weight or NULL

Patient’s Occupation (0010, 2180) NULL

Additional Patient’s History (0010, 21B0) NULL

11/22/02 REVISION B ACQSIM CT – DICOM CONFORMANCE STATEMENT 6

 Modality (0008, 0060) ”CT”
General
Series Series Instance UID (0020, 000E) UID

Series Number (0020, 0011) Number

Laterality (0020, 0060) NULL

Series Date (0008, 0021) Date

Series Time (0008, 0031) Time

Protocol Name (0018, 1030) Protocol Name

Series Description (0008, 103E) NULL

Operator’s Name (0008, 1070) Operator’s Name or NULL

Body Part Examined (0018, 0015) Body Part

Manufacturer (0008, 0070) ”Picker”

General
Equipment Institution Name (0008, 0080) Name as configured by user

Institution Address (0008, 0081) Address as configured by user

Station Name (0008, 1010) Station name as configured by user

Institutional Department Name (0008, 1040) Department name as configured by

user

Manufacturer’s Model Name (0008, 1090) ”Picker UltraZ”

Spatial Resolution (0018, 1050) Number

Date of Last Calibration (0018, 1200) Date

Time of Last Calibration (0018, 1201) Time

Pixel Padding Value (0028, 0120) 0

11/22/02 REVISION B ACQSIM CT – DICOM CONFORMANCE STATEMENT 7

 Image Number (0020, 0013) Number
General
Image Patient Orientation (0020, 0020) Combination of ”H”, ”F”, ”A”, ”P”,
”L”, and ”R”

Image Date (0008, 0023) Date

Image Time (0008, 0033) Time

Acquisition Number (0020, 0012) Number

Acquisition Date (0008, 0022) Date

Acquisition Time (0008, 0032) Time

Derivation Description (0008, 2111) NULL

Pixel Spacing (0028, 0030) Number pair

Image Plane
Image Orientation (Patient) (0020, 0037) Direction cosines for orientation

Image Position (Patient) (0020, 0032) x,y,z coordinates of first pixel

Slice Thickness (0018, 0050) Number

Slice Location (0020, 1041) Number

11/22/02 REVISION B ACQSIM CT – DICOM CONFORMANCE STATEMENT 8

 Samples per Pixel (0028, 0002) 1
Image Pixel
Photometric Interpretation (0028, 0004) ”MONOCHROME2”

Rows (0028, 0010) Pixel rows (512 or 1024 for CT

images)

Columns (0028, 0011) Pixel columns (512 or 1024 for CT

images)

Bits allocated (0028, 0100) 16 (for CT Images)

Bits Stored (0028, 0101) 16 (for CT images)

High Bit (0028, 0102) 15 (for CT images)

Pixel Representation (0028, 0103) 1 (Two’s complement)

Pixel data (7FE0, 0010) Pixel data

Pixel Aspect Ratio (0028, 0034) Number pair

Smallest Image Pixel Value (0028, 0106) Minimum actual pixel value in this
image

Largest Image Pixel Value (0028, 0107) Maximum actual pixel value in this
image

Contrast/Bolus Agent (0018, 0010) Agent as provided by the operator

Contrast/
bolus Contrast/Bolus Route (0018, 1040) ”IV”, ”GI”, or ”IV & GI”

Contrast/Bolus Volume (0018, 1041) 0

Contrast/Bolus Start Time (0018, 1042) NULL

Contrast/Bolus Stop Time (0018, 1043) NULL

Contrast/Bolus Total Dose (0018, 1044) 0

11/22/02 REVISION B ACQSIM CT – DICOM CONFORMANCE STATEMENT 9

 Image Type (0008, 0008)
CT Image
Samples per Pixel (0028, 0002) 1

Photometric Interpretation (0028, 0004) ”MONOCHROME2”

Bits allocated (0028, 0100) 16 (for CT images)

Bits Stored (0028, 0101) 16 (for CT images)

High Bit (0028, 0102) 15 (for CT images)

Rescale Intercept (0028, 1052) 0

Rescale Slope (0028, 1053) 1

KVP (0018, 0060) Peak Voltage as specified by the

protocol

Acquisition Number (0020, 0012) Number

Scan Options (0018, 0022) NULL

Reconstruction Diameter (0018, 1100) Diameter in millimeters

Distance Source to Detector (0018, 1110) Distance in millimeters

Distance Source to Patient (0018, 1111) Distance in millimeters

Gantry/Detector Tilt (0018, 1120) Tilt in degrees

Table Height (0018, 1130) Height in millimeters

Rotation Direction (0018, 1140) ”CW”

Exposure Time (0018, 1150) Exposure time in milliseconds

X–ray Tube Current (0018, 1151) Current in mA

Exposure (0018, 1152) Number

Generator Power (0018, 1170) Power in kW

VOI LUT Window Center (0028, 1050) Number

Window Width (0028, 1051) Number

11/22/02 REVISION B ACQSIM CT – DICOM CONFORMANCE STATEMENT 10

 SOP Class UID (0008, 0016) 1.2.840.10008.5.1.4.1.1.2 for CT
SOP 1.2.840.10008.5.1.4.1.1.7 for SC
Common
SOP Instance UID (0008, 0018) UID

Specific Character Set (0008. 0005) Character set used

Instance Creation Date (0008, 0012) Date

Instance Creation Time (0008, 0013) Time

Additionally, CT images that were created by an AcQSim CT scanner will contain the following private elements.

Identifier Attribute Tag Type

Private Group Tag (0011, 0010) LO

Patient Locale (0011, 1010) CS

Patient Flags (0011, 1011) UL

Patient Trauma Flag (0011, 1012) UL

Patient UID (0011, 1013) UI

Study Locale (0011, 1020) CS

Study Folder (0011, 1021) CS

Series Locale (0011, 1030) CS

Series Protocol Modifications (0011, 1031) CS

Series Flags (0011, 1032) UL

Series Coronal Position (0011, 1033) CS

Series Frame of Reference Absolute Position (0011, 1034) FD

Series Frame of Reference Absolute Couch Height (0011, 1035) FD

Series Protocol ID (0011, 1036) UL

Image Compression (0011, 1040) CS

Image Locale (0011, 1042) CS

11/22/02 REVISION B ACQSIM CT – DICOM CONFORMANCE STATEMENT 11

 Image Flags (0011, 1043) UL

Pilot Tube Position (degrees) (0011, 1050) FD

Reconstruction filter (0011, 1051) CS

Spiral Interpolation filter (0011, 1052) CS

Reconstruction Horizontal Center (0011, 1053) FD

Reconstruction Vertical Center (0011, 1054) FD

Injector Flag (0011, 1055) CS

Spiral Revolutions (0011, 1056) FD

Pitch Value for Spiral (0011, 1057) FD

Pilot Edge Enhancement (0011, 1058) CS

Type of Pilot Scan Used (0011, 1059) CS

Sampling (0011, 105A) FD

Scan Type (0011, 105B) CS

CT Image Locale (0011, 105C) CS

CT Image Flags (0011, 105D) UL

Peristaltic Correction Flag (0011, 105E) UL

Off Focal Correction Flag (0011, 105F) UL

IBC Flag (0011, 1060) UL

MSSI Flag (0011, 1061) UL

Scan Angle in Degrees (0011, 1062) FD

MSSI Width in mm (0011, 1063) FD

The Slice Spacing from the Current Image Group (0011, 1064) FD

The ID of the Group that this Image Belongs To (0011, 1065) UL

The Scan Time (0011, 1066) UL

11/22/02 REVISION B ACQSIM CT – DICOM CONFORMANCE STATEMENT 12

 IBC Threshold (0011, 1067) UL

The Scan Field of View (0011, 1068) CS

3.1.3 Association Acceptance policy

The AUS software never accepts associations.
3.2 APS Specification
The APS software provides Standard Conformance to the following DICOM SOP Classes as an SCP:
SOP Class Name SOP Class UID
Verification 1.2.840.10008.1.1
Patient Root Query/Retrieve 1.2.840.10008.5.1.4.1.2.1.1
Information Model – FIND
Patient Root Query/Retrieve 1.2.840.10008.5.1.4.1.2.1.2
Information Model – MOVE
Study Root Query/Retrieve 1.2.840.10008.5.1.4.1.2.2.1
Information Model – FIND
Study Root Query/Retrieve 1.2.840.10008.5.1.4.1.2.2.2
Information Model – MOVE
Patient/Study only 1.2.840.10008.5.1.4.1.2.3.1
Query/Retrieve Information
Model – FIND
Patient/Study only 1.2.840.10008.5.1.4.1.2.3.2
Query/Retrieve Information
Model – MOVE

The APS software never acts in the role of an SCU.

11/22/02 REVISION B ACQSIM CT – DICOM CONFORMANCE STATEMENT 13

3.2.1 Association Establishment Policies
3.2.1.1 General
The APS software is started at system initialization time. After initializing, the APS waits for association requests. When a successful
association is made, a new process is spawned to handle requests on the association. This process will receive one request at a time,
process it, and send a response before reading the next request from the network. The process will close the association if it has been
idle for more than the configured time, or if the Service Class User breaks down the connection.

The APS software does not place any restrictions on the maximum PDU size. If the Service Class User for the association does not specify
a maximum PDU size, the APS software sends PDU’s of not more than 4096 bytes.
3.2.1.2 Number of Associations
The APS software places no limits on the number of concurrent associations. However, more than 4 associations active concurrently will
impact system performance. Other system resource limitations may also impact the maximum number of concurrent associations.

There are no additional restrictions on multiple simultaneous associations with a single AE.
3.2.1.3 Asynchronous Nature
Although there may be concurrent associations, images are processed in a serial fashion. The APS software processes each image in
turn and sends a response before processing the next image. Therefore, there is no asynchronous activity in this implementation.

The Asynchronous Operation Window negotiation is not supported.

3.2.1.4 Implementation Identifying Information
APS will provide a single Implementation Class UID which is 2.16.840.1.113662.2.4
3.2.2 Association Initiation Policy
The APS software only initiates associations to perform C–STORE sub–operations for a C–MOVE request. It utilizes the AUS software
described previously to make this association. Details of the association initiation policy may be seen in the AUS description above.

3.2.3 Association Acceptance Policy

There are two Real World Activities which may cause association establishment. These are: ”Remote System Requests Directory”, and
”Remote System Requests Images”. The APS software acts the same way in making the association regardless of the remote system’s
intent. The association acceptance policy for both of these real world activities is grouped into ”Remote connection to APS” below.

11/22/02 REVISION B ACQSIM CT – DICOM CONFORMANCE STATEMENT 14

3.2.3.1 Remote connection to APS
3.2.3.1.1 Associated Real World Activity
The Associated Real World Activity is an attempt by a remote system to connect to the AcQSim CT for retrieval.
3.2.3.1.2 Acceptable presentation contexts.
The table below indicates which presentation contexts will be accepted by the APS software.

Presentation Context Table

Abstract Syntax Transfer Syntax Role Ext.
Name UID Name UID List Neg.
Patient Root Query/Retrieve 1.2.840.10008.5.1.4.1.2.1.1 DICOM Explicit VR Big Endian 1.2.840.1008.1.2.2 SCP None
Information Model – FIND DICOM Explicit VR Little Endian 1.2.840.10008.1.2.1
DICOM Implicit VR Little Endian 1.2.840.10008.1.2
Patient Root Query/Retrieve
Q y/ 1.2.840.10008.5.1.4.1.2.1.2 DICOM Explicit VR Big Endian 1.2.840.1008.1.2.2 SCP None
Information Model – MOVE DICOM Explicit VR Little Endian 1.2.840.10008.1.2.1
DICOM Implicit VR Little Endian 1.2.840.10008.1.2
Study yRoot Query/Retrieve
Q y/ 1.2.840.10008.5.1.4.1.2.2.1 DICOM Explicit VR Big Endian 1.2.840.1008.1.2.2 SCP None
Information Model – FIND DICOM Explicit VR Little Endian 1.2.840.10008.1.2.1
DICOM Implicit VR Little Endian 1.2.840.10008.1.2
Study yRoot Query/Retrieve
Q y/ 1.2.840.10008.5.1.4.1.2.2.2 DICOM Explicit VR Big Endian 1.2.840.1008.1.2.2 SCP None
Information Model – MOVE DICOM Explicit VR Little Endian 1.2.840.10008.1.2.1
DICOM Implicit VR Little Endian 1.2.840.10008.1.2
Patient/Study
/ Only
y Query/
y Q y/ 1.2.840.10008.5.1.4.1.2.3.1 DICOM Explicit VR Big Endian 1.2.840.1008.1.2.2 SCP None
Retrieve Information Model DICOM Explicit VR Little Endian 1.2.840.10008.1.2.1
– FIND DICOM Implicit VR Little Endian 1.2.840.10008.1.2
Patient/Study
/ Only
y Query/
y Q y/ 1.2.840.10008.5.1.4.1.2.3.2 DICOM Explicit VR Big Endian 1.2.840.1008.1.2.2 SCP None
Retrieve Information Model DICOM Explicit VR Little Endian 1.2.840.10008.1.2.1
– MOVE DICOM Implicit VR Little Endian 1.2.840.10008.1.2

11/22/02 REVISION B ACQSIM CT – DICOM CONFORMANCE STATEMENT 15

3.2.3.1.2.1 SOP Specific Conformance to Verification SOP Class
APS provides standard conformance to the DICOM Verification Service Class.
3.2.3.1.2.2 SOP Specific Conformance to the Query/Retrieve Service Class
3.2.3.1.2.2.1 C–FIND Conformance
The APS software conforms to C–FIND behavior in the standard way for Patient Root Model, Study Root Model, and Patient/Study Only
Model.

Relational Search is not supported.

Extended Negotiation is not supported.

These Optional Keys are supported when a C–FIND is requested on the appropriate hierarchy level:

Optional Keys Supported by APS Software

Description Tag Level

Patient Sex (0010, 0040) Patient

Patient’s Age (0010, 1010) Patient

Patient’s Size (0010, 1020) Patient

Patient’s Weight (0010, 1030) Patient

Ethnic Group (0010, 2160) Patient

Patient Comments (0010, 4000) Patient

Occupation (0010, 2180) Patient

Referring Physician’s (0008, 0090) Study

Name

Name of Physicians (0008, 1060) Study

Reading Study

Admitting Diagnoses (0008,1080) Study

Description

Patient’s Age (0010, 1010) Study

Patient’s Size (0010, 1020) Study

11/22/02 REVISION B ACQSIM CT – DICOM CONFORMANCE STATEMENT 16

 Patient’s Weight (0010, 1030) Study

Occupation (0010, 2180) Study

Series Laterality (0020, 0060) Series

Series Date (0008, 0021) Series

Series Time (0008, 0031) Series

Performing Physician’s (0008, 1050) Series

Name

Protocol Name (0018, 1030) Series

Series Description (0008, 103E) Series

Operator’s Name (0008, 1070) Series

Body Part Examined (0018, 0015) Series

Patient Position (0018, 5100) Series

Patient Orientation (0020, 0020) Image

Image Date (0008, 0023) Image

Image Time (0008, 0033) Image

Image Type (0008, 0008) Image

Acquisition Number (0020, 0012) Image

Acquisition Date (0008, 0022) Image

Acquisition Time (0008, 0032) Image

Derivation description (0008,2111) Image

3.2.3.1.2.2.2 C–MOVE Conformance

The APS software conforms to C–MOVE behavior in the standard way for Patient Root Model, Study Root Model, and Patient/Study Only
Model.

These are the Storage Service Class SOP Classes under which the APS software supports C–STORE sub–operations generated by the
C–MOVE:

11/22/02 REVISION B ACQSIM CT – DICOM CONFORMANCE STATEMENT 17

 SOP Class Name SOP Class UID
CT Image Storage 1.2.840.10008.5.1.4.1.1.2
SC Image Storage 1.2.840.10008.5.1.4.1.1.7

3.2.3.1.3 Presentation Context Acceptance Criteria

APS will always accept any of the Presentation Contexts specified in section 2.2.3.1.2. As many as eleven contexts will be accepted per
association.
3.2.3.1.4 Transfer Syntax Acceptance Criteria
APS accepts only the DICOM default transfer syntax (DICOM Implicit VR Little Endian).
3.3 Film Server Specification
The Film Server software provides Standard Conformance to the following DICOM SOP Classes as an SCU:
SOP Class Name SOP Class UID
Basic Grayscale Print Management Meta SOP Class 1.2.840.10008.5.1.1.9
Basic Film Session SOP Class 1.2.840.10008.5.1.1.1
Basic Film Box SOP Class 1.2.840.10008.5.1.1.2
Basic Grayscale Image Box SOP Class 1.2.840.10008.5.1.1.4
Printer SOP Class 1.2.840.10008.5.1.1.16
Basic Color Print Management Meta SOP Class 1.2.840.10008.5.1.1.18
Basic Film Session SOP Class 1.2.840.10008.5.1.1.1
Basic Film Box SOP Class 1.2.840.10008.5.1.1.2
Basic Color Image Box SOP Class 1.2.840.10008.5.1.1.4.1
Printer SOP Class 1.2.840.10008.5.1.1.16
Print Job SOP Class 1.2.840.10008.5.1.1.14
The Film Server software never acts in the role of an SCP.

11/22/02 REVISION B ACQSIM CT – DICOM CONFORMANCE STATEMENT 18

3.3.1 Association Establishment Policies
3.3.1.1 General
The Film Server software attempts to establish an association when it determines that it has the necessary data to print a sheet of film.
The film server obtains data when the operator indicates that an image is to be filmed, or when images are being created and the ”Auto
Film” option is enabled. One or more images may be placed on a film, depending on the format selected by the user.

The Film Server software does not place any restrictions on the maximum PDU size. If the Service Class Provider for the association does
not specify a maximum PDU size, the Film Server software sends PDU’s of s not more than 4096 bytes.

3.3.1.2 Number of Associations

The number of associations the film server will maintain with a single printer is configurable. The default is one. The maximum number
of associations the film server will support is the sum of the number of associations allowed for each configured printer.

3.3.1.3 Asynchronous Nature

For each sheet of film to be printed, the Film Server software creates an association, sets film attributes, prints the film, and releases the
association. There is no asynchronous activity.

The Asynchronous Operations Window negotiation is not supported.

3.3.1.4 Implementation Identifying Information

The Film Server software will provide a single Implementation Class UID which is 2.16.840.1.113662.2.4

3.3.2 Association Initiation Policy

There are two Real World Activities which may cause association establishment. First is when an operator selects a printer, and second
is when the operator has indicated to the Film Server software that a sheet of film should be printed. The implementation described here
offers only the default transfer syntax (DICOM Implicit VR Little Endian).

3.3.2.1 Printer Selected

3.3.2.1.1 Associated Real World Activity
When the operator selects a printer for the first time, the film server consults its configuration to determine what level of connection testing
should be done. If the configuration indicates a DICOM association should be attempted, the Film server software will request an
association.

11/22/02 REVISION B ACQSIM CT – DICOM CONFORMANCE STATEMENT 19

3.3.2.1.2 Proposed presentation contexts.
The Film Server software will propose Job SOP Class and either Grayscale or Color Meta SOP class based on the type of printer. Only
the default transfer syntax (DICOM Implicit VR Little Endian) will be offered.

Presentation Context Table

Abstract Syntax Transfer Syntax Role Ext.

Name UID Name List UID list

Neg.
Basic Grayscale Print 1.2.840.10008.5.1.1.9 DICOM Implicit VR 1.2.840.10008.1.2 SCU None
Management Meta SOP Class Little Endian
Basic Color Print 1.2.840.10008.5.1.1.18 DICOM Implicit VR 1.2.840.10008.1.2 SCU None
Management Meta SOP Class LittleEndian
Print Job SOP Class 1.2.840.10008.5.1.1.14 DICOM Implicit VR Little 1.2.840.10008.1.2 SCU None
Endian

3.3.2.1.3 SOP Specific conformance

As a result of this Real World Activity, the Film Server software will only create, then release the association. It does not exercise any of
functionality of the SOP classes and so it provides standard conformance to the service classes it associates with as a Service Class User.
3.3.2.2 Film Sheet to be Printed.
3.3.2.2.1 Associated Real World Activity
The Film Server is informed that a sheet of film is to be printed. This may occur because the operator has depressed the ”Print” button,
or enough images have been selected by the operator for a full sheet of film to be printed.
3.3.2.2.2 Proposed presentation contexts.
The Film Server software will propose Job SOP Class and either Grayscale or Color Meta SOP class based on the type of printer. Only
the default transfer syntax (DICOM Implicit VR Little Endian) will be offered.

11/22/02 REVISION B ACQSIM CT – DICOM CONFORMANCE STATEMENT 20

 Presentation Context Table
Abstract Syntax Transfer Syntax Role Ext.

Name UID Name List UID list

Neg.
Basic Grayscale Print 1.2.840.10008.5.1.1.9 DICOM Implicit VR 1.2.840.10008.1.2 SCU None
Management Meta SOP Class Little Endian
Basic Color Print 1.2.840.10008.5.1.1.18 DICOM Implicit VR Little 1.2.840.10008.1.2 SCU None
Management Meta SOP Class Endian
Print Job SOP Class 1.2.840.10008.5.1.1.14 DICOM Implicit VR Little 1.2.840.10008.1.2 SCU None
Endian

3.3.2.3 SOP Specific Conformance Statement

The following DIMSE Service Elements and optional attributes are used by the Film Server software:

Basic Film Session SOP Class

DIMSE Services Used Optional Attribute Description Tag Possible Values

N–CREATE
Number of Copies (2000, 0010) See Note Below

N–SET
Number of Copies (2000, 0010) See Note Below

N–DELETE

N–ACTION

11/22/02 REVISION B ACQSIM CT – DICOM CONFORMANCE STATEMENT 21

 Basic Film Box SOP Class
DIMSE Services Used Optional Attribute Description Tag Possible Values
N–CREATE
Magnification Type (2010, 0060) See Note Below
Border Density (2010, 0100) See Note Below
Trim (2010, 0140) See Note Below
N–SET
Magnification Type (2010, 0060) See Note Below
Border Density (2010, 0100) See Note Below
Trim (2010, 0140) See Note Below
N–DELETE
N–ACTION

Basic Grayscale Image Box SOP Class

DIMSE Services Used Optional Attribute Description Tag Possible Values
N–SET
Magnification Type (2010, 0060) See Note Below

Basic Color Image Box SOP Class

DIMSE Services Used Optional Attribute Description Tag Possible Values
N–SET
Magnification Type (2010, 0060) See Note Below

Print Job SOP Class

DIMSE Services Used Optional Attribute Description Tag Possible Values
N–EVENT–REPORT
N–GET

11/22/02 REVISION B ACQSIM CT – DICOM CONFORMANCE STATEMENT 22

Basic Film Session SOP Class

Basic Film Box SOP Class

Basic Grayscale Image Box SOP Class

Basic Color Image Box SOP Class

Print Job SOP ClassNOTE: The film server software uses a file to determine what the valid values are for mandatory and optional attributes.
A separate file exists for each printer type and is generated by Philips. The data in the file is based on the conformance statement provided
by the manufacturer of the printer.
3.3.3 Association Acceptance policy
The Film Server software never accepts associations.
3.4 WORKLIST Specification
The WORKLIST software provides Standard Conformance to the following DICOM SOP Class as an SCU:

SOP Class Name SOP Class UID

Modality Worklist Information Model – FIND 1.2.840.10008.5.1.4.31

The WORKLIST software never acts in the role of an SCP.

3.4.1 Association Establishment Policy
3.4.1.1 General
The WORKLIST software attempts to establish an association when the operator has chosen to search the network for worklist procedures
through the access screens. Once the association is established, the WORKLIST software waits for returned worklist entries until the SCP
sends an “end of worklist.”
3.4.1.2 Number of Associations
One WORKLIST application requests one association at a time.

11/22/02 REVISION B ACQSIM CT – DICOM CONFORMANCE STATEMENT 23

3.4.1.3 Asynchronous Nature
No asynchronous capability.
3.4.1.4 Implementation Identifying Information
The WORKLIST software provides a single Implementation Class UID of 2.16.840.1.113662.2.1.1
3.4.2 Association Initiation Policy
The WORKLIST software attempts to initiate an associaton whenever the operator selects “SEARCH” from the PROfile Connect Operations
menu.

The WORKLIST software never accepts an association request.

3.4.2.1 Search for Worklist Scheduled Procedure
3.4.2.1.1 Associated Real World Activity
The operator initiates the worklist request by selecting “SEARCH” from the WORKLIST entry under the Study menu bar.
3.4.2.1.2 Proposed Presentation Contexts
Each time an association is initiated, the WORKLIST software proposes a single Presentation Context to be used on that association.

Presentation Context Table

Abstract Syntax Transfer Syntax Role Ext.
Name UID Name List UID list Neg.
Modality 1.2.840.10008.5.1.4.31 DICOM Implicit VR 1.2.840.10008.1.2 SCU None
Worklist Little Endian
Information
Model – FIND

11/22/02 REVISION B ACQSIM CT – DICOM CONFORMANCE STATEMENT 24

3.4.2.2 SOP Specific Conformance Statement
To request a worklist, the WORKLIST software sends a C–FIND request. This request contains the desired search criteria for determining
the matching worklist entries. It also contains a specification of which fields are requested to be returned with the matching entires. The
WORKLIST software then looks for one or more C–Find responses containing the matching worklist records.

For a Manual Search, the WORKLIST software requires that the operator remain in the WORKLIST screen until the search is resolved,
successful or unsuccessful. If any returned procedures exist, the WORKLIST software displays the returned procedures to the operator.
It is the operator’s choice to select worklist entries for subsequent use on the scanner. If no procedures are returned, or a communications
failure occurs, an appropriate status is displayed to the operator.

At any time during a manual search operation, the operator may abort the worklist request. The WORKLIST software cancels it’s
association, and the user screen closes.

Extended Negotiation is not supported.

3.4.2.2.1 Modality Worklist Information Model
The following table defines the WORKLIST software’s usage of the attributes for the Modality Worklist Model. All type 1 and type 2 elements
are sent as well as the listed type 3 elements.

WORKLIST FIELDS
Attribute Name Tag Type Implementation Details Displayed to user as
Scheduled Procedure Step Module
Scheduled Procedure (0040, 0100) 1 None Not Displayed
Step Sequence
> Scheduled Station AE (0040, 0001) 1 Default to AE Title of Device* Not Displayed
Title
> Scheduled Procedure (0040, 0002) 1 Scheduled Date
Step Start Date
> Scheduled Procedure (0040, 0003) 1 Scheduled Time
Step Start Time
> Scheduled Procedure (0040, 0011) 2 Scheduled Location
Step Location

11/22/02 REVISION B ACQSIM CT – DICOM CONFORMANCE STATEMENT 25

 > Modality (0008, 0060) 1 Default to “CT”** Not Displayed
> Scheduled Performing (0040, 0006) 2 Radiologist
Physician name
> Scheduled Procedure (0040, 0007) 1C Examination Description
Step Description
> Scheduled Procedure (0040, 0008) 1C Scheduled Action Item Code
Step Action Item Code
Sequence
>> Code Value (0008, 0100) 1C
>> Coding Scheme (0008, 0102) 1C
Designator
>> Code Meaning (0008, 0104) 3
> Scheduled Procedure (0040, 0009) 1 Scheduled Prodedure ID
Step ID
Requested Procedure Module
Requested Procedure ID (0040, 1001) 1 Requested Procedure ID
Requested Procedure (0032, 1060) 1C Requested Procedure Description
Description
Requested Procedure (0032, 1064) 1C Requested Procedure Code
Code Sequence
> Code Value (0008, 0100) 1C
> Coding Scheme (0008, 0102) 1C
Designator
> Code Meaning (0008, 0104) 3
Study Instance UID (0020, 000D) 1 Not Displayed
Requested Procedure (0040, 1400) 3 Requested Procedure Comments
Comments
Names of Intended (0040, 1010) 3 Intended Recipients of Results
Recipients of Results

11/22/02 REVISION B ACQSIM CT – DICOM CONFORMANCE STATEMENT 26

 Imaging Service Request Module
Imaging Service Request (0040, 2400) 3 Imaging Service Request
Comments Comments
Accession Number (0008, 0050) 2 Accession Number
Requesting Physician (0032, 1032) 2 Requesting Physician
Requesting Service (0032, 1033) 3 Requesting Service
Referring Physician’s (0008, 0090) 2 Referring Physician
Name
Visit Information Module
Current Patient Location (0038, 0300) 2 Current Patient Location

Patient Identification Module

Patient’s Name (0010, 0010) 1 Last Name, First Name, Middle
Initial
Patient ID (0010, 0020) 1 Patient ID
Other Patient ID’s (0010, 1000) 3 Other Patient ID’s
Patient Demographic Module
Patient’s Birth Date (0010, 0030) 2 Birth Date
Patient’s Sex (0010, 0040) 2 Sex
Patient’s Age (0010, 1010) 3 Age
Patient’s Weight (0010, 1030) 2 Weight
Ethnic Group (0010, 2160) 3 Ethnic Group
Patient Comments (0010, 4000) 3 Patient Comments
Patient Medical Module
Pregnancy Status (0010, 21C0) 2 Pregnancy Status
Medical Alerts (0010, 2000) 2 Medical Alerts
Additional Patient History (0010, 21B0) 3 Additional Patient History

11/22/02 REVISION B ACQSIM CT – DICOM CONFORMANCE STATEMENT 27

 SOP Common Module
Special Character Set (0008, 0005) 1C Default to Latin 1 character Not Displayed
set***

* This field shall not be stored in the database. This value shall be obtained from the network configuration.

** This field shall not be stored in the database. This value shall be hard–coded.

*** This field shall not be stored in the database. This value shall be obtained as a canned message.
4 Communications Profiles
4.1 Supported Communications Stacks (Parts 8,9)
The AUS, APS, and Film Server software provide DICOM 3.0 TCP/IP network communications support as defined in part 8 of the DICOM
3.0 standard.
4.2 TCP/IP Stack
The TCP/IP protocol stack is supported as implemented in Sun Microsystems Solaris 2.5
4.2.1 Physical Media Support
The following physical media connections are available:

10 Base T, 10 Base 2, 10 Base 5, 10 Base FOIRL, An AUI connector is provided for maximum flexibility.
5 Extensions/Specializations/Privatization
No extensions, privatization, or specializations are used in this implementation.

11/22/02 REVISION B ACQSIM CT – DICOM CONFORMANCE STATEMENT 28

6 Configuration
6.1 AE Title/Presentation Address mapping
The mapping between AE Title and presentation context is done in two files, film_server.cfg and dicom.cfg. These files should only be
modified using the service application on the AcQSim CT.
6.2 Configurable Parameters
The following local parameters are configurable using the AcQSim CT Service Application. Please consult your Philips Service
representative for detailed information on using the Service Application. Default values for each field are shown in parentheses.

– Application Title used by the Film Server software (PICKER_CAM_SCU)

– Connection wait time when connecting to a printer. (60 seconds)

– Time to wait between PDUs when connected to a printer (60 seconds)

– Application title used by AUS and APS software. (DICOM_STORAGE)

– TCP/IP Port used by APS software. (104)

– Defaults to use when APS software is associated with a host that has not been configured.

– Default connection wait time. (60 seconds)

– Default maximum time to wait between PDUs. (10 seconds)

– Default maximum time to keep an idle connection up. (600 seconds)

– Default maximum PDU length. (4096 bytes)

– For each configured printer:

– Application Title (PRINT_SCP)

– Port (104)

– Camera Type

– Connection Test Level (Ping)

11/22/02 REVISION B ACQSIM CT – DICOM CONFORMANCE STATEMENT 29

– DICOM Print Job SOP Class Support (No)

– Print Time Out (300 seconds)

– Read Time Out (60 seconds)

– Number of Concurrent Associations. (1)

– For each configured storage/query/retrieve device:

– Application Title (DICOM_STORAGE)

– Port (104)

– Maximum time to wait between PDUs (10 seconds)

– Maximum time to wait for a connection (60 seconds)

– Maximum time to keep up an idle association (300 seconds)

– Maximum PDU length (4096)

– Insert length to end elements (No)

The Worklist Device Configuraton allows the user to expand the date range a number of units before and/or after the current day. The date
range is used to prevent scheduled procedure information not scheduled within the date range from being returned.

Please note: port numbers 6002, 6938, 6950, and 7020 are used for Philips CT proprietary protocols and should not be used for any of
the DICOM ports.

In most cases, the system must be rebooted for configuration changes to take effect.

All UID’s generated by the DICOM software on the AcQSim CT product are based on Philips’s UID root. This root is 2.16.840.1.113662.
6.3 Support of Extended Character Sets
The AcQSim CT is capable of handling the Latin 1 character set (ISO–IR 100Latin alphabet No. 1, supplementary set). The AcQSim CT
will accept, send, and display images which use this character set. The AcQSim CT will also accept and send images using other character
sets, but data in them may not be displayed correctly.

11/22/02 REVISION B ACQSIM CT – DICOM CONFORMANCE STATEMENT 30

SCHEMATICS
AcQSim CT schematics are available in 11x17” paper format. Order part number T55E–2918.

Rebecca Nemenz
CN = Rebecca Nemenz, C = US, O =
Philips Medical Systems. Confidential and Proprietary information. Refer to Title Page. Philips Medical Systems
I am approving this document
Cleveland, Ohio 44143 U.S.A.
2005.07.13 09:45:07 -04'00'